b. Project Manual - Bureau of Engineering

Transcription

PROJECT MANUAL
FOR THE
ENCINO-TARZANA VILLAGE BRANCH LIBRARY
18231 VENTURA BLVD.
LOS ANGELES, CA 91356
FOR
Los Angeles Public Library
CITY OF LOS ANGELES
DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS
BUREAU OF ENGINEERING
VITALY B. TROYAN, CITY ENGINEER
LIBRARY FACILITIES PROGRAM
630 WEST FIFTH STREET, LOS ANGELES, CA
TEL: 213.847.6366
W.O. E1700418
SAM S. TANAKA, PROGRAM MANAGER
Steven Ehrlich Architect
10865 Washington Blvd.
Culver City, CA 90232
TEL: 310.838.9700
FAX:310.838.9737
Web: www.s-ehrlich.com
E-Mail: inquire@s-ehrlich.com
JUNE 2001
PROJECT MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL CONDITIONS
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01010
01015
01021
01022
01045
01060
01150
01200
01305
01311
01340
01380
01400
01500
01569
01640
01700
01710
SUMMARY OF THE WORK
CONTRACTOR'S USE OF THE PREMISES
CASH ALLOWANCES
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SUSTAINABLE CONSTRUCTION
CUTTING AND PATCHING
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
SOLID RESOURCES MANAGEMENT
PROJECT MEETINGS
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PROGRESS SCHEDULE AND REPORTS
SUBMITTALS
CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHY
QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
DUST, NOISE, AND VIBRATION CONTROL
PRODUCT HANDLING
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
CLEANING
DIVISION 02 - SITE WORK
02020
02050
02051
02052
02065
02110
02115
02150
02220
02383
02510
02513
02514
02517
02523
02580
02667
02687
02720
02730
02810
02834
02836
DECONSTRUCTION
DEMOLITION
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT (DEMOLISHED BUILDING)
LEAD-BASED PAINT ABATEMENT (DEMOLISHED BUILDING)
TREE REMOVAL
SITE CLEARING
TREE PROTECTION
SHORING
EARTHWORK
DRILLED FOUNDATION CAISSONS (PIERS)
YARD WORK AND STREET WORK
ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING
THIN SET CONCRETE PAVERS
PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING
SAND BEDDED POROUS CONCRETE PAVERS
PAVEMENT MARKING
SITE WATER DISTRIBUTION
NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION
STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
SANITARY SEWERAGE SYSTEMS
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
PVC COATED CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
SLIDING DRIVEWAY GATE
LIBRARY BOND PROGRAM
ENCINO-TARZANA BRANCH LIBRARY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC-1
02879
02900
02911
02948
02950
02954
02955
02970
MOVABLE DECORATIVE TRASH RECEPTACLES
LANDSCAPING
HDPE AND WOOD BENCHES
TREE GRATES AND FRAMES
TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND COVER
BOLLARDS (PIPE GUARD POSTS)
OFF-SITE IMPROVEMENTS
LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE AND TREE ESTABLISHMENT
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
03100
03200
03300
03310
CONCRETE FORMWORK
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
04220
04411
CONCRETE BLOCK MASONRY
GRANITE AND LIMESTONE COUNTERTOPS
DIVISION 05 - METALS
05120
05300
05410
05500
05506
05515
05551
STRUCTURAL STEEL
METAL DECKING
COLD FORMED METAL STUD SYSTEM
METAL FABRICATIONS
ENCLOSURE GATES
STEEL LADDER
PEDESTRIAN MAT GRATINGS
DIVISION 06 - WOODS & PLASTIC
06100
06158
06171
06200
06400
06427
ROUGH CARPENTRY
RECYCLED WOOD AND PLASTICS
GLUE LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS
FINISH CARPENTRY
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PLASTIC COATED HARDBOARD PANELWORK (MARLITE)
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
07150
07200
07226
07270
07411
07435
07436
07600
07829
DAMPPROOFING FOR PLANTERS
THERMAL AND ACOUSTICAL INSULATION
RIGID ROOF INSULATION
FIRESTOPPING
STANDING SEAM ROOFING
FLAT METAL WALL PANELS
MOISTURE RETARDER - DOUBLE BUILDING PAPER
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
FLAT GLAZED SKYLIGHTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC-2
07900
SEALANTS AND CAULKING
DIVISION 08 - DOORS & WINDOWS
08110
08210
08305
08413
08520
08710
08720
08800
08911
08921
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
WOOD DOORS
ACCESS PANELS
ALUMIUM CLERESTORY (INTERIOR)
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
FINISH HARDWARE
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOORS
GLAZING
STRUCTURAL GLAZING - CORNER WINDOWS (DESIGN-BUILD)
GLAZED CURTAIN WALL, STOREFRONT, AND DOOR SYSTEM
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
09200
09260
09330
09500
09514
09647
09650
09690
09784
09860
09900
LATH AND PLASTER (STUCCO)
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
CERAMIC TILE
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
ACOUSTICAL (TECTUM) CEILING
LAMINATE WOOD FLOORING
RESILIENT FLOORING
CARPET (GLUE-DOWN)
CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER
ANTI-GRAFFITI COATING
PAINTING
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10102
10107
10155
10202
10340
10350
10400
10415
10416
10420
10421
10422
10423
10520
10700
10754
10757
10800
10811
WHITE MARKER BOARDS
TACKABLE SURFACES
STAINLESS STEEL TOILET PARTITIONS (SSTP)
METAL LOUVERS (BAKED ENAMEL)
SERPENTINE BICYCLE RACKS
FLAGPOLE
INTERIOR SIGNAGE
BUILDING SIGN
DISPLAY CASES AND BULLETIN BOARDS & TACKBOARDS
WALL CLOCK
WALL SAFE
BOOK RETURNS
CAST BRONZE IDENTIFICATION PLAQUE
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES
METAL LOCKERS
PUBLIC PAY TELEPHONES
WALL MOUNTED SHELF TYPE TELEPHONE ENCLOSURES
TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES
KITCHEN PAPER TOWEL HOLDERS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC-3
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
11051
11053
11106
11132
11452
COMPUTER MONITOR SUPPORT SYSTEM
BOOK DETECTION SYSTEM
DISPLAYWALL
PROJECTION SCREENS
APPLIANCES
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12527
MECHANIZED WINDOW SHADES
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15010
15121
15140
15170
15190
15245
15260
15290
15330
15410
15430
15440
15450
15535
15623
15625
15671
15855
15870
15885
15890
15910
15920
15940
15973
15990
15995
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PIPING EXPANSION COMPENSATION
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
MOTORS
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
VIBRATION ISOLATION
PIPING INSULATION
DUCTWORK INSULATION
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PLUMBING PIPING
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
REFRIGERATION PIPING AND SPECIALTIES
FORCED AIR FURNACES
GASFIRED DUCT FURNACE
AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS
AIR HANKLING UNITS WITH COILS
POWER VENTILATORS
AIR CLEANING
DUCTWORK
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
SOUND ATTENUATORS
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
HVAC SYSTEM TESTING, BALANCING & PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16010
16111
16112
16113
16114
16118
16123
16130
16140
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
CONDUIT
SURFACE RACEWAYS
UNDERFLOOR DUCT SYSTEM
CABLE TRAYS
DUCTBANK
BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
BOXES
WIRING DEVICES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC-4
16160
16170
16180
16190
16195
16421
16426
16440
16441
16450
16470
16476
16480
16485
16510
16530
16613
16710
16720
16721
16741
16742
16745
16771
16780
16781
16782
16790
CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
GROUNDING AND BONDING
EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS
SUPPORTING DEVICES
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
UTILITY SERVICE ENTRANCE
DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
SECONDARY GROUNDING
PANELBOARDS
ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
MOTOR CONTROL
CONTACTORS
INTERIOR LUMINAIRES
SITE LIGHTING
EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY
STRUCTURED TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING AND PATHWAY SYSTEM
INTRUSION ALARM SYSTEM
FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS
TELEPHONE SERVICE, PATHWAYS, AND WIRING
VOICE AND DATA WIRING AND CABLING
LOCAL AREA NETWORK
MULTI-PURPOSE ROOM SOUND SYSTEM
TELEVISION SYSTEM
TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION SYSTEM
DATA WIRING SYSTEMS
APPENDICES
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
A
B
C
D
GEOTECHNICAL REPORTS
SOIL CORROSION STUDY
ASBESTOS AND LEAD SURVEY
CONSTRUCTION HANDBOOK
-- End of Project Table of Contents --
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TOC-5
GENERAL CONDITIONS
SECTION 1 - DEFINITIONS
The following terms as used in this Contract shall be defined and interpreted as follows:
(a) "Contract" or "this Contract": The particular Contract executed by the Contractor and
the City, of which these General Conditions are a part. The following documents
constitute a part of the contract: Agreement, Instructions to Bidders, Notice Inviting
Bids, Contractor's Proposal, Plans and specifications, Soil Reports and/or
Subsurface Investigation Reports, Summary of First Notice Replies, and all addenda
and bulletins Notice to Bidders issued during the bidding period.
(b)
"Contractor" or "Prime Contractor" or "Contractor's Authorized Representative": The
person, firm, or corporation to whom this Contract is awarded by the City and who is
party thereto.
(c)
"Subcontractor": Any person, firm, or corporation, other than an employee of the
Prime Contractor, supplying for and under agreement with, either the Prime
Contractor or any Subcontractor of the Contractor, labor or materials, or both, at the
job-site of the Project in connection with this Contract.
(d)
"City Engineer": City Engineer of the Bureau of Engineering, or his authorized
representative.
(e)
"Board": Board of Public Works, City of Los Angeles, the awarding authority.
(f)
"Plan", "Plans" or "Drawings" or Contract Drawings: Any and all plans, maps,
profiles, drawings, sketches, charts, or schedules furnished by the City and on which
are detailed or delineated the location or instructions regarding the Work to be done.
Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Drawings showing the
design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations,
Sections, details, schedules and diagrams.
(g)
"Project": The structure or improvement to be constructed in whole or in part, through
the performance of this Contract.
(h)
"Work": Labor or materials or both; or the complete Contract work.
(i)
"Inspector": Authorized representative of the Director, Bureau of Contract
Administration.
(j)
"City": City of Los Angeles, a Municipal Corporation.
(k)
"Specifications": Written instructions, provisions, conditions, and detailed
requirements pertaining to materials, methods, and manner of performing the work
and to the quality of work to be furnished and installed under the Contract.
(l)
"Holiday": Reference to holidays shall mean those holidays and dates as observed
by the Los Angeles City Offices. List of such holiday dates are available in the Board
of Public Works Office.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-1
(m) "Bidder": Any individual, firm, partnership, corporation or combination thereof
submitting a Bid for the Contracted Work acting directly or through a duly authorized
representative of the City.
(n)
"Change Order": A written instruction to the Contractor signed by the City Engineer
and the Contractor issued after the execution of the Contract, authorizing an addition,
deletion or revision in the Work; or an adjustment in the Contract sum or in the
Contract time.
(o)
"Consultant": An Architectural or Engineering firm under Contract or agreement with
the City of Los Angeles to perform services.
(p)
"Record Drawings": A complete set of Reproducible Drawings used for construction,
indicating thereof, all changes made from the layout shown on the Contract Drawings,
Coordination Drawings and approved Shop Drawings.
(q)
"Concealed": Hidden from sight as in chases, hollow construction or above furred
spaces, shafts or crawl spaces used for maintenance and repair.
SECTION 2 - NOTICE
Any notice required to be given to the Contractor will be by certified mail and may be given by
delivering said notice, or a copy thereof, to the Contractor in person, or if Contractor cannot be
found with reasonable diligence, then by posting a copy of said notice in a conspicuous place at
the site of the Work.
Any notice, request, demand or other communication to the
NOTE:
City required or permitted hereunder shall be addressed to the following:
Project Manager / Construction Manager
Library Bond Program
911 Wilshire Blvd. ,Suite 2250
Los Angeles, CA 90017
.
SECTION 3 - AUTHORITY OF BOARD
(a)
As the representative of the Board, the City Engineer shall decide, within the
provisions of the Specifications, all questions which may arise concerning the quality
or acceptability of materials furnished and work performed. The City Engineer shall
determine all matters pertaining to Contract amount, Time Extensions, Change Order,
design, and interpretation of Contract Drawings and Specifications.
(b)
Final determination of the acceptable fulfillment of the Contract on the part of the
Contractor shall be made by the Board.
PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 4 - ADDENDA, BULLETINS AND NOTICE TO BIDDERS
(a)
Addenda: The written document, issued during the bidding period, which modifies,
supersedes or supplements the Contract Documents.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-2
1. Addenda shall form a part of the Instructions to Bidders, Contract Drawings,
and/or Specifications and shall be reflected on the Bidder's proposal.
2. Addenda shall take precedence over all other Drawings, Specifications, and
Contract Documents and requires Board approval. Subsequent addenda shall govern
over prior addenda only to the extent specified.
(b)
Bulletins: Are issued to give further instruction to the Bidders; they do not change or
modify any part of the Contract Documents, and are issued during the time of the
bidding.
(c)
Notice to Bidders: Are issued to the Bidders prior to Bid opening date relative to
modifications of the Contract Documents for additive or deductive changes or
modifications.
SECTION 5 - MANDATORY PROVISION
Any mention in the Divisions of these Specifications which follow these General Conditions or
indication on drawings of articles, materials, operations, or methods requires that the Contractor
provide each item mentioned or indicated, of quality or subject to qualifications noted; perform
according to conditions stated, each operations prescribed, and provide therefore all necessary
labor, equipment, and incidentals, even though such mention of articles, materials, operations,
methods, quality, qualifications, or conditions is not expressed in complete sentences.
SECTION 6 - ISSUANCE OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
(a)
Copies of all Plans and Specifications will be kept on file in the office of the Bureau of
Engineering, Construction Division 600 South Spring St, 6th Floor, Los Angeles, CA 90017
(b)
Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the City Engineer will furnish
to the Contractor, 10 sets each of the Plans and Specifications without charge.
Additional sets desired by the Contractor for Contractor's use or the use of
Contractor's Subcontractors or Sub-Subcontractors will be furnished upon request,
but at the Contractor's expense.
(c)
All Drawings, Specifications and copies thereof are the property of the City and shall
not to be used on other work.
(d)
The Contractor shall keep on the job-site of the project, at all times, a complete set of
the Plans and Specifications including all addenda as approved by the Los Angeles
Building Department for the Inspector's use. A Los Angeles Department of Building
and Safety approved set of Drawings shall also be kept at the job-site.
(e)
A list of Contract Documents furnished as noted in the "Table of Contents" of the
"Specifications". The Contract Drawings listed shows the Work contemplated. The
Contractor upon receipt thereof shall review the Contract Drawings and shall promptly
notify the City Engineer of any omission or discrepancies.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-3
SECTION 7 - STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
(a)
All reference in the Specifications or on the Contract Drawings to Standard
Specifications shall be understood to refer to "Standard Specifications for Public
Works Construction", latest edition, published by Building News, Inc., as amended or
revised to the date of receiving bids.
(b)
References made to other Specifications and Codes refer to editions in effect, as
amended or revised to the day of receiving bids.
SECTION 8 - INTERPRETATION OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
(a)
Every part of the work, as shown on the Contract Drawings and as described in the
Specifications, must be complete and finished. No deviations shall be made from the
Contract Drawings or Specifications without previous written authorization from the
City Engineer.
(b)
In general, the Contract Drawings will show dimensions, positions and kind of
construction, and the Specifications will define materials, qualities and methods. Any
work called for on the Contract Drawings and not mentioned in the specifications, or
vice versa, shall be performed as though full set forth in both. Work not particularly
detailed, marked, or specified shall be the same as similar parts that are detailed,
marked, or specified.
(c)
The Contract Drawings have been drawn to the indicated scales, except where
otherwise noted. Dimensions indicated by figures or numerals shall govern in all
cases whether drawn to scale or not. Larger scale drawings shall take precedence
over smaller scale drawings. Contract Drawings shall not be scaled for dimensions.
(d)
In the case of differences between the Specifications and the Contract Drawings, the
Specifications shall govern.
(e)
Should errors appear in the Contract Drawings or Specifications or in the work done
by others affecting this work, the Contractor shall immediately notify the City
Engineer prior to installation, who will issue instructions as to procedure. If the
Contractor proceeds with the work so affected, without instructions from the City
Engineer, Contractor shall remove the incorrect work or make the necessary
corrections to comply with the City Engineer's instructions at no cost to the City.
This includes typographical errors in the Specifications and notational errors on the
Contract Drawings where doubtful of interpretation.
(f)
The general character of the detailed work is shown on the Contract Drawings, but
minor modifications may be made in larger scale drawings. The City Engineer will
furnish additional details, when needed, to more fully explain the work, and same
shall be considered part of the Contract. Should any detail submitted later than the
Contract Drawings be, in the opinion of the Contractor, more costly than the scale
drawings and the Specifications indicate, written notice thereof shall be given to the
City Engineer prior to performing the work. The claim will then be considered, and if
justified, said detail drawings will be amended or the extra work authorized. Nonreceipt of such notice shall relieve the City of any claim.
(g)
Where on any Contract Drawing, a portion of the work is drawn out or detailed and the
remainder is indicated in outline, the drawn out or detailed parts shall apply also to all
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-4
other like portions of the Work. Where ornament or other detail is indicated by partial
detail only, such detail shall be continued throughout the courses or parts in which it
occurs and shall also apply to all other similar parts in the Work, unless otherwise
indicated.
(h)
References made to other Specifications and Codes refer to editions in effect at the
date bids are received for the project, and include all addenda prior to that date.
SECTION 9 - ACCURACY OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
(a)
Omissions from the Plans and Specifications shall not relieve the Contractor from the
responsibility of furnishing, making, or installing all items required by law or usually
furnished, made or installed in a project of the scope and general character indicated
by the Plans and Specifications.
(b)
The Plans show conditions as they are supposed or believed by the City Engineer to
exist, but it is not intended or to be inferred that the conditions as shown thereon
constitute a representation or warranty, expressed or implied, by the City or its
officers, that such conditions are actually existent, nor shall the City, or any of its
officers, be liable for any loss sustained by the Contractor as a result of any variance
between conditions as shown on the Plans, the actual conditions revealed during
progress of the work or otherwise, except as indicated in SECTION 39, of this
Division.
SECTION 10 - DIVISION OF SPECIFICATIONS
(a)
The Specifications are arranged into the Construction Specifications Institute (CSI)
Divisions - Section format. Each "Section" constitutes a unit of work and related
"Sections" are grouped under broad generic headings called Divisions.
(b)
The organization of the Specifications into Division, Sections, and articles shall not
control or limit the Contractor in dividing the work among subcontractors, a subsubcontractor, or to establish the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. The
Contractor shall be solely responsible for all subcontract arrangements of Work
regardless of the specification organization.
SECTION 11 - SHOP DRAWINGS AND MANUFACTURERS' DATA
(a)
The Contractor shall prepare, approve, sign and submit to the City Engineer any and
all Shop Drawings, Manufacturers' Project Data, Wiring Diagrams and Samples
required by the Construction Documents, specification section 01340 - "submittals" in
division 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
(b)
The Contractor by preparing, reviewing, approving and submitting the Shop Drawings,
Manufacturers' Product Data, Wiring Diagrams and Samples represents that the
Contractor has determined and verified all materials, field measurements and filed
construction criteria related thereto, and has checked and coordinated the information
contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work, the Project and
the Contract Documents.
(c)
The Contractor shall inform the City Engineer in writing of any and all deviations
and/or questions regarding the Contract Documents, and shall properly identify these
areas of concern in the letter of transmittal of the Shop Drawings, Manufacturers'
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-5
Product Data, Wiring Diagram and Samples for proper written disposition respectively
by the City Engineer. The Contractor shall provide reproducible of Shop Drawings
which exceed 11-inch X 17-inches, and the number of copies specified elsewhere.
(d)
All Shop Drawings, Manufacturers' Product Data, Wiring Diagrams and Samples
submitted, shall be accompanied by letter of transmittal and shall be addressed to
the City Engineer to be received and filed.
(e)
The Contractor is not relieved of the responsibility for any deviation from the
requirements of the Contract Documents, by virtue of Contractor's approval and
submittal of the Shop Drawings, Manufacturers' Product Data, Wiring Diagrams and
Samples to the City Engineer. All deviations and/or interpretations of the Contract
Documents must be approved in writing by the City Engineer.
(f)
The Contractor's review and approval of the Shop Drawings, Manufacturers' Product
Data, Wiring Diagrams and Samples is not relieved from any requirements of the
Contract Document regardless of any errors or omissions in such submittals.
(g)
The Shop Drawings shall be general and shall not relieve the Contractor from the
responsibility for proper fitting and construction of the work, nor from furnishing
materials and work required by the Contract, which may or may not be indicated on
the Shop Drawings.
The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work requiring submittal and review of
Shop Drawings, Product Data, samples, etc. until such submittals have been
reviewed and approved by the Architect or City Engineer.
(h)
Shop Drawings shall show in detail the size, sections and dimensions of all the
members, the arrangement and construction of all connections and joints and other
pertinent details; also, all holes, straps and other fittings required by other
Contractors for attaching their work. When required, by the City Engineer or by
Standard Practice of the Contractor, engineering computations shall be submitted for
the record. The Contractor shall be responsible for delivering approved copies of Shop
Drawings to all others whose work is dependent thereon.
(i)
At all times, the Contractor shall maintain at the site of the project, a complete file of
Shop Drawings and Manufacturers' Data of its own and all subcontractors. All Shop
Drawings and Manufacturers' Data shall be reviewed and signed to indicate approval
by the Contractor.
(j)
Submittals shall be made within the times specified in the various Divisions, of the
Construction Documents. If time is not specified, they shall be made within a period
which will cause no delay in the work. The Contractor shall allow 10 calendar days
on the project construction schedule for each item submitted for review by the City
Engineer.
(k)
In the event the City Engineer finds the submittal to be incomplete, it will be returned
to the Contractor for required revised drawings. The Contractor will revise the
drawings and resubmit as indicated for original submittals. Any delay resulting from
the need for resubmittals shall be the Contractor's responsibility.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-6
(l)
In the event, the Contract Documents are prepared by a Consultant, the pertinent
requirements of this Section will be effective, except as follows or as otherwise
modified in the Divisions that follow:
1. All references in this SECTION to the City Engineer shall include the Consultant.
2. Seven copies of each submittal are required, with six copies to be delivered to the
Consultant and one copy to the Bureau of Engineering and they shall be submitted
simultaneously.
3. If submittal is found to be incomplete, Contractor will be notified by the Consultant
if revised drawings are required. (Revisions stemming from substitutions for "or
equal" determinations).
4. The Contractor is to revise the drawings as required and to resubmit revised Shop
Drawings to the Bureau of Engineering and to the Consultant simultaneously; with
one copy to the Bureau of Engineering and six copies to the Consultant.
5. When Shop Drawings are reviewed, Consultant/Architect shall forward 5 copies of
shop drawings to City Engineer for final approval and distribution. Two copies of
reviewed shop drawings will be returned to the Contractor.
SECTION 12 - REFERENCE TO TRADE NAMES
(a)
Whenever in the Specifications, any material or process is indicated or specified by
patent or proprietary name or by name of manufacturer, such Specifications shall be
deemed to be used for the purpose of facilitating description of the material or
process desired, and shall be deemed to be followed by the words "or equivalent,"
and the Contractor may offer any material or process which shall be equal in all
essential characteristics to that so indicated or specified. If the material, process, or
article offered by the Contractor is not, in the opinion of the City Engineer, equal to
that specified, then the Contractor must furnish the material, process, or article
specified, or one that, in the opinion of the City Engineer, is equal thereof in all
essential characteristics.
(b)
The Contractor's request or submittal of any material or process which the Contractor
deems equivalent to that so specified or indicated on the Contract Drawings shall be
submitted to the City Engineer within forty (40) days after the notice to proceed. It
shall be incumbent upon the Contractor to furnish sufficient data to the City Engineer
to support the claim of equality. Submit separate request for each substitution.
(c)
Any request or submittal received after the forty (40) day period specified above will be
considered as not equal to that so specified and will be processed as a substitution
described in paragraph below. No other requests for substitutions will be considered
after expiration of the forty (40) calendar day period specified except that in
exceptional cases where it is in the best interests of the City.
(d)
If the City Engineer decides to accept for use in the projects a material which is not
the equal of that specified, authority for substitution shall be made in the manner
described herein for "Extra Work and Changes" with appropriate monetary allowance
for the difference in value. Substitutions accepted by the City Engineer after the forty
(40) day period shall not result in any extra cost to the City.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-7
(e)
Any materials, process or article may be requested for a substitution by the
Contractor, in lieu of that specified under the following conditions:
1. The requests must be submitted in writing and in a manner described herein for
"Extra Work and Changes" with appropriate monetary allowances for the difference in
value. Substitute product shall not be ordered or installed without written acceptance
from the Engineer.
2. The requests must be submitted forty (40) days prior to starting the work, as
established by the City Engineer, so as not to cause any delay in completion of the
project. No other request will be considered after expiration of the forty (40) day
period specified, except that in exceptional cases where it is in the best interest to
the City.
3. The Contractor, at its own expense, shall have the substitution tested by an
approved testing laboratory, under the directions of the City Engineer, if so requested.
4. The Contractor agrees to pay for all engineering and design services, if required,
to make all changes and adjustments in material and work of all trades directly or
indirectly affected by the substitute, to the satisfaction of the City Engineer, at no
cost to the City.
5. All requests for substitution shall be made through the Prime Contractor;
submission by the Prime Contractor shall imply its approval of such substitution.
6. No requests for substitutions will be considered during the bidding period.
7. The Contractor shall furnish adequate data with the request for approval of a
substitute, to enable the City Engineer to evaluate the proposed substitution. Give
comparison between proposed substitution and specified product of quality,
performance, warranty, cost data and amount of net change to Contract sum,
availability of maintenance service and replacement materials, effect on Construction
Schedule and any change required in other work or products.
8. Contractor shall coordinate installation and make other changes which may be
required for work to be completed in all respect.
9. Contractor waives claims for additional cost which may subsequently become
apparent.
(f)
Substitution will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on the Shop
Drawings or on Product Data submittals without separate written requests.
SECTION 13 - FAMILIARITY WITH PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to be so thoroughly familiar with all details of the
project, including the work of its own forces and of all Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors,
that the following shall be called to the attention of the City Engineer for instructions before an
error is made on the job:
(a)
Errors and omissions in the Contract Drawings and Specifications.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-8
(b)
Work on the Contract Drawings or in the Specifications which, if so constructed,
would result in confusion of interference with other work or the work of other trades,
including the location of fixtures and equipment.
(c)
Coordinate work of the various Sections of the Specifications to assure efficient and
orderly sequence of installation of construction elements with provisions for
accommodating items to be installed later.
(d)
Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work
which are indicated diagrammatically on the Drawings. Follow routing shown for
pipes, ducts and conduit as closely as practicable; make runs parallel with lines of
building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations,
for maintenance and for repairs.
SECTION 14 - COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS
During the performance of Contracted Work, Contractor shall comply with all applicable
ordinances, laws, rules and regulations of the City, County, State and Federal Government or
subdivisions or commission thereof. Contractor shall also comply with provisions of all permits.
SECTION 15 - TIME FOR COMMENCING AND COMPLETING WORK
(a)
The Contractor shall commence the work required by this Contract within 5 calendar
days of date specified in notice from the Board of Public Works to proceed with the
work, and shall complete the work within 400 calendar days of said date plus any
approved extensions of time as herein described.
(b)
The City Engineer may permit, or direct the Contractor to suspend any work
affected by the inclemency of the weather, or other climatic conditions. If as a
direct result of such suspension critical activities are impacted and a project delay
results from this impact, the Contractor will be entitled to an extension of time as
provided in (c) and (d) below, but the Contractor shall not be entitled to damages or
additional payment due to such delays."
(c)
Extensions of time will be considered for delays in commencement, prosecution or
completion of the Contracted Work due to causes beyond control and without the
fault or negligence of the contractor, including but not restricted to: Failure of the
City to provide the right-of-way without prior notice through these specifications and
other contract Documents, acts of God or of a public enemy, acts of the federal
government or any State or political subdivision thereof, insurrections, war, fires,
floods, explosions, earthquakes, lightning, or other catastrophes, epidemics,
quarantine restrictions, strikes, vandalism, labor disputes, provided that the
Contractor shall request extension of time for such delay, stating the date of each
delay and the causes therefore, within 15 calendar days after the beginning of the
delay. Extension of time will be granted, when found to be justified under the above
conditions, for periods of time equal to the time by which the interim milestone and
project completion dates are impacted by these delays in accordance with Section
01311 "Progress Schedule and Reports". The Contractor shall not be entitled to
damages or additional payment due to such delays.
(d)
All requests for time extensions shall be accompanied by a revised construction
schedule, and other data as requested by the City Engineer. Any and all
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-9
extensions of time granted under the provisions of these specifications shall not
release the sureties on the bonds accompanying the Contract for the work require
herein, which said bonds shall remain in full force and effect until the discharge of
the Contract.
(e)
"The Contractor may be compensated for delays caused solely by the failure of the
City to provide necessary information known to the City at the time of bid, failure to
deliver materials shown in the Contract Documents to be furnished by the City, or
for suspension of the work by the City for its own convenience or benefit. If the
Contractor sustains a loss which could not have been avoided by the judicious
handling of forces, equipment or plant which would have provided a reasonable
mitigation of the loss, there shall be paid to the Contractor such amount as the
Engineer may find to be fair and reasonable compensation for such part of the
Contractor's actual loss as was unavoidable and not concurrent with Contractor
caused delays or non-compensable delays such as those described in (c) above."
(f)
No extension of time will be granted for a delay caused by the inability to obtain
materials unless the Contractor furnishes proof to the City Engineer that such
delays are unavoidable. The City Engineer will grant a time extension only if it is in
the best interest of the City to do so.
SECTION 16 - LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
(a)
Should the Contractor fail to complete the work within the time agreed upon in the
Contract, or within the stipulated time for the completion, as extended, or within such
extra time as may be allowed for delays and extra work as herein provided, the City
will deduct and retain out of the moneys which may be due the Contractor, as
liquidated damages, but not as a penalty, the sum of $2,000.00 per day for each
and every day that the time consumed in the execution of the work exceeds the time
stipulated for its completion, or such stipulated time as the same may be increased
as herein provided, which said sum per day, in view of the difficulty of estimating such
damage, as hereby agreed upon, fixed and determined by the parties thereto as the
liquidated damages that the City will suffer by reason of such default and not by way of
penalty.
(b)
In addition to the specified liquidated damages, the City will deduct and retain out
of the moneys which may be due this Contractor, all cost to the City for direct
supervision and inspection of the Contractor's work during the period of time
between the stipulated date of completion and the actual date of completion.
(c)
The Contractor will not be assessed liquidated damages for delay in completion of
the Contracted Work caused by the City or the existing public utilities encumbered
to relocated same in a timely manner of such utilities not identified on the Contract
Drawings or in the Specifications.
SECTION 17 - PERMITS
The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits, licenses, and fees as specified in Section
01010 of Division 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS entitled SUMMARY OF THE WORK.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-10
SECTION 18 - CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE
At all times when any work is being performed at the site of the project, the Contractor shall be
present in person or be represented by a competent superintendent satisfactory to the City
Engineer. The Contractor's representative shall have authority to act for the contractor in all
matters concerning the work and shall have the ability to so organize the work and the work of
the Subcontractors, and Sub-subcontractors as to attain complete cooperation and minimize
delays.
SECTION 19 - CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES
(a)
The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best
skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control
over construction means, method, techniques, sequences and procedures and for
coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless Contract
Documents give other specific instruction concerning these matters.
(b)
The Contractor shall be responsible to the City for acts and omissions of the
Contractor's employees, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors and their agents
and employees, and other persons performing portions of the Work under a
contract with the Contractor.
(c)
The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the City
Engineer's administration of the Contract or by tests, inspections or approvals
required or performed by persons other than the Contractor.
(d)
The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already
performed under this Contract to determine that such portions are in proper
condition to receive subsequent Work.
SECTION 20 - WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIAL
(a)
Unless otherwise specifically provided for in the Specifications or in the Contract
Drawings, all workmanship, equipment, materials, and articles incorporated in the
work are to be of the most suitable grade of their respective kinds for the intended
purpose. The equipment, materials and articles shall be new, best quality,
undamaged, and not defective.
(b)
All materials to be incorporated in the structure shall be protected from damage during
delivery, storage and handling, during and after installation until acceptance of the
Contracted Work.
SECTION 21 - METHODS AND APPLIANCES
The methods and appliances adopted by the Contractor shall be such as will secure a
satisfactory quality of work, and will enable the Contractor to complete the Work in the time
agreed upon. If at anytime such methods and appliances appear inadequate, the City Engineer
may order the Contractor to improve their character, or increase their efficiency, and the
Contractor shall conform to such order, but the failure of the City Engineer to order such
improvement of methods, or increase of efficiency, will not relieve the Contractor from his
obligation to perform good work, or finish it in the time agreed upon.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-11
SECTION 22 - BUILDING REGULATIONS AND CODES
(a)
(b)
The Contractor shall perform the Contracted Work in accordance with the latest
requirements of the Los Angeles City Building Code and Uniform Building Code
Supplement and all other regulations, laws, and ordinances even though such
requirements are not specifically mentioned in the Specifications or shown on the
Contract Drawings.
When the work required by the Plans and Specifications is in conflict with any such
law or ordinance, the Contractor shall notify the Inspector. The conflict will be
reviewed by the City Engineer and the Contractor shall not proceed with the work until
the Inspector has so ordered.
SECTION 23 - WORKS
(a)
Workers: Only competent workers shall be employed on the Contracted Work. Any
person employed, who is, in the opinion of the Inspector, or City Engineer, found to
be incompetent, intemperate, troublesome, disorderly, or otherwise objectionable, or
who fails or refuses to perform the Work properly and acceptably, shall be
immediately removed from the Contracted or Change Order Work by the Contractor
and not be re-employed on the Work.
(b)
Resident Labor: In the employment of persons performing labor upon the Contracted
Work, preference shall be given to persons who shall have actually resided in the City
of Los Angeles and shall have so resided for the period of one year next preceding the
date of their employment to perform such labor.
SECTION 24 - ACCIDENT PREVENTION
The safety provisions of applicable laws, building and construction codes shall be observed.
Machinery, equipment, and other hazards shall be guarded or eliminated in accordance with the
safety provisions of the Division of Industrial Safety, Department of Industrial Relations, State of
California.
SECTION 25 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY AND RESTORATION OF EXISTING
IMPROVEMENTS
(a)
Precaution shall be exercised at all times for the protection of persons and property.
The Contractor shall furnish or cause to be furnished and maintained, all covers,
scaffolds, fences, guards, and other protective devices as required by the Inspector
and the Local and State rules, ordinances, or regulations necessary for protection of
public and private property and the public safety. Contractor shall hold the City
harmless from any and all damage to persons or property.
(b)
The Contractor shall protect the Contracted Work from injury and make good all
damage without charge.
(c)
Construction fences and barricades shall be of reasonable good appearance, and
shall be maintained free of signs, posters, writing, marking, and any other things
which detract from reasonably good appearance.
(d)
The Contractor shall repair or replace all existing improvements (e.g., curbs,
sidewalks, driveways, fences, signs, utilities, street surfaces, structures, etc.)
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-12
damaged or removed as a result of his operations, to the satisfaction of the governing
authority having jurisdiction.
(e)
In case of damage, which in the opinion of the Inspector after consulting with the City
Engineer, threatens the safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall
immediately make all repairs necessary for the removal of the hazard.
SECTION 26 - WORK BY CITY OR OTHERS
The City may perform with its own forces or award to other Contractors, any extra work, or any
portion of the project, not included in this Contract.
(a)
Temporary Repairs: The City reserves the right to make temporary repairs as
necessary to keep equipment in operating condition without voiding the Contractor's
Guarantee Bond or relieving the Contractor of the Contractor's responsibilities during
the bonding period.
SECTION 27 - COOPERATION AND COLLATERAL WORK
(a)
The Contractor shall be responsible for ascertaining the nature and extent of any
simultaneous, collateral and essential work by others. The City, its workers and
others shall have the right to operate within or adjacent to the work site to perform
such work.
(b)
The City, the Contractor and each of such workers, Contractors and others, shall
coordinate their operations and cooperate to minimize interference.
(c)
The Contractor shall include in its Bid, all costs involved as a result of coordinating its
work with others. The Contractor will not be entitled to additional compensation from
the City for damages resulting from such simultaneous, collateral and essential work.
If necessary to avoid or minimize such damage, or delay, the Contractor shall
redeploy its work force to other parts of the work.
(d)
Should the Contractor be delayed by the City, and such delay could not reasonably
have been foreseen and prevented by the Contractor, the City Engineer will determine
the extent of the delay, the effect of the delay on the project as a whole, and any
commensurate extension of time.
SECTION 28 - GUARANTY-WARRANTY
(a)
The Contractor shall and hereby does warrant and guarantee that all work executed
under this Contract will be free from defects of materials and workmanship for a period
of one (1) year from the date of the City's final acceptance of the project; except that
certain specific items of work may require a guaranty or warranty for a greater period
of time where hereinafter specified; the Contractor further agrees to repair or replace,
at its own expense, all such defective work and all other work damaged thereby,
which becomes defective during the term of the above mentioned guaranties and
warranties.
1. Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defects caused by abuse,
modifications not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance,
improper operation or normal wear and tear under normal usage.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-13
(b)
It shall be understood that the surety for the faithful performance bond submitted in
conformance with the terms of the Contract by the Contractor for this project, is liable
on its bond for all obligations of the Contractor including guarantee provisions.
(c)
The Contractor further agrees that within 10 calendar days after being notified in
writing by the City Engineer of any work not in accordance with the requirements of
the Contract, or any defects in the work, the Contractor will commence and prosecute
with due diligence all work necessary to fulfill the terms of this guarantee, and to
complete the work within a reasonable period of time. In the event the Contractor fails
to so comply, Contractor does hereby authorize the City to proceed to have such
work done at the Contractor's expense, and Contractor will pay the cost thereof upon
demand. The City shall be entitled to all costs, including reasonable attorney's fees
necessarily incurred upon the Contractor's refusal to pay the above costs.
(d)
Notwithstanding the foregoing Subsection (c), in the event of an emergency
constituting an immediate hazard to the health or safety of the City's employees,
property, or licensees the City may undertake, at the Contractor's expense, without
prior notice all work necessary to correct such hazardous conditions when it was
caused by work of the Contractor not being in accordance with the requirements of
the Contract.
SECTION 29 - PATENTS
The Contractor shall hold the City, Owner or the Agency harmless from any and all claims which
may be made on account of any illegal infringement of any patent or patents of processes,
methods, and appliances used in construction of the work that are not specifically required by
the Specifications, and shall defend any such action prosecuted against the City arising out of
such claims and shall pay with costs, and a reasonable attorney's fee, any judgement so
obtained. The City shall similarly hold the Contractor harmless from claims made on account of
alleged infringement of any patented articles or processes which actually are required by the
Plans or the Specifications.
SECTION 30 - RECORD DRAWINGS
(a)
Record Drawings shall be provided as specified in other Divisions of these
Specifications. "As installed" drawings, with indications in suitable ink or chemical
fluid on one set of prints to produce a record of the complete installations, shall be
kept on the job and up-to-date during construction. At the completion of the work and
prior to final inspection, the Contractor shall copy all record "as installed" data, using
red ink, onto a set of blueline or blackline prints furnished by the City.
(b)
The Contractor shall certify to the completeness and accuracy of the "as installed"
information indicated on the blueline or blackline prints with its signature. The signed
blueline or blackline prints shall be delivered to the City Engineer as a condition
precedent to the City's acceptance of the Contracted Work.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-14
INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
SECTION 31 - MATERIALS, SAMPLES AND TESTING
(a)
All materials required by the Contract Documents to be tested shall be sampled and
tested in the manner prescribed for the particular materials, and the results of such
tests shall be reported to the Inspector in the form of affidavits made and attested to
by a testing agency. The final decision as to acceptance of the material shall be the
responsibility of the City Engineer or the Consultant.
(b)
When any materials required to be sampled or tested prior to use are delivered to the
job-site or are ready for testing, the Contractor shall so notify the Inspector and shall
allow sufficient time in the planning of the work for such sampling or testing.
(c)
When any tests indicate nonconformity with the Contract Documents, all materials of
which the tested samples are representative shall be immediately removed from the
job-site and shall not again be brought upon the job-site.
(d)
Except where otherwise specifically specified, the Department of General Services
Standards Unit of the City of Los Angeles will make all required tests of material
without cost to the Contractor.
(e)
Unless otherwise directed or specified, samples to be tested will be selected by the
Inspector or the Standards Unit from material at the job-site. The Contractor shall
provide every reasonable facility for aid to the Inspector or the Standards Unit in such
testing or sampling.
(f)
Whenever requested, samples of any material proposed to be used in the work shall
be delivered by the Contractor, free of charge, to the place within the City of Los
Angeles designated by the Inspector or the Standards Unit, Department of General
Services.
(g)
When sampling of materials for tests is to be made at a warehouse, factory, or mill
within the limits of Los Angeles County, the Contractor shall notify the Inspector a
sufficient length of time in advance to allow for arrangements to be made for such
sampling.
(h)
When sampling of materials for tests is to be made at any point outside the limits of
Los Angeles County, the Contractor shall engage a Testing Agency approved by the
Los Angeles City Department of Building and Safety and by the Inspector, to make
the test and furnish the affidavit specified below. All cost shall be borne by the
Contractor.
1. The Inspector of Public Works of the Bureau of Contract Administration,
Department of Public Works, has the responsibility and authority for approving
third party test and inspection laboratories as indicated herein and in Section 32
of the General Conditions. The Supervisor of the Materials Control Group of the
Bureau of Contract Administration acts in Behalf of the Inspector of Public
Works.
2. Per the Contract Documents, all material and fabricated items originating outside
the 50-mile geographic limits from the City of Los Angeles, which requires
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-15
inspection and testing will be inspected and/or tested at the laboratory, to be
arranged and paid for by the Prime Contractor, who has been approved by the
Supervisor of Materials Control. The Prime Contractor needs to comply with the
following procedures in a timely manner. Compliance will help eliminate
interference with the Contractor's schedule of operations and to minimize delay
and unnecessary expense to the City of Los Angeles and the Contractor.
3. The City of Los Angeles has a contract only with the Prime Contractor.
Therefore, all requests for approval of a third party test lab shall be in writing from
the Prime Contractor and addressed to the supervisor of the Materials Control
Group, [213] 580-1390 as follows:
Bureau of Contract Administration
Materials Control Group
221 N. Figueroa Street, Room 700
Los Angeles, CA 90012
One duplicate copy of the request shall be sent to the Construction Manager and
the City Engineer.
4. The letter requesting approval of a third party test lab or private inspection
company shall contain all of the following information:
a. Complete title of Project.
b. Project Work Order Number.
c. Name of proposed testing laboratory or inspection company.
d. Address and telephone number of proposed test lab/inspection
company.
e. Contact person at proposed test lab/inspection company.
f. Description and history of the proposed test lab/inspection company.
g. Resume of the inspector(s) who will do inspection.
h. Approved submittal number(s) and approved shop drawing item(s) to be
inspected or tested or both.
i. Name and address and telephone number of company where item(s) or
material will be fabricated.
j. Contact person at fabricators.
k. Fabrication schedule.
5. The Prime Contractor will be notified by letter if the testing laboratory/inspection
company is approved.
6. Any material that is subject to mill certification or requires shop inspection and/or
testing arrives at the job-site without proper inspection and testing, or certification
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-16
will be rejected by the Project Inspector. It is the Prime Contractor' s
responsibility to ensure that all items requiring shop inspection are inspected at
their source by the Materials Control Group or by an inspection or testing
laboratory that has been approved by the Materials Control Group or all items
delivered with required mill certification.
7. For certification information, contact:
Sr. Building Inspector,
Materials Control Section,
Dept. Of Building and Safety
Telephone: 213 485-3770
or
Material Control Supervisor
Material Control Group,
Bureau of Contract Administration
Telephone: 213 580-1390
(i)
When the manufacturer, fabricator, or dealer of materials provides the results of tests
from samples taken at the mill, factory, or warehouse, and when the testing agency
is approved by the Inspector, and the tests have been made in conformity with
specifications for the specific material, the Inspector will accept the reports of such
tests if made in the form of the affidavit specified below.
(j)
Whenever any Testing Agency takes samples of materials other than at the job-site,
the deliveries to the job-site of materials represented by such samples shall be
identified as specified for the specific material, and the results of such tests shall be
reported to the Inspector in the form of affidavits attested to by the testing agency.
Such affidavits shall furnish the following information with respect to the material
sampled:
1. Manufacturer's name and brand.
2. Place of sampling.
3. Sufficient information to identify the lot, group, bin, or silo from which the samples
were taken.
4. Amount of material in the lot sampled.
5. Statement that the material has passed the requirements.
6. Signature of the person making the affidavit, and the date of execution of the
affidavit.
7. Test criteria by reference to ASTM standard or other appropriate designation.
(k)
Any materials sampled other than at the job-site will be subject to such additional
sampling or testing at the job-site as may be ordered by the Inspector.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-17
SECTION 32 - INSPECTION
(a)
In order to allow for inspection, and in addition to any inspection required by the
Department of Building and Safety or any inspection required elsewhere in these
Specifications, the Contractor shall notify the Inspector a sufficient length of time in
advance, of the permanent concealment of any materials, or work by other materials,
or work.
(b)
Whenever the Contractor intends to carry on the work of this Contract on a Saturday,
Sunday, or Holiday, or more than eight (8) hours a day on a Monday through Friday,
he shall notify the Inspector of such intention at least 24 hours in advance so that
inspection may be arranged. The Contractor shall pay extra costs to the City for
inspection and other incidental expenses caused by such overtime work. Whenever
the Contractor is requested by the Inspector to work overtime, in the interest of the
City, the expense of the overtime wage paid to the City Inspectors will be borne by
the City. No demolition will be permitted on Saturdays, Sundays, or Holidays without
approval of the Board of Public Works.
(c)
If any Work is concealed or performed without the prior notice specified above, then
the Work shall be subject to such tests or exposure as may be necessary to prove to
the Inspector that the materials used and the work done are in conformity with the
Plans and Specifications. All labor and equipment necessary for exposing and testing
shall be furnished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall replace all material or work
damaged by exposing and any faulty materials or workmanship evidence by such
exposure or testing. All cost shall be borne by the Contractor.
(d)
When, in order to comply with the intent of the Specification and when not otherwise
specified, inspection should be made at the plant or mill of the manufacturer or
fabricator of material, and such plant or mill is within the limits of Los Angeles
County, the Contractor shall notify the Inspector a sufficient length of time in advance
to allow for arrangements to be made for such inspection.
(e)
When such plant or mill is outside the limits of Los Angeles County, the Contractor,
at its own expense, shall engage an Inspector, approved by the City Engineer to
inspect the materials at the said plant or mill. The Inspector shall be governed by the
requirements of the Specifications, and shall forward to the City Engineer whatever
written reports are required.
(f)
Any inspection or approval by any representative or agent of the City will not relieve
the Contractor of the responsibility of incorporating in the Work, only those materials
which conform to the Specifications, and any nonconforming materials shall be
removed from the job-site whenever identified.
(g)
The City Engineer and his authorized representatives, shall at all times have access
to the work during its construction at shops and yards, as well as at the project site.
The Contractor shall provide every necessary facility for ascertaining that the
materials and workmanship are in accordance with Contract Drawings and
Specifications.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-18
SECTION 33 - FINAL INSPECTION
(a)
The Contractor shall notify the Inspector and City Engineer upon completion of 20% of
the work and thereafter at each 20% increment, for review of the project progress of
the architectural, mechanical ventilating, plumbing, electrical and site work.
(b)
Upon completion of the Work, the Contractor shall notify the Inspector and the City
Engineer when a final inspection of the Work is desired. Such inspections will be
made as soon thereafter as possible. If the Work is found to be in compliance with
Plans and Specifications, the City Engineer will furnish the Contractor with a
certificate to that effect. If the work is found not to be substantially completed, the
Contractor shall continue to perform work to comply with Plans and Specifications
and Contract time is continued to be assessed.
(c)
All work outside of the property lines will be inspected by the Bureau of Contract
Administration. All work of this project within the property lines will be inspected by
the Los Angeles City Department of building & Safety and the Inspector of the Bureau
of Contract Administration. This does not relieve the Contractor of performing work in
accordance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications.
SECTION 34 - DEFECTIVE WORK
No Work which is defective in its construction, or deficient in any of the requirements of the
Contract Documents, shall be considered as accepted in consequence of the failure of any
employee of the City to point out said defects or deficiency or to order them corrected during
construction. The Contractor shall correct any imperfect Work whenever discovered, before the
final acceptance of the Work.
SECTION 35 - USE OF THE STRUCTURE BEFORE ACCEPTANCE
(a)
The City may, at any time, and from time to time, during the performance of the
Work, enter the structure for the purpose of installing any necessary work by City
labor or other contracts and for any other purpose in connection with the installation
of facilities. The Contractor shall cooperate with the City and not interfere with other
work being done by or on behalf of the City.
(b)
If, prior to completion and final acceptance of all of the Work, the City takes
possession of any portion of the Project with intent of retaining possession thereof,
then the Contractor shall be relieved of the responsibility for loss or damage to such
portion, other than that resulting from his fault or negligence. Such taking of
possession by the City shall not relieve the Contractor from any provisions of this
Contract respecting such portion other than to the extent specified in the preceding
sentence, nor constitute a final acceptance of such portion.
(c)
Prior to such partial occupancy or use of any portion of the Project by the City,
Contractor and City Engineer shall jointly inspect the area or portion of the Work in
order to determine and record the condition of the Work.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-19
PAYMENTS
SECTION 36 - CONTRACT PRICE BREAKDOWN
(a)
The Contractor shall submit to the Bureau of Contract Administration for approval,
within 15 calendar days following receipt of the "Notice to proceed," a complete
breakdown of the bid price, by the divisions and principal technical sections of the
Specifications, for use in checking work progress and partial payment request.
(b)
Where the Contract involves more than one building, an additional breakdown of the
Contract price is required for each building and for Yard and Street Work
improvements, in lump sum only.
(c)
Schedule of values to be derived from the cost loading of the construction schedule.
(Primavera Program).
SECTION 37 - PAYMENTS
(a)
On or about the first of each calendar month, the Contractor shall request payment,
on the Contract Payment Request Form supplied by the City, for the work performed
prior to such date. Each Payment Request shall be accompanied by the update
progress schedule indicating progress achieved to that date.
(b)
Upon approval by the Inspector and the City Engineer of the Contractor's estimate of
work completed, the City will make a progress payment to the Contractor equal in
amount to the approved estimate less a retention of 10 percent and less the total of all
previous payments. Upon completion of 50 percent of the Work of the Contract, the
City Engineer may at his discretion, reduce the amount of retention for the remainder
of the Work.
(c)
In preparing estimates, the material delivered on the job-site, or off-site location
preparatory work done, and the cost of bonds and insurance paid may be taken into
consideration. Partial payment for materials or equipment may, at the City engineer's
option be made subject to the following conditions:
1. Payment shall not be made for any individual items unless it will become a
permanent part of the improvement and has a value of more than $5,000.00.
2. No payment shall be made for degradable materials such as rock, sand, cement,
reinforcing steel, miscellaneous piping, drywall, and similar items of construction
until they are incorporated into the work.
3. Payment shall be made only on the basis of the amount of the invoice for the
actual value of the material presented to the City Engineer together with an
authenticated unconditional release and bill of sale executed by the supplier. All
suppliers, fabricators, or manufacturers who intend to furnish material or
equipment to a City project must file a notice with the City in accordance with the
State of California lien laws.
4.
In order for the Contractor to qualify for partial payment, each supplier, fabricator,
or manufacturer shall, in addition, file a list indicating what material shall be
furnished to the Project along with a list of notarized signatures of employees
who are authorized to sign an unconditional release for their company.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-20
5. The Contractor commits or agrees to provide secure storage facilities in a bonded
warehouse or facility approved by the City Engineer in accordance with Item 8
below, and exercise such measures, including manufacturer's recommended
maintenance, as will ensure the preservation of the specified quality, quantity,
and fitness of such materials or equipment. Manufacturer's recommended
maintenance and storage procedures shall be submitted to the City Engineer.
6. Payment for materials or equipment stored shall not exceed ninety (90) percent of
the invoice cost. In any event, percentage of invoice paid shall be at the
discretion of the City Engineer.
7. No payment will be made on living or perishable plant material until planting has
been completed and accepted by the City Engineer, unless otherwise approved
by the City Engineer.
8. The Contractor commits that it will secure under lock and key and physically
segregate subject material from all other material within its facility and shall
identify this material as being "Property of the City of Los Angeles". The City
Engineer staff shall be allowed access to the material storage facility provi ded
that forty-eight (48) hours advance notice is given to the Contractor.
9. The Contractor commits that it will provide proof of full all risk insurance coverage
for subject material. Said insurance shall cover material stored at the supplier's
facility, while in transit to the project site, while being off loaded at the project
site, and until material is incorporated into the work.
10. The Contractor commits that it shall absorb any and all cost increases incurred
to meet the requirements of Section 37 of the General Conditions without any
modification in the contract amount.
11. The Contractor commits that it shall be responsible for any damage to, defects
therein, misfabrication thereof or loss of subject material and all damages as if
the supplier was still the owner of said material, until it is incorporated into the
project and accepted by the City Engineer.
12. The Contractor shall furnish monthly photos and written statement confirming the
condition of the stored material in the facilities outside of a fifty (50) mile radius of
Los Angeles.
13. Prior to the payment, notification from storage site and verification by the City of
Los Angeles that materials are stored and secured as noted in Item 5 above.
(d)
Upon completion of the Work, the Contractor may request full payment for the Work,
and after acceptance of the Work by the Board, the City will make a final progress
payment as described above. The amount retained will continue to be retained until
thirty-five 35 days after the date of acceptance by the Board. In case of default by the
Contractor, the retention shall be retained by the City, as liquidated damages, as
provided in the Section relating to Suspension of Contract.
(e)
At the expiration of thirty-five (35) days from the date of the acceptance and upon
receipt from the Contractor of all affidavits and guarantees required by the
Specifications, the remainder due the Contractor will be paid by the City.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-21
(f)
If this Contract comprises two or more major units of work readily separable and
divisible, and for which separate prices are stipulated in the Contract, the Contractor
may make separate requests for progress payment on each such unit, and the City
will make such progress payments, acceptance, retention, and final payment in
accordance with the procedure specified above for the entire Contract.
(g)
The making of any payment to the Contractor under this Contract shall not relieve the
Contractor of all obligation hereunder. The Contractor is obligated to complete the
Contract in its entirety and to deliver to the City such completed work, finished
product or structure as is specified in the Contract, at the time or times specified, and
until this Contract is fully performed by the Contractor and the work, product, or
structure produced thereby is accepted by the City, the Contractor shall be obligated
to repair, replace, restore, or rebuild any fully or partially completed work or structure,
or any materials or equipment required to be provided under the Contract which may
be damaged, lost, stolen, or otherwise injured in any way; provided, however, that
with respect to any major unit of the type mentioned in this Section, this particular
obligation of the Contractor will terminate upon the completion by the Contract and
acceptance by the City of such major unit, and provided, further, that all work, any
structure, materials, and equipment covered by any partial payment is made.
(h)
When a "Notice to Withhold" is served upon the City, or the Board, pursuant to the
lien statutes of the State of California, to withhold sufficient funds from payments to
the Contractor in support of a claim resulting from default by the Contractor in
payment for labor or materials used in the prosecution of his Contract, the City will
withhold from payments due the Contractor an amount of money equal to the amount
of the claim stated in the "Notice of Withhold", and an additional amount equal to 25
percent of the amount of said claim, to defray any costs of litigation in the event of
court action on the claim, for a total withholding of one and one-quarter times in the
stated amount of the claim.
(i)
The Contractor will be required to make all monthly request for payment on the City's
Contract Payment Request Form. That form requires that the Contractor certify under
penalty of perjury to the following:
1. No workers were required or permitted to work more than eight (8) hours in any
one calendar day, except in cases of emergency, and except as provided by law.
2. Not less than the prevailing rates of wages, as set forth in the Contract for this
Work, have been paid all laborers, workers, and mechanics employed to perform
this Work.
3. There were no substitutions of Subcontractors, no assignment or transference of
Subcontractors or Sub-subcontractors, except as provided by the Board of Public
Works.
4. All of the provisions of Los Angeles Administrative Code, Section 10.8, pertaining
to non-discrimination in employment have been complied with.
5. That the Record Drawings maintained on the job have been noted with all changes
made subsequent to the previous "Payment Request".
The City's approval of the Payment Request shall be contingent upon the
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-22
current status of the required Record Drawings, Wiring Diagrams and the
Progress Photographs.
6. That the Shop Drawings and Wiring Diagrams have been submitted and approved
by the Contractor and reviewed by the city Engineer or the Consultant, as
applicable.
(j)
The City's decision to withhold payment will be based on the following:
1. Defective Work not remedied.
2. Third party claims filed.
3. Failure of Contractor to make payments to Subcontractor or for labor, materials
and equipment.
4. Reasonable evidence that Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the
Contract Sum.
5. Damage to the City or another Contractor.
6. Reasonable evidence that Work will not be completed within the Contract Time
and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated
damages for the anticipated delay.
7. Failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
(k)
The Contractor shall appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each
Subcontractor to make payments to the Sub-subcontractors in similar manner.
SECTION 38 - EXTRA WORK AND CHANGES
(a)
Subject to all City charter limitations, including those on competitive bidding, the City
Engineer at any time during the progress of the Work may order alterations in,
additions to, deviations or omissions from the Work contemplated by the original
Contract Documents (Plans and Specifications).
(b)
No extra work shall be performed or changed be made unless in pursuance of a
written "Change Order" from the City Engineer stating that the extra work or change
is authorized and no claim for an addition to the Contract amount shall be valid unless
the extra work or change is so ordered. Each change will be identified by a "Change
Order" number.
(c)
If any change involves an increase or decrease in the cost of the Contractor's work,
the "Change Order" shall state the amount to be added to or deducted from the
Contract amount, and shall also state the additional time, if any, needed for the
performance of the Work.
(d)
Any change to the Contract amount shall be in a lump sum mutually agreed to by
the Contractor and the Board, except that when, in the opinion of the City Engineer,
such basis is not feasible, the change to the Contract amount shall be determined
upon a cost-plus-percentage basis.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-23
(e)
Each lump sum quotation from the Contractor shall be accompanied by sufficient
detailed estimates to permit verification of the total.
(f)
When the work is to be done on a cost-plus-percentage basis, the Contractor shall
submit daily statements to the City Engineer, showing all labor, materials, and
equipment costs incurred, and upon completion of the Work, a summary statement of
costs including overhead and profit.
(g)
Estimates for lump sum quotations and accounting for cost-plus-percentage work
shall be limited to direct expenditure necessitated specifically by the subject extra
work, and shall be segregated as follows:
1. Direct labor (including the itemized time of the job superintendent spent solely on
the work of the "Change Order") and materials for both temporary and permanent
work with proper allowance for salvage of temporary work, and including direct
engineering expenses.
2. Equipment rental or use allowance, individual pieces of equipment or tools having
a replacement value of $250 or less whether or not consumed by use shall be
considered small tools and no payment will be made therefore.
3. Subcontractor's and Sub-subcontractor's costs; including their overhead and profit.
4. Social Security and unemployment taxes and other payroll surcharges.
(h)
In addition to the direct cost specified above, the Contractor will be paid a lump sum
for Contractor's overhead, profit, field office salaries, and expense, supervision not
applied solely to the work of the "Change Order" and "Bond". Such lump sum shall
conform to the following schedule of percentages of the total amount of the said direct
expenditures.
Direct
Expenditures
Percentage for
Lump Sum Addition
Under $1,000
$1,001 to $20,000
$20,001 to $100,000
$100,001 to $500,000
$500,001 to $1,000,000
$1,000,001 and greater
(i)
20%
16%
12%
10%
8%
6%
Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors will be allowed the following percentages for
overhead and profit, respectively, on the amount of their direct expenditures.
Direct Expenditures
on Change Orders
Under $1,001
$1,001 to $20,000
$20,001 to $100,000
$100,001 to $500,000
Percentage for
Lump Sum Addition
25% for Overhead and Profit
21.5% for Overhead and Profit
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-24
(j)
For work performed by a Sub-Subcontractor, the Subcontractor may add 6 percent of
the Sub-subcontractor's total for overhead and profit.
(k)
The basis for determining the cost for Sub-subcontractors shall be the same as for
Subcontractors, and no increase shall be allowed, regardless of the number of tiers of
Subcontractors involved.
(l)
For added or omitted work by Subcontractors, the Contractor shall furnish to the City
Engineer the Subcontractor's detailed estimate of the cost for labor, materials, and
equipment, including the markup by the Subcontractor for overhead and profit. Such
estimate of cost shall be certified by the subcontractor. The same requirement shall
apply to any Sub-subcontractor. The Contractor shall furnish any additional details to
the City Engineer within 5 days after the Contractor has been notified by the City.
(m) For added or omitted work furnished by a vendor or supplier, the Contractor shall
furnish to the City Engineer, a detailed estimate or quotation of the cost including
discounts to the Contractor for such work, signed by the vendor or supplier.
(n)
Any change in the work involving both extras and credits shall show a net total cost,
including subcontracts. Allowances for overhead and profit to the total cost, as
specified hereinabove, shall be applied if the net total cost is an extra; overhead and
profit allowances shall not be applied if the net total cost is a credit. The estimated
cost of deductions shall be based on labor and material prices on the date the
"Change Order" was signed.
(o)
If the Contractor is delayed in completing the work by reason of any change ordered
by the City Engineer, the time for completion of the work will be extended by "Change
Order" for a period equal to the number of days by which the entire project has been
delayed because of the change. The Contractor will not be liable for liquidated
damages for this period of time, but the contractor shall have no claim for any other
compensation for any such delay, except as hereinbefore provided in this Section.
(p)
In case of failure on the part of the City Engineer and the Contractor to arrive at an
agreement on the amount of credit or extra cost for a proposed change to the Plans
or Specifications, a "Change Order" will be processed in the amount believed by the
City Engineer to be reasonable, and the Contractor shall proceed with the work. If the
Contractor believes that the amount named in the "Change Order" is not a reasonable
payment for the work required, the Contractor may file a request for review with the
Board of Public Works.
(q)
Any change in the work shall conform to the original Drawings and Specifications
insofar as they may apply, without conflict to the conditions involved in the change.
(r)
Payment for additional work or extras, if any, shall become due and payable in
accordance with the provision for payment of the Contract price.
(s)
Any changes that are required to accommodate construction due to errors or
omissions in the approved Construction Drawings and Construction Specifications
prepared by the Contractor shall not be considered as extra work.
(t)
Full rental costs for rented or leased equipment shall not exceed the rates listed in
the Rental Rate Blue Book (the Blue Book) published by Dataquest, Inc., Palo Alto,
California, as adjusted to the regional area of the work under this Contract. Owned
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-25
equipment costs shall not exceed the rates listed in the Cost Reference Guide (the
CRG) for Construction Equipment, published by Dataquest, Inc., Palo Alto, California.
The most recent published edition in effect at the commencement of the actual
equipment use shall be used.
1. Leased Equipment:
a.
For equipment rented or leased in arm's length transactions from outside
vendors, the Contractor shall be paid the actual invoiced or leased rates.
Arm's length rental or lease transactions are those in which the firm involved
in the rental or lease of such equipment is not associated with, owned by,
have common management, directorship, facilities, and/or stockholders with
the firm renting the equipment. Submittal by a Contractor of a rental or
lease invoice from the lessor will be prima facie proof of compliance with the
above. However, such invoices are not conclusive proof; if questioned, the
burden of proof remains with the Contractor. In no event shall the leased
equipment rate billed to the City be at rates exceeding those prescribed in
the following table:
Payment Category Blue Book Actual Usage
Less than 8 hours Hourly Rate,
8 or more hours but less than 7 days Daily Rate,
7 or more days but less than 30 days Weekly Rate,
30 days or more Monthly Rate.
b.
When in Use Actual equipment, use time documented by the Inspector
shall be the basis that the equipment was on and utilized at the project site.
In addition to the leasing rate and the markup negotiated above, equipment
operational costs shall not exceed the estimated hourly operating rate as
set forth in the Blue Book. The hours of operation shall be based upon
actual equipment usage as recorded by the Inspector. For multiple shift
work sequences, the allowable equipment rate shall not exceed fifty percent
(50%) of the base rate, for second or third shifts.
c.
Idle equipment is equipment on site and necessary to perform the work
under the change but not in actual use. Idle equipment time, as
documented by the Inspector, shall be paid at the rate determined above.
Idle time shall include a reasonable time allowance to and from the project
site.
2. Owned and Other Equipment:
a.
Equipment rates for owned equipment or equipment provided in other than
arm's length transactions will not exceed the total hourly cost listed in the
Cost Reference Guide. Except as noted herein below, this equipment
hourly rate plus the estimated operating cost per hour from the Cost
Reference Guide will be paid for each hour the equipment actually performs
work. Daily records listing the equipment units and their respective
operators, identification code, and actual usage, as certified at the end of
each workday (or work shift if the work is being performed in multiple work
shift sequence) by the Inspector shall be the record upon which actual
equipment use shall be based. For multiple shift work sequences, the
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-26
allowable equipment rate shall not exceed the hourly depreciation and
operating costs listed in the Cost Reference Guide, for second or third
shifts.
b.
Equipment necessary to be on the site to complete the Work, but not in
actual use, shall not exceed fifty percent (50%) of the ownership hourly rate
set forth in the Cost Reference Guide, provided that its presence and
necessity on the site has been documented by the Inspector, and further
provided that the equipment was idled solely by actions of the City. Idle
equipment time will only be paid as a function of delays specifically directed
or caused by the City's actions. In no event shall the idle time claimed in a
day for a particular piece of equipment exceed the normal work schedule
established for the project (usually eight (8) hours per day or forty (40) hours
per week, and excluding Saturdays, Sundays, and Holidays). For multiple
shift work sequences, the allowable idle equipment rate shall not exceed
fifty percent (50%) of the hourly depreciation cost listed in the Cost
Reference Guide, for second or third shifts.
3. Equipment Shipment and Set Up Costs: Documented and actual equipment
shipment and set up costs shall be paid for.
4. In the event that a piece of equipment used on a "Change Order" is not listed in
the Blue Book or the CRG, costs may be derived from the AGC Equipment
Ownership Guide, the Associated Equipment Dealers Guide, or the Equipment
Rate Guide published by the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers.
SECTION 39 - UNFORESEEN CONDITIONS
(a)
Increased cost to the Contractor in the performance of the work due to any of the
following conditions will be paid for in the manner described hereinabove in Section 38
for "Extra Work and Changes":
1. Underground conditions materially different from those shown on the Plans or
indicated in the Specifications.
2. Underground man-made structures which could not reasonably have been
discovered by the Contractor during the period of advertising for bids.
3. Existing fill, unstable soil, or soil that has been disturbed through no fault of the
Contractor, any of which requires removal and replacement, compaction, or
additional concrete and backfilling.
4. Unknown physical conditions at the job-site of an unusual nature, differing
materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent
in the work of the character provided in this Contract.
5. Material that the Contractor believes may be material that is "hazardous waste"
is defined in Section 25117 of the Health Code and is required to be removed to a
Class I, Class II or Class III disposal site in accordance with provisions of
existing laws.
(b)
Immediately upon discovery of any of the conditions listed in Section (a) above, the
Contractor shall stop all work thereon and notify the Inspector. The unforeseen
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-27
condition will be reviewed by the City Engineer and the Contractor shall not proceed
with the work until the Inspector has so ordered.
(c)
No claim of the Contractor under this clause shall be allowed unless the Contractor
has given the required notice in (b) above, provided however, the time prescribed
therefore may be extended by the City Engineer.
SECTION 40 - SUSPENSION OF WORK
(a)
If the work of the Contract is suspended or delayed, the Contractor shall so notify the
Inspector or the City Engineer within 24 hours after the start thereof. If the Contractor
is entitled to reimbursement for such suspension or delay, as specified hereinafter,
Contractor shall submit a completely detailed statement of the costs thereof to the
City Engineer within 15 days after the termination thereof.
(b)
If the work of the Contract is suspended or delayed through no fault of the City, all
expenses and losses incurred by the Contractor shall be borne in full by the
Contractor. This includes, but is not limited to labor strikes or inclement weather.
(c)
If the work of the Contract is suspended or delayed by an act of the City, or by failure
of the City to furnish required information or if the critical path is affected by the
suspension and the Contractor thereby incurs expenses or sustains losses which
could not have been avoided by the judicious handling of forces and equipment, and if
by a diligent prosecution of the Work, Contractor could not have completed the work
before such suspension, the Contractor will be paid such amount as the Board may
find to be fair and reasonable compensation for such part of the Contractor's actual
loss as was unavoidable and could not have been reduced. In no case shall any
compensation be made to cover any loss other than actual cash, paid for wages,
rental of equipment, and materials used in protection of the Work, all of which must
be supported by satisfactory written evidence. Such wages shall not include the
wages or salary of any individual not necessary to the protection of the project. The
Contractor shall not be entitled to mark-up of overhead or profit on damages or
extended duration.
DEFAULT - SUBLETTING - INSURANCE
SECTION 41 - SUSPENSION OF CONTRACT
(a)
If the Contractor should be adjudged bankrupt or if Contractor should make a general
assignment for the benefit of his creditors or if a receiver should be appointed on
account of insolvency, then in any such case the Board shall have the power to
suspend the operations of the Contract.
(b)
Should the Contractor fail to begin Work within the time required in such a manner as
to ensure full compliance with the Contract within the time limit or if the Work to be
done under this Contract be abandoned by the Contractor or if at any time the City
Engineer is of the opinion that the said Work is unnecessarily or unreasonably
delayed or that said Contractor is willfully violating any of the terms of the Contract or
is not executing the Contract in good faith or is not following the instructions of the
City Engineer as to additional force necessary in the opinion of the City for its
completion within the required time or if at any time the Contractor is not properly
carrying out the provisions of the Contract in their true intent and meaning, then in
any such case, notice thereof in writing will be served upon the Contractor. Should
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-28
the Contractor neglect or refuse to provide means for a satisfactory compliance with
the direction of the City Engineer within the time specified in such notices the Board
shall have the power to suspend the operations of the Contract.
(c)
Upon receiving notice of such suspension said Contractor shall discontinue said Work
or such parts of it as the Board may designate. Upon such suspension the Board
may employ other parties to carry on the Contract to completion, employ the
necessary workers, substitute other machinery or materials, purchase the materials
contracted for in such manner as the Board may deem proper, hire such forces and
buy such machinery, tools, appliances, materials, supplies and equipment at the
Contractor's expense, as may be necessary for the proper conduct of the Work and
for the completion thereof. Any excess of costs arising there from over and above the
Contract price will be charged against the Contractor and his sureties, who will be
liable therefore.
(d)
In the event of such suspension, all moneys due the Contractor or retained under the
terms of the Contract shall be forfeited to the City; but such forfeiture will not release
the Contractor or Contractor's sureties from liability for failure to fulfill the Contract.
The Contractor and Contractor's sureties will be credited with the amount of money so
forfeited toward any excess of cost over and above the Contract price arising from the
suspension of the operations of the Contract and the completion of the Work by the
City, as above provided, and the Contractor will be so credited with any surplus
remaining after all just claims for such completion have been paid.
(e)
In lieu of the exercise of the authority hereinabove given, to employ workers, purchase
tools and materials, and complete the Work, the City reserves the right and option
instead thereof, to annul and cancel the Contract and to relet the Work or any part
thereof, and said Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim for damages on
account of such annulment nor shall such annulment affect the right of the City to
recover damages which may arise from such failure on the part of the Contractor, to
fulfill the terms of the Contract. And in case of such annulment, all moneys due the
Contractor, or retained under the terms of the Contract, shall be forfeited to the City;
but such forfeiture shall not release the Contractor or Contractor's sureties from
liability for failure to fulfill the Contract; and the Contractor and Contractor's sureties
shall be credited with the amount of moneys so forfeited toward any greater sum they
may become liable for to the City on account of the default of the Contractor.
(f)
In determination of the question whether there has been such non-compliance with
the Contract as to warrant the suspension or annulment thereof, a hearing shall be
held before the Board and the decision of the Board will be binding on both parties.
SECTION 42 - ASSIGNMENT
The Contractor shall not assign any of Contractor's rights under the Contract (including right to
any payment) or substitute any portion of the Contract without consent of the Board in writing.
SECTION 43 - SUBLETTING
(a)
The Contractor shall submit the names and proof of qualifications of all
Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors proposed to perform work on the project to
the City Engineer's, and the Board's approval prior to commencement of any work on
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-29
the Contract, but such approval shall not entitle Subcontractors or Subsubcontractors to recognition for any direct or contractual relationship with the City,
nor shall it constitute approval of the use of any materials other than those specified.
(b)
Upon receipt from the Contractor of the names of proposed Subcontractors and Subsubcontractors, the City Engineer will investigate the record, ability and capacity of
each, and proof of qualifications and references, and will issue written approval if
found to be in the best interest of the City. Any submittal made without proof of
qualifications will be rejected as non-responsive to the specifications.
(c)
The Contractor shall be responsible for all acts of Subcontractors and all Contracted
Work, regardless of any Subcontracts. All interests of the City in work of
Subcontractors shall be coordinated through the Contract.
(d)
If a Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor has been rejected by the City after
investigation by the City Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish the City Engineer with
additional names for City Engineer's approval.
SECTION 44 - INDEMNIFICATION AND INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION
CONTRACTORS
(a)
Indemnification:
1. Except for the active negligence or willful misconduct of City, Contractor
undertakes and agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless City and any and
all of City's Boards, Officers, Agents, Employees, Assigns, and Successors in
Interest from and against all suits and causes of action, claims, losses,
demands and expenses, including, but not limited to, Attorney's fees and cost of
litigation, damage to any person, including the Contractor's employees and
agents, or damage to or destruction of property of either party hereto or of third
parties, arising in any manner by reason of the negligent acts, errors, omissions
or willful misconduct incident to the performance of this Agreement on the part of
the Contractor or Subcontractor of any tier.
2. It is agreed that such defense and indemnity shall extend to the City Engineer or
any other Design Consultant providing services under written agreement with the
City covering any portion of the Project. Provided, however, that the Design
Consultant shall be solely responsible for the enforcement of any request made
by said Consultant for indemnification or defense by Contractor. It is further
provided that City shall have no liability whatsoever for any failure of Contractor to
comply with any request from the Consultant for indemnity or defense.
3.
It is further agreed that the defense and indemnity obligations of the Contractor
under this paragraph shall not extend to the liability of the Design Consultant or its
agents, employees or sub-consultants, arising as a result of such indemnitee's own
active negligence, errors or omissions or from (1) the preparation or approval of
maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, change orders, designs or
specifications, or (2) the giving of or failure to give directions or instructions to the
indemnitee provided that such giving or failure to give is the primary cause of the
damage or injury.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-30
(b)
Insurance:
1. General Conditions: During the term of this agreement and without limiting
Contractor's indemnification of City, Contractor shall provide and maintain at its
own expense during the term of this Agreement insurance having the limit
customarily carried and actually arranged by the Contractor, but not less than
the amounts and types listed on the "Insurance Requirements" form attached
hereto covering its operations hereunder subject to the following conditions:
a. Insurance Requirements: All insurance required hereunder shall conform to
City requirements established by charter, ordinance or policy and shall be
filed with the Office of the City Attorney for its review in accordance with Los
Angeles Administrative Code Sections 11.47 through 11.56.
b. Additional Insured/Loss Payee: City, its Boards, Officers, Agents, Design
Consultants, if any, and Employees shall be included as additional insured in
all liability insurance policies which may be required except: Workers'
Compensation/Employer's Liability, Professional Errors and Omissions,
second-party Legal Liability coverage (such as Fire Legal) and Owners' and
Contractors' Protective Liability, in which latter case the City shall be the
Named Insured. City shall be named Loss Payee As Its Interest May
Appear in all applicable property, fidelity or surety coverage which may be
required.
c. Primary Insurance: Such insurance shall be primary with respect to any
insurance maintained by City and shall not call on City's insurance program
for contributions.
d. Admitted Carrier/Licensed California Broker: Insurance shall be obtained from
brokers or carriers authorized to transact insurance business in California.
e. Approval of Insurance: Evidence of insurance shall be submitted to and
approved by City Attorney and City Risk Manager prior to commencement of
any work or tenancy under this Agreement.
f. Cancellation (30-day Notice): With respect to the interests of the City, such
insurance shall not be canceled or materially reduced in coverage or limits
except after thirty (30) days written notice by receipted delivery (e.g.,
certified mail-return receipt, courier or telegram) has been given to City
Attorney Insurance & Bonds, and/or City Risk Manager, Room 1500 City
Hall East, 200 North Main Street, Los Angeles, CA 90012-4190.
g. Severability of Interest: Except with respect to the insurance company's
limits of liability, each liability insurance policy shall apply separately to each
insured against whom claim or suit is brought. The inclusion of any person
or organization as an insured shall not affect any right which such person or
organization would have as a claimant if not so included.
h. Acceptable Evidence: The appropriate "City Special Endorsement Forms"
are the preferred forms of evidence of insurance. Alternatively, Contractor
may submit two (2) certified copies of the policy or other evidence
acceptable to the City Attorney and City Risk Manager containing language
which complies with Subparagraphs (a) through (g) above. With respect to
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-31
Professional Liability Insurance, either a signed copy of the Policy
Declarations Page or a letter from Contractor's insurance broker certifying
coverage, together with a 30-day cancellation notice endorsement in favor of
the City as specified in Subparagraph (f) above, will satisfy this requirement.
i. Renewal: Once the insurance has been approved by City, evidence of renewal
of an expired policy may be submitted on a manually signed renewal
endorsement form. If the policy or carrier has changed, however, new
evidence as specified in Paragraphs (a) through (h) above, must be
submitted.
j. Severability of Interest: Except with respect to the insurance company's limit
of liability, each liability insurance policy shall apply separately to each
insured against whom a suit is brought. The inclusion of any person or
organization as an insured shall not affect any right which such person or
organization would have a claimant if not so included.
2. Workers' Compensation: By signing this Agreement, Contractor hereby certifies
that it is aware of the provisions of Section 3700 et seq., of the Labor Code which
require every employer to be insured against liability for Workers'
Compensation or to undertake self-insurance in accordance with the provisions of
that Code, and that it will comply with such provisions at all such times as they
may apply during the performance of the work pursuant to this Agreement.
3. Aggregate Limits/Blanket Coverage: If any of the required insurance coverages
contain aggregate limits, or apply to other operations or tenancy of Contractor
not related to this agreement, Contractor shall give City prompt, written notice of
any incident, occurrence, claim, settlement or judgment against such insurance
which in Contractor's best judgment may diminish the protection such insurance
affords City. Further, Contractor shall immediately take all reasonable and
available steps to restore such aggregate limits or shall provide other insurance
protection for such aggregate limits, City may at its option, specify a minimum
acceptable aggregate for each line of coverage required.
4. Self-Insurance and Self-Insured Retention: Self-insurance programs and selfinsured retention in insurance policies are subject to separate approval by City
upon review of evidence of Contractor's financial capacity to respond.
Additionally, such programs or retention must provide City with at least the same
protection from liability and defense of suits as would be afforded by first-dollar
insurance.
5. Modification of Coverage: City reserves the right at any time during the term of
this Agreement to change the amounts and types of insurance required
hereunder by giving Contractor ninety (90) days advance written notice of such
change. If such change should result in substantial additional cost to Contractor,
City agrees to negotiate additional compensation proportional to the increased
benefit to City.
6. Failure to Procure Insurance:
a. The required coverages and limits are subject to availability on the open
market at reasonable cost as determined by City. Non-availability or nonaffordability must be documented by a letter from Contractor's insurance
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-32
broker or agent indicating a good faith effort to place the required insurance
and showing as a minimum the names of the insurance carriers and the
declinations or quotations received from each.
b. Within the foregoing constraints, Contractor's failure to procure or maintain
required insurance or a self-insurance program during the entire term of this
Agreement shall constitute a material breach of this Agreement under which
the City may immediately suspend or terminate this Agreement or, at its
discretion, procure or renew such insurance to protect City's interests and
pay any and all premiums in connection therewith, and recover all monies so
paid from Contractor.
7. Underlying Insurance: Contractor shall be responsible for requiring
indemnifications and insurance as it deems appropriate from Contractor's
employees receiving mileage allowance, consultants, agents and subcontractors,
if any, to protect Contractor's and City's interests, and for ensuring that such
persons comply with any applicable insurance statutes. Contractor is
encouraged to seek professional advice in this regard.
CITY AND STATE REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 45 - LENGTH OF WORKDAY AND WORKWEEK
(a)
Eight (8) hours of labor shall constitute a calendar day's work for employees of
Contractors under this Contract, to be paid for at not less than the basic wage rate for
the first eight hours work of each day.
(b)
When work in excess of 8 hours per day, or 40 hours during any one week is
performed, wages for all hours over 8 hours in any one day or over 40 hours during
any one week shall be paid at not less than 1-1/2 times the basic wage rate, as
provided in Division 2, Part 7, Chapter 1, Article 3 of the Labor Code of California.
SECTION 46 - PREVAILING WAGE
(a)
The Board of Public Works has obtained a schedule of the prevailing hourly rate in
dollars and details pertinent thereto for each craft or type of worker or mechanic
needed to perform the work, from the Department of Industrial Relations. Said
Schedule is on file with the Board. The Contractor shall post at the job-site in a
conspicuous place available to all employees and applicants for employment
copies of the prevailing wage rates provided by the City for each craft; classification;
or type of workers needed to execute the Contract.
(b)
The Contractor shall pay all workers under the Contract at least the prevailing wage
determined in Section 48(a) hereof, and shall keep the schedule referred to above,
posted at the job-site at all times during the performance of the Contract.
(c)
The Contractor, all Subcontractors, and Sub-subcontractors shall comply with the
provisions of Division 2, Part 7, Chapter 1, Article 2 of the California Labor Code.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-33
SECTION 47 - PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES
The Contractor and each of all Subcontractors and Sub-Subcontractors shall pay each of its
employees engaged in work on the project under this Contract in compliance with the State
Labor Code.
SECTION 48 - CONVICT-MADE MATERIALS
No materials manufactured or produced in a penal or correctional institution shall be incorporated
in the project under this Contract.
SECTION 49 - EXEMPTION FROM FEDERAL EXCISE TAX
(a)
Purchase of materials and equipment which will be incorporated or installed
permanently in the Contracted Work are exempt from Federal excise tax in effect at
the time of purchase, as applicable. Prices included in the Contract amount shall
reflect such exemptions. A Federal Tax Exemption Certificate will be furnished by
the City, on request, as acknowledgement that materials and equipment for which
exemption is requested by the Contractor, is valid where provided for the exclusive
use of the City.
(b)
Lists of exempt articles provided by the Contractor and Subcontractors and SubSubcontractors shall be submitted to the City by the Contractor. Purchases of
materials and equipment which will be used in the operations of the Contractor or
Subcontractors or Sub-Subcontractors and not incorporated in the Contracted Work
are not exempt from excise tax.
SECTION 50 - SALES OR USE TAX
Purchase of materials and equipment which will be incorporated or installed permanently in the
Contract Work, or which will be used in the operation of the Contractor or Subcontractors or Subsubcontractors, and not incorporated in the Contract Work, are not exempt from City of Los
Angeles and California State Sales or Use Taxes in effect at the time of purchase, as applicable.
SECTION 51 - NON-DISCRIMINATION IN EMPLOYMENT
(a)
The Contractor shall comply with all of the provisions of Los Angeles Administrative
Code Section 10.0 through 10.13, Mandatory Provision pertaining to NonDiscrimination in Employment, which provides the procedure pertaining to NonDiscrimination in Employment in the performance of City Contracts and providing the
procedure for the administration of such contractual provisions, including
employment, the posting of notice in conspicuous places, solicitation or
advertisements for employees, relations with labor unions, access to the Contractor's
records, possibility of declaration of breach of Contract or delinquency, relationship
with and responsibility for Subcontracts.
(b)
The Contractor shall submit Monthly Ethnic Reports to the Board of Public Works
indicating the number of employees in the various work categories and ethnic groups,
on forms furnished by the City.
(c)
Non-Discrimination Clause: The Contractor agrees and obligates himself not to
discriminate during the performance of this Contract against any employee or
applicant for employment because of employees or applicants race, religion, national
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-34
origin, ancestry, sex, age or physical handicap. Provide all Subcontractors or Subsubcontractors awarded under this Contract with a like non-discrimination clause.
SECTION 52 - APPRENTICE UTILIZATION
Any Contract awarded hereunder will require the Contractor to comply with the provisions of the
Labor Code, State of California. Section 1777.5 relating to apprentice employment and training;
and will require the Prime Contractor to assume full responsibility for compliance with said
Section with respect to all Apprenticable Occupations upon the project. Compliance with said
Section 1777.5 of the Labor Code is not required for Public Works Contracts involving less than
$30,000 or less than 20 working days.
SECTION 53 - BUSINESS TAX REGISTRATION CERTIFICATES
(a)
The Contractor represents that Contractor has obtained and presently holds the
Business Tax Registration Certificate(s) required by the Los Angeles City's Business
Tax Ordinance (Article 1, Chapter 2, Section 21.00 and following, of the Los Angeles
Municipal Code). The Contractor shall maintain, or obtain as necessary, all such
certificates required of it under said Ordinance and shall not allow any such certificate
to be revoked or suspended.
(b)
The City of Los Angeles requires all firms that have business activity within the City of
Los Angeles to pay City Business Taxes. Each firm or individual that pays the
Business Tax receives a Business Tax Registration Certificate (BTRC) Number.
(c)
Beginning October 14, 1987, payments for goods or services will be withheld unless
proof of tax compliance is provided to the City. All firms and individuals that do
business with the City of Los Angeles will be required to provide a BTRC Number or
an Exemption Number as proof of compliance with Los Angeles City Business Tax
requirements in order to receive payment for goods or services.
(d)
The Tax and Permit Division of the City Clerk's Office has the sole authority to
determine whether a firm is covered by business tax requirements. Those firms not
required to pay will be given an Exemption Number.
(e)
If you do not have a BTRC Number, contact the Tax and Permit Division of the City of
Los Angeles.
SECTION 54 - LISTING OF SUBCONTRACTORS
(a)
General: All Contracts let by the Board of Public Works for the construction of any
public work or improvement within the City of Los Angeles will require the submittal of
a list of Subcontractors with the bid.
(b)
Definitions: For the purposes of this Section of the Specifications, "Sub-contractor"
shall mean a Contractor within the meaning of the provisions of Chapter 9
(commencing with Section 7000) of Division 3 of the Business and Professions Code
of the State of California, who contracts directly with the Prime Contractor. "Prime
Contractor" shall mean the Contractor who contracts directly with the awarding
authority.
(c) Listing of Subcontractors: Every Subcontractor making a bid or offering to perform the
work shall file with the bid the
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-35
1. The name, address, telephone number, of each Subcontractor who will perform or
render service in an amount as indicated in the following tables:
LIST ALL SUBCONTRACTORS
CONTRACTOR'S TOTAL BID AMOUNT
Under
$100,000
Between $100,000 and $1,000,000.
Above
$1,000,000
FOR AMOUNTS IN EXCESS OF
$5,000
5% of the total bid
$50,000
2. MBE/WBE2. MBE/WBE Subcontractors regardless of subcontract amount.
3. A description of that portion of the work to be performed by each such
Subcontractor. Only one Subcontractor for each portion of the work shall be
listed. Failure of a Bidder to specify a Subcontractor for any portion of the work
in an amount in excess of $10,000 shall constitute agreement by said Bidder
that it is fully qualified to perform that work and shall perform it with its own
forces. Its "own forces" shall be construed to include only workers employed
and paid directly by the Prime Contractor and equipment owned or rented by the
Prime Contractor, with or without operators. Such term does not include
employees or equipment of a subcontractor, assignee, or agent of the Prime
Contractor. A Prime Contractor violating any provisions of this subsection shall
be penalized as set forth in Section (h) hereinafter specified.
(d)
(e)
Circumvention: Circumvention by a Prime Contractor of the Subcontractor listing
requirements, by the device of listing another Contractor who will in turn sublet
portions constituting the majority of the work covered by the Prime Contractor shall
be considered a violation and shall subject such Prime Contractor to the penalties set
forth herein.
Substitution:
1. No Prime Contractor whose bid is accepted may substitute any person as
Subcontractor in place of the Subcontractor listed in the original bid or offer
except in the following instances:
a. When the Subcontractor listed in the bid after a reasonable opportunity to do
so fails or refuses to execute a written Contract when such written Contract,
based upon the general terms, conditions, Plans and Specifications for the
project involved or the terms of such Subcontractor's written bid, is presented
to it by the Prime Contractor.
b. When the listed Subcontractor becomes bankrupt or insolvent.
c. When the listed Subcontractor fails or refuses to perform its Subcontract.
d. When the listed Subcontractor fails or refuses to meet the bond requirements
of the Prime Contractor as set forth herein under the Subcontractors
Performance Bonds.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-36
e. When the Contractor demonstrates to the satisfaction of the Board that the
Subcontractor was listed by inadvertent clerical error.
f. When the listed Subcontractor is not properly licensed pursuant to the
Contractors License Law, or does not meet the qualifications required by the
Contract.
g. When the Board or its duly authorized officer determines that the Work being
performed by the listed Subcontractor is substantially unsatisfactory and not
in substantial accordance with the Plans and Specifications or the listed
Subcontractor is substantially delaying or disrupting the progress of the
Work.
h. When the listed Subcontractor fails to submit an Affirmative Action Plan
acceptable to the Board.
or
Any Subcontractor allowed to be substituted for another shall meet the same
MBE/WBE status requirements that were required of the replaced Subcontractor.
1. No Subcontractor shall be substituted for work which the Prime Contractor
agrees to perform in excess of the amount specified above in Section 56(c)3 by
failure to designate a Subcontractor therefore except in the performance of
"Change Orders" causing changes or deviations from the original Contract or in
cases of public emergency or necessity and only after a finding reduced to
writing by the Board setting forth the facts constituting the emergency or
necessity.
2. The Prime Contractor, as a condition of asserting a claim of inadvertent clerical
error in a listing of a Subcontractor, shall within two working days after the time
of the prime bid opening by the Board give written notice to both the
Subcontractor its claims to have listed in error and the intended Subcontractor,
who had bid to the Prime Contractor in prior to bid opening. Any listed
Subcontractor who has been notified by the Prime Contractor in accordance with
the provisions of this Section as to an inadvertent clerical error, shall be allowed
six working days from the time of the prime bid opening within which to submit to
the Board and to the Prime Contractor written objection to the Prime Contractor's
claim of inadvertent clerical error. In all other cases, the Prime Contractor must
make a request in writing, to the Board, for the substitution of Subcontractors,
giving reasons therefore. The Board shall mail a written notice to the listed
Subcontractor giving reasons for the proposed substitutions. Such notice shall
be served by certified or registered mail to the last known address of such
Subcontractor. The listed Subcontractor shall have five working days from the
date of mailing of such notice within which to file with the Board, written
objections to the substitution and the notice itself shall so state.
3. Failure to file written objections within the times specified herein shall constitute a
waiver of objection to the substitution by the listed Subcontractor and, where the
ground for substitution is an inadvertent clerical error, shall be primary evidence
of an agreement by the listed Subcontractors that an inadvertent clerical error
was made.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-37
4. If written objections are filed, the Board shall give five working days' notice in
writing to the Prime Contractor and to the listed Subcontractor of a hearing by
the Board on the Prime Contractor's request for substitution. Any determination
made, shall be based on the facts contained in declarations submitted under
penalty of perjury, upon testimony under oath, subject to cross-examination, and
upon any other relevant evidence. With respect to requests, for substitution upon
submission of affidavits by the Prime Contractor and the intended Subcontractor
that an error was, in fact, made and:
a. Submission of a similar affidavit by the Subcontractor listed in error; or
b. Failure to file written objection, as provided herein, by the Subcontractor
listed in error; or
c. A determination after hearing that the listed Subcontractor was listed in error.
5. The determination by the Board shall be final.
(f)
Subcontractor's Performance Bonds: In the event the Subcontractor submitting a bid
to a Prime Contractor does not, upon the request of the Prime Contractor and at the
expense of the Prime Contractor at the established charge or premium therefore,
furnish to such Prime Contractor a bond, or bonds, issued by an admitted surety
wherein the Prime Contractor shall be named the oblige, guaranteeing prompt and
faithful performance of such Subcontract and the payment of all claims for labor and
materials furnished or used in and about the work to be performed and performed
under such Subcontract, the Prime Contractor may reject such bid and make a
substitution of another Subcontractor subject to the provisions herein. Such bond, or
bonds may be required at the expense of the Subcontractor only if the Prime
Contractor in its written or published request for sub-bids (1) specified that the
expense for such bond, or bonds, shall be borne by the Subcontractor and (2) clearly
specified the amount and requirements of such bond, or bonds.
(g)
Assignment: No Contractor shall permit any Subcontractor to be voluntarily assigned
or transferred or allow it to be performed by a Subcontractor other than the original
Subcontractor listed on the original bid without the consent of the Board.
(h)
Penalties: A Contractor violating any provisions of this Section shall be deemed in
violation of the Contract and the City may at its discretion do the following:
1. Cancel the Contract.
2. Assess the Contractor a penalty of not more than 10 percent of the Subcontract
involved.
NOTE: In any of the proceeding under this Subsection, the Contractor shall be entitled to a
public hearing and five (5) working days notice of the time and place thereof.
(i)
Submittal: Before commencing any work, the Contractor shall submit for approval to
the Engineer and Bureau of Contract Administration the name, address, telephone
number, contract amount of all Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors and a
description of each portion of the work to be subcontracted.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-38
(j)
Inactive License Holders or Unlicensed Contractors: Contractors utilizing inactive
license holders or unlicensed Contractors are in violation of the State Business and
Professions Code, Section 7117.5 and 7118 respectively. Violation of these sections
may result in the Board declaring the bid to be non-responsive. The City will report all
violations to the Registrar, Contractor's State License Board, 3132 Bradshaw Road,
Sacramento, California.
SECTION 55 - SUBSTITUTION OF SECURITIES
(a)
The Contractor has the option, at its expense, to substitute for any money being
withheld by the City Securities equivalent to the amount being withheld. Securities
eligible for such substitution are bank or savings and loans certificates of deposit or
such securities which are eligible for investment pursuant to Government Code
Section 16430. As to any such security or securities so substituted for monies
withheld, the Contractor shall be the beneficial owner of same and shall receive any
interest thereon.
(b)
Such security shall, at the request and expense of the Contractor, be deposited with
the City or with a State or Federally Chartered Bank as the escrow agent who shall
pay such monies to the Contractor upon notification by the City expiration of 35 days
from the date of acceptance of the Work by the Board, or as prescribed by law,
provided, however, that there will be a continued retention of the necessary securities
to cover such amounts as are required by law to be withheld by properly executed
and filed notices to stop payment, or as may be authorized by the Contract to be
further retained.
(c)
Any escrow agreement entered into pursuant to this provision shall contain as a
minimum, the following provisions:
1. The amount of securities to be deposited;
2. The terms and conditions of conversion to cash in case of the default of the
contractor; and
3. The termination of the escrow upon completion of the Contract and the other
requirements as herein above provided.
SECTION 56 - NOTIFICATION OF HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES
(a)
The Contractor's attention is called to the provisions of the California Administrative
code, Title 8, Industrial Relations, General Industry Safety Orders, particularly
Section 5194(e); and to the City of Los Angeles Hazard Communication Program,
particularly Part 4 and the appendices thereto.
(b)
The existing facilities may contain asbestos, PCB's, corrosive, carcinogens, or other
hazardous materials otherwise not referred to in the Contract Drawings and
Specifications. Should the Contractor or any of the Contractor's Subcontractors and
Sub-subcontractors while performing work on or to have reason to believe that any
hazardous material not indicated in the Contract Documents, is present, the
Contractor shall stop the Work and immediately notify the City Engineer. Removal
and disposal of the hazardous material or substances will be done by and at the
expense of the City or by "Change Order".
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-39
SECTION 57 - ADJUSTMENT OF CONTRACT TIME ONLY
(a)
For all "Change Orders" related to the removal and disposal of Hazardous Materials or
Substances for which a compensable time extension of the Contracted Work is justified,
but for which there is no change in the "Scope of Work" under this Contract, the amount
of the "Change Order" shall consist of the following direct elements:
1.
The Contractor shall quote a unit price for such work on an agreed upon unit
basis.
2.
The resulting direct costs incurred due to the time extension, to the extent
provided for under General Provisions Section 40 - SUSPENSION OF WORK.
3.
(b)
Daily Field Overhead Rate as quoted by the Contractor, multiplied by the number
of days the Contract time is extended, which costs shall constitute the full extent
of overhead cost owed to the Contractor.
There shall be no duplications of costs in the above, elements, no profit shall be
allowed. The derivation of an extended home office overhead rate of the Contractor and
its applications to Contract time extensions shall not be allowed under this Contract."
(c)
In the event that the Contractor is delayed in the ultimate completion of the entire
Contracted Work solely because of such conditions, the Contractor shall be entitled to
an extension of contracted time in and the waiving of liquidated damages during the
period of time occasioned by the delay.
(d)
For new construction work and for all Contractor-furnished supplied and equipment that
may contain hazardous materials, the Contractor shall develop and implement a
written hazard communication program for Contractors employees in accordance with
the State's Administrative Code and the City's Hazard Communication Program. The
City will cooperate by providing the Contractor, upon request, with copies of available
material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) covering hazardous materials identified by the
Contractor that are encountered in existing facilities during the course of the Work.
For hazardous materials for MSDS are not currently available at the City, the
Contractor shall develop and provide the appropriate MSDS.
(e)
The Contractor's basic written Hazards Communication Program shall be submitted to
the City Engineer for review and approval prior to start of hazardous materials removal
work at the job-site and shall be revised and kept current as required by the continuing
progress of the removal work. All provisions concerning MSDS for identified hazardous
materials shall be met before the hazardous material is delivered to the job-site.
(f)
The City Engineer shall be provided with seven (7) copies of the Contractor's written
Hazard Communications Program, Contractor provided MSDS and all revisions and
modifications thereto.
SECTION 58 - PROGRESS SCHEDULE AND REPORTS
The Contractor shall furnish a practical work schedule of expected progress of Contracted Work
within 15 days of the official start date indicating approximate sequence (start and finish dates),
of each work activity necessary to complete the Contracted Work. The schedule shall be in
the form of a "Bar Chart" graphically showing the order and interdependence and sequence of
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-40
all work activities. Upon approval of the "Bar Chart" by the City Engineer and the Inspector, the
Contractor shall maintain a copy thereof in the "Job Office" of the Inspector, recording work
progress at the end of each Calendar Week.
SECTION 59 - RESPONSIBILITY FOR SITE
Contractor shall be in full charge of and be responsible for the jobsite and Contracted Work,
subject to the directions of the Inspector or City Engineer and to the terms and conditions of
any separate Contracts which may be awarded to others. Contractor shall perform no other
operations of any nature except as specifically authorized in the Plans and Specifications or
as authorized by the Inspector or City Engineer.
- End of Section -
GENERAL CONDITIONS
PAGE-41
PART ONE - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK
A.
Work in this Contract: All labor, materials and equipment necessary for construction of
the Encino-Tarzana Branch Library Building as noted on the Contract Drawings Building
51/47, Work Order E1700418, these specifications and all other Contract Documents
including the GENERAL CONDITIONS and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS.
B.
Work not included in this Contract.
1.
1.2
CONTRACT DRAWINGS
A.
1.3
All work or equipment indicated on the Contract Drawings or in these
Specifications "Not in Contract" or "N.I.C." or anything which implies exclusion
from the Contract in any manner.
The Drawings indicated in the list shown on Sheet T1 of the contract drawings
constitute a part of the Contract Documents.
MODIFICATIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS
A.
Reference is made to Section 11 - SHOP DRAWINGS AND MANUFACTURER'S
DATA:
Section 11.J.: Delete the third sentence and substitute the following:
“The Contractor shall allow fifteen calendar days on the project construction
schedule for each item submitted for review by the City Engineer.”
Section 11 (l) : Add the following:
"6. When Shop Drawings are required due to substitutions for "or equal"
determination, after final check, five copies, revi ewed and signed by the
Consultant Architect shall be forwarded to the City Engineer for distribution.
Contractor will receive two copies of submittal."
B.
Reference is made to Section 15 - TIME FOR COMMENCING AND COMPLETING
WORK:
Section 15 (a) insert the following sentence at the end of the section:
“Completion of the Work constitutes Milestone 3 of the Contract. Additional
milestone dates covering items of construction are covered under Section
01311 - Progress Schedule and Reports, of the General Requirements.”
PAGE-1
C.
Reference is made to Section 16 – LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
Replace paragraph 16(a) with the following:
“(a)
Should the Contractor fail to complete the Milestones 1, 2, and 3 of
the work within the times agreed upon in the Contract, or within the
stipulated times for the completion, as extended, or within such extra time
as may be allowed for delays and extra work as herein provided, the City
will deduct and retain out of the moneys which may be due to the
Contractor, as liquidated damages, but not as a penalty, the sums as listed
below per day for each and every day that the time consumed in the
execution of the work exceeds the times stipulated for their completion, or
such stipulated time as the same may be increased as herein provided,
which said sum per day, in view of the difficulty of estimating such damage,
as hereby agreed upon, fixed and determined by the parties thereto as the
liquidated damages that the City will suffer by reason of such default and
not by way of penalty.
Milestones
Milestone 1
Milestone 2
Milestone 3
D.
Liquidation
Damages
$500.00
$500.00
$2,000.00
“
Reference is made to Section 37 – PAYMENTS. Replace the second sentence of
paragraph 37(a) with the following:
“Each Payment Request shall be calculated from the updated Cost Loaded Progress
Schedule indicating progress achieved to that date.”
E.
Reference is made to Section 38 - EXTRA WORK AND CHANGES:
Section 38.h. and 38.i.: Delete and substitute the following:
“(h)
In addition to the Contractor’s direct cost specified in Section 38 (g) 1, 2, and
4, above, the Contractor will be paid a lump sum for his overhead, profit,
including, field office salaries and field expense, supervision not applied solely
to the work of the Change Order, Insurances and Bond. Such lump sum shall
conform to the following schedule of percentages of the total amount of the
said direct expenditures.
Direct
Expenditures
Under $1,000
$1,001 to $20,000
$20,001 to $100,000
$100,001 to $500,000
$500,001 and greater
Percentage for
Lump Sum Addition
18%
14%
10%
8%
6%
In addition to the Subcontractor and Sub-subcontractor costs, including their
overhead and profit, as specified in Section 38(g)3 above, the Contractor will be
PAGE-2
paid a lump sum of 6% of the above costs for his overhead, profit, including
field office salaries and field expense, supervision not applied solely to the
work of the Change Order, Insurances and Bond.
“(i)
F.
Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors will be allowed the following
percentages for overhead and profit, respectively, on the amount of their direct
expenditures.
Direct Expenditures
on Change Orders
Percentage for
Lump Sum Addition
Under $1,001
$1,001 to $20,000
$20,001 to $100,000
$100,001 to $500,000
$500,001 and greater
6% for Overhead and Profit”
Reference is made to Section 54 - LISTING OF SUBCONTRACTOR:
Delete Section 54.C.1, and substitute the language given in the GENERAL
INSTRUCTIONS AND INFORMATION TO BIDDERS in the bid package
Proposal Part IV, Item #18.a.1.
G.
Reference is made to Section 57 - ADJUSTMENT OF CONTRACT TIME ONLY:
Delete Section 57(a), 57(b) and 57(c).
H.
Reference is made to Section 58 - PROGRESS SCHEDULE AND REPORTS
Delete this Section 58 in its entirety.
(END OF SECTION)
PAGE-3
SECTION 01010
SUMMARY OF THE WORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.7 SUMMARY
1.2
A.
The work to be done under this Contract includes the furnishing of Contractor
Administration, labor, materials, tools and equipment for the construction of ENCINOTARZANA BRANCH LIBRARY for the Library Department of the City of Los Angeles, all
in accordance with the Contract Documents, including the GENERAL CONDITIONS,
Supplementary Conditions and other Sections of DIVISION 1 GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS of the Project Manual.
B.
Related Work:
1.
Documents affecting work of this Contract include, but are not necessarily limited
to the GENERAL CONDITIONS, Supplementary Conditions and Sections in
DIVISION 1 of this Project Manual.
2.
The work of other Contracts is described in the various Contract Documents
prepared therefor, some of which are in the possession of the City and are
available for inspection by interested parties.
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
A.
General:
1.
The project Name is:
18231 Ventura Blvd.
Los Angeles, California 91356
FOR: CITY OF LOS ANGELES LIBRARY DEPARTMENT
2.
Contract Documents have been prepared by:
Steven Ehrlich
10865 Washington Blvd.
Culver City, California 90232
Phone 310-838-9700 FAX 310-838-9737
B.
The Work:
1.
The extent of Contracted Work is indicated on the contract Drawings and in the
Project Manual including the following:
a.
Division 1 - General Requirements
b.
Division 2 - Sitework
c.
Division 3 – Concrete
SUMMARY OF WORK
01010-1
C.
1.3
Division 4 - Masonry
e.
Division 5 - Metals
f.
Division 6 - Wood and Plastics
g.
Division 7 - Thermal and Moisture Protection
h.
Division 8 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames, etc.
i.
Division 9 - Finishes
j.
Division 10 - Specialties
k.
Division 11 - Equipment
l.
Division 12 - Furnishings
m.
Division 15 - Mechanical
n.
Division 16 - Electrical
Layout of Contracted Work:
1.
The City will furnish bench marks and property line stakes for the
commencement of the work, and the Contractor shall furnish all additional
surveying for the project, and shall protect the monuments from damage for the
duration of the project.
2.
Surveying shall be done by a licensed land surveyor. Grade sheets shall be
submitted to the City Engineer for review.
3.
The Contractor shall perform and be responsible for the accurate layout of all
portions of the work. He shall verify dimensions on the Drawings and report to
the City Engineer, any discrepancies before proceeding with related work.
CITY OCCUPATION OF THE PREMISES
A.
The Contractor shall limit his use of the premises to the work areas that will be dedicated
to his use as directed by the City Engineer so as to allow for City partial occupancy and
use.
1.
1.4
d.
Use of the Site: Confine operations at the site to the areas permitted under the
Contract. Portions of the site beyond areas on which work is to be performed are
not to be disturbed. Conform to site rules and regulations affecting the work
while engaged in project construction.
SUMMARY OF REFERENCES
A.
Contracted Work can be summarized by references to the Contract General Conditions,
Project Manual Technical Sections of the Project Manual, Contract Drawings, Addenda,
Notice to Bidders and Modifications to the Contract Documents.
B.
It is recognized that the Contracted Work is also unavoidably affected or influenced by
governing Codes and Regulations, natural phenomena, including weather conditions and
other forces outside the Contract Documents.
SUMMARY OF WORK
01010-2
1.5
SUPPLEMENTAL INFORMATION:
A.
1.6
Emergency Information: The name, addresses and telephone numbers of the
Contractor, Subcontractors or their representatives shall be filed with the City Engineer
prior start of Contracted Work.
PERMITS
A.
Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits, licenses and fees required by the City,
County of Los Angeles or State Laws except the building permit as defined in Section
91.0201 of the Municipal Code which will be furnished by the City Engineer or defined in
the Technical specifications "Sections."
B.
The Contractor Shall Obtain and pay for the following:
1.
Building Permit
2.
Sewer Assessment Fee
3.
Sewer Capping Permit
4.
Permits to Use Street Space and Deposit Building Materials
5.
Irrigation-Sprinkler System Permit
6.
Sewer and Storm Drain Connection Permit
7.
Street Work Permits
8.
Demolition Plan Check and Permit
9.
Plumbing Permit
10.
Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Permit
11.
Fire Sprinkler System Permit
12.
Electrical Permit
13.
Street Repair Permit.
14.
Fire Protection Permit for Fire Alarm System and Smoke.
15.
Shoring Permit.
16.
Sign Permit and Plan check
17.
On-site Storm Drainage Permit.
18.
Street use permits.
19.
Book Shelving Permit and Plan Check.
20.
Flag Pole Permit and plan check.
SUMMARY OF WORK
01010-3
21.
Witness test Permit for Security System
22.
Metal studs plan check and permit fees.
23.
Exterior metal panel plan check and permit fees.
24.
Grading Permit.
25.
Los Angeles County Flood Control District Permit
26.
Asbestos, Lead-Based Paint, PCB or Contaminated Soil Removal Notification
Permit
27.
California General Construction Activity Stormwater Permit and Wet Weather
Erosion Control Plan (WWECP) Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plant (SWPPP)
for stormwater pollution control measures for construction activities.
28.
Sewer and Storm Drain Connection Permit
The Contractor shall be familiar with all aspects of the project. For the project which
requires haul route hearing and haul route bonding as part of the Grading Permit
approval process, Contractor shall prepare and secure the Grading Permit as soon as the
construction contract is awarded in order to mitigate any possible delays due to the haul
route hearing, haul route map preparations, as required by the Los Angeles City
Department of Building and Safety, Grading Division.
1.7
C.
If applicable, after the award of the contract, the Contractor may be required to provide
Contractor information, such as Worker's Compensation Insurance to the City and/or
signature on the Building Permit Application in order for the City to complete the Building
Permit approval process with the Los Angeles City Department of Building and Safety.
D.
If the Contractor is delayed during the inspections by local authorized agencies or work
by utility companies, not the fault of the Contractor and a critical path is impacted,
Contractor shall be entitled to time extension and shall have no claim for any other
compensation for such delay.
UTILITY SERVICES CONNECTIONS
A.
Before submitting bid, the Contractor shall verify the locations of all utility services and
shall include sufficient funds for the material, labor and utility fees/charges for installation
of an approved utility service and/or removal of existing utility services, relocation of
existing utility services or relocation of existing utility poles.
B.
Before any work is performed on these facilities, verify all drawings, Project Manual and
requirements related to these facilities with the serving utility companies.
C.
Within five (5) days after the Notice-to-Proceed notify the serving utilities that the project
is under construction and to furnish them dates on which the services will be required.
Furnish the City Engineer duplicate copy of all service requests.
D.
Should any major changes to the work indicated be necessary to complete the utility
installation, notify the City Engineer in writing at once and cease all the work affected until
approval for required modifications has been obtained from the City Engineer.
E.
After all utility services are completed; all street pavements and bases shall be repaired.
Contractor shall include in the contract and pay for street damage restoration fee as
SUMMARY OF WORK
01010-4
indicated in Section 02510 - YARD WORK AND STREET WORK and attachment shown
herein.
F.
Contractor shall make all arrangements and pay for all fees and charges with the proper
authorities for the new utility service connections and dis-connections of existing service
including the following:
1.
Water Service Connections
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
1.8
Domestic Water Service
Fire Sprinkler Service, Including The Check Valve And Vault Installations
Construction Water
Power Service Connections
a.
Power Service
b.
Testings of Electrical Equipment and Control
c.
Power For Construction and Testing Equipment
Gas Services Connection
a.
Gas Service
b.
Gas-Fired Equipments
Telephone Service Connections
a.
Telephone System
b.
Construction Telephones
ADMINISTRATION OF CONSTRUCTION
A.
All work of this Contract will be administered by the City Engineer.
-- End of Section --
SUMMARY OF WORK
01010-5
SECTION 01015
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
This Section applies to all situations in which the Contractor or his representatives
including, but not necessarily limited to, suppliers, subcontractors, employees, and
field engineers, who enter upon the City's property.
B.
Contractor shall commence the contract work and provide security and protection to
existing facility and job site within 15 days from the issuance of Notice-To-Proceed.
C.
Related Work:
1.
Documents affecting work of this Contract include, but are not necessarily
limited to the GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS,
and Sections in DIVISION 1 of these Specifications.
2.
Temporary Facilities and Controls in Section 01500.
3.
Summary of Work in Section 01010.
4.
Temporary Facilities and Controls in Section 01500.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Refer to Section 01340 - SUBMITTALS in Division 1.
B.
Maintain an accurate record of the names and identification of all persons entering
upon the City's property in connection with the Work of this Contract, including times
of entering and times of leaving, and submit a copy of the record to the City daily.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Promptly upon award of the Contract, notify all pertinent personnel regarding
requirements of this Section.
B.
Require that all personnel who will enter upon the City's property certify their
awareness of and familiarity with the requirements of this Section.
SITE INVESTIGATION
A.
Contractor shall investigate the job-site to ascertain all conditions affecting necessary
procedures and sequencing of the work operations in the execution of the Contracted
Work.
1.
Utilities in Abandoned Streets, Easements, and/or Alleys: Contractor is
responsible for verifying and satisfying himself as to conditions under which
work on such utilities will be done, such as what lines will be left in place,
removed or rerouted. Should existing inactive utility lines (not shown or noted
01015-1
on the Drawings) be encountered, they shall be completely removed during
excavating operations or left-in-place and properly capped if not in way of new
construction or if sufficiently below finish grade; as directed by the City
Engineer. Contractor shall bear all costs involved in removing, rerouting or
capping of such lines. Contact the interested utility agencies as necessary
to determine the work operations involved.
1.5
1.6
1.7
2.
Contractor shall report to the City Engineer any adverse condition(s) which
would affect the proper execution of the Contracted Work and shall not
proceed until instructed by the City Engineer.
3.
Start of Contracted Work at the job-site shall imply Contractor's acceptance
of job conditions.
B.
Work Determination: Contractor shall satisfy himself regarding job conditions, the
nature and types of work to be performed and shall be responsible for the
determination of all classes of work to be accomplished at the job-site or at the
manufacturer's plant.
C.
Allotted Working Space: Contractor shall limit work operations to the "working site" or
"job-site" and areas immediately adjacent thereto as specified or authorized by the
City Engineer.
ACCESS TO THE JOB-SITE
A.
As instructed by the City Engineer, Contractor shall restrict Contractor's employees to
the immediate work areas on the job-site and in no way go beyond the work limits
noted on the Contract Drawings or as otherwise directed by the City Engineer.
B.
Contractor shall in no way block such entrance(s) to the job-site.
C.
Use of such accesses to the job-site will only be for the purpose of parking, delivery
and/or removal of materials equipment, tools, vehicles and removal of rubbish and
debris, and shall be kept free of obstructions and in a safe condition at all times during
extent of Contracted Work.
PARKING:
A.
No parking of Contractor's vehicles will be allowed on the job-site except for the
purposes of unloading and/or loading as directed by the City Engineer.
B.
Contractor's employees are advised to park on adjacent City streets and shall observe
City Parking Codes on such streets.
C.
Contractor shall obtain and pay for a "Street Use Permit" in order to park his vehicles,
equipment and Contractor's Field Office. Such "Street Use" shall be fenced off from
street traffic in accordance to W.A.T.C.H. (Work Area Traffic Control Handbook), latest
edition. Upon completion of Contracted Work such street area shall be left in a clean
and safe condition ready for use by the public.
SECURITY
A.
Restrict the access of all persons entering upon the City's property in connection with
the work to the Access Route and to the actual site of the work.
01015-2
1.8
B.
All employees of the Contractor who will be engaged in the construction of this project
will be screened by the City for proper identification and good behavior. Candidates of
good standing will be issued a temporary pass. Contractor shall furnish the City, a list
of employees for approval prior to start of this project.
C.
Contractor shall furnish and maintain approved type site security protection between
the work areas and other areas, as directed by the City Engineer or other authorities
having jurisdiction. All such site security protections shall remain for the duration of
this Contract or as otherwise directed by the City Engineer.
PROTECTIONS
A.
1.9
1.10
REPAIR OF DAMAGES
A.
Methods: Repair or replace damaged work with new materials as necessary to
restore the damaged areas or surfaces to a condition equal to and matching such
conditions existing prior to damage or start of work of this Contract, to the full
satisfaction of the City Engineer, at no cost to the City.
B.
Matching or Existing Work:
1.
Finish of all existing wood, plaster, masonry and/or concrete work [indicated
on the Drawings] to be altered, repaired or patched to match and be flush with
adjoining surfaces, subject to the approval of the City Engineer.
2.
Finish of all new masonry and/or concrete work (to adjoin remaining work) to
match and be flush with adjoining surfaces, unless otherwise noted on the
Drawings, subject to the approval of the City Engineer.
INTERRUPTION OF SERVICES
A.
1.11
Required: Where necessary for the safety of the public and the protection of the
adjacent street improvements and adjacent properties. Provide and maintain adequate
protections, fences and gates and barricades to separate work areas from areas
outside the job-site limits as directed by the Inspector or other authorities having
jurisdiction. Such protections shall comply with provisions of Section 25 of GENERAL
CONDITIONS and shall remain in place during extent of this Contract or as otherwise
directed by the Inspector. Contractor shall provide and maintain pedestrian and
vehicular access in accordance with Work Area Traffic Control Handbook
(W.A.T.C.H.), latest edition.
Contractor shall make all provisions to accomplish Contracted Work without undue
interference with the daily operations of the existing facilities in the vicinity of the jobsite.
NON-INTERFERENCE WITH OTHERS
A.
Contractor shall confine Contracted Work operations to the immediate boundaries of
the job-site and shall execute work operations in a manner to minimize interference
with City operations and/or work operations of other Contractor working on the
premises; as directed by the City Engineer.
01015-3
1.12
B.
Contractor shall provide and maintain adjacent pedestrian and vehicular accesses in
accordance with Work Area Traffic Control Handbook (W.A.T.C.H.), latest edition.
C.
Contractor shall obtain approval of City Engineer and local authorities having
jurisdiction such as Department of Transportation, Police Department, etc. prior to any
street or alley closure.
UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERT
A.
1.13
JOB SAFETY
A.
1.14
Contractor shall observe all safety rules and regulations of the most current Los
Angeles City Building codes and CAL/OSHA as applicable to the safety of the
Contractor, Contractor's personnel and City employees during Contracted Work
operations especially during asbestos removal operations.
JOB CONDITIONS
A.
1.15
Before commencing any excavation, the Contractor shall obtain an underground
service alert inquiry I.D. Number by calling 1 (800) 422-4133. Two working days shall
be allowed after the I.D. Number is obtained and before the excavation work is started
so that utility owners can be notified. The I.D. Number must be reported to the Bureau
of Contract Administration when calling for inspection: Metro, (213) 580-5080; Valley,
(818) 756-8335. I. D. Numbers will not be given more than ten (10) days prior to
starting excavation work.
Graffiti Control: During the Contracted Work period up to the final acceptance of the
Project by the City, the Contractor shall maintain the job-site perimeter construction
wood fencing and temporary construction sheds free of graffiti. All graffiti and handbills
(posters, etc.) shall be promptly removed within 24-hours after discovery at no added
cost to the City. Conform to applicable provisions of the GENERAL CONDITIONS.
HAZARDOUS WORK CONDITIONS
1.
Contractor shall provide adequate fire extinguishers on the premises during
the Contract period. Type and sizes as recommended by the National Board
of Fire Underwriters as necessary to control a particular kind of fire and
instruct his employees as to the use of such fire extinguishers.
2.
Place all such fire extinguishers ready for use in the immediate area where
the hazardous work operations will occur.
3.
Contractor shall take special precautions in the use of acetylene torches,
welding equipment, tar pots and kettles when working in a hazardous area.
01015-4
SECTION 01021
CASH ALLOWANCES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.2
Required: To provide adequate budget and bonding to cover items not precisely
determined by the City prior to bidding, allow within the proposed Contract sum the
amounts described in the Section.
Related Work:
1.
Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited
to the GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and
Sections in DIVISION 1 of these Specifications.
2.
Other provisions concerning Cash Allowances also may be stated in other
Sections of these Specifications.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Whenever the Specifications provide a lump sum amount, as a cash allowance for
specific work, in lieu of detailed Plans and Specifications, the Contractor shall include that
amount for the designated work in his bid. The specified lump sum amount shall be
deemed to represent the cost of the designated work, not including any allowance for
Contractor's overhead or profit.
B.
When, during the progress of the project, the City Engineer furnishes detailed Plans and
Specifications for the designated work, any difference in cost to the Contractor from the
specified lump sum shall be added to or deducted from the Contract amount as provided
herein for "Extra Work and Changes."
CASH ALLOWANCES
01021-1
SECTION 01022
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SUSTAINABLE CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
The goal is that the Project shall be designed, constructed and equipped with energy
efficient and sustainable design measures, materials and devices that are feasible,
proven and cost effective.
B.
It shall be required that the Contractor shall recycle demolition and construction waste to
the satisfaction of the City of Los Angeles, Department of Planning and the Bureau of
Sanitation.
C.
The mandated requirements of the Sustainable Performance Guidelines shall be
incorporated and shall attain at least LEED certified level based on the LEED rating
system.
1.
In order to comply with the guidelines and mitigation requirements, it shall be
required to recycle demolition and construction waste to the satisfaction of the
City of Los Angeles Department of Planning and Bureau of Sanitation. The
construction waste recycling plan shall be developed prior to the construction of
this project.
2.
Sustainable building materials have environmental and health merits which
traditional materials do not have and these merits are often not considered. The
production and use of sustainable materials means less energy consumption,
less natural resource depletion, air pollution, and less toxicity for both the earth
and it's occupants.
3.
For this project, the selection of sustainable building materials shall include
criteria such as recycled content, indoor air quality, renewable resource content ,
transportation efficiency, product packaging, durability, and maintenance.
Materials with a high content of post -consumer and/or post-industrial waste shall
be utilized.
4.
In compliance with the Mitigation Requirements, the following shall be used.
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
Recycled content insulation
Non-VOC paints
Recycled content gypsum board
Reduced formaldehyde particleboard or sustainable wood cabinets.
In addition, the following is a list of materials with recycled content that can
potentially be used in this project:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Rubberized asphalt concrete
Wheel stops and speed bumps
Outdoor furnishing and trash receptacles.
Plastic tree stakes
Concrete slab waterproofing
Concrete reinforcement
Structural Steel
GENERAL REQIREMENTS FOR SUSTAINABLE
CONSTRUCTION
01022-1
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
D.
E.
Building thermal batt insulation
Hollow metal doors and frames
Exterior glass and glazing
Paint
Metal support systems (e.g. studs and furring channels)
Gypsum board
Ceramic tile
Acoustical ceilings
Resilient flooring
Carpeting
Toilet compartments and screens
Signage
The project shall optimize the building envelope, glazing orientations and shading.
1.
In compliance with the Mitigation Measures, energy use shall be reduced through
architectural design by 10% relative to Title 24 standards.
2.
T8 lamps and electronic ballasts shall be used in all non-dimming fluorescent
fixtures.
3.
HID lighting will be considered in high bay areas where access to fixtures is
difficult.
4.
Hard-wired compact fluorescent fixtures shall be used where feasible.
5.
Dimmable electronic ballasts shall be used as applicable.
6.
An isolated ground wiring system shall be incorporated into the electrical design
for all computer related power outlets.
7.
Provide an efficient parking lot lighting system with photoelectric on/off controls.
8.
Conditions of Approval and Mitigation Program require lighting to exceed the
1993 Title 24 Standards by 15%.
9.
The library's lighting design shall comply with the 1999 Title 24 standards for
lighting, which is more restrictive than conditions of approval mandate.
HVAC and Plumbing
1.
Local climate and weather data shall be used to perform the building cooling load
calculations.
2.
The design shall exceed 1999 Title 24 calculations by 15 percent.
3.
Space Conditioning:
a.
Use premium efficiency motors for supply and return fans, and for the
water pumps.
b.
Air filtration shall be accomplished with 95% minimum efficiency pre-filter
and a non-dusting bonded carbon final filter.
CONSTRUCTION
01022-2
4.
c.
The HVAC unit shall be equipped with an economizer.
d.
Fans shall be mounted on spring vibration isolators in order to minimize
noise transmission.
e.
Cooling and condenser coils shall be of copper tube/copper fin
construction in order to extend life of the air conditioning unit.
f.
The HVAC units shall be of variable air volume (VAV) type in order to
reduce the energy consumption.
g.
Supply air delivery to the individual zones shall be based on the cooling
demand and controlled from the zone room thermostat.
h.
Toilet room intended for public use shall be provided with mechanical
exhaust scheduled for continuous operation during the occupied hours in
order to eliminate odor problems. Exhaust fans serving private toilets
shall be interlocked with the toilet room light switch.
i.
The Meeting Room shall be air conditioned with a single zone rooftop
packaged air conditioning unit which shall operate only at the time when
the room is in use.
j.
Due to the outdoor air pollution, the indoor air filtration shall be
accomplished with 95% minimum efficiency pre-filter and a non-dusting
bonded carbon final filter in order to maintain good indoor air quality.
k.
The economizer shall be of a differential enthalpy type to better utilize
the lower heat content airstream to meet cooling loads.
l.
Gas-fired high efficiency and low NOX gas emission hot water boiler will
provide space heating for the library.
Indoor Air Quality:
a.
The minimum required volume of outside air shall be based on the CO2
sensor measurements provided through the energy management system
utilizing velocity sensors placed at each VAV box inlet.
b.
Condensate drain pan shall be of sloped design in order to remove the
microbial growth in the pan.
c.
The outside air intakes shall be equipped with the outside airflow
measuring stations.
5.
Building Energy Management and Control Systems (EMCS): The building
controls shall be of direct digital type and shall perform energy management for
building HVAC and lighting systems. The EMCS system shall be accessible for
monitoring and controlling the system via Internet.
6.
Water Conservation: Plumbing fixtures shall be of a water conservation type in
compliance with California Energy Commission Title 24 regulations. The
following shall be provided:
CONSTRUCTION
01022-3
F.
a.
Toilets shall be of reduced water consumption type and shall utilize 1.6
gallons per flush, or less.
b.
Urinals shall be of a reduced water consumption type and shall utilize 1.0
gallon per flush or less.
c.
Faucets will be of reduced water consumption type and shall utilize 1.0
gallon per minute, or less.
Water Conservation:
1.
Reclaimed water shall be used for landscape irrigation.
2.
Low volume heads shall be used wherever practicable to reduce runoff,
evaporation, and water waste.
3.
Automatic controls for irrigation system with a rain sensor device shall be
installed to prevent water flow in the system after rainfall has provided natural
irrigation.
4.
Where practicable, the design shall provide slopes to transport maintenance
water to planting areas. Where impracticable as on relatively flat or minor slopes
other transportation techniques will be explored.
5.
An automatic flow meter shall shut off irrigation system in the event of a mainline
breakage.
6.
Given the level grade at this site, it will be difficult to slow or retain storm water
run-off for irrigation purposes with landscape swales or retention areas. This
challenge will be reviewed.
7.
The trash enclosure can be roofed and a floor drain can be provided which ties
into the sanitary sewer. This will convey washdown water into the sewer system.
8.
Permeable pavement shall be selected for certain areas. This will allow moisture
to percolate into the subgrade.
G.
Use "processed miscellaneous base" (recycled material) under paving.
H.
Landscaping shall comply with the Project's Mitigation Measure requiring 50% minimum
native or drought tolerant plants. Landscaping shall provide the following:
1.
Wherever practicable, trees shall be planted along pathways and against
buildings.
2.
Deciduous trees or vines shall be planted against west-facing portions of the
building and windows.
3.
Landscaping waste shall be minimized:
a.
Plants that provide minimal maintenance and waste shall be selected.
b.
Planting beds shall be mulched.
CONSTRUCTION
01022-4
c.
I.
Recycling of vegetative waste during maintenance period shall be
performed.
The project shall comply with all federal, state and local regulations, including the City of
Los Angeles Recycling Ordinances. Dual-bin systems for recycleables and trash shall be
installed.
J.
The site shall promote the use of electric vehicles by providing access to one electric
vehicle charging station in the parking lot.
K.
A bicycle storage system shall be provided at entry court.
CONSTRUCTION
01022-5
SECTION 01045
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.2
This section establishes general requirements pertaining to cutting (including
excavating), fitting, and patching of the Contracted Work required to:
1.
Make the several parts fit properly;
2.
Uncover work to provide for installing, inspecting, or both, of ill-timed work;
3.
Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of the Contract
Documents; and
4.
Remove and replace defective work.
Related Work:
1.
Documents affecting work of this Contract includes but are not necessarily
2.
In addition to other requirements specified, upon the City Engineer's request
uncover work to provide for inspection by the Consultant or City Engineer of
covered work and remove samples of installed materials for testing.
3.
Do not cut or alter work performed under separate Contracts without the City
Engineer's written permission.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Request For City Engineer's Consent
1.
Prior to cutting which effects structural safety, submit written request to the
City Engineer for permission to proceed with cutting.
2.
Should conditions of the work or schedule indicate a required change of
materials or methods for cutting and patching notify the City Engineer and
obtain written permission prior to proceeding.
3.
Submit method(s) of cutting and patching, and protection plan for each
condition to the City Engineer for approval. Submit structural calculation
prepared by a California State licensed engineer, as directed by the City
Engineer.
4.
Submit all shop drawings or submittals as required by other Sections of the
Project Manual. Submit [floor and wall covering samples], [paint color
samples] for the repaired area to the City Engineer for approval.]
01045-1
B.
1.3
Notices to the City Engineer:
1.
Prior to cutting and patching perform pursuant to the City Engineer's
instructions; submit repair method and procedure to the City Engineer.
2.
Submit written notice to the City Engineer designating the time the work will
be uncovered, to provide for the City Engineer's observation.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified
requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this
Section.
B.
The safety provisions of applicable laws, building and construction codes shall be
observed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Use materials that are identical to existing materials. If identical materials
are not available, or existing materials do not meet codes or cannot be used where
exposed surfaces are involved, use materials that match existing adjacent surfaces to
the fullest extent possible with regard to visual effect. Use materials whose installed
performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials. Submit method of repair
including lapping, splicing and joining of new and existing materials.
B.
For replacement of items removed, use materials complying with pertinent Sections
this Project Manual.
C.
All cut concrete shall be provided with steel dowels filled with non-shrink grout prior to
patching or placement of new concrete.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
SURFACE CONDITIONS
A.
Inspection:
1.
Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to movement or
damage during cutting, excavating, patching, and backfilling.
2.
After uncovering the work, inspect conditions affecting installation of new
work.
3.
Obtain required shear tests for existing concrete materials.
4.
Obtain required weldability test on existing steel.
5.
Unless specified otherwise, inspect and determine location of existing rebars
in masonry and/or concrete walls or flooring prior to cutting.
01045-2
B.
3.2
1.
If uncovered conditions are not as anticipated, immediately notify the City
Engineer and secure needed directions.
2.
Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
PREPARATION PRIOR TO CUTTING
A.
3.3
Discrepancies:
Provide required protection including, but not necessarily limited to, shoring, bracing,
and support to maintain structural integrity of the work.
PERFORMANCE
A.
B.
Perform required excavating and backfilling as required under pertinent other
Sections of these Specifications.
1.
Perform cutting and demolition by methods, which will prevent
damage to other portions of the Contracted Work and provide proper
surfaces to receive installation of repair and new work.
2.
Perform fitting and adjusting of products to provide finished
installation complying with the specified tolerances and finishes.
Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage
elements to be retained or adjoining construction. Where possible, review
proposed procedures with the original installer. If Contractor does not concur
with the original installer’s recommendations, Contractor shall notify the City
Engineer requesting instructions.
1.
In general, where cutting is required, use hand or small power tools
designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping.
Impact tools are not to be used in the building. Cut holes and slots
neatly to size required with minimum disturbance of adjacent
surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
2.
To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the
exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces, or spaces.
3.
Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine such as
a carborundum saw or diamond core drill. Use methods or locations
that could avoid cutting the rebars. All cut rebars, approved by the
City Engineer, shall be rounded off any sharp edges and dabbed with
a coat of protective coating against rusting.
4.
Comply with requirements of applicable Sections of DIVISION 2
where cutting and patching requires excavating and backfilling.
5.
By-pass utility services such as pipe or conduit, before cutting,
where services are shown or required to be removed, relocated or
abandoned. Cut-off pipe or conduit in walls, partitions or floor slabs
to be removed. Cap, valve or plug and seal the remaining portion of
pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter
after bypassing and cutting. No existing service shall be interrupted,
01045-3
in accordance with Section 01015 - CONTRACTOR’S USE OF THE
PREMISES.
6.
7.
8.
C.
3.4
Unless specified otherwise, all cut ceiling framing members shall be
repaired or replaced with new framing members to the satisfaction of
the City Engineer. Re-install all ceiling, mechanical grills, and
lighting fixtures affected by the cutting and repairs.
Unless specified otherwise, all existing masonry walls shall be
removed to the nearest grout joint. All removed masonry units shall
be protected, salvaged and reused.
Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with
specified tolerances.
1.
Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate
integrity of the installation.
2.
Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will
eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.
3.
All existing masonry wall shall be repointed and regrouted to the
nearest wythe joint to match existing.
4.
Restore all building insulation and fireproofing to match existing
thickness and conditions.
5.
Restore complete [caulking], [sealer], [waterproofing] etc. to achieve
maximum performance as required at no additional cost to the City.
CLEANING
A.
3.5
Unless specified otherwise, all cut floor or roof wooden ledgers and
blockings shall be repaired, spliced and installed with approved steel
connectors. If necessary, install new double wooden ledgers or
blocking without additional cost to the City.
Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching is performed or used
as access. Remove completely paint, mortar, oils, putty and items of similar nature.
Thoroughly clean piping, conduit and similar features before painting or other finishing
is applied. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
TESTING
B.
Demonstrate by appropriate water testing that repaired [roofing], [caulking], [sealer],
[waterproofing], [ceramic tiles], etc. are completely water tight and weather tight.
C.
Arrange with local authorized agencies and test all existing utility services,
mechanical and plumbing systems, fire and life systems affected by the cutting and
patching.
-- End of Section -LIBRARY BOND PROGRAM
01045-4
SECTION 01060
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY OF WORK
A.
B.
Building Codes and Regulations:
1.
The Contractor shall perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the
Los Angeles City Building Code and all other regulations, laws, and ordinances,
even though such requirements are not specifically mentioned in the
Specifications or shown on the Drawings.
2.
When the work required by the Drawings and Specifications is in conflict with any
such law or ordinance, the Contractor shall notify the City Engineer. The conflict
will be reviewed by the City Engineer and the Contractor shall not proceed with
the work until the City Engineer has so ordered.
3.
This section specifies procedural and administrative requirements for compliance
with governing regulations, codes, and standards imposed upon the Work.
These requirements include obtaining permits, licenses, inspections, releases,
and similar documentation, as well as payments, statements, and similar
requirements associated with the regulations, codes, and standards.
Related Documents:
1.
1.2
Contract Documents: Work of this Section shall comply with all the Contract
Documents, including General Conditions and other Sections, DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
CODES AND REGULATIONS
A.
The design and construction of this project have been depicted on the Contract
Documents to be in compliance with all applicable codes, which govern the various work,
materials, devices, equipment, systems, and procedures in effect at the time the project
is issued to bid by the Board of Public Works.
B.
When a particular edition of the codes and regulations is indicated the edition so
designated shall apply. When a particular edition is not indicated, the edition that is
current at the time of advertising for bids shall apply. The applicable codes and
regulations include, but are not limited to the following:
1.
Uniform Building Code with the City of Los Angeles, Amendments.
2.
Los Angeles City "Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction."
3.
CCR Title 24.
4.
CAL/OSHA (Occupational and Safety Code).
5.
California State Architectural Barrier's Law (CAL/ABL).
01060-1
C.
6.
California State Fire Marshall requirements.
7.
State Energy Standards Title 24.
8.
Los Angeles City Electric, Plumbing and Mechanical Codes.
9.
Los Angeles County Health Department.
10.
South Coast Air Quality Management District.
11.
The Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
12.
California Building Code (CBC).
13.
California State Fire Marshall requirements.
14.
California Electrical, Plumbing and Mechanical Codes.
15.
Los Angeles City Fire Code.
16.
Los Angeles City Municipal Code, latest edition.
17.
Uniform Building Code (UBC).
18.
All other Codes and Regulations that are noted in the Technical Specification
Sections.
The procedure followed by the City Engineer has been to contact governing authorities
where necessary to obtain information needed for the purpose of preparing Contract
Documents, recognizing that such information may or may not be of significance in
relation to the Contractor's responsibilities for performing the Work. Direct contact, by the
Contractor, with such governing authorities can be made for necessary information and
decisions that have a bearing on the performance of the Work, if necessary.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
PART 3 EXECUTION
A.
For hazardous substance removal work, Contractor shall contact the City Engineer to
obtain the proper owner information to be used in manifest or notification prior to the start
of any abatement work.
B.
All information used by the Contractor including the City's and City authorized
representative's names, addresses and telephone numbers shall be consistent with the
information shown on the building permit and plan-check applications obtained by the
City.
01060-2
SECTION 01150
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
This Section Includes: Procedures for ensuring optimal diversion of solid resources
generated by the Work within the limits of the Construction Schedule, Contract Sum,
and available materials, equipment, and products.
1.
Contractor shall participate in promoting efforts of City to create a resourceefficient and environmentally-sensitive structure and to effect optimum control
of solid waste and recoverable resources generated in the Work.
2.
Pursuant to the City's Recycled Product Procurement Ordinance and
Amendments (CF 93-2092) and Clinton Executive Order (Federal Acquisition,
Recycling, and Waste Prevention), Contractor shall use products with postconsumer recycled content to the greatest extent feasible.
Refer to the most recent issue of "A Resource Guide to Recycled-Content
Construction Products," published by the City?s Solid Resources Citywide
Recycling Division of the Bureau of Sanitation (call 213 847-1444 to obtain a
copy).
B.
1.2
Related Sections: Documents affecting work of this Section includes but are not
necessarily limited to the following Contract Specifications:
1.
Cleaning in Section 01710.
2.
Demolition in Section 02050.
3.
Asbestos and Lead-Base Paint Removal in Sections 02051 and 02052.
4.
Earthwork in Section 02220.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Class III Landfill: A landfill that accepts non-hazardous resources such as
household, commercial, and industrial waste, resulting from construction, remodeling,
repair, and demolition operations. A Class III landfill must have a solid waste facilities
permit from the California Integrated Waste Management Board (CIWMB) and is
regulated by the Local Enforcement Agency (LEA).
B.
Construction and Demolition Waste: Includes all non-hazardous solid resources
resulting from construction, remodeling, alterations, repair, and demolition operations.
C.
Disposal: Acceptance of solid wastes at a legally operating facility for the purpose of
landfilling. Includes Class III landfills and inert fills.
01150-1
D.
Inert Backfill Site: A location, other than inert fill or other disposal facility, to which
inert materials are taken for the purpose of filling an excavation, shoring, or others
soils engineering operation.
E.
Inert Fill A facility that legally accept inert waste such as asphalt and concrete
exclusively for the purpose of disposal.
F.
Inert Solids/Inert Waste: Non-liquid solid resources including, but not limited to, soil
and concrete, that does not contain hazardous waste or soluble pollutants at
concentrations in excess of water-quality objectives established by a regional Water
Board pursuant to Division 7 (Section 13000 et seq.) of the California Water Code and
does not contain significant quantities of decomposable solid resources.
G.
Mixed Debris: Loads that include commingled recyclable and non-recyclable
materials generated at the construction site.
H.
Mixed Debris Recycling Facility: A solid resources processing facility that accepts
loads of commingled construction and demolition debris for the purpose of recovering
re-usable and recyclable materials and disposing the non-recyclable residual
materials.
I.
Permitted Waste Hauler: A company that possesses a valid and current permit from
the Los Angeles County Department of Public Health, to collect and transport solid
wastes from individuals or businesses for the purpose of recycling or disposal in the
Los Angeles County.
J.
Recycling: The process of sorting, cleansing, treating and reconstituting materials for
the purpose of using the altered form in the manufacture of a new product. Recycling
does not include burning, incinerating or thermally destroying solid waste.
1.
On-site Recycling: Materials that are sorted and processed for use in an
altered form in the Work, (e.g. concrete is crushed for use as base for a
parking lot on the site).
2.
Off-site Recycling: Materials hauled to a location and used in an altered form
in the manufacture of a new product.
K.
Recycling Facility: An operation that can legally accept materials for the purpose of
processing the materials into an altered form for the manufacture of a new product.
Depending on the types of materials accepted and operating procedures, a recycling
facility may or may not be required to have a Solid Waste Facilities permit from the
CIWMB or be regulated by the LEA.
L.
Re-use: Materials that are recovered for use in the same form. This includes materials
are used on-site or off-site. Refers also to Salvage, in which materials recovered for reuse and sold or donated to a third party.
M.
Source-Separated Materials: Materials that are sorted at the site of generation by
individual material type for the purpose of recycling, i.e., loads of concrete that are
source-separated for delivery to a base course recycling facility.
01150-2
1.3
N.
Solid Waste: Materials that have been designated as non-recyclable and are
discarded for the purposes of disposal.
O.
Transfer Station: A facility that can legally accept solid wastes for the purpose of
temporarily storing the materials for re-loading onto other trucks and transporting them
to a landfill for disposal, or recovering some materials for re-use or recycling. Transfer
stations must be permitted by the CIWMB and regulated by the LEA.
SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
1.4
Required Notification: Notify City's representative for acceptance of an alternate
product when Contractor is aware of materials, equipment or products that meet the
aesthetic and programmatic intent of Contract Documents, but which are more
environmentally-sensitive than materials, equipment or products specified or indicated
in the Contract Documents.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Solid Resources Management Plan:
1.
Prior to the Bid, Contractor shall conduct a site assessment and estimate the
types and quantities of materials under the Work that are anticipated to be
feasible for on-site processing, source separation for recycling, or re-use, and
shall note the procedures intended for a recycling, re-use, or salvage program.
Refer to the most recent issue of “Construction and Demolition Waste
Recycling Guide”, and the “Wood You Recycle?” guide, published by the
City’s Integrated Solid Waste Management Office, for a partial list of facilities
that accept these materials for recycling.
2.
After award of Contract and prior to the commencement of the Work,
Contractor shall schedule and attend a meeting with a representative of the
City's Solid Resources Citywide Recycling Division at (213) 847-1444, to
discuss the Contractor's proposed Solid Resources Management Plan, and to
develop a mutual understanding regarding the recycling, re-use, and recycledcontent procurement programs. Not more than 20 working days after the
meeting, Contractor shall prepare and submit to ISWMO, a written Solid
Resources Management Plan including, but not limited to the following
(submit in format provided herein as Attachment A):
3.
a.
Contractor and Project identification information.
b.
Procedures to be used.
c.
Materials to be re-used and recycled.
d.
Estimated quantity of materials.
e.
Names and location of re-used and recycling facilities/sites.
Contractor shall conduct a site assessment and estimate the types and
quantities of materials under the Work that are anticipated to be feasible for
01150-3
on-site processing, source separation for recycling, or re-use, and shall note
the procedures intended for a recycling, re-use, or salvage program. Refer to
the most recent issue of Construction and Demolition Waste Recycling
Guide, and the Wood You Recycle? guide, published by the City's Integrated
Solid Waste Management Office, for a partial list of facilities that accept
these materials for recycling.
4.
If applicable, revise and resubmit Solid Resources Management Plan in
coordination with the representative of the City's Integrated Solid Waste
Management Office.
a.
B.
C.
Review of the Contractor's Solid Resources Management Plan will
not otherwise relieve the Contractor of responsibility for adequate and
continuing control of pollutants and other environmental protection
measures.
Required Submittal of Summary of Diversion and Disposal with Each Application for
Progress Payment: A summary of recyclables and solid resources generated by the
construction and demolition operations. Submit on form provided herein (Attachment
B). Failure to submit the form and its supporting documentation may render the
application for progress payment incomplete and delay progress payments. Include
manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices specifically identifying the Project and
materials sent to:
1.
Source Separated Recycling Facilities
2.
Mixed Debris Recycling Facilities
3.
Class III Landfills
4.
Inert Materials accepted at Class III Landfills as daily cover
5.
Inert Fills
6.
Inert Backfill Sites other than Inert Fills
With each submittal of Contractor's application for process payment, the Contractor is
required to submit to the Inspector the attached, "Summary of Solid Waste Diversion
and Disposal, " quantifying all materials generated in the Work, disposed in Class III
Landfills, or diverted from disposal through recycling. Indicate zero (0) if there is no
quantity to report for a type of material. As indicated on the form:
a.
Report disposal or recycling either in tons or in cubic yards: if scales
are available at disposal or recycling facility, report in tons;
otherwise, report in cubic yards.
b.
Indicate locations to which materials are delivered for disposal,
recycling, accepted as daily cover, or taken for inert backfill.
c.
The Summary Form must be accompanied by legible copies of weigh
tickets, receipts, or invoices that specifically identify the project
generating the material. Said documents must be from recyclers
01150-4
and/or disposal site operators that can legally accept the materials
for the purpose of re-use, recycling, or disposal.
d.
1.5
Indicate the Project title, City Work Order Number; progress
payment number; name of the company completing the Summary
Form and compiling backup documentation; the printed name,
signature, and daytime phone number of the person completing the
form, the beginning and ending dates of the period covered on the
Summary Form; and the date that the Summary Form is completed.
RECYCLING, RE-USE, AND SALVAGE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Recycling, Re-Use, and Salvage Facilities: The most recent issue of the "Construction
and Demolition Waste Recycling Guide," and the "Wood You Recycle?" guide,
published by the City's Integrated Solid Waste Management Office, are incorporated
herein by reference. For more information, contact the City's Solid Resources Citywide
Recycling Division, 433 South Spring Street, Suite, Los Angeles, CA 90013, (213)
847-1444; FAX (213) 473-8232. These guides are updated regularly.
B.
Development and Implementation of Recycling Procedures: Based upon Contract
Documents, the Contractor's Solid Resources Management Plan, estimated quantities
of available materials, and availability of recycling facilities, Contractor shall develop
and implement procedures to re-use, salvage, and recycled materials to the greatest
extent feasible. Procedures shall include source separated recycling, as well as mixed
recycling efforts. Procedures shall include consideration of on-site recycling.
1.
On-site or Off-site Recycling Source-Separated Materials: Contractor shall
develop and implement a program to include source separation of solid
resources, to the greatest extent feasible, of the following types:
a.
Asphalt
b.
Concrete, concrete block, slump stone (decorative concrete block),
and rocks
c.
Dirt
d.
Metal, ferrous and non-ferrous
e.
Wood
f.
Green materials (i.e. tree trimmings)
g.
Other materials, as appropriate, such as red clay brick and
corrugated cardboard
Off-site Recyclables shall be legally transported to a source
separated or mixed debris recycling facility. On-site Recycling
program shall produce a quality product to meet specifications
identified in the Contract Documents, subject to approval of the City
Engineer. On-site recycling plans shall also estimate the amount to
be used in the Work and include a program for off-site recycling of
01150-5
any excess material that cannot be used in the Work.
2.
Mixed Debris Recycling: Develop and implement a program to transport loads
of commingled construction and demolition materials that cannot be feasibly
source-separated to a mixed recycling facility. These facilities are listed in the
most recent issue of the "Construction and Demolition Waste Recycling
Guide”, published by the City's Solid Resources Citywide Recycling Division.
3.
Salvageable Items: Perform a site pre-assessment, identify materials that are
feasible for salvage, determine requirements for site storage, and
transportation of materials to a salvage facility. A partial list of facilities is
included in the most recent issue of the "Construction and Demolition Waste
Recycling Guide.” published by the City?s Integrated Solid Waste
Management Office.
4.
Disposal Operations:
5.
C.
a.
Using a permitted waste hauler or its own trucking services,
Contractor shall legally transport and dispose of materials that
cannot be delivered to a source separated or mixed recycling facility,
to a transfer station or disposal facility that can legally accept the
materials for the purpose of disposal.
b.
Do not burn, bury or otherwise dispose of solid waste on the project
job-site.
Hauling:
a.
Contractor is responsible for arranging collection of materials, by a
permitted waste hauler or using its own trucks, to facilities that can
legally accept construction and demolition materials for purpose of
re-use, recycling, or disposal.
b.
Prior to delivering materials, Contractor shall familiarize itself with the
specifications for acceptance of construction and demolition
materials at recycling facilities.
The most recent issue of
"Construction and Demolition Waste Recycling Guide”, published by
the City's Solid Resources Citywide Recycling Division, includes a
partial list of these facilities.
Participate in Re-Use Programs: Implement a re-use program to the greatest extent
feasible. Alternatives include:
1.
California Materials Exchange (CAL-MAX) Program sponsored by the
California Integrated Waste Management Board. CAL-MAX is a free service
provided by the California Integrated Waste Management Board designed to
help businesses find markets for materials that traditionally would be
discarded. The premise of the CAL-MAX Program is that material discarded
by one business may be a resource for another business. To obtain a current
Materials Listings Catalog, call CAL-MAX/California Integrated Waste
Management Board at (800) 553-2962 or (800) CLEANUP
01150-6
2.
LA Shares is a non-profit materials exchange that accepts excess re-usable
materials from private donors and distributes them to various non-profit
organizations throughout the City. Contact LA Shares at (213) 485-1097.
3.
Habitat for Humanity: Los Angeles (HFH-LA), a non-profit housing
organization that rehabilitates and builds housing for low income families.
HFH-LA sites requiring donated materials vary. Contact HFH-LA at (213) 9759757.
4.
Other re-use organizations or activities.
D.
Revenue: Revenues or other savings obtained for recycled, re-used, or salvaged
materials shall accrue to Contractor unless otherwise noted in the Contract
Documents.
E.
Value: The City makes no claims or assumes any value of any material, equipment or
product to be removed from the existing building as described in Subsection 1.4D of
the Section 01010 - SUMMARY OF THE WORK.
(END OF SECTION)
01150-7
ATTACHMENT A
FORMAT FOR CONTRACTOR? S
SOLID RESOURCES MANAGEMENT PLAN
Project Title:
W.O. Number:
Contractor?s Name:
Street Address:
City, State, Zip:
Phone:
FAX:
Date Submitted:
These are procedures to be used for re-using, salvaging, or recycling materials. Indicate the procedures (by
number), types of materials, and estimated quantities that will be recycled or disposed in the sections
below:
1.
Hand-wrecking to recover salvageable materials
2.
On-site concrete and asphalt crushing for use on-site
3.
On-site concrete and asphalt crushing for use off-site
4.
Source separation of materials and separately hauling to recyclers
5.
Hauling mixed recyclables to a mixed debris recycling facility
6.
Other (please describe)
RE-USE/SALVAGE/RECYCLING OF MATERIALS
Type of
Material
Example:
Concrete
No. of
Procedure to
be Used
(as above)
4
Estimated Quantities
Facility to be Used/Location
Cubic
Tons
Y Units
ABC Recyclers
Los Angeles
1
2
0
Asphalt
01150-8
Concrete
Soils (clean)
Wood/Green
Scrap Metal
Salvage Items
Describe:
Other
Describe:
Misc. Construction
Debris
01150-9
ATTACHMENT A
FORMAT FOR CONTRACTOR? S
SOLID RESOURCES MANAGEMENT PLAN
CONTINUATION SHEET
DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS
Project Title:
W.O. Number:
Estimated Quantities
Type of Materials
Example:
Misc. Const. Debris
Facility to be Used/Location
XYZ Disposal
Los Angeles
Tons
Cubic
Yards
Unit
60
Asphalt
Concrete
Soils (clean)
Wood/Green Materials
Scrap Metal
Other (i.e. Cardboard, Red Clay
Brick)
Please describe:
Misc. Construction Debris
01150-10
ATTACHMENT B
CITY OF LOS ANGELES
BUREAU OF CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION
BUREAU OF ENGINEERING
BUREAU OF SANITATION / SOLID RESOURCES CITYWIDE RECYCLING DIVISION
SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SHEET
Assembly Bill 939. Pursuant to the California Integrated Solid Waste Management Act of 1989, the
City is required to reduce the amount of solid waste disposed in landfills 25% by 1995 and 50%
by the year 2000. Contracts that include work that will generate solid waste, including
construction and demolition debris, have been targeted for participation in source reduction, reuse, and recycling programs. The CONTRACTOR is urged to manage solid waste generated by
the work, to divert waste from disposal in landfills, particularly Class III landfills, and to
maximize source reduction, re-use, and recycling of construction and demolition debris.
CONTRACTOR may contact the Solid Resources Citywide Recycling Division of the Bureau of
Sanitation at (213) 847-1444 for information about recycling construction and
demolition materials.
Reporting Disposal and Diversion of Solid Waste. Upon submittal of its applications for progress
payment, CONTRACTOR is required to submit to the INSPECTOR the attached summary of
solid waste generated by the work, quantifying all solid waste materials disposed in Class III
landfills, diverted from disposal through recycling, accepted at Class III landfills as daily cover,
disposed in inert fills, or taken for inert backfill. As indicated on the Summary Form:
a.
Report disposal or recycling in tons or cubic yards: if trucks are weighed at disposal or
recycling facility, report in tons; otherwise report in cubic yards. Indicate zero (0) if there is no
quantity to report for a type of material.
b.
Indicate all locations to which materials are delivered for disposal, recycling, accepted as daily
cover, or taken for inert backfill.
c.
The Summary Form must be accompanied by legible copies of weigh tickets, receipts, or
invoices that specifically identify the project generating the material. Said documents must be
from recycles and/or disposal site operators that can legally accept the materials. If materials
are taken to an inert backfill site and weigh tickets, receipts, or invoices are not available,
CONTRACTOR shall provide documentation on its letterhead identifying the address to which
materials were taken, name of owner/operator, type of materials, and tons or cubic yards
disposed, specifically identifying the project generating the materials.
d.
Indicate the name of the company completing the Summary Form and compiling backup
documentation; the printed name, signature, and daytime phone number of the person
completing the form, the beginning and ending dates of the period covered on the Summary
Form; and the date that the Summary Form is completed. Indicate Progress Payment Number
with which Summary is submitted in the space provided.
01150-11
CITY OF LOS ANGELES/BOARD OF PUBLIC WORKS
SUMMARY OF SOLID WASTE DISPOSAL AND DIVERSION
PROJECT TITLE: W.O.# PROGRESS PMT. #
(a)
(b)
(Circle One)
Disposed
in Class III
Landfills
(c)
Diverted
from Class III
Landfills
by Recycling
(d)
Disposed
in Inert
Fills
Taken to
Inert Backfill
Site
or Accepted at CLIII
Landfill as Daily Cover
Type
of Material
Tons
CY
Tons
CY
Tons
CY
Tons
ASPHALT
Name of Facility/Site
Where Taken:
CONCRETE
Where Taken:
METAL
Where Taken:
OTHER SEGREGATED
MATERIALS
(Describe):
Where Taken:
01150-12
CY
MISCELLANEOUS
CONSTRUCTION WASTE
Where Taken:
Total
COMPANY NAME: DATE OF REPORT:
NAME
OF
PERSON
COMPLETING
FORM:
(Please
SIGNATURE:
DAYTIME
PERIOD COVERED IN THIS REPORT: FROM
Print)
TITLE:
PHONE:
()
TO
01150-13
CITY OF LOS ANGELES/BOARD OF PUBLIC WORKS
SUMMARY OF SOLID WASTE DISPOSAL AND DIVERSION
CONTINUATION SHEET
PROJECT TITLE: W.O.# PROGRESS PMT. #
(a)
(b)
(Circle One)
Disposed
in Class III
Landfills
(c)
Diverted
from Class III
Landfills
by Recycling
(d)
Disposed
in Inert
Fills
Taken to
Inert Backfill
Site
or Accepted at CLIII
Landfill as Daily Cover
Type
of Material
Tons
CY
Tons
CY
Tons
CY
Tons
ASPHALT
Where Taken:
CONCRETE
Where Taken:
METAL
Where Taken:
OTHER SEGREGATED
MATERIALS
(Describe):
Where Taken:
01150-14
CY
MISCELLANEOUS
CONSTRUCTION WASTE
Where Taken:
Total
COMPANY NAME: DATE OF REPORT:
NAME
OF
PERSON
COMPLETING
FORM:
(Please
SIGNATURE:
DAYTIME
PERIOD COVERED IN THIS REPORT: FROM
Print)
TITLE:
PHONE:
()
TO
01150-15
SECTION 01200
PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
DESCRIPTION
A.
Work Included: As required to enable orderly review during progress of Contracted
Work, and to provide for systematic discussion of problems, the Consultant or the City
Engineer will conduct project meetings throughout the construction period.
B.
Related Work:
1.
to, GENERAL CONDITIONS, and Sections in DIVISION of the Project Manual.
2.
The Contractor's relations with his Subcontractors and materials suppliers, and
discussions relative thereto, are the Contractor's responsibility and normally are
not part of project meetings content.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Comply with provisions of SUBMITTALS SECTION 01340 of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL
B.
Agenda Items: To the maximum extent practicable, advise the Consultant or City
Engineer at least 24 hours in advance of project meetings regarding items to be added to
the agenda.
C.
Minutes:
1.
The City Engineer will compile minutes of each project meeting and will furnish
one copy to the Contractor and required copies to the City.
2.
Recipients of copies may make and distribute such other copies as they wish.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
For those persons designated by the Contractor to attend and participate in project
meetings, provide required authority to commit the Contractor to solutions agreed upon in
the project meetings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
MEETING SCHEDULE
A.
Except as noted below for Preconstruction Meeting, project meetings will be held weekly
or as otherwise directed by the City Engineer.
B.
Coordinate as necessary to establish mutually acceptable schedule for meetings.
PROJECT MEETINGS
01200-1
3.2
MEETING LOCATION
A.
3.3
The City Engineer will establish meeting location. To the maximum extent practicable,
meetings will be held at the job-site in the construction field office.
PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
A.
B.
Preconstruction Meeting will be scheduled to be held within 15 working days after the
City has issued the "Notice to Proceed".
1.
Provide attendance by authorized representatives of the Contractor and major
subcontractors.
2.
The City Engineer will advise other interested parties, including the City and
request their attendance.
Minimum Agenda: Data will be distributed and discussed on at least the following items.
1.
Organizational arrangement of Contractor's forces and personnel, and those of
subcontractors, materials suppliers, and City Engineer.
2.
Channels and procedures for communication.
3.
Construction schedule, including sequence of critical work.
4.
Contract Documents, including distribution of required copies of original
Documents and revisions.
5.
Processing of Shop Drawings and other data submitted to the Consultant for
review.
6.
Processing of Bulletins, Requests for Information (RFI), field decisions, and
Change Orders.
7.
Rules and regulations governing performance of the Work.
8.
Procedures for safety and first aid, security, quality control, housekeeping, and
related matters.
9.
Review and update "Record Drawings."
10.
3.4
Review monthly progress payments.
PROJECT MEETINGS
A.
Attendance:
1.
The Contractor's major Project Manager, and Superintendent shall be present,
and they shall represent the major subcontractors at the meetings through out
the progress of the Work.
2.
Materials suppliers, and others may be invited to attend those Project Meetings
in which their aspect of the Work is involved.
PROJECT MEETINGS
01200-2
3.
B.
C.
3.5
Contractor may not cancel or be absent from any meeting without advanced
approval from the City Engineer. The Contractor must submit a written request
with reason to the City Engineer 24-hours before the scheduled meeting. If
approved, the Contractor shall notify all parties of the cancellation.
Minimum Agenda:
1.
Review, revise as necessary, and approve minutes of previous meeting.
2.
Review progress of the Work since last meeting. Review actual starts and finish
dates of activities.
3.
Review status (total complete and outstanding) of submittal for approval,
Request-for-Information and Change Orders.
4.
Identify old and new problems, which impede planned progress, identify
responsible party for the follow-up actions. Mutually agree to a common solution
and date of correction.
5.
Develop corrective measures and procedures to regain lost time on the planned
schedule.
6.
Review Weekly Progress Reports including the forecasts [as required in Section
01311 – PROGRES SCHEDULE AND REPORTS].
7.
Status of Record drawings and the Record Project Manual.
8.
Job Site Walk-Through. Record all discussion and follow-up actions.
9.
Any job site health and/or accident or safety issues.
Revisions to Minutes:
1.
Unless published minutes are challenged in writing prior to the next regularly
scheduled progress meeting, they will be accepted as properly stating the
activities and decisions of the meeting.
2.
Persons challenging published minutes shall reproduce and distribute copies of
the challenge to all indicated recipients of the particular set of minutes.
3.
Challenge to minutes shall be settled as priority portion of "old business" at the
next regularly scheduled meeting.
SITE MEETINGS
A.
Required when necessary to enable orderly review and discussion of site conditions and
problems requiring solution during the progress of the contracted work. Notify the City
Engineer the need for additional site meetings as early as possible to resolve the
problem without any impact to the Project Schedule.
B.
Provide necessary labor, tools, and equipment such as shoring, scaffolding, ladder, etc.
to gain access to the site.
PROJECT MEETINGS
01200-3
SECTION 01305
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
Related Document
A.
1.3
Administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for substitutions made
after award of Contract.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Other Division 1 Specification Sections and the General Conditions including, but not
limited to, following:
1.4
Division 1: Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.
2.
Division 1 Project Close-out
3.
General Conditions Section 12 – REFERENCE TO TRADE NAMES
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.5
1.
Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction
required by Contract Documents proposed by Contractor after award of Contract on
“Substitution Request Forms” (following this Section) are considered to be requests for
substitutions. Following are not considered to be Requests for Substitutions:
1.
Substitutions requested during bidding period, and accepted by Addendum prior to
award of Contract, are included in Contract Documents and are not subject to
requirements specified in this Section for Substitutions.
2.
Contractor’s submittal, and Architect’s and City Representative’s acceptance of
Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples for construction activities not complying
with Contract Documents do not constitute acceptable or valid Request for
Substitution, nor do they constitute contractual approval.
3.
Revisions to Contract Documents requested by City’s Representative or Architect.
4.
Specified options of products and construction methods included in Contract
Documents.
5.
Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and orders
issued by governing authorities.
SUBMITTALS
01305 - 1
A.
B.
Requests for Substitutions will not be considered before selection of Contractor.
Substitutions will not be considered when:
1.
Indicated on shop drawings or product data submittals without separate formal
“Request for Substitution” (included at the end of this section).
2.
Requested directly by subcontractor or supplier.
3.
Acceptance will require revision of Contract Documents.
4.
Proposed changes are not in compliance with general intent of
Documents.
the Contract
Requests for substitutions will be considered only within 35 days after Notice to Proceed.
Other requests will be considered only when:
1.
Specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within Contract
Time. Architect or City Representative will not consider request if product or
method cannot be provided as result of failure to pursue Work promptly or
coordinate activities properly.
2.
Subsequent information or changes indicate specified product will not perform as
intended.
3.
Requested substitution offers the City substantial advantage, in cost, time, energy
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities the
City must assume. City’s additional responsibilities include compensation to
Architect for redesign and evaluation services, compensation to the City for
additional processing and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction
by the City, and similar considerations.
4.
Specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by
governing authority, and requested substitution can be approved.
5.
Specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in manner that is
compatible with other materials and where Contractor certifies that substitution will
overcome incompatibility.
6.
Specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other
materials and where Contractor certifies that proposed substitution can be
coordinated.
7.
Specified product or method of construction cannot provide warranty required by
Contract Documents and where Contractor certifies that proposed substitution
provides required warranty.
C.
Do not order or install substitute products without written acceptance.
D.
Only 1”Request for Substitution” for each product will be considered. When substitution is
not accepted, provide specified product.
E.
The City and the Architect will determine acceptability of substitutions within 14 calendar
days, or 21 calendar days when engineer or consultants are involved.
01305 - 2
F.
G.
H.
Submit 2 copies of each request to the City on “Request for Substitution” form at end of this
Section. Submit separate form for each substitution.
1.
Identify products by Specification Section and Article numbers.
2.
Provide manufacturer's name and address, trade name of products, and model or
catalog number.
3.
List fabricators and suppliers as appropriate, with address and telephone numbers
of manufacturer and local distributor with service capabilities, if appropriate.
4.
Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed
substitution with requirements of Contract Documents including independent
laboratory testing reports, approval numbers, listings, and approved assembly
descriptions as requested by City’s Construction Manager or Architect, or as
required by agencies having jurisdiction.
5.
Attach product data as specified in Division 1.
6.
Give itemized comparison of proposed substitution with specified product, listing
variation, and reference to Specification Section and Article numbers.
7.
Give quality and performance comparison between proposed substitution and
specified product.
8.
Submit written certification from manufacturer that proposed substitution is
appropriate for this application.
9.
List availability of maintenance services and replacement materials.
10.
State effect of substitution on construction schedule, and changes required in other
Work or products.
By making requests for substitutions, Contractor:
1.
Represents that Contractor has personally investigated proposed substitute
product and determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that
specified.
2.
Represents that Contractor will provide same warranty for substitution that
Contractor would for that specified.
3.
Will coordinate installation of accepted substitute, making such changes as may
be required for Work to be compatible with substrates and adjacent materials, and
complete in all respects.
4.
Waives claims for additional time related to substitution which may later become
apparent.
5.
Certifies that cost data presented is complete and includes related costs under this
Contract, including redesign costs, and waives claims for additional costs related
to substitution which may later become apparent.
Modification of Documents: Where substitution requires changes to design of Work as
indicated on accepted Shop Drawings for proper installation, furnish drawings and
01305 - 3
specifications prepared by and bearing seal of licensed Architect and Engineers as
appropriate, revising Shop Drawings.
1.
Submit revised Documents for acceptance in accordance with Division 1.
2.
Revised Drawings shall be sufficiently complete for proper installation of
substitution and related Work with adjacent materials.
.
3.
Include details of connection to and relationship
If, in the City’s sole judgment, proposed substitution is potentially acceptable but is
of such significance or deals with product or system affecting basic design or
aesthetics, pay the City for changes required to Contract Documents as follows:
.
4.
5.
1.6
Reimburse the City for Architect's account for time spent in changing
Contract Documents at standard schedule of hourly rates at time of
submittal.
Contractor is responsible for cost of revised Documents, obtaining and paying for
review and plan check by authorities having jurisdiction, and cost of revised
construction.
Submit revised drawings with Record Documents in accordance with Division 1.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A.
Architect and City Representatives’ Action: If necessary, Architect through the City
Representative will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 1
week of receipt of request for substitution. The City will notify Contractor of acceptance or
rejection of substitution within 2 weeks of receipt of request, or 1 week of receipt of
additional information or documentation, whichever is later. Acceptance will be in form of
Change Order, should a change in Contract cost or time be associated with the
substitution.
1.
Architect or City Representative will not make exhaustive attempt to determine
products proposed for substitution are equivalent to, or can be modified in order to
be equivalent to specified products.
.
Where extensive investigation is required by City’s Representative or
Architect, as determined by City’s Representative, Contractor shall
reimburse the City for City Representative’s or Architect's account for time
spent in processing additional resubmittals at standard schedule of rates
at time of submittal.
2.
Use product specified if Architect and City Representatives cannot make decision
on use of proposed substitution within time allocated.
3.
If accepted by Architect and City Representatives, products proposed for
substitution are accepted, subject to minor modifications by manufacturer, if
necessary, to meet detailed requirements of Drawings and Specifications.
B.
For Accepted Products: Submit shop drawings, product data, and samples in accordance
with Divi sion 1.
C.
If accepted by the Architect’s and City’s Representatives, such approval or conditional
approval, shall not relieve the Contractor from complying with the requirements of the
01305 - 4
drawings and specifications, and the Contractor’s own expense for any change resulting
from the Contractor’s proposed substitutions which affect other parts of the Contractor’s
own work or the work of others.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
(Not Used)
(Not Used)
END OF SECTION
01305 - 5
REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION
Pursuant to Section 1305 “Product Substitution Procedures”, the Contractor must submit this form, fully
executed, for consideration of each proposal:
Date:
Initial Submittal
Submittal Number:
,
2nd Submittal
From:
,
Submittal
To:
PROJECT:
OWNER:
Subject:
Equipment/System Designation: per Contract:
Drawing No./Detail and Specification Section/Paragraph:
Proposed Substitution Remarks:
We have verified the enclosed documents describing this substitution, that meets all requirements under the
contract documents, except the following deviations as listed on the attached list.
Contractor’s Authorized Signature
Date
REVIEW
Approved
Rejected
Conditional Approval:
City’s Authorized Signature
Date
Architect’s Authorized Signature
Date
01305 - 6
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
TO:
THE CITY OF LOS ANGELES, LIBRARY BOND PROGRAM
ATTN:
RE:
(Building – Project)
Project No.
Gentlemen:
We hereby submit for your consideration the following product instead of the specified item for the above
project:
Section No.
Specified Item:
Proposed Substitution:
Article No.
Attached are the complete technical data, including laboratory test reports as applicable, as required by
Section _________ of the specifications. Also included is complete information on changes to the drawings
and specifications which the proposed substitution will require for proper installation and/or record drawings.
COMPLETE THE FOLLOWING:
A.
Does the substitution affect dimensions shown on drawings?
Yes
No
B.
What affect does the substitution have on other trades?
C.
What are the differences between the specified and the proposed substitution?
D.
Manufacturer’s guarantees for the specified and proposed items are (the same) (different; see
attached explanation).
E.
Does the substitution affect the schedule?
F.
1.
Increase (calendar days)
2.
Decrease (calendar days
3.
No changes
What are the cost implications?
1.
Increase (amount) $
2.
Credit (amount) $
3.
No change to cost
01305 - 7
SECTION 01311
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
PROGRESS OF THE WORK
A.
Required: The Contracted Work shall be executed with such progress as required to
prevent any delay to the general completion of the Contract.
B.
Related Work:
Documents affecting work of this Section include but are not necessarily
2.
Requirements for progress schedule and reports:
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The Contractor is required to employ a Scheduling Staff who performs the duties of a
Construction Scheduler, or retain the services of a Construction Scheduler. The
Construction Scheduler shall have at least five (5) years of verifiable experience as the
person primarily responsible for preparing and maintaining detailed project schedules
on projects of the same or similar size and nature as this project.
B.
Within five (5) days after the Notice of Award, the Contractor shall provide a statement
to the City Engineer with the following:
C.
1.3
1.
1.
Identification, qualifications, and experience of the Contractor’s Construction
Scheduler and all other members of the scheduling staff.
2.
References of not less than two (2) previous projects on which the
Contractor’s Construction Scheduler has utilized Critical Path Method (CPM)
scheduling.
3.
A description of the computer system hardware and accessories to be
utilized for the project management as stated hereinafter in Subsection 1.4A
and other project management hardware and software available by the
Contractor.
The City Engineer and the Inspector reserve the right to disapprove any candidate or
Scheduling System proposed for the project. The City Engineer and the Inspector
reserve the right to remove, without rights to work on the project, any member of the
Contractor’s scheduling staff, that is, in the opinion of the City Engineer or Inspector,
incompetent in scheduling.
PRE-CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING CONFERENCE
A.
The City’s Construction Manager will schedule and conduct a preconstruction
scheduling conference with the Contractor within seven (7) days after Notice of Award,
to commence the development of the required project schedule.
01311-1
B.
1.4
1.
Contractor’s General Superintendent and Scheduling Staff.
2.
Representative(s) of any Subcontractor or Supplier whom the Contractor may
desire to invi te or whom the City may request. All key Subcontractors,
Project Managers, and Superintendents and Suppliers’ Key Representatives
are requested to attend.
3.
The City Engineer, Inspector and other City Engineer authorized
representatives.
DEFINITIONS
A.
B.
1.5
Contractors shall be prepared to review and discuss the schedule and sequence of
operations, resources and cost loading methodology. The conference shall be
attended by:
Schedules:
1.
The scheduling methods to be used shall be in the form of Precedence
Diagram Method (PDM) with capabilities of identifying the critical path. The
principal and definitions of the terms used herein shall be as set forth or
generally as described in the Associated General Contractor’s Publication
“CPM in Construction.” The Contractor shall use the computerized critical
path scheduling system, Primavera Project Planners, Version 2.0 for
Windows or the latest version by Primavera Systems, Inc.
2.
Each activity shall also be labeled with an alphanumeric work breakdown
structure/sorting/selection code as directed by the City Engineer including
type of activity, spec section, and responsibility.
Day: As used throughout the Contract unless otherwise stated means "calendar day".
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A.
Within fifteen (15) days after the Pre-construction conference, the contractor shall
submit a Preliminary Project Schedule including schedule of manpower and costs
assigned to each activity to the City Engineer the detailed plan of operation for the first
ninety (90) days of work after Notice, as well as a general approach for the remainder
of the work. The City Engineer, Inspector and the Contractor shall meet within seven
(7) days after submittal of the preliminary Project schedule to review and make any
necessary adjustments or revisions.
Accordingly, no time extension will be
guaranteed nor delay damages paid until a delay occurs which extends the work
beyond the Contract completion date as originally set forth in the Contract or as
modified by subsequent Change Order.
The Contractor shall submit the revised Preliminary Project Schedule for approval to
the City Engineer and the Inspector within seven (7) days after the meeting or within
seven (7) days after City’s review. The resultant Preliminary Project Schedule shall be
the sole basis of partial or progress payments made for work performed during the first
ninety (90) days after the Notice to Proceed.
Submittal and approval of the Preliminary Project Schedule are a condition precedent
01311-2
to the issuance and payment of progress payments. Therefore, no progress payments
will be made until the City Engineer and the Inspector have approved the Preliminary
Project Schedule.
The Preliminary Project Schedule shall be updated monthly during the first ninety (90)
days after the Notice to Proceed, as part of the payment application process. All
appropriate reports and network diagrams required by Subsection 1.10 shall be
submitted, as agreed upon between the City Engineer, the Inspector and the
Contractor.
B.
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the City Engineer the Contractor's
Construction Schedule within 40 days after "Notice to Proceed.” Contractor's
Construction Schedule shall be comprised of the Detailed Network Diagram as
described in Subsection 1.6, the Reports described in Subsection 1.7, and manpower
histogram described in Subsection 1.13. The first ninety (90) days of the Contractor’s
Construction Schedule shall be the approved preliminary 90-day schedule.
C.
The Contractor's Construction Schedule shall show the sequence and
interdependence of activities required for complete performance of all work. The
Contractor's Construction Schedule shall begin with the date the City issues the
"Notice to Proceed", and concluded with the date of Final Completion of the Contract
as specified in the Contract. Float or slack time is not for the exclusive use or benefit
of either the City or the Contractor, but is a resource available to both parties as
needed to meet Contract milestones, and the Contract completion date. Accordingly,
no time extensions will be granted nor delay damages paid until a delay occurs which
extends the work beyond the Contract completion date. As originally set forth in the
Contract or as modified by subsequent Change Order.
D.
Construction Sequence
1.
In addition to the items set forth in this Section of the General Requirements,
the following milestones should be taken into consideration when preparing
the proposed construction schedule:
Milestone 1
Complete all the foundations substructure, and building slab on grade, and
commence the structural steel erection within 110 calendar days plus any
approved extensions of time after notice from the Board of Public Works to
proceed with the work.
Milestone 2
Complete the rough in of the building, including roof sheeting, and necessary
plumbing, mechanical, electrical, and building structure rough in inspection
approval within 210 calendar days plus any approved extensions of time after
notice from the Board of Public Works to proceed with the work.
E.
Pursuant to the Float Sharing requirements of the Contract Documents, 1) use of float
suppression techniques such as preferential sequencing, special lead/lag logic
restraints, extended Activity times, or imposed dates, and 2) use of Float Time
disclosed or implied by the use of alternative Float suppression techniques, shall be
shared to the proportionate benefit of the City, Contractor, and Contractor's
01311-3
Subcontractors.
F.
1.6
Comments made by the City Engineer on the Contractor's Construction Schedule
during review will not relieve the Contractor from compliance with requirements of the
Contract Documents. This review is only for general conformance with the schedule
concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the
Contract Documents. Upon the City's request, the Contractor shall participate in the
review of the Construction Schedule submissions. All revi sions to the Contractor’s
Construction Schedule shall be resubmitted within ten (10) calendar days after City's
review.
DETAILED NETWORK DIAGRAM
A.
B.
General:
1.
Each Contractor's Construction Schedule shall include time-scaled network
diagrams based on calendar days. The network diagrams shall be Critical
Path Method (CPM) precedence format and shall show the sequence and
interdependence of activities required for complete performance of both bid
items of work. A calendar shall be shown on all sheets along the entire sheet
length. Each activity shall be plotted so that the beginning (and completion
dates) of said activity can be determined graphically (by comparison) with the
calendar scale.
2.
Sufficient care shall be exercised to produce legible and accurate network
diagrams. The network diagrams shall be drawn legibly on 24-inch by 36-inch
reproducible media or a comparable computerized plot.
3.
Contractor, Subcontractor, and City responsibility activities shall be coded
and annotated on the network diagrams. In addition, each activity of the
network diagrams shall be labeled with a complete description, cost as well
as the planned activity duration in calendar days.
4.
Contractor’s Construction Schedule shall also be presented in bar chart
format based on calendar workdays.
Activities:
1.
The work activities comprising the Contractor's Construction Schedule shall
be of sufficient detail to assure adequate planning has been done for the
proper execution of the work and such that the schedules provides an
appropriate basis for monitoring and evaluating the progress of the work. A
work activity is defined as an activity which requires time and resources
(manpower, equipment, and/or material) to complete. No activity shall have
more than fourteen (14) calendar days duration for any on-site operation.
Selected exceptions may be approved by the City where sub-networks may
be used.
2.
If requested by the City, the Contractor shall provide highly detailed, shortterm schedules for specific crucial items at the Contractor's expense. The
cost of including Change Orders on the CPM will be borne by the Contractor.
3.
The schedules shall indicate the sequence and interdependency of work
01311-4
activities to complete the Work. They shall include, but not be limited to the
following items, as appropriate to the Contract; (As Applicable):
4.
a.
Mobilization and move in.
b.
Excavation, backfilling, grading, paving, etc.
c.
Submittal preparation by the Contractor and review by the City,
including purchase order, shop drawings, technical manuals, and all
other submittals. Contractor must allow 15 calendar days for all
reviews by the City.
d.
The Contractor shall allow 9 calendar days between completion of
the compaction of the building pad and the start of foundation
excavation, for City’s completion and review of the compaction report.
e.
Order, manufacture, delivery, installation, and procurement of critical
material and major equipment.
e.
Concrete placement sequence.
f.
Structural steel, miscellaneous metal, masonry, equipment
installation, piping work.
g.
Plumbing.
h.
Heating, ventilation, and air conditioning.
i.
Electrical.
j.
All other major construction activities.
k.
Subcontractor's items of work.
l.
Performance and acceptance tests and supervisory service activities.
m.
Delivery, installation, and check out of City supplied equipment and
material, if applicable.
n.
Startup and fine tuning (testing) of all facilities.
o.
Operator and maintenance personnel training.
p.
All Contracts stipulated milestone dates, substantial completion
date, and final completion date.
q.
Final clean-up.
r.
Final inspecting and testing.
Any activity that requires unusual shift work, such as two shifts, 6-day week,
and so forth, shall be clearly identified on the schedule.
01311-5
5.
1.7
All activities of the City which affect progress and/or affect required dates for
completion of all or part of the Contracted Work.
REPORTS
A.
The Detailed Network Diagram shall be accompanied by computer generated reports
in tabular format, prepared, sorted and sub-sorted as follows; and shall be submitted
with one (1) computer diskette and two (2) copies of the network diagram, and the
computer
1.
All activities sorted by activity number and also including precedent and
successor relationships, lag and lead time. Each listing shall show Activity
Number, description, Location, Responsibility, Total Duration in Work Days,
Early-Start date, Late-Start date, Early-Finish date, Late-Finish date, Total
Float, Free Float, Monetary value of each activity, Percentage of activity
completed; Contractor's earnings based on portion of activity completed, and
Status (whether critical or completed) for each activity in the Network
Diagram. Show information in such detail that duration time of activities will
range normally from (1) to (15) calendar days; subject to the approval of the
City Engineer.
2.
Activity Responsibility sorted by Early-Start and Total Float. The Activity
Responsibility listing shall segregate into separate sub-listings: The work
activities for the Contractor; each Subcontractor; and submittals to the City
Engineer of all major items of material and equipment.
3.
A sub-listing of materials and equipment procurement activities sorted by
Specification number. The sub-listing of materials and equipment shall
include the following activities: Preparation of Shop Drawings and submittal to
the City, review by the City, and fabrication or delivery of material and/or
equipment. All of these activities shall interface with the earliest date that the
material or equipment is to be installed on the project.
4.
Earned value report sorted and subtotaled by specification number showing
the following data: Activity ID, activity description, budgeted cost, percent
complete cost to date and cost this period.
B.
Failure to submit adequate and accurate content, in the opinion of the City, in the
Contractor's Construction Schedules, or failure to submit on the dates established by
the City will result in cost to the City; therefore, the Contractor will pay the City a
liquidated damage of $400 for the first day the schedule(s) is late or lacks sufficient
adequacy and $200 per day thereafter. This amount shall be subtracted from any
monies due the Contractor.
C.
All updated or reviewed schedules submitted after the original schedule shall be in the
same detail as the original submittals, unless modified in writing by the City.
Contractor shall not change activity numbers on schedule updates.
1,8
NOT USED
1.9
REVISIONS TO ACCEPTED SCHEDULE
01311-6
A.
1.10
The Contractor shall prosecute the work in accordance with the Contractor's
Construction Schedule. Changes made to the Contractor's Construction Schedule for
accomplishing the work shall be subject to review and acceptance by the City
Engineer for conformance to the requirements of this Division.
B.
Upon approval of a Change Order or issuance of Proceed Order with a change, the
approved change shall be reflected in the next schedule submittal by the Contractor or
other schedule update submittal "X" by the City Engineer.
C.
If the Contractor desires to make a change to the Contractor's Construction Schedule,
he shall notify the City Engineer in writing stating the reasons for the change at the
job-site. If the City Engineer considers the change to be of major nature, the City
Engineer may require the Contractor to revise and submit for acceptance, at the
Contractor's sole expense, all or the affected portion of the Detailed Network Diagram
and analysis to show the effect on the entire project. The proposed revision and
analysis shall be submitted to the City Engineer within fifteen (15) days after the City
Engineer notifies the Contractor the revision is of a major nature. A change will be
considered of a major nature if the time estimated to be required for an activity or the
sequence of activities is varied from the original plan to a degree that there is
reasonable doubt that the Contract completion date will be met or if the change
impacts the work of other Contractors at the job-site. Changes to activities having
adequate float shall be considered as minor changes, except that an accumulation of
minor changes may be considered a major change when such changes affect the
Contract completion date. Revisions to the Contractors Construction Schedule shall
not be made in the same submittal as the monthly updates. They must be submitted
separately in a separate Primavera file.
PROGRESS REPORTS
A.
Once each week on a date established by the City Engineer, the Contractor shall
submit a report/schedule listing the activities, started, completed and in progress for
the previous week and the activities scheduled for the succeeding two weeks. This
report shall include concrete placements scheduled, major equipment installation,
testing, and like detail. A histogram and bar chart shall be used to display the
information in pictorial form.
B.
Once each month on a date established by the City Engineer, a review meeting for
coordination of the schedule will be held. The Contractor’s Project Manager, the
Superintendent, and/or the Scheduler and those major Subcontractors as determined
to be necessary by the City Engineer and/or Contractors shall attend the meeting.
Contractor shall provide progress with Progress Override Logic Analysis.
C.
Prior to the meeting, the Contractor shall obtain from his Subcontractors and staff, the
necessary information as required to reflect progress to date. An updated Schedule
containing the following information shall be available for review at the meeting. The
updated Schedule shall include all information available as of the cut-off date
established by the City Engineer. A detailed list of all schedule changes (logic,
duration, status, additions, and deletions) shall be submitted with the update.
1.
For Activities Started and/or Completed during the Previous Period: Actual
start and actual completion dates and number of workdays.
01311-7
2.
For Activities Begun, But Not Yet Completed: The actual start date,
percentage complete to date, the remaining duration of the work, and the
estimated completion date.
3.
For Activities Not Yet Started: Estimated start dates; and revised durations,
and estimated completion dates, if necessary.
4.
For Authorized Change Orders: Revised activities and durations, where
required.
5.
The monthly update of the Network Diagram shall be for the month preceding
the meeting and for three months following the meeting. The previous month's
activities shall be reported as they actually took place.
6.
Portions of the Detailed Network Diagrams on which all activities are
complete need not be reprinted and submitted in subsequent updates.
However, the file of submitted detailed Network Diagrams and the related
reports shall constitute a clear record of progress of the work from Notice to
Proceed to final completion.
7.
The monthly submittal to the City shall be accomplished by two (2) copies of
a bound report. The bound report shall include the information described in
the Contractor's Schedule Narrative Report Outline detailed in the following:
a.
Contractor's Schedule Narrative Report Outline:
(1)
Contractor's Transmittal Letter.
(2)
Description of problem areas.
(3)
Current and anticipated delays.
-
Cause of the delay.
Corrective action and schedule adjustments to
correct the delay.
Impact of the delay on other activities, or
milestones, and on completion dates. A written
Time Impact Analysis illustrating the influence of
each change or delay on the current Contract
Schedule completion date utilizing the approved
current Record Schedule. Each Time Impact
Analysis shall include a fragment demonstrating
how the Contractor proposed to incorporate the
Change Order or delay into the current Schedule.
A fragment is defined as a sequence of new and/or
activity revisions that are proposed to be added to
the approved Baseline Detailed Project Schedule or
current record in effect at the time the change or
delay is encountered to demonstrate the influence
of the delay and the method of incorporating the
delay and its impact into the schedule as they are
encountered.
01311-8
(4)
Changes in construction sequence.
(5)
Pending items and status thereof.
-
(6)
Contract completion dates status.
-
8.
9.
1.11
Permits
Change Orders
Time Extensions
Other
Ahead of schedule and number of working days.
Behind schedule and number of working days.
(7)
Other project or scheduling concerns.
(8)
Include reviewed and updated Detail Network Diagram and
Reports.
Predicated upon the results of the City Engineer's review of monthly
submissions of updated Network Diagrams and Reports, and/or the joint
City/Contractor review in any given month, the Contractor may be required to
revise the Contractor's Construction Schedule. Conditions under which a
revision will be made are as follows:
a.
When a delay in completion of any work items or sequence of work
items results in an indicated extension of the project completion or
interim milestone dates detailed herein by 30 calendar days.
b.
When delays in submittals or deliveries or work stoppages are
encountered which make replanning or rescheduling of the work
necessary.
c.
When the schedule does not represent the actual prosecution and
progress of the project.
All revisions and additions to the Contractor's Construction Schedule are
subject to the review of the City.
DELAYS AND RECOVERY
A.
If at any time during the project, the Contractor fails to complete any activity by its
latest scheduled completion date, the Contractor shall, within five (5) working calendar
days, submit to the City, a written statement as to how and when Contractor will
reorganize the work force to return to the current Contractor's Construction Schedule.
B.
Whenever it becomes apparent from the current monthly progress evaluation and
updated schedule data that any milestone date(s) and/or Contract completion date will
not be met; the Contractor shall take some or all of the following actions:
1.
Increase construction manpower in such quantities and crafts as shall
substantially eliminate the backlog of work and meet the current Contract
completion date.
01311-9
2.
Increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per workday, workdays
per work week, or the amount of construction equipment, or any combination
of the foregoing sufficient to substantially eliminate the backlog of work.
3.
Reschedule work items to achieve concurrence of accomplishment or;
NOTE: The City may elect to withhold progress payments until the Contractor's
progress indicates that the Milestone date(s) and/or completion will be met.
C.
1.12
Under no circumstances will the addition of equipment or construction forces,
increasing the work hours or any other method, manner, or procedure to return to the
contractually required completion date be considered justification for a Change Order
or treated as an acceleration.
SCHEDULE TIME EXTENSIONS
A.
When Change Orders or delays are experienced by the Contractor and a time
extension is requested, the Contractor shall submit to the City Engineer, a written
Time Impact Analysis illustrating the influence of each change or delay on the current
Contract schedule completion date utilizing the approved current Record Schedule.
Each Time Impact Analysis shall include a Fragment demonstrating how the
Contractor proposes to incorporate the Change Order or delay into the current Record
Schedule. A Fragment is defined as a sequence of new and/or activity revisions that
are proposed to be added to the approved Baseline Detailed Project Schedule or
Current Record in effect at the time the change or delay is encountered to
demonstrate the influence of the delay and the method for incorporating the delay and
its impact into the schedule as they are encountered.
B.
Each Time Impact Analysis shall demonstrate the estimated time impact based on
the events of the delay, the date of the Field Order, Change Order or the Unilateral
Change Order was given to the Contractor, the status of construction at that point in
time and the event time computation of all activities affected by the change or delay.
The event times used in the analysis shall be those included in the latest update of the
Current Record Schedule, in effect at the time the change or delay was encountered.
C.
Time extensions will be granted only to the extent that equitable time adjustments for
the activity or activities affected exceed the total or remaining float along the critical
path of activities at the time of actual delay, or at the time the Field Order, the Change
Order, and the Unilateral Change Order was issued. Float or slack time is not for the
exclusive use or benefit of the City Engineer or the Contractor but is an expiring
resource available to all parties as needed to meet Contract milestones and the
Contract completion date. Time extensions shall not be granted nor delay damages
paid until:
1.
A delay occurs which is beyond the control and without the fault or
negligence of the Contractor and its Subcontractor or Suppliers, at any tier;
and,
2.
Which extends actual performance of the work beyond the applicable current
Contract completion date and the most recent date predicted for completion
of the project on the approved schedule update current as of the time of the
01311-10
delay or as of the time of issuance of the Field Order, the Change Order, or
the Unilateral Change Order.
1.13
1.14
D.
Each Time Impact Analysis shall be submitted in two (2) copies, within ten (10) days
after the delay occurs or issuance of the Field Order, Change Order or Unilateral
Change Order, in accordance with Section 15 - TIME FOR COMMENCING AND
COMPLETING WORK of the General Conditions. If the Contractor does not submit a
Time Impact Analysis for a specific Change Order or delay within the specified period
of time, the Contractor shall be deemed to have irrevocably waived any rights to
additional time and cost.
E.
Since float time within the Detailed Project Schedule and the Record Schedule is
jointly owned, it is acknowledged and agreed by the Contractor that City caused
delays on the project may be offset by City caused time savings (including, but not
limited to: critical path submittals returned in less time than allowed for in the
Contract, approval of substitution requests, which results in a saving of time along the
critical path for the Contractor, etc.). In such an event, the Contractor shall not be
entitled to receive an extension of time or delay damages until City caused time
savings are exceeded and the Contract completion date also exceeded.
F.
Approval or rejection of each Time Impact Analysis by the City Engineer shall be made
within [fifteen (15) days] after receipt of each Time Impact Analysis, unless
subsequent meetings and negotiations are necessary. Upon approval, a copy of a
Time Impact Analysis signed by the City Engineer shall be returned to the Contractor
for incorporation into the schedule.
G.
Upon mutual agreement by both parties, fragnets illustrating the influence of Change
Orders and delays shall be incorporated into the Detailed Project Schedule or Record
Schedule during the first update after agreement is reached.
COST LOADING
A.
In addition to the above network requirements, the Contractor shall furnish cost
estimates for each activity which, cumulatively equal the total Contract cost.
Mobilization may be shown separately however, other costs i.e. profit, insurance and
bond shall be prorated throughout all activities. The cost (loading) allocation shall be
included in the review of each application for progress payment. The approval of cost
loading or schedule of payment values does not represent approval of true cost of each
item. The schedule of payment value shall not be used in Change Order. Contractor
shall submit detail estimate for each proposed Change Order.
B.
The cost loading shall be based upon the Contractor's Construction Schedule and
shall equal in total, the Contractor's bid price plus Change Order.
C.
The Contractor, at the pre-construction conference, shall explain in detail the
procedure to be used to develop the schedule cost loading. This procedure is subject
to review by the City. Failure to submit an acceptable schedule cost loading shall be
considered cause for withholding any progress payments due or that may become due
under this Contract.
MANPOWER
A.
The Contractor shall submit with the initial Contractor's Construction Schedule a
01311-11
histogram depicting total project craft manpower and that for each of his principal
Subcontractors. The histogram shall be based upon and shall be in substantive
agreement with the Contractor's Construction Schedule.
1.15
CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
A.
The Contractor shall submit with the initial Contractor's Construction Schedule, a
tabular report listing each major piece of construction equipment and each major piece
of construction equipment for each Subcontractor for each month. This report shall
identify whether the equipment is owned or leased. The tabular report shall be based
upon and in substantive agreement with the number of shifts and crew sizes by craft in
the Contractor's Construction Schedule.
End of Section --
01311-12
SECTION 01340
SUBMITTALS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
D.
General: This Section specifies the administrative and procedural requirements for
submittals and substitution submittals required for the performance of the Contracted
Work as specified in the following Sections of the GENERAL CONDITIONS of these
Specifications:
1.
Shop Drawings and Manufacturer's Data.
2.
References to Trade Names (as applicable to substitutions).
Related Work:
1.
Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily
and Sections in DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS of these
Specifications.
2.
Individual listed submittal requirements noted in the technical Specification
Sections and as hereinafter listed in this Section.
Work Not Included:
1.
City Engineer will not review unrelated submittals.
2.
The Contractor may be required to provide drawings, setting diagrams and
similar information necessary for proper coordination of Contracted Work.
Such data shall remain between the Contractor and Contractor's Subcontractor and will not be reviewed by the City Engineer unless specifically called
for in the Contract Documents.
Contractor's Submittals: Required for performance of Contracted Work, include but
not limited to the following:
1.
Cost Breakdown
2.
Construction Schedule
3.
Submittal Schedule
4.
Daily Construction Reports
5.
Shop Drawings and Manufacturer's Data
6.
Samples
7.
Certificate of Compliance
SUBMITTALS
01340-1
E.
1.2
8.
Construction Photographs (see Section 01380)
9.
Substitutions.
10.
Hazardous Communication Program
Administrative Submittals:
1.
Permits and Plan Checks
2.
Application for Payments
3.
Performance and Payment Bonds
4.
Insurance Certificates
5.
List of Subcontractors
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A.
B.
C.
General: Conform to the provisions related to SHOP DRAWINGS AND
MANUFACTURER'S DATA in the GENERAL CONDITIONS of this Project and as may
be specifically directed by the City Engineer.
1.
Preparation and processing of submittals shall be coordinated with
Contracted Work operations which includes fabrication, purchasing and
delivery of work items so as not to delay Contracted Work operations.
2.
The City Engineer reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal
requiring coordination with other submittals until such other submittals are
received by the City Engineer.
Coordination and Submittals:
1.
Carefully review and coordinate all aspects of each item being submitted.
2.
Verify that all such submittal items conform to the Specification requirements
noted in the Technical Specification Sections.
Submittal Identification: Affix to each submittal, the Prime Contractor's signature
certifying that required coordination has been performed and include on an attached
label for processing and recording action taken, noting the following:
1.
Name of the Project
2.
Date of the submittal and submittal number
3.
4.
Name and address of City Engineer
Name and address of the Prime Contractor
5.
Name and address of the Subcontractor(s)
SUBMITTALS
01340-2
D.
E.
1.3
6.
Name and address of the Supplier
7.
Name and address of the Manufacturer
8.
Submittal Number
9.
Reference to Specification Section Number and Title
10.
Reference to Drawing Sheet Number and detail(s)
Transmittal of Submittals: Appropriately package and label each submittal for
transmittal and handling from Contractor to City Engineer using a preprinted standard
transmittal form verifying that the Contractor has met the following City requirements:
1.
Conformance in all respect to the Contract Document requirements.
2.
Has reviewed and coordinated all aspects of each submitted item relative to
manufacturer's product data, specifications, etc.
3.
That all deviations and/or questions have been approved and/or answered in
writing by the City Engineer and that the approval of such submittals and/or
deviations does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility caused by such
deviation(s).
4.
Contractor not relieved from responsibilities for errors and omissions in the
required submittals as revealed resulting from the City's review of such
submittals.
5.
It is considered reasonable that the Contractor shall make a complete and
acceptable submittal to the City Engineer by the second submission of a
submittal item. The City reserves the right to withhold moneys due the
Contractor to cover additional costs of the City Engineer's review beyond the
second submittal. On the third Contractor?s submittal, the Contractor will be
charged $ 100.00 per hour of City?s review.
Submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule:
1.
Comply with provisions of Section 01311 - PROGRESS SCHEDULE AND
REPORTS.
2.
Coordinate the Contractor's submittal of construction schedule with schedule
of values, lists of subcontracts, etc.
MISCELLANEOUS SUBMITTALS
A.
Required: Contractor shall prepare a Daily Construction Report recording the following
information concerning events at the job-site and submit duplicate copies to the City
Engineer on weekly intervals:
1.
List of Subcontractors and Sub-Subcontractors at the job site.
2.
Approximate count of personnel at the site.
3.
High and low temperatures, general weather conditions.
SUBMITTALS
01340-3
B.
4.
Accidents and unusual events.
5.
Meetings and significant decisions.
6.
Stoppages, delays, shortages, losses.
7.
Meter readings and similar recordings.
8.
Emergency procedures, work of each activities.
9.
Orders and requests of governing authorities.
10.
Change Orders received, implemented.
11.
Services connected, disconnected.
12.
Equipment or system tests and start-ups.
13.
Partial completions, occupancies.
14.
Substantial completions authorized.
Comply with pertinent provisions of the GENERAL CONDITIONS as applicable to the
following:
1.
Record Drawings, Record Specifications, Record Product Data, record
Samples and Record Submittals.
2.
Maintenance and Operating Manuals.
3.
Manufacturer's Reference Data.
4.
Qualification of Contractor.
5.
Warranty and Guarantee.
6.
Manufacturer's Recommended Installation Procedures.
7.
Materials List of items proposed to be provided as specified in the Technical
Specification Sections.
8.
Samples, illustrating assembly details, workmanship, fabrication technics,
connections, color selection to be submitted as specified in the Technical
9.
Regarding Concrete Work, submit Portland Cement Mill Certificates,
Concrete Mix Designs, Load Tickets and Product Data.
10.
Regarding Masonry Work, submit the following:
a.
Sample Concrete Block Panel, show all block sizes, colors, and
finishes.
SUBMITTALS
01340-4
1.4
LIST OF REQUIRED SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Comply with all submittal requirements in the Contract Documents, including
requirements related to substitutions as specified in the GENERAL CONDITIONS
under "REFERENCE TO TRADE NAMES".
SPECIFICATION SECTION
SUBMITTAL
01010 SUMMARY OF THE WORK
-
Duplicated copies of all permit
01015 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF THE
PREMISES
-
Security
List of employees
01045 CUTTING AND PATCHING
-
Request of permission,
Repair method and procedure.
01060 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
-
Duplicated copies of all permit
Regulatory Requirements
01150 SOLID RESOURCES
MANAGEMENT
-
Solid Resources Management
Plans
Summary of Diversion & Disposal
Development & Implementation of
Recycling Procedures
-
01200 PROJECT MEETINGS
-
Agenda Items
Meeting Minutes
01311 PROGRESS SCHEDULE AND REPORTS-
Construction Schedule
Reports
01340 SUBMITTALS
-
Contractor's Submittals
Administrative Submittals
Miscellaneous Submittals
01380 CONSTRUCTION
PHOTOGRAPHY
-
Work Supplies
Color Prints
01400 QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES -
Testing Laboratory
Testing Reports
01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND
CONTROLS
-
01640 PRODUCT HANDLING
-
Shop Drawings for Construction
Signs
Transfer of Billing
Method and Procedures
Copy of Insurance Certification
Manufacturer's Installation
Procedures
Manufacturer's Specifications
SUBMITTALS
01340-5
01700 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
-
Progress Record Documents
Final Record Document
Submittals
Warranties
Operating & Maintenance Manual
A&M Manual
Stock Material
Certificate of Occupancy
01710 CLEANING
-
02020 DECONSTRUCTION
-
02050 DEMOLITION
-
S.C. Air Quality District
Requirements
CAL/OSHA
Test Reports
Insurance
Shoring Permit
Demolition Plan and Schedules
L.A. City Bldg. & Safety
Demolition permit
-
02051 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
(DEMOLISHED BUILDING)
-
Permits and Notifications
Landfill approval
Pressure Differential recordings
Monitoring Results
Training Certificates
ACM and LBP Removal Plan
Exhaust Equipment approval
Test Laboratory Certification
Industrial Hygienist Certification
02052 LEAD-BASED PAINT ABATEMENT
-
Permits and Notifications
Landfill approval
Pressure Differential recordings
Monitoring Results
Training Certificates
ACM and LBP Removal Plan
Exhaust Equipment approval
Test Laboratory Certification
Industrial Hygienist Certification
02065 TREE REMOVAL
-
02110 SITE CLEARING
-
Permit
02115 TREE PROTECTION
-
SUBMITTALS
01340-6
02150 SHORING
-
Design and Calculations
Shop Drawings
Quality Control Submittals
Permits
Contract Close-Out Submittals
02220 EARTHWORK
-
Test Reports-Excavating
Permit
Import Soil Source
List of material (weed killer,
termite control)
02230 BASE COURSE
-
Product Data
02383 DRILLED FOUNDATION CAISSONS
(PIERS)
-
Product Data
Procedure for Installation
Manufacturer’s Specifications
02510 YARD WORK & STREET WORK
-
Portland Cement Mill Certificate
Product Data
Duplicated copy of permit
02513 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING
-
Product Data
Certificates
Certificate of Weigh Masters
02514 THIN SET CONCRETE PAVERS -
Product Data
Manufacturer’s Installation
Procedures
02517 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE
PAVING
-
Product Data
Procedures
02523 SAND BEDDED POROUS CONCRETE PAVERS
-
Product Data
Procedures
02580
PAVEMENT MARKING
-
Product Data
Procedures
02667
-
Product Data
Procedures
Manufacturer’s Warranty
02687
NATURAL GAS DISTRIBUTION -
Product Data
Procedures
SUBMITTALS
01340-7
-
02720
-
Product Data
02730
-
Product Data
Procedures
-
02810
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
-
02834
PVC COATED CHAIN LINK FENCES
AND GATES
-
02836
-
Product Data
Procedures
Product Data
Procedures
-
Product Data
Procedures
02879
MOVABLE DECORATIVE TRASH
RECEPTACLES
-
Product Data
02911
-
Product Data
Shop Drawings
02948
02950 TREES, PLANTS AND GROUND
COVER
-
Materials and Equipment Lists
Shop Drawings
Procurement List Certification
Weekly Maintenance Schedule
Bonds
Landscape material list
02954
-
Product Data
02955
-
Product Data
Duplicated copy of Permit
Portland Cement Mill Certificate
SUBMITTALS
01340-8
02970 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE AND
TREE ESTABLISHMENT
-
Materials and Equipment Lists
Shop Drawings
Procurement List Certification
Weekly Maintenance Schedule
Bonds
Landscape material list
03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK
-
Product Data
Procedures
List of work items
03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT -
Materials List
Manufacturer's Specifications &
placement layout
Procedures
Shop Drawings
03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
-
03310 LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE
-
04220 CONCRETE BLOCK MASONRY -
Product Data
Samples & Tests
Laboratory Test Reports
Portland Cement Mill Certificates
Concrete Mix Design and Curing
Method
Load Tickets
Expansion and Control Joint
Layout
Permit
Patching method and procedure
Product Data
Samples & Tests
Shop Drawings
Laboratory Test Reports
Portland Cement Mill Certificates
Concrete Mix Design and Curing
Method
Load Tickets
Expansion and Control Joint
Layout
Permit
Patching method and procedure
Color Samples
Sample Panel
Shop Drawings
Sandblast permit
SUBMITTALS
01340-9
04411 GRANITE AND LIMESTONE
COUNTERTOPS
-
Samples
Installation Procedures
Shop Drawings
05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL
-
Product Data
Shop Drawings and erection plans
Mill Certificates
Mill Test Reports
Welder's Certificate
Test Reports
Shop and Field Inspection
05300 METAL DECKING
-
Product Data
Shop Drawings
Manufacturer's recommended
installation
Materials List
05410 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
-
05500 METAL FABRICATIONS
-
Product Data
Shop Drawings and structural
calculations
Mill Certificates
Welder's Certificate
Pre-installation conference
Materials List
Shop Drawings
Samples
Templates
Procedures
Certificates
05506 ENCLOSURE GATES
-
Shop Drawings
Guarantee / Warranty
05515 STEEL LADDER
-
Materials List
Shop Drawings
Samples
Templates
Procedures
Certificates
-
Shop Drawings
05551 PEDESTRIAN MAT GRATINGS
SUBMITTALS
01340-10
06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY
-
Shop Drawings
Material List
06171 GLUE LAMINATED STRUCTURAL
UNITS
-
-
Procedures
Manufacturer’s Product
Information
06200 FINISH CARPENTRY
-
Shop Drawings
Material List
Certification
06400 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
-
Shop Drawings
Material List
Certification
Samples
Mock-up
Procedures
Manufacturer's Product
Information
Guarantee/Warranty
-
06427 PLASTIC COATED HARDBOARD
PANEL WORK (MARLITE)
-
-
Procedures
Manufacturer’s Product
Information
Guarantee/Warranty
07150 DAMPPROOFING FOR PLANTERS
-
Product Data
Application Procedures
Warranty/Guarantee
07200 THERMAL AND ACOUSTICAL
INSULATION
-
Product Data
Warranty/Guarantee
Certification
07226 RIGID ROOF INSULATION
-
Product Data
Application Procedures
Warranty/Guarantee
07270 FIRESTOPPING
-
Product Data
Shop Drawings
Samples
Warranty
Installer Qualifications
Manufacturer's Engineering
judgment identification number
and drawing details
-
SUBMITTALS
01340-11
07411 STANDING SEAM ROOF
SYSTEM
and
07435 FLAT METAL WALL PANELS
-
07436 MOISTURE RETARDER – DOUBLE
BUILDING PAPER
-
Shop Drawings
Procedures
Product Data
Samples
Certification
Applicator's Certification
Warranty
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Procedures
Samples
Certification
Applicator’s Certification
Warranty
07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL -
Manufacturer's /Product Data
Shop Drawings
Samples
Warranty
Procedures
07830 ROOF HATCHES
-
Product Data
Shop Drawings
Samples
Warranty
Installer Qualifications
Manufacturer's Engineering
judgment identification number
and drawing details
07829 FLAT GLAZED SKYLIGHTS
-
Product Data
Shop Drawings
Procedures
Warranty
Certification
-
Product Data
Samples
Warranty
Proof of Quality
-
Shop Drawings
Maintenance Material
Color Sample
Gauge Level
07900 SEALANTS AND CAULKING
08110 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
SUBMITTALS
01340-12
-
Manufacturer's Specification
Procedures
08210 WOOD DOORS
-
Shop Drawings
08305 ACCESS PANELS
-
Shop Drawings
08413 ALUMINUM CLERESTORY
(INTERIOR)
and
08520 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
-
Shop Drawings Including
Structural Calculations
Materials List
Procedures
Samples
Certificates
-
08710 FINISH HARDWARE
-
08720
AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOORS
-
Product Data
Finish Hardware Schedule &
Floor Plans
Templates
Samples
Keys
Materials List
Shop Drawings
Procedures
Operation and Maintenance
Instructions
Control and Wiring Diagrams
Keys
08800 GLAZING
-
Material List
Product Data
Samples
Labeling
Procedures
08911 STRUCTURAL GLAZING- CORNER
WINDOW
-
Material List
Product Data
Samples
Labeling
Procedures
SUBMITTALS
01340-13
08921 GLAZED CURTAIN WAL, STORE
FRONT AND DOOR SYSTEM
-
Material List
Product Data
Samples
Labeling
Procedures
09200 LATH AND PLASTER
-
Product Data
Material List
Samples
Shop Drawing including
Structural Calculation
09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEM
-
Samples
Product Data
Manufacturer's Recommended
Instruction & Specification
Procedures
-
09330 CERAMIC TILE
-
Product Data
Certificates
Samples
Procedures
Shop Drawings
09500 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
-
Product Data
Samples
Manufacturer's Data
Shop Drawings
Material List
Certification
Warranty
09514 ACOUSTICAL (TECTUM) CEILINGS
-
Product Data
Samples
Manufacturer's Data
Shop Drawings
Material List
Certification
Warranty
09647 LAMINATE WOOD FLORING
-
Product Data
Samples
Manufacturer’s Data
Certification
Warranty
09650 RESILIENT FLOORING
-
Samples
-
SUBMITTALS
01340-14
09690 CARPET (GLUE-DOWN)
-
09784 CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER
-
09860 ANTI-GRAFFITI COATING
Samples
Shop Drawings
Tests
Procedures
Manufacturer's Certification
Material Lists
Maintenance Manual
Product Data
Extra Stock
Manufacturer's Instructions
Warranty
Procedures
Product Data
Warranty
-
Product Data
Material List
Procedures
Pre-warranty Application Form
Guarantee
09900 PAINTING
-
Samples
Extra Stock/Maintenance Material
Manufacturer's Data
10102 WHITE MARKER BOARDS
-
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Guarantee
Procedures
10107 TACKABLE SURFACES
-
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Guarantee
Procedures
-
Product Data & Manufacturer's
recommended installations
Maintenance Materials
Material Lists
Certification or references
Cleaning and maintenance data
SUBMITTALS
01340-15
10155 STAINLESS STEEL TOILET
PARTITIONS
-
10202 METAL LOUVERS (BAKED
ENAMEL)
-
10340 SERPENTINE BICYCLE RACK
-
10350 FLAGPOLES
-
10400 INTERIOR SIGNAGE
-
Product Data
Shop Drawings
Samples
Guarantee
Procedures
Shop Drawings
Samples
Guarantee
Procedures
Product Data
Test Reports
Certifications
Applicator Qualification
Product Data
Material Lists
Procedures
Shop Drawings
Samples
Warranty
Product Data
Procedures
Shop Drawings
Samples
Permit
Warranty
Shop Drawings
Product Data
wARRANTY
Procedures
Samples
Material, Equipment & Fixture
Lists
Signage Schedule
SUBMITTALS
01340-16
10415 BUILDING SIGN
-
10416 DISPLAY CASES AND BULLETIN
BOARDS and TACK BOARDS
Shop Drawings
Product Data
wARRANTY
Procedures
Samples
Material, Equipment & Fixture
Lists
Signage Schedule
-
10420 WALL CLOCK
-
10421 WALL SAFE
-
10422 BOOK RETURN
-
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Guarantee
Procedures
Samples
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Guarantee
Procedures
Samples
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Guarantee
Procedures
Samples
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Guarantee
Procedures
Samples
10423 CAST BRONZE IDENTIFICATION
-
Product Data
Sample
10520 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS,
CABINETS & ACCESSORIES
-
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Material Lists
Guarantee
SUBMITTALS
01340-17
10700 METAL LOCKERS
-
Procedures
Samples
-
Shop and Erection Drawings
Product Data
Material Lists
Warranty
Guarantee
Procedures
Samples
10754 PUBLIC PAY TELEPHONES
-
Product Data
Sample
10757 WALL MOUNTED SHELF TYPE ENCLOSURE
Product Data
Sample
10800 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES -
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Fastener Data
Material Lists
Guarantee
Warranty
Procedures
Samples
11051 COMPUTER MONITOR SUPPORT
SYSTEM
-
11053 BOOK DETECTION SYSTEM
-
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Material Lists
Guarantee
Warranty
Procedures
Samples
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Material Lists
Guarantee
Warranty
Procedures
SUBMITTALS
01340-18
11054 LIBRARY SHELVING
11106 DISPLAYWALL
-
11132 PROJECTION SCREENS
-
11452 APPLIANCES
-
12527 MECHANIZED WINDOW SHADES
-
15050 BASIC MECHANICAL
REQUIREMENTS
-
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Material Lists
Warranty
Guarantee
Procedures
Samples
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Material Lists
Guarantee
Procedures
Samples
Mock-up
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Material Lists
Warranty
Procedures
Samples
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Material Lists
Warranty
Procedures
Operating and Maintenance
Manual
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Warranty
Procedures
Material Lists
Samples
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Guarantee
Procedures
SUBMITTALS
01340-19
15100 VALVES FOR HVAC SYSTEMS
-
Samples
-
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Guarantee
Procedures
Samples
15121 PIPING EXPANSION
COMPENSATION
15140 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
FOR HVAC SYSTEMS
-
15141 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
FOR FIRE PROTECTION
-
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Guarantee
Procedures
15170 MOTORS
-
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Warranty
15190 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION -
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Guarantee
Procedures
Samples
Record Drawings
15245 VIBRATION CONTROL
-
-
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Guarantee
Procedures
Samples
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Guarantee
Procedures
Samples
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Guarantee
Procedures
SUBMITTALS
01340-20
15260 PIPING INSULATION
-
Samples
-
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Guarantee
Procedures
Samples
-
15260 DUCTWORK INSULATION
-
15330 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
-
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Guarantee
Procedures
Samples
-
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Procedures
Samples
Record Drawings
Certification
Operations and Instructions
Manual
Permits
Inspections
15535 REGRIGERATION PIPING AND
SPECIALITIES
-
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Guarantee
Record Drawings
15410
15430
15440
15450
-
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Guarantee
Procedures
Samples
Record Drawings
-
PLUMBING PIPING
PLUMBING SPECIALITIES
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
-
SUBMITTALS
01340-21
15600 HEATING, VENTILATING
AIR CONDITIONING (H.V.A.C.)
-
-
Product Data
Shop Drawings
Calculations
Record Drawings
Guarantee
Procedures
Samples
Control Diagrams
Balancing Procedures and
Reports
Permits
Inspections
Maintenance and Operating
Manual
Test and Supervision Report
15623 FORCED AIR FURNACES
-
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Guarantee
Record Drawings
15625 GAS FIRED DUCT FURNACE
-
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Guarantee
Record Drawings
15870 POWER VENTILATORS
-
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Guarantee
Procedures
Samples
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Guarantee
Record Drawings
-
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Guarantee
Record Drawings
-
15671 AIR COOLED CONDITIONING UNIT
15855 AIR HANDLING UNITS WITH COILS
SUBMITTALS
01340-22
15885 AIR CLEANING
-
15890 DUCTWORK
-
15910 DUCT ACCESSORIES
-
15920 SOUND ATTENUATORS
-
15940 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
-
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Guarantee
Procedures
Samples
Record Drawings
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Guarantee
Procedures
Samples
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Guarantee
Procedures
Samples
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Guarantee
Procedures
Samples
Product Data
Shop Drawings
Calculations
Record Drawings
Guarantee
Procedures
Samples
Control Diagrams
Reports
Permits
Inspections
Manual
SUBMITTALS
01340-23
15973 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS
SYSTEM
-
-
Product Data
Shop Drawings
Calculations
Record Drawings
Guarantee
Procedures
Samples
Control Diagrams
Reports
Permits
Inspections
Manual
15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND
BALANCING
-
Product Data
Shop Drawings
Calculations
Record Drawings
15995 HVAC SYSTEM TESTING
BALANCING, AND PERFORMANCE
VERIFICATION
-
Product Data
Shop Drawings
Calculations
Record Drawings
16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
-
Shop Drawings
Material List
Test Reports
-
16111 CONDUITS
16112 SURFACE RACEWAYS
-
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Guarantee
Procedures
Samples
16113 UNDERFLOOR DUCT SYSTEM -
Material List
16114 CABLE TRAYS
-
Material List
Color Coding
Test Reports
16118 DUCT BANK
-
Material List
Shop Drawings
16123 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE
-
Material List
Color Coding
Test Reports
SUBMITTALS
01340-24
16130 BOXES
-
Material List
Installation Drawings
16140 WIRING DEVICES
-
Material List
Shop Drawings
16141 NAMEPLATES AND WARNING
SIGNS
-
Nameplate Schedule
16160 CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
-
Material List
Shop Drawings
16170 GROUNDING AND BONDING
-
Product Data
Shop Drawings
16180 EQUIPMENT WIRING SYSTEMS
-
Equipment Wiring Diagram
Equipment Interconnection Wiring
Diagram
Material List
16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES
-
Material List
16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
-
Material List
Nameplate Data
16421 UTILITY SERVICE ENTRANCE
-
Utility Interface Diagram
Material List
16426 DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS
-
Shop Drawings
16440 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
-
Product Data
16441 ENCLOSED SWITCHES
-
Product Data
16450 SECONDARY GROUNDING
-
Material List
Grounding Method Description
Test Reports
16470 PANEL BOARDS
-
Material List
Lock and Key Information
Nameplate Identification
16476 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
-
Product Data
16480 MOTOR CONTROL
-
Product Data
16485 CONTACTERS
-
Product Data
16510 INTERIOR LUMINARES
-
Product Data
SUBMITTALS
01340-25
1.5
16530 SITE LIGHTING
-
Product Data
16613 EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY
-
Product Data
Shop Drawings
16710 STRUCTURED TELECOMMUNI- CATIONS, CABLING AND
PATHWAYS SYSTEM
Product Data
System Operation
16712 TELECOMMUNICATION BASIC
MATERIALS AND METHODS
-
Product Data
System Operation
16713 TELECOMMUNICATIONS
DISTRIBUTIONS SYSTEM
-
Product Data
System Operation
16720 INTRUSION ALARM SYSTEM
System Documentation
Written Description
Record Drawings
Spare Parts List
Test Reports
16721 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
-
16741 TELEPHONE SERVICE,
PATHWAY AND WIRING
-
Product Data
System Operation
16742 VOICE AND DATA WIRING AND
CABLE
-
Product Data
System Operation
16745 LOCAL AREA NETWORK
-
Product Data
System Operation
16771 MULTIPURPOSE ROOM
SOUND SYSTEM
-
Product Data
System Operation
16790 DATA WIRING SYSTEM
-
Product Data
System Operation
Shop Drawings
Product Data
Manufacturer’s Certificates
Test Procedures
Operating & Maintenance
Instruction Manuals
Applicator Certification
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Required: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment and methods of
construction required by the Contract Documents shall conform to the provisions
entitled "REFERENCE TO TRADE NAMES" in the GENERAL CONDITIONS of the
Specifications after award of Contract.
SUBMITTALS
01340-26
1.
B.
All substitution requests shall be made by the Prime Contractor and shall
imply Prime Contractor's approval of such substitutions.
The Following Are Not Considered As Substitutions:
1.
Substitutions requested by Bidders during the bidding period, and accepted
prior to award of Contract, are considered as included in the Contract
Documents and are not subject to requirements specified in this Section for
substitutions.
2.
Revisions to Contract Documents requested by the City Engineer.
3.
Specified options of products and construction methods included in Contract
Documents.
4.
The Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations
and orders issued by governing authorities.
5.
Substitutions will not be considered when indicated or implied on the Shop
Drawings or on Product Data submittals without separate written requests.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
Contractor shall perform no portion of the work requiring submittal and review of shop drawings,
product data, samples, etc until such submittal have been reviewed by the City Engineer. All
work not shown or approved, shop drawings by the City Engineer or not conforming to the
contract plans and specification shall be removed without additional cost to the City.
--End of Section --
SUBMITTALS
01340-27
SECTION 01380
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
Required: Provide photographs taken at the job-site at the specified stages of
Contracted Work in accordance with provisions of this Section.
1.
Take two views at 30 day intervals during the period of Contracted Work.
2.
Take first photographs just before Contractor starts any work operations at the
job-site.
3.
Take final photographs when all Contracted Work has been completed,
regardless of time interval since previous photographs were taken.
Related Work:
1.
1.2
1.3
to, GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS and Sections in
DIVISION 1 of the Project Manual.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340.
B.
Except as otherwise directed by the City Engineer, submit 3 color, glossy prints of each
photograph.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Secure the services of a professional photographer who is skilled and experienced in
construction photography and whose work samples are acceptable to the City Engineer.
B.
Do not replace the photographer without the City Engineer's written approval.
C.
Require the photographer to retain the negatives for at least one year following Date of
Substantial Completion, and to provide additional prints to the City during that period at
the prevailing commercial rates for such prints.
D.
Do not permit prints to be issued for any other purpose without specific written approval
from the City Engineer.
E.
Photographs and prints to be of professional quality; clear, in focus and with high
resolution and sharpness, with minimum distortion. Prints to be with contrast, detail and
finish for acceptable reproduction by half-tone cut.
CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPGHY
01380-1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A.
B.
Provide color prints:
1.
Size: 8" x 10"'
2.
Type: Smooth surface, glossy print, single weight paper with white base
mounted on muslin or on double weight glossy paper.
On the back of each print, in a manner not damaging to the print, identify the following:
1.
Job name;
2.
Location from which photographed;
3.
Date of photograph;
4.
Photographer's name, address, and photograph number.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
A.
View Locations: As directed by the City Engineer. Location(s) to provide diversified
overall view of the work from a position which is expected to remain accessible
throughout progress of the Contracted Work for added photography.
B.
Weather Conditions: When inclement weather is anticipated, consult with the City
Engineer to determine acceptable alternate arrangements.
C.
Timing of Photography: To the maximum extent practicable, take photographs at the
same time of day throughout progress of the Contracted Work.
D.
On Contract Drawing: Photographer to identify each photograph location or by such
other means as acceptable to the City Engineer, to enable future photographs to be
taken from the same location and position.
E.
Change of Locations: When so directed by the City Engineer because of construction,
change one or more of the locations inside or outside of the building(s).
F.
Views: Minimum of three locations.
G.
Notifications: Notify the City Engineer seven days in advance of proposed day of
photography.
CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPGHY
01380-2
SECTION 01400
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
1.3
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including GENERAL and
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply
to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for quality control
services.
B.
Quality control services include inspections and tests and related actions including
reports performed by independent agencies, governing authorities, and the Contractor.
They do not include Contract enforcement activities performed by the Consultant or
City Engineer.
C.
Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements
specified or indicated. These services do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for
compliance with Contract Document requirements.
D.
Requirements of this Section relate to customized fabrication and installation
procedures, not production of standard products.
1.
Specific quality control requirements for individual construction activities are
specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Those requirements,
including inspections and tests, cover production of standard products as well
as customized fabrication and installation procedures.
2.
Inspections, tests and related actions specified are not intended to limit the
Contractor's quality control procedures that facilitate compliance with
Contract Document requirements.
3.
Requirements for the Contractor to provide quality control services required by
the Consultant, City, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by
provisions of this Section.
RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
Contractor Responsibilities: The Contractor shall provide inspections, tests and similar
quality control services, specified in individual Specification Sections and required by
governing authorities, except where they are specifically indicated to be the City's
responsibility, or are provided by another identified entity; these services include those
specified to be performed by an independent agency and not by the Contractor. Costs
for these services shall be included in the Contract Sum.
1.
The City will engage and pay for the services of an independent agency to
perform inspections and tests specified as the City's responsibility.
01400-1
a.
2.
Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of
required inspections, tests or similar services prove unsatisfactory and do not
indicate compliance with Contract Document requirements, regardless of
whether the original test was the Contractor's responsibility.
a.
3.
4.
B.
Where the City has engaged a testing agency or other entity for
testing and inspection of a part of the Work, and the Contractor is
also required to engage an entity for the same or related element, the
Contractor shall not employ the entity engaged by the City, unless
otherwise agreed in writing with the City.
Cost of retesting construction revised or replaced by the Contractor
is the Contractor’s responsibility, where required tests were
performed on original construction.
Associated Services: The Contractor shall cooperate with agencies
performing required inspections, tests and similar services and provide
reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Contractor shall include the
required inspections, tests, and similar services in the Construction
Schedule; and all associated cost in contract sum. Notify the agency
sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel.
Coordinate with all parties and attend all required Pre-Testing Procedural
Conference. Verify with the Engineer of Record for all testing locations and
procedures. Obtain from Engineer of Record all other required observation
reports or records. If the agency is employed by the City, Contractor shall
coordinate and request the services through the Inspector seven (7) days in
advance. Inspector shall verify with the work for the readiness of the
inspection and tests. Auxiliary services required include but are not limited to:
a.
Providing access to the Work and furnishing incidental labor and
facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests.
b.
Taking adequate quantities of representative samples of materials
that require testing or assisting the agency in taking samples.
c.
Providing facilities for storage and curing off test samples, and
delivery of samples to testing laboratories.
d.
Providing the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use
for materials mixes that require control by the testing agency.
e.
Security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project
site.
f.
Providing demolition, removal or required work necessary to expose
the area for the review, inspection and testings.
Remove all debris as a result of the review, inspection and testing. Providing
patching, repair and refinish to affected area after inspection and testing, in
accordance with Subsection 3.1 herein.
City Responsibilities: The City will provide inspections, tests and similar quality control
services specified to be performed by independent agencies and not by the Contractor,
01400-2
except where they are specifically indicated as the Contractor's responsibility or are
provided by another identified entity. Costs for these services are not included in the
Contract Sum.
C.
1.
The City will employ and pay for the services of an independent agency,
testing laboratory or other qualified firm to perform services, which are the
City's responsibility.
2.
The agency employed by the City shall be allowed a period of ten (10) days to
prepare the written report after the inspection, tests or similar services are
performed.
Coordination: The Contractor and each agency engaged to perform inspections, tests
and similar services shall coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate
required services with a minimum of delay. In addition, the Contractor and each
agency shall coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing
construction to accommodate inspections and tests.
1.
1.4
The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests,
taking samples and similar activities.
SUBMITTALS
A.
The independent testing agency shall submit a certified written report of each
inspection, test or similar service, to the City Engineer, in duplicate, unless the
Contractor is responsible for the service. If the Contractor is responsible for the
service, submit a certified written report of each inspection, test or similar service
through the Contractor, with seven (7) duplicated copies to City Engineer for review in
accordance with provisions shown in Section 11 - SHOP DRAWINGS AND
MANUFACTURER’S DATA of the General Conditions.
1.
Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the governing
authority, when the authority so directs.
2.
Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test or similar service shall
include, but not be limited to:
a.
Date of issue.
b.
Project Title and Number.
c.
Name, address and telephone number of testing agency.
d.
Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
e.
Names of individuals making the inspection or test.
f.
Designation of the Work and test method.
g.
Identification of produce and Specification Section.
h.
I.
Complete inspection or test data.
Test results and interpretations of test results.
01400-3
1.5
j.
Ambient conditions at the time of sample-taking and testing.
k.
Comments or professional opinion as to whether inspected or tested
Work complies with Contract Document requirements.
l.
Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
m.
Recommendations on retesting.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Qualification for Service Agencies: Engage inspection and testing service agencies,
including independent testing laboratories, which are pre-qualified as complying with
"Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification" by the
American Council of Independent Laboratories, and which specialize in the types of
inspections and tests to be performed. Laboratory has to be pre-approved by L. A. B.
& S. and Contract Administrator. Agencies must also be pre-qualified by the
Department of Building and Safety and the Bureau of Contract Administration.
1.
Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on the Project
shall be authorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in the State in
which the Project is located.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A.
General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample-taking and similar services,
repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate
deficiencies, including deficiencies in visual qualities of exposed finishes. Comply with
Contract Document requirements for "Cutting and Patching" - Section 01045.
B.
Protect construction exposed by or for quality control service activities, and protect
repaired construction.
C.
Repair and protection is the Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment
of responsibility for inspection, testing or similar services.
--End of Section --
01400-4
SECTION 01500
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
This Section describes construction facilities and temporary controls required for the
Contracted work at the ENCINO-TARZANA BRANCH LIBRARY job-site.
B.
Related Work:
1.
2.
Except that equipment furnished by subcontractors shall comply with
requirements of pertinent safety regulations, such equipment normally
furnished by the individual trades in execution of their own portions of the
Work are not part of this Section.
3.
Permanent installation and hookup of the various utility lines are described in
other Sections.
REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide construction facilities and temporary controls needed for the Contracted Work
including, but not necessarily limited to:
1.
Temporary utilities such as water, cooling/heating, ventilation, electricity, and
telephone with answering machine or voice mail, separate fax line and fax
machine;
2.
Field Office for the Contractor's personnel;
3.
Sanitary facilities with sink;
4.
Enclosures such as tarpaulins, barricades, and canopies;
5.
Temporary fencing of the construction site;
6.
Project sign; Contractor shall prepare the Project sign for the ground breaking
ceremonies if so directed by the City Engineer.
7.
Plan box;
8.
Temporary partitions;
9.
Job Office for the Architect and/or City Engineer.
10.
Plan rack;
01500-1
1.3
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver temporary facilities and controls to the job-site and store where located as
directed by the City Engineer.
B.
Maintain temporary facilities and controls at the job-site in proper and safe condition
throughout progress of the Contracted Work.
C.
Handle temporary facilities and controls in a manner prescribed by the City Engineer
to least interrupt existing facility operations.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Comply with pertinent provisions in the SUBMITTALS SECTION 01340 in
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS of these Specifications.
B.
Submit all certification of insurance and bonding, and photograph of off-site storage
area
C.
Submit duplicate copy of permits, transfer of rental fencing and utility billings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
UTILITIES
A.
Water: Contractor to arrange with the City Department of Water and Power; assume
all costs to remove all existing connections to water facilities, make new connection
for construction water including water as necessary for required tests. Contractor
shall make transfer of billing of any existing water facilities prior to start of work.
Contractor shall deliver duplicates of such transfer to the City Engineer. Wasting of
water will be prohibited.
B.
Temporary Ventilation: Provide adequate means to furnish temporary ventilation within
work areas at Contractor's own expense and conforming to applicable requirements
and standards of Federal, State, County and City.
C.
Temporary Light and Power: Contractor to arrange with City Department of Water and
Power; to assume all costs; to remove all existing connections to power facilities; to
make new connections for construction light and power including light and power as
necessary for required tests. Contractor shall maintain all necessary facilities or
operations, and turn off all unnecessary equipment. Contractor shall make transfer of
billing of any existing power facilities prior to start of work. Contractor shall deliver
duplicate copy of such transfer to the City Engineer.
D.
Telephone: Contractor shall arrange, pay and maintain for temporary telephone
service from the local Telephone Company; Contractor shall assume all costs and pay
for all calls over the job telephones and fax machines, job telephone to be so located
that it is easily accessible from the job office; job telephone to be provided with an
outside extension bell. The job telephone shall be for City personnel use only.
E.
Gas for Tests: Contractor shall arrange and pay for temporary gas service from the
Gas Company, Contractor shall assume all costs.
01500-2
F.
2.2
Heating: Provide and maintain required temporary heat at no cost to the City for
proper conduct of Contracted Work operations, conforming to all requirements of the
latest edition of Los Angeles City Building Code and Amendments.
FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS
A.
Contractor's Facilities:
1.
Contractor shall provide and locate in safe area an adequate size temporary
shed for the safe storage of all materials and equipment. The shed shall be
weathertight with a wood floor above grade. The shed shall be removed from
the job-site upon the completion of Contracted Work or when so ordered by
the Inspector or City Engineer.
2.
Within Contractor's Field Office provide tables, chairs and utilities.
B.
Sanitary Facilities: Adequate sanitary conveniences of an approved type for the use of
persons employed on the work, and properly secluded from public observation, shall
be provided and maintained by the Contractor in such a manner and at such points as
shall be required or approved by the Inspector. These conveniences shall be
maintained at all times without nuisances and their use shall be strictly enforced.
Upon completion of the Contracted Work, they shall be removed from the premises,
leaving the premises clean and free from nuisance.
C.
Job Bulletin Board: Provide and mount on the Contractor's Field Office where it can be
readily seen by the Contractor's employees.
1.
D.
Substantially built 3-feet high x 4-feet wide with a framed glass door protected
on the outside with a 2-inch x 2-inch galvanized mesh and lock.
Job Office: The Contractor shall provide one separate office for the Inspector for the
entire period of construction or until Inspector directs its removal. The location shall
be as directed by the City Engineer. The construction shall be temporary; weathertight; 12-feet by 60-feet, 720 square foot floor area (minimum); screened windows with
security, that open in opposite walls; door with latch set and hasp for padlocking;
padlock to be furnished by the City; furniture shall be provided as follows: Built-in 12
foot plan counter; (3) 5-foot double pedestal desks; (3) metal lockable 4 drawer file
cabinet for filing; 9-inch x 12-inch folders; (3) chairs; (1) stool; (1) plan rack; fax
machine; auto feeder and auto sorter photo copier; (1) Dell Notebook Inspiron 7500
Series, 15.4: Super XGA Display, 750Mhz Pentium III Intel Speedstep Technology,
192 MB SDRAM 2 Dimms, 30 GB Ultra ATA Hard Drive, removable combo 32x Max
CD ROM & 3.5 Floppy Drive, internal 56K capable V.90 Fax modem, 8MB AI mobility
P3D Video with 2x AGP, 69 watts 17500/hr Li-ion Secondary battery, 3-yr warranty
and on site parts and labor service with, a laser printer, Microsoft Windows Millenium,
Norton Antivirus 2000 for Windows Millenium, Microsoft Office 2000 Professional,
nylon carrying case dual compartment for 15.4" screen size; hot and cold drinking
water dispenser with a maintenance service agreement, (3) telephones with multiple
lines (one telephone at the plan table), including a fax line, (2) two way radios with
batteries and charging units. Electrical power shall be provided for (8) duplex
convenient outlets, and office shall be illuminated at the counter (with incandescent
lights) and desks. Provide heating and air-conditioning of sufficient capacity to control
the temperature at all times. Contractor will pay for all utility fees throughout the
course of construction. The Contractor shall provide maintenance service agreement
for the job office and equipment mentioned above during the course of the contract and
01500-3
extra work. All equipment shall be turned in to the City Engineer, 600 South Spring
Street Suite 200 after the acceptance of the contract. Upon completion of the
Contractor Work, leave area broom clean; remove all rubbish from the City property.
C.
2.3
2.4
Potable Water Facility: Adequate potable water facility of an approved type for the use
of all persons employed on the work, shall be provided and maintained by the
Contractor in such manner to be required or approved by the Inspector. The potable
water facility shall be disinfected clean and equipped with sink, soap, paper towels
and maintained clean at all time without nuisances. Contractor shall provide water
supply for the public use, and required drain system.
ENCLOSURES
A.
Precaution shall be exercised by the Contractor at all times for the protection of
persons and property.
B.
Contractor shall furnish or cause to be furnished and maintained for the duration of
Contracted Work. All scaffolds, covers, tarpaulins, canopies, warning signs, steps,
bridges and other temporary construction and other protective devices as required by
the Inspector and the Local and State Rules, Ordinances and/or Regulations
necessary for protection of public and private property and the public safety.
C.
Such enclosures shall be of reasonable good appearances and shall be maintained
free of signs, posters, writing, markings and any other things which would detract from
reasonably good appearance.
TEMPORARY FENCING AND GATES
A.
Required: Provide and maintain for the duration of the Contracted Work temporary
fencing of design and type needed to prevent entry onto the job-site (work area) by the
public.
B.
Construction: Conform to Division 44 of the Los Angeles City Building Code, where
adjacent to any public way.
C.
Plywood Fence: Required by the Los Angeles City Building Code, where adjacent to
a public way; apply two coats of an exterior oil pint of colors as approved by the City
Engineer. Apply two coats of an exterior semi-gloss enamel and ANTI-GRAFFITI
Coating specified in Section 09860.
D.
1.
Color shall be as directed by the City Engineer.
2.
Remove graffiti (if any) once a week throughout the contract time.
3.
Post signs that read "POST NO BILLS".
4.
Plywood fences shall be constructed on concrete foundation and subject to
the wind force or other loading.
5.
Any company logo or other posting is prohibited.
Chain Link Fence: Where required, conform to the [1999] Los Angeles City Building
Codes and Amendments and Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction.
01500-4
1.
2.5
2.6
Provide an approved (6) foot high chain link fence with (3) foot high barbed
wire and metal supports above the fence. All vertical poles and horizontal
rails, tension bars, etc. shall be in conformance with the Standard
Specifications for Public Works Construction.]
E.
Chain Link Fence and/with a Opening Along Property Lines: Provide an approved 6foot high chain link fence and gate with metal supports and (3) foot high barbed wire
above the fence along the property lines and/or at openings to prevent access to the
job site.
F.
Outside Property Lines: Contractor shall obtain all necessary written approvals
from the City Engineer and the local authorities having jurisdiction prior to erecting
and temporary chain link fencing. Contractor shall remove all chain link fencing
and repair all sidewalks or existing improvements after completion of Contract.
PLAN BOX
A.
Purpose: For the storage of a full set of Contracted job plans and specifications.
B.
Duration: During the entire Contracted Work period or until the City Engineer direct its
removal.
C.
Location: Where directed by the City Engineer, for location in close proximity of the
Contractor's Field Office on the job-site.
D.
Construction: Box shall be of size to contain the job plans, shall be temporary,
weathertight, with cover, lock and proper identification.
CONSTRUCTION SIGN
NOTE: 1.
2.
SPECIFIER SHALL REVIEW AND VERIFY WITH THE CONTRACT
DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS AND MATERIAL SPECIFIED HEREIN.
THE CITY SEAL SHALL BE EIGHT INCHES IN DIAMETER, CODE NO. 6
OFFICIAL SEAL.
A.
Design: As indicated on the Contract Drawings.
B.
Materials:
C.
1.
Posts: 4-inch x 4-inch redwood, C.R.A. Foundation grade.
2.
Frame: Douglas fir solid stock, W.C.L.B., and Better, V.G. Finish.
3.
Metal Panel: No. 22 gauge sheet steel.
4.
City Seal: Provided by City Engineer.
Fabrication:
1.
Securely attach frame to posts with adequate fasteners.
2.
Miter and nail frame, conceal fastenings and set nails.
01500-5
3.
D.
Secure sheet metal panel to frame with wood stops, as indicated on the
Contract Drawings.
Painting:
1.
By sign painters.
2.
On all surfaces of posts, panel and frame, 1 coat of primer and 1 coat of finish
paint on concealed surfaces not glued; 1 coat of primer and 2 coats of finish
paint on exposed surfaces.
3.
With exterior wood primer and exterior oil paint as specified in Section 09900.
4.
White finish on all surfaces; black letters and black frame reveals.
E.
Installation: Set posts into natural ground; location as directed by the City Engineer or
where indicated on the Contract Drawings. Sign may be constructed with temporary
supports for the purpose of relocation during construction when previously approved by
the City Engineer.
F.
Shop Drawing: Required
G.
Removal: Upon completion of Contracted Work or when directed by the City Engineer.
H.
Modifications: During the course of the Contract, the Contractor may be required to
make changes to lettering, as directed by the City Engineer, up to forty (40) letters
regardless of the letter size, without additional cost to the City. Repair and recoat the
modified area in a manner that will eliminate the evidence of the changes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL
A.
Maintain temporary facilities and controls as long as needed for safe and proper
completion of the Contracted Work.
B.
Remove such temporary facilities and controls as rapidly as progress of the
Contracted Work will permit, or as directed by the City Engineer.
C.
The Contractor shall provide temporary facilities and control as soon as possible. The
Contractor shall commence contract works and provide security and protection to
existing facility and job site within 15 days from the Notice-To-Proceed.
D.
Temporary fencing and gate(s) shall be with a double-locking method to allow dual
access by the City Employee and Contractor.
E.
Repair all streets or yard paving to the original conditions.
Contractor shall provide and maintain pedestrian and vehicular access in accordance with Work
Area Traffic Control Handbook (W.A.T.C.H.) latest edition.
01500-6
SECTION 01569
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
DESCRIPTION
A.
This section specifies the control of dust, noise, and vibration control that the Contractor
is required to provide for as well as other pollutants encountered by or generated by the
Contractor.
B.
Control measures specified are considered an obligation of the Contractor with the costs
included within the various contract items of work.
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
1.3
Record on daily reports any problems in complying with laws, regulations and ordinances
and corrective action taken.
SUBMITTALS
A.
In accordance with Section, 01340, furnish the following:
1.
B.
1.4
Protection Plan: After the contract is awarded, prior to the commencement of the
work, the Contractor shall meet with the Consultant and the City to discuss the
proposed Protection Plan and to develop mutual understanding relative to details
of controlling dust, noise, and vibration. Not more than 20 days after the
meeting, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Consultant for approval,
a written Protection Plan including, but not limited to, the following:
a.
A list of Federal, State and local laws, regulations and permits
concerning the abatement and control of dust, noise, and vibration that
are applicable to the Contractor's proposed operations and the
requirements imposed by those laws, regulations imposed by those laws,
regulations and permits.
b.
Procedures to be implemented to provide the required to comply with the
applicable laws and regulations.
c.
Work Area Plan showing the proposed activity in each portion of the area
and identifying the areas of limited use or nonuse. Plan shall include
measures for marking the limits of use areas.
Approval of the Contractor's Protection Plan, will not relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for adequate and continuing control of dust, noise, and vibration.
DUST CONTROL
A.
Keep dust down at all times, including during work and nonworking periods. Sprinkle or
treat, with dust suppressants, the soil at the site, and other areas disturbed by operations.
Dry power brooming will not be permitted. Instead, use vacuuming, wet mopping, wet
sweeping, or wet power brooming.
01569-1
B.
Air blowing will be permitted only for cleaning nonparticulate debris such as steel
reinforcing bars except as otherwise specified.
C.
Only wet cutting will be permitted for cutting concrete blocks, concrete, and bituminous
concrete. Do not unnecessarily shake bags of cement, concrete mortar, or plaster.
1.
1.5
Particulates Control: Maintain all excavations, stockpiles, and all other work areas
within or outside the project boundaries free from particulates which would cause a
hazard or a nuisance.
NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL
A.
General: Take every action practicable to minimize noise and vibration. Perform noise
and vibration producing work in less sensitive hours of the day as directed by the
Consultant or City.
B.
Maintain noise produced by the work at or below the decibel levels and within the time
periods specified.
1.
Repetitive, high level impact noise and vibration will be permitted only between
the hours established by the Consultant and City.
2.
Repetitive impact noise on the property, when permitted, shall not exceed the
following dB limitations:
Time Duration of Impact Noise
Less than 30 seconds of any hour
Less than three minutes of any hour
Less than 12 minutes of any hour
More than 12 minutes in any hour
3.
Sound Level in dB
85
80
75
70
Provide equipment, sound-deadening devices, and take noise abatement
measures that are necessary to comply with the requirements of this contract,
consisting of, but not limited to the following:
a.
Maximum permissible construction equipment noise levels at 50 feet
(dBA):
EARTHMOVING
FRONT LOADERS
BACKHOES
DOZERS
TRACTORS
GRADERS
TRUCKS
PUMPS
GENERATORS
COMPRESSORS
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
75
MATERIALS HANDLING
CONCRETE MIXERS 75
CONCRETE PUMPS 75
CRANES
75
DERRICKS IMPACT
75
JACK HAMMERS
75
ROCK DRILLS
80
BLASTING
None
SAWS
75
VIBRATORS
75
b.
Shields or other physical barriers to restrict the transmission of noise.
c.
Soundproof housings or enclosures for noise-producing machinery.
d.
Efficient silencers on air intakes for equipment.
01569-2
4.
e.
Efficient intake and exhaust mufflers on internal combustion engines that
are maintained to have equipment perform below noise levels specified.
f.
Conduct truck loading, unloading and hauling operations so that noise is
kept to a minimum.
At least once every five successive working days while work is being performed,
above 55 dBA noise level, measure sound level for noise exposure due to the
construction. Measure noise exposure at the property line or 50 feet from the
noise source, whichever is greater. Measure the sound levels on the A weighing
network of a General Purpose sound level meter at slow response. To minimize
the effect of reflective sound waves at buildings, measurements may be taken
three to six feet in front of any building face. Submit the recorded information to
the Consultant noting any problems and the alternatives for mitigating actions.
01569-3
SECTION 01640
PRODUCT HANDLING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
1.2
A.
Work Included: Contractor shall protect products and materials scheduled for use and
installation in the Contracted Work, by means including, but not necessarily described
in detail in this Section.
B.
Related Work:
limited to, GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and
Sections in DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS of these
Specifications.
2.
In the various technical Specification Sections, additional procedures are
noted in more detail under such subheadings as "Delivery", "Storage" and
"Handling" as may be applicable to the Project.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.3
1.
Include within the Contractor's quality assurance program such procedures as are
required to assure full protection of work and materials, including but not limited to the
following as may be applicable to specific Technical Specification Sections.
1.
Qualifications of Personnel (laborer and workers).
2.
Qualifications of Manufacturers.
3.
Qualifications of Subcontractors.
4.
Applicable Codes and Regulations.
5.
Workmanship and Materials.
6.
Delivery Plan and Temporary Support Details.
B.
Include within the Contractor’s schedule are all products, materials, equipment and
purchase required for this project including the delivery and installation dates, [in
accordance with the provisions in Section 01311 - PROGRESS SCHEDULES AND
REPORTS of the Project Manual.]
C.
Submittal: Submit quality assurance program, delivery plan and schedule, temporary
support details, painting samples, etc. in accordance with provisions indicated in
Section 01340 - SUBMITTAL.
MANUFACTURERS' RECOMMENDATIONS
A.
Except as otherwise approved by the City Engineer, determine and comply with
manufacturers' recommendations on product handling, storage, and protection.
PRODUCT HANDLING
01640-1
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
PACKAGING
A.
B.
1.6
1.7
Deliver products to the job-site in their manufacturer's original container, with labels
intact and legible.
1.
Maintain packaged materials with seals unbroken and labels intact until time
of use.
2.
Promptly remove damaged material and unsuitable items from the job-site,
and promptly replace with material meeting the specified requirements, at no
additional cost to the City.
The City Engineer may reject as non-complying such material and products that do
not bear identification satisfactory to the City Engineer as to manufacturer, grade,
quality, and other pertinent information.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect finished surfaces, including jambs and soffits of openings used as
passageways, through which equipment and materials are handled.
B.
Provide protection for finished floor surfaces in traffic areas prior to allowing equipment
or materials to be moved over such surfaces.
C.
Maintain finished surfaces of Contracted Work, clean, unmarred and suitably protected
until accepted by the City.
D.
No product shall be delivered to the job-site more than 30 days before the work is
scheduled to begin unless product can be protected and sealed against weathering,
extreme temperatures and theft, to the satisfaction of the City Engineer. Storage of
sensitive electronic/electrical equipment, etc. in cargo container at the job site is not
acceptable to the City. The Contractor shall remove all product or material, as
directed by the City Engineer, at no additional cost to the City.
E.
All structural wood and steel components shall be primed, wrapped and protected
before delivery.
F.
No mechanical equipment, duct, water system and piping, hanger and support and
sensitive equipment shall be exposed to weathering, dust or other construction
environment without proper protection.
REPAIRS AND REPLACEMENTS
A.
In event of damage, promptly make replacements and repairs to the approval of the
City Engineer and at no additional cost to the City.
B.
Additional time required to secure replacements and to make repairs will not be
considered by the City Engineer to justify an extension in the Contract Time of
PRODUCT HANDLING
01640-2
Completion.
C.
Failure to protect or make repair to products, material and/or equipment may result in
withholding of payment or notification to Contractor’s Insurance or Bond Company.
PRODUCT HANDLING
01640-3
SECTION 01700
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including GENERAL and
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS and other DIVISION 1 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.
Cleaning in Section 01710.
2.
1.2
3.
Contractor’s Use of the Premises in Section 01015.
4
Library Equipment in Division 11
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.3
Submittal in Section 01340.
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project closeout,
including but not limited to:
1.
Inspection procedures.
2.
Project record document submittals.
3.
Operating and Maintenance Manual submittal.
4.
Submittal of warranties.
5.
Final cleaning.
Closeout requirements for specific construction activities are included in the
appropriate Technical Sections in Divisions 2 through 16.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial
Completion, complete the following. List exceptions in the request.
1.
In the "Request for Payment" that coincides with, or first follows, the date
Substantial Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the
portion of the Contracted Work claimed as substantially complete. Include
supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract
Documents and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the
Contract Sum.
a.
If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of
incomplete items, the value of incomplete construction, and reasons
the Work is not complete.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
01700-1
b.
B.
Include a list of incomplete or outstanding works established during a
Pre-final walk-thru as required in Section 32 - INSPECTION AND
FINAL INSPECTION of the General Conditions, and all supporting
evidence or documentation for completion.
2.
Advise City of pending insurance change-over requirements.
3.
Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements,
final certifications and similar documents. Obtain all Building and Safety's
sign-offs and submit duplicate copy of the Building and Safety's Inspection
Record to the City.
4.
Obtain and submit releases from local authorized agencies enabling the City
unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities; include the
certificate of occupancy, permits or operating certificates and similar
releases. Return all Building & Safety’s sign- off sheet and Inspection
Records to the City.
5.
Submit Record Drawings and Record Project Manual, maintenance manuals,
final project photographs, damage or settlement survey, property survey, and
similar final record information.
6.
Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items.
7.
Make final change-over of permanent locks and transmit keys to the City.
Advise the City's personnel of change-over in security provisions.
8.
Complete start-up testing of systems, and instruction of the City's operating
and maintenance personnel. Discontinue or change over and remove
temporary facilities from the job-site, along with construction tools, mock-ups,
and similar elements.
9.
Complete final clean-up requirements, including touch-up painting. Touch-up
and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes.
10.
Complete all required testing including balancing test, bacteriological
analysis, etc. Submit all test reports.
11.
Return all original permits and manifests to the City Engineer.
12.
Advise the City of pending change over of the utility services upon start-up
testing of the systems and completion of final inspection.
13.
Complete final clean up requirements, including touch-up painting. Touch-up
and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes.
14.
Make ready to proceed with landscape establishment period Submit the
maintenance schedules and logs.
Inspection Procedures: The Inspector, with cooperation from the City Engineer will
prepare a Final Inspection Correction list to that effect following inspection, or advise
the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the
construction work can be considered complete. The Contract time shall continue to
be assessed.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
01700-2
C.
1.4
1.
The Inspector, and City Engineer will repeat the inspection when requested
and assured that the Contracted Work has been satisfactorily completed.
2.
The Inspector, and City Engineer will inspect the work of the landscape
maintenance service upon completion.
3.
Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for
final acceptance. The Contract time shall stop when all corrections are
considered complete by the City.
Reinspection Fees: Should the City Engineer perform reinspection due to failure of the
Work to comply with the claim of status of completion made by the Contractor, the
Contractor will compensate City Engineer for such additional services. The City will
deduct the amount of such compensation from the final payment to Contractor.
FINAL ACCEPTANCE
A.
B.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of final
acceptance and final payment, complete the following. List exceptions in the request.
1.
Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation
not previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for
products and completed operations where required.
2.
Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to
the Contract Sum.
3.
Submit a certified copy of the Inspector’s (combined with City Engineer's) final
inspection list of items to be completed or corrected, stating that each item
has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance, and the list has
been endorsed and dated by the Inspector, the City Engineer.
4.
Submit final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and
similar data as of the date of Substantial Completion, or when the City took
possession of and responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
5.
Submit consent of surety to final payment.
6.
Submit a final liquidated damages settlement statement.
7.
Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with
insurance requirements.
8.
Return all original permits documents to the City.
9.
Submit all required certified weekly payroll records, ethnic composition of
work force reports.
Reinspection Procedure: The Inspector, and City Engineer will reinspect the
Contracted Work upon receipt of notice that the Work, including inspection list items
from earlier inspections, has been completed, except items whose completion has
been delayed because of circumstances acceptable to the City Engineer.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
01700-3
1.5
1.
Upon completion of reinspection, the Engineer will prepare a "Certificate of
Final Acceptance", or advise the Contractor of Contracted Work that is
incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for
final acceptance.
2.
If necessary, reinspection will be repeated.
RECORD DOCUMENTS SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes; protect from
deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistive location; provide access to record
documents for the City Engineer's reference during normal working hours. All record
documents shall be maintained with current status during construction and submitted
monthly for City Engineer's approval as required in Section 37- Payment of General
Conditions. All new information shall be recorded as soon as they are made or
approved by the City regardless that the work is completed or not. Any change to
this information shall be again recorded at no cost to the City.
B.
Record Drawings: Maintain a clean, undamaged set of blue or black line white-prints
of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. Mark the set to show the actual installation
where the installation varies substantially from the Contracted Work as originally
shown. Mark whichever drawing is most capable of showing conditions fully and
accurately; where Shop Drawings are used, record a cross-reference at the
corresponding location on the Contract Drawings. Give particular attention to
concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date.
Upon completion of the work, submit record drawings, record Project Manual etc, to
the City Engineer for review and for the City’s records.
1.
Mark record sets with red erasable pencil; use other colors to distinguish
between variations in separate categories of the Work.
2.
Mark new information that is important to the City, including detail from
"Request-for-Information” but was not shown on Contract Drawings or Shop
Drawings as soon as it is made available. Any subsequent revision or
changes, to the details from an earlier “Request-for-Information”, shall also be
marked immediately on the Record Drawings.
3.
Note related finalized or pending "Change Order" numbers where applicable.
4.
Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with durable
paper cover sheets, and print suitable titles, dates and other identification on
the cover of each set.
5.
Update drawing index to reflect any additional drawings or
shop drawings added to the record drawing package.
6.
Note all addenda, drawing modification, etc. on record
drawings.
7.
Where Shop Drawings are used for actual performance of the
contract work and are most capable of showing actual details, conditions, and
dimensions fully and accurately, record all the Shop Drawings and place them
in good order with the record drawings. Properly identified and bound of field,
and ready for continued use and reference.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
01700-4
8.
C.
Record Specifications: Maintain one complete copy of the Project Manual, including
addenda, and one copy of other written construction documents such as "Change
Orders" and modifications issued in printed form during construction. Mark these
document to show substantial variations in actual Contracted Work performed in
comparison with the text of the Specifications and modifications. Give particular
attention to substitutions, selection of options and similar information on elements that
are concealed or cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation.
Note related Record Drawing information and Product Data.
1.
D.
After all correction works are completed and inspected, City Engineer and
Inspector of Bureau of Contract Administration shall establish the
construction completion date.
Upon completion of the Work, submit record Specifications to the City
Engineer for the City's records.
Record Product Data: Maintain one copy of each Product Data submittal. Mark these
documents to show significant variations in actual Work performed in comparison with
information submitted. Include variations in products delivered to the site, and from the
manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations. Give particular
attention to concealed products and portions of the Work, which cannot otherwise be
readily discerned later by direct observation. Note related Change Orders and mark-up
of Record Drawings and Specifications.
1.
Upon completion of mark-up, submit complete set of Record Product Data to
the City Engineer for the City's records.
E.
Record Sample Submitted: Immediately prior to the date or dates of Substantial
Completion, the Contractor will meet at the job-site with the City Engineer and the
City's personnel to determine which of the submitted Samples that have been
maintained during progress of the Work are to be transmitted to the City for record
purposes. Comply with delivery to the City's Sample storage area.
F.
Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other Specification Sections for
requirements of miscellaneous record-keeping and submittals in connection with
actual performance of the Contract Work. Immediately, prior to the date or dates of
Substantial Completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good order,
properly identified and bound of filed, ready for continued use and reference. Submit to
the City Engineer for the City's records.
G.
Maintenance Manuals: Organize operating and maintenance data into suitable sets of
manageable size. Provide a Table of Contents with page numbers for each manuals.
Bind properly indexed data in individual heavy -duty 2-inch, 3-ring vinyl-covered binders,
with pocket folders for folded sheet information. Drawings will not be accepted unless
they are folded and placed in the pocket. Mark appropriate identification on front and
spine of each binder ( such as Encino-Tarzana Branch Library, Contact Number,
Name of Product/ item, Volume Number, etc.). Include the following types of
information:
1.
Emergency instructions.
2.
Spare parts list.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
01700-5
H.
3.
Copies of warranties and permit.
4.
Wiring diagrams.
5.
Recommended "turn around" cycles.
6.
Inspection procedures.
7.
Shop Drawings and Product Data.
8.
Fixture lamping schedule.
9.
Small scale of As-Built drawing of such operating equipment.
Record Schedule: Provide one copy of [a computer diskette of] the Construction
Schedule. Record this document to show the actual schedules and sequences the
actual works were performed in comparison with Baseline Construction Schedule
approval in accordance with Section 01311 - PROGRESS SCHEDULE AND
REPORTS.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A.
Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each installer of equipment that
requires regular maintenance to meet with the City's personnel to provide instruction in
proper operation and maintenance. If installers are not experienced in procedures,
provide instruction by manufacturer's representatives. Include a detailed review of the
following items:
1.
Maintenance Manuals.
2.
Serial Numbers
3.
Record Documents.
4.
Spare parts and materials.
5.
Tools.
6.
7.
Lubricants.
Fuels.
8.
Identification systems.
9.
Control sequences.
10.
Hazards.
11.
Cleaning.
12.
Warranties and bonds.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
01700-6
B.
3.2
13.
Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments.
14..
Permit and Record Documents.
As Part of Instruction for Operating Equipment, Demonstrate the Following
Procedures:
1.
Start-up.
2.
Shutdown.
3.
Emergency operations.
4.
Noise and vibration adjustments.
5.
Safety procedures.
6.
Economy and efficiency adjustments.
7.
Effective energy utilization.
FINAL CLEANING
A.
General: General cleaning during construction is required by the General Conditions
and included in Section, "Contractor's Use of the Premises" and in Section 01710 CLEANING.
B.
Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning.
Clean each surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building
cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's instructions.
1.
Complete the following cleaning operations prior to City's acceptance of
Contracted Work.
a.
Remove labels that are not permanent labels.
b.
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and
windows. Remove glazing compound and other substances that are
noticeable vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken
glass and other damaged transparent materials at no added cost to
the City.
Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dustfree condition, free of stains, films and similar foreign substances.
Restore reflective surfaces to their original reflective condition. Leave
concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum carpeted surfaces.
c.
d.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove
excess lubrication and other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to
a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps.
e.
Clean the site, including landscape development areas of rubbish,
litter and other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean;
remove stains, spills and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
01700-7
are neither paved nor planted, to a smooth even-textures surface.
f.
Remove all temporary detour stripping by the wet sandblasting
method.
C.
Pest Control: Engage an experienced exterminator to make a final inspection, and rid
the Project of rodents, insects and other pests.
D.
Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for
protection of the Contracted Work during construction.
E.
Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety
standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess
materials on the City's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful or dangerous
materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose
of in a lawful manner.
1.
Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated Work
have become the City's property, arrange for disposition of these materials as
directed.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
01700-8
SECTION 01710
CLEANING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
A.
Required: Throughout the entire Contracted Work period, Contractor shall maintain
the building and the job-site in a standard of cleanliness, as described in this Section,
including all necessary final cleaning prior to City's acceptance of Contracted Work.
B.
Related Work:
1.
2.
In addition to standards described in this Section, comply with requirements
for cleaning as described in pertinent other Sections of these Specifications.
3.
Contractor's Use of the Premises in Section 01015.
4.
Project Closeout in Section 01700.
5.
Demolition in Section 02050.
6.
Removal of Asbestos and Lead-Based Paint in Sections 02051 and 02052
7.
8.
Trees, Plants and Ground Cover in Section 02950.
9.
Cast-In-Place Concrete in Section 03300.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conduct daily inspection, and more often if necessary, to verify that requirements for
cleanliness are being met.
B.
In addition to the standards described in this Section, comply with pertinent
requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
C.
Labor: Provide skilled personnel experienced in the operations of maintaining the
specified standards of cleanliness during the Contracted Work operations until final
acceptance of the Project by the City.
SUBMITTAL
A.
1.
Method and Procedures: As required by the City Engineer.
2.
Dewatering plan.
3.
Manufacturer’s recommendations or instructions for cleaning and polishing as
CLEANING
01710-1
required in other Sections of the Project Manual.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
CLEANING MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A.
2.2
Provide commercial quality building maintenance equipment and materials to achieve
the cleanliness desired by the City.
COMPATIBILITY
A.
Use only the cleaning materials and equipment which are compatible with the surface
being cleaned, as recommended by the manufacturer of the material.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
PROGRESS CLEANING
A.
B.
C.
General:
1.
Retain stored items in an orderly arrangement allowing maximum access, not
impeding traffic or drainage, and providing required protection of materials.
2.
Do not allow accumulation of scrap, debris, waste material, and other items
not required for construction of this Work.
3.
Provide adequate storage for all items, materials, waste and debris awaiting
removal from the job-site where directed by the City Engineer, observing
requirements for fire protection and protection of the ecology.
4.
Unless specified otherwise, all drilled mud or excess concrete are not allowed
to be stored or stock-piled at jobsite, they shall be removed and disposed off
immediately.
5.
Seal and protect all opening to mechanical ducts, piping from dust or debris
or other contaminants.
Disposal:
1.
At least twice each month or more often as necessary or directed by the City
Engineer completely remove all scrap, debris and waste materials from the
job-site at an approved and licensed dump yard or disposal facility.
2.
Contractor shall be responsible for removing from "City Streets" any
excavated materials, demolished materials or equipment and debris falling off
the Contractor's trucks and other equipment during transporting from the jobsite to an approved and licensed dump yard or disposal facility.
The Job-Site:
1.
Daily, and more often if necessary, inspect the site and pick up all scrap,
debris, and waste material. Remove such items to the place designated for
their storage by the City Engineer.
CLEANING
01710-2
D.
2.
Weekly, and more often if necessary, inspect all arrangements of materials
stored on the job-site. Restack, tidy, or otherwise service arrangements to
meet the requirements of subparagraph 3.1-A-1 above.
3.
Maintain the job-site in a neat, safe and orderly condition at all times and not
interfering or delaying Contracted Work operations.
4.
During demolition, site clearing and/or earth moving operations control the
dust on the job-site by watering or sprinkling at such intervals as will reduce
the dust during all hours that work is being performed.
5.
All water encountered during construction shall be disposed of by the
Contractor in such manner as will not damage public or private property or
create a nuisance or health menace. Water if odorless and stable, may be
discharged into an existing storm drain, channel or street gutter in a manner
approved by the Engineer. Contractor shall provide a mean for desilting the
water before discharging it.
Structures:
1.
Weekly, and more often if necessary, inspect the structures and pick up all
scrap, debris, and waste material. Remove such items to the place
designated for their storage.
NOTE: REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL OF "ASBESTOS" AND “LEAD-BASED
PAINT” SHALL CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS
SPECIFIED IN SECTION 02051 - ASBESTOS REMOVAL,
AND SECTION 02052-LEAD-BASED PAINT REMOVAL,
RESPECTIVELY.
2.
Do not at any time, throw rubbish from the windows of the buildings.
3.
Weekly and more often if necessary, sweep interior spaces clean.
a.
4.
"Clean", for the purpose of this subparagraph, shall be interpreted as
meaning free from dust and other material capable of being removed
by use of reasonable effort and a hand-held broom.
Besides the general broom cleaning of the interior of the structure, the
Contractor shall be responsible for seeing that the following special cleaning
for all trades shall be done at the completion of the Work:
a.
Remove putty stains from all glass, then wash and polish glass.
b.
Remove all marks, stains, fingerprints, and other soil or dirt from all
painted, stained or decorated work.
c.
Remove all temporary protections, clean and polish all floors and
waxed surfaces.
d.
Clean and polish all hardware and plumbing trim; remove stains,
dust, dirt, plaster, paint, etc.
e.
Remove all spots, soil, plaster and paint from all tile work, and wash
CLEANING
01710-3
tile.
f.
Clean all fixtures and equipment. Remove all rust and repair all
damaged finish.
g.
Remove all spatter, splashes, spillage and dripping of paint or
concrete or other material from jobsite and/or adjacent property.
h.
Seal all mechanical duct openings awaiting for connection from dust
or soil. Remove all dust, soil, etc from all mechanical ducts and
clean all interior and exterior surfaces. Demonstrate to Inspector and
City Engineer and obtain approval prior to testing. Self blow-cleaning
by the installed mechanical equipment is not acceptable.
i.
Protect existing improvements from stains or other nuisance caused
from all coring or concrete saw-cutting work. Collect all water used
or dust caused by coring or concrete saw cutting work. Remove all
stains and nuisance by approved method.
j.
Remove all stains, oil, rust, etc. from all concrete paving.
k.
Vacuum clean carpeting to remove debris, all spots, soil and stains.
l.
Remove all portholes, epoxy sealer, epoxy adhesive or excess epoxy
from all concrete or masonry surfaces.
5.
Any anticipated delay in removal of materials, rubbish and debris shall be
subject to the approval of the City Engineer.
6.
As required preparatory to installation of succeeding materials, clean the
structures or pertinent portions thereof to the degree of cleanliness
recommended by the manufacturer of the succeeding material, using
equipment and materials required to achieve the necessary cleanliness.
7.
Following the installation of finish floor materials, clean the finish floor daily
(and more often if necessary) at all times while work is being performed in the
space in which finish materials are installed.
a.
8.
3.2
"Clean", for the purpose of this subparagraph, shall be interpreted as
meaning free from foreign material which, in the opinion of the City
Engineer, may be injurious to the finish floor material.
All lead-based paint will be either removed, or removed along with other
demolition under contract during the project renovation, [or encapsulated on
wall noted to remain]. All worker shall be protected from lead exposure using
engineering and work practice/ control when performing all renovation,
remodeling or final cleaning activities in accordance with local regulations and
requirements.
FINAL CLEANING
A.
Required: Upon the completion of the Contracted Work, the Contractor shall remove
all of Contractor's plant tools, materials and other articles from the property of the City.
Should the Contractor fail to take prompt action to this end, the City at its option and
CLEANING
01710-4
without waiver of such other rights as it may have, of 15 day's notice, treat them as
abandoned property, and may remove such articles at the Contractor's expense.
B.
The term "Clean" shall be interpreted as meaning the level of cleanliness generally
provided by skilled cleaners using commercial quality building maintenance equipment
and materials.
C.
Prior to completion of the Contracted Work, remove from the job-site all tools, surplus
materials, equipment, scrap, debris and waste. Conduct final progress cleaning as
described in Subsection 3.1 above.
D.
Site:
E.
1.
Unless otherwise specifically directed by the City Engineer, broom clean
paved areas on the site and public paved areas adjacent to the site.
2.
Completely remove resultant debris.
3.
Remove all temporary detour strippings by the wet sandblasting method
without damage to existing pavement.
Structures:
1.
2.
F.
Exterior:
a.
Visually inspect exterior surfaces and remove all traces of soil, waste
materials, smudges, and other foreign matter.
b.
Remove all traces of splashed materials from adjacent surfaces.
c.
If necessary to achieve a uniform degree of cleanliness, hose down
the exterior of the structure.
d.
In the event of stubborn stains not removable with water, the City
Engineer may require light sandblasting or other cleaning method at
no additional cost to the City.
Interior:
a.
Visually inspect interior surfaces and remove all traces of soil, waste
materials, smudges, and other foreign matter.
b.
Remove all traces of splashed materials from adjacent surfaces.
c.
Remove paint droppings, spots, stains, and dirt from finished
surfaces.
3.
Glass: Clean inside and outside.
4.
Polished Surfaces: To surfaces requiring routine application of buffed polish,
apply the polish recommended by the manufacturer of the material being
polished.
Schedule final cleaning as approved by the City Engineer to enable the City to accept
CLEANING
01710-5
a completely clean work.
3.3
CLEANING DURING CITY'S OCCUPANCY
A.
3.4
Should the City choose to occupy the Contracted Work or any portion thereof prior to
completion of Contracted Work and acceptance by the City, responsibilities for interim
and final cleaning shall be as determined by the City Engineer in accordance with the
GENERAL CONDITIONS of the Contract.
USE OF THE STRUCTURE BEFORE CITY'S ACCEPTANCE
A.
See the subject specified in the GENERAL CONDITIONS of this Project.
CLEANING
01710-6
C. Contractor Shall Not:
3.01
1.
Dispose any materials that have reasonable potential for reuse or recycling.
2.
Recycle any materials that have reasonable potential for reuse.
3.
Use traditional wrecking methods and machinery on any parts of the structures except for
foundations, concrete walls and floors and other concrete building materials or except in
cases where instructed by the City Engineer.
CLEAN-UP
A. The contractor shall be responsible for disposing all materials not marked for Deconstruction
or recycling.
END OF SECTION
DECONSTRUCTION
02020-3
SECTION 02020
DECONSTRUCTION
PART I – GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. This section establishes within the provision of the contract documents a feature that provides an
environmentally beneficial process of deconstruction rather than traditional demolition.
B. Definition: Deconstruction involves the careful dismantling of structures and separation of
materials in order to maximize potential reuse and/or recycle of recovered materials.
Coordination: This contract requires the separation and preservation of building materials for reuse
either on-site or off-site as indicated in the inventory list below. ALL applicable trades shall be
provide a representative with relevant experience in order to be considered responsive.
1.02 SUMMARY OF WORK
1.
Documents affecting this work of this Contract include, but are not necessarily limited to, the
GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPLIMENTARY CONDITIONS, and Sections in Division 1 of these
Specifications.
2.
The Contractor and all applicable trades shall attend a briefing on Deconstruction prior to the start
of Demolition. The Contractor shall be notified as to the time and location the briefing.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Request for City Engineer’s Approval
B. A copy of the Contractor’s Solid Resources Plan (Section 01150) shall be transmitted to the City
Engineer for approval prior to start of Deconstruction. The contractor shall include sufficient
details in this plan for comparison with the following PROJECT INVENTORY LIST:
ENCINO-TARZANA BRANCH LIBRARY INVENTORY LIST
1.
Galvanized Metal Screen:
Rear of building, recycle
2.
Aluminum Window Framing:
Recycle all, good financial incentive
3.
Aluminum Door Frames:
Recycle all, good financial incentive
4.
Glass:
Recycle all glass
5.
Slab on Grade Concrete:
All, mostly on front & side, crush & recycle.
DECONSTRUCTION
02020-1
6.
Wood Ceiling:
Salvage all wood from ceiling structure.
7.
Wood Entryway
Salvage.
8.
Vintage Wood Furniture:
Salvage for possible use reuse/donation
Wall Book Shelves
Open Back-to-Back Aisle Shelves
C. Upon Completion of Work, using the provided reporting forms of the City’s Solid Resources Citywide
Recycling Division (SRCRD), the Contractor shall thoroughly document the type, amount value sold,
buyer contact information, and intended use for all recovered materials and submit them to the City
Engineer for approval before submittal to the Bureau of Contract Administration.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
The contractor shall employ adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and
experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements
and methods for proper performance of this work.
PART II - EXECUTION
2.01 REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate work of this section as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate
provisions in the work. Apply all preparation and requirements of the Building Demolition Section
of the Specifications prior to start of Deconstruction.
B. Using the provided Project Inventory list, perform deconstruction which includes, but is not limited
to, the following items:
1.
Manually remove fixtures (lighting, plumbing, heating and cooling), mechanical equipment,
timbers, doors, windows, carpets, decorative items, etc.
2.
Manually dismantle all lumber (including wood flooring, wall studs, floor joists, rafters, etc.)
and store separately on-site according to size and grading.
3.
Manually remove and separate all bricks and roof tiles.
4.
Remove scrap metal for recycling or reused as directed.
5.
Demolish foundations, concrete walls and floors and other concrete building materials using
traditional methods, but with the objective of recycling those materials as directed by the City
Engineer.
6.
Assume ownership of all materials in the subject structures, except for those materials
designated by the City Engineer for re-use in subsequent library construction. Contractor is
encouraged to seek maximum value for those materials and shall keep all proceeds from sale
of materials.
7.
Separate and store recovered materials on-site, re-use materials in the construction of the
new library, work with the City’s Solid Resources Citywide Recycling Division (SRCRD) to
identify buyers for reusable/recyclable materials, conduct on-site sale of materials.
DECONSTRUCTION
02020-2
C. Contractor Shall Not:
3.01
1.
Dispose any materials that have reasonable potential for reuse or recycling.
2.
Recycle any materials that have reasonable potential for reuse.
3.
Use traditional wrecking methods and machinery on any parts of the structures except for
foundations, concrete walls and floors and other concrete building materials or except in
cases where instructed by the City Engineer.
CLEAN-UP
A. The contractor shall be responsible for disposing all materials not marked for Deconstruction
or recycling.
END OF SECTION
DECONSTRUCTION
02020-3
SECTION 02050
DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Carefully demolish the structures indicated or noted on the Contract Drawings to be
demolished and remove them from the premises.
B.
Related Work Sections:
1.
to the GENERAL CONDITIONS, and Sections in GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
of DIVISION 1 of the Project Manual.
2.
Site Clearing in Section 02110.
3.
4.
Concrete Work in Section 03300.
C.
Labor: Use adequate numbers of skilled laborers who are thoroughly trained and
experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified
Section.
D.
Codes and Regulations: Comply with all applicable Government Codes and Regulations,
of County and City of Los Angeles especially meeting safety standards and regulations of
CAL/OSHA. Provide additional measures, added materials and devices as may be
needed and/or as directed by the City Engineer or the Consultant, at no added cost to the
City.
E.
General: Comply with the following as specified in the General Conditions and Division .
F.
1.
Erection and maintenance of protections
2.
Dust Control.
3.
Repair of Damages.
4.
Cleaning and removal of rubbish and debris.
Protection of Existing Site Improvements: Protect existing improvements where they are
required to remain in-place, and perform cutting and patching by approved methods and
as authorized by the City Engineer or the Consultant.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
DEMOLITION
DEMOLITION
02050-1
3.2
A.
This Section requires removal and disposal, off site, of the buildings and appurtenances
indicated to be demolished.
B.
Salvaged Materials: Items of salvable value to Contractor may be removed from
structure as work progresses. Transport salvaged items from site as they are removed.
C.
Explosives: Use of explosives will not be permitted.
D.
Traffic: Conduct demolition operations and removal of debris to ensure minimum
interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
E.
Utility Services: Maintain existing utilities indicated to stay in service and protect against
damage during demolition operations.
F.
Pollution Controls: Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable
methods to limit dust and dirt rising and scattering in air. Comply with governing
regulations.
G.
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing prior to start of work.
H.
Buildings: Demolish buildings completely and remove from site.
I.
Below-Grade Construction: Demolish foundation walls and other below-grade
construction, including concrete slabs, to a depth of not less than 12 inched below lowest
foundation level.
J.
Below-Grade Foundation Piers: Demolish existing piers to the depth below grade that is
indicated on the drawings.
K.
Removal: Transport materials removed from demolished structures and legally dispose
off site.
RULE 1403 NOTIFICATION
A.
The Contractor shall notify the Southern California Air Quality Management District
(SCAQMD) not later than 10 days before the beginning of demolition work, and file
SCAQMD Form No. 1403.
B.
For more information regarding this requirement, call SCAQMD at (818) 572-6195.
END OF SECTION
DEMOLITION
02050-2
SECTION 02051
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT (DEMOLISHED BUILDING)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
Work Included: Contractor shall furnish all labor, services, materials, permits, insurance
(specifically covering the handling and transportation of Asbestos Materials) and equipment
which is specified, shown or reasonably implied for Asbestos Abatement activities, as
specified in the preceeding pages and identified as Scope of Work to these Specifications.
B.
Related Work:
1.
C.
Documents affecting Work of this Section include but are not necessarily limited to
Sections in Divisions 0 through 16 of the Project Manual for the facility.
Applicable Publications: The work conducted shall comply with all applicable federal, state
and local regulations. Applicable guidelines and standards listed in this Scope of Work
include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1.
South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1403.
2.
Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Publications:
29 CFR 1910.1001
Occupational
Exposure to Asbestos, Tremolite,
Anthophyllite and Actinolite
29 CFR 1910.1101
Asbestos
29 CFR 1910.1200
Hazard Communication
29 CFR 1910.134
Respiratory Protection
29 CFR 1910.145
Specifications for Accident Prevention Signs & Tags
29 CFR 1910.20
Access to Employee Exposure & Medical Records
29 CFR 1926.1101
Asbestos
29 CFR 1926.200
Signs, Signals & Barricades
29 CFR 1926.55
Gases, Vapors, Fumes, Dusts & Mists
40 CFR 61
Subpart A - General Provisions
Subpart M - National Emission Standards for Asbestos
40 CFR 61.152
Standard for Waste Manufacturing, Demolition, Spraying
and Fabricating Operations
40 CFR 241
Guidelines for the Land Disposal of Solid Wastes
40 CFR 257
Criteria for Classification of Solid Waste
40 CFR 261 & 262
Waste Disposal Facilities & Practices
40 CFR 763
AHERA
3.
California Code of Regulations - General Industry Safety Orders (GISO)
Title 8 CCR Section 5208
Asbestos Regulations
4.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Publications:
Z88.2-80
Practices for Respiratory Protection
Z87.1
Eye Protection
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02051-1
1.2
5.
National Institute of Occupational Safety & Health (NIOSH)
6.
Other federal, state and local regulations having authority over Asbestos-related
activities.
DEFINITIONS
SUMMARY:
General Explanation: A substantial amount of specification language constitutes definitions for
terms found in other contract documents. Certain terms used in the Specifications are defined in
this article.
A.
Owner: The City of Los Angeles (also known as the “City”) and/or a designated
representative.
B.
Abatement:
Procedures to control fiber release from Asbestos-containing building
materials. Includes removal, encapsulation1 and enclosure.
C.
Action Level: (REPLACED BY “PEL” VIA 29 CFR 1926.1101.)
D.
Air Lock: A system for permitting ingress and egress with minimum air movement between
a contaminated area and an uncontaminated area.
E.
Air Monitoring: The process of measuring the fiber content of a specific volume of air in a
stated period of time.
F.
Air Sampling Professional: The professional contracted or employed to supervise air
monitoring and analysis schemes This individual is also responsible for recognition of
technical deficiencies in Worker protection equipment and procedures during both planning
and on-site phases of an Abatement Project. Acceptable Air Sampling Professionals
include State of California Certified Site Surveillance Technicians and Certified Asbestos
Consultants.
G.
Amended Water: Water to which a surfactant has been added.
H.
Area Monitoring: Sampling of airborne fiber concentrations within the Asbestos Work Area
and outside the Asbestos Work Area which are representative of the airborne
concentrations of Asbestos fibers which may reach the breathing zone.
I.
Asbestos: (29 CFR 1926.1101 Definitions) Includes Chrysotile, Amosite, Crocidolite,
Tremolite asbestos, and any of these minerals that has been chemically treated and/or
altered.
J.
Asbestos (California Code of Regulations definitions): Means fibrous forms of various
hydrated minerals including Chrysotile, (fibrous serpentine) Crocidolite (fibrous fliebeckite),
Amosite (fibrous Cummintonite-Grunerite), Fibrous Tremolite, fibrous Actinolite, and fibrous
Anthophyllite.
K
Asbestos-Containing Material (ACM) EPA definition: Material composed of asbestos of any
type in an amount greater than 1 percent and by weight, either alone or mixed with other
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02051-2
fibrous or nonfibrous materials.
L.
Asbestos- Containing Construction Material (California definition): Means any manufactured
construction material which contains more than 1/10th of 1% asbestos by weight.
M.
Asbestos- Containing Waste Material: Means friable asbestos waste and asbestos waste
from control devices (Pollution Control Devices).
N.
Asbestos Fibers: Asbestos fibers having an aspect ratio of at least 3:1 and 5 micrometers
in length.
O.
Authorized Visitor: The Owners Project Team members 1 the Owners Representative,
Consultant and any representative of a regulatory or other agency having jurisdiction over
the Project.
P.
Clean Room: An uncontaminated area or room which is a part of the Worker
Decontamination Enclosure with provisions for storage of Workers' street clothes and
protective equipment.
P(2).
Consultant (Also known as Environmental Consultant, and/or Observation Service): The
agent of the Owner or the Owner's Representative who shall observe the Work, perform
tests, verify that abatement methods and procedures specified by the Specifications are
being complied with, and reports all observations and test results to the Owner or the
Owner’s Representative
Q.
Contained Work Area: A Work Area which has been Isolated, Plasticized, and equipped
with a Decontamination Enclosure System.
R.
Curtained Doorway: A device to allow ingress or egress from one area to another while
permitting minimal air movement between the areas, typically constructed by placing three
overlapping sheets of plastic over an existing or temporarily framed doorway, securing each
along the top of the doorway. and securing the vertical edge of the outer two sheets along
the opposite vertical side of the doorway.
S.
Decontamination Enclosure System: A series of connected rooms. with Air Locks or
Curtained Doorways between any two adjacent rooms, for the decontamination of Workers
and of materials and equipment. A Decontamination Enclosure System always contains at
least one Air Lock to the Work Area.
T.
Encapsulant (sealant): A liquid material which can be applied to Asbestos-Containing
material and which controls the possible release of Asbestos fibers from the material either
by creating a membrane over the surface (bridging encapsulant) or by penetrating into the
material and binding its components together (penetrating encapsulant).
U.
Encapsulation: All herein-specified procedures necessary to apply an encapsulant to
Asbestos-Containing building materials to control the possible release of Asbestos fibers
into the ambient air.
V.
Enclosure: All herein-specified procedures necessary to enclose completely AsbestosContaining Material behind airtight, impermeable, permanent barriers.
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02051-3
W.
Excursion Limit: An exposure of airborne concentrations of Asbestos fibers of one fiber per
cubic centimeter of air (1 f/cc) as averaged over a sampling period of thirty (30) minute
period.
X.
Equipment Room: A contaminated area or room which is part of the Worker
Decontamination Enclosure with provisions for storage of contaminated clothing and
equipment.
Y.
Equipment Decontamination Enclosure: That portion of a Decontamination Enclosure
System designed for controlled transfer of materials, waste containers and equipment,
typically consisting of a Washroom and a Holding Area.
Z.
Friable Asbestos Material (40 CFR, Subpart M): Material that contains more than one
percent (1%) Asbestos by weight and that can be broken1 crumbled, pulverized, or reduced
to powder by hand pressure when dry.
AA.
Fixed Object: A unit of equipment or furniture or other building component which cannot be
detached from the building or can only be detached by destructive methods resulting in
irreparable damage to the item.
AB.
Glovebag Method: A method with limited applications for removing small amounts of friable
Asbestos-Containing material from HVAC ducts, short piping runs, valves, joints, elbows,
and other nonplanar surfaces In an isolated (noncontained) Work Area The glovebag
(typically constructed of six [6] mil transparent Regulite plastic) has two inward-projecting
longsleeve rubber gloves, one inward-projecting waterwand sleeve, an internal tool pouch,
and an attached, labeled receptacle for Asbestos waste. The glovebag is constructed and
installed In such a manner that it surrounds the object or area to be decontaminated and
contains all Asbestos fibers released during the removal process. All Workers who are
permitted to use the Glovebag Method must be highly trained, experienced, and skilled in
this method.
AC.
HEPA Filter: A high efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filter capable of trapping and retaining
99.97 percent of all monodispersed particles (Asbestos fibers) equal to or greater than 0.3
microns in mass median aerodynamic equivalent diameter.
AD.
HEPA Vacuum Equipment: Vacuuming equipment with a HEPA filter system.
AE.
Holding Area: A room in the Equipment Decontamination Enclosure located between the
Washroom and an uncontaminated area. The Holding Area comprises an Air Look.
AF.
Isolation: The sealing of all openings into a Work Area.
AG.
Isolated (noncontalned) Work Area: A Work Area which is Isolated, but has not been
Plasticized and may or may not be equipped with a Decontamination Enclosure System.
AH.
Maximum Acceptable Level: An exposure of airborne concentrations of fibers of 0.1 fibers
per cubic centimeter of air at any time. This level is a contractual standard for this Project.
AI.
Moveable object: A unit of equipment, furniture or other building component which is
detached or can be detached from the building without destructive methods or results.
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02051-4
AJ.
Negative Air Pressure Equipment: A portable local exhaust system equipped with HEPA
filtration and capable of maintaining a constant, low velocity air flow into contaminated
areas from adjacent uncontaminated areas.
AK.
Nonfriable Asbestos-Containing Material: Material that contains more than one (1) percent
Asbestos by weight in which the fibers have been locked in by a bonding agent, coating,
binder, or other material so that the Asbestos swell bound and will not release fibers during
any appropriate end-use, handling, demolition1 storage, transportation, processing, or
disposal.
AL.
Observation Service (Also known as Consultant and/or Environmental Consultant): The
agent of the Owner or the Owner's Representative who shall observe the Work, perform
tests, verify that abatement methods and procedures specified by the Specifications are
being complied with, and reports all observations and test results to the Owner or the
Owners Representative.
AL(2).
Owner: The City of Los Angeles and/or a designated representative.
AM.
Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL): An airborne concentration of asbestos, Tremolite,
Anthophyllite, Actinolite, or a combination of these minerals in excess of 0.1 fibers per
cubic centimeter of air as an eight (8) hour time-weighted average (TWA).
AN.
Personal Monitoring: Sampling of Asbestos fiber concentrations within the breathing zone
of an Asbestos Worker.
AO.
Plasticize: To cover floors, walls and other structural elements of a Work Area with plastic
sheeting as herein specified with all seams securely taped.
AP.
Removal: All herein-specified procedures necessary to remove Asbestos-Containing
materials from the designated areas and to dispose of these materials at an acceptable
site.
AQ.
Shower Room: A room between the Clean Room and the Equipment Room in the Worker
Decontamination Enclosure with hot and cold or warm running water, and suitably arranged
for complete showering during decontamination. The Shower Room includes an Air Lock
between contaminated and clean areas.
AR.
Surfactant: A chemical wetting agent added to water to reduce surface tension and improve
penetration.
AS.
Washroom: A room between the Work Area and the Holding Area in the Equipment
Decontamination Enclosure System where equipment and waste containers are
decontaminated. The Washroom comprises an Air Lock.
AT.
Wet Cleaning: The process of eliminating Asbestos contamination from building surfaces
and objects by using cloths, mops. or other cleaning tools which have been dampened with
water, and by afterwards disposing of these cleaning tools as Asbestos-contaminated
waste.
AU.
Work Area (Also known as "Regulated Area”): Designated rooms, spaces, or areas of the
Project in which Asbestos Abatement actions are to be undertaken or which may become
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02051-5
contaminated as a result of such abatement actions. A Contained Work Area is a Work
Area which has been Isolated, Plasticized, and equipped with a Decontamination Enclosure
System. An Isolated Work Area is a Work Area which is Isolated, but has not been
Plasticized and may or may not be equipped with a Decontamination Enclosure System.
AV.
1.3
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Safety Compliance: In addition to detailed requirements of this Specification. comply with
laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations of federal, state, regional, and local authorities and
publications regarding handling, storing, transporting, and disposing of Asbestos Waste
materials. Submit matters of Interpretation of standards to the appropriate administrative
agency for resolution before starting the Work. Where the requirements of this Specification
and referenced documents vary, the most stringent requirement shall apply. When
requirements of reference documents vary, the most stringent requirement shall apply.
B.
Contractor shall have at least one copy each of 29 CFR Part 1910 - Occupational Safety
and Health Standards, 29 CFR 1926.1101,40 GFR Part 61, Subparts A & M, and all
pertinent state and local regulations at his office and at the job site.
C.
Before the commencement of any work at the site, the Contractor shall post bilingual (as
appropriate) EPA and OSHA caution signs In and around the Work Area to comply with
EPA and OSHA regulations.
D.
Area Monitoring shall be performed by the observation Service, which will conduct air
sampling of the Abatement Project (1) outside the building, (2) immediately outside the
Work Area, (3) In the Work Area. and (4) for Work Area Clearance Testing after
decontamination operations.
E.
Personal Monitoring and other monitoring, which are required by law, or considered
necessary by the Contractor for Worker protection shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor.
Job Walk: The Contractor must attend the Job Walk to qualify to bid on any or all portions
of this project.
F.
1.4
Worker Decontamination Enclosure System: That portion of a Decontamination Enclosure
System designed for controlled passage of Workers, and other personnel and Authorized
Visitors, typically consIsting of a Clean Room. a Shower Room, and an Equipment Room.
SUBMITTALS AND NOTIFICATIONS (ABATEMENT CONTRACTOR MUST PROVIDE AS
SUBMITTAL FOR REVIEW AND APPROVAL PRIOR TO THE START OF WORK.)
A.
Copies of permits and/or notifications, as required by applicable rules and regulations.
B.
Copies of appropriate AHERA training certificates (current) for each employee from their
respective training agency or organization.
C.
Copies of appropriate AHERA training certificates (current) for each employee from their
respective training agency or organization.
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02051-6
1.5
D.
Copies of registration (current) with the Office of Public School Construction (OPSC) for
each employee from their respective training agency or organization.
E.
Submit proof that all persons providing labor and/or professional services who will be
entering contaminated areas have had current (less than one year prior to start of the
Project) medical examinations in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.1101. Furnish physician’s
interpretation of said examinations including the declaration that the worker can wear a
negative pressure respirator while performing their work.
F.
Record of successful fit testing performed by a qualified individual within the previous six
months, for each employee to be used on this project with the employee's name and social
security number with each record.
G.
Proposed respiratory protection program for employees throughout all phases of the job,
including make, model and NIOSH approval number of the respirators to be used.
H.
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) on potentially hazardous materials to be used on the
project.
I.
Proof of Contractor’s License and Asbestos Certification from the Contractors Licensing
Board, and proof of registration with the Division of Occupationsl Safety and Health in
accordance with California Labor Code, Section 6501.
J.
Copy of appropriate General Liability Insurance Certificate naming the City of Los Angeles
as well as the designated Environmental Consultant as additionally insured.
K.
List of proposed environmental laboratories to be used by the Contactor, including copies of
pertinent licenses, certifications and registrations.
L.
List of proposed subcontractors to be used by the Contractor, if any.
M.
List of proposed waste transporters to be used by the Contractor, including copies of
N.
List of proposed waste disposal facilities to be used by Contractor, including copies of
O.
List of product substitutions proposed by Contractor to be considered for approval by the
City of Los Angeles and/or designated Environmental Consultant.
P.
Written abatement plan by Contractor, as required by 8CCR, Sec. 5208.
Q.
Detailed work schedule including, but not necessarily limited to, specific dates of proposed
work, number and hours of each shift per day, number of workers/supervisors for each shift,
and the proposed completion date.
R.
Provide manufacturer’s certification that vacuums, differential pressure equipment filters,
and other local exhaust ventilation equipment conform to ANSI Z9.2.
REIMBURSEMENT OF COSTS OF THE OWNER AND THE CONSULTANT
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02051-7
A.
In The event that reviews and/or Clearance Testing by the Consultant or regulatory agencies
shows that the Work Area or any portion of the Work Area is not decontaminated or If the
Work is not in conformance with the Specifications, the Owner, Consultant and his
Consultants will record all time, tests and project related expenses expended to monitor
the Work until the work in compliance. All time and expenses recorded by the Owner,
Consultant and his Consultants to monitor the above work, and all time, tests and project
related expenses incurred by the Owner and Consultant and his Consultants outside the
Project Work Days, Work Hours or Contract Time shall, at the discretion of the Owner, be
paid for by the Contractor. The Contractor, promptly upon receipt of the billing from the
Owner, or the Consultant shall reimburse the Owner at the normal billing rate of the Owner
or the Consultant and his Consultants, or the Owner is authorized to withhold funds from
the Contract Sum, for all time spent by the Owner, Consultant and his Consultants for
reviews, testing and other project related expenses when any of the above conditions occur.
B.
Overtime work by the Contractor shall be requested in writing at least 48 hours in advance
to allow for scheduling of appropriate School Personnel and the Consultant.
1.
In the event the Consultant is required to work overtime, either at the request of or
because of the Contractor, the Owner has the option of charging the Contractor for
the overtime hours worked at the Consultant’s overtime rate.
PART 2 - WORKER PROTECTION
2.1
PERSONAL PROTECTION & HYGIENE
A.
All persons working on an Asbestos abatement site shall, when present in the work area,
wear disposable clothing with attached foot and head covers and at minimum a half face air
purifying respirator equipped with high efficiency particulate air filters.
B.
The Contractor shall ensure that all persons entering the work area without exception:
1.
Change from street clothes to protective clothing at designated areas prior to
starting the day's work.
2.
Smoking is prohibited is all times. No eating or drinking is to take place beyond
the established critical barrier. Prior to eating or drinking, the workers will be fully
decontaminated. Each worker will then dress in clean overalls to eat or drink.
These new coveralls can then be worn back into the work area.
C.
The Contractor shall require that each person entering the Work Area shall wear an
approved respirator and protective clothing. There shall be no exceptions to this rule.
D.
Protective clothing shall consist of disposable full-body clothing of non-woven material
comprised of heat and pressure-bonded polyethylene fibers. Material shall be chemically
and biologically inert, low-linting and static free(unless laundered); durable enough to resist
abrasion, puncturing and tearing; highly resistant to penetration of air-borne particulate
when wet or dry. Suits may be fabricated with integral head and foot covering. Disposable
clothing shall be adequately sealed to the footwear to prevent body contamination.
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02051-8
2.2
E.
The Contractor shall require a minimum of a half-face negative pressure respirator with high
efficiency filters during the removal and clean-up operations. Supply a sufficient quantity of
respirator filters so that workers can change filters as needed. Require that respirators be
wet-rinsed and filters discarded each time a worker exits the work area. Require that new
filters be installed each time a worker re-enters the work area. Store respirators and filters
at the job site and protect them totally from exposure to lead dust prior to their use.
F.
Wearing of contact lenses in the contaminated atmosphere shall not be
permitted.
RESPIRATORS
A.
The Contractor shall provide approved respirators to all workers at no charge.
B.
The Contractor shall require that each person entering the work area shall wear an approved
respirator. There shall be no exceptions to this rule.
C.
The Contractor shall instruct and train each worker involved in Asbestos abatement or
maintenance and repair of Asbestos-containing materials in proper respiratory use and
require that each worker always wear a respirator, properly fitted on the face in the work
area from the start of any operation which may cause airborne lead particles until the work
area is completely decontaminated.
D.
The Contractor shall ensure that the employees will use respiratory protection that is
appropriate for the lead level encountered in the work place or as required for other toxic or
oxygen-deficient situations encountered.
E.
Except to the extent that more stringent requirements are written directly into the
Specifications, the following regulations and standards have the same force and effect (and
are made a part of the Specifications by reference) as if copied directly into the
Specifications, or as if published copies were bound herewith. Where there is a conflict in
requirements set forth in these regulations and standards, meet the more stringent
requirement.
OSHA - U.S. Department of Labor Occupational Safety and Health Administration,
Safety and Health Standards 29 CFR 1910, Section 1001 and Section 1910.134. 29
CFR 1926.62.
ANSI - American National Standard Practices for Respiratory Protection, ANSI Z88.2.
NIOSH - National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
MSHA - Mine Safety and Health Administration
F.
Air Purifying Respirators
1.
Respirator Bodies: Provide half face or full face type respirators. Equip full face
respirators with a nose cup or other anti-fogging device.
2.
Filter Cartridges: Provide, at a minimum, HEPA type filters labeled with NIOSH
and MSHA Certification for "Radionuclides, Radon Daughters, Dust, Fumes, Mists
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02051-9
including Asbestos-Containing Dusts and Mists" and color coded in accordance
with ANSI Z88.2. In addition, a chemical cartridge section may be added, if
required, for solvents, etc., in use. In this case, provide cartridges that have each
section of the combination canister labeled with the appropriate color code and
NIOSH/MSHA Certification.
3.
G.
2.
3.
Initial Fitting: Provide initial fitting of respiratory protection during a respiratory
protection training course. Fit types of respirator to be actually worn by each
individual. Allow an individual to use only those respirators for which training and fit
testing has been provided.
On a Semi-Annual Basis: check the fit of worker's respirator by having irritant
smoke blown onto the respirator from a smoke tube.
Upon Each Wearing: Require that each time an air-purifying respirator is put on it
be checked for fit with a positive and negative pressure fit test in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions or ANSI Z88.2.
Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL):
1.
I.
Do not use single use, disposable or quarter face
Fit Testing:
1.
H.
Non-permitted respirators:
respirators.
8-Hour Time Weighted Average: (TWA) of lead to which any worker may be
exposed shall not exceed 0.1 f/cc.
Respiratory Protection Factor:
Respirator Type
Protection Factor
Air purifying:
Negative pressure respirator
High efficiency filter
Half facepiece
10
Air purifying:
Negative pressure respirator
Full facepiece
50
Powered Air Purifying (PAPR):
Positive pressure respirator
Half or Full facepiece
50
Type C supplied air:
Pressure demand or other positive pressure mode
Half facepiece
1,000
2,000
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02051-10
Full facepiece
2.3
2.4
Full facepiece
Equipped with an auxiliary positive pressure
Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA)
10,000
Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA):
Positive Pressure respirator
10,000
DRESS AND EQUIPMENT
A.
The Contractor shall provide approved protective clothing to all workers, and to all official
representatives of the Owner, State or other governmental entity, and the Consultant who
may inspect the job site.
B.
Protective clothing shall consist of disposable full-body clothing of non- woven material
comprised of heat and pressure-bonded polyethylene fibers. material shall be chemically
and biologically inert, low-linting and static free(unless laundered); durable enough to resist
abrasion, puncturing and tearing; highly resistant to penetration of air-borne particulate
when wet or dry. Suits may be fabricated with integral head and foot covering. Disposable
clothing shall be adequately sealed to the footwear to prevent body contamination.
C.
Disposable protective clothing shall be disposed of as Asbestos waste every time the
wearer exists from the work space/equipment room to the shower room while proceeding to
the clean area.
D.
Additional safety equipment: Hard hats shall meet the requirements of ANSI Standard
Z89.1; eye protection shall meet the requirements of ANSI Standard Z87.1 and foot
protection shall meet the requirements of ANSI Standard Z41.1; disposable PVC gloves as
necessary shall be provided to all workers and authorized visitors. Non-skid footwear shall
be provided to all abatement workers.
WORKER PROTECTION PROCEDURES - TO BE POSTED IN CLEAN ROOM
Bilingual (English and other appropriate language[s] )Worker Protection Procedures must be posted
in the Clean Room. If the first language of all Workers is English, the bilingual procedures are
excepted.
A
Each Worker and Authorized Visitor shall, upon entering the job site: remove street clothes
in the Clean Room and put on a respirator and clean protective clothing before entering the
Equipment Room or the Work Area.
B.
All Workers shall, each time they leave the Work Area: remove gross-contamination from
clothing before leaving the Work Area; proceed to the Equipment Room and remove all
clothing except respirators: still wearing the respirator, proceed naked to the showers;
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02051-11
clean the outside of the respirator with soap and water while showering; remove the
respirator; thoroughly shampoo and wash themselves.
2.5
C.
Following showering and drying off, each Worker shall proceed directly to the Clean Room
and dress in their personal clothing. Before reentering the Work Area, each Worker and
Authorized Visitor shall put on a clean respirator and shall dress in clean protective
clothing.
D.
Contaminated protective clothing and work footwear shall be stored in the Equipment Room
when not in use in the Work Area. At appropriate times or upon completion of Asbestos
Abatement, dispose of protective clothing and footwear as contaminated waste, or launder
in accordance with government regulations.
E.
Workers removing waste containers from the Equipment Decontamination Enclosure shall
enter the Holding Area from outside wearing a respirator and dressed in clean disposable
coveralls. No Worker shall use this system as a means to leave or enter the Washroom or
the Work Area.
F.
The disposable clothing worn outside the Work Area shall be of different color or markings
from the disposable clothing worn inside the Work Area.
G.
Workers shall not eat, drink, smoke, or chew gum or tobacco while in the Work Area.
H.
Workers and Authorized Visitors with beards or who are unshaven shall not enter the Work
Area.
MEDICAL EXAMINATIONS AND HISTORIES
A.
Before exposure to airborne Asbestos, the Contractor will provide each employee providing
labor or professional services at the Project site with a current comprehensive medical
exam, including a history of respiratory and gastrointestinal diseases, meeting the general
definition outlined in 29 CFR 1910.1001, 29 CFR 1910.134, [and] 29 CFR 1926.1101 and
California Administrative Code Title 8, CAC Section 5208, page 442.2.1 part (1)].
PART 3 - PRODUCTS
3.1
GENERAL
A.
3.2
3.3
Contractor shall furnish, provide and utilize the following produsts in the Work as specified.
PROTECTIVE COVERING
A.
Protective sheeting shall be 4 or 6 mil in thickness and conform to ASTM E154, Kc-156, D124B, D-2103 and D4379.
B.
Polyethylene sheeting shall be fire resistive.
C.
Polyethylene sheeting shall be opaque in color.
PROTECTIVE PACKAGING
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02051-12
3.4
A.
Bags utilized for waste shall be a minimum of 6 mil in thickness and properly labeled in
accordance with EPA, OSHA, and DOT regulations.
B.
Appropriately labeled, sealable, impermeable drum containers.
TAPE
A.
3.5
CAUTION SIGNS
A.
3.6
3.7
Duct Tape 2” or wider, or equal, and capable of sealing joints of adjacent sheets of plastic,
and for attachment of plastic sheet to finished or unfinished surfaces of dissimilar materials,
and capable of adhering under both dry and wet conditions, including use of amended
water.
Before removing Asbestos, and at each separate work area, the contractor performing
abatement shall display caution signs as required by 29 CFR 1910.1001, 29 CFR
1926.1101 and/or other pertinent state and local regulations.
SURFACTANT
A.
Surfactant, or wetting agent, for amending water will be 50% polyoxyethylene polyglycol
ester and 50% polyoxyethylene ether, or equivalent, at a concentration of one (1) ounce per
five (5) gallons of water.
B.
Surfactants containing the ingredient Methylene Chloride are not acceptable.
ENCAPSULATING SEALER
A.
Shall be a penetrating or bridging type, pollution-free, nontoxic, with a Class A fire
classification as specified herein. Encapsulants with the ingredint Mwthylene Chloride are
not acceptable.
B.
Shall be flexible when cured, resistant to weathering, oxidation, aging and abuse.
C.
Approved manufacturer for encapsulation of spray-applied or trowel-applied materials
include American Coatings Corporation. Approved manufacturer for all other encapsulation
work include American Coatings, HB Fuller Company - Fosters Product Division, or
approved equal.
D.
Shall be a water-dispensed coating, insoluble in water when cured.
E.
Shall be used undiluted.
F.
Shall have a written certification from the manufacturer that the encapsulant is compatible
with the replacement material and will safely withstand temperatures of all surfaces on
which the encapsulation will be applied.
G.
The City of Los Angeles, and/or the designated Consultant for the proposed project, may at
any time take random samples of encapsulant from open containers or spray equipment for
testing to insure product quality and compliance with the Specifications.
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02051-13
H.
3.8
LAGGING ADHESIVE
A.
3.9
Shall meet NFPA 90A Code, such as Arabol, Childers CP52, Insul-Coustic 102, or
approved equal.
GLOVEBAGS
A.
3.10
Encapsulant to be applied to structural members before re-application of spray-applied or
trowel-applied fireproofing must be a component of the fireproofing system when it was
tested and rated by the underwriters laboratory (UL), American Society for Testing &
Materials (ASTM), Factory Mutual (FM) or other building code approved agencies.
The glovebag (typically constructed of six [6] mil transparent regulate plastic) has two (2)
inward-projecting longsleeve rubber gloves, one (1) inward-projecting waterwand sleeve, an
internal tool pouch, and an attached labeled receptacle for Asbestos Waste.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
A.
Provide suitable tools for Asbestos removal and encapsulation..
B.
Negative air pressure equipment: High-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filtration systems
shall have filtration equipment in compliance with ANSI Z9.2, local exhaust ventilation.
C.
Manometer: Shall have a built-in alarm and contineous hard copy read-out.
D.
HEPA Vacuums: Shall comply with ANSI Z9.2, local exhaust ventilation.
PART 4 - EXECUTION
4.1
WORK AREA PREPARATION
A.
Contractor must perform All work in accordance with, but not necessarily limited to, 29
CFR 1926.1101 (OSHA regulations), 8CCR 5280 (Cal/OSHA) and South Coast Air Quality
Management District (Rule 1403).
B.
Preparation procedures for removal of spray-applied or trowel-applied materials; tank, boiler,
breaching, flue, chiller, miscellaneous equipment and pipe insulation; and other friable
materials:
1.
Removal of the above or other friable Asbestos-Containing materials, unless
specified otherwise, shall be executed in a “Contained” Work Area.
2.
Contractor shall Isolate the Work Area for the duration of the Project, completely
sealing all openings including, but not limited to, HVAC ducts, diffusers and grilles,
skylights, doorways, and windows, with six (6) mil polyethylene taped securely to
a clean surface. Spray adhesive used on finished surfaces should be avoided where
possible. Construct barriers that enclose or separate Work Areas with wood or
metal framing members and sheathed with plywood.
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02051-14
3.
HVAC systems shall be shut down. Contractor shall design his Work Area
preparation and engineering controls as specified and/or as required to prevent
damage to and contamination of the affected HVAC system.
4.
Contractor shall remove all Movable Objects from the Work Area that are vulnerable
to damage or contamination, or that will impede or prevent the completion of the
Work. All Movable Objects removed from the Work Area shall be clean before
being moved to the designated storage area.
5.
Clean and cover Fixed and Movable Objects that can remain in the Work Area with
six (6) ml polyethylene sheeting taped securely in place. Special precautions shall
be taken to protect Fixed Objects vulnerable to damage or contamination.
6.
All Fixed and Movable Objects requiring cleaning shall be washed with amended
water or cleaned with a HEPA filtered vacuum.
7.
All objects removed shall be adequately marked and charted on a plan to ensure
proper reinstallation upon completion of the decontamination of the Work Area. The
objects shall be stored in a location designated by the Owner, and In a manner that
will prevent contamination or damage to the objects. Damaged and missing objects
will be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense and to the satisfaction of the
Owner.
8.
Seal and protect all light fixtures, computer systems communication systems.
lighted exit signs and other electrical items, etc, that will remain within the Work
Area with six (6) mil polyethylene taped securely. The polyethylene cover shall be
kept away from heat-generating electrical devices where fire or damage to the
device is possible. Light fixtures and all other electrical items shall be thoroughly
cleaned before. covering. Make waterproof all electrical conduit connections and
other electrical devices that will be exposed to moisture.
9.
After Work Area abatement but prior to clearance testing, the Contractor shall
remove heating, ventilation and air conditioning system filters, and pack them in
protective six (6) mil polyethylene sheeting for burial in the approved Waste
Disposal Facility.
10.
After Work Area abatement but prior to clearance testing the air handling and duct
system shall be cleaned. The Contractor shall possess the necessary skills or
shall retain the services of a professional company that is experienced in the
decontamination of air handling and duct systems.
11.
Clean the proposed Work Areas before plasticizing floors and walls, using HEPA
vacuum equipment or wet-cleaning methods as appropriate. Do not use methods
that raise dust. such as dry sweeping or vacuuming with equipment not equipped
with HEPA filters.
12.
Work Area (Containment): Contractor shall cover entire floor with a minimum of two
(2) six (6) mil protective coverings. Cover wall and column surfaces with a minimum
of two (2) four (4) ml protective covering. Floor coverings shall extend a minimum of
12' up vertical surfaces and behind wall covers. All seams shall be staggered and
securely taped. Each layer shall be independently taped to the wall.
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02051-15
a.
Contractor shall cover entire floor with a heavy duty tarpaulin (reinforced
polyethylene) followed by three (3) layers of six (6) mil protective coverings
and a single ten (10) mil protective floater sheet. Cover walls and columns
with three (3) four (4) mil protective covering. Floor coverings shall extend a
minimum of 12" up vertical surfaces and behind wall coverings. Alt seams
shall be staggered, adhesive sprayed and securely taped.
13.
Install 2' x 2' Plexiglas observation window(s) at strategic location(s) In the
"Containment" barrier to allow observation of work from outside the Work Area. Do
not Install observation windows at locations accessible to building occupants or the
public.
14.
Seal all wall, plumbing, duct and other cavities to prevent Asbestos materials from
falling into such cavities during the Work.
15.
The Contractor shall check regularly (at beginning, middle and end of each shift as
a minimum) all polyethylene isolation and containment (protective) barriers for
punctures, loose seats, contact with heat-generating devices, etc. Problem areas
shall be repaired or mended immediately.
16.
Maintain existing emergency exits from the building. Maintain a minimum of two (2)
exits from Work Areas where possible. The first exit shall be the Worker
Decontamination Enclosure System. The second exit may be the Equipment
Decontamination Enclosure System or a ripcord type, emergency only exit in the
plastic containment at a door, window or other appropriate location. Exits, where
possible, shall be on opposite ends of the Work Area. All exits shall be labeled in
bright letters or signage. The second exit shall be labeled “Emergency Exit Only".
Establish alternative exits satisfactory to fire officials where existing building or
Work Area emergency exits am unavoidably blocked by activities of this project.
17.
Provide and maintain appropriate fire extinguisher inside and outside the Work
Area. [One 30-pound type 'ABC" fire extinguisher is required for each 2,000 sq. ft of
floor area.]
18.
Install and maintain temporary emergency lighting with battery backup power in all
Work Areas. Work Areas with natural lighting, and no night work to be performed,
are exempt from this requirement.
19.
Shutdown of electric power during the wet removal or encapsulation phase of the
Project is mandatory unless directed otherwise. Provide temporary power and
lighting when necessary, and ensure safe installation of temporary power sources
and equipment per applicable electrical code requirements including appropriate
Ground Fault protection. Temporary light fixtures will be explosion proof. Provide
and maintain auxiliary diesel generator equipment where existing facility power is
Insufficient. Locate generator or vent generator exhaust in a manner that will
prevent carbon monoxide hazards to workers and the public. When power
shutdown is required, the Contractor shall check for conditions where shutdown will
pose a danger to the building or to the building's components. Contractor shall take
all precautions necessary, including inspections and testing, to Insure the safety of
his employees and other building occupants from electrical hazards during the
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02051-16
course of the Project. Existing fire, smoke detection and other life safety Systems
shall be kept in operation at all times, or, the Contractor shall install and maintain a
temporary system or alternate acceptable to the Owner and fire officials.
C.
20.
The Contractor shall install and maintain Negative Air Pressure Equipment during
the abatement and decontamination phases of the Project until the Clearance Test
has passed. A sufficient amount of air shall be exhausted by the unit(s) to create a
pressure of -0.02 inches of water within the Work Area with respect to the area
outside the Work Area. If only one unit is necessary to provide the specified
negative air pressure in a Work Area, the Contractor shall have a backup unit in
place should the first unit fail, and for filter changes. Install and maintain
emergency self-starting diesel generator back-up power for negative pressure
equipment in the event of power loss in the facility. Locate generator or vent
generator exhaust in a manner that will prevent carbon monoxide hazards to
workers and the public. When more than one negative air pressure unit is required,
emergency power back-up is required for only 50% of the units.
21.
Install and maintain a manometer from the time abatement begins until the
Clearance Test has passed in Work Areas where adjacent areas are occupied by
unprotected workers, other building users or the public and when dry removal
methods are required to be employed due to restrictive project conditions. Report
readings to the Environmental Consultant at the start and end of each work shift.
22.
Notify the Environmental Consultant twenty-four (24) hours in advance of when
preparatory steps will be completed. Asbestos Abatement Work shall not
commence until: all preparation requirements have been completed: all tools,
equipment. and materials are on hand; all required submittals, notices and permits
have been approved, and until the Environmental Consultant authorizes in writing
that Work may commence.
Preparation Procedures for: Minor repair of tank, boiler, breaching, flue, chiller and
miscellaneous equipment Insulation, the removal of resilient floor tile, resilient sheet
flooring, flooring mastic and the removal of pipe Insulation by the Glovebag Method (when
approved) and for minor or localized debris cleanup:
1.
Above removal, repair and debris cleanup activities unless specified otherwise,
shall be executed in an "'isolated"' Work Area.
2.
Contractor shall Isolate the Work Area for the duration Of the Project completely
seating all openings, including but not limited to, HVAC ducts, diffusers and grilles,
skylights, doorways and windows, with six (6) mil polyethylene sheet plastic
securely taped to a clean surface. Spray adhesive applied on finished surfaces
should be avoided where possible. As an option to isolating an entire room or area,
the Contractor may construct a single-layer six (6) ml polyethylene Isolation barrier
(Mini Containment) around the pipe., equipment or debris being worked on in
accordance with procedures specified by 29 CFR 1926.50 for small scale, short
duration projects. Work Areas with permeable finishes and/or components will
require the covering of such items with one layer of tour (4) ml polyethylene plastic
or the Contractor shall use the Mini Containment option.
3.
Curtained Doorway; Contractor shall construct a Curtained Doorway of clear plastic
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02051-17
sheeting, using six (6) mil polyethylene plastic, at entrances and exits to the Work
Area. If the Mini Containment option Is used, move the construction of the
Curtained Doorway from the room entrance to the Mini Containment itself.
4.
HVAC systems shall be shut down. If the air handling system cannot be shut down
and there is an avenue for asbestos fibers generated during abatement work to
enter into the air stream of the HVAC system, construct a single-layer six (6) mil
polyethylene plastic barrier (Mini Containment) around the item(s) being abated. In
addition contain/secure HVAC System when possible without interfering with
service to areas outside the Work Area.
5.
Shutdown of electric power during work unless directed otherwise is mandatory
where electrical hazards are possible. Provide temporary power and lighting when
necessary, and ensure safe installation of temporary sources and equipment per
applicable electrical code requirements, including appropriate Ground Fault
protection. Temporary light fixtures must be explosion proof. Provide and maintain
auxiliary diesel generator equipment where existing facility power is insufficient.
Locate generator or vent generator exhaust in a manner that will prevent carbon
monoxide hazards to workers and the public. When power shutdown is required,
the Contractor shall check for conditions where shutdown will pose a danger to the
building or to the building's contents. Contractor shall take all precautions
necessary, including inspections and testing, to insure the safety of his employees
and other building occupants from electrical hazards during the course of the
Project. Existing fire, smoke detection and other life safety systems shall be kept
in operation at all times or, the Contractor shall install and maintain a temporary
system or alternative acceptable to the Owner and fire officials.
6.
Contractor shall check regularly (at the beginning, middle and end of each shift as
a minimum) all polyethylene Isolation barriers for punctures, loose seats, contact
with heat-generating devices, etc. Problem areas shall be repaired or mended
immediately.
7.
Contractor shall install and maintain Negative Air Pressure Equipment during the
abatement and decontamination phases of the project until the Clearance Test has
passed. A sufficient amount of air shall be exhausted by the unit(s) to create a
pressure of negative 0.02 inches (-0.02 inches) of water within the Work Area with
respect to the area outside the Work Area. if only one unit is necessary to provide
the specified negative air pressure in a Work Area, the Contractor shall have a
backup unit in place should the first unit fail and for filter changes. When the "Mini
Containment" option is utilized the Contractor may substitute a HEPA vacuum to
create the specified negative air pressure within the Work Area when standard
Negative Air Pressure Equipment volumes are too great.
8.
Maintain existing emergency exits from the building. Maintain a minimum of two (2)
exits from the Work Area where possible. The first exit shall be the Worker
Decontamination Enclosure system. The second exit, when possible, shall be a
second door, window, or other appropriate opening with a rip cord emergency only
exit seal Exits, where possible, shall be on opposite ends of the Work Area. All
exits shall be labeled in bright letters or signage. The second exit shall be labeled
“Emergency Exit Only." Establish alternative exits satisfactory to fire officials when
existing building Work Area emergency exits are unavoidably blocked by activities
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02051-18
of this project.
D.
9.
Provide and maintain appropriate type of fire extinguishers in the Work Area. The
size and number of extinguishers shall be as required by local fire officials, but
shall not be less than one (1) fire extinguisher Inside and outside the Work Area.
10.
Provide temporary emergency lighting with battery backup power In all Work Areas
where none exists. Work Areas with natural lighting, and no night work to be
performed, are exempt from this requirement.
11.
Notify the Environmental Consultant twenty-tour (24) hours in advance of when
commence until: all preparation requirements have been completed; all tools,
equipment, and materials are on hand; all required submittals1 notices and permits
have been approved, and until the Environmental Consultant authorizes in writing
mat Work Is to commence.
Preparation procedures for ceiling panel removal:
1.
Panel removal activities may be executed in a non-isolated Work Area when the
use of a moveable decontamination enclosure unit is employed, otherwise follow
preparation procedure specified in Article 4.01.
2.
Owner shall remove, where possible, all moveable furniture, cabinets, etc., from
underneath the area where panels are being removed, and adjacent areas to allow
access for the moveable decontamination enclosure unit. Contractor shall cover
Fixed Objects with three (3) mil polyethylene sheeting. Special precautions shall
be taken to protect items vulnerable to moisture or contamination.
3.
Shutdown of electrical power during the work is mandatory in areas where a
possible electrical shock poses a hazard unless directed otherwise. Provide
temporary power and lighting when necessary and ensure a safe installation of
temporary power sources and equipment per applicable electrical code
requirements including appropriate Ground Fault protection. Temporary light
fixtures shall be explosive proof. Provide and maintain auxiliary diesel generator
equipment where existing facility power is insufficient. Locate generator or vent
generator exhaust in a manner that will prevent carbon monoxide hazards to
workers and the public. When power shutdown is required, the Contractor shall
check for conditions where shutdown will pose a danger to the building or to the
building's components. Contractor shall take all precautions necessary, Including
inspections and testing, to Insure the safety of his employees and other building
occupants from electrical hazards during the course of the Project. Existing fire,
smoke detection and other life safety Systems shall be kept in operation at all
times or, the Contractor shall install and maintain a temporary system or
alternative acceptable to the Owner and fire officials.
4.
HVAC systems shall be shut down while removal is in progress.
5.
Maintain existing emergency and fire exits from Work Area or establish alternative
exits satisfactory to the Owner and fire officials.
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02051-19
E.
6.
Provide and maintain appropriate fire extinguishers in the Work Area and adjacent
areas. The size and number of extinguishers shall be as required by local fire
officials but shall not be less than one (1) per Work Area.
7.
Provide temporary emergency lighting with battery backup power in all Work Areas
where no emergency lighting is provided. Work Area with natural lighting and no
night work to be performed are exempt from this requirement.
8.
Notify the Environmental Consultant twenty-four (24) hours in advance Of when
commence until: all preparation requirements have been completed; all tools,
equipment, and materials are on hand; all required submittals, notices and permits
have been approved and until the Environmental Consultant authorizes in writing
that the Work may commence.
Preparation Procedures for ceiling debris removal:
1.
F.
Prepare Work Area in accordance with Article 4.01-A.
Preparation procedures for encapsulation of spray-applied or trowel-applied materials:
1.
Prepare Work Area in accordance with Article 4.01-A. The following exceptions
shall apply:
a.
G.
Preparation procedures for removal of nonfriable Asbestos-Containing roofing and “Transite”
materials (in good condition.)
1.
H.
No Work Area preparation required.
Preparation procedures for major repair of: spray-applied or trowel-applied materials; tank,
boiler, breaching, flue, chiller and miscellaneous equipment and pipe insulation:
1.
4.2
Wall covering may be reduced to a single layer.
Prepare Work Area in accordance with Article 4.01-A.
DECONTAMINATION ENCLOSURE SYSTEMS
A.
Decontamination Enclosure Systems (Worker and Equipment) general requirements:
1.
B.
Build suitable wood, metal or PVC framing as described herein and as approved by
the Environmental Consultant at the shop drawing submittal stage. Portable prefab
units, if utilized, must be submitted for review and approval by the Environmental
Consultant before start of construction. Submittal shall include, but not be limited
to, a floor plan layout complying with the schematic layouts bound herein, showing
dimensions, materials. sizes, thickness, plumbing, and electrical outlets, etc.
Decontamination Enclosure System for asbestos abatement work in "Contained" Work
Areas:
1.
Construct a Workers' Decontamination Enclosure System contiguous to the Work
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02051-20
Area consisting of three totally enclosed chambers to conform with standard
drawings bound herein as follows:
2.
C.
a.
An Equipment Room with an Air Lock to the Work Area and a Curtained
Doorway to the Shower Room.
b.
A Shower Room with two Curtained Doorways, one to the Equipment
Room and one to the Clean Room. Plastic on Shower Room and adjoining
Equipment and Glean Rooms shall be opaque. The Shower Room shall
contain at least one shower with hot and cold or warm water. Careful
attention shall be paid to the shower enclosure to ensure against leaking of
any kind. Trap shower waste using filters having a maximum pore size of
1.0 micron, and drain into a sanitary sewer. Replace filter when they
become clogged. Ensure a supply of soap and disposable towels at all
times in the Shower Room.
c.
A Clean Room with one Curtained Doorway into the shower and one
entrance or exit to non-contaminated areas of the building. The Clean
Room shall have sufficient space for storage of the Workers street clothes,
towels, and other non-contaminated items. Joint use of this space for other
functions, such as offices, storage of equipment, materials, or tools, shall
be prohibited.
Construct an Equipment Decontamination Enclosure System consisting of two
totally enclosed chambers as follows:
a.
A Washroom with an Air Lock to a designated staging area of the Work
Area and a Curtained Doorway to the Holding Room.
b.
A Holding Room with a Curtained Doorway to The Washroom and a
doorway to an uncontaminated area.
Decontamination Enclosure System for asbestos-abatement work in “Isolated" Work Areas:
1.
Construct a Decontamination Enclosure System consisting of two totally enclosed
chambers, as follows:
a.
An Equipment Room, consisting of a Curtained Doorway to the Isolated
Work Area and a Curtained Doorway to the Shower Room.
b.
A Shower Room, consisting of a Curtained Doorway to the Equipment
Room and a Curtained Doorway to an uncontaminated area. Plastic on
Shower Room and adjoining Equipment and Clean Rooms shall be
opaque. The Shower Room shall contain at least one shower with hot and
cold or warm water. Careful attention shall be paid to the shower enclosure
to ensure against leaking of any kind. Trap shower waste using filters
having a maximum pore size of 1.0 micron, and drain into a sanitary
sewer. Replace filter when they become clogged. Ensure a supply of soap
and disposable towels at all times in the Shower Room.
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02051-21
2.
D.
A Washroom with an Air Lock to a designated staging area of the Work
Area and a Curtained Doorway to the Holding Room.
b.
A Holding Room with a Curtained Doorway to the Washroom and a
doorway to an uncontaminated area.
Construct a Decontamination Enclosure System - Worker and Equipment in
accordance with Article 4.02.
Decontamination Enclosure System for nonfriable Asbestos-Containing materials:
1.
F.
a.
Decontamination Enclosure System for encapsulation of spray-applied or trowel-applied
materials:
1.
E.
Construction of an Equipment Decontamination Enclosure System is optional.
Construct a Decontamination Enclosure System - Worker and Equipment in
accordance with Article 4.02.
Movable Decontamination Enclosure Unit for ceiling panel removal and ceiling debris
removal:
1.
A Movable Decontamination Enclosure Unit shall be erected for the ceiling panel
removal and ceiling debris removal work. The enclosure shall be of a scaffold frame
type on locked casters with six (6) mil polyethylene sheeting at floor and all four
sides, one side to serve as a Curtained Doorway with a double-layer polyethylene
sheeting. Construction of enclosure to comply with EPA, OSHA and local
regulatory requirements. Install and operate negative air equipment connected to or
within the unit. Negative pressure within the enclosure shall be sufficient to create
a high flow of air into me top of the enclosure.
a.
4.3
Build suitable framing as described herein and as approved by the
Environmental Consultant at the shop drawing submittal stage. Portable
prefab units, If utilized, must be submitted for review and approved by the
Environmental Consultant before start of construction. Submittal shall
Include, but not be limited to, a floor plan layout complying with the
schematic layouts bound herein, showing dimension, materials, size,
thickness, plumbing, and electrical outlets, etc.
DECONTAMINATION PROCEDURES
A.
The Contractor shall assure that all employees, who work in areas where exposure to
Asbestos is expected, decontaminate whenever exiting the work area and at the end of the
work shift.
B.
Decontaminating will consist of rinsing the whole body and protective clothing with water
from a water sprayer or portable shower located in the two stage decontamination unit and
then disposing of the protective clothing.
C.
All shower waste water will be filtered through a final stage 5 micron filter prior to disposal.
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02051-22
D.
4.4
Disposable protective clothing shall be disposed of as Asbestos waste every time the
wearer exists from the work area.
REMOVAL PROCEDURES
A.
Contractor must utilize the OSHA (CFR 1926.1101), Cal/OSHA (8CCR Sec. 5208), and
South Coast Air Quality Management District (Rule 1403) procedures for the removal of
Asbestos-containing materials.
B.
Begin work by applying Ammended Water to Asbestos materials. The Asbestos materials
shall be sufficiently saturated without causing excessive dripping. Spray materials
repeatedly duringthe work process to maintain a wet condition.
C.
Asbestos materials shall be removed in manageable sections by a multi-person team,
some of whom are wetting and the remainder removing and cleaning. Any material which
falls to the floor shall be wetted and picked up immediately. Material shall not be allowed to
dry out. Material drop shall not exceed 15 feet. For heights up to 50 feet, provide inclined
chutes or scaffolding to intercept drop. For heights exceeding 50 feet , provide enclosed
dust-proof chutes. Before a second area can be started, removed material shall be packed
into approved and labeled packaging while It is still wet. The outside of all containers shall
be clean before leaving the Work Area. Move containers to the Washroom (Shower Room
when Equipment Decontamination System is not required), wet-clean each container
thoroughly, and move to Holding Area pending removal to uncontaminated areas.
D.
Prevent build up of excess water and debris by regularly using a HEPA vacuumed system
to containerize debris and water.
E.
Asbestos material debris, drippings, splatters, and overspray on surfaces within accessible
ceiling cavities and other accessible areas shall be removed in the same manner and
cleaned to the degree as specified above.
F.
The Work Area shall be kept orderly, clean and clear of work materials, polyethylene
sheeting, tape, cleaning material, and clothing. and all other disposable material or items
used in the Work Area shall be packed into properly labeled protective packaging and
removed from the Work Area.
Protective packages and drums containing Asbestos materials shall be cleaned and stored
in the isolated Holding Area until that time when the materials are to be loaded and hauled
to the Hazardous Waste Disposal Facility for burial. The packages and drums shall be
stored in piles no higher than four (4) feet, and in a manner that will not result in damage to
the packages or drums. Transport bags in covered drums or carts from the Holding Area to
the transport.
G.
H.
Equipment removal procedures: Clean surfaces of contaminated equipment thoroughly by
wet-sponging or wiping before moving such Items into the Washroom (Shower Room when
Equipment Decontamination System is not required) for final cleaning and removal to
uncontaminated areas. Ensure that personnel do not leave Work Area through the
Equipment Decontamination Enclosure.
I.
Do not bag water used during abatement activities. Properly filter and drain water into
building sanitary drain unless prohibited by local regulations. Filter shall have a maximum
pore size of 1.0 micron.
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02051-23
J.
Nonfriable Materials:
1.
Resilient Floor Tile and Mastic (also applies to Resilient Sheet Flooring)
a.
2.
Remove floor tile and mastic with wet methods and in a manner that will
not create debris. Mechanical equipment or tools used with water are
permissible providing that friable debris will not be generated. Mechanical
equipment or tools used without the use of water will be allowed only if
they are the dustless type and if the equipment has a self-contained
bagging system and HEPA filtration. Package floor tile and mastic in
properly labeled double six (6) mil lined containers or bags for proper
disposal according to applicable local, state and federal rules &
regulations.
Roofing Materials
a.
Use removal methods that will keep the tearing and fraying of the roof
membrane to a minimum. If sawing tools are used, they must be factory
equipped with HERA filtering devices, or perform in a manner that will not
release visible dust emissions. Roofing debris made friable shall be misted
with an asphalt resaturant before transportation to dumpsters. Do not use
water. Do not use excessive amounts of resaturant that may result in
leakage into the building. Apply additional resaturant, if necessary when
the roofing debris is in the dumpster. Install, when possible, a protective
tarp under the Work Area or dumpster where resaturant leakage may
result In property damage.
b.
Off-load roofing debris into dumpster by means of chutes. Use dust control
methods as required to hold dust generation to a minimum.
c.
Roofing shall be removed so that no felts are visible. Asphalt bitumen
residue need not be removed from the substrate unless directed otherwise
in the Contract Documents.
d.
Have adequate material on hand and available labor to protect exposed roof
areas from water Intrusion during inclement weather.
e.
Do not commence with removal work if Inclement weather is probable.
NOTE: Contractor shall be responsible for water damage as the result of
the Contractor's work or failure to perform work. Contractor shall be
responsible for maintaining the abated portions of the roof free from
moisture intrusion for seven (7) calendar days following the written notice of
completion, or until the roofing contractor has been given Notice to
Proceed by the Owner, whichever comes first.
f.
The Work Area shall be kept orderly. clean and clear of work materials.
g.
Package roofing materials in unlabeled double six (6) ml lined containers
or bags, or in accordance with the disposal facilities requirements.
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02051-24
3.
4.5
4.6
Transite Materials: Remove Transite materials with wet methods and in a manner
that will not create friable debris. Do not use saws or other such mechanical
equipment. Package Transite materials in unlabeled double six (8) ml lined
containers or bags, or in accordance with the disposal facilities requirements.
ENCAPSULATION OF ASBESTOS SPRAY-APPLIED OR TROWEL-APPLIED MATERIALS
A.
Repair damaged and missing areas of existing spray-applied or trowel-applied materials to
obtain a suitable base for sealing and to restore continuity of existing material. Use the
specified Asbestos-free replacement material. Prepare surfaces and apply replacement
material in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B.
Remove damaged, loose, or hanging Asbestos material. Pack in labeled, sealable plastic
bags, six (6) mil minimum thickness, and place in labeled containers for transport.
C.
Seal filled containers. Clean external surfaces of containers thoroughly by wet-sponging.
Move containers to the Washroom (Shower Room when Equipment Decontamination
System is not required). wet-clean each container thoroughly and move to Holding Area
pending removal to uncontaminated areas. Ensure that containers are removed from the
Holding Area Workers who have entered from uncontaminated areas dressed In dean
coveralls. Ensure That Workers do not enter from uncontaminated areas into the
Washroom or the Work Area; ensure that contaminated Workers do not exit the Work Area
through the Equipment Decontamination Enclosure System.
D.
After proper preparation of the material, apply bridging/penetrating type encapsulant to
provide complete encapsulation of the material (to substrate, if a penetrating type
encapsulant) in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. Apply encapsulant
using airless spray equipment.
E.
Consult with encapsulant manufacturer prior to proceeding with Work.
F.
Contractor shall be certified by the encapsulant manufacturer as an approved applicator.
DECONTAMINATION OF WORK AREA
A.
Decontaminated procedures for Contained Work Areas 1 excluding Asbestos-Containing
Material encapsulation work:
1.
Remove all visible accumulations of Asbestos material and debris. Wet-clean all
surfaces within the Work Area to remove Asbestos residue.
2.
After cleaning, the Contractor shall perform a complete visual Inspection of the
Work Area to ensure that the Work Area is free of any visible debris or residue.
3.
Upon completion of his visual inspection. the Contractor shall notify the
Observation Service in advance that the Work Area Is ready for Initial Review.
4.
Upon proper notification, the observation Service will review the Work Area for
general conformance with the Specifications. Any nonconformance of the Work
shall be remedied by the Contractor until the Work Area is in compliance, and at
the Contractor's expense.
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02051-25
5.
Upon successful compliance with the Initial Review by the observation Service and
after written notification, the Contractor shall encapsulate surfaces where Asbestos
materials have been removed. Unless specified otherwise encapsulate those
portions of the items where the Asbestos-Containing material was missing prior to
the start of this Contract. All surfaces within ceiling and other accessible cavities
where spray-applied or trowel-applied materials have been removed shall also be
encapsulated. Apply encapsulant in sufficient amounts to render the affected
surface tacky to the touch. The encapsulant shall be compatible with the existing
substrate and replacement materials and shall be rated to safely withstand the
temperature of the items to which ft will be applied. Encapsulants to be applied to
structural members prior to reapplication of spray-applied or trowel-applied
fireproofing must be a component of the fireproofing system when it was tested and
rated by the Underwriters Laboratory (UL), American Society for Testing Materials
(ASTM). Factory Mutual (FM) or other building code approved testing agencies
6.
Upon completion of the Encapsulation Work, me Contractor shall notify the
Environmental Consultant in advance that the encapsulated surfaces are ready for
Encapsulation Review.
7.
Upon proper notification, the Environmental Consultant will review the encapsulated
surfaces for general conformance with the Specifications. Any nonconformance of
the Work shall be remedied by the Contractor until the Work is In compliance and
at the Contractor's expense.
8.
Upon successful compliance with the Encapsulation Review by the Environmental
Consultant and after written notification1 the Contractor shall remove the outer layer
of plastic on the walls, floors, and ceilings (where applicable). The inner plastic
layer and isolation barriers on vents, grilles, diffusers, etc., shall remain In place.
9.
Wet-clean the Work Area, wait twenty-four (24) hours to allow for the settlement of
dust, and again wet-clean, or clean with HEPA vacuum equipment, all surfaces
within the Work Area. After completing of the second cleaning operation the
Contractor shall perform a complete visual inspection of the Work Area to ensure
that the Work Area Is tree of contamination.
10.
Sealed drums and bags, and all equipment used in the Work Area shall be
included in the cleanup and shall be removed from the Work Area via the
Equipment Decontamination Enclosure System at the appropriate time in the
cleaning sequence.
Upon completion of the second cleaning operation, the Contractor shall notify the
Environmental Consultant twenty-four (24) hours in advance that the Work Area is
ready for Progress Review and Clearance Testing. Refer to appropriate Article on
Air Monitoring in this Section for Clearance Testing standards. Contamination found
during the Pre-testing Review shall be remedied by the Contractor, at his expense,
prior to clearance testing.
11.
12.
Upon written notification from the Environmental Consultant that the Work Area has
passed the standard for Clearance Testing, the Contractor shall apply, when
included in the Contract, the Asbestos-free replacement materials and reestablish
objects and systems as specified In these specifications. The inner plastic layer
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02051-26
and isolation barriers may be removed by the Contractor at any time after written
notification.
B.
13.
Upon completion of the application of replacement materials, or If no replacement
materials are required, after the removal of the inner plastic layer, isolation barriers
and the re-establishment of objects and systems the Contractor shall notify the
Environmental Consultant and/or Owner's Representative twenty-four (24) hours In
advance that the Work Area is ready for Pre-final Review.
14.
Upon notification1 the observation Service and Owners Representative wilt review
the Work Area. improper application of replacement materials1 unapproved damage
to the facility or Its contents or improper reestablishment of objects and systems
discovered during the Pre-final Review shall be Itemized on a Punch List for
correction by The Contractor at his expense. If no deficiencies are discovered me
Contractor this portion of the Contract shall be approved In writing by the
Observation Service and Owner's Representative as complete. If deficiencies are
noted continue with the subsequent procedures. NOTE: It deficiencies noted do not
prevent the Owner from occupancy or proceeding with reconstruction work, the
Contract or this portion of the Contract shall be specified in writing by the
Environmental Consultant and the Owner's Representative Substantially Complete.
15.
Upon correction of Punch List deficiencies, the Contractor shall notify the
Environmental Consultant and Owner's Representative in advance that the Work
Area is ready for Final Review.
16.
Upon notification, the Environmental Consultant and Owner’s Representative will
review the corrected Punch List deficiencies. If the deficiencies have been
corrected the Contract. or this portion of the Contract1 shall be approved in writing
by the Environmental Consultant and Owner’s Representative as complete. If
deficiencies have not been properly corrected the Contractor shall repeat at his
expense procedures 15 and 16 until all deficiencies have been corrected and
approved. NOTE: If deficiencies noted do not prevent the Owner from occupancy or
proceeding with reconstruction work. the Contract or this portion of the Contract
shall be specified in writing by the Environmental Consultant and the Owner's
Representative Substantially Complete.
Decontamination procedures for Isolated" Work Areas:
1.
Contractor shall perform a complete visual inspection of the Work Area to ensure
that the Work Area Is free of any contamination.
2.
If any evidence of Asbestos material or debris is encountered, the Contractor shall
remove the contaminants and shall wet-clean all surfaces within the Work Area to
remove Asbestos residue.
3.
Sealed drums and bags, and all equipment used in the Work Area shall be
Included In the cleanup and shall be removed from the Work Area at the
appropriate time in the cleaning sequence.
4.
Upon completion of his visual inspection and any necessary cleaning, the
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02051-27
Contractor shall notify the Environmental Consultant in advance that the Work Area
is ready for Initial Review.
5.
Upon proper notification, the Environmental Consultant will review the Work Area for
the Contractor's expense.
6.
Upon successful compliance with the Initial Review of the Environmental Consultant
and after written notification, the Contractor shall encapsulate surfaces where
Asbestos-Containing Materials were removed. Unless specified otherwise
encapsulate those portions of the items where the Asbestos-Containing Material
was missing prior to the start of this Contract. Apply encapsulant in sufficient
amounts to render the affected surface tacky to the touch. The encapsulant shall
be compatible with the existing substrate and replacement materials and shall be
rated to safely withstand the temperatures of the surface to which it will be applied.
Do not encapsulate substrates from which resilient flooring (tile or sheets), flooring
mastic or roofing materials have been removed. Encapsulants to be applied to
structural members prior to reapplication of spray-applied or trowel-applied
fireproofing must be a component of the fireproofing system when It was tested and
rated by the Underwriters Laboratory (UL), American Society for Testing Materials
(ASIM), Factory Mutual (FM) or other building code approved testing agencies.
7.
Upon completion of the Encapsulation Work. the Contractor shall notify the
Environmental Consultant twenty-four (24) hours In advance that the encapsulated
surfaces are ready for Encapsulation Review and Clearance Testing.
8.
Upon proper notification, the Environmental Consultant will review the encapsulated
the Work shall be remedied by the Contractor until the Work is in compliance and
at the Contractors expense.
9.
Upon successful compliance with, the Encapsulation Review of the Environmental
Consultant, the Work Area is ready for Clearance Testing. Refer to the appropriate
Article on Air Monitoring in this Section for Clearance Testing standards.
10.
passed the standard for Clearance Testing, the Contractor shall when included in
the Contract, apply Asbestos-free replacement materials and reestablish objects
and systems as specified in these Specifications. The Isolation barriers may be
removed by the Contractor at any time after the written notification.
11.
Upon completion of the application of replacement material, or if no replacement
materials are required, after the removal of the isolation barriers and the reestablishment of objects and systems, the Contractor shall notify the
Environmental Consultant and Owner's Representative twenty-four (24) hours in
advance that the Work Area is ready for Pre-final Review.
12.
Upon notification, the Environmental Consultant and Owner's Representative will
review the Work Area. Improper application of replacement materials, unapproved
damage to the facility or its contents or improper reestablishment of objects and
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02051-28
systems discovered during the Pro-final Review shall be itemized on a Punch List
for correction by the Contractor at his expense. If no deficiencies are discovered
the Contractor this portion of the Contract shall be approved in writing by the
Environmental Consultant and Owner's Representative as complete. If deficiencies
are noted continue with the subsequent procedures. NOTE: If deficiencies noted
do not prevent the Owner from occupancy or proceeding with reconstruction work,
the Contract or this portion of the Contract shall be specified in writing by the
C.
13.
Upon correction of the Punch Lists deficiencies, the Contractor shall notify the
Environmental Consultant and Owners Representative in advance that Work Area is
ready for Final Review.
14.
Upon notification, the Environmental Consultant and the Owner's Representative
will review the corrected Punch List deficiencies. If alt deficiencies have been
corrected to the satisfaction of the Environmental Consultant and the Owner's
Representative, the Contract or this portion of the Contract shall be approved in
writing by the Environmental Consultant and Owner's Representative as completed.
If deficiencies have not been property corrected the Contractor shall repeat at his
expense procedures 13 and 14 until all deficiencies have been corrected and
approved. NOTE: If deficiencies noted do not prevent the Owner from occupancy
or proceeding with reconstruction work, the Contract or this portion of the Contract
shall be specified in writing by the Environmental Consultant and the Owners
Decontamination procedures for encapsulation of spray-applied, trowel-applied or other
friable materials in a “Contained" Work Area:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Upon completion of the Encapsulation Work, the Contractor shall notify the
Observation Service in advance that the encapsulated surfaces are ready for
Encapsulation Review.
Upon proper notification. the Environmental Consultant will review the encapsulated
the Work shall be remedied by the Contractor until the Work is In compliance, and
at the Contractor's expense.
Upon successful compliance with the Encapsulation Review by the Environmental
Consultant and after written notification, the Contractor shall remove all visible
accumulations of Asbestos material debris, and wet-clean all surfaces within the
Work Area to remove any Asbestos residue.
After cleaning, the Contractor shall perform a complete visual inspection of the
Work Area to ensure that the Work Area is free of any debris or residue.
Upon completion of his visual inspection, the Contractor shall notify the
Environmental Consultant in advance that the Work Area is ready for initial Review.
Upon successful compliance with the Environmental Consultant Initial Review and
after written notification, the Contractor shall remove the layer of plastic on the
walls and floors. The isolation barriers on vents1 grilles, diffuser, etc., shall remain in
place.
After removal of the plastic covering, dean the Work Area, vacuuming with HERA
vacuum equipment all surfaces within the Work Area. After the completion of the
cleaning operation, the Contractor shall perform a complete visual inspection of the
Work Area to ensure that it is free of contamination.
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02051-29
D.
8.
Sealed drums and bags, and all equipment used In the Work Area shall be
included in the cleanup, and shall be removed from the Work Area via the
Equipment Decontamination Enclosure at the appropriate time In the cleaning
sequence.
9.
Upon completion of the cleaning operation. the Contractor shall notify the
Environmental Consultant twenty-four (24) hours In advance that the Work Area is
ready for review and Clearance Testing. Refer to the appropriate Article on Air
Monitoring in this Section for Clearance Testing standards.
10.
passed the standard for Clearance Testing, the Contractor shall remove the
isolation barriers. proceed with the re-establishment of objects and Systems and
when included In the Contract, apply Asbestos-free replacement materials as
specified in these Specifications.
11.
Upon completion of the application of replacement materials, or If no replacement
materials are required, after the removal of isolation barriers and the reestablishment of objects and systems, the Contractor shall notify the
Environmental Consultant and Owner's Representative twenty-four (24) hours In
advance that the Work Area is ready for pre-final Review.
12.
Upon notification, the Environmental Consultant and Owner's Representative will
review the Work Area. Improper application of replacement materials or improper
re-establishment of objects and systems or unapproved damage to the facility or is
contents discovered during the Pre-final Review shall be itemized on a Punch List
for correction by the Contractor at his expense. If no deficiencies are discovered
the Contract or this portion of the Contract shall be approved in writing by the
Environmental Consultant and Owners representative as complete. If deficiencies
are noted continue with the subsequent procedures. NOTE: If deficiencies noted do
not prevent the Owner from occupancy or proceeding with reconstruction work. the
Contract or this portion of the Contract shall be specified In writing by the
13.
Upon correction of the Punch Listed deficiencies, the Contractor shall notify the
Environmental Consultant and the Owner's Representative In advance that the
Work Area is ready for Final Review.
14.
Upon notification the Environmental Consultant and the owners Representative will
review the corrected Punch List deficiencies. If all deficiencies have been corrected,
the Contract or this portion of the Contract. shall be approved in writing by the
Environmental Consultant and owners representative as complete. If deficiencies
have not been properly corrected, the Contractor shall repeat, at his expense,
procedures 13 and 14 until all deficiencies have been corrected and approved.
NOTE: If deficiencies noted do not prevent the Owner from occupancy or
proceeding with reconstruction work, the Contract or this portion of the Contract
Decontamination procedure for removal of nonfriable materials in non-prepared Work Areas:
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02051-30
1.
The Contractor shall perform a complete visual inspection of the Work Area.
2.
Asbestos debris encountered shall be removed.
3.
Sealed drums and bags. and all equipment used in the Work Area shall be
included In the cleanup, and shall be removed from the Work Area at the
appropriate time in the cleaning sequence.
4.
Upon completion of his visual inspection and any necessary cleaning, the
Contractor shall notify the Environmental Consultant that the Work Area is ready
for Initial Review.
5.
Upon proper notification, the Environmental Consultant will review the Work Area for
the Contractors expense.
6.
Upon successful compliance with the Initial Review, the Environmental Consultant
shall conduct Clearance Testing. Refer to appropriate Article in this Section on Air
Monitoring for Clearance Testing standards.
7.
Upon written notification from the Owner's Representative that the Work Area has
passed the standard for Clearance Testing, the Contractor shall apply the
asbestos-free replacement materials, when included in the contract, and reestablish objects and Systems as specified in these Specifications.
8.
Upon completion of the application of replacement materials, or if no replacement
materials are required, after the re-establishment of objects and systems, the
Contractor shall notify the Environmental Consultant and the Owners
Representative within twenty-four (24) hours, in advance, that the Work Area is
ready for Pre-final Review.
9.
Upon notification, the Environmental Consultant and the Owners Representative will
review the Work Area. Improper application of the replacement materials,
unapproved damage to the facility or Its contents or Improper reestablishment of
objects and systems shall be itemized on a Punch List for correction by the
Contractor at his expense. If no deficiencies are discovered the Contract or this
portion of the Contract shall be approved in writing by the Environmental Consultant
as complete. If deficiencies are noted continue with the subsequent procedures.
NOTE: If deficiencies noted do not prevent the Owner from occupancy or
proceeding with reconstruction work, the Contract or this portion of the Contract
10.
Upon correction of Punch List deficiencies the Contractor shall notify the
Environmental Consultant and Owners Representative In advance that the Work
Area is ready for Final Review.
11.
Upon notification, the Environmental Consultant and the Owners Representative will
review the corrected Punch List deficiencies. If all deficiencies have been corrected.
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02051-31
the Contract or this portion of the Contract. shall be approved in writing by the
Environmental Consultant as complete. If deficiencies have not been properly
corrected, the Contractor shall repeat. at his expense. procedures 10 and 11 until
all deficiencies have been corrected and approved. NOTE: If deficiencies noted do
not prevent the Owner from occupancy or proceeding with reconstruction work, the
Contract or this portion of the Contract shall be specified in writing by the
Environmental Consultant and the owners Representative Substantially Complete.
4.7
DISPOSAL OF ASBESTOS WASTE
A.
Asbestos waste materials shall be packed into approved labeled protective packaging. The
Contractor shall be responsible for proper handling and disposal of the waste at an Ownerapproved facility in accordance with EPA guidelines.
B.
Hazardous Waste Transportation: Contractor shall submit to the Owner, for approval, the
name, address, telephone number and the EPA I.D. number of the waste transporter to be
utilized for this project.
C.
Waste Disposal Facility: Contractor shall submit to the Owner, for approval, the name,
class, address, telephone number and the EPA I.D. number of the waste disposal facility to
be utilized for this project.
Contractor shall notify the Owner at least 48 hours in advance of the time when
contaminated waste is to be removed from the site.
D.
E.
4.8
4.9
Contractor shall hold the Owner harmless for claims, damages, losses, and expenses
against the Owner, including attorney’s fees arising from asbestos spills on the site or en
route to the disposal site.
BUILDING CONTAMINATION
A.
If it is determined by visual identification or air samples that building contamination has
occurred as a result of the negligence and/or poor work practices of the Contractor, the
Contractor agrees to clean the affected premises at no charge to the Owner. The
Contractor also agrees to accept all liability for damages claimed or lawsuits brought by
person(s) exposed to such contamination.
B.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs incurred by the Owner and Consultant
should other portions of the building become contaminated with Asbestos as a result of the
Contractors poor work practices or other activities.
AIR MONITORING AND TESTING
A.
Area Air Monitoring:
1.
Throughout removal.encapsulation.and cleaning operations, Area Air Monitoring
shall be conducted by the Consultant to ensure that the Contractor's engineering
controls and work practices are minimizing worker and public exposures to
airborne asbestos fibers. in accordance with applicable codes, regulations. and
ordinances Fiber counting shall be done by the PCM Method No.7400 established
by NIOSH, with the following as minimum samplings recommended by the EPA:
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02051-32
2.
B.
Personal Air Monitoring:
1.
2.
3.
C.
The Consultant shall report the Area Air Monitoring results to the Contractor on the
following day If Area Air Monitoring results are unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall
make changes in his engineering controls and work practices to assure
compliance with the following standards. Unsatisfactory results are fiber counts
within the Work Area in excess of the Maximum Acceptable Level (0.1 fibers/cc) or
fiber counts outside the Work Area in excess of the Benchmark
Initial and periodic eight(S) hour TWA and thirty (30) minute excursion limit air
monitoring of Worker exposures to airborne concentrations of Asbestos fibers shall
be in accordance with OSHA (CFR 1926.58) requirements.
Once OSHA sampling requirements are satisfied the Contractor shall conduct, as
a requirement of this Contract, not less than one (1) personal air sample, twice per
calendar week, to determine 8-hour time-weighted average (TWA) exposures and
thirty (30) minute Excursion Limit exposures of workers operating in each Work
Area. Samples shall be collected within the Workers' breathing zones. Samples
shall be taken for each ten (10) workers from the time preparation work is started
until the Work Area has passed Clearance Testing. NOTE: Contract required
personal sampling is not necessary while the Contractor is conducting OSHA
required sampling or when Type C Respirators are in use.
The Contractor shall report Personal Monitoring results to the Observation Service
within 48 hours from the end of the work shift. Worker exposures to airborne
Asbestos concentrations shall not exceed the Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL) of
a-hour time-weighted average (TWA} of 0.1 fibers (longer than 5 micrometers) per
cubic centimeter of air, or the 1f/cc 30 minute period Excursion Limit.
Clearance Testing:
1.
Contained Work Areas: The Contractor should not be released until final inspection
and air testing are performed by the Consultant using AHERA protocol (“Aggressive
Sampling").
2.
Isolated and Nonprepared Work Area: The Consultant shall take a minimum of one
(1) non-aggressive air sample of 3,000 liters, upon completion of each Work Area.
The "Clearance" sample will be analyzed by PCM Method No. 7400 and
determined "clean” before removal of isolation material from the Work Area.
a.
3.
If the tests show that the Work Area has not been decontaminated, the
Contractor shall repeat the cleaning and/or encapsulation application until
the Work Area is in compliance. For the purpose of this Project,
decontamination for clearance testing by PCM Method No.7400 shall be
defined as air samples showing less than 0.01 fibers/cc. If the tests show
that the Work Area has not been decontaminated, the Contractor shall
repeat the cleaning and/or encapsulation application until the Work Area is
in compliance.
Clearance criteria for Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) Analysis Method:
Less than or equal to 70 structures per square millimeter (mm2).
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02051-33
4.
Clearance criteria for Phase Contrast Microscopy (PCM) Analysis Method: Less
than or equal to 0.01 fibers per cubic centimeter (f/cc).
NOTE:
4.10
STOPPING THE WORK
A.
4.11
In The event that Clearance Testing by the Consultant fails to meet the
Clearance Criteria set forth in these Specifications (i.e., not pass), the
Contractor shall be responsible for all additional time, additional tests and
project related expenses incurred by the Owner and Consultant and his
Consultants.
If, at any time, the Consultant decides that Work Practices are violating pertinent
regulations, these Specifications or, in his opinion, endangering Workers or the public, he
will immediately notify the Contractor (followed up in writing) that operations shall cease
until corrective action is taken. and the Contractor shall take such corrective action before
proceeding with the Work. Loss or Damages due to a Stop Work Order shall be borne by
the Contractor.
REPAIR AND PAINTING
A.
Contractor shall leave all finished surfaces and other items in Work Areas in the condition
in which they were prior to the commencement of the Project. Damage to finishes and
other items as the result of Work under this Contract shall be repaired or replaced, painted
or cleaned to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative. Delays due to repair Work are
not cause for extension of the deadline for the completion of the Project. Painting shall be
in accordance with the requirements set forth by the Project Manual. Repairs shall be in
accordance with standard construction methods for the item(s) in need of repair. Submit for
approval all repair materials and methods. All costs for cleaning, painting, and repair as the
result of the Contractor's or his Subcontractors' activities shall be borne by the Contractor.
END OF SECTION
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT
02051-34
SECTION 02052
LEAD-BASED PAINT ABATEMENT (DEMOLISHED BUILDING)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
DESCRIPTION
A.
Work Included: Contractor shall furnish all labor, services, materials, permits, insurance
(specifically covering the handling and transportation of Lead-Based Paint and Lead-Based
Paint Waste Materials) and equipment which is specified, shown or reasonably implied for
Lead Abatement activities, as specified in the preceeding pages and identified as Scope of
Work to these Specifications.
B.
Related Work:
1.
C.
Documents affecting Work of this Section include but are not necessarily limited to
Sections in Divisions 0 through 17 of the Project Manual for the facility.
Applicable Publications: The work conducted shall comply with all applicable federal, state
and local regulations. Applicable guidelines and standards listed in this Scope of Work
include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1.
Department of Housing & Urban Development (HUD): “Guidelines for the Evaluation
and Control of Lead-Based Paint Hazards in Housing," dated June 1995, revised
1997.
2.
Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Publications:
29 CFR 1910.20
Access to Employee Exposure & Medical Records
29 CFR 1910.134
Respiratory Protection
29 CFR 1910.145
Specifications for Accident Prevention Signs & Tags
29 CFR 1910.1025
General Industry Standards - Lead
29 CFR 1910.1200
Hazard Communication
29 CFR 1926.55
Gases, Vapors, Fumes, Dusts & Mists
29 CFR 1926.62
Construction Standards - Lead
29 CFR 1926.200
Signs, Signals & Barricades
40 CFR 61
Subpart A General Provisions
40 CFR 61.152
Standard for Waste Manufacturing, Demolition, Spraying
and Fabricating Operations
40 CFR 241
Guidelines for the Land Disposal of Solid Wastes
40 CFR 257
Criteria for Classification of Solid Waste
40 CFR 261 & 262
Waste Disposal Facilities & Practices
3.
California Code of Regulations - General Industry Safety Orders (GISO)
Section 1532.1
Lead
Section 5216
Lead Regulations
Section 5155
Airborne Contaminants
4.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Publications:
Z88.2-80
Practices for Respiratory Protection
Z87.1
Eye Protection
LEAD-BASE PAINT ABATEMENT
02052-1
1.02
5.
National Institute of Occupational Safety & Health (NIOSH) Publications:
Manual of Analytical Methods, 2nd Edition, Volume 1, Physical & Chemical
Analysis Method (P&CAM)
6.
Title 17, CCR, Div. 1, Chapter 8
7.
Title 22, CCR.
DEFINITIONS
SUMMARY:
General Explanation: A substantial amount of specification language constitutes definitions for
terms found in other contract documents. Certain terms used in the Specifications are defined in
this article.
A.
City: The City of Los Angeles (also hereinafter referred to as the “City”) and/or a designated
representative.
B.
Abatement: Means any measure designed to permanently eliminate lead- based paint
hazards in accordance with standards established by the EPA Administrator pursuant to
Title IV of the Toxic Substances Control Act (TSCA). Abatement strategies include: removal
of lead- based paint; enclosure of lead- based paint; encapsulation of lead- based paint
(with a product that has been shown to meet standards established or recognized pursuant
to Title IV of TSCA); replacement of building components coated by lead- based paint;
removal of lead- contaminated dust; removal or covering of lead- contaminated soil with a
durable covering (not grass or sod, which are considered interim control measures); as well
as all preparation, cleanup, disposal, postabatement clearance testing, record keeping,
and monitoring (if applicable).
B(2).
Abatement Area: Means the exterior of the building or an area isolated from the building
interior by containment.
C.
Accessible Surface: Means any surface which is below five (5) feet in height from the floor
or ground or is exposed in such a way that a child can come in contact with the surface.
D.
Biological Monitoring: Is the analysis of a person’s blood to determine the level of lead
contamination in the body. Biological monitoring for lead hazard reduction work includes
blood sampling and analysis for lead and zinc protoporphyrin levels.
E.
Certified Industrial Hygienist: Is a person certified by the American Board of Industrial
Hygiene and who has at least four years experience and a graduate degree or five years
experience; and who has passed a two- day examination offered by the Board.
F.
Change Room: The area of a worker decontamination facility used for removing protective
equipment prior to entering the clean room.
G.
Clean Room: The area of a worker decontamination facility used for donning protective
equipment and storing street clothes.
02052-2
H.
Code Enforcement Agency: Means the State Lead Poisoning Prevention Program or its
agent, or the local board of health or other agency responsible for enforcing the State
Sanitary Code or sections thereof.
I.
Commissioner: Means the Commissioner of Public Health.
J.
Common Area: Means a room or area that is accessible to more than one tenant in a
building (e. g., common hallways, stairwells, laundry rooms).
K.
"Consultant": Shall refer to the Environmental Consultant, and its designated, authorized
representatives.
L.
Containment: Means a process for protecting other workers, residents, and the environment
by isolating areas from exposures to lead dust and debris created during abatement in a
work area.
M.
Decontamination of Personnel: Shall include, at a minimum, HEPA vacuuming of
disposable personal protective clothing according to the provisions in 29 CFR 1926.62.
N.
Decontamination of Work Areas: Shall be as specified in Section 3.02.
O.
Defective Surface: Means peeling, flaking, chalking, scaling, or chipping paint; or, paint over
crumbling, cracking, or falling plaster, or plaster with holes in it; paint over a defective or
deteriorating substrate; paint that is separating from the substrate; and paint that is
damaged in any manner such that a child can be exposed to the paint from the damaged
area.
P.
Employee: Any person employed or hired by an employer in any lawful employment.
Q.
Employer: Any person, firm, corporation, partnership, association, or other entity engaged
in a business or providing services, including the State and any of its political subdivisions,
or any person acting in the direct interest of any of the foregoing in relation to any employee
or place of employment.
R.
Elevated Blood Lead Level: In adult workers, means a blood lead concentration equal to or
greater than twenty- five (25) micrograms per deciliter (µg/dl) or an increase of ten (10) µg/dl
above baseline levels.
S.
Enclosure: Means covering surfaces and sealing or caulking with durable materials so as to
prevent or control chalking, peeling, or flaking substances containing toxic levels of lead
from becoming part of house dust or accessible to children.
T.
Entity: Means any person, partnership, firm, association, corporation, sole proprietorship,
or any other business concern, state or local government agency or political subdivision or
authority thereof, or any religious, social, or union organization, whether operated for profit
or otherwise.
U.
"General Trades Contractor": Shall refer to the contractor responsible for coordination of all
filed sub- bids and general construction.
02052-3
1.03
V.
Hazardous Level of Lead for Waste Disposal: Is 5.0 parts per million (ppm) as defined by
RCRA Toxicity Characteristic Leachate Procedure (TCLP) or other requirement set by local
or state authorities.
W.
High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) Filter: Means a type of filtering system capable of
filtering out particles of 0.3 microns or greater diameter from a body of air at 99.97%
efficiency or greater.
X.
High Phosphate Detergent: Is detergent which contains at least five percent (5%) trisodium phosphate (TSP) or other equally effective cleaning agent.
Y.
Intact Surface: Means a defect- free surface with no loose, peeling, chipping, or flaking
paint. Painted surfaces must be free from crumbling, cracking, or falling plaster and must
not have holes in them. Intact surfaces are not damaged in any way.
Z.
Lead-based: Refers to paints, glazes, and other surface coverings containing a toxic level of
lead, as defined by applicable federal, state, and local rules and regulations.
AA.
Paint Removal: Means a strategy of abatement which entails stripping lead paint from
surfaces.
AB.
Qualified Abatement Subcontractor: A sub-contractor capable of providing a properly
trained, DHS certified, and equipped work force for abatement work. All workers employees
to perform abatement activities shall have successfully completed a minimum of 24 hours of
training in the potential hazards of abating lead based paint. Abatement contractors must
possess the appropriate license or certification from the State or local government.
AC.
Removal: Means a strategy of abatement which entails the removal of components, such
as windows, doors, gutters, downspouts, railing stairs, molding and trim that contain toxic
levels of lead.
AD.
"Subcontractor": Shall refer to the Abatement Contractor.
AE.
N.A.
AF.
Toxic Level of Lead in Surface Coatings: Toxic level of lead in surface coating is defined as
the Los Angeles County Department of Health Services active level of 1.0 milligrams or
more per square centimeter (mg/cm2) by XRF methods or 600 parts per million (ppm)
(0.06%) by laboratory testing (EPA, CPSC)- and/or as defined by the most current
applicable federal, state, and local rules and regulations.
Toxic level of lead in surface coating is defined as the Los Angeles County Department of
Health Services active level of 1.0
AG.
Toxicity Characteristic Leachate Procedure (TCLP): Is the EPA required sample preparation
for determining the hazard characteristic of a waste generated at a lead abatement site.
AH.
"Wet Wall": Shall refer to walls which contain plumbing fixtures and/ or pipes, including
both supply and sanitary lines.
ABATEMENT CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY
02052-4
A.
All regulations by the above and other governing agencies in their most current version are
applicable throughout this project. Where there is a conflict between this Specification and
the cited federal, state or local regulations or guidelines, the more restrictive or stringent
requirements shall prevail. This Section refers to many requirements found in these
references, but in no way is it intended to cite or reiterate all provisions therein or
elsewhere. It is the Abatement Contractor’s responsibility to know, understand, and abide
by all such regulations, guidelines and common practices
B.
Qualification Criteria. The City requests that appropriate documentation be provided as a
submittal for all aspects of the work detailing the firm’s qualifications on the following
criteria:
General: The (fill in) request that documentation be provided for all aspects of the work at
the Bid opening detailing the firm’s qualifications.
Training Requirements: All workers and supervisors shall have successfully completed a
course provided by a training provider accredited with the California Department of Health
Services Childhood Lead Poisoning Prevention Branch – Lead Related Construction
Certification Requirements.
Supervision:
The Abatement Contractor shall provide one site supervisor whose
responsibilities include coordination, safety, security and execution of all phases of the lead
removal project. The Supervisor shall not be used as a lead removal worker, and shall be
assigned full time to the project. The Supervisor shall be fully qualified in all aspects of lead
abatement practices and procedures, and have a five-day training course provided by a
training provider certified by the DHS Lead Poisoning Prevention Branch, Lead Related
Construction Interim Certification Guidelines.
C.
License Requirements. Firm(s) shall be qualified to perform abatement operations as
defined by the HUD Guidelines and Local Law and have workers and supervisors who have
successfully completed training courses covering abatement issues. This course shall
cover all topics required by HUD, EPA and Local Law. These topics should include, but not
be limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Toxicity of Lead
How Can I Protect Myself? (Respirators, Personal Protective Equipment and
Decontamination Procedures)
Other Chemical and Safety Hazards
Using Tools
Completing the Project
Role of the Inspector
Lead in Construction and Abatement
Monitoring and Medical Removal
Signs and Labels
Preparing the Work Area
Cleanup: How and Why
Clearance
Worker Responsibilities
02052-5
Contractor is advised that licenses in other trades may be required. The Subcontractors are
also responsible for insuring that all licensing requirements for appropriate trades and
procedures are met.
1.04
SPECIFIC ABATEMENT CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
Notifications/ Approvals
1.
B.
Provide in proper and timely fashion all necessary notifications to relevant Federal,
State and local authorities and obtain and comply with the provisions of all permits
or applications required by the work specified, as well as make all required
submittals required under those auspices. The Abatement Contractor shall
indemnify the City’s, Architect and Consultant from, and pay for all claims resulting
from, failure to adhere to these provisions. The costs for all permits, applications,
and the like, are to be borne by the Abatement Contractor. For each work site, the
Abatement Subcontractor shall notify in writing the following agencies, five (5) days
prior to the date abatement which will begin (in accordance with Local Law) and
shall provide evidence of notifications to the City and General Trades Contractor at
the preconstruction conference and shall be posted, in conformance with DHS
Notification Form 8551, at the work site at all time at each entrance of work site
five (5) days prior to the Work:
a.
Certification or Licensing State Agency
b.
Department of Public Health Childhood Lead Poisoning Prevention
Program
c.
Occupants of the Dwelling Unit to be abated and occupants of the Building
to undergo abatement activities, in conjunction with City.
Fees, Permits and Licenses
1.
The Abatement Contractor shall pay all licensing fees, royalties, and other costs
necessary for the use of any copyrighted or patented product, design, invention, or
processing the performance of the job specified in this Section. The Abatement
Contractor shall be solely responsible for costs, damages or losses resulting from
any infringement of these patent rights or copyrights. The Abatement Contractor
shall hold the City’s, Architect and the Consultant harmless from any costs,
damages, and losses resulting from any infringement of these patent rights or
copyrights. If the Contract Specification requests the use of any product, design,
invention, or process that requires a licensing fee or royalty fee for use in the
performance of the job, the Abatement Contractor shall be responsible for the fee or
royalty and shall disclose the existence of such rights.
2.
Applications and Permits. The Abatement Contractor shall make all applicable and
necessary notifications (in proper and timely fashion) to relevant federal, state, and
local authorities and shall obtain and comply with the provisions of all permits or
applications required by the work specified, as well as make all required submittals
required under those auspices. The Abatement Contractor shall indemnify the City,
Architect and Consultant from, and pay for all claims resulting from failure to
02052-6
adhere to these provisions. The costs for all permits, applications, and the like, are
to be assumed by the Abatement Contractor.
3.
C.
The Abatement Contractor shall be responsible for securing all necessary permits
for work under this Section, including hauling, removal, and disposal, fire, and
materials usage, or any other permits required to perform the specified work.
Coordination/ Cooperation. The Abatement Contractor shall meet with the Architect, City,
and Consultant prior to commencing work on the project. The meeting shall be at the
facility of City at a mutually convenient time and date to be determined by the City and
Consultant. At the meeting, the Abatement Contractor shall be represented by authorized
representatives and the field supervisors who shall run the project on a daily basis, and
shall present evidence that all requirements for initiation of the work have been met. The
minimum agenda for the meeting shall be:
1.
Channels of communication;
2.
Construction schedule, including sequence of critical work;
3.
Designation of responsible personnel;
4.
Procedures for safety, security, quality control, housekeeping, and related matters;
5.
Use of premises, facilities and utilities;
6.
Review of "Pre- Job Submittals"
7.
Discussion of a detailed Project Specification Work Plan composed of at least the
following:
a.
A sketch showing the detail, location and layout of the clean area, the dirty
area (Decon System) and the work area.
b.
The sequencing of the work.
c.
The timing and projected completion of the work.
d.
Detailed description of the method to be employed in order to control
airborne and waste water pollution.
e.
The type of equipment and amount of equipment available to the
Abatement Contractor to be used on the project, including HEPA
vacuums, etc.
f.
The procedures to contain, package and remove the waste from the work
area and the procedures and locations of the disposal of hazardous and
non- hazardous waste.
g.
An air sampling plan which includes:
(1)
h.
i.
Air sampling training and strategy, sampling locations, projected
number of samples; and frequency, methodology, and duration of
sampling.
The type of respirators to be used, protective equipment to be used, and a
respirator program, if applicable.
A safety precautions plan may include special precautions taken by the
Abatement Sub or Subcontractors in performing their respective tasks,
02052-7
j.
1.05
safety equipment to be worn by employees, frequency of safety meetings,
and all other relevant functions to be performed by the abatement
Contractors to ensure a safe workplace.
Any other data that enhances this work plan. Innovative ideas and/ or
technology are encouraged.
Documentation/ Submittals
A.
Pre- Abatement/ Job. The Abatement Contractor shall provide seven (7) copies of the
following Submittals for City review and approval prior to the commencement of work:
1.
Copies of all notifications, permits, applications, licenses and like documents
required by federal, state, or local regulations obtained or submitted in proper
fashion.
2.
Copies of medical records, including lead blood level monitoring data and a
notarized statement by the examining medical doctor that such examinations took
place, and when, for each employee to be used on the project.
3.
Copies of Contractor’s certificates, licenses, and copies of each supervisor’s
license and workers’ certificates
4.
Record of successful respirator fit testing performed by a qualified individual within
the previous six months, for each employee to be used on this project with the
employee’s name and social security number with each record;
5.
Proposed respiratory protection program for employees throughout all phases of
the job, including make, model and NIOSH approval numbers of respirators to be
used;
6.
A detailed Project Specification Work Plan as described in Section 3.02-A.
7.
Written description, for the City’s review and acceptance, of all proposed
procedures, methods, or equipment to be utilized that differ from the Contract
Specifications, including manufacturers specifications on any equipment not
specified for use by this Section; in all instances, the Contractor must comply with
all applicable federal, state and local regulations.
8.
Proposed electrical safeguards to be implemented by qualified Electrical
Subcontractor, including but not limited to location of transformers, GFCI outlets,
lighting, and power panels necessary to safely perform the job, including a
description of electrical hazards safety plan for common practices in the work area.
9.
Proposed worker orientation plan which at a minimum includes a description of
lead hazards and abatement methodologies, a review of worker protection
requirements, and the outline of safety procedures.
10.
Chain- of- Command of responsibility at work site including supervisors, foreman,
and competent person, their names, resumes and certificates of training.
11.
List of all supervisors and workers intended to be assigned to the project.
02052-8
B.
C.
12.
Proposed Emergency Plan and route of egress from work areas in case of fire or
injury, including the name and phone number of nearest medical assistance center.
This shall be conspicuously posted at the work site.
13.
The name and address of Abatement Contractor’s blood lead testing lab, OSHACDC listing, and Certification in the state where work site is located.
14.
The name and address of Abatement Contractor’s personal air monitoring and
waste disposal lead testing laboratory( ies) including certification( s) of
accreditation for lead in the EPA National Lead Laboratory Accreditation Program,
listing of relevant experience in air and debris lead analysis, and presentation of a
documented Quality Assurance and Quality Control Program.
15.
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) on all materials and chemicals to be used on
the project.
16.
Name, address, and ID number of the hazardous waste hauler, waste transfer
route, and proposed disposal site.
17.
Name, address, and ID number of the proposed construction debris site.
18.
Proposed heating system for abatement to be employed, if used.
During Job. The Abatement Contractor is required to submit to the City and Consultant, a
weekly status report including:
1.
Number of buildings started
2.
Number of buildings completed awaiting test results
3.
Number of buildings failing clearance
4.
Number of buildings passing clearance
5.
Results from personal air samples
6.
Results from TCLP testing
7.
Results from other testing
8.
Any other relevant data as requested by the City.
9.
Medical, license, and Respirator Fit documentation shall be provided in advance of
any new employees starting on the project.
Post- abatement. The Abatement Contractor is required to submit to the City the following
at a Post- Construction conference:
02052-9
1.06
1.
Copies of manifests and receipts acknowledging disposal of all hazardous and nonhazardous waste material from the project showing delivery date, quantity, and
appropriate signature of landfill’s authorized representative.
2.
A copy of the entry- exit logbook with accompanying letter from the abatement
contractor certifying testing that it is true and current to the best of her/his
knowledge.
3.
All personal monitoring results.
4.
All TCLP & TTLC test results.
PERSONAL PROTECTION
A.
B.
Respiratory Protection/ Protective Clothing
1.
Prior to commencing all work, all workers shall be instructed in all aspects of
personnel protection, work procedures, emergency evacuation procedures and use
of equipment including procedures unique to this project.
2.
Respiratory protection shall meet the requirements of OSHA as presented in 29
CFR 1910.134 titled "Respiratory Protection" and 29 CFR 1926.62 titled "Lead in
Construction." The protection factors shown in 29 CFR 1926.62 shall be used for
this project.
3.
Abatement Contractor shall provide appropriate respiratory protection equipment for
each worker and ensure usage during potential lead exposure.
4.
Abatement Contractor shall select respirators from among those jointly approved
as being acceptable for protection by the National Institute for Occupational Safety
and Health (NIOSH) under the provisions of 30 CFR Part 11.
5.
Abatement Contractor shall have adequate supply of HEPA filter elements or other
necessary filter elements and spare parts on site for respirators in use.
Respiratory Protection Requirements
1.
The Qualified Abatement Contractor shall provide respirators and all necessary
maintenance materials at no cost to the employees. Employees shall wear the
following respirators at all times while abatement work is underway or while present
in the work area.
a.
For use while sanding, scraping or stripping with a heat gun, the minimum
required respirator shall be the halfmask, air- purifying respirator equipped
with HEPA filters or a powered, air- purifying respirator with high efficiency
filters or the half mask supplied- air respirator operated in the positivepressure mode, if required under local law.
b.
For use with caustics or in replacement, the minimum required respirator
shall be the halfmask, air- purifying respirator equipped with high
efficiency filters. Whenever a chemical preparation is used in conjunction
02052-10
with a mechanical or powered technique, the use of an additional
combination cartridge, appropriate to the exposure, shall be used unless a
supplied- air respirator is used.
c.
1.07
For use during removal or demolition of components with surfaces covered
with lead-based paint, the minimum required respirator shall be the halfmask, air purifying respirator equipped with high efficiency filters.
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
Work/ Scheduling Requirements. Work shall be carried out in sequential phases.
Inspection and approval of each phase by the Consultant shall be sought and gained before
proceeding to the next phase and in accordance with the schedule agreed upon by City at
the Pre-Construction meeting as amended. As a Contract requirement, any reasonable
delay caused by this requirement will not constitute a basis for claim against the City or
Consultant.
B.
Job Sequences
C.
1.
The Abatement Contractor shall extend full cooperation to City in all matters
involving the use of City’s facilities. At no time shall the Abatement Subcontractor
cause or allow to be caused conditions which may cause risk or hazard to the
general public or conditions that might impair safe use of the facility. The use of the
facility’s electricity, water or like utilities by the Abatement Subcontractor shall be
coordinated through the City.
2.
The Abatement Contractor shall submit a time-line schedule, not date specific, to
City and Consultant for integration into the overall project schedule. Coordinate the
work of this section with that of all other trades. Phasing and scheduling of this
project will be at the discretion of the City and Consultant and shall not proceed in
any area without the express consent of the City and Consultant. The Abatement
Contractor shall be available within 24 hours notice for additional work or rework if
after acceptance of the work it is found that full abatement or clearance was not
achieved from the initial work effort as determined by the City and Consultant.
3.
The proposed time line for the work in this Section, as noted above, shall show the
time involved rfom start to finish of abatement operations, including preparation,
removal, cleanup, and tear- down portions of the job.
4.
A final written schedule shall be prepared for approval by the City and the
Consultant.
Working Hours. Refer to Summary of Work for specific requirements. The work in this
Section shall be carried on under the usual construction conditions, in conjunction with all
other work at the site. The Abatement Contractor shall cooperate with the City, Consultant,
General Contractor, and subcontractors and equipment suppliers working on the site,
coordinate the work with them and proceed in a manner so as not to delay the progress of
the project.
1.
The Abatement Contractor shall coordinate the work with the progress of the work
of other trades so that the work shall be completed as soon as conditions permit.
02052-11
Any overtime hours worked or additional costs incurred due to lack of or improper
coordination with General Contractor or other trades of the General Contractor by
the Abatement Contractor shall be assumed by the Abatement Contractor without
any additional cost to the City or the Consultant.
2.
Any costs associated with repeated cleaning due to a failure to achieve clearance
shall be borne by the Abatement Contractor without any additional cost to the City
or the Consultant.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIALS AND/ OR METHODS
A.
Any substitution in materials or methods to those specified shall be approved by the
Consultant and City prior to use. Any requests for substitution shall be provided in writing to
the Consultant and the City. The request shall clearly state the rationale for the
substitution.
B.
Submit to the Consultant and the City product data and samples of all materials to be
considered as an alternate.
C.
Product data shall consist of manufacturer’s catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams,
schedules, performance charts, illustrations, material safety data sheets (MSDS) and other
standard descriptive data. Submittal data shall be clearly marked to identify pertinent
materials, products or models and show performance characteristics and capacities.
Samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to clearly illustrate the functional
characteristics of the product or material with integrally related parts and attachment
devices.
D.
No work shall begin which requires submittal for approval until City has "approved" or
"approved as noted" the submittal.
INTRODUCTION
A.
Materials and Equipment
1.
The work of this Section, without limiting the generality thereof, includes the
furnishing of labor, materials, tools, equipment, services and incidentals necessary
to complete all Lead Based Paint Abatement in accordance with the Plans and
Specifications. These Plans and Specifications are intended to describe, and
provide for a finished and complete piece of work; work which is described by any
portion of these documents shall be complete in every detail and in accordance
with established trade practice, notwithstanding whether or not every item or detail
necessarily involved is particularly mentioned.
2.
Approvals and Inspections. All temporary facilities, work procedures, equipment,
materials, services, and agreements must strictly adhere to and meet this Section
along with EPA, OSHA, NIOSH, HUD regulations recommendations, and
guidelines, as well as any other federal state, and local regulations. Where there
exists an overlap of these regulations and guidelines, the most stringent one
02052-12
applies. All work performed by the Abatement Contractor is further subject to
approval of the City, and/ or Consultant.
B.
Materials
1.
Deliver all materials in the original packages, containers, or bundles bearing the
name of the manufacturer and the brand name and product technical description.
2.
Damaged or deteriorating materials shall not be used and shall be removed from
the premises.
3.
Polyethylene sheet in a roll size to minimize the frequency of joints shall be
delivered to job site with factory label indicating 6 mil.
4.
Polyethylene disposable bags shall be six (6) mil with preprinted label, sealed
with duct tape.
5.
Tape or adhesive spray will be capable of sealing joints in adjacent polyethylene
sheets and for attachment of polyethylene sheet to finished or unfinished surfaces
of dissimilar materials and capable of adhering under both dry and wet conditions,
including use of amended water.
6.
Impermeable containers are to be used to receive and retain any lead containing or
contaminated materials until disposal at an acceptable disposal site. (The
containers shall be labeled in accordance with EPA and DOT standards.)
7.
HEPA filtered exhaust systems shall be used during any dust generating
abatement operations.
8.
All caustics shall be properly labeled and containerized in leak- tight containers.
9.
Machine Sanding Equipment - Sanders shall be of the dual action, rotary action,
orbital or straight line system type, fitted with a high efficiency particulate air
(HEPA) dust pickup system. Air compressors utilized to operate this equipment
shall be designed to continuously provide 90 to 110 p. s. i. or as recommended by
the manufacturer.
10.
Heat Blower Gun Equipment - Electrically- operated, heat- blower gun shall be a
flameless electrical paint softener type. Heat- blower shall have electronically
controlled temperature settings to allow usage below a temperature of 1,100
degrees Fahrenheit. Heat- blower shall be DI type (non- grounded) 120 V, AC
application. Heat- blower shall be equipped with various nozzles to cover all
common applications (cone, fan, glass protector, spoon reflector, etc.).
11.
Chemical Stripping Removers - Chemical removers shall contain no methylene
chloride products. Chemical removers shall be compatible with, and not harmful to
the substrate that they are applied to. Chemical removers used on masonry
surfaces shall contain anti- stain formulation that inhibits discoloration of stone,
granite, brick and other masonry construction. Chemical removers used on interior
surfaces shall not raise or discolor the surface being abated.
02052-13
12.
C.
Chemical Stripping Agent Neutralizer - Chemical stripping agent neutralizers may
be used on exterior surfaces only. Neutralizers shall be compatible with and not
harmful to the substrate that they are applied to. Neutralizers shall be compatible
with the stripping agent that has been applied to the surface substrate.
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
1.
Provide suitable tools for all abatement operations.
2.
The Abatement Contractor shall have available sufficient inventory or dated
purchase orders for materials necessary for the job including protective clothing,
respirators, filter cartridges, polyethylene sheeting of proper size and thickness,
tape, and air filters.
3.
The Abatement Contractor shall have available power cables or sources such as
generators (where required).
4.
Vacuum units, of suitable size and capacities for project, shall have HEPA filter(s)
capable of trapping and retaining at least 99.97% of all monodispersed particles of
0.3 micrometers in diameter.
5.
The Abatement Contractor will have reserve units so that the station system will
operate continuously.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
LOCATION AND WORK STATEMENT
The site for abatement and locations of the effected buildings are described in Summary of Work.
The Abatement Contractor shall retain full control and responsibility of all lead waste and
construction waste generated during abatement procedures outlined in this specification. Specific
work locations and component schedules are listed on Drawings as well as the locations listed
below.
3.02
WORK AREA SET UP
A.
General
1.
Site Safety. The Abatement Contractor is responsible for all safety at the work site.
This includes, but is not limited to electrical safety, mechanical (tool) safety, fire
safety, and personnel protective safety. Safety requirements are, for the most part,
common sense and sound business practice; however, the Abatement Contractor
is advised that federal, state and local regulations exist which govern safety on the
work site. Therefore, in addition to the following, the Abatement Contractor is
responsible for adhering to the most stringent requirements in affect by any of the
following entities or these Specifications.
a.
A primary concern in this type of work is to ensure that adequate exits
exist in the event of an emergency and conversely, that adequate
entrances exist for emergency personnel. The nature of this work requires
02052-14
sealing entrances and the extensive use of six- mil polyethylene sheeting;
however, the Abatement Contractor should never permanently seal (i. e.,
nail, bolt, hard cover) any potential escape exits and should take extra
care to clearly identify potential exits and inform the workers.
2.
WORK SITE SAFETY PLAN
Prior to the initiation of the abatement work, the following tasks must be completed
by the Contractor:
The Abatement Contractor shall establish a work site safety plan which includes a
set of emergency procedures and shall post them in a conspicuous place at the
work site. The safety plan should include provisions for the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Evacuation of injured workers
Emergency and fire exit routes from all work areas, including local
telephone numbers for fire and medical emergency personnel
Copies of applicable insurance certificates
Employee work logs
The Abatement Contractor is responsible for training all workers in safety
procedures. At a minimum, one employee on site shall be trained and certified in
basic first aid by the American Red Cross or equivalent. A general first aid kit may
be maintained in the containment for treating minor medical problems.
3.
Access to Work Areas
a.
The City will provide specific access as required during the project to the
Abatement Contractor and personnel assigned to the project. The
Abatement Contractor will be responsible for the security of each building
or portion thereof involved in the abatement project. It will also be the
Abatement Contractor’s responsibility to allow only authorized personnel
as defined below in Section 3.06 into the work area, and to secure all
assigned entrances and exits at the end of the work day so as to prevent
unauthorized entry.
b.
The Abatement Contractor shall maintain a bound log book in which any
person entering or leaving the lead abatement work area must sign and
enter the dates and times of entry and departure.
c.
Use of waste containers on- site shall be controlled under the following
requirements:
(1)
(2)
(3)
Location of waste containers on- site shall be coordinated with the
City and Consultant.
The waste containers shall be solid enclosed containers, lined
with two layers of six- mil polyethylene sheeting and locked and
secured at all times.
The Abatement Subcontractor shall comply with all federal, state
and local regulations and ordinances regarding lead waste
storage.
02052-15
d.
C.
The Abatement Contractor, supervisor will not allow anyone access to the
work area unless they have successfully passed an approved training
program.
Exterior Abatement Preparation
1.
Prior to the commencement of any abatement procedures, notification
requirements must be met; required signs shall be posted and moveable objects
shall be moved a minimum of four feet from the perimeter walls of the room.
2.
Pre-abatement work shall be performed prior to any abatement or component
removal commencing on each side of the building.
3.
Decontamination Unit. At a minimum, the Abatement Contractor shall construct a
multi- stage decontamination unit. This unit shall be directly adjacent to the
abatement area for the decontamination of workers contaminated with lead. The
decontamination unit shall consist of an equipment room/dirty room, and clean
room/wash area in series. The Contractor shall ensure that employees use the
worker decontamination chamber prior to leaving the work area.
a.
The decontamination unit shall be constructed with six-mil polyethylene
sheeting on floors, walls and ceiling.
4.
Clean area. The Abatement Contractor shall select a clean area outside the
abatement area for the workers to change into protective equipment. This area shall
contain warm water hand washing facilities (potable water), clean cloths, storage
for a HEPA vacuum, and respirator storage space. Contaminated equipment or
personnel shall not be permitted in this area.
5.
Abatement area.
a.
The Abatement Contractor shall pre- clean all surfaces with a HEPA
vacuum and protect occupants’ belongings by covering with one layer of
six mil polyethylene and have joints taped. All debris gathered during this
cleanup shall be disposed of properly. In addition, any existing loose
paint or paint bearing materials found in the buildings are to be assumed
hazardous and packaged and disposed of properly. The amount of the
material should be estimated during the pre- bid walkthrough.
b.
For exterior work, the Abatement Contractor shall prepare the area as
follows:
(1)
Doors and Windows: Sealed doors and windows on the interior
side of the building upon which a dust- generating method is being
used, and on the same floor and all floors below, must be closed
and covered with six-mil thick polyethylene sheeting.
(2)
Plants and Ground: The ground and any plants or shrubs in the
area in which exterior abatement is occurring shall be covered with
a waterproof 6 mil polyethylene sheeting and weighted at all edges
02052-16
so as to prevent blowing. Such covering shall cover from the side
of the structure to a point at least eight feet away from the
structure. The covering shall be taped or otherwise attached to the
structure.
6.
(a)
The waterproof 6 mil polyethylene sheeting shall always
be placed in a manner that traps all debris and water. This
is best accomplished by elevating the edges.
(b)
The waterproof 6 mil polyethylene sheeting shall be
properly disposed of and not reused.
(c)
Special Areas. Any abatement project being performed on
any structure other than a building shall be arranged,
equipped and operated in a manner which will eliminate
the possibility of lead contaminants or lead contaminated
materials escaping from the work area.
c.
The Abatement Contractor shall maintain polyethylene barriers, and a
clean area as long as needed for the safe and proper completion of the
work. Any openings or tears in the work area barriers shall be corrected by
the Abatement Subcontractor at the beginning of each work day and as
necessary during the workday with such openings or tears reported
immediately to the City. Work will not be allowed to commence until all
barriers are in place and acceptable to the Consultant.
d.
Barriers shall not be removed until the work areas are thoroughly cleaned,
and the area approved by the Consultant. All debris must be properly
bagged and removed from work areas, and the lead surface wipe samples
must have passed final clearance tests, in accordance with provisions
detailed in the Specification prior to barrier removal.
e.
At the City’s and Consultant’s approval, the Abatement Contractor may
utilize a portable mini- isolation chamber to create an isolated work area
around single components to be removed. This chamber shall still be
equipped with an adjacent clean room, and become an isolated work area
sealed at all seams to where it is attached to adjacent surfaces. It shall
also satisfy all requirements for a work area and satisfy all clearance
criteria, as identified in this Section and Local Law.
Signs. Prior to the preparation of a dwelling for abatement, the Abatement
Subcontractor shall place warning signs immediately outside all entrances and
exits to the dwelling, warning that abatement work is being conducted in the
vicinity. The signs shall be at least 20" x 14" and read:
WARNING:
LEAD PAINT REMOVAL HAZARD
UNAUTHORIZED ENTRY PROHIBITED
NO SMOKING, EATING OR DRINKING ALLOWED IN THE WORK AREA
02052-17
(Signs shall be in bold lettering with lettering not smaller than two inches tall.)
7.
8.
3.03
Construct and maintain suitable polyethylene barriers within the building to isolate
the exterior work area from the interior of the building.
The polyethylene barriers termed "critical barriers" for the removal of windows shall
consist of the following:
a.
Pre- Clean all interior window surfaces with a HEPA- equipped vacuum.
b.
Seal duct tape lip to inner most sill, casing and header surfaces of the
window.
c.
Seal two layers of six mil polyethylene sheeting from the duct tape lip on
the inside sill of the dwelling unit window and extend up to the inside
surface of the top interior casing. The first layer of sheeting applied shall be
sealed to the inside faces of the window casing. The polyethylene sheeting
shall be sealed to a piece of three- inch wide duct tape forming a lip
attached to the interior window perimeter of the window casing.
d.
There shall be no cavity in the polyethylene sheeting created that would
allow lead dust to accumulate, which cannot be removed with HEPA
vacuuming. This shall allow for removal of this polyethylene sheeting from
the exterior of the building, without the generation of lead dust, once the
window is removed and cleanup is complete.
e.
The second layer of polyethylene sheeting shall be applied over the first
layer and sealed directly to the inner face of the cut tape lip and window
sill and casing.
f.
This sealing of windows shall be done from the interior prior to the
beginning of any exterior work.
9.
The exterior of the building and the ground surrounding the building shall be covered
with plastic sheeting or tarpaulins from the edge of the building to a point at least
eight feet away and secured to the ground.
10.
The poly barriers shall not be removed until after all debris, dust, and chips are
vacuumed up from the exterior.
11.
Maintain polyethylene barriers, as long as needed for the safe and proper
completion of the work. Any breeches in the work area barriers shall be corrected
immediately and as necessary during the work day with such breeches reported
immediately to the City. Work will not be allowed to commence until all barriers are
in place and acceptable to the Consultant.
12.
Window barriers shall not be removed until the window opening and polyethylene
sheeting thoroughly cleaned as specified in this section, all debris has been
properly bagged and removed from work areas, and the lead surface wipe samples
have been taken in accordance with provisions detailed herein.
OCCUPANT PROTECTION
02052-18
During the course of the abatement project, the protection of the building occupants and their
belongings shall be the responsibility of the Abatement Contractor. Use of engineering controls
shall be employed throughout the entire project.
A.
City’s Responsibilities
The City shall be responsible for all aspects addressing the relocation of occupants during
daily construction activities of the abatement project.
B.
Occupant’s Responsibility
The occupants shall be responsible for providing an unobstructed work place for the
Abatement Contractor prior to vacating the area during daily construction activities. The
Citys’ responsibilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
C.
1.
Removal of all paintings, pictures, plaques, draperies, shelves, and otherwise
applied items from outside wall surfaces within the work area.
2.
Removal of all furniture from around the perimeter of the outside walls to a location
in the center of the room no closer than four (4) feet from the work area walls. If the
room is too small to accomplish this, the furniture must be removed from the room.
Abatement Contractor’s Responsibility
The Abatement Contractor shall be responsible for establishing and maintaining all
engineering controls referenced herein and as required to prevent dispersal of lead
contamination from the work area. While this is the prime responsibility of the Abatement
Contractor, additional responsibility will include, but not be limited to, the following:
3.04
1.
Provide notifications and posting as required by these specifications.
2.
Protect occupants’ possessions as specified in these specifications including, but
not limited to, furniture and boxed items located in the center of work area rooms.
3.
The Abatement Contractor shall be responsible for and bear all costs resulting from
damage caused to the occupants’ possessions during the abatement work.
PROTECTIVE PROCEDURES
A.
Personal Air monitoring. Both personal air and area (ambient) air sampling will occur
periodically throughout the project. The Abatement Contractor is advised of the following
sampling:
1.
Consultant will perform clean area air monitoring sampling and analysis for all
phases of the work in this Section. Personal air sampling is the responsibility of
the Contractors. But the Consultant will reserve the right to collect any personal air
sampling deemed necessary or appropriate.
2.
Air samples may also be collected by the Consultant outside critical barriers of the
work area in the clean room, and in areas adjacent to the clean room.
02052-19
B.
3.
The Consultant will also collect wipe samples both within the abatement area and
outside the abatement area as final clearance sampling.
4.
Any adjustment, tampering, and/ or deliberate interference with Consultant’s air
monitoring equipment by the Abatement Contractor’s personnel will not be
tolerated. Furthermore, the Abatement Contractor may be held liable for
prosecution under applicable laws and regulations for attempting to falsify test
results.
Worker Protection Requirements
1.
Biological Monitoring. All workers must have baseline and postabatement blood
lead level measurements determined by the whole blood lead method, utilizing the
Vena- Puncture technique with results provided to the City and Consultant. This
screening shall be performed every two months for the first six (6) months, and
every six months thereafter if blood lead levels do not increase by more than 10
µg/dl. In addition, the Abatement Contractor shall have a medical examination
performed on each employee. This medical examination must be performed before
workers begin lead contaminated work area and at the termination of an
employee’s employment or yearly, whichever comes first. A worker shall be
removed from the job whenever three blood sampling tests average more than 25
µg/dl or if a single test exceeds 30 µg/dl. A formal investigation shall occur
whenever a worker’s blood lead level rises more than 10 µg/dl over the baseline
level. The Abatement Subcontractor shall be responsible for medical surveillance
and record keeping, as defined in the OSHA Lead in Construction Standard (29
CFR 1926.62) and Local Law.
2.
Training Requirements. All workers and supervisors shall have successfully
completed a course provided by a licensed training provider meeting all
requirements of EPA and Local Law. Supervisors shall be licensed by the
responsible Local State Agency responsible. The Abatement Contractor will adhere
to the requirements of OSHA regulations CFR 1910.1200 and 1926.62.
3.
Supervision. The Abatement Contractor shall provide one site supervisor whose
responsibilities include coordination, safety, security and execution of all phases of
the lead removal project. The supervisor shall not be used as a lead removal
worker, and shall be assigned full time to the project. The supervisor shall be fully
qualified in all aspects of lead abatement practices and procedures, and have a
three-day training course provided by a certified training provider and approved by
the responsible Local State Agency within the previous year prior to
commencement of lead- related work. Supervisors are competent individuals who
must be qualified to conduct the personal air sampling.
4.
Respirators and Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
a.
Personal protection in the form of disposable coveralls and NIOSH
approved respirators, is required for all workers, supervisors, and
authorized visitors entering the work area during the abatement and
cleaning operations. A half- face negative pressure respirator is required
until air monitoring data proves otherwise. Authorized visitors (i. e., federal,
02052-20
state, and local inspectors) must provide a current health and medical
report certifying them as approved to wear half- face respirators, and must
wear PAPRs until air monitoring data permits the use of half face
respirators.
b.
Each worker shall be supplied with a minimum of two (2) complete
disposable suits every day. Removal workers shall not be limited to two (2)
suits, and the Abatement Contractor will be required to supply additional
suits as is necessary. In addition to disposable suits for the workers, the
Abatement Contractor shall also supply suits for the Consultant and other
personnel who are authorized to inspect the worksite. Contractor must
consider this cost in the bid. Disposable suits, such as TYVEK suits, and
other personal protective equipment (PPE) must be donned prior to
entering work area. A clean area will be provided for workers to put on suits
and other personal protective equipment and to store their street clothes.
Suits will be worn inside the work area after the area passes preabatement inspection and shall remain in use until the area passes final
clearance inspection. Light weight nylon clothes may be worn under the
suit, but these clothes must be changed before leaving the work area and
should be laundered separately.
c.
Work clothes shall consist of moisture repellent, disposable full- body
suits, head covers, gloves with cuffs extending outside the sleeves of the
protective suit, boot or shoe covers, a face shield and eye protection. Hard
hats shall be worn. In addition, when caustic paste is used as an
abatement agent, full- body suits and gloves impervious to caustics, glove
extenders, face shields and boot or shoe covers are required.
d.
Eye protection to personnel engaged in lead operations shall be furnished
when the use of a full face respirator is not required.
e.
Goggles with side shields will be worn when working with a material that
may splash or fragment, or if protective eye wear is specified on the
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for that product.
f.
Additional respiratory protection by supplemental filters, such as organic
vapor cartridges, may be needed when handling some coating products.
Consult the Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and obtain the proper
filters as necessary.
The Abatement Contractor shall provide portable eyewash stations inside
all work areas where caustic paste is to be used.
g.
The stations should be capable of providing a flow of water for at least five
minutes. The Abatement Contractor shall provide another station capable
of providing a flow of water for at least fifteen minutes in the clean area.
Squeeze bottles are not sufficient eyewash stations.
h.
The Abatement Contractor shall supply workers and supervisory personnel
with NIOSH approved respirators and HEPA filters. Respiratory protection
shall be implemented for all work performed by the Abatement Contractor
02052-21
under this Section. The respirators shall be sanitized and maintained
according to the manufacturer’s specifications. Disposable respirators
shall not be considered acceptable under any circumstances. The
Abatement Contractor will maintain on- site a sufficient supply of HEPA
filters to allow workers and supervisory personnel to change contaminated
filters per manufacturer’s recommendations or when breathing resistance
is encountered. The Abatement Contractor is solely responsible for means
and methods used and for compliance with applicable regulations:
(1)
Half- mask, negative pressure, air purifying respirators equipped
with high efficiency filters for airborne lead dust levels not in
excess of 0.5 mg/m3 (10 times the Permissible Exposure Limit)
shall be used during component removal and enclosure abatement
methods, with the exception of surface preparation for enclosures.
(2)
Full- face Powered Air Purifying Respirators (PAPRs) with high
efficiency filters for airborne dust levels not in excess of 2.5 mg/m3
(50 time the Permissible Exposure Limit) will be required during all
abatement demolition methods and encapsulation surface
preparation methods and as required by OSHA 1926.62.
(3)
Pressure demand, full face, supplied air respirators are required
when airborne lead dust concentrations are expected to meet or
exceed 50 mg/m3 (1000 times the Permissible Exposure Limit).
Respirators will not be removed until the worker enters the
washing area of the decontamination chamber.
i.
Respirators shall be individually assigned to removal workers for their
exclusive use. All respiratory protection shall be provided to workers in
accordance with the approved respiratory protection program, which
includes all items in OSHA 29 CFR 1910.134 (B), (D), (E), & (F), and the
OSHA lead standard 29 CFR 1926.62. A copy of this program shall be
kept at the worksite, and shall be posted in the clean area.
j.
Workers must perform negative and positive pressure fit checks each time
a respirator is put on, whenever the respirator design so permits.
k.
Powered air purifying respirators (PAPR) shall be tested for adequate flow
as specified by the manufacturer.
l.
Workers shall be given a qualitative fit test in accordance with procedures
detailed in OSHA 29 CFR 1910.1025, Appendix D, Qualitative Fit Test
Protocols, for all respirators to be used on this abatement project. An
appropriately administered quantitative fit test may be substituted for the
qualitative fit test.
m.
If a question exists as to the proper selection of respirators, the Contractor
may consult the OSHA Lead in Construction Standard (29 CFR 1926.62,
and Title 8, CCR).
02052-22
5.
n.
Upon leaving the active work area, cartridges must be removed, and
respirators cleaned in a disinfectant solution and clean water rinsed.
o.
Clean respirators should be stored in plastic bags when not in use.
p.
The Abatement Contractor shall inspect respirators daily for broken,
missing, or damaged parts.
q.
The Abatement Contractor shall provide personal sampling to check
personal exposure levels. Samples shall be taken for the duration of the
work shift or for eight hours, whichever is less. Personal samples need not
be taken every day but must be taken in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62
and Title 8, CCR. Sampling will determine eight- hour Time- Weighted
Average exposures (TWA). Results shall be provided to the City and
Consultants within 48 hours of the sampling.
r.
Abatement Contractor shall comply with all OSHA, state, or other
applicable requirements of worker medical examinations for approval to
wear respiratory protection, and shall submit document of such approval to
the City.
Exposure Conditions.
If air monitoring data, gathered by the Abatement Contractor or Consultant shows
that worker exposure to airborne lead exceeds
50 µg/m3, the following conditions apply:
C.
a.
Clothing. Street clothes cannot be worn into containment. Workers must
wear nylon shorts, TYVEK shorts, or nothing under disposable suit.
b.
Showers. Showers must be provided. Shower water shall be collected and
properly disposed according to local, State, and Federal rules and
regulations.
(1)
All workers must shower upon leaving the work area.
(2)
A three- stage decontamination unit must be constructed of sixmil polyethylene sheeting and consisting of a dirty room, shower,
and clean room.
Personal Air Sampling
1.
General. The Abatement Contractor is required to perform the personal air sampling
activities during all lead paint abatement work. The results of such sampling shall
be posted, provided to indivi dual workers, and submitted to City and Consultant as
described herein.
2.
Sampling. Samples shall be taken for the duration of the work shift or for eight
hours, whichever is less. Personal samples need not be taken every day after the
first day if working conditions remain unchanged, but must be taken every time
there is a change in the removal operation, either in terms of the location or the
02052-23
type of work. Sampling will be used to determine eight- hour Time- Weighted
Averages (TWA). The Abatement Contractor is responsible for personal sampling
as outlined in OSHA Standard 29 CFR 1926.62, and Title 8, CCR. This sampling
will determine the degree of respirator protection required, subject to the
regulations.
3.05
3.
Sampling Results. Air sampling results shall be transmitted to the City and
individual workers in written form no more than forty- eight (48) hours after the
completion of a sampling cycle. The reporting document shall list each sample’s
result, sampling time and date, personnel monitored and their social security
numbers, flow rate, sample duration, sample yield, cassette size, and analysts’
name and company, and shall include an interpretation of the results. Air sample
analysis results will be reported in micrograms of lead per cubic meter of air (µg/
m3).
4.
Testing Laboratory. The Abatement Contractor’s testing lab shall be certified for
lead air sample by the American Industrial Hygiene Association. Abatement
Contractor shall submit for the City’s and Consultant’s review and acceptance the
name and address of the laboratory, certification( s) of accreditation for heavy metal
analysis, and a listing of relevant experience in air lead analysis, and presentation
of a documented Quality Assurance and Quality Control program.
5.
Air Monitoring Frequency. The air monitoring frequency for Abatement Contractor
operations will be established in accordance with the requirements set forth in 29
CFR 1926.62 and Title 8, CCR.
WORKER HYGIENE PRACTICES.
In order to avoid possible exposure to dangerous levels of lead and to prevent possible
contamination of areas outside the demarcated work area, work shall follow the general guidelines
listed below:
A.
Work Area Entry. At no time shall a worker or other authorized personnel entering the work
area go further than the Clean Area without proper respiratory protection and protective
clothing.
B.
Work Area Departure. The worker shall remove all gross contamination, debris and dust
from the disposable suit by completely HEPA vacuuming them before leaving work area.
C.
Personal Protective Equipment. All persons leaving the work area must remove their
personal protective equipment (except respirators) before leaving the containment. Suits
shall be removed "inside out" to minimize the dispersal of lead dust.
D.
Wash Facilities. All workers must wash upon leaving the work area. Wash facilities will be
provided by the abatement Subcontractor. This wash facility will consist of, at least, warm
running potable water, soap, and towels. All waste water must be contained and disposed
of in accordance with this Specification.
E.
Equipment. All equipment used by the workers inside the work area shall be either left in
the work area or thoroughly decontaminated before being removed from the area. Extra
02052-24
work clothing (in addition to the disposable suits supplied by the Abatement Subcontractor)
shall be left in the clean area until the completion of work in that area.
The clean area shall be cleaned of all visible debris and disposable materials daily.
3.06
F.
Prohibited Activities. Under no circumstances shall workers or supervisory personnel eat,
drink, smoke, chew gum, or chew tobacco or remove their respirators in the work area. To
do so shall be grounds for the City and/ or Consultant to STOP all removal operations. Only
in the case of life threatening emergency shall workers or supervisory personnel be allowed
to remove their protective respirators while in the work area. In this situation, respirators are
to be removed for as short a duration as possible.
G.
Footwear. As with additional clothing, all work footwear shall be left inside the
decontamination area until the completion of the job and then shall be HEPA vacuumed and
wiped or discarded as contaminated waste.
H.
Shock Hazards. The Abatement Subcontractor is responsible for using safe procedures to
avoid electrical hazards. Power will be shut off and checked before work begins when a
hazard exists. all extension cords and power tools used within the work area shall be
attached to Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCI).
CONTROL OVER ABATEMENT WORK
All work procedures shall be continuously controlled and monitored by the Contractor to assure that
the building will not be further contaminated. The following controls shall be instituted on each
working day:
A.
Start Up
Prior to work on any given day, the Contractor’s designated project supervisor will discuss
the day’s work schedule with his work force to evaluate job tasks with respect to safety
procedures and requirements specified to prevent contamination of the other parts of the
building or the employees. This includes a visual survey of the work area and the
decontamination enclosure systems.
B.
Access
The Contractor shall maintain control of and be responsible for access to all work areas to
ensure the following requirements:
1.
Non- authorized personnel are prohibited from entering the area at all times of day
and night;
2.
All authorized personnel entering the work area shall be familiar with the worker
protection procedures contained in this specification and shall be equipped with
properly fitted respirators and protective clothing;
3.
All personnel who are exiting from the decontamination enclosure system shall be
properly decontaminated;
02052-25
3.07
Lead waste which is taken out of the work area must be properly handled in
accordance with these specifications. The surface of any waste containers,
removed from the work area, shall be wiped down with a minimum of a 5% solution
of non-phosphate or other approved equivalent cleaning agent prior to removing it
from the work area.
5.
Building components with lead painted surfaces shall be removed from the work
area and placed directly into a labelled and secured disposal container or a
designated storage area.
ABATEMENT SEQUENCING
A.
3.08
4.
The Abatement Contractor shall be resposible for coordination with the City, the Consultant,
the General Contractor, and other trades.
ABATEMENT PROCEDURES
A.
B.
General
1.
Overview. The information contained in this section indicates specific abatement
procedures for designated components.
2.
Workmanship. All lead- based paint abatement activities shall be conducted in a
professional workman- like manner.
Exterior Component Removal
1.
General. Abatement procedures detail both specific components and the
generalities of component removal. Generalities of abatement are detailed below.
All resulting bundles of "containers" of removed components and/ or debris shall be
carefully handled to reduce the potential of ripping, bursting, or otherwise
diminishing the integrity of the bundle of "container."
a.
Provide work area preparation in accordance with Section 3.02.
b.
Care must be taken so that leaded materials are neither burned, nor
dusted, nor result in further exposure to workers, buidling/facility users or
occupants, children, or observers.
c.
Care shall be taken to avoid damage to adjacent areas during the removal
of components to be replaced. The Abatement Contractor shall run a utility
knife around the edge (score) of the abatement substrate and the adjacent
(non- abated) substrate to cut any bonding between the substrates and
thereby eliminate damage.
d.
If components to be removed contain gross areas of loose of peeling paint,
these areas shall be wet scrapped or HEPA vacuumed prior to removal.
The paint chips shall be contained either in the HEPA vacuum or in a
separate six (6) mil polyethylene bag. Temporary encapsulants expressly
for this purpose are also acceptable.
02052-26
e.
C.
Components that are removed for replacement shall be temporarily
wrapped for transport to the dumpsters. Care shall be taken when
transporting leaded components from the work area to the dumpster. All
leaded components shall be sealed in air tight containers from transport to
the dumpster. Once the material has been transferred, it shall be removed
from the container and placed in the lined dumpster.
CAUSTIC PAINT REMOVAL - PROCEDURES
1.
General. Caustic paste application and use shall be in accordance with
manufacturer’s instruction for each product. Prior to beginning the application, all
accumulated dust, dirt, and visible oil and grease shall be removed with a five
percent non-phosphate and water solution or other equally effective cleaning agent.
When a caustic stripping agent is used as the abatement agent, the Abatement
Subcontractor shall provide and ensure the use of the following items:
- Full-body coveralls with hood impervious to caustic substances;
- Gloves impervious to caustic substances;
- Glove extenders;
- Face shield;
- Appropriate boot or shoe covers;
- An eyewash station;
- A suitable and unrestricted wash area in the event of inadvertent
exposure.
a.
Paint Removal - A caustic stripping agent may require multiple
applications, depending on a variety of circumstances. When this type of
material is used, care should be taken to avoid drying of the agent. It may
become necessary to lightly mist over area with water to keep it moist.
Surfaces that come in contact with the stripping agents used in this
methodology during washing or neutralizing shall be completely cleaned
before the waste dries.
(1)
Each worker, in order to be allowed in the work area, must have
received specific instructions on the procedures to remove material
that inadvertently comes in contact with skin, and eyewashing
procedures, together with information on the nature of the danger.
This can be accomplished by general safety meetings that are
regularly scheduled and with a "right- to- know" booklet that is in a
location that is known to all persons and is readily accessible.
(2)
In addition to standardized work area preparation, to protect
surrounding areas, polyethylene sheeting shall be placed flush to
the surrounding walls for a firm seal to avoid leakage of waste
below the polyethylene sheeting, and the joint shall be caulked.
The Abatement Contractor may place absorbent pads or material
below the surface being abated and/ or place waterproof duct tape
on the surface adjacent to that being abated, to prevent damage to
the adjacent wall or floor surface. The Abatement Subcontractor is
responsible for repairing any adjacent surfaces harmed by the
chemical removal process. This includes contamination of these
surfaces by chemical residue.
02052-27
2.
(3)
A dwell time may be a specified by the manufacturer. The
Contractor shall run a series of test patches to determine the
optimal amount of time for the chemical to work on a particular
component.
(4)
Removal of the caustic stripping agent after dwell time shall be
performed by scraping the waste off the substrate onto the paper,
using a metal scraper. Application process shall be repeated if, in
the opinion of the Consultant, complete removal of the paint is not
attained. At no time shall dry scraping be used.
(5)
Once removal of paint from the abated surface is complete, cleanup procedures shall then follow and include washdown of the
surface and neutralization.
(6)
Once the neutralizing process is complete, the surface shall
undergo normal cleanup procedures of HEPA vacuuming, wet
wash and repeated HEPA vacuuming.
(7)
All worker protection equipment as specified shall be left within the
work area during all phases of the work. This equipment may be
transferred between work areas using double six (6) mil
polyethylene bags to prevent contamination of clean areas.
(8)
All accumulated debris resulting from removal of caustic paste
shall be treated as hazardous and shall be properly stored and
disposed of according to EPA, DOT, and all other applicable
federal, state, and local regulations.
(9)
Any wood flooring contaminated by the absorption of lead caustic
shall be replaced by the Abatement Contractor at his/ her
expense.
Application and Removal
a.
Spray or hand trowel paste according to manufacturer’s specifications (no
less than -" thick). The caustic stripping agent should be applied with
recommended special spray equipment approved by the manufacturer to
ensure proper application of product, if spray application is used.
(1)
b.
During spray application no more than two workers (one person
applying and one helper) shall be allowed in the work area.
Security of work area is absolutely essential.
Never remove material with personnel below, or in a manner that would
allow caustic to fall on, splatter or contact personnel in the vicinity of the
removal.
- Minimize the fall distance of the paste/ paint.
02052-28
3.
4.
3.09
c.
Work area shall be properly heated so as to meet temperature
requirements outlined in the manufacturerÆs specifications. Heating
procedures shall be subject to the approval of the Consultant and City, and
shall be supplied by the G. C.
d.
Abatement Contractor shall make certain that during the application, dwell
time and removal of caustic paste, the work area is secured.
Clean Up
a.
Collect caustic paste cloth with paste/ paint along with remaining residue
and put into six (6) mil polyethylene bags and dispose of in compliance
with all regulations and specifications.
b.
Spray surface lightly with water spray. Then with a nylon scrub brush,
agitate surface to loosen all residue. Thoroughly scrub surface, being sure
to get all crevices, grooves, cracks, etc.
c.
Lightly spray clean water on surface, removing remaining residue. The use
of a wet vacuum to assist in the cleanup is suggested. Make certain that
entire surface is clean of any paint/ paste residue.
d.
Treat residue (paste, paper, water, etc.) as hazardous waste until results
of TCLP and TTLC tests are available. Disposal will be dependent upon
these results.
Neutralization
a.
Apply caustic stripping agent neutralizer in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations. Wash neutralizer off with clean water,
per manufacturer’s recommendations.
b.
Apply second application of caustic stripping agent neutralizer if needed
and allow to dry. After one to three (1- 3) hours, wash neutralizer off with
clean water and allow surface to dry completely.
c.
Abatement Contractor should use pH paper to determine if neutralization is
adequate. A dry surface showing a pH of between 6 and 8 after the proper
drying out period, is ready to be recoated. A pH over 8 should be treated to
another application of neutralizer and left to dry before retesting. It is most
important that the surface properly dry out before recoating.
DAILY CLEANUP
At the completion of each workday, the Abatement Contractor shall clean the inside of the work
area. At a minimum, the following procedures shall be adhered to:
A.
Cleaning
1.
End of Day Cleaning. Thirty (30) minutes or more if necessary prior to the end of
each work day, the lead work area must be cleaned of all debris. Under no
02052-29
circumstances will lead paint abatement work be permitted when active lead paint
clean-up work is proceeding. All abatement activity must cease during the cleanup
period.
Such cleaning shall include a thorough HEPA vacuuming of all affected surfaces,
as determined by the Consultant. Additionally, cleaning requires the use of a
solution of five percent non-phosphate or other equally effective cleaning agent. All
waste materials generated during this daily cleanup shall be disposed of as
hazardous waste, unless analytical testing proves otherwise.
2.
Equipment Cleaning. Durable equipment, such as power and hand tools,
generators, and vehicles shall be cleaned at least monthly or prior to removal from
buildings undergoing abatement or the site. All equipment shall be cleaned by
HEPA vacuuming and high- phosphate (non-phosphate) washing (or use of an
equivalent cleaner).
a.
3.
High Efficiency Particulate Air (HEPA) vacuum: The Abatement Contractor
will obtain training in the use of the HEPA vacuum from the manufacturer
prior to use and submit evidence of this training to the City and Consultant.
The Abatement Contractor shall obtain HEPA vacuum attachments, such
as various size brushes, crevice tools, and angular tools to be used for
varied applications and service the HEPA vacuum routinely to assure
proper operation. Caution shall be used any time the HEPA is opened for
filter replacement or debris removal. Operators shall wear a full set of
protective clothing and equipment, including respirators, when using and
emptying the HEPA vacuuming equipment.
Preliminary Clean- Up. Upon completion of the lead paint abatement and a
satisfactory visual inspection by the City / Consultant in a given work area, a
preliminary cleanup shall be performed by the Abatement Contractor. This cleanup includes removal of any contaminated material, equipment or debris including
polyethylene sheeting from the work area, except for critical barriers. The
polyethylene sheeting shall first be sprayed or misted with water for dust control,
the resulting abatement debris removed, then the sheeting shall be folded in upon
itself. All polyethylene sheeting used for critical barriers shall remain in place until
final clearance testing results have passed the clearance criteria set forth herein.
a.
Large Debris. Large debris from demolition (i. e. doors, windows,
baseboards) shall be wrapped in polyethylene sheeting at least six- mil
thick, sealed with heavy duty duct tape, and stored until proper disposal.
b.
Small Debris. Prior to picking up or collecting small debris, the surfaces of
this debris will be sprayed with a fine mist of water. The debris will be
picked up, collected and placed into a single plastic bag, at least six- mils
thick. The bags shall not be overloaded, shall be securely sealed, and
shall be stored in the designated area until disposal. Dry sweeping is not
permitted in the work area; wet sweeping will require approval by the
Consultant.
c.
Sheeting. Removal of surface six- mil polyethylene sheeting shall begin
from upper levels, such as on cabinets, counters or shelves. Removal of
02052-30
floor polyethylene sheeting shall begin at the corners and folded into the
middle to contain the dust or residue. All collected polyethylene sheeting
shall be placed in six- mil polyethylene bags for proper disposal as
described in this Specification.
3.10
d.
HEPA Vacuuming. Once the six- mil polyethylene sheeting is removed
from the work area, cleaning shall begin with a thorough HEPA vacuuming
of all surfaces, starting at the ceilings, proceeding down the walls and
including window, doors and door trim and floor. The floor shall be
vacuumed last, beginning at the farthest corners from the entrance to the
work area. HEPA vacuuming shall again be performed as noted above,
after the following non-phosphate wash.
e.
Non-phosphate Wash. Abatement Contractor shall next wash or mop the
same surfaces with a trisodium phosphate (TSP) detergent solution (five
percent) or other equally effective cleaning agent and allow surfaces to dry.
Then a second HEPA Vacuuming of the surfaces will be performed by the
Abatement Subcontractor, as described above. By the conclusion of the
cleaning phase, all vi sible dust and debris shall have been completely
removed.
f.
Hygiene, Cleaning Equipment and Supplies. Special attention shall be
given to personal hygiene and the cleaning of supplies and/ or equipment.
All mop heads, sponges and rags shall be replaced or changed daily, at a
minimum. Rags, mop heads or sponges may be reused if Abatement
Contractor has them cleaned via a washing system specially equipped
with HEPA filtration.
g.
Detergents. The Abatement Contractor shall prepare and use detergents
containing five to ten percent non-phosphate according to the
manufacturer’s instructions. The manufacturer’s recommended coverage
will be followed. The waste water from clean up shall be contained and
disposed of according to all applicable Federal, state, county and local
regulations and guidelines. In no instance shall waste water be disposed in
storm sewers (e. g., yard inlet or street drain) or sanitary sewers (e. g.,
toilet, sink, or any other household/ residential/ commercial type drain
system) without specific governmental approval.
VISUAL INSPECTIONS
The Abatement Contractor shall request a visual inspection by the City or Consultant. If the area
does not pass a visual inspection (e. g., no visible dust or debris), the Abatement Subcontractor
shall reclean the area as outlined in Steps d, e, f, and g in Section 3..09-A.3.
A.
Post-abatement Visual Inspection. The Consultant shall confirm job completeness by
determining whether all surfaces have been abated according to the approved abatement
plan and project specification. The Consultant will then determine if the building has been
adequately cleaned by examining all surfaces for dust and debris. If dust is found, the work
area should be recleaned, and the damp cloth test repeated.
B.
Post-abatement Clearance. When all surfaces have passed visual inspection, wipe samples
as detailed in Section 3.10-D.1 shall be performed by the Consultant. The standards for
02052-31
passing a wipe test are outlined in Section 3.10-D.2. Should laboratory results indicate that
the wipe test clearance level is exceeded, the Abatement Contractor shall reclean the
affected area, at no additional cost to the City, utilizing the methods specified above.
Retesting will then be performed to verify compliance with the mandated levels. Abatement
Contractor shall pay for all additional testing and provide, at no additional cost, a recleaning
of an effected area and personal belongings until the clearance level is achieved.
C.
Finish Coatings. Finished coatings including, but not limited to, stains, primer, sealers and
polyurethane coatings, if used, shall only be applied upon approval by the City/ Consultant.
Any surface requiring painting shall be primed with an approved primer. All primers or finish
coating materials shall have labeling stating, in equal or appropriate wording, "does not
contain lead- based paint greater than 600 parts per million" (0.06%) and "does not contain
mercury." In lieu of label wording, a manufacturer’s statement to this effect may be
substituted.
D.
Inspection/ Clearance Standards. When cleanup has been completed and all surfaces
have been final cleaned, wipe samples by the Consultant or Industrial Hygienist will be
performed. The following standards must be met for all "clearance" requirements:
1.
Wipe Tests.
When only some component types are to be sampled in a specific area, the
Consultant will ensure that the component types to be sampled are randomly
selected. Within an area, the specific components to be sampled shall be selected
at random and the specific sample location on a large component shall be selected
at random.
In order to compare results with applicable HUD Guideline clearance criteria, the
following methods must be used.
2.
a.
The sampling location (a specific surface area) must be selected, and the
surface area of that location carefully measured and recorded.
b.
The wipe sampling procedure must ensure that a very high percentage of
the surface dust present on the sample location is captured on the wipe.
c.
Wipe sample collection criteria for abatement shall be as follows:
Clearance Wipe Tests
a.
Clearance on all abatement projects and interim control work must be
performed by a State of California DHS certified lead risk
assessor/inspector.
b.
Finish the lead hazard control and cleanup effort. Seal floors before
clearance testing (if necessary).
c.
Wait 1 hour to allow any airborne dust to settle. Do not enter the room
during that hour.
d.
Conduct visual examination.
02052-32
3.
(1)
Determine if all required work has been completed and all leadbased paint hazards have been controlled.
(2)
Determine if there is visible settled dust, paint chips, or debris in
the interior or around the exterior.
e.
Complete the Visual Clearance Form contained in this chapter; if all
specified work was not completed, inform the City and order completion of
work and repeated cleanup, if necessary.
f.
Conduct clearance dust sampling of floors, interior window sills, and
window troughs using the protocol in this chapter.
g.
Conduct clearance soil sampling if bare soil is present that was not
sampled previously, or if exterior paint work was completed as part of the
lead hazard control effort.
h.
Submit samples to an Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) recognized
laboratory participating in the National Lead Laboratory Accreditation
Program for analysis.
i.
Interpret results.
j.
If clearance is achieved, go to step o.
k.
Order repeated cleaning if results are above applicable standards. Clean all
surfaces the sample represents. If both window and floor samples fail, the
entire unit must be recleaned.
l.
Continue sampling and repeated cleaning until the dwelling achieves
compliance with all clearance standards.
m.
Complete any related construction work that does not disturb a surface
with lead- based paint (all work that does disturb painted surfaces or that
could generate leaded dust should be completed as part of the lead hazard
control effort).
n.
Issue any necessary certificates of lead- based paint compliance or
releases and maintain appropriate records.
o.
Permit residents into the cleared work area.
Clearance criteria shall be as follows:
Surface Leaded Dust Loading (µg/ ft 2) (micrograms per square foot) - Wipe Only
Floors - 100 µg/ ft 2
Interior Window Sills (Stools) - 500 µg/ ft 2
Exeterior floor and exterior horizontal window surface s– 800 µg/ ft 2
02052-33
4.
E.
F.
Retests. Should laboratory results indicate that the wipe test clearance level is
exceeded, the Abatement Contractor shall reclean the affected area, at no
additional cost to the City, utilizing the methods specified above. Retesting will
then be performed to verify compliance with the mandated levels. Abatement
Contractor shall pay for all additional testing and provide, at no additional cost, a
recleaning of an affected area until the clearance level is achieved.
Inspections. In addition to various daily inspections of the lead work area and abatement
practices, the Consultant will make four (4) mandatory inspections during the work, one
during each phase of removal. Each inspection must be requested by the Abatement
Contractor to be performed by the Consultant to the Consultant’s satisfaction before work
may begin for next phase of work, or an area accepted. Failure on the part of the
Abatement Subcontractor to obtain the Consultant’s approval before proceeding to the next
scheduled phase is regarded as a violation of this section. In the event of this occurring,
Consultant will request work be stopped and City will be contacted to intervene. The four (4)
inspections are as follows:
1.
Window and Door Barrier Completion. Abatement Contractor shall have all
preabatement preparations of the work area complete, as described in Sections
3.02.
2.
Post Removal Inspection. Abatement Contractor shall have completed abatement
and final cleanup of all visible debris and perform final cleaning techniques of nonphosphate washing and HEPA vacuuming as described in Section 3.09.
3.
Daily Clean- up. Abatement Contractor shall have completed daily cleanup as
defined in Section 3.08.
4.
Final Clearance. Consultant will perform final clearance wipe testing 24 hours after
final cleanup activities are completed as described in Section 3.10.
Air Sampling Procedure
Air sampling shall be conducted by the Consultant. Samples shall be collected and
analyzed for total airborne lead. Air sampling will be collected during, but not limited to, the
preabatement and postabatement periods.
G.
1.
Sampling Apparatus. Air Sampling shall be collected utilizing a closed- face, 37
millimeter cassette. A mixed cellulose ester filter with 0.8 micrometer pore size
with a cellulose support pad shall be placed in the cassette. Air sampling pumps
shall be calibrated at 2.0 – 4.0 liters per minute prior to sampling. All pumps shall
be post calibrated.
2.
Analytical Method. The NIOSH 7082 (AAS) procedure shall be used for sample
analysis. A blank filter shall be submitted with each set of samples.
Data Reporting for Lead in Air
Laboratory results for air samples shall be provided in micrograms of lead per cubic meter
of air.
02052-34
Information specific to obtaining the air samples should be listed on a separate data form
for air samples, which would include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
H.
Location where sample was taken
Length of time in use
Approximate volume of air sampled
Abatement/ clearance status
Abatement method (e. g., removal vs. enclosure)
Analytical Laboratory Qualifications
Analytical laboratories must be recognized by the EPA as participating in the National Lead
Laboratory Accreditation Program (NLLAP). The Laboratory must show evidence that it is
proficient in lead analysis under the Environmental Lead Proficiency Analytical Testing
Program. If the laboratory is not currently enrolled in these programs, the laboratory will be
required to enroll in the next round of ELPAT samples. The laboratory must be accredited
within a one year period by an organization recognized by NLLAP that has signed a
Memorandum of Understanding with EPA. Currently, the American Industrial Hygiene
Association (703- 849- 8888) and the American Association for Laboratory Accreditation
(301- 670- 1377) have signed such memoranda of understanding with EPA.
1.
I.
All dust, paint, and soil samples shall be analyzed for total lead, not "bioavailable"
lead, as required in the HUD Guidelines for Evaluation and Control of Lead- Based
Paint in Housing.
Qualifications of Sampling Personnel
All personnel conducting environmental sampling for this project must be State DHS
certified as a lead-based paint inspector, risk assessor, or project monitor.
3.11
DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL
A.
Caution Note for Contractors:
All materials, whether hazardous or non- hazardous, shall be disposed of in accordance
with all laws and the provisions of this Section and any or all applicable federal, state,
county, or local regulations and guidelines. It shall be the sole responsibility of the
Abatement Contractor to assure compliance with all laws and regulations relating to this
disposal. Until analytical results are available, all waste materials (including water) shall be
segregated and treated as hazardous.
1.
Waste Segregation - The Abatement Contractor shall be responsible for
segregating waste in accordance with the previously defined six categories.
Separate waste dumpsters shall be in accordance with local, Stae, Federal defined
six (6) categories. Prior to disposal of each dumpster of waste, a representative
sample will be collected by the on- site inspector, paid for by the Abatement
Contractor and analyzed by TCLP and TTLC for the RCRA metals. The result of
each TCLP and TTLC analysis will dictate the disposal requirement for each
dumpster.
02052-35
2.
Disposal Requirements. The Abatement Contractor shall contact the Regional
EPA, state, local, and all other pertinent authorities to determine lead- based paint
debris disposal requirements. If applicable, the requirements of the Resource
Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) must be complied with, as well as any or
all other applicable federal, state, county, or local waste requirements.
The Abatement Contractor shall not leave any debris in the yard or near- by
property, incinerate debris, dump debris by the road, place debris in any
unauthorized dumpster, or introduce lead contaminated water into storm sewers
(shall not be poured down yard inlet or street drain) or sanitary sewers (shall not be
flushed down toilet or any other household/ residential/ commercial type drain
system).
3.
EPA ID Numbers. The City shall apply for an EPA identification number from the
appropriate office; if more than 100 kg of hazardous waste will be generated from
the abatement process during any calendar month. If less than 100 kg is to be
generated, the City shall obtain a Small Quantity Generator RCRA Hazardous
Material ID number. The Consultant will assist the City in contacting the
appropriate office to secure the identification number. The City also has the
responsibility to coordinate this action through the State and secure any additional
number as required.
The following testing must be performed by a laboratory properly certified by the
State of California. The name of the laboratory must be supplied to the City/
Consultant prior to the initiation of the testing.
4.
TCLP Test. Testing on lead- based paint abatement waste materials by use of the
Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) as well as Total Threshold Limit
Concentration (TTLC) will be completed and paid by the Abatement Contractor, and
results shall be supplied to the Consultant and City.
5.
Testing of Materials. The testing of material shall be performed as obtained to
minimize the storage of "assumed" hazardous material. In absence of written
official state guidance, the Abatement Contractor shall take at least one (1)
composite sample of the items listed below for the RCRA eight (8) heavy metals.
The Abatement Contractor shall also determine if additional testing for other
compounds, such as pH, flashpoint, etc., are required for disposal at a particular
landfill. The following materials shall be tested to determine whether or not they are
hazardous:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Waste water.
Dust from HEPA filters.
Metals that have not been previously tested.
Plastic sheets, duct tape, or tape used to cover floors and other services
during the lead- based paint removal.
Solvents and caustics used during the stripping process.
Liquid waste, such as wash water used to decontaminate wood after
solvents have been used, and liquid waste from exterior (or interior) water
blasting.
Rags, sponges, mops, scrapers, and other materials used for testing,
abatement, and cleanup.
02052-36
h.
i.
Disposable work clothes and respirator filters cartridges.
Any other items contaminated with lead- based paint or items produced as
a result of ead- based paint abatement activity, such as the water filters.
6.
Storage Requirements. Any item found to be hazardous, by way of testing, shall be
kept in a secured area or lockable container that is inaccessible to all persons
other than abatement personnel. All hazardous waste shall be labeled "Hazardous
Waste - Contains Lead" and a date that the Abatement Subcontractor began to
collect waste in that container. All hazardous and non- hazardous waste shall be
kept in totally and completely separate containers. Until TCLP and TTLC testing
proves an item to be non- hazardous, all items shall be considered hazardous and
stored in a secured area or lockable container.
7.
Regulations. The Abatement Contractor will be required to comply with the
Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) and/ or any other applicable
state, county law, regulation and/ or guidelines, whichever is most stringent.
8.
Waste Transportation. If the Abatement Contractor is not a RCRA/ DOT/ EPA
certified Hazardous Waste Transporter, a contract shall be entered into with a
certified transporter to move the waste. The Abatement Contractor shall require the
certified hazardous waste transport firm to follow RCRA, DOT, EPA, and any/ all
other applicable regulations. Many transporters are also capable of supplying
pertinent information and services applicable to necessary rules, regulations, and
specifications. The certified transporter/ hauler shall submit for City/ Consultant
approved their qualifications to perform the work as specified herein. The
Abatement Contractor shall be responsible for all actions of the waste hauler as
pertaining to waste removal and disposal under this Section and all EPA, DOT, and
other applicable regulations.
a.
The Abatement Contractor must supply documents that detail the site( s)
to be used for ultimate waste disposal. Documents from these disposal
sites must be supplied by the Abatement Contractor to the City/
Consultant from the disposal facilities stating that hazardous and/ or
construction waste will be accepted by these facilities. In addition, the
Abatement Contractor must submit documents from these sites proving
that they are licensed/ permitted to accept such waste and will accept the
waste proposed by the Abatement Contractor for treatment or ultimate
disposal.
9.
Waste Containers. The Abatement Subcontractor will comply with EPA and DOT
regulations for waste containers. The Abatement Subcontractor shall contact the
state and local authorities to determine their criteria for containers. In the case of
any conflict in regulations, the more stringent regulation shall apply.
10.
Emergencies. Abatement Contractor shall: contact local fire, police, hospitals or
local emergency response teams and inform them of the type of hazardous waste
activity and ask for assistance in the event of an accident; keep and properly
maintain a suitable fire extinguisher( s) on site; have an immediate means of
communication with a regulatory agency in the event of an emergency; keep a list
of phone numbers of regulatory agencies on site, make sure all employees know
how to deal with all types of accidents; make one person who is always on site,
02052-37
when the site is occupied, the emergency coordinator to ensure that emergency
procedures are carried out in the event an emergency arises; and keep and
maintain a "right to know" manual that is in an easily accessible location and in an
area that is known to all employees.
11.
Disposal Packaging. The Abatement Contractor shall place lead- based paint
fragments and debris produced as a result of any abatement activity and lead dust
in six- mil polyethylene (plastic) bags that are airtight and puncture- resistant.
a.
Cleaning Materials. The Abatement Contractor shall place all disposable
cleaning materials such as sponges, mop heads, filters, disposable
clothing, and brooms in six- mil plastic bags. If after testing, those
materials are determined to be hazardous, the bags will be sealed,
labelled, and considered hazardous waste.
b.
Contaminated Debris. In particular, the Abatement Contractor shall
separate, label, and containerize the following:
c.
12.
(1)
All paint or paint fragments removed by chemical strippers,
surface preparation, or by any abatement methodology;
(2)
(3)
Grossly contaminated body suits;
HEPA vacuum contents, filters, and respirator cartridges: paint
chips or other abatement debris on plastic should always be
HEPA vacuumed prior to picking up the plastic.
(4)
All hazardous wastes or materials should be kept totally separate
from non- hazardous materials.
Polyethylene Sheeting. The Abatement Contractor shall clean surfaces
and equipment and containerize large debris. Prior to removing any six (6)
mil polyethylene sheeting, the Abatement Contractor shall lightly mist the
sheeting in order to keep dust down and remove and containerize any
debris and fold six (6) mil polyethylene sheeting inward to contain debris
and to form tight bundles to containerize for disposal. The Abatement
Contractor shall place all plastic sheeting in six (6) mil thick polyethylene
bags and seal.
Removing and Transporting Waste
a.
Vehicles. The Abatement Contractor shall ensure that all non- hazardous
waste is transported in covered vehicles to a landfill, or lined landfill, if
required.
b.
Container Handling. The Abatement Contractor shall carefully place the
containers into the truck or dumpster used for disposal. At NO time will
debris or containers be thrown or dropped.
c.
Dust or Debris. If the Abatement Contractor subcontracts the removing of
the non- hazardous lead- based paint abatement waste, the Contractor
02052-38
shall ensure that the company removing the waste material adequately
covers all loads so as to assure that no dust or debris is released.
B.
D.
Liquid Wastes. The Abatement Contractor shall contain and properly
dispose of all liquid waste, including lead- contaminated wash water if not
filtered and drained.
e.
Containers. The Abatement Contractor shall HEPA vacuum the exterior of
all waste containers prior to removi ng the waste containers from the work
area and shall wet wipe the containers to ensure that there is no residual
contamination. Containers should then be moved out of the work area into
the designated storage area.
f.
Solvents. The Abatement Contractor shall place solvent residues and
residues from strippers in drums made out of materials that cannot be
dissolved or corroded by chemicals. Solvents will be tested by the
Abatement Contractor to determine of they are hazardous. Solvents,
caustic, and acid waste must be segregated and not stored in the same
containers.
Soil Sampling Procedure
1.
C.
d.
Pre- abatement Soil Sampling. In order to establish baseline lead- in- soil
conditions on the site prior to the initiation of exterior lead abatement, soil samples
will be collected by the Consultant.
Post- abatement Soil Sampling
1.
Post- abatement soil samples, will be collected at the same area(s) where preabatement soils samples were collected.
2.
If preabatement soil samples at any of the locations exceed 400 µg/g, the
Contractor may be required to perform soil excavation and removal at additional
cost as specified in Section 3.11-D.
3.
If preabatement soil samples are at or below 400 µg/g, and postabatement soil
samples exceed 400 µg/g, the Contractor will be required to perform soil excavation
and removal at no additional cost as specified in Section 3.11-D under Section 3.12
Damages.
Excavation and Removal of Contaminated Soil
1.
Careful excavation will begin with equipment, such as an excavator or backhoe.
Work will continue with hand tools as directed by the Consultant. Careful handling
of soil with hand tools shall be employed in order to avoid damaging the structure
and to minimize waste generation.
2.
Excavation to a depth of two (2) inches will take place within the area identified by
the Consultant.
02052-39
E.
3.
Excavation will be performed with care to protect structures, utilities, sidewalks,
pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by equipment, contaminated
soil, and other hazards created by operations.
4.
Excavated soils will be placed in a pre- designated area on six (6) mil polyethylene
roll sheeting and covered with the same material.
5.
Proper protective measures will be taken to prevent human exposure to excavated
soils. Protective measures shall include installation of construction fencing around
excavated soil and staking or weighting polyethylene sheeting to prevent wind or
precipitation damage.
6.
Careful removal of contaminated soil will begin with equipment, such as an
excavator or pay loader. Work will continue until all contaminated soil is removed
from the area outlined on the site plan to the specified depth.
7.
Appropriate worker protection practices shall be followed as specified in OSHA
Regulations.
Laboratory Testing for Lead in Soil
Pre- abatement and postabatement soil lead analysis will be performed by the Consultant.
EPA protocols for soil sampling will be followed.
3.12
DAMAGES
The Abatement Contractor shall protect remaining surfaces such as drywall, paneling, plaster,
glass, and the property soil, etc., from damage. Damages to non- protected remaining surfaces
shall be repaired at the Abatement Contractor’s expense. Random background soil samples will
have been obtained by the Consultant. Results will be supplied without specifying their location. The
Abatement Contractor is responsible for damages if the property soil becomes further contaminated.
Reference is made to Section 3.11-A and 3.11-B.
3.12
REOCCUPANCY CRITERIA
During all stages of the exterior abatements, dwelling units will be reoccupied after final cleanup and
visual inspection completed by the Consultant at the end of each work day. Two sets of postabatement wipe samples analyzed by atomic absorption spectroscopy (AAS) will be collected for
confirmatory purposes. A comparison will be made with preabatement wipe samples collected prior
to abatement. If the two sets of results are not statistically different, occupancy shall be maintained.
However, if a unit is cleared and reoccupied based on the Consultant’s visual inspection and it
then fails to meet the clearance criteria based on the laboratory results, the cost of the cleaning of
the occupants’ household furnishings will be borne by the Abatement Contractor. U.S. HUD
Guidelines for the Evaluation and Control of Lead- Based Paint Hazards in Housing will apply for
lead wipe results.
END OF SECTION
02052-40
SECTION 02065
TREE REMOVAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Perform tree removal and disposal, off site, as indicated on the drawings or specified.
Submit a proposed schedule of tree removal that is coordinated with adjacent construction
operations.
REFERENCE
A.
Tree removal shall be in accordance with ANSI Z133.1, "Tree Care Operations, Pruning,
Trimming, Repairing, Maintaining, and Removing Trees and Cutting Brush."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
TREE REMOVAL
A.
B.
Trees shall be removed by non-destructive or destructive methods, as applicable and as follows:
1.
Non-Destructive Method: Excavate and remove tree with its root system intact, to the
greatest extent practicable. Extract tree with fabric slings, cranes, and other
machinery and methodology designed to prevent bruising of the bark or other injury to
the tree. Envelop the root ball in burlap, carefully avoiding cracking or breaking the
earth ball. Place the root ball in protective containers. Load the containers on truck
bed and transport them away from the premises.
2.
Destructive Method: Cut down the tree at the ground line, and cut the felled tree in
transportable parcels. By excavating, extract the tree stump and roots to a depth of 12
inches below the ground line. Explosive blasting will not be acceptable.
Filling Voids: Completely fill below-grade voids resulting from removal of trees.
1.
In paved areas or within the building foot print, use satisfactory soil materials as
defined in ASTM D2487, consisting of stone, gravel, and sand, free from debris, trash,
roots, and other organic matter.
END OF SECTION
TREE REMOVAL
02065-1
SECTION 02110
SITE CLEARING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SUMMARY
A.
All site clearing on the job-site noted on or indicated on the Contract Drawings and in the
Project Manual.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Documents affecting work of this Section included, but are not necessarily limited
to the GENERAL CONDITIONS, and Sections in DIVISION 1 - GENERAL
2.
Exterior Demolition in Section 02050.
3.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Labor: Use adequate numbers of skilled laborers thoroughly trained in site-clearing
operations and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the
specified requirements and methods needed for the proper performance of the work of
this Section.
B.
Codes and Regulations: Perform all work of this Section in strict accordance with
applicable Government Codes and Regulations especially meeting all safety standards
and requirements of CAL/OSHA, County and City of Los Angeles. Provide additional
measures, added materials as may be needed as directed by the City Engineer or the
Consultant at no added cost to the City.
C.
Miscellaneous Requirements:
1.
Erection and maintenance of protections
2.
Dust Control
3.
Cleaning and Removal of Rubbish
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Provide materials not specifically described but required for completion of the work as
selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the City Engineer or the Consultant.
SITE CLEARING
02110-1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SITE CONDITIONS
A.
3.2
3.3
Examine the job-site and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper site-clearing operations, as directed
by the City Engineer or the Consultant. Do not proceed until such detrimental conditions
have been corrected.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect Existing Structures and Site Improvements, indicated to remain from damage by
approved methods and/or as authorized by the City Engineer. Removal of all protections
shall be when work of this Section is completed or when so authorized by the City
Engineer or the Consultant.
B.
Protect Existing Utilities indicated or made known to remain traversing the job-site and
serving existing adjacent facilities.
C.
Protect Existing Trees and Shrubs indicated to remain by providing temporary
surrounding fencing so located a sufficient distance away so that trees and shrubs will
not be damaged by site-clearing operations.
D.
Protection of Persons and Property (existing structures and site improvements):
1.
Provide barricades, canopies, warning signs at open depressions and holes on
adjacent property and public accesses.
2.
Provide operating warning lights during hours from dusk to dawn each day or as
otherwise required.
3.
Protect existing remaining structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements other
facilities from damage as caused by settlement, undermining, washout or other
hazards created by site-clearing operations of this Section.
E.
Use means necessary to prevent dust from becoming a nuisance to the public, to
neighbors and to others performing work on or near the job-site.
F.
Maintain access to the job-site at all times.
SITE CLEARING
A.
Prior to starting job-site clearing operations carefully study the Contract Drawings and the
Project Manual.
B.
In the company of the City Engineer or the Consultant, prior to starting site clearing
operations, visit the job-site and verify the extent of work to be done under this Contract.
C.
Site Clearing Operations:
1.
Remove all growths including trees and shrubs on the job-site within property
lines including trees in tree wells and elsewhere as noted on the Contract
Drawings.
SITE CLEARING
02110-2
3.4
Clean out all roots 1-inch and larger to a depth of a least 2 feet below finish
grade or existing ground surface or new graded surface whichever is lower or to
a depth where settlement will not occur as caused by decomposition of roots.
3.
Treat roots remaining in the soil with a weed killer approved and as directed by
the City Engineer or the Consultant.
4.
Remove all rubbish and debris existing and resulting from work operations of this
Section as soon as possible, do not allow to pile up. Do not burn rubbish and
debris on the job-site.
5.
Where active utility lines need to be capped or plugged, perform such work in
accordance with requirements of the Utility Company or government agency
having jurisdiction and conform to provisions of Subsection 3.2B of this Section.
CLEAN-UP
A.
3.5
2.
Contractor shall comply with the provisions of DIVISION 1 of the Project Manual.
STORAGE OF MATERIALS AT THE JOB-SITE
A.
Storage not permitted beyond brief accumulation awaiting pick-up by removal trucks.
Delays in the removal of site-clearing materials from the job-site shall be subject to the
approval of the City Engineer or the Consultant.
END OF SECTION
SITE CLEARING
02110-3
SECTION 02115
TREE PROTECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Work Included: Provide all labor, materials, equipment, transportation and services
necessary for, and incidental to performing all operations in connection with
furnishing, delivery and installation of the work of this Section as shown on the
Drawings and as specified herein. Work shall include, but not be limited to, the
following:
1.
B.
1.2
1.3
1.4
Protection and welfare of all existing trees within the Contract Limits which
are noted to remain, including trimming, cabling, and repair of such trees
as necessary and all labor, materials and equipment necessary.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 02810: Irrigation.
2.
Section 02950: Trees Plants and Groundcovers.
3.
Section 02970: Landscape Maintenance and Plant Establishment
DEFINITIONS
A.
"Injury" is defined, without limitation, as any bruising, scarring, tearing, or breaking
of roots, branches, or trunk.
B.
"Drip line" is defined as the outermost limits of the tree canopy.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Fencing materials.
B.
Maintenance plan.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
General Responsibility: The Contractor shall be directly responsible for protection
and welfare of existing trees within the Contract Limits which are noted to remain.
This responsibility shall continue throughout the full construction period until the
entire Project is completed and accepted by the City Engineer and through
completion of the guarantee period.
B.
Reference Standards: Published specifications, standards, tests, or recommended
methods of trade, industry, or governmental organizations apply to work of this
Section.
TREE PROTECTION
02115-1
1.
C.
Qualification of Workmen:
1.
1.5
International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) "Guide for Establishing Values
of Trees and Other Plants," prepared by the Council of Tree and
Landscape Appraisers (CTLA).
Trimming and pruning shall be performed only by a certified, Registered
Arborist.
WARRANTY
A.
Contractor shall guarantee upright growth and health of plant materials for 12
months after completion of landscaping Work.
B.
During the warranty period the Contractor shall be liable for damages to all trees
covered by the provisions of this Section. Compensation to the City Engineer shall
be as outlined in Section 3.05.
C.
Contractor will not be held responsible for damages due to vandalism, or freak acts
of nature during the warranty period. Immediately report such conditions to the City
Engineer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
2.2
2.3
General: Use only new materials of brands and types noted on the Drawings,
specified herein, or equal.
TREE PROTECTION FENCING
A.
Tree Protection Fence: 8-foot high cyclone fence, sturdy and capable of acting as
a barrier against objects, vehicles, etc. on site during the construction process. It
shall be constructed and designed so as to allow for relocations as required and
shall have gate access to inside for care of tree. It shall be continuously maintained
and repaired as necessary. Metal shall be galvanized.
B.
Install tree protection fencing around trees to be preserved at a distance required
from the base of the trunk to the drip line of the tree. Fencing shall remain until
landscape work had commenced, and it shall then be removed as directed by the
City Engineer.
C.
During the course of construction, relocation of the fence may be required to
facilitate construction. The Contractor shall do so as directed by the City Engineer
at no additional expense to the City.
PRUNING MATERIALS
A.
Pruning sterilant shall be Physan 20 Fertilome Type A or diluted bleach, or equal.
B.
Tree seal shall be asphalt emulsion base "Tree Seal" by Jenstar, "Henry's Pruning
Seal Spray" The Henry Co., or equal.
TREE PROTECTION
02115-2
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
The Contractor shall conduct operations continually to completion, unless weather
conditions are prohibitive.
B.
Provide ample water supply of potable quantity for all operations required under this
Section.
3.2
TREE PROTECTION
A.
The existing trees to be preserved presently are in excellent condition. Trees shall
not be allowed to deteriorate and shall be maintained in a healthy and vigorous
condition during the course of construction and maintenance period.
B.
During the course of construction the Contractor shall take all necessary
precautions, as outlined herein, to protect the existing trees to be preserved from
injury or death. Protection shall be given to the roots, trunk, and foliage.
C.
Trees subject to the provisions of this Section which have been injured shall be
repaired immediately by a certified, Registered Arborist. Repair shall include
removal of rough edges, sprung bark and severely injured branches as directed by
the City Engineer.
D.
Tree protection fencing shall be installed for the protection of existing trees to be
preserved. No construction, demolition, or work of any nature will be allowed within
the fenced area without prior written approval by the University Representative.
1.
Approval by the University Representative for work within the fenced area
shall not release the Contractor from any of the provisions specified herein
for the protection of existing trees to be preserved.
2.
During the course of construction of approved work within the fenced area,
no roots larger than two inches in diameter shall be cut without prior
written approval by the University Representative.
E.
During construction the existing site surface drainage patterns shall not be altered
within the area of drip line.
F.
Contractor shall not alter the existing water table within the area of the drip line.
G.
Necessary measures shall be taken to maintain healthy living conditions for
existing trees to be preserved. Such measures shall include but not be limited to
periodic washing of leaves for the removal of dust, irrigation, spots, etc.
H.
Do not permit the following within the drip line of any existing tree to be preserved:
1.
Storage or parking of automobiles or other vehicles.
TREE PROTECTION
02115-3
I.
2.
Stockpiling of building materials, refuse or excavated materials.
3.
Skinning or bruising of bark.
4.
Use of trees as support posts, power poles, or signposts; anchorage for
ropes, guy wires, or power lines; or other similar functions.
5.
Dumping of poisonous materials on or around trees and roots. Such
materials include but are not limited to paint, petroleum products, dirty
water, or other deleterious materials.
6.
Cutting of tree roots by utility trenching, foundation digging; placement of
curbs and trenches, and other miscellaneous excavation without prior
written approval by the City Engineer.
7.
Damage to trunk, limbs, or foliage caused by maneuvering vehicles or
stacking material or equipment too close to the tree.
8.
Compaction of the root area by movement of trucks or grading machines;
storage of equipment, gravel, earth fill, or construction supplies; etc.
9.
Excessive water or heat from equipment, utility line construction, or
burning of trash under or near shrubs or trees.
10.
Damage to root system from flooding, erosion, and excessive wetting and
drying resulting from dewatering and other operations.
Excavation Around Trees:
1.
Excavation within the drip lines of trees shall be done only where
absolutely necessary.
2.
Where trenching for utilities is required within drip lines, tunneling under
and around roots shall be by hand digging. Main lateral roots and taproots
shall not be cut. Smaller roots that interfere with installation of new work
may be cut with prior approval from the City Engineer. Any roots to be
removed shall be cut, not ripped or torn.
3.
Where excavation for new construction is required within drip line of trees,
hand excavation shall be employed to minimize damage to root system.
Roots shall be relocated in backfill areas wherever possible. If large, main
lateral roots are encountered, they shall be exposed beyond excavation
limits as required to bend and relocate without breaking. If encountered
immediately adjacent to location of new construction and relocation is not
practical, roots shall be cut approximately 6 inches back from new
construction.
4.
Exposed roots shall not be allowed to dry out before permanent backfill is
placed. Temporary earth cover shall be provided, or roots shall be packed
with wet peat moss or four layers of wet, untreated burlap and temporarily
supported and protected from damage until permanently relocated and
TREE PROTECTION
02115-4
covered with backfill. The cover over the roots shall be wetted to the point
of runoff daily.
5.
3.3
3.4
TREE TRIMMING
A.
A consulting Arborist, registered by the American Society of Consulting Arborists
(ASCA), shall be engaged to direct removal of branches from trees if necessary to
protect the health of the tree or if required to clear for new construction.
B.
In company with the City Engineer, and a certified, Registered Arborist, ascertain
the limbs and roots which are to be trimmed and clearly mark them to designate
the approved point of cutting.
C.
Dead and damaged trees that are determined by the City Engineer and certified,
Registered Arborist to be incapable of restoration to normal growth pattern shall be
removed.
D.
Cut evenly, using proper tools and skilled workmen, to achieve neat severance with
the least possible damage to the tree.
E.
In the case of root cuts, apply wet burlap or other protection, approved as noted
herein, to prevent drying out, and maintain in a wet condition as long as necessary
for temporary protection.
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
A.
3.5
Branching structure shall be thinned in accordance with NAA "Pruning
Standards and Practices" to balance loss to root system caused by
damage or cutting of root system. Thinning shall not exceed 30 percent of
existing branching structure.
Provide manual irrigation on a weekly basis until the new irrigation system is
operational.
REPAIRS
A.
Damage to existing tree crowns or roots over 1 inch in diameter shall be
immediately reported to City Engineer.
B.
A certified, Registered Arborist shall direct repair of trees. Repairs shall be made
promptly after damage occurs to prevent progressive deterioration of damaged
trees. Repairs shall be made at the Contractors expense.
C.
Irreparable Damage: Any tree to be protected or relocated which is irreparably
damaged owing to the Contractor's negligence or failure to provide adequate
protection, shall be compensated for in accordance with the following schedule of
values using the "tree caliper" method (greatest trunk diameter, measured 18
inches above ground):
1.
For trees and shrubs with diameters up to and including 6 inches,
compensation shall be the actual cost of replacement with item similar in
species, size, and shape, including:
TREE PROTECTION
02115-5
2.
a.
Actual cost of item boxed out of ground.
b.
Transportation or delivery of boxed item to site.
c.
Planting and staking.
d.
Maintenance, including watering, fertilizing, pruning, pest control,
and other care to bring replacement to same general condition of
original item.
For trunks of the following diameters, compensation shall be as shown.
7"..................................................................
8"..................................................................
9"..................................................................
10"................................................................
11"................................................................
12"................................................................
13"................................................................
14"................................................................
15"................................................................
16"................................................................
17"................................................................
18"and over, add for each caliper inch.....
D.
3.6
$1,200
1,700
2,200
2,600
3,100
3,600
4,100
4,600
5,000
5,500
6,000
600
Damaged tree limbs or trees which have died as a result of injury during
construction shall remain the property of the City and shall remain or be removed
by the Contractor as directed by the City Engineer.
MAINTENANCE
A.
Contractor shall be responsible to perform periodic inspections of existing trees to
be preserved and submit written proposals to the City Engineer for additional
maintenance work as may be required to ensure the health and general well-being
of the trees. Contractor shall retain, at the direction of the City Engineer additional
specialists as may be required to perform this work.
B.
The Contractor shall keep the trees free from weeds and debris at all times.
TREE PROTECTION
02115-6
SECTION 02150
SHORING
PART ONE - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Work Included: Provide shoring at open excavations and elsewhere where
greater than 5-feet in depth. Shoring shall be furnished, placed, maintained and when
applicable removed by the Contractor, as needed to protect workers, materials, other
properties and the public.
B.
Related Work:
1.
2.
Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not
necessarily limited to the GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY
CONDITIONS, and Sections in DIVISION 1 of these Specifications.
As established in the GENERAL CONDITIONS of the Contract, the Contractor is solely
responsible for means and methods of construction and for the sequences and procedures to be used.
3.
Excavation and Backfilling as applicable to the following:
a.
b.
b.
1.2
Section 02220 - Earthwork
Section 02720 - Storm Drainage System.
Section 07290 - Waterproofing
SUBMITTALS
A.
Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340 - SUBMITTALS of DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
B.
Design and Calculations: Contractor shall design and prepare shoring plans and make
calculations in accordance with the requirements of the Los Angeles City Building Code, Section
91.2902 and 91.2903 and Safety Orders of the State of California, Division of Industrial Safety, Title 8,
Subchapter 4, Article 6, Sections 1540 and 1541 as necessary for a permit.
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit plans for shoring to the Consultant or City Engineer for City of
Los Angeles review and Los Angeles City Building and Safety approval at least 3 weeks prior to
commencement of work. No excavations shall be started until the Consultant or City Engineer
has reviewed and approved the shoring design which includes the following:
1.
Design assumptions, analysis calculations, and information on Contractor's proposed
method of installation and removal of all shoring.
2.
The maximum design load to be carried by the various members of the support
system.
SHORING
02150-1
3.
Detailed excavation support drawings, showing all pertinent dimensions, spacings, and
relationships among the components of the shoring, as well as construction sequence and scheduling.
4.
The method of bracing and pre-loading, if any.
5.
Detailed utility and structure support drawings where necessary.
6.
The full excavation depth and depth(s) below the main excavation to which the support
system will be installed.
7.
8.
Detailed sequence of construction and loads for various stages of bracing removal.
Detailed drawings and descriptions of the method to be used by the Contractor to
monitor shoring movements.
D.
Quality Control Submittals:
1.
Design Data: The design and calculations shall be sealed and signed by a
professional engineer licensed in the State of California and experienced in the design of earth
retaining structures.
E. Permits:
1.
Submit in accordance with provisions in Section 01010 -SUMMARY OF THE WORK in
DIVISION 1.
2.
Contractor shall submit shoring plans and calculations to the Los Angeles City Department of
Building and Safety and obtain and pay for the required permit.
3.
Obtain permit(s) from the Division of Industrial Safety of the State of California, pursuant to
Subsection 7-10.4.1 of SSPWC, prior to excavating to the depth of 5-feet or greater. A duplicate copy
of the permit shall be submitted to the City Engineer for review prior to start of excavation.
A.
4.
Contract Close-Out Submittals:
Project Record Documents: Comply with provisions in Section 01700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced
in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.
B.
Employ a qualified Engineer having a previously established reputation for at least 5
years properly permitted to provide such services at the location of the Work, to design the
shoring system and to inspect and report on the quality of its construction.
C.
Comply with pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
SHORING
02150-2
D.
Coordinate the shoring design and construction with:
1.
2.
Soil Investigation Report prepared for this Work;
Structural system established for the Work, including location of columns, pilasters,
walls, and other features.
E.
Regulatory Requirements:
1.
Conform to provisions of Section 01060.
2.
Comply with applicable requirements of CAL/OSHA with respect to safety during
excavation and construction operations.
1.4
REFERENCES
A.
Reference Standards: Comply with the following:
1.
State of California, Division of Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(CAL/OSHA).
2.
Standard Specification for Public Works Construction (SSPWC), published by Building
News, Inc., Los Angeles, California (1991 Edition) with latest supplements.
a.
1.5
1.6
Section 306-1.1.6 - Bracing Excavations.
PROTECTIONS
A.
Protect adjacent existing improvements against damage by Contractor's operations.
Repair or replace damaged items to the full satisfaction of the City at no extra cost to the City.
B.
Shore, crib or lag excavations and earthbanks as necessary to prevent caving in,
erosion or gullying of sides.
C.
Divert or pump water out of all excavations and trenches until piping, conduit, leak
detection cables and tanks are installed and until concrete is placed, forms are removed and
backfilling is completed.
INSPECTIONS
A.
B.
Excavation of existing fills, reworking of natural soils and compaction of all required fills
will be inspected and tested by the City of Los Angeles Building and Safety inspector and a
Soils Engineer who will be responsible to the City Engineer and will be paid for by the City.
Place all such backfill under the full supervision of the Soils Engineer.
SHORING
02150-3
1.8
PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and bear the sole burden of cost for any
and all damages resulting from improper shoring or failure to shore.
2.
The safety of workmen, the protection of adjacent structures, property and utilities, and
the installation of adequate supports for all excavations shall be the sole responsibility of the
Contractor.
3.
The design, planning, installation, and removal of all shoring shall be accomplished in
such a manner as to maintain stability of the required excavation or trench section and to prevent any
movement of soil that may cause damage to adjacent structures and utilities, damage or delay the
work, or endanger life and health.
1.9
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A.
No separate measurement or payment will be made for the items of work in this
Section. Full compensation for labor, material, tools, equipment, and incidentals required to
furnish and install all work items in this Section in place shall be considered as included in the
lump sum prices stated in the Bid for the work to which the work items in this Section are
attached or form a part.
PART TWO - PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART THREE - EXECUTION
3.1
SURFACE CONDITIONS
A.
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work. Do not proceed
until detrimental conditions are corrected.
B.
Existing Utilities: Contract Drawings show major utilities, but all utilities may not be
shown. Contractor will field check locations of utilities with representatives of the utility.
Protect any sewer, water, gas, electric or other pipelines or conduits uncovered during work
from damage. Contact Underground Service Alert (800)422-4133, 48 hours prior to digging.
1.
2.
Excavate by hand or other excavation methods acceptable to the utility owner.
If existing utilities interfere with Contractor's proposed method of support, any required
modification or relocation shall be performed at no additional cost to the City.
C.
1.
Provisions for Contingencies:
Provide a contingency plan or alternative procedures to be implemented if unfavorable
performance is evidenced from monitoring program in Paragraph 3.4.
a.
Keep on hand the necessary materials and
equipment to implement the contingency plan.
SHORING
02150-4
2.
If support elements project beyond the vertical projection of the right-of-way shown on
the Contract Drawings onto adjoining property, The City of Los Angeles shall obtain permission of the
adjoining property owner in writing.
3.
Subsurface Conditions: Evaluate subsurface conditions as excavation occurs.
4.
Notifications: Notify Engineer of differing conditions that could affect the shoring design
assumptions.
5.
Acceptance: Proceeding with work means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Protection:
1.
Protect or repair utilities damaged by operations of this Section.
2.
Protect adjacent structures and property from damage and disfiguration.
B.
1.
De-watering:
Where applicable, no excavation shall commence until the Contractor has
demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Consultant or City Engineer that the groundwater level has been
lowered. De-watering and that the soils inside the excavation are in the de-watered condition that was
assumed in the Contractor's shoring design and submittal.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
All trench and excavation openings shall be lighted and fenced or barricaded during
nights, weekends, and other times as necessary and meet CAL/OSHA safety requirements.
B.
All shoring shall be installed to the lines and elevations shown on the Contractor's
review working drawings. No component of the shoring shall infringe on the minimum
dimensions of any permanent structure shown in the Contract Drawings.
C.
The excavation shall be staged as shown in the Working Drawings and in such a
manner as to provide a stable system of support at all times.
D.
Should the shoring system utilize steel H-beams, piles, or other similar vertical
supports, driving of said vertical supports will not be permitted in proximity of existing
structures except for the last 4-feet. The vertical supports shall be placed in holes drilled to a
depth of 4-feet above the proposed bottom of pile, except where this procedure is
impracticable. The vertical support may then be driven to the required depth, not to exceed 4feet. During the drilling and driving operations, the Contractor shall take care to avoid damage
to utilities.
At locations where the drilling of such holes is impracticable because of the existence
of obstructions or rocks, running sand, or other adverse condition, and provided said
impracticability is demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Engineer by actual drilling operations
by the Contractor, the Engineer may, upon request of the Contractor, approve the use of means
SHORING
02150-5
other than drilling for the purpose of placing the vertical support. Such other means, however,
must be of a nature which will accomplish, as nearly as possible, the purpose of the drilling,
namely, the prevention of damage to existing surface or subsurface improvements, both public
and private.
3.4
MONITORING
A.
Inspection: Comply with Section 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES.
1.
Monitor and record daily readings on the shoring to detect any vertical or horizontal
movement.
a.
b.
c.
2.
Measurements shall be referenced from an initial
position of the shoring, as jointly established and agreed upon by the
Contractor and the City Engineer.
Horizontal deflections into the excavation at any
location on the shoring shall be limited to a maximum of 1-inch. If at any time
this deflection exceeds 1-inch, immediate corrective measures shall be taken
by the Contractor to prevent any further deflections.
The Contractor shall stop the excavation work until
corrective measures have been taken and the deflections have been reduced
to acceptable limits as specified.
Monitor adjacent ground and structures on both sides of excavations to verify that no
settlement is occurring or has occurred as a result of the Contractor's construction activities.
3.5
REMOVAL
A.
Shoring shall be removed as necessary under the direction of the City of Los Angeles
Building and Safety inspector and the Soils Engineer to allow backfill to be placed and
compacted. If in the opinion of the Inspector it should not be possible to remove any
components of the shoring without disturbance of damage to adjacent structures, properties, or
facilities, the Contractor shall leave them in place, except for the shoring that is within the
limits of future construction or within 5-feet of the final surface elevations. This upper portion of
the shoring shall be cut and removed from the site. All voids existing behind the shoring which
remains in place shall be backfilled as specified in Section 02200 - EARTHWORK.
B.
Shoring shall be removed as backfilling progresses. Removal shall be conducted in
such a manner so as to avoid any damage to the tunnel structure, adjacent facilities, or to
other members of the shoring system. Impact loading on the tunnel or in members of the
shoring system will not be allowed.
C.
During backfilling, temporary support elements shall not be removed until alternative
support is available, such as substituted struts, backfill, or ability of the support system to act
as a cantilever without detrimental deflection.
D.
Portions of shoring used to support excavations for installation of sanitary sewer and
storm drain facilities shall be left in place, or the pipe bedding and side support shall be recompacted to the satisfaction of the Consultant or City Engineer.
SHORING
02150-6
(END OF SECTION)
SHORING
02150-7
SECTION 02220
EARTHWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2
Provided and execute earthwork as indicated on the Contract Drawings or in these
specifications including but not limited to the following:
1.
Excavating and trenching for underground utility lines.
2.
Filling, Backfilling, and compaction.
3.
Exterior grading and cutting.
4.
Earthwork for site improvements.
5.
Select base materials for under concrete slab and under paving.
6.
Soil treatment for termite control.
7.
Soil treatment for killing weeds.
Related Sections:
1.
to the GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS and
Sections in DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS of these Specifications.
2.
Other Earthwork in Division 2.
3.
Concrete Work in Division 3.
4.
Plumbing Work in Division 15.
No footings shall be excavated prior to approval of the Geotechnical Engineering
Department’s Compaction Certificate Report being approved by the Department of
Building and Safety.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Labor: Use adequate numbers of skilled laborers to are thoroughly trained and
experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with specified
Section.
B.
Equipment: Use equipment adequate in size, capacity, and numbers to accomplish the
work of this Section in a timely manner.
C.
In addition to complying with requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction,
comply with the directions of the Soil Engineer.
EARTHWORK
02220-1
D.
1.3
PERMITS
A.
1.4
Required: The Contractor shall fully coordinate the work operations of this Section with
that of other trades involved and with the City Engineer or the Consultant to assure
proper sequence of work, limitations, methods and time of work so as to minimize or
avoid interference with the activities of others.
PROTECTIONS
A.
General: Comply with provisions of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. Protect
and guard all excavations against damage to life, limb and property as prescribed by Los
Angeles City Department of Building and Safety.
B.
Protections: Provide and install signs, lights and barricades at danger points on and off
the job-site to guard against accidents, and for the protection of property.
C.
Existing Improvements (including trees and shrubs): Protect against damage resulting
from Contractor's operations. Repair or replace damaged items to the full satisfactions of
the City at no added cost to the City.
D.
Shoring, Cribbing and Lagging: Required of excavations and earthbanks as necessary to
prevent caving in, erosion or gullying of sides.
E.
1.6
Required: In addition to the requirements specified herein, and in applicable Section of
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, of these specifications, the Contractor shall
perform all work in accordance with the permit requirements of the Los Angeles City
Department of Building and Safety and no additional compensation will be allowed
therefore.
WORK COORDINATION
A.
1.5
Comply with applicable provisions of Section 300 of the "Standard Specifications for
Public Works Construction" and Standard Plan S-610-17 City of Los Angeles" NOTICE
TO CONTRACTORS - COMPREHENSIVE."
1.
Design and calculations of shoring, etc. shall be in accordance with requirements
of Los Angeles City Building Code, and Safety Orders of State of California,
Division of Industrial Safety, Title 8, Subchapter 4, Article 6.
2.
Upon completion of project or when no longer needed or otherwise directed by
the authority having jurisdiction remove all such shoring from the job-site.
Water: Divert or pump out of all excavations until concrete and other items are placed
therein, forms removed and backfilling is completed.
INSPECTION
A.
Required: All excavations and trenches will be inspected by the Consultant, Inspector or
the Soils Engineer designated by the City Engineer or the Consultant before filling,
backfilling or other subsequent work is placed therein.
1.
Earthwork backfill for structures shall comply with requirements of the "Standard
Specifications."
EARTHWORK
02220-2
1.7
1.8
1.9
SOILS INFORMATION
A.
Information on the Contract Drawings or in the Soils Information Report not a guarantee
of Uniformity of soils conditions over the job-site.
B.
Copies of Foundations Investigation and Soils Report are available in the office of the
Architect, and may be reviewed upon request.
MATERIAL HANDLING
A.
Delivery: All materials, tools, equipment, etc. to be delivered to the job-site where
directed by the City Engineer or the Consultant, in such a manner coordinated with
progress of work of this Section.
B.
Storage: Where directed by the City Engineer or the Consultant, so as not to interfere
with work operations and City Employee operations on the premises.
DISPOSAL OF EXCESS MATERIALS
A.
Required: Remove the job-site all excess excavated and imported materials not used for
fill or backfill and all waste and debris.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
SOIL MATERIALS
A.
Suitable Excavated Material: Suitable materials from excavations for use in fill and
embankments shall be free from shale, sod, large clods or hard lumps of earth, roots,
trash or other debris; that has a liquid limit of less than 30 and a plasticity index of less
than 9; and is readily compatible to specified density. No rock, cobbles or broken
concrete exceeding 4 inches in maximum dimension shall be placed in compacted fill
without the specified approval of the City Engineer or the Consultant.
B.
Fill Material: Furnish imported earth material as necessary; if the amount if the amount of
suitable earth materials obtained from the job-site excavations is not sufficient to properly
construct the required fill, subject to the approval of the City Engineer or the Consultant
or the Inspector prior to use.
1.
Obtain imported fill material from a source approved by the City Engineer or the
Consultant prior to importing to the job-site.
2.
Imported fill material shall be free of foreign materials, vegetable growths, sod,
rocks, expansive soils and all debris.
3.
Lime for Treatment of Imported Fill Material: As here after specified in
accordance with Section 301-5 of the "Standard Specifications."
4.
Where fill material exhibits a wide variation in consistency, the City Engineer or
the Consultant may require blending to stabilize and upgrade the material as
directed by the Engineer or the Consultant.
5.
In Landscape (planting area) fill shall not be saline or contain anything that would
prevent normal plant growth.
6.
Fill material is subject to the approval of the Soils Engineer.
EARTHWORK
02220-3
C.
Select Base Material: "Untreated Crushed Aggregate Base", 3/4-inch maximum size
aggregate, as specified in Section 200-2.2 of the "Standard Specifications."
D.
Backfill Material:
E.
2.2
Over Conduit or Pipe rise approved washed sand and extend 12-inches above
such conduit or pipe, balance of backfill to be approved clean earth materials.
Drainage Fill Material: Clean gravel conforming to ASTM C33 graded as follows:
Sieve Size
% Passing Sieve
1 1/2 inch
3/4 inch
#4
#16
#50
#100
90 to 100%
45 to 60%
35 to 50%
20 to 40%
5 to 20%
0 to 5%
Provide a dry, free-flowing, dust-free chemical compound, soluble in water, capable of
inhibiting growth of vegetation, and approved for use on this Work by governmental
agencies having jurisdiction.
Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the City Engineer or
the Consultant.
TERMITE CONTROL MATERIAL:
A.
2.7
2.
OTHER MATERIALS
A.
2.4
Use clean earth materials previously removed from job-site excavations or use
imported fill materials as above specified free from large clods larger than 4inches and stones, subject to the Inspector's approved prior to use.
WEED KILLER
A.
2.3
1.
Solution of water emulsifiable concentrate; 1% solution of chlordane or 0.8 of 1% solution
of Lindane or 0.5 of 1% solution of Dieldrin. Add a compatible pigment (red or green) for
obvious contrast with untreated soil.
SOIL STERILANT:
A.
United States Borax Corp. "Polyborchlorate" or equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
SURFACE CONDITIONS
A.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not
proceed until detrimental conditions are corrected.
EARTHWORK
02220-4
3.2
SITE PREPARATION
A.
Subgrades: Bring subgrades to optimum moisture content and then compact the
maximum density as per the Soils Report and per ASTM D1557 - "Method of
Compaction." Prepare subgrade in accordance with Section 301-1 of the "Standard
Specifications."
B.
Holes and trenches existing on the job-site or resulting from Contractor's operations shall
be filled with clean existing or imported earth materials (free or large clods and stone).
Construct fill in accordance with Section 300.4 of the "Standard Specification" placed in
8-inch layers and compacted to 90% relative compaction and finished to elevations
necessary to require cutting by rough grading. Inspection by Inspector required prior to
filling.
C.
Grading: To elevations of existing adjoining street surfaces, private property and
surfaces immediately adjacent to the job-site limits indicated on the Contract Drawings;
make all grades in a straight line from any point to any other perimeter point.
D.
Dewatering:
1.
Remove all water, including rain water, encountered during trench and substructure work to an approved location by pumps, drains, and other approved
methods.
2.
Keep excavations and site construction area free from water.
E.
Dust Control: Use means necessary to prevent dust becoming a nuisance to the public,
to neighbors, and to other work being performed on or near the job-site.
F.
Utilities:
1.
Unless shown to be removed, protect active utility lines shown on the Contract
Drawings or otherwise made known to the Contractor prior to excavating. If
damaged, repair or replace at no additional cost to the City.
2.
If active utility lines are encountered, and are not shown on the Contract
Drawings or otherwise made known to the Contractor promptly take necessary
steps to assure that service is not interrupted.
3.
If service is interrupted as a result of work under this Section, immediately
restore service by repairing the damaged utility at no additional cost to the City.
4.
If existing utilities are found to interfere with the permanent facilities being
constructed under this Section, immediately notify the City Engineer or the
Consultant and secure instructions.
5.
Do not proceed with permanent relocation of utilities until written instructions are
received from the City Engineer or the Consultant.
G.
Approval of Subgrade: By the Soils Engineer prior to placing any fill.
H.
Subgrade Preparation Where Extensive Fills Will Occur:
EARTHWORK
02220-5
3.3
1.
Remove disturbed existing soils and stockpile materials approved by the Soils
Engineer for use in fills and as backfill materials. Dispose unsuitable materials
off the job-site.
2.
Subgrade to be approved by the Soils Engineer.
3.
Bring to designated rough grades, using existing on-site or imported materials, as
approved by Soils Engineer, regrade by removing and replacing materials in
loose lifts and bringing to optimum moisture content and compacting to the
relative indicated in the Soils Report. Use granular material for fills behind
retaining walls.
4.
Scarify the upper 6-inches of soils over the entire rough graded site and
recompact to a minimum relative compaction as indicated in the Soils Report.
5.
Testing of Fills: Test the fill for conformance with specifications; under
continuous control supervision of a qualified representative of the City at no cost
to the Contractor; the City's representative shall keep a log of the tests performed
which will be filed with the City Engineer upon completion of the work.
Contractor to bear the costs of rework, retesting and re-inspection because of
non-conformance.
EXCAVATING
A.
General:
1.
Excavation consists of the removal and disposal of materials necessary to
establish required grade elevations for new construction.
2.
Excavated materials suitable for use as fill and/or backfill to be stockpiled where
directed by the City Engineer or the Consultant.
3.
Non-approved and excess excavated materials to be legally removed and
disposed of from the job-site.
B.
Over excavation, removal of soil backfilling and recompaction shall be in accordance with
the Soils Report.
C.
For Substructure Concrete:
1.
When Earth Banks are Stable: To net sizes of concrete, except as otherwise
specified or indicated on the Contract Drawings.
2.
When Earth Banks are not Stable: Sufficiently wider than concrete to allow for
forms and inspection thereof.
3.
Where Rock Occurs: Surface to be levelled to a clean, even hard surface.
4.
Depth: As indicated on Contract Drawings.
5.
Excessive Depth: Where excavation is made deeper than required, fill with
concrete at Contractor's expense.
EARTHWORK
02220-6
D.
3.4
6.
Inspection Required: After excavation and before placing concrete and before
backfilling, the exposed soil will be carefully inspected by the Soil Engineer to
verify removal of additional unsuitable soil.
7.
Excavation for Grade Beams: Omit forms when sides will stand to a cut face,
make such excavation 1-inch wider on each side.
8.
When excavating adjacent to existing remaining structures, do so in a sequence
as required and approved by the City Engineer or the Consultant to avoid
displacement or damage to the existing adjacent structure.
For Site Improvements:
1.
Masonry Yard Walls: As necessary for required footing and setting of forms for
concrete work, to depth indicated.
2.
For Planter Curbs: To exact curb limit, without excessive removal of adjacent
paving or subgrade for new paving.
3.
Planter Areas: Excavate 6-inches of existing sub-soils as necessary to receive
topsoil fill.
4.
For Bumper Posts: To dimensions and depths noted on the drawings.
5.
For Irrigation Piping: To depths necessary for installation of pipe.
6.
For Flagpole, to exact size and depth for concrete foundation.
7.
For Concrete Yard Gutters: Mow strips and other site improvements to exact
limits of such work without excessive removal of any existing paving or subgrade.
E.
For Walls (including wall footings): Width not less than 18-in. from face of wall and
sufficient for necessary forms, cribbing, bracing, inspection, and application for
waterproofing on walls, where required.
F.
For Storm Drainage Piping: To depth necessary for installation of piping and construction
of catch basin in accordance with requirements of Division 15 and as noted on the
Drawings.
G.
Corrections: Required of all unauthorized excavations made below indicated depths, as
recommended by the Soils Engineer at no added cost to the City.
TRENCHING FOR UNDERGROUND UTILITY LINES
A.
Required: As noted on the Contract Drawings.
B.
Depth and Width: As necessary for complete installations; make sides vertical and
bottoms smooth, firm, level or uniformly sloped as indicated, slope not to exceed a
downward slope of two horizontal to one vertical; in manner to prevent formation of water
pockets in the pipe. Conform to the requirements of the Standard Specifications for
Public Works Construction.
C.
Shoring, Bracing and Bulkheading of Trenches: All to be provided, installed and
maintained where required to support trenches. Conform to requirements prescribed by
the Los Angeles Department of Building and Safety and CAL/OSHA.
EARTHWORK
02220-7
D.
3.5
3.6
3.7
Encountered Existing Underground Piping or Conduits: Immediately stop trenching
operations at the point of encounter, notify the City Engineer of such condition and do not
proceed until further instructed by the City Engineer or the Consultant.
FILLING
A.
General: Construct in accordance with Section 300-4 of the "Standard Specifications"
and place in layers not exceeding 8-in. thickness, compacted to a relative compaction of
not less than 90% when tested in accordance with Section 211-2 of the above "Standard
Specification.
B.
In Planting Areas and Tree Wells: Place saturated fill (exclusive of topsoil fill) prior to
construction of adjacent improvements to minimize settlement as follows:
1.
Planting Areas: Cultivate and soak the soil for a minimum of two days using a
common lawn soaker.
2.
Tree Wells: Excavate a sump approximately 3-feet square by 3-feet deep and
flood each sump for about 3 days.
C.
Fill all holes on the job-site existing or resulting from site-clearing or demolition
operations.
D.
Inspection Required: Prior to placement of fill materials.
BACKFILLING
A.
Prior to Backfilling: Remove debris, trash and form materials from excavations.
B.
Inspection Required: Prior to backfilling operations.
C.
Placement of Backfill: In layers not exceeding 8-inches thickness, moisten to optimum
moisture content and compact until required 90% relative compaction is secured and
finish to suitable elevations to provide for anticipated settlement and shrinkage.
D.
Over Underground Piping: Do not place backfill materials until the Inspector has
inspected and approved the pipe installation.
E.
For Backfill Against Below Grade Walls: Do not place until such walls have gained
sufficient strength to resist backfill loads and backside of such walls have been properly
waterproofed without prior approval of the Inspector. Bring backfill up to finish grade or to
subgrade for paving as indicated on the drawings.
SELECT BASE
A.
Place in accordance with Section 301-2 of "Standard Specifications."
B.
Locations: Place select base beneath concrete and asphalt concrete yard paving,
beneath concrete driveway aprons and concrete gutters in yard areas, building floor slab
on grade and elsewhere to thicknesses noted on the Contract Drawings.
C.
Compaction Prior to Placement of the Select Base: The upper 6-in. of subgrade soil,
whether fill or natural soil, shall be compacted to the relative compaction indicated in the
Soils Report and in accordance with Section 301-1 of "Standard Specifications."
EARTHWORK
02220-8
D.
3.8
GRUBBING
A.
3.9
3.10
Thickness: As indicated on the drawings.
Remove Entirely roots under footings and elsewhere to 2-feet below subgrade or new
finished earth surface.
GRADING
A.
Rough: Leave cut and fill sufficiently high to require cutting by fine grading.
B.
Fine: To elevations required to ensure finished elevations indicated on drawings.
C.
Subgrade Preparation: Required for all areas, other than filled or backfill areas, over
which moisture barrier material, slabs, walks or pavement will be placed; in accordance
with Section 301-1 of "Standard Specifications."
D.
Inspection Required: Prior to placing concrete or other material.
E.
Grading for Paving:
1.
Rough: Cut and fill to be left sufficiently high to require cutting by grading and
preparation of the surface for placement of the required select base material to
thickness noted on the Contract Drawings or matching that of adjacent existing
select base materials.
2.
Fine: To exact elevations necessary for required new paving and paving repairs.
3.
Inspection required: Prior to placing of select base and asphalt paving materials.
SOIL TREATMENT FOR TERMITE CONTROL
A.
Required: Treatment of ground area under entrance and building slabs and earth sides
of building footings and ground floor wall excavations.
B.
Application:
C.
1.
Under Slabs: After completion of grading and before placing of concrete.
2.
Earth-Formed Footings: On each side of excavation before placing of concrete.
3.
Wood or Metal Formed Surfaces: After placing of concrete; in area adjacent to
footing and footing walls each side; before beginning backfilling and at each
second lift of the backfill.
Quantities: 1 gallon for each 10 square feet of ground surface under slab; 2 gallons for
each 10 square feet at footing excavation.
1.
Around new building exterior perimeter (24-inch wide strip) after backfill is
placed, at rate of one gallon per five (5) square foot of area.
2.
In absorbent soil or fill (sand or sand and gravel mix) increase the rate to 1-1/2
gallons per ten (10) square feet of area.
EARTHWORK
02220-9
3.
3.11
Retreatment: Treated areas that are subsequently excavated, trenched or filled
shall be retreated at the same rate as originally treated.
SOIL STERILIZATION (WEED KILLER)
A.
Apply specified soil sterilization (weed killer) material to areas to receive select base
materials and asphalt concrete paving by methods recommended by the manufacturer.
Certify in writing that the material has been applied.
EARTHWORK
02220-10
SECTION 02383
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Furnish and install drilled foundation piers as indicated on the drawings.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit detailed "As Built" records for each pier.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
2.2
Concrete Work: As specified in Division 3.
1.
Concrete strength shall be as indicated on the drawings. Slump shall be from 4 to
6 inches.
2.
Coarse Aggregate: Maximum size aggregate shall be 1 inch.
3.
Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615, Grade 60 for No. 5 and larger; Grade 40 for No. 4
and smaller.
PIER DRILLING EQUIPMENT
Pier drilling equipment shall have minimum torque capacity and downward force capacity suitable
for the site conditions.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXCAVATION
A.
Drill piers to depths and dimensions shown. Excavate or drill the bottom of excavations to
bell diameters and shapes shown. Drilling of pier shall not be within 20 feet (6 m) of
concrete placed within last 3 days. Clean bottoms of piers of loose, soft, or disturbed
materials and level. Dispose of excavated material legally off the premises. Excavations
made below indicated depths, without specific direction by the City Engineer shall be filled
with concrete.
B.
Where, in the opinion of the City Engineer, materials are encountered at the indicated
depths that do not provide the required bearing capacity or would result in unsatisfactory
construction, the excavation shall be extended as directed by the City Engineer and an
adjustment in the contract requirements will be made.
FILLING
A.
Prior to placing concrete, inspect pier excavation to ensure that deleterious material or
detrimental conditions are not present in the excavation. Concrete shall be placed
immediately (within 1 minute) after completing excavation. Place concrete continuously by
02383-1
methods that ensure against segregation and dislodging of excavation sidewalls and
completely fill the bell and shaft.
3.4
B.
Place concrete by pumping, tremie, or drop chutes. For concrete placed by pumping or
tremie, the discharge shall be kept a minimum of 3 feet above the fresh concrete surface
during placement.
C.
Place concrete without the creation of construction joints, cold joints, or any other kind of
joints.
D.
Vibrate concrete in the top 10 feet of the hole, or for the length of the reinforcing steel,
whichever is greater.
REINFORCEMENT
Install as indicated. Insert securely in the piers, in position and alignment, as shown, prior to
concrete placement.
3.5
TOLERANCES
A.
B.
3.6
Piers out of center or plumb beyond the tolerance specified shall be corrected to comply
with the tolerances and the Contractor shall bear any cost of correction. Method of
correction shall be approved by the City Engineer.
1.
Cross Sections of shafts and bells shall not be less than design dimensions.
2.
Top Location of Piers: Install with top location deviating not more than 3 inches
from centerline locations.
3.
Vertical Piers: Install plumb within a maximum of 1 1/2 inches for the first 10 feet
and 1/2 inch for each 10 feet of additional depth.
Center of the pier shall be established after construction is completed and the center
marked by a suitable permanent mark.
RECORDS
Keep complete and accurate records of all pier installations. Include locations, shaft diameters,
top and bottom elevations, depths of holes, concrete strength, concrete volume, quantity of rock
excavation, excavation condition, dates of excavation and concrete placement, bearing strata
description, and subsurface water conditions. Location shall be based on the survey of the
registered surveyor or engineer.
02383-2
SECTION 02510
PART ONE - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
All yard and street work indicated on the drawings and in these specifications;
including:
1.
B.
Street Work: Curbs, gutters, tree guards and gratings.
2.
Street paving repairs.
3.
Handicapped Parking Sign.
Related Sections:
1.
Documents affecting work of this Sections include but are
not necessarily limited to the GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY
CONDITIONS and Sections in DIVISION 1 of these Specifications.
2.
Earthwork including excavating, grading and filling and select
base materials in Section 02220.
7.
1.2
3.
Irrigation System in Sections 02810
4.
Trees, Plants and Ground Cover in Section 02950.
5.
Concrete work and concrete paving in DIVISION 3.
6.
Steel pipe posts in Section 05500.
On-Site Storm Sewage in Section 02720.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Labor: Use adequate number of skilled laborers who are thoroughly trained
and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the
specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of
this Section.
B.
Codes and Regulations
1.
Conform to the applicable Los Angeles City Building Code
and the Los Angeles City "Standard Specifications for Public Works
Construction" and Bureau of Engineering "Standard Plans" hereinafter
specified in these specifications.
02510-1
1.3
ALTERATIONS, REPAIRS AND REPLACEMENTS
A.
As required for complete construction of project; materials and construction to
match existing adjacent work where occur in quality and appearance and conform to
applicable provisions of these Specifications.
1.4
PROTECTION
A.
Required: Furnish, erect and maintain fences, barriers, lights and signs as
necessary, in order to protect the public, City personnel, Contractor's personnel and
existing work and work of this Section under this Contract.
B.
Provide pedestrian traffic in accordance with W.A.T.C.H. (Work Area Traffic
Control Handbook).
1.5
A.
Delivery: Deliver materials, and products and equipment to the job-site
where directed by the City Engineer.
B.
Storage: Store materials where located on the job-site not interfering with
work operations of this Section as directed by the City Engineer and easily accessible
when needed to be installed or used.
C.
Handling : Handle materials, etc. safely and avoiding damage to such
materials prior to installation.
1.6
SUBMITTALS (As Applicable)
A.
General: Comply with provisions of SUBMITTALS SECTION of DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS of these Specifications.
B.
Portland Cement Mill Certificate: Submit to the City Engineer showing
conformance with the specification requirements and applicable Section of the
"Standard Specifications" or otherwise the Testing Laboratory shall test the cement as
per ASTM C150.
C.
Product Data: Submit to the City Engineer data on proprietary items,
materials, etc. to be used in the work of this Section, as conforming to the specified
requirements of this Section.
1.7
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
Required: Clearly mark changes, deletions and/or additions to the work of
this Section conforming to provisions of Section 42 of the GENERAL CONDITIONS of
these Specifications.
1.8
REMOVAL AND CLEAN-UP
A.
Remove all surplus materials, debris and rubbish resulting from work of this
Section conforming to provisions of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS of
these Specifications.
02510-2
PART TWO - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Furnish Concrete material, form work and reinforcing in accordance with
applicable requirements specified in DIVISION 3.
2.2
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Soil Sterilant: U. S. Borax Corp. "Polyborchlorate"
B.
Grout: Non-shrink grout "Por-Rok" by Hallemite Mfg. Co., Cleveland, Ohio
(Los Angeles phone (213) 583-4184) or an Thiokol based caulking compound.
PART THREE - EXECUTION
3.1
JOB-SITE CONDITIONS
A.
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be
performed.
1.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper
completion of the work, as directed by the City Engineer.
2.
corrected.
3.2
CONCRETE YARD PAVING
A.
3.3
See Section 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.
HANDICAPPED PARKING SIGN
A.
Required: On posts where indicated on the Contract Drawings complying
with Standards of the California Administrative Code, Part II, Title 24 as manufactured
by the Lettering Concept Inc., 10539 Humbolt Street, Los Alamitos, California, (213)
493-6495 or equal.
B.
Materials and Fabrications: Constructed of 3M Scotchlite Brand reflective
sheeting laminated to 18-gage heavy duty sheet steel and silkscreened in transparent
blue with "Handicapped Symbol" plus the message "Handicapped Parking Only" in
white. Sign to have a weather-resistant finish.
C.
D.
3.4
Do not proceed until such detrimental conditions are
Size: 18-inches wide x 27-inches high.
Installation: Mount on post at height noted on the Contract Drawing in plumb
and level position.
STREET WORK
A.
Required: All work located outside of property lines as indicated on the
Drawings and as necessary. *Such work includes curbs and gutters, sidewalks,
02510-3
driveways, tree well covers or grates, and asphalt concrete paving repairs.
B.
Methods: Applicable sections of the "Standard Specifications for Public
Works Construction", 1997 edition and latest amendments thereto and Los
Angeles City Bureau of Engineering Standard Details noted on the Drawings.
C.
Inspection: By the City Bureau of Contract Administration. Notify the
Director at least 72 hours prior to proposed time of doing street work, to arrange for
required inspections at no charge to the Contractor.
D.
Permits:
1.
Provisions as noted in Section 01010 - SUMMARY OF THE
WORK in GENERAL REQUIREMENTS and as noted in the SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS effective, except that permits for street work (not
including surveys, grade sheets and street-use permits) will be paid for by the
Contractor.
2.
Obtain necessary "Permits to Use Street Space or Deposit
Building Materials", at no cost to the City.
3.
Obtain and pay for any surveys and grade sheets required by
the City Bureau of Contract Administration, "Standard Specifications" or the
City Engineer.
(END OF SECTION)
02510-4
SECTION 02513
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.2
1.
Hot-mix asphalt paving.
2.
Pavement and parking lot-marking paint.
3.
Concrete wheel bumpers
RELATED WORK
A.
1.3
This Section includes the following:
Related Sections: Document affecting Work of this Section include, but are not
necessarily limited to GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS and
Sections in DIVISION 1 of these Specifications:
1.
Earthwork for aggregate subbase and base courses and aggregate
pavement shoulders in Section 02220.
2.
Sealants and Caulking for joint sealants and fillers at paving terminations in
Section 07920.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General:
Comply with the pertinent provisions of SUBMITTALS Section 01340 of
DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS of the Specifications.
B.
Product Data: Within 40 calendar days after the Contractor has received the City's
"Notice to Proceed" submit the following:
1.
Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section.
2.
Mix design for asphaltic concrete prepared by a materials laboratory under the direction of a California Registered Engineer or a standard mix design proven in
actual performance.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate pavement markings, lane separations, and defined parking
spaces. Indicate dedicated handicapped spaces with international graphics symbol.
D.
Qualification Data:
For installer specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other
information specified.
E.
Certificates: Signed by the materials producer and the asphalt paving subcontractor,
stating that materials meet or exceed the specified requirements.
02513-1
F.
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
Certificate of Weigh Masters or certified delivery tickets for each truckload of asphaltic
material delivered to the job-site.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installation: Use adequate numbers of skilled craft persons who are thoroughly trained
and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the Work of this
Section. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed
hot-mix asphalt paving similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing hot-mix asphalt similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance.
C.
Materials and Installations: In accordance with the following documents referred to as
the "Standard Specifications". "Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction,
2000 Edition, City of Los Angeles Department of Public Works/Standard Plan S-610-23,
or latest edition, Notice to Contractors-Comprehensive. City of Los Angeles, Department
of Building and Safety, General Specifications, Form B-164 Standard Drawings."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
G.
Deliver pavement-marking materials to Project site in original packages with seals
unbroken and bearing manufacturer's labels containing brand name and type of material,
date of manufacture, and directions for storage.
H.
Store pavement-marking materials in a clean, dry, protected location and within
temperature range required by manufacturer.
Protect stored materials from direct
sunlight.
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A
Apply bituminous primer, paint primer and seal coat only when the ambient temperature
is above 50 degrees F. and when temperature has not been below 35 degrees F. for 12
hours immediately prior to application.
B
Do not apply bituminous materials when base surface is wet or contains an excess of
moisture that would prevent uniform distribution and the required penetration.
C
Construct asphaltic concrete surface course only when ambient temperature is above 40
degrees F. when underlying base is dry and when it is not raining.
PROTECTION
A.
Furnish, erect and maintain fences, barrier lights and signs as necessary to adequately
protect the public, existing work and work under this Contract as prescribed by the Los
Angeles City Department of Building and Safety.
B.
Protect the asphaltic concrete paved areas from traffic until the sealer is set and cured
and does not pick up under foot or wheeled traffic.
02513-2
1.7
ALTERATIONS, REPAIRS AND REPLACEMENT
A.
As required for complete construction of the project; materials and construction to match
existing adjacent work in quality and appearance and to conform to applicable provisions
of these specifications.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous
installations.
B.
Aggregates: Conform to "Standard Specifications, Section 400-4.3 for the gradations
specified. For Type II asphalt, Class C2.
C.
Recycled Aggregates: Reclaimed asphalt that has been crushed to uniform size and
microwave processed to control oil content and conforms to "Standard Specifications,
Section 400-4.3 for the gradations specified. For Type II asphalt, Class C2.
D.
Aggregate Base: As specified in the EARTHWORK - Section 02220.
E.
Soil Sterilant: Tinted for visual identification, shall be as follows:
1.
Pacific Coast Borax Co.: "Polyborchlorate".
2.
Amspray Corp. "Pavex".
3.
Elanco "Spike 80W".
4.
United States Borax Corp. "Polyborchlorate".
F.
Prime Coat:
asphalt.
G.
Paint Binder: Standard Specifications, Article 203-3 for Classification SS1H anionic
asphalt emulsion.
H.
Asphalt Concrete Surface Course: Standard Specifications Article 203-6 for hot plant
mixed aggregate and asphalt, produced by a commercial asphalt paving plant, except as
modified hereinafter:
1.
Standard Specifications, Article 302-5.3 for Classification SC-250 liquid
Asphalt Cement: Standard Specification, Article 203-1, for steam refined paving
asphalt, AR8000 Viscosity Grade, mixed with the aggregate at a rate specified in
Article 203-6.3.
I.
Surface Sealer: AASHTO Designation SS-1h emulsion type.
J.
Concrete Materials:
Materials, form work and reinforcing shall be furnished in
accordance with applicable requirements specified in Section 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE
CONCRETE.
02513-3
K.
Parking Lot Striping and Markings: Material shall be fuller "Traffic Line Paint" or J.E.
Bauer Co. "Zonelac Traffic Paint" or Sinclair "Traffic-Lack No. 70". Color shall be white
except that handicapped emblem and adjacent parking stall lines shall be "blue" color".
Parking lot striping shall be per Section 210 and 310-5.6 of the “Standard Specifications”.
The coating shall be minimum 15 mil thick.
L.
Headers and Stakes: Redwood, Construction Grade, in dimensions shown on the
Contract Drawings or as required for the use where dimensions are not shown on the
Drawings in conformance to Standard Specifications Section 302.5.4. Headers to be 2inch x 6-inch size with 2-inch by 4-inch stakes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION / PRELIMINARY PREPARATION
A.
Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to support paving and imposed loads.
B.
Installer shall notify City Engineer in writing of any unsatisfactory conditions.
begin paving installation until these conditions have been satisfactorily corrected.
Do not
FINAL PREPARATION OF SUBGRADES
A.
After preparation of subgrade as specified in Section 02220 of these Specifications and
just prior to installing aggregate base, thoroughly scarify and sprinkle the entire area to
be paved, and then compact to a smooth, hard, even surface of 90% compaction to receive the aggregates in conformance to Section 301 of the "Standard Specifications".
B.
Soil Sterilization: Apply the specified weed killer soil sterilant to the entire area to be
paved with asphalt concrete paving. Adhere to the manufacturer's application recommendations.
PLACEMENT OF BASE COURSES (In accordance with Section 301-2 of the "Standard
Specifications")
A.
Base:
1.
Spread the specified base material to a thickness providing the compacted thickness shown on the Drawings.
2.
Compact to 95%.
B.
Just prior to placement, the upper 6-inches of the subgrade soil, whether fill or natural
shall be compacted in accordance with Section 301-1 of the "Standard Specifications".
C.
Thickness Tolerance: Provide the compacted thicknesses shown on the Contract Drawings within a tolerance of minus 0.0" to plus 0.5".
D.
Smoothness Tolerance: Provide the lines and grades shown on the Contract Drawings
within a tolerance of 3/8" in ten feet.
1.
Deviations: Correct by removing materials, replacing with new materials, and
reworking or re-compacting as required.
02513-4
E.
3.4
3.6
Use only the amount of moisture needed to achieve the specified
CONSTRUCTION OF ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVING:
A.
3.5
Moisture Content:
compaction.
In accordance with the "Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction", latest
Edition.
1.
Laying: In accordance with Section 302-5 of "Standard Specifications".
2.
Tack Coat: Apply to surfaces of concrete improvements abutting new work at
least 24 hours prior to laying of new work.
3.
Apply suitable binder continuously on concrete surfaces to which asphalt concrete is placed, abutted or joined to provide tight bond at joints, which shall be
neat, straight-line and close.
4.
Pavement Edging: Place headers and stakes at all edges of the asphalt paving
not abutting other asphalt and/or concrete surfaces.
5.
Grade paving evenly without low spots, hollows or irregularities and to provide
proper drainage to new concrete catch basins.
B.
Thickness: Thickness as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
C.
Flood Tests: After completion of the paving and prior to acceptance of the work, a water
flood test shall be made in the presence of the Inspector. The flooding shall be done by
water tank truck. All depressions, where the water ponds to a depth of more than 1/8inch shall be filled or slope shall be corrected to provide proper drainage to catch basins.
Filling shall be done with hot materials only. The edges of the fill shall be feathered and
smoothed so that the joint between the fill and the original surfacing is invisible.
APPLICATION OF SEAL COAT
A.
Prepare the surfaces, mix the seal coat material, and apply in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the City Engineer or the Consultant.
B.
Achieve a finished surface seal which, when dry and thoroughly set, is smooth, tough, resilient, of uniform black color, and free from coarse textured areas, lap marks, ridges, and
other surface irregularities.
PARKING AREA STRIPING AND MARKINGS
A.
Materials: As hereinbefore specified.
B.
Lines: 4-inches wide.
C.
Arrows: 12-inch stroke, with proportionate head.
D.
Words: 24-inches high, 4-inch and 2-inch strokes as noted on the Contract Drawings.
E.
Disabled Emblem: As noted on the Contract Drawings.
F.
Preparations: All surfaces to be free of dirt, grease or other foreign materials.
02513-5
G.
3.7
Application: Apply one heavy undiluted coat with traffic line painting equipment in locations indicated on the Contract Drawings in uniform coverage, free from light spots and
with all edges clean-cut, straight line and true.
ASPHALTIC CONCRETE REPAIRS
A.
Required: As necessary to accommodate construction of new curbs, gutters and driveways as indicated on the Contract Drawings; as necessary due to excavation, trenching
and utility connections.
B.
Application: Upon completion of all work within existing asphalt concrete paved areas,
Contractor shall repair the existing asphalt concrete paving conforming to requirements of
the "Standard Specifications" and Bureau of Engineering standards as follows:
1.
Properly prepared sub-base and aggregate base using existing removed aggregate base materials as approved by the City Engineer or the Consultant, to
match existing adjoining work.
2.
Soil Sterilization: Apply weed killer (soil sterilant) on areas to be paved with asphalt concrete; soil sterilant to be applied recommended by the manufacturer;
Contractor shall certify in writing that material has been applied.
3.
Tack coat surfaces of the existing asphalt concrete surfaces as per 302-5.4 of
the "Standard Specifications" over which new materials will be laid or edges of
existing saw cut asphalt concrete and/or concrete against which new asphalt
concrete will be placed, with suitable grade asphalt or asphalt emulsion (Fed.
Spec. SS-1h); terminate tack coat or concrete surfaces at top asphalt concrete
paving.
4.
Lay new asphalt concrete paving conforming to Section 203-6 of the "Standard
Specifications" to match adjoining work using material of a heavier density than
the "in-place" adjacent work. Use hot smoothing iron to obtain inconspicuous,
straight and flush joint lines. Properly grade to provide the desired drainage as
indicated on the Contract Drawings.
02513-6
SECTION 02514
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Furnish and install precast thin set concrete pavers as indicated on the drawings and
specified.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Concrete Pavers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements, provide concrete
pavers as manufactured by Tile Tech (323) 939-8786, or an "or equal" product by one of
the following:
1.
2.
Cal-Pave Inc., Woodland Hills, CA.
Hokanson Co., Sacramento, CA.
B.
Pavers shall have a compressive strength of not less than 4000 psi.
C.
Latex-Portland Cement Mortars and Grouts: Provide products of one of the following
manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Bostik Construction Products Div., Emhart Chemical Group.
C-Cure Chemical Co., Inc.
Custom Building Products.
Laticrete Inc.
Provide color selections made by Architect from full range of standard colors and
textures available from the manufacturer.
D.
Latex-Modified Portland Cement Setting-bed Mortar: Proportion and mix portland
cement, aggregate, and latex additive for setting bed to comply with directions of latex
additive manufacturer and as necessary to produce stiff mixture with a moist surface
when bed is ready to receive brick pavers.
E.
Latex-Modified Portland Cement Slurry Bond Coat: Proportion and mix portland cement,
aggregate, and latex additive for slurry bond coat to comply with directions of latex
additive manufacturer.
F.
Latex-Modified Portland Cement Grout: Provide factory blended grout. Add latex
additive to dry grout mix in proportion and concentration recommended by latex additive
manufacturer. Produce the color selected by the Architect.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install thin set concrete pavers as recommended by the Tile Council of America
Installation Manual.
02514-1
SECTION 02517
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Furnish and install portland cement concrete paving as shown on the drawings, including
curbs, gutters, walkways, and pavement, and other site concrete.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide samples, manufacturer's product data, test reports, and materials' certifications
as required in referenced sections for concrete and joint fillers and sealers.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Forms: Steel, wood, or other suitable material of size and strength to resist movement
during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal.
Use straight forms, free of distortion and defects.
1.
Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bends as
required.
B.
Coat forms with a nonstaining form release agent that will not discolor or deface surface
of concrete.
C.
Welded Wire Mesh: Welded plain cold-drawn steel wire fabric, ASTM A185, in flat
sheets, not rolls.
D.
Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60.
E.
Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with
ends square and free of burrs.
F.
Concrete Materials: Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 sections for
concrete materials, admixtures, bonding materials, curing materials, and others as
required.
G.
Use high-range water-reducing admixture (HRWR) in pumped concrete, concrete for
parking structure slabs, and concrete with water/cement ratios below 0.50. High-Range
water-reducing admixture (Super Plasticizer) shall conform to ASTM C 494, Type F or
Type G, and be one of the following products:
1.
"Super P," Anti-Hydro Co., Inc.
2.
"Eucon 37," Euclid Chemical Co.
3.
"WRDA 19" or "Daracem," W.R. Grace & Co.
4.
"Rheobuild," Master Builders, Inc.
02517-1
5.
2.2
"Sikament 300," Sika Corp.
H.
Expansion Joint Sealers: Comply with requirements of applicable Division 7 sections for
joint sealers.
I.
Bituminous Fiber Joint Filler: Preformed strips of asphalt saturated fiberboard, complying
with ASTM D 1751.
J.
Liquid-Membrane Forming and Sealing Curing Compound: Comply with ASTM C 309,
Type I, Class A unless other type acceptable to Architect. Moisture loss no more than
0.055 gr./sq. cm. when applied at 200 sq. ft./gal, as follows:
1.
"Clear Seal"; A. C. Horn.
2.
"AR -30" W.R. Meadows.
3.
"Kure-N-Seal"; Sonneborn-Contech.
CONCRETE MIX, DESIGN, AND TESTING
A.
Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 sections for concrete mix design,
sampling and testing, and quality control and as herein specified.
B.
Design mix to produce normal-weight concrete consisting of portland cement, aggregate,
water-reducing or high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer), air-entraining
admixture, and water to produce the following properties:
1.
Compressive Strength: As indicated on the drawings, or if not so indicated
compressive strength shall be 3000 psi, minimum at 28 days.
2.
Slump Limit: 8 inches minimum for concrete containing high-range waterreducing admixture (superplasticizer); 3 inches for other concrete.
3.
Air Content: 5 to 8 percent.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
FORM CONSTRUCTION
A.
Set forms to required grades and lines, braced and secured. Install forms to allow
continuous progress of work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after
placement.
B.
Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to following tolerances:
1.
Top of forms not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
2.
Vertical face on longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
C.
Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as required to ensure
separation from concrete without damage.
D.
Slope step treads at 1/4 inch per foot to drain.
02517-2
3.2
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
3.3
3.4
Locate, place, and support reinforcement as specified in Division 3 sections, unless
otherwise indicated.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
General: Comply with requirements of Division 3 sections for mixing and placing
concrete, and as herein specified.
B.
Do not place concrete until subbase and forms have been checked for line and grade.
Moisten subbase if required to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is
placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at
required finish elevation and alignment.
C.
Place concrete by methods that prevent segregation of mix. Consolidate concrete along
face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away
from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for
hand-spreading. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocation of reinforcing, dowels, and
joint devices.
D.
Use bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or
partially hardened concrete surfaces.
E.
Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints as far
as possible. If interrupted for more than 1/2 hour, place a construction joint.
F.
Curbs and Gutters: Automatic machine may be used for curb and gutter placement at
Contractor's option. If machine placement is to be used, submit revised mix design and
laboratory test results that meet or exceed minimums specified. Machine placement
must produce curbs and gutters to required cross-section, lines, grades, finish, and
jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not acceptable, remove and
replace with formed concrete as specified.
JOINTS
A.
General: Construct expansion, weakened-plane (contraction), and construction joints
true to line with face perpendicular to surface of concrete. Construct transverse joints at
right angles to the centerline, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
When joining existing structures, place transverse joints to align with previously placed
joints, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Weakened-Plane (Contraction) Joints: Provide weakened-plane (contraction) joints,
sectioning concrete into areas as shown on drawings. Construct weakened-plane joints
for a depth equal to at least 1/4 concrete thickness, as follows:
1.
Tooled Joints: Form weakened-plane joints in fresh concrete by grooving top
portion with a recommended cutting tool and finishing edges with a jointer.
2.
Sawed Joints: Form weakened-plane joints with powered saws equipped with
shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut joints into hardened
concrete as soon as surface will not be torn, abraded, or otherwise damaged by
cutting action.
02517-3
3.5
D.
Construction Joints: Use standard metal keyways. Place construction joints at end of
placements and at locations where placement operations are stopped for more than 1/2
hour, except where such placements terminate at expansion joints.
E.
Expansion Joints: Provide premolded joint filler for expansion joints abutting concrete
curbs, catch basins, inlets, structures, walks, and other fixed objects.
F.
Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch
below finished surface where joint sealer is indicated. If no joint sealer, place top of joint
filler flush with finished concrete surface.
G.
Fillers and Sealants: Comply with requirements of applicable Division 7 sections for
preparation of joints, materials, installation, and performance.
GENERAL CONCRETE FINISHING
A.
After striking-off and consolidating concrete, smooth surface by screeding and floating.
Apply a float finish as a first phase preceeding all other finishes. Use hand methods only
where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust floating to compact surface and
produce uniform texture.
B.
After floating, test surface for trueness with a 10-ft. straightedge. Distribute concrete as
required to remove surface irregularities, and refloat repaired areas to provide a
continuous smooth finish.
C.
Work edges of slabs, gutters, back top edge of curb, and formed joints with an edging
tool, and round to 1/2-inch radius.
D.
After floating and when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared, complete
troweling and finish surface as follows:
E.
3.6
1.
On level surfaces, broom finish by drawing a fine-hair broom across concrete
surface perpendicular to line of traffic.
2.
On inclined slab surfaces, provide a coarse, non-slip finish by scoring surface
with a stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic.
Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed. After form removal,
clean ends of joints and point-up any minor honeycombed areas. Remove and replace
areas or sections with major defects, as directed by Architect.
WOOD FLOAT FINISH
A.
Also provide as second stage for other finishes, unless otherwise specified.
B.
Using approved floating machines or hardwood trowels, float surfaces to required planes
and shapes, working just sufficiently to bring surfaces to uniform condition.
C.
Work no more than necessary to achieve uniform texture free from irregularities and
screed marks; except where receiving fills or mortar beds, leave surfaces in roughened,
granular condition for good mechanical bond.
D.
Cut and fill surfaces as necessary to true up.
02517-4
3.7
3.8
3.9
E.
When followed by other finishes, floating shall leave small amount of mortar on surfaces
without excess of water.
F.
Do not proceed with subsequent finishes until surface water has absorbed or dried off
and concrete has set sufficiently to prevent fines or water from being worked to the
surface.
G.
Finish texture shall be fine-grained and granular to provide good slip-resistance, and shall
be reasonably free from directional trowel marks.
H.
Provide for exterior and interior surfaces of buildings, unless otherwise indicated.
STEEL TROWEL FINISH
A.
Using finishing machines or steel trowels, trowel surfaces to produce a dense, hard,
smooth steel trowel finish. Commence troweling in 1 pass sufficiently to flatten floated
surface.
B.
Wait until concrete has set sufficiently; then resume steel troweling; continue and repeat
as required to obtain a hard steel trowel finish, free of blemishes, ripples, and trowel
marks.
C.
Do not:
1.
Use cement or sand dusting to absorb or otherwise remove surface water.
2.
Commence troweling too soon on freshly placed concrete.
3.
Overwork surfaces by excessive troweling in an area in one pass.
D.
Work out lips, uneven levels, and other irregularities prior to final troweling.
E.
Neatly tool exposed edges, expansion joints, curbs, arises, and other details.
F.
Surface across joints shall be level and free from offsets.
G.
Provide for interior surface not otherwise indicated or specified.
BROOM FINISH
A.
For exterior flatwork and where indicated.
B.
Draw a soft-bristled push broom over an initially trowel-finished surface.
C.
When coarser surfaces are desired, use a stiffer-bristled broom.
D.
Broom finish shall provide a non-slip surface, even if exposed to rain.
CURING
A.
Protect and cure finished concrete paving in compliance with applicable requirements of
Division 3 membrane-forming curing and sealing compound.
02517-5
3.10
REPAIRS AND PROTECTIONS
A.
Repair or replace broken or defective concrete, as directed by Architect.
B.
Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic from pavement
for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain
pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as
they occur.
C.
Sweep concrete pavement and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt, and other foreign
material just before final inspection.
02517-6
SECTION 02523
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Furnish and install sand bedded concrete pavers to allow for permeability as indicated on
the drawings and specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
Concrete Pavers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements, provide concrete
pavers as manufactured by Tile Tech (323) 939-8786, or an "or equal" product by one of
the following:
1.
Cal-Pave Inc., Woodland Hills, CA.
2.
Hokanson Co., Sacramento, CA.
B.
Pavers shall have the ability to allow rapid permeation of water and a compressive
strength of not less than 4000 psi.
C.
Sand for bedding shall be fine aggregates shall be natural sand or sand manufactured
from crushed stone, quartz, or other natural stone, shall conform to ASTM C33, and shall
be clean but need not be washed sand.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION - ON SAND SETTING BED
A.
Spread sand evenly over prepared substrate to a thickness as indicated on the drawings.
B.
Dampen and roller compact sand to level and even surface. Screed and scarify top 1/2
inch of sand.
C.
Place paver units in the pattern indicated on the drawings, from straight reference edge.
Solidly embed the paver on the sand setting bed, resting firmly without wobbling. Place
half units, special shaped units, and curbs at edge and interruptions. Maintain tight,
evenly spaced joints.
D.
Sprinkle sand over surface of the pavers, sweep into joints and moisten. Recover with
additional sand until firm joints are achieved. Remove excess sand. Tamp and level
paver units with mechanical vibrator until units are firmly bedded, level, and to correct
elevation and gradients.
END OF SECTION
02523-1
SECTION 02580
PAVEMENT MARKING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Work Included: Furnish and apply pavement marking as indicated on the drawings and
specified.
Submit the manufacturer's product data and certificates of compliance in accordance with
Section 01340.
DESCRIPTION
A.
This work shall consist of applying paint on pavement surfaces, in the form of traffic
markings, delineation of areas restricted to handicapped persons, crosswalks, and other
markings, in accordance with the drawings, or as prescribed by the City.
B.
Details not shown shall be in conformity with the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control
Devices for Streets and Highways, published by the U.S. Department of Transportation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Paint shall be a water emulsion based as manufactured by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
J.E. Bauer "Zonelac Traffic Paint"
Fuller "Traffic Line Paint"
Sinclair "Traffic-Lack No. 70"
B.
Paint shall be in containers of at least five gallons. Each batch of paint shall be
accompanied by a certificate stating compliance with the applicable publication.
C.
Reflectorized beads shall conform to FS TT-P-110, Type II.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION
A.
Paint applicators and operations shall be under the control of an experienced technician
thoroughly familiar with equipment, tools, materials, and marking layouts. Apply marking
as recommended by the paint manufacturers.
B.
Manually paint numbers, letters, and symbols using templates.
PAVEMENT MARKING
02580-1
SECTION 02667
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
1.3
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300 - Submittals.
B.
Product Data: Submit data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves and accessories.
SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT
A.
1.4
1.5
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A.
Record actual locations of piping mains, valves, connections, thrust restraints, and invert
elevations.
B.
Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of uncharted
utilities.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Section includes pipe and fittings for site water distribution, as indicated and specified.
Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
A.
Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600 –
Materials and Equipment.
B.
Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
WATER PIPE
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Beetle Plastics, Inc.
2.
Easyway Plastics, Inc.
3.
Hefco Plastics, Inc.
02667-1
B.
2.2
B.
Fittings: ASTM D2466, PVC.
2.
Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld.
3.
Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, brightly colored plastic covering,
imprinted with "Water Service" in large letters.
Manufacturers:
1.
Hammond Valve.
2.
Stockham Valves and Fittings.
3.
American Valve.
4.
Crane Valve
5.
Walworth.
6.
Milwaukee Valve Co.
Brass or Bronze body, non-rising stem, inside screw, single wedge or disc, compression
ends, with control rod, extension box and valve key.
GATE VALVES - 3 INCHES AND OVER
A.
B.
2.4
1.
GATE VALVES - UP TO 3 INCHES
A.
2.3
PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785, Schedule 40:
Manufacturers:
1.
Hammond Valve.
2.
3.
American Valve.
4.
Crane Valve
5.
Walworth.
6.
Milwaukee Valve Co.
AWWA C500, Iron body, bronze trim, non-rising stem with square nut, single wedge,
flanged ends, control rod, extension box and valve key.
BALL VALVES - UP TO 2 INCHES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Hammond Valve.
02667-2
B.
2.5
2.
Stockham Valves and Fitting
3.
Jenkins Valves Inc.
Brass body, teflon coated brass ball, rubber seats and stem seals, Tee stem pre-drilled for
control rod, AWWA inlet end, compression outlet, with control rod, extension box and valve
key.
SWING CHECK VALVES - FROM 2 INCHES TO 24 INCHES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
B.
2.6
AWWA C508, iron body, bronze trim, 45 degree swing disc, renewable disc and seat,
flanged ends.
BUTTERFLY VALVES - FROM 2 INCHES TO 24 INCHES
A.
B.
2.7
General Controls or equal.
Manufacturers:
1.
Hammond Valve.
2.
3.
Jenkins Valves Inc.
AWWA C504, iron body, bronze disc, resilient replaceable seat, water or lug ends, ten
position lever handle.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Concrete for Thrust Restraints: Concrete type specified in Section 03300 – Cast-In-Place
Concrete.
B.
Backflow Preventer: Type as required by the City of Los Angeles.
C.
Meter: Type as required by the City of Los Angeles.
D.
Extension Stems for Valve Operators:
1.
Where depth of valve is such that center-line is more than 3 feet below grade,
provide operating extension stem to bring operating nut 6 inches below surface of
ground and flash or box cover.
2.
Construct extension stems of steel, complete with 2 inch square operating nut.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION - PIPE
02667-3
3.2
3.3
3.4
A.
Maintain separation of water main from sewer piping in accordance with code.
B.
Install pipe to indicated elevation to within tolerance of 5/8 inches.
C.
Install grooved and shouldered pipe joints to AWWA C606.
D.
Route pipe in straight line.
E.
Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints.
F.
Slope water pipe and position drains at low points.
G.
Form and place concrete for thrust restraints at each elbow or change of direction of pipe
main.
H.
Establish elevations of buried piping to ensure not less than 2 ft of cover.
I.
Install trace wire continuous over top of pipe; coordinate with Section 02324 - Trenching.
J.
Backfill trench in accordance with Section 02320 - Backfilling.
INSTALLATION - VALVES AND HYDRANTS
A.
Set valves on solid bearing.
B.
Center and plumb valve box over valve. Set box cover flush with finished grade.
SERVICE CONNECTIONS
A.
Provide water service to utility company requirements with reduced pressure backflow
preventer and water meter with by-pass valves and sand strainer.
B.
Provide sleeve in retaining wall for service main. Support with reinforced concrete bridge.
Calk enlarged sleeve watertight.
C.
Anchor service main to interior surface of foundation wall.
D.
Provide 18 gage galvanized sheet metal sleeve surrounding service main to 6 inches above
floor and 6 feet minimum below grade. Size for 2 inches minimum of glass fiber insulation
stuffing.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D1557.
B.
If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, refer to Section 01405 –
Testing and Inspecting.
C.
Provide hydrostatic leak test as indicated in the California Code of Regulations, Title 24 Building Standards, Part 5, 1998 Basic Plumbing Regulations with State Amendments.
END OF SECTION
02667-4
02667-5
SECTION 02687
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
Section includes pipe and fittings for site utility natural gas distribution as indicated on the
drawings and specified.
A.
Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves and accessories.
A.
Record actual locations of pipe mains, valves, connections, and invert elevations.
B.
utilities.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with the City of Los Angeles, and the Southern California Gas
Company standards.
B.
Conform to ANSI B31.2.
C.
Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
and applicable state regulations.
D.
Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME SEC IX.
E.
Conform to NFPA 54.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPING
A.
2.2
Polyethylene Pipe: ASTM D2513, SDR 11.5:
1.
Fittings: ASTM D2513.
2.
Joints: Mechanical or Compression fit.
3.
Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, brightly colored plastic covering,
imprinted with "Natural Gas Service" in large letters.
GAS COCKS
02687-1
2.3
A.
Up to 2 Inches: 150 psig WOG, bronze body, bronze tapered plug, non-lubricated, Teflon
packing, threaded ends.
B.
Over 2 Inches: 125 psig WOG, Cast iron body and tapered plug, non-lubricated, Teflon
packing, threaded ends.
C.
Gas Cock and Pressure Regulating Valves:
marked on valve body.
Manufacturer's name and pressure rating
PRESSURE REGULATING VALVES
A.
Valves: Single stage, malleable iron body, corrosion-resistant, pressure regulator with
atmospheric vent, elevation compensator; with threaded ends for 2 inch and smaller,
flanged ends larger than 2 inch.
B.
Capacity: For inlet and outlet gas pressures, specific gravity, and flow rate indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
PREPARATION
A.
Cut pipe ends square, ream pipe and tube ends to full pipe diameter, remove burrs. Bevel
plain end ferrous pipe over 2 inches diameter.
B.
Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.
C.
Prepare piping connections with threading and unions..
BEDDING
A.
Hand trim excavation for accurate placement of pipe to elevations indicated.
B.
Place bedding material at trench bottom, level fill materials in one continuous layer not
exceeding 6 inches compacted depth, compact to 95 percent.
C.
Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill, tamped in place and compacted to 95
percent.
D.
Maintain optimum moisture content of bedding material to attain required compaction
density.
INSTALLATION - PIPING
A.
Maintain separation of gas line from water piping in accordance with the State of California
Building Code.
B.
Route piping in straight line.
C.
Install piping to conserve space and not interfere with use of site space.
D.
Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints.
02687-2
3.4
E.
Install cocks and other fittings.
F.
Establish elevations of buried piping to ensure not less than 24 inches of cover in nontraveled areas and 48 inches of cover in driveways and parking areas.
G.
Lay pipe on bedding.
H.
Install trace wire continuous over top of pipe.
I.
Backfill trench in accordance with Section 02320 - Backfill.
J.
Center and plumb valve box over valve. Set box cover flush with finished ground surface.
Prevent shock or stress from being transmitted through valve box to valve.
A.
Test all piping for leakage. If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements,
remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to the City.
END OF SECTION
02687-3
SECTION 02720
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM C76 - Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe.
B.
ASTM D1557 - Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate
Mixtures Using 10 lb Rammer and 18 inch Drop.
C.
ASTM D3035 – Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) SDR 35 and Fittings.
D.
"Standard Plans and Specifications, Department of Public Works", City of Los Angeles.
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
1.5
Section includes site storm sewerage drainage piping, fittings and accessories, as
Product Data: Submit data indicating pipe and pipe accessories.
A.
Accurately record actual locations of pipe runs, connections, catch basins, cleanouts, and
invert elevations.
B.
utilities.
A.
Perform all work of this Section in strict accordance with applicable Government Codes and
Regulations especially meeting all safety standards and requirements of CAL/OSHA,
Department of Public Works, and the City of Los Angeles as indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SEWER PIPE MATERIALS
A.
2.2
Plastic Pipe: ASTM D3035, PVC SDR 35, material; inside nominal diameter as indicated
on drawings, bell and spigot style solvent sealed joint end.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Pipe Joints: Mechanical clamp ring type, stainless steel expanding and contracting sleeve,
neoprene ribbed gasket for positive seal.
02720-1
2.3
B.
Fittings: Same material as pipe molded or formed to suit pipe size and end design, in
required tee, bends, elbows, cleanouts, reducers, traps and other configurations required.
C.
Filter Fabric: Non-biodegradable, woven.
D.
Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, brightly colored plastic covering, imprinted
with "Storm Sewer Service" in large letters.
CLEANOUTS
A.
Base Pad: Cast-in-place concrete of type specified in Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place
Concrete.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
3.3
Verify that trench cut excavation base is ready to receive work and excavations,
dimensions, and elevations are as indicated on drawings.
PREPARATION
A.
Hand trim excavations to required elevations. Correct over excavation with lean concrete.
B.
Remove large stones or other hard matter which could damage piping or impede consistent
backfilling or compaction.
C.
Place bedding material at trench bottom, level materials in continuous layer not exceeding
6 inches compacted depth.
D.
Maintain optimum moisture content of bedding material to attain required compaction
density.
INSTALLATION - PIPE
A.
Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Seal
joints watertight.
B.
Place pipe on 4 inches, minimum, of clean coarse sand.
C.
Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on drawings with maximum variation from true slope of
1/8 inch in 10 feet.
D.
Install aggregate at sides and over top of pipe. Provide top cover to minimum compacted
thickness as indicated in soil report.
E.
Refer to Section 02324 – Trenching , for trenching requirements. Do not displace or
damage pipe when compacting.
F.
Connect to municipal storm sewer system, through installed sleeves.
G.
Install trace wire continuous over top of pipe, buried 6 inches below finish grade, above pipe
line; coordinate with Section 02060 - Aggregate.
02720-2
3.4
3.5
INSTALLATION - CATCH BASINS AND CLEANOUTS
A.
Form bottom of excavation clean and smooth to correct elevation.
B.
Form and place cast-in-place concrete base pad, with provision for storm sewer pipe end
sections.
C.
Level top surface of base pad; sleeve concrete shaft sections to receive storm sewer pipe
sections.
D.
Establish elevations and pipe inverts for inlets and outlets as indicated.
E.
Mount lid and frame level in grout, secured to top cone section to elevation indicated.
A.
Request inspection prior to and immediately after placing aggregate cover over pipe.
B.
C.
If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, refer to Section 01400 -Quality
Control.
02720-3
SECTION 02730
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.7
Section includes sanitary sewerage drainage piping, fittings, accessories and bedding;
connection of building sanitary drainage system to and cleanout access all as indicated on
A.
B.
Product Data: Submit data indicating pipe and pipe accessories.
SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION
A.
B.
Manufacturer's
specified.
C.
Certificates: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
Instructions:
Indicate special procedures required to install Products
A.
Record location of pipe runs, connections, catch basins, clean-outs, control points, and
invert elevations.
B.
Identify, indicate, and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions or discovery of
uncharted utilities.
A.
Perform all work of this Section in strict accordance with applicable Government Codes and
Regulations especially meeting all safety standards and requirements of CAL/OSHA.
Provide additional measures, added materials and devices as may be needed as directed
by the City Representative.
B.
Conform to the California Code of Regulations, Title 24 - Building Standards, Part 5, 1998
Basic Plumbing Regulations with State Amendments .
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE MATERIALS
A.
Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Joint Devices:
1.
Pipe: ASTM A74, Extra Heavy Service type, inside nominal diameter as indicated
on Drawings, hubless.
02730- 1
2.
B.
2.2
2.3
Joint Device: ASTM C564, rubber gasket joint devices.
PVC outside of buildings shall conform to ASTM moduls indicator wall thickness T-1 of
ASTM-F789 or SDR-35 of ASTMD-3034.
PIPE ACCESSORIES
A.
Pipe Joints: Mechanical clamp ring type, stainless steel expanding and contracting sleeve,
neoprene ribbed gasket for positive seal.
B.
Fittings: Same material as pipe molded or formed to suit pipe size and end design, in
required tee, bends, elbows, clean-outs, reducers, traps and other configurations required.
C.
Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, brightly colored plastic covering, imprinted
with "Sewer Service" in large letters.
D.
Polyethylene: Encase metal pipe below grade with 6 mil thick clear polyethylene film, type
recommended for below grade application.
CLEAN-OUTS
A.
As indicated.
B.
Pad: Cast-in-place concrete of type specified in Section 03300- Cast-in-Place Concrete.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
3.3
Verify that trench cut is ready to receive work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations
are as indicated on drawings.
PREPARATION
A.
Hand trim excavations to required elevations. Correct over excavation with lean concrete.
B.
Maintain moisture content of bedding material at optimum or above to plus or minus 2
percent to attain required compaction density.
INSTALLATION - PIPE
A.
Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Seal
joints watertight.
B.
Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on drawings; with maximum variation from true slope of
1:1000.
C.
Install bedding at sides and over top of pipe to minimum compacted thickness indicated on
soils report; compacted to 90% unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Refer to Section 02324 – Trenching, for trenching requirements. Do not displace or
damage pipe when compacting.
02730- 2
3.4
3.5
E.
Connect to building sanitary sewer outlet and municipal sewer system, through installed
sleeves.
F.
Install trace wire and colored marker tape continuous over top of pipe, buried 6 inches
below finish grade, above pipe line; coordinate with Section 02324 - Trenching.
G.
Coordinate the Work with termination of sanitary sewer connection outside building,
connection to municipal sewer utility service and trenching.
INSTALLATION - CLEAN-OUTS
A.
Form and place cast-in-place concrete pad with provision for sanitary sewer pipe ends.
B.
Establish elevations and inverts for inlets and outlets as indicated.
C.
Mount clean-out surface hub level in grout, to elevation indicated.
A.
Request inspection prior to and immediately after placing bedding.
B.
C.
Moisture content testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D1557.
D.
If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, refer to Section 01405 –
Testing and Inspection.
E.
Pressure, Infiltration and Deflection Test: Coordinate the Work with the California Code of
Regulations, Title 24 - Building Standards, Part 5, 1998 Basic Plumbing Regulations with
State Amendments.
F.
Protect pipe and aggregate cover from damage or displacement until backfilling operation is
in progress.
02730- 3
SECTON 02810
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
1.3
Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to install
the irrigation system as indicated on the approved drawings and specified herein and
shall perform all other incidental work necessary to carry out the intent of this irrigation
specification and irrigation drawings including the following:
1.
Furnish and install all pipelines and fittings.
2.
Furnish and install automatic controller, all electrical connections and control
wiring.
3.
Furnish, assemble, and install material described in this specification and as
4.
Excavate and backfill trenches.
5.
Test and inspect system.
6.
Sixty day maintenance.
7.
One year guarantee.
B.
Work noted as “N.I.C” “existing” or “to be supplied and/or installed by others” is not a
part of this Section.
C.
The work in this section shall be coordinated with all underground utilities and trades
responsible for their installation.
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A.
Landscape planting: Division 2 –Section 02900
B.
Electrical: Division 16 – Section 16000
C.
Mechanical: Division 15 – Section 15400
D.
Examine all Drawings and Specifications pertinent to the proper completion of the work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Permits: Obtain and pay for all permits and inspections required by outside agencies.
B.
Ordinances and regulations: Local, municipal, and state laws, and rules and regulations
governing or relating to any portion of this work are hereby incorporated into and made a
part of these specifications, and their provisions shall be carried out by the Contractor.
Anything contained in the specifications shall not be construed to conflict with any of
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
02810-1
these rules and regulations or requirements of the same. However, when the
specifications and drawings call for or describe materials, workmanship, or construction
of a better quality, higher standard, or larger size than is required by these rules and
regulations, the provisions of the specifications and drawings shall take precedence.
C.
Protection: Erect and maintain barricades, warning signs and lights, and provide guards
as necessary or required to protect all persons on the site.
D.
Underwriters Laboratories: Electrical wiring controls, motors, and devices shall be U.L.
listed, and so labeled.
E.
Installer qualifications (for solvent and rubber gasket joints): Each person shall be trained
by the manufacturer’s representative in techniques for making correct joints prior to
performing work on the site.
F.
Work of this Section, that is allied, with the work of other trades shall be coordinated as
necessary.
G.
Superintendent: A superintendent satisfactory to the Project Manager shall be present
on the site at all times during progress of the work.
1.
The Superintendent shall not be changed, except with the consent of the Project
Manager.
2.
The Superintendent shall be authorized to represent the Contractor.
H.
Discrepancies: When discrepancies exist between drawings and specifications, and no
specific interpretation is issued prior to bidding, the decision regarding this interpretation
will rest with Project Manager, The Contractor will be compelled to act on this decision
as directed. In the event the installation deviates from the directions given, it shall be
corrected at the Contractor's expense.
I.
Explanation of drawings: Due to the scale of drawings, it is not possible to indicate all
offsets, fittings, sleeves, etc., which may be required. Carefully investigate the structural
and finished conditions affecting all of this work and plan this work accordingly,
furnishing such fittings, etc., as may be required to meet such conditions. Drawings are
generally diagrammatic and indicative of the work to be installed. The work shall be
installed in such a manner as to avoid conflicts between irrigation systems, planting and
architectural features.
J.
Manufacturer’s directions: manufacturer’s directions and detailed drawings shall be
followed in all cases where the manufacturers used in this Contract furnish directions
covering points not shown in the drawings and specifications.
K.
Work called for on the drawings by notes or details shall be furnished and installed
whether or not specifically mentioned in the specifications.
L.
The Contractor shall not install the irrigation system as shown on the drawings when it is
obvious in the field that obstructions, grade differences or discrepancies in equipment
usage or area dimensions exist that might not have been considered in the engineering.
Such obstructions or differences shall be brought to the attention of the Project
Manager. In the event this notification is not performed, the Contractor shall assume full
responsibility for any revision necessary. At no additional cost to the Department.
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
02810-2
1.4
ALTERNATE MATERIAL APPROVALS
A.
1.5
1.
Approval of any item as a substitution or alternate is for design only, based on
information or samples provided by the Contractor.
2.
Contractor shall be responsible for the total performance of such substitution to
equal or surpass the original in every respect.
3.
If the substitution proves to be unsatisfactory in the opinion of the Project
Manager, Contractor shall remove such work and re place it with originally
specified item (including installation) as part of the work of this Section.
4.
Manufacturer’s warranties shall not relieve Contractor of any liability under the
specified guarantee. Such warranties are intended only to supplement the
contractor’s guarantee.
RECORD DRAWINGS (AS-BUILTS) AND CONTROLLER CHARTS
A.
B.
1.6
Substitution of any product, material, or equipment without the prior written approval of
the Project Manager will not be permitted.
As built plans shall be maintained daily throughout the construction period and turned over
to the Project Manager at the Operational Final Inspection, as indicated in the General
section of this Notice to Contractors in the Record Drawings Submittal section.
The Contractor shall provide two copies of a controller chart showing the irrigation system
installed. The chart shall be done on a half size photographic reproduction of the irrigation
plan and shall reflect the as-built data. Each station shall be shown in a different color and
control wire locations shall be indicated. The complete plan shall be laminated on each side
with a 20 mil acrylic plastic sheet. A 3/4" brass grommet shall be placed in each top
corner. The Contractor shall obtain approval of the controller chart from the Project
Manager, before proceeding with the plastic lamination.
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Provide two individually bound manuals
requirements for irrigation systems.
detailing
operation
and
maintenance
B.
Manuals shall be delivered to the Project Manager no later than 10 days prior to
completion of work.
C.
Provide descriptions of all installed materials and systems in sufficient detail to permit
maintenance personnel to understand operate and maintain the equipment.
D.
Provide the following in each manual:
1.
Index sheet, stating Irrigation contractor’s name, address, telephone number
and name of person to contact
2.
Duration of guarantee period
3.
Equipment list providing the following for each item:
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
02810-3
1.7
1.8
Manufacturer’s name
b.
Make and model number
c.
Name and address of local manufacturer’s representative
d.
Spare parts list in detail
e.
Detailed operating and maintenance instructions for major equipment
CHECKLIST
A.
Provide a signed and dated checklist and deliver to the Project Manager prior to final
review of the work.
B.
Use the following format:
1.
Plumbing permits: if none required, so note.
2.
Material approvals: approved by and date
3.
Pressure line tests: by whom and date
4.
Record drawings: received by and date
5.
Controller charts: received by and date
6.
Materials furnished: received by and date
7.
Operation and maintenance manuals: received by and date
8.
System and equipment operation instructions: received by and date
9.
Manufacturer’s warranties if required: received by and date
10.
Written guarantee: received by and date
11.
Lowering of heads in lawn areas: if incomplete, so state
WARRANTY FOR IRRIGATION SYSTEM WORK
A.
1.9
a.
The entire sprinkler irrigation system shall be warranted to be free from defects in materials
and workmanship, and installed in accordance with this Notice to Contractors and the
SSPWC. The Contractor shall be required to repair or replace any defects in material or
workmanship which may develop within one (1 ) calendar year from the date of acceptance,
ordinary wear and tear and unusual abuse or neglect excepted. Further, the Contractor
shall be required to make any necessary repairs within 24 hours of notification at no cost to
the Department. If the Contractor or his agent fail to make such repairs within the stipulated
time, the Department shall make such repairs or have repairs made by a third party and bill
the Contractor for all expenses that accrue from making such repairs.
GUARANTEE AGAINST SETTLEMENT
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
02810-4
A.
1.10
If, within one (1) calendar year from the date of acceptance, settlement occurs along
mainlines, lateral lines, at valve boxes, or other irrigation related appurtenances, and
adjustments in pipes valves and sprinkler heads are required to bring the system, sod, or
paving to the level of the permanent grades, the Contractor shall make all adjustments
without additional cost to the Department, including complete restoration of any planting,
paving, or other improvements damaged as a result of settlement.
PRODUCT HANDLING
A.
B.
Storage:
1.
Store materials at a location directed by the Project Manager
2.
Store materials in an orderly manner. Avoid interference with other construction
activities.
Protection: Contractor shall protect his work and work of others for the duration of the
contract. He shall protect pipes and fittings from direct sunlight and avoid undue
bending and any concentrated external loading. Beds on which beds are stored shall be
full lengths of pipe. Pipe or fittings that have been damaged shall not be used.
1.
It shall be the contractor’s responsibility to protect all materials from theft or
loss.
2.
Protect all materials to prevent intrusion of dirt and moisture.
3.
Protect the installed work and materials of other trades.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
2.2
2.3
Materials or equipment installed or furnished shall be new.
GENERAL PIPE
A.
Pressure supply line from point of connection through backflow prevention unit: must be
cast iron, brass, copper or other material approved by the Department .
B.
With the exception of intake and discharge connections to backflow preventer, all other
above ground installation shall be brownline UVR pvc.
C.
All threaded pipes shall be threaded by the manufacturer of the pipe.
SOLVENT WELDED PLASTIC PIPE
A.
Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe shall be used for pipe sizes up to and including 1 1/2 inch
diameter on both the discharge and supply side of control valves, (212-2.1.3). Class 315
PVC plastic pipe shall be used for pipe sizes from 2 inch up to and including 3 inch
diameter.
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
02810-5
B.
C.
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
Fittings: standard weight, Schedule 40, injection molded p.v.c. Comply with ASTM
D1784, cell classification 13454B, as manufactured by Dura Company or approved
equal.
1.
Threads (where required): injection molded type
2.
Tees and ells: side gated
Threaded nipples: standard weight, Schedule 80 with molded threads
JOINT CEMENT AND PRIMER
A.
Non-pressure plastic pipe and fittings shall be cemented using a 100% active solvent,
blue in color.
B.
Pressure plastic pipe and fittings shall be coated with a primer and then with a 100%
active solvent.
C.
Both primer and solvent shall be similar in all respects to that manufactured by Christi’s
or approved equal.
COPPER PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Pipe: Type K, hard tempered ASTM B 88
B.
Fittings: wrought copper, solder joint type in accordance with ANSI B 16.22.
C.
Joints shall be soldered with silver solder, conforming to ASTM B 206.
BRASS PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Brass pipe shall be 85% red brass, American National Standard Institute (ANSI),
Schedule 40 screwed pipe.
B.
Fittings shall be medium brass, screwed 125 pound class.
GALVANIZED PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Pipe shall be galvanized steel, American National Standard Institute (ANSI), Schedule
40 galvanized, mild steel screwed pipe.
B.
Fittings: screwed beaded malleable iron, or 125 pound cast iron, flanged.
C.
Unions (2 inches and smaller) shall be galvanized steel with brass to iron seat, minimum
300 lb. WOG, ground joint pattern.
D.
When brass piping is connected to a galvanized pipe, make connections using a
dielectric union, or dielectric flanges. Dielectric isolation must be provided between all
connections joining ferrous and non-ferrous metals.
E.
Pipe Wrapping (Protective Coatings): All buried piping shall be factory wrapped, with the
exception of field wrapping at joint conditions, as follows:
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
02810-6
1.
2.8
Underground steel piping buried directly in the soil shall be factory coated with
asphalt, wrapped with asphalt saturated felt, finished with a coat of asphalt, and
wrapped with an overwrap of 50 lb. kraft paper. Field wrapping of pipe shall not
be acceptable except joints and risers to back flow preventers hose bibs, and
the like field wrapped to 6 inches above finished grade.
ELECTRICAL AND WIRING SERVICE
A.
B.
High voltage
1.
Contractor is to coordinate with the local electrical company for connection to
electrical service and/or installation of conduit, electrical wiring, and meter
pedestal at the location shown on the drawings. Minor changes in location
caused by actual site conditions should be made at no cost to the Department.
The Project Manager shall approve all changes to the plans
2.
Electrical equipment installed outside building shall be NEMA 4 type,
waterproofed for exterior installation.
3.
All connections between electrical services and equipment shall be in rigid
galvanized electrical conduit, with conduit and wiring size as required.
4.
Electrical requirements to automatic controllers - (120 v) To be complete in
every respect to local Electrical Code, ready for use and in accordance with
manufacturer’s requirements. Provide separate power shut-off switch at panel
for each controller. All wiring in galvanized conduit and fittings from source
provided under the electrical section. No running threads accepted; use nipples.
Conduit system shall be 660 volt insulation; NEC standard annealed copper wire
and shall be minimum AWG #12 TW or RW. Protect each controller by a code
approved ground connection. Supply to meet the electrical requirements of the
irrigation controller. Use only galvanized steel fasteners in securing controllers
in position. Install new controller as detailed on drawings.
5.
All high voltage electrical work shall require separate electrical permits and
inspection.
Low Voltage
1.
Control wire: Connection between the automatic controller(s) and the remote
control valves shall be made with direct burial 14 gage, AWG-UF, 600 volt, copper
wire. Wires shall be provided in the following colors: red,yellow, blue, green,
orange, tan, purple, pink, brown, gray, and white.
2.
Control wire connections: Control wire connections shall be made with 3-M brand of
DBY or DBR Direct Burial Splice kits, or approved equal. The splice kit shall
consist of a one-piece malleable plastic bulb body with internal locking fingers,
filled with re-enterable gel sealant and a Scothlok Electrical Spring Connector.
Materials shall be as follows:
a.
Connector shall be a flame retardant PVC insulator with a steel spring and
shell within.
b.
Tube material shall be polypropylene.
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
02810-7
c.
3.
Gel material shall be hixotropic calcium organic complex.
Wire sizes and numbers of wires shall be as shown below:
CONNECTOR
Model DBY
Model DBR
2.9
The Contractor shall be responsible for connection to the 1” water meter provided
under civil work. Minor changes in location caused by actual site conditions should be
made at no cost to the Department. The Project Manager shall approve all changes to
the plans
1.
2.13
2-1/2 inches and smaller, (unless otherwise noted on Drawings): ASTM B62 brass
body, 150 pound saturated steam rated; with screwed joints; non-rising stem; screwed
bonnet, solid disc. Provide with hand-wheel.
QUICK COUPLING VALVES AND ASSEMBLIES
A.
2.12
Connections to existing mains: Contractor is to connect to an existing main, at
the location shown on drawings. Irrigation drawings are based on a review of
existing conditions and, when available, as-built irrigation drawings. Existing
conditions may differ in the field from what is shown on as-built drawings.
Therefore, Contractor is to review existing site conditions prior to any
installation. Changes in existing piping size that may require different fittings
shall be made at no additional cost to the Department.
GATE VALVES
A.
2.11
NO. AND SIZE OF WIRE 3M
Max. 4 - 12 gage US wires 3M
3 -1 4 gage US wires
WATER SERVICE
A.
2.10
COLOR
Yellow
Red Max.
Quick couplers shall be 1 inch i.p.s., two piece, brass or bronze construction equipped with
a cover, unless otherwise specified on plans. The Contractor shall provide one quick coupler
key with hose
swivel for each five quick couplers installed. Contractor shall supply a minimum of one
quick coupler key with hose swivel, (212-2.2.6) and shall be installed per details.
BACKFLOW PREVENTION UNITS
A.
Backflow preventer: designed to operate on a "reduced pressure" principle; equipped
with gate valves and field test cocks.
B.
Pressure vacuum relieves, inlet and discharge gate valves, and field test cocks.
C.
Wye strainers at backflow prevention: Units 2" and smaller shall have bronze wye
strainers with threaded end connections and a 100 mesh stainless steel monel screen.
D.
Class 312 stainless steel nuts and bolts shall be used to connect all flanged
connections.
AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
02810-8
A
Type: fully automatic operation, capable of operating the number of stations and remote
control valves indicated on Drawings.
1.
2.14
REMOTE CONTROL VALVES
A.
2.15
B.
Sprinkler shall be similar in all respects to type noted on Drawing.
Body shall be equipped with a built-in check valve.
VALVE BOXES
A.
2.18
As per Drawings
SMALL SHRUBBERY SPRINKLER HEADS
A.
2.17
All remote control valves shall be electrically operated with body of cast brass or bronze
construction,(212-2.2.4) and installed per details.
ROTARY SPRINKLER HEADS
A.
2.16
Automatic assembly shall consist of a stainless steel, vandal resistant
enclosure, stainless steel pre-drilled removable backboard, controller of same
manufacturer and model No. as called out on drawings, terminal strip, and 117
volt outlet. The 117 volt duplex box shall be provided with an on/off switch and
117 volt receptacle. All power within the housing shall be properly phased. A
prewired terminal strip shall be provided clearly indicating the proper points of
connection of all appropriate wiring (stations valves, common, master valve,
pump start, and sensing). The controller assembly shall include a limited five
year warranty.
Valve boxes shall be of Portland Cement concrete with a cast iron frame and hinged
double toggle locking cover. The inside dimensions of the box shall be 10 1/2 inches by
17 1/4 inches, Model 363 1/2 HFL by Eisel Enterprises Inc., or approved equivalent. The
cast iron cover shall be permanently embossed, "GV" for gate valve, "RCV" for remote
control valves, "QC" for quick coupler valves, MV for Master Valves, or FM for Flow
Meter. Paint is not acceptable. Contractor shall supply one (1) valve box cover key for
each five (5) valve boxes installed. Provide a minimum of two (2) cover keys, (2122.2.7).
Boxes are to be installed per details.
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE TOOLS
A.
Deliver the following items to the Department when work is completed and prior to final
acceptance of work.
1.
Two wrenches for disassembly and adjustment of each type of sprinkler head.
2.
Two keys for each automatic controller.
3.
6 quick coupler keys and matching hose swivels with globe valves.
4.
2 keys for opening valve boxes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
02810-9
3.1
UTILITY SERVICES
A.
Contractor shall connect to the 1” water meter at the location indicated on the drawings
and make any minor changes in location necessary due to actual site conditions as a
part of this contract.
1.
B.
3.2
Connections to existing mains: Contractor is to connect to an existing main, at
the location shown on drawings. Irrigation drawings are based on a review of
existing conditions and, when available, as-built irrigation drawings. Existing
conditions may differ in the field from what is shown on as-built drawings.
Therefore, Contractor is to review existing site conditions prior to any
installation. Changes in existing piping size that may require different fittings
shall be made at no additional cost to the Department.
Connect to existing electrical service. Make minor changes in location as necessary
due to actual site conditions as part of this work.
SITE REVIEWS
A.
Before any work commences; a conference shall be held with the Project Manager and
Contractor regarding general requirements of this work.
B.
Contractor’s responsibility:
1.
C.
Notify the Project Manager for the following reviews, with 48 hours minimum
notice.
a.
Pressure supply line installation and testing
b.
System layout
c.
Coverage tests
d.
Final review
2.
Provide "walkie-talkie" equipment and/or personnel to maintain communication
from review area to automatic controllers.
3.
Provide up-to-date as-built drawings at each review.
4.
In the event Contractor schedules any review and the system is not fully ready,
record drawings are not current, or required corrective work has not been
completed, the Contractor shall be responsible for reimbursing the Department
at the current hourly rate plus all travel expenses. No further reviews will be
conducted until this charge is paid.
Examine surfaces for conditions that will adversely affect execution, permanence and
quality of work.
1.
Verify that grading has been completed and the work of this section can
properly proceed.
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
02810-10
2.
3.3
Exercise extreme care in excavating and working near existing utilities.
Contractor is responsible for damages to utilities, which are caused by his
operations or neglect. Check existing utility drawings for locations.
D.
Notify the Project Manager in writing, describing unacceptable conditions.
E.
Do not proceed with work until unacceptable site conditions are corrected or existing
utilities are located.
NEW PIPELINE INSTALLATION
A.
General: when pipelines run parallel they shall be separated horizontally by a minimum
distance of 12". When pipelines cross each other they shall be separated vertically by a
minimum distance of 3". No irrigation trenching shall pass closer than eight feet of the base
of any tree. No tree root larger than 2" diameter shall be cut without approval of the Project
Manager.
B.
Cover Over Mainlines: Maintain 24 inches of cover over mainlines 3" and smaller in
diameter. Mainlines 4" and larger in diameter shall have 30" of cover over the top of the
pipe, (308-5.2). All trenching shall be per details.
C.
Cover Over Lateral Lines: Maintain 12 inches of cover over all lateral lines.
D.
Pipe Bedding, Backfill, And Densification: Pipe bedding and backfill: bedding shall surround
the pipe to one foot above the top of the pipe. Bedding shall be placed in 6 inch lifts. All
bedding shall be densified by water jetting. Water jetting shall be sufficient to thoroughly
wet bedding material around the pipe, (306-1.2.1). There shall be no rocks over 1/2" in
greatest dimension and no organic matter placed in the bedding material. Backfill shall be
the material placed above the bedding. Backfill shall be placed in one-foot lifts and densified
by water jetting. Jetting shall be continued until backfill collapses and water is forced to the
surface, (306-1.3.1). Pipe trenches thoroughly densified by water settling shall have a
minimum relative compaction of 85%. There shall be no rocks over 2" in greatest dimension
or organic matter in the backfill. Trench areas which exhibit insufficient densification shall
be subject to compaction tests as requested by the inspector or the Project Manager. All
such compaction tests shall be at the expense of the Contractor. Additional tests may be
required until the 85% minimum compaction is achieved. Finished trenches shall match
finish grades flush with adjacent finish grades. The Contractor shall be responsible for
maintaining the trenches flush and smooth until final acceptance of the project.
The maximum trench width shall be two and a half diameters of the pipe.
E.
Pipes Crossing Under Paving: Where irrigation piping crosses a vehicular roadway or other
paving having a width of less than 25 feet, a PVC Sch. 40 PVC sleeve which is a minimum
of two pipe sizes larger than the piping to pass through it, shall be jacked under the paving
at a depth of 36" minimum. Where remote control wiring crosses under paving having a
width of less than 25 feet, a 3 inch PVC Sch. 40 PVC sleeve shall be jacked under the
paving at a depth of 36" minimum. All sleeves shall extend 3' minimum beyond the edges of
paving.
Where irrigation piping crosses a vehicular roadway or other paving having a width greater
than 25 feet, a trench shall be excavated across the roadway or paving to accommodate a
Class 315 PVC sleeve a minimum of two pipe sizes larger than the piping to pass through
it, at a depth of 36" below the bottom of the paving, as measured from the top of the sleeve.
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
02810-11
Where remote control wiring crosses under paving having a width greater than 25 feet, a 3
inch Sch. 40 PVC sleeve shalt be installed at a depth of 36" below the bottom of the paving,
as measured from the top of the sleeve. The backfill of the trench shall be a 2 sack cement
slurry. The slurry shall extend from the bottom of the trench to within one inch of the bottom
of the existing paving. The trench in the existing paving shall be repaired with a like paving
material and join the existing paving both horizontally and vertically.
3.4
REMOTE CONTROL WIRING UNDER PAVING
A.
3.5
FITTINGS ON MAINLINES:
A.
3.6
Remote control wire under paving shall be placed in a 3" class 315 PVC sleeve buried at a
depth of 36. Roadways less than 25 feet in width shall have the sleeve jacked under the
roadway.
All outlets from a mainline shall be accomplished with line sized tees with an outlet of the
specified size. No saddle tees shall be permitted.
INSTALLATION OF VALVE BOXES
A.
Boxes shall be set flush with existing grade, including sloped areas, and all soil within 12
inches of the perimeter of the box shall be compacted by water settlement as indicated in
the trench repair section of this specification. Boxes are to be positioned per details.
3.7
LAYOUT OF PIPING
A.
Pipe layout as shown on irrigation plan is schematic. Contractor may route piping in the most
expedient manner consistent with the requirements set forth herein, including avoidance of tree
roots. Contractor shall adhere to As-Built requirements as shown above.
3.8
PLACEMENT OF IRRIGATION HEADS
3.9
A.
Note: Department of Recreation and Parks irrigation plans are designed, as a minimum
standard, for head-to-head coverage. Head locations shall be scaled from center of head
symbol directly from the irrigation plan. Accuracy of placement shall be within plus or
minus two feet for all rotary heads having a throw of 25 feet or greater; within plus or minus
12 inches for all head types with a throw of under 25 feet. Where heads are located
adjacent to paving, the heads shall be placed within three inches of such paving.
B.
Installation Of Irrigation Heads: Sprinkler heads in lawn areas shall be set flush with finish
grade at initial installation and protected during construction. All soil 12 inches from the
perimeter of the head shall be compacted by water jetting as indicated in this specification,
or set in sand as shown on details.
C.
Sprinkler Head Riser: All plastic sprinkler heads shall be installed on swing joint
assemblies as shown on details. Swing joint assemblies for Thompson gear driven rotary
pop-up heads shall be fabricated of Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe and fittings as
specified in details.
AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.
The foundation of the automatic controller shall be per details. Each remote control valve
shall have a separate 24 volt control wire from the automatic irrigation controller.
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
02810-12
3.10
LOW VOLTAGE WIRE CONNECTlONS
A.
3.11
Connectors shall be DBY or DBR as manufactured by 3M Corp. Control wires shall be
stripped of 1/2 inch insulation, inserted into the electrical spring connector, and the
connector twisted in a clockwise
direction until the wires are tight. Insert the completed splice into the gel-filled tube, and
check visually to confirm that the wire nut has been pushed past the fingers and is seated
in the bottom of the tube.
Position wires in wire channels and close insulator cover.
CONTROL WIRE
A.
Connection between the automatic controller(s) and the remote control valves shall be
made with direct burial 14 gage, AWG-UF,600 volt, copper wire. Wires shall be color coded
as follows:
CONTROLLER WIRE
COLOR
CONTROLLER
STATIONS
RED
YELLOW
BLUE
GREEN
ORANGE
TAN
PURPLE
PINK
BROWN
GRAY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
CONTROLLER
A
B
C
D
E
F
3.12
CONTROLLER
STATIONS
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
CONTROLLER
STATIONS
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
CONTROLLER
STATIONS
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
TAPE BUNDLE COLOR
RED
YELLOW
BLUE
GREEN
WHITE
BLACK
INSTALLATION OF IRRIGATION CONTROL WIRING
A.
Wire bundles shall be taped at 5' o.c. Lay bundles in the mainline trench. Do not tape
bundles to the mainline piping.
B.
The Contractor shall run two extra black control wires from the automatic controller to the
farthest valve on the system, or to the farthest valve at each end of the controller area, if the
farthest area extends in two directions from the controller.
C.
Each controller shall have a separate 14 gage, AWG-UF, 600 volt, WHITE common wire for
each 10 consecutive stations on each irrigation controller.
Common 1,
Common 2,
stations 1-10
stations 1 1-20
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
02810-13
Common 3,
Common 4,
3.13
3.14
D.
Each exterior controller enclosure shall have a ground rod installed if detailed on controller
installation detail.
E.
Wire shall not be taped to mainline (308-5.5). If control wires run in same trench as lateral
lines, or are dead headed, wire depth shall be maintained at 24't. For installation, see
details.
IRRIGATION SYSTEM FLUSHING AND TESTING
A.
The irrigation system shall be flushed in the presence of the Contract Administration
Construction Inspector. Flushing shall start with the valve closest to the point of connection
and proceed with each consecutive valve toward the valve farthest from the point of
connection. Each lateral system shall have each riser capped during the flushing
commencing with the riser closest to the valve and proceeding to the farthest riser. After the
entire irrigation system has been flushed the system shall be pressure tested in
accordance with section 308-5.6 of the SSPWC.
B.
The irrigation system mainlines shall be pressure tested following the flushing of the
complete system. The mainlines shall be tested for 24 hours at 125 p.s.i. with all control
valves in place and closed. During the test, the Contractor shall provide pressure gauges
downstream from the backflow device and upstream from the farthest remote control valve in
the system. Air pressure testing of the irrigation system is acceptable if approved by the
Project Manager.
STEEL PIPELINE
A.
3.15
Prior to the application of the P.V.C. solvent cement, prepare all surfaces to be solvent
welded with tetrahydrofuran primer tinted purple. Teflon tape shall be used on all plastic
male pipe threads, (3085.2.3).
BACKFLOW DEVICE INSTALLATION AND CERTIFICATION
A.
3.17
Joints shall be made with Teflon tape applied to the male threads only, (308-5.2.2).
PLASTIC PIPELINE-SOLVENT WELDED OR THREADED ENDS
A.
3.16
stations 21-30
stations 31-40
The Contractor shall obtain certification of the backflow device and submit two copies of the
certification to the Project Manager at the Operational Final. The backflow certification shall
be made on the County Health Department standard form and filed with the County Health
Department, Cross Connection Section, Room 150, 2525 Corporate Place, Monterey Park,
CA, 91754. The contractor shall paint all backflow prevention devices above ground with two
coats of forest green enamel. Mask all identification tags prior to painting, (308-5.3). After
certification remove all test cocks, replace with threaded brass plugs, and deliver test
cocks to Project Manager.
EXISTING TREES
A.
Where it is necessary to excavate adjacent to existing trees, use all possible care to
avoid injury to trees and tree roots. Excavation in areas where 2 inch and larger roots
occur shall be done by hand. Roots 2 inches and larger in diameter, except directly in
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
02810-14
the path of pipe or conduit, shall be tunneled under and shall be heavily wrapped in
burlap, to prevent scarring or excessive drying. Where a ditching machine is run close to
trees having roots smaller than 2 inches in diameter, the wall of the trench adjacent to
the tree shall be hand trimmed, making clean cuts through. Roots 1 inch and larger in
diameter shall be painted with two coats of Tree Seal, or equal. Trenches adjacent to
trees would be closed within 24 hours. Where this is not possible, the side of the trench
adjacent to the tree shall be kept shaded with burlap or canvas.
3.18
3.19
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A.
Train the Department’s Maintenance personnel in proper operation of all major
equipment, including recommended winterization procedures.
B.
Provide this training at the Project Manager’s convenience.
C.
Submit written evi dence that training has been successfully completed.
CLEANUP
Upon completion of the work, restore ground surfaces to required elevations and remove excess
materials, debris and equipment from the site to satisfaction of Project Manager
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
02810-15
SECTION 02834
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Furnish and install polyvinyl chloride (PVC) coated chain link fencing as indicated on the
drawings and specified.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1
1.3
1.
Product data in the form of manufacturer's technical data, specifications, and
installation instructions for fence and gate posts, fabric, gates, and accessories.
2.
Samples for selection of PVC color in form of manufacturer's color charts or 6inch lengths of actual fabric wire showing colors available.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain chain link fences and gates as complete units,
including necessary erection accessories, fittings, and fastenings from a single source or
manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCT
2.1
FABRIC
A.
Small Mesh Fence: Comply with ASTM F573, 1-inch-mesh, PVC finish, 12-gauge
(0.113-inch-diameter) steel chain-link fabric, zinc-coated after weaving with minimum 1.2oz. zinc per sq. ft. of uncoated wire surface and knuckling at each selvage.
B.
Selvage: Fabric shall be knuckled at both selvages.
C.
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Finish: Comply with ASTM F668, with core wire diameter
(gage) measured prior to application of PVC coating with not less than 0.40 oz. zinc per
sq. ft. of uncoated surface on 6 gage wire and not less than 0.30 oz. zinc per sq. ft. of
uncoated surface on 9 to 12 gage wire. Color as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's standard colors available.
1.
2.2
Class 1, 0.015- to 0.025-inch-thick PVC coating extruded over zinc-coated steel
core wire.
FRAMING
A.
Strength requirements for posts and rails conforming to ASTM F669.
B.
Pipe shall be straight, true to section, material, and sizes specified, and shall conform to
the following weights per foot:
NPS in
Outside Diameter
02834-1
inches
1-1/4
C.
2.3
2.4
(OD) in inches
1.660
Steel Framework, General: Posts, rails, braces, and gate frames.
1.
Type I Pipe: Hot-dipped galvanized steel pipe conforming to ASTM F1083, plain
ends, standard weight (schedule 40) with not less than 1.8 oz. zinc per sq. ft. of
surface area coated.
2.
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Finish: Provide framework, fittings, and accessories
with manufacturer's standard polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic resin finish
thermally bonded and adhered to a cured primer applied over zinc-coated steel,
not less than 10 mils (0.010-inch) thick. Color to match chain link fabric.
D.
Gate Posts: Furnish posts for supporting single gate leaf, or one leaf of a double gate
installation, not less than 4" od.
E.
Top Rail: Manufacturer's longest lengths, with expansion-type couplings, approximately
6 inches long, for each joint. Provi de means for attaching top rail securely to each gate.
FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
A.
Material: Comply with ASTM F626, PVC coated.
B.
Tension Wire: 0.177-inch-diameter, PVC coated.
C.
Tie Wires: 12-gage (0.106-inch diameter) galvanized steel with a PVC coating to match
fabric coating material.
D.
Post Brace Assembly: Manufacturer's standard adjustable brace at end and gate posts
and at both sides of corner and pull posts, with horizontal brace located at midheight of
fabric. Use same material as top rail for brace, and truss to line posts with 3/8-inchdiameter rod and adjustable tightener. Provide manufacturers PVC coated materials.
E.
Tension or Stretcher Bars: PVC coated with minimum length 2 inches less than full
height of fabric, minimum cross-section of 3/16 inch by 3/4 inch.
F.
Tension and Brace Bands: Minimum 3/4-inch-wide PVC coated steel.
G.
Concrete: Provide concrete consisting of Portland cement, ASTM C150, aggregates
ASTM C33, and clean water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day
compressive strength of 2500 psi. Use at least 4 sacks of cement per cu. yd., 1-inch
maximum size aggregate, maximum 3-inch slump, and 2 to 4% entrained air.
GATES
A.
Fabricate perimeter frames of gates from metal and finish to match fence framework.
Provide horizontal and vertical members to ensure proper gate operation and attachment
of fabric, hardware, and accessories.
1.
B.
Install diagonal cross-bracing consisting of 3/8-inch-diameter adjustable-length
truss rods on gates to ensure frame rigidity without sag or twist.
Swing Gates: Comply with ASTM F900, of PVC coated materials.
02834-2
C.
1.
Hinges: Size and material to suit gate size, non-lift-off type, offset to permit 180degree gate opening. Provide 1-1/2 pair of hinges for each gate leaf.
2.
Latch: Forked type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from either side of
gate, with padlock eye.
3.
Keeper: Provide keeper for vehicle gates, which automatically engages gate leaf
and holds it in open position until manually released.
4.
Gate Stops: Provide gate stops for double gates, consisting of mushroom-type
flush plate with anchors, set in concrete, and designed to engage center drop rod
or plunger bar. Include locking device and padlock eyes as integral part of latch,
permitting both gate leaves to be locked with single padlock.
Sliding Gates: Comply with ASTM F1184.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install fencing and gates in compliance with ASTM F567.
B.
Install gates plumb, level, and secure for full opening without interference. Install groundset items in concrete for anchorage.
C.
Adjust hardware for smooth operation.
02834-3
SECTION 02836
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Furnish and install the sliding driveway gate as indicated on the drawings and specified.
SUBMITTALS
The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01340.
A.
Manufacturer's Catalog Data
B.
Shop Drawings
C.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Manufacturer's printed instructions installation of
components and assemblies.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
DESIGN
A.
Provide “Talis Design” of the “Orsogril System” by Ametco Manufacturing Corp., or equal.
B.
Main bars shall be formed for 80% direct visual screening, and shall be comprised 131/32” by 1/16” at 4-7/8” centers, with round cross 5/32” diameter at 5-7/32” centers
STEEL PLATES, SHAPES, AND BARS
A.
2.3
HOT-ROLLED CARBON STEEL BARS AND BAR-SIZE SHAPES
A.
2.4
2.5
Plates, shapes, and bars shall conform to ASTM A36.
Bars and bar sizes shall conform to ASTM A575, Grade M1020.
FASTENINGS AND ANCHORAGE MATERIALS
A.
Anchorage devices shall be expansion shields conforming to FS FF-S-325, Group, Type,
and Class as suitable for the construction involved.
B.
Machine screws shall be carbon steel, cross-recess drive, flat-head, conforming to FS
FF-S-92, Type III.
FABRICATION
A.
Front Wheel: Provide not less than 6-inch or 8-inch diameter "V" grooved steel wheel
running on 3/4-inch x 3/4-inch, or 1-1/2-inch x 1-1/2-inch steel angle and plate assembly,
with anchors for anchorage to concrete pad. Fabricate wheel box using 1/4-inch bent
steel plate and weld it to sliding gate frame.
B.
Rear Wheels: Provide 2 flanged steel wheels, one located near bottom, the other near
top of gate frame in vertical alignment, complete with lubricating fittings.
02836-1
2.6
C.
Wheel Shafts: Wheel shafts shall be of tool steel, threaded as necessary for nuts and
suitable size.
D.
Tracks: Steel channel for flanged steel wheels, with suitable fasteners, and with end
stops.
E.
Locking Device: Equip each gate with a heavy -duty device with provisions for
padlocking.
F.
Gate Pulls: Provide bent rod gate pulls, weld to each side of leading vertical member of
each gate frame assembly.
WORKMANSHIP
A.
2.7
Joints shall be milled to a close fit. Corner joints shall be coped or mitered, well-formed,
and in true alignment. Joints exposed to the weather shall be formed and fabricated to
exclude water. Exposed surfaces shall have a smooth finish and sharp, well-defined
lines and arrises.
GALVANIZING
A.
Galvanizing of iron and steel hardware shall be in accordance with ASTM A153.
Galvanizing of steel shapes, plates, bars, and strip, 1/8-inch thick and heavier, shall be in
accordance with ASTM A123. Galvanizing of assembled steel products shall be in
accordance with ASTM A123.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Anchorage devices, anchor bolts, and items having integral anchors which are to be
embedded in cast-in-place concrete shall be delivered in time to be installed before the
start of concrete operations.
B.
Install sliding gates and operating hardware as recommended by the manufacturer.
C.
Anchors shall be provided for securing frames into adjoining concrete.
D.
Tracks: Securely set bottom tracks in level and parallel position with adjustable clamp on
wheel stops at each end of each track.
E.
Properly hang on tracks and adjust for smooth and trouble-free operation; to be centered
on and roll on its track for the full length of front wheel run.
F.
Gates shall operate freely without excessive looseness.
02836-2
SECTION 02879
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Furnish and install movable decorative trash receptacles as indicated on the drawings
and specified.
Submit product data movable decorative trash receptacles as indicated on the drawings.
Deliver receptacles to project site in original factory wrappings and clearly labeled with identification of
manufacturer, and brand name. Store receptacles in undamaged containers, inside protected from
weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and blocked off ground.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MOVABLE TRASH RECEPTACLES
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Sydney Trash Receptacle"
by Canterbury International, or equal.
B.
Trash receptacles shall be cylindrical, free standing steel rod barrel bodied with fiberglass
or aluminum top, side loading with removable stand urn top, oval trash receptor hole and
removable internal liner. Equip unit with removable ash urn. Provide units with absolute
segregation of ash and trash compartments, Class A rated materials, and stabilization of
unit to prevent tipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install movable trash receptacles after other finishing operations, including painting, have
been completed.
B.
Install movable trash receptacles complying with manufacturer's printed instruction, using
fasteners as recommended by manufacturer as appropriate to the location. Clean and
polish exposed surfaces, using materials and methods recommended by the
manufacturer.
C.
Protect movable trash receptacles against damage during remainder of construction
period, complying with manufacturer's directions.
02879-1
SECTION 02900
LANDSCAPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
PROVISIONS AND DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.2
Apply to the work of this section
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.3
Work includes:
1.
Landscape Finish Grading
2.
Soil Amending and Preparation
3.
Planting
4.
Tree Supports
5.
Watering
6.
Mulch and Top Dressing
7.
Weed and Fungus Control
8.
Insect Control
9.
Maintenance
INTENT OF SPECIFICATIONS
A.
It is the Intent of these Specifications to describe the materials and methods required for
the installation of landscape work free from defects in materials and workmanship.
Notwithstanding the fact that these Specifications may be deficient in setting forth a
complete detailed description of the work to be performed, it shall be the responsibility of
the successful bidder to install the landscape work fully and completely to the satisfaction
of the Owner or the Owner's Representative.
B.
The Contractor is responsible for all work described in this section unless specifically noted
as the responsibility of another.
C.
In the event of any discrepancies between the plans and the Specifications, the Owner's
Representative shall be notified of such discrepancies in writing and a decision given in
such time so as not to hinder progress of the work.
D.
Definitions as used herein are:
1.
Owner and Owner's Representative- Any agent authorized and designated by the
Owner for overseeing the work for the Project or any of its phases or parts.
LANDSCAPING
02900-1
2.
Work- Refers to work at the site of the project and that is normally done at the
location of the project, and includes the performance of all labor and the furnishing
of all plants, materials, supplies, equipment and other facilities and items
necessary or proper for or incidental to the carrying out and completion of this
contract. The term "work" shall also mean any and all obligations undertaken by
the Contractor pursuant to the contract documents, and shall include (in addition to
the above), but not necessarily be limited to, supplies, plant resources, tools,
transportation, loading and unloading, personnel and supervision thereof, insurance
bonds, cost of permits, fees,
taxes, etc., and also that which is produced,
constructed or built pursuant to the contract documents.
3.
Extra Work-Term "extra work" as used herein refers to and includes work required
by the Owner and Owner's Representative, which in the judgment of the Owner's
Representative, involves changes in or additions to that required by the drawings,
specifications and addenda in their present form.
1.5
NOT USED
1.6
PROTECTION
1.7
A.
Provide and be responsible for protection of work in this Section until completion and final
acceptance of project by Owner and Owner's Representative. Repair or replace all
damaged or defective work to original specified condition at no additional cost. Contractor
shall provide necessary protection for the finished surface material adjacent to his work.
B.
Take all necessary precautionary measures for the safety of employees involved in the work
and comply with all applicable provisions of Federal and State safety laws and building
codes to prevent accidents or injury on or about the premises where the work is being
performed.
C.
Protect and guard all excavations and other work against danger to life, limb and property in
conformance with all applicable State Codes.
COORDINATION AND COOPERATION
A.
1.8
Work shall be fully coordinated with other contractors and trades to assure the proper
sequence, limits, methods and time of performance. The Contractor shall arrange his work
so as to impose a minimum of hardship on the present operation of the facilities and the
performance of the work of other trades or contractors on the premises.
CLEAN-UP AND STORAGE
A.
B.
Keep the work area and the adjacent areas affected free and clear of all debris caused by
the work of this section. During and upon completion of work herein specified, remove all
debris, unused materials and equipment related to the work of this section, and leave work
in a clean acceptable condition.
Contractor shall arrange location for material and equipment storage on-site within the limits
of work as indicated on the drawings. Location shall be where it will not interfere with other
work under separate contracts. Contractor shall be responsible for all materials and
equipment stored on the site.
LANDSCAPING
02900-2
1.9
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
The Contractor shall examine the site of work, determine and verify all existing conditions
under which he will be obligated to operate in performing the work.
B.
Written dimensions shall have precedence over scaled dimensions and conditions shown
on the drawings. When written dimensions conflict with existing conditions, Owner's
Representative shall be notified and shall sign and approve resolution of conflict before
proceeding with any work.
C.
The Contractor shall furnish adequate equipment, materials, and supplies reasonably
necessary to properly perform the Work in the best and soundest way in accordance with
the Contract Documents.
D.
Location of Underground Utilities: Verify locations of underground utilities prior to the
installation of trees. If any discrepancies occur between plans and site conditions, Owner's
Representative shall be notified and shall sign and approve resolution of conflict before
proceeding.
E.
Before starting any part of the work, the Contractor and all Subcontractors shall be licensed
in accordance with applicable laws, orders, regulations and rules.
1.10
NOT USED
1.11
SUPERINTENDENT
A.
1.12
Contractor shall designate a Superintendent fluent in the English language to remain on site
full time during the progress of the work. Superintendent to be satisfactory to the Owner's
Representative. The Superintendent shall not be changed except with the consent of the
Owner's Representative.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Contractor to provide written submittals to Owner's Representative prior to beginning of
landscape installation.
1.
Written certification that sub-surface drainage system has been tested and is
operating properly.
2.
Written certification that irrigation system has been tested and is operating
properly.
3.
Written certification that all plant material has been reviewed in nurseries one
month after award of bid and prior to delivery to site.
4.
Soil Analysis: Contractor to provide soil tests analysis. Prior to the completion of
the rough grading on the site, the Contractor shall take three (3) samples of the soil
in locations designated by the Owner's Representative. These samples shall be
sent to Wallace Laboratories, El Segundo, Ca. 310 615-0116, to identify soil
characteristics and recommend fertilizers, amendments and installation
LANDSCAPING
02900-3
procedures. The results of these tests shall be sent to the Owner's Representative
for approval prior to beginning work.
5.
B.
C.
a.
If conditions of existing soil are found which would warrant a change being
made to the soil amendments, then the Contractor shall be notified of
those changes by
the Owner's Representative prior to any soil
amending.
b.
Notification of soil preparation approval or disapproval shall be given to the
Contractor within five (5) working days after the receipt of the test results.
c.
Notification of approval warrants notification to proceed with seeding and
plant installation.
d.
Notification of disapproval requires the Contractor to correct deficiencies in
the
soil preparation to render it to conformance with the specifications.
Corrections shall be made prior to any planting. Contractor shall notify the
Owner's Representative in writing when the deficiencies have been
corrected in the form of an updated soil analysis.
e.
The recommendations of the agronomy report shall take precedence over
the quantities of soil amendments and material to be mixed in the backfill
mix, only where they exceed the minimum requirements specified herein.
Certificates: Prior to job acceptance written certifications shall be submitted by the
Contractor to the Owner and Owner's Representative for the following:
a.
Quantity of commercial fertilizer or organic fertilizer.
b.
Quantity of sod.
c.
Quantity of soil amendments.
d.
Quantity of pesticide.
e.
Quantity of herbicide.
f.
Quantity of hydromulch material and binder
g.
Quantity of soil sulfer
h.
Quantity of agricultural gypsum
All manufactured and/or processed items or materials shall be installed in accordance with
the methods, techniques and specifications as set forth by each representative
manufacturer. All pertinent descriptive literature issued by any of these manufacturer’s
shall be submitted and shall become a part of these specifications.
Within 20 days after award of contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner's
Representative for approval, three (3) copies of a complete material list, together with
manufacturers' name and numbers covering all material to be furnished under this contract.
Contractor shall also furnish five (5) copies of descriptive literature with (catalog cuts)
LANDSCAPING
02900-4
marked with highlighter pen on all items to be used on this project. No work shall
commence before receipt of approved material list and descriptive material.
D.
1.13
Contractor to provide one photograph of each tree specified per prior to commencing
landscape installation.
GUARANTEE
A.
The Contractor shall provide the Owner with a written guarantee covering the following:
1.
For plant material provided under this contract the Contractor shall guarantee that
all plant material be healthy and true to name and variety. Contractor shall
guarantee against improper handling, improper installation, and improper protection
and maintenance during contract maintenance period, and for the time periods
commencing from the end of the maintenance period as follows:
a.
One (1) year for all 15 gallon can, 24" box and larger size plants.
b.
Six (6) months for all 5 gallon and 1 gallon size plants.
c.
Three (3) months for all ground cover plants
d.
One (1) month for annual color.
All plant material noted as pre-tagged on the plant material list (nursery identified)
are covered under the above guarantees.
2.
All replacement plant materials shall also be governed by this guarantee with the
exception of commencement time, which shall be the date of their installation.
3.
At the end of the 90 day maintenance period the Contractor and Owner's
Representative shall meet on the site to review the project and state of the
landscape. Any discrepancies between the landscape plans and specifications to
the actual installation shall be reviewed and documented in writing at this meeting.
During the maintenance and guarantee periods the Owner's Representative shall
notify the contractor in writing of any problems/disease, etc., which may occur to
the plant material.
4.
Any plant material that is unhealthy, dead, or the design value of the plant, in the
opinion of the Owner's Representative, has been so injured or damaged as to
render it unsuitable for the purpose intended, shall be replaced immediately by the
Contractor at no cost to the Owner. The removal of plant material, additional
fertilizer and topsoil necessary for the replacement, all labor, and correction of any
damage to the adjacent areas incurred by the Contractor during replacement shall
be at the Contractor's expense.
5.
At the conclusion of the 90 day maintenance period a date for the termination of
the one year guarantee for the trees will be mutually established by the Contractor,
Owner and Owner's Representative. The Owner and Owner's representative, and
Contractor will meet at the site at the pre-arranged termination date of the
guarantee period in order to determine whether the trees meet the criteria
established by the guarantee.
LANDSCAPING
02900-5
B.
1.14
6.
Soil compaction shall be guaranteed for one (1) year against improper compaction,
excessive settling, and rapid decomposition of soil.
7.
Contractor shall not be responsible under the above guarantees for damage arising
from:
a.
Acts of God or vandalism;
b.
Negligence or inadequate maintenance by the Owner after the end of plant
maintenance period;
c.
The prolonged absence of running water at the project premises;
d.
Lack of access to the project premises;
e.
Watering or other well-meaning care of any client employees;
f.
Accidental or malicious damage by employees, cleaning crews or other
personnel to either plants or containers;
g.
Introduction of any liquids into the plant's soil such as cleaning chemicals,
alcohol or other fluids, or the use of toxic gases such as strong ammonia
from cleaning and stripping.
Defective Work
1.
All work and/or materials which are determined by the Owner's Representative to
be defective or deficient in quality or workmanship shall be remedied or removed
and replaced by Contractor in manner reasonably satisfactory without expense to
the Owner.
2.
The Contractor shall bear all expenses and shall make good all work of other
contractors which has been destroyed or damaged by removal or replacement of
defective landscape work.
3.
Neither final acceptance of the Work, nor payment therefore, nor any provision in
Contract Documents shall relieve the contractor of responsibility for defective or
deficient materials or workmanship, unless otherwise expressly specified.
OBSERVATIONS
A.
Materials
1.
All plant material shall be located at nurseries within one (1) month after awarding
of contract. Contractor shall arrange to have material maintained during
construction process until job is ready for installation. All plant material will be
periodically inspected prior to installation period. Contract shall include in the bid
deposits required by nurseries to hold and maintain plants prior to delivery. Such
deposits must be made within 35 days of awarding of contract.
LANDSCAPING
02900-6
B.
2.
Plant material identified as tagged at specific nurseries in the remarks column of
the material list has been pre-approved by Owner's Representative. No alternates
are acceptable unless written approval has been received by the Owner's
Representative. All tagged materials are covered in the above guaranteed clauses.
3.
If during the holding period prior to delivery to site plants are found not conforming
to specifications, they will be rejected and replaced by approved specimens.
4.
Plant material shall be properly acclimatized to site climate and conditions before
delivering to the site.
5.
Upon delivery of material to site:
All plant material shall be observed and approved by the Owner's
Representative for quality, size and variety prior to installation. Such
approval shall not impair the right of observation and rejection during the
progress of the work for size and condition of rootball, latent defects,
diseases or injuries.
b.
Provide tags or labels on five or 5% of each variety of plants (whichever is
greatest) which identify genus, species, and (if applicable) variety by
proper botanical name.
c.
All rejected plant material shall be removed from site within two (2) working
days.
Workmanship: Observation of site at critical stages of work.
1.
C.
a.
Owner's Representative shall observe and approve the following conditions prior to
preceding:
a.
Soil Testing Point of Locations
b.
Finish Grading
c.
Location of Drains
d.
Header Installation
e.
Location of Plant Material
Material and Workmanship
1.
Prior to commencement of 90 day maintenance period.
a.
Owner's Representative shall observe work at completion of all
construction and installation work required by the contract prior to
commencement of the plant establishment period.
b.
Contractor shall provide a written request for observation received by the
Owner's Representative seven (7) days prior to inspection date. This
LANDSCAPING
02900-7
observation shall be made only after the approval of the Owner's
Representative.
1.15
PAYMENT FOR ADDITIONAL OBSERVATIONS
A.
Any additional observations of the work required by the Owner because of non-compliance
with these Contract Documents shall be paid to Owner by the Contractor at the Owner's
Representative's current hourly fee rates for such observations. Any additional observations
of the work required by the Landscape Architect because of non-compliance with these
Contract Documents shall be paid to the Landscape Architect by the Contractor at the
Landscape Architect's current hourly fee rates for such observations. Charges incurred by
any additional analysis required shall be paid by the Contractor.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
A.
Refer to plans for plant list. Plant list is for guide only. Quantities, sizes and types of plant
material shall be determined by plan review.
B.
On planting plan sheet(s) each circular symbol or hatched area represents a plant or
planting, or seeding whether or not each symbol is specifically noted. Contractor shall
determine the plant type and size each symbol represents by using the following
guidelines:
See legend on plan sheet.
2.
Match symbol with like symbol which is noted.
3.
If a plant symbol is part of a group of symbols, see noting for the group.
4.
If questions arise concerning identification of the plant type and size symbol,
contact the Owner's Representative for verification.
C.
For clarity of drawing, ground cover symbols are not shown on planting plan sheets in areas
covered by shrub symbols. The ground cover indicated adjacent to the shrub symbols shall
be planted to within 1' 0" of the wooded base of each shrub as planted.
D.
All Manufactured and/or Processed Items or Materials: All materials shall be installed in
accordance with the methods, techniques and specifications as set forth by each
representative manufacturer. All pertinent descriptive literature issued by any of these
manufacturers shall become a part of these specifications.
MATERIALS
A.
2.3
1.
All materials shall be new and of size and type as called out on the drawings. All materials
of like-kind shall be of one manufacturer.
SOIL
LANDSCAPING
02900-8
A.
The Contractor shall verify the amounts of soil, where required, by plan check and site
observation. The Contractor shall provide adequate amounts of specified soils to attain
grades, compaction, as shown and/or noted on drawings.
B.
Fill and Backfill: Fill and backfill soil shall contain no more than twenty percent (20%) clay
(expandable material) and have a pH range between 6.5 and 7.5. Mix shall be free of
debris, any noxious weeds, ingredients or objects that are detrimental to healthy plant
growth.
Prepared backfill mix consists of:
On site Topsoil
6 parts by volume
Wood Shavings
4 parts by volume
Soil Conditioner/Fertilizer
17 lb per cubic yard of mix
Agricultural Gypsum
10 lb. Per cubic yard of mix
2.4
C.
Topsoil: All topsoil to be fertile, friable, natural top-loam free from alkali, noxious weed
seed, admixtures of clay, sub-soil, rocks larger than 3/4" diameter, sticks, debris,
construction waste or other foreign matter that would be detrimental to healthy plant growth.
Total pore space content on a volume/volume basis shall be at least 15% when moisture is
present at field capacity. Soil shall have a field capacity of at least 15 percent by weight.
Top soil shall not be used for planting operations while in muddy condition.
D.
Imported Soil for On-Grade Landscape Finish Grading: All imported soil to be topsoil as
specified above. In order to insure conformance, samples of the import soil shall be
submitted to a soils laboratory for analysis prior to installation. Contractor shall submit soil
test results to Owner's Representative.
FERTILIZER AND SOIL AMENDMENTS - SOIL PREPARATION
A.
The following organic soil amendments and fertilizer are a minimum requirement and to be
used for initial pricing. Specific amendments and fertilizer specifications will be made after
soil samples are tested by the Contractor as described in these specifications.
B.
All materials shall be of standard, approved and first-grade quality and shall be in prime
condition when installed and accepted. Any commercially processed or packaged material
shall be delivered to the site in the original unopened container bearing the manufacturer's
guaranteed analysis.
C.
Organic Soil Amendment for On-Grade Planting Areas:
1.
D.
0" to 1/4" ground bark that has been stabilized with nitrogen, iron, and a wetting
agent with a pH of 5.5 to 6.0 and salinity of 1.75.
Inorganic Soil Amenders:
1.
2.
Calcium Carbonate Lime: Standard Agricultural type.
Dolomite Lime: Standard Agricultural type.
3.
Potassium Nitrate.
4.
Single super phosphate.
LANDSCAPING
02900-9
E.
F.
2.5
Iron Sulfate: Ground ferrous sulfate containing not less than 18.5% iron expressed
as metallic.
6.
Soil Sulphur: Standard Agricultural type.
7.
Gypsum: Standard Agricultural type.
Fertilizers:
1.
Controlled release type with coated and uncoated prills formulated as 16-7-12 (+2%
iron), or equal (no known equal).
2.
Planting tablets of 20-10-5 analysis, 21 grams; Agriform 20-10-5, or equal, (no
known equal).
Activated Charcoal: Gro-safe or equal
MULCH AND TOP DRESSING
A.
2.6
5.
Nitrogen stabilized fir or pine shavings. Shavings shall be of shredded fir or pine particles
containing 0.75% nitrogen and 0.1 to 0.15% iron. Particles shall be composted, leached
and aged for a minimum of ten to twelve months and shall have a pH factor between 4.0 and
4.5. Mulch shall contain no Eucalyptus.
PLANTS, CONTAINER GROWN AND GROUND COVER PLANTS
A.
Container Grown Plants: Measurements of plants where shown on Plant List shall be as
indicated and where not shown shall be of uniform and normal size equal to local nursery
standards of like container size and plant type. Plants shall have a habit of growth normal
to the species. They shall be sound, healthy, vigorous and free form insect pests, plant
disease, sun scalds, fresh abrasions and disfigurements as determined by the Owner's
Representative. Tree trunks shall be sturdy and well "hardened off". All plants shall have
normally well developed branch systems, and vigorous and fibrous root systems which are
neither root nor pot bound. Any plant with root systems abnormally twisted or knotted will
not be accepted. Root systems shall have developed so that the root mass will retain its
shape and hold together when removed from the container.
B.
All plants shall conform to the State of California Grading Code of Nursery Stock or
equivalent and shall be Number 1 Grade.
C.
All plants shall conform to quantity and quality standards as set forth in USDA Standard for
Nursery Stock, Publication No. 260.1.
D.
All plants shall be grown in nurseries observed by the State of California Department of
Agriculture.
E.
Ground Cover Plants: Rooted cuttings or seedlings shall have been grown in flats and
remain in those flats until planting. Plant roots shall be well developed, but not so
excessive that they do not separate without breaking when plants are removed from flats.
Plant roots shall be kept moist at all times while in flats.
2.7
NOT USED.
LANDSCAPING
02900-10
2.8
STAKING MATERIALS:
A.
2.9
2.10
GUYING MATERIALS:
A.
Guy wires shall be of pliable, zinc-coated steel of No. 10 gauge.
B.
Anchors (deadman) for holding guy wires shall be of 4 inches x 4 inches solid treated
lumber, 1-foot-6 inches in length.
C.
PVC for covering wire shall be 1/2” diameter and new.
D.
Flags, to be attached to guys, shall be of surgical tubing, 1/8 inch diameter and 4 feet long,
of uniform thickness.
WATER
A.
2.11
2.12
A.
No material or method shall affect the landscape planting and must conform to Federal,
State and Local regulations.
B.
Application: The applicator of all weed control materials shall be licensed by the State of
California as a Pest Control Operator and a Pest Control Advisor in addition to and
subcontractor licenses that are required.
C.
Submittals: Prior to the installation of any chemical weed control materials, the Pest
Control Advisor shall submit to the Owner's Representative a list of the weed control
materials and quantities per acre intended for use in controlling the weed types prevalent
and expected on the site. Pest Control Advisor shall furnish data to demonstrate the
compatibility of the weed control materials and methods with the intended planting and
seed varieties.
INSECT CONTROL
Provide insecticides for control of all harmful insects as is necessary to protect all plant
materials and as approved by a licensed Pest Control Advisor. Submit all types for approval
by the Owner's Representative prior to application.
ROOT BARRIERS
A.
2.14
Domestic, potable water or reclaimed water from sources on site.
WEED AND FUNGUS CONTROL
A.
2.13
Tree Staking: Stakes shall be pin.The Reddy Stake System screw in auger type steel
stake with adjustable height "T"-bar, UV-resistant vinyl tubing, cable ties, anti-rotational tab
and as manufactured by Screw Tight Post Division, 209 634-7791, no known equal. Sizes
shall be per manufacturer's specifications.
Biological Root Control Device per landscape details.
TREE STAND PIPES:
LANDSCAPING
02900-11
A.
Tree stand pipes shall be 4 inches rigid, perforated PVC pipe wrapped with filter fabric and
placed upright in augured hole surrounded with gravel; one per tree. Keep stand pipe free of
gravel to facilitate monitoring of water level at bottom of pit and cover with black plastic.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Verification of site conditions. See Section 1.09.
LANDSCAPE GRADING
A.
Landscape Fine Grading: All landscape areas shall be graded within approximately 1/10
(0.10) feet of grades indicated on drawings. Or finish grades established after existing
grades have been shot by contractor per plan instructions. If additional soil is necessary to
bring grade to proper elevations the Contractor shall arrange with the Owner for installation
of imported soil based on a per cu. yard cost prior to installation.
1.
Under this section all soil shall be brought to grades as indicated on drawings,
importing soil as necessary and anticipating the installation of soil amenders and
settling and/or compaction. Imported soil shall be compacted to a minimum of
80% and a maximum of 85% prior to soil preparation. (The soil shall not be worked
when the moisture content is so great that excessive compaction will occur nor
when it is so dry that clods will not break readily) Water shall be applied, if
necessary, to provide ideal moisture for filling and for planting as herein specified.
2.
Finish grades not specifically indicated on drawings shall be governed as follows:
a.
For turf areas, 1" below adjacent paving, curb and mowing strips.
b.
For shrubs and groundcover areas, 1 1/2" below adjacent paving or as
shown on drawings, curbs, and mowing strips.
c.
B.
(1.)
All areas except lawn: Make entire area smooth and even to finish
grade. Cultivate all areas so that there are no humps or
hollows, so that areas drain as indicated. Grade to allow free flow
of surface water to drainage devices without it puddling or ponding.
Cultivate entire planting area to a depth of 6" minimum and remove
all rock in excess of 3/4" in diameter, rubble, construction material
and waste and any other material.
(2.)
All lawn areas: Areas to receive lawn shall be cultivated to a
depth of 6" minimum in two directions and all rock and debris in
excess of 1" diameter shall be removed from the site. All flow
lines, designated or not, shall be graded and maintained, to allow
free flow of surface water.
Finish grade of soil in planters to be no more than 3” from top edge of
planter after compaction.
Backfill, Imported Fill or Artificial Soil and Gravel: Prior to the installation of any imported
fill, backfill, gravel fill or subbase, required under the work of this section, the Contractor
LANDSCAPING
02900-12
shall
observe the integrity of all water-proofing and damp-proofing membranes which
occur over, on or against any construction which said material is to be installed. Contractor
is to correct any defects which might affect the performance of the above membranes prior
to proceeding with any work.
3.3
C.
Topsoil: Import additional topsoil only as required to bring planting area up to finish grade.
Topsoil shall be imported by the Contractor and shall be of the quality specified herein. Soil
shall be spread and cultivated so that no overt settling takes place at any time.
D.
Remove all stumps, roots and stones larger than 3/4 in diameter and vegetative growth not
shown to remain.
E.
All soil polluted by gasoline, oil, plaster, construction debris, or other substances which
would render it unsuitable for a proper plant growth medium shall be removed from the
premises whether or not such pollution occurs or exists prior to or during the contract
period. In the event that such material is placed by others performing under this contract,
the Contractor shall request its removal by the party responsible. If this is not possible,
Contractor shall remove such material and backcharge the party for costs incurred.
F.
Dispose of buried debris found upon any excavation to any convenient dump or offsite
location at no additional expense to Owner.
SOIL PREPARATION
A.
Verify proper scheduling of soil amending based on a soil testing report recommendations.
Pending soil test results, the soil shall be amended as itemized.
B.
All planting areas except slopes steeper than 4;1 shall be thoroughly ripped to a depth of
12", using a ripper with teeth no wider than 12"o.c. The ripping shall be performed in two
directions if site conditions permit.
C.
1.
Prior to ripping soil remove all vegetation not to remain, stumps, roots, rocks,
stones larger than 1" in diameter and other deleterious material.
2.
Thoroughly moisten soil and grade all planting areas to within one-tenth foot of
finished grades prior to amending soil.
Soil Amendments:
1.
Prior to adding soil amendments, the Contractor shall provide analysis of imported
and existing soil obtained from three (3) soil samples each from locations as
directed by the Owner’s Representative. The samples shall be analyzed by
Wallace Laboratory and amendments applied as outlined in the soils report. The
amendments specified below are a minimum requirement.
2.
After the areas have been graded, the following rates as of soil conditioning and
amendment materials shall be evenly spread over all planting areas and shall be
thoroughly scarified to an average depth of 6 inches by rototilling a minimum of 2
alternating passes.
Soil Conditioner
Soil Sulphur
4 Cu. Yd.
20 Lbs.
Per 1,000 Sq. Ft.
Per 1,000 Sq. Ft.
LANDSCAPING
02900-13
Iron Sulphate
Gypsum
Pre-Plant Fertilizer
3.4
20 Lbs.
100 Lbs
20 Lbs.
Per 1,000 Sq. Ft.
Per 1,000 Sq. Ft.
Per 1,000 Sq. Ft.
3.
Fertilizer (pre-plant) shall be incorporated into the top 6 inches of finish grade.
Fertilizer shall be applied after leaching operation.
4.
For acid loving plants: Excavate and remove existing soil to a depth of 18" below
finish grade. Install the following soil mix to finish grade anticipating settling,
compaction, etc., thoroughly till bottom six inches of new soil into top six inches
of existing subbase, where applicable, then install remaining new soil mix.
a.
25% top soil
b.
50% peat moss
c.
25% turf-n-tee
d.
8 lbs. per cu. yd. bone meal
e.
8 oz. per cu. yd. iron sulfate
PLANTING
A.
General
1.
Do not install any plant material until irrigation system is installed, tested and
approved by Owner's Representative and operating normally. Planting, staking,
guying and tying of trees to be followed by planting of shrubs, vines, ground cover,
and lawn, in respective order. Plan drawings indicate the desired size, type and
location of plant material and are to be as close as possible. In the event changes
from indicated locations are deemed necessary by the Owner's Representative,
they shall be made by the Contractor without additional cost to the Owner, provided
the change is ordered before the particular plant material is installed, and no
significant additional labor or material necessary.
2.
When plant material is spaced in rows, the total dimension shall be verified and the
plants equally spaced within the designated area.
3.
The term “Planting Area” shall mean all areas to be planted with trees, shrubs,
groundcovers, seed and sod.
4.
Actual planting shall be performed during those periods when weather and soil
conditions are suitable in accordance with locally accepted horticultural practice.
5.
All rock and other growth and debris accumulated during the duration of the project
shall be removed from the site.
6.
Prior to excavation for planting or placing of plant materials, locate all underground
utility lines still in use and take proper precautions to avoid damage to such
improvements. In the event of a conflict between such lines and plant locations,
notify the Owner's Representative who shall arrange for the relocation of one or the
LANDSCAPING
02900-14
other. The Contractor assumes all responsibility for making any and all repairs for
damages from work as herein specified.
7.
Grading and soil preparation work shall be performed only during the period when
beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. If the moisture content of the soil
should reach such a level that working it would destroy soil structure, grading
operations shall be suspended until the moisture content is increased or reduced
to acceptable levels and the desired results are likely to be obtained.
a.
Planting areas shall be free of rocks larger than 1 inch with no more than
5% by volume of rocks smaller than 1 inch. All depressions, voids,
erosion, settled trenches and excavations shall be filled with amended soil
and/or removed by the Contractor leaving a smooth, even finish grade.
Final grade shall be established to the Civil Engineer's specifications and
the following directives:
b.
Grade shall ensure positive drainage of site, directing surface drainage
toward curbs, gutters, swales and drains; away from building foundations,
free of irregularities and depressions. A minimum of 2% drainage away
from buildings shall be maintained.
c.
Molding and rounding of grades shall be provided at all changes in slope.
Blend slopes into level areas.
d.
Grades shall be 2 inches below adjacent paved areas and sidewalks and
flush with valve boxes, mowing strips, clean-outs, drains, manholes, etc.,
unless otherwise shown on drawings and shall have a minimum slope of
1% to drains.
e.
Maintain grades within a tolerance of +/- 0.1 foot of grades shown on the
Civil Engineer's plans. Open lawn areas may be within +/- 0.5 foot of
grades shown on Civil Engineer's plans.
f.
No planting shall be installed until approval has been given by the Owner's
Representative.
g.
Care shall be taken that the rate of application of water does not cause
erosion or sloughing of soils.
h.
All depressions, voids, erosion scars and settled trenches generated by
the deep watering shall be filled with conditioned topsoil and brought to
finish grade.
i.
Finish Grading:
1.)
Finish grades shall be indicated on Civil Engineer's drawing.
2.)
Finish grades shall be measured as the final water compacted and
settled surface grades and shall be within +/- 0.1 foot of the spot
elevations and grade lines indicated.
LANDSCAPING
02900-15
3.)
Finish grades shall be measured at the top surface of surface
materials.
4.)
Molding and rounding of the grades shall be provided at all
changes in slope.
5.)
All undulations and irregularities in the planting surfaces resulting
from tillage, rototilling and all other operations shall be leveled and
floated out before planting operations are initiated.
6.)
The Contractor shall take every precaution to protect and avoid
damage to sprinkler heads, irrigation lines and other underground
utilities during his grading and conditioning operations.
7.)
Final finish grades shall insure positive drainage of the site with all
surface drainage away from buildings, walls and toward roadways,
drains and catch basins.
8.)
Final grades shall be acceptable to the Owner’s Representative
before planting operations will be allowed to begin.
9.)
Planting surfaces shall be graded with no less than two (2) percent
surface slope for positive drainage.
10.)
All scaled dimensions are approximate. Before proceeding with
any work, carefully check and verify all dimensions and
immediately inform the Owner's Representative of any discrepancy
between the drawings and/or specifications and actual conditions.
11.)
Quantities for plant materials are shown for convenience only, and
not guaranteed. Check and verify count and supply sufficient
number to fulfill intent of drawings. Notify Owner's Representative
of discrepancies between quantities and symbols shown prior to
installation.
12.)
Adequately stake, barricade and protect all irrigation equipment,
manholes, utility lines, and other existing property during all
phases of the soil amending and grading
13.
Trees.
a.)
One photograph of each tree variety and size, called out
on Drawings, shall be delivered to the Owner's
Representative for approval prior to delivery to site or
installation.
b.)
The Contractor shall immediately remove from the site any
trees not approved after the Owner's Representative has
seen them.
c.)
The Contractor, at his option and expense, can retain the
services of the Owner's Representative to review trees 15
LANDSCAPING
02900-16
gallon and larger tagged at the nursery and/or at its place
of growth, or submit color photographs of trees for
approval.
B.
Planting
1.
C.
All plants shall be installed with main stems bearing the same relation to finished
grade that they did in their place of growth. All plants shall be located in the center
of plant pits. All main stems shall be vertical.
a.
No plant shall be planted if the rootball is broken or cracked either before
or during the process of installation.
b.
No wilted plant shall be planted.
c.
Water all plants immediately after installation.
Plant Pits
1.
2.
Plant pits for 20" box and larger plants and shall have vertical sides with widths 2
times wider than root ball width and a depth 12" deeper than the height of the
rootball.
Plant pits for container grown plants 1 gallon size to 15 gallon size shall be as
follows:
CONTAINER SIZES
1 gallon
2 gallon
5 gallon
7 gallon
15 gallon
3.
D.
PIT WIDTH
12"
18"
24"
26"
36"
PIT DEPTH
12"
14
18"
22"
24"
Plant pits for rooted cuttings or seedlings to be at least 6"x 6".
Backfill for Plant Pits.
1.
Fill with backfill to proper height to receive the plant, and thoroughly tamp the
mixture before setting the plant.
2.
Set plant in upright position in the center of the hole, and compact the backfill
mixture around the rootball.
3.
Thoroughly water each plant until the hole is 2/3 full.
4.
After watering, tamp the soil in place until the surface of the backfill is level with the
surrounding grade.
5.
Backfill.
a.
For all container sized plants on grade (with the exception of acid-loving
plants), backfill shall be a uniform mixture of the following ingredients (by
volume) unless advised otherwise by results of soil testing laboratory:
LANDSCAPING
02900-17
70% excavated soil.
30% organic soil amender.
4 pounds per cubic yard 10-10-10 Commercial Fertilizer.
1 ounce iron sulfate per cubic yard.
b.
All backfill shall be installed and semi-compacted in a manner so that after
settling, the base of plant stem is flush with adjacent finish grade. During
backfilling, place fertilizer tablets near, but not in direct contact with, the
bottom half of the rootballs at the following rates:
One tablet per 1 gallon plant
Two tablets per 5 gallon plant
Three tablets per 15 gallon plant
Five tablets per 24 inch and larger boxes
Ten tablets per 36 inch box
Twelve tablets per 42 inch and larger boxes
6.
7.
3.5
a.
For plants within lawn areas, construct a temporary basin around each
plant ball immediately after planting. The berm forming the basin shall be
continuous and 3" above finish grade with the diameters corresponding to
rootball size.
b.
Remove temporary basins just prior to preparation of lawn areas for
seeding.
c.
For plants not within lawn areas construct a berm 3" above finish grade
and continuous at the periphery of the rootball of the plant such as to keep
water confined around the rootball. Basins shall have flat bottoms.
Rooted Cuttings or Seedlings (Ground Cover): Plants shall be grown in flats until
time for planting. At time of planting, pits for plants from flats shall be at least 6" x
6" and the earth around each plant shall be firmed sufficiently to force out all air
pockets. Water immediately after planting, and keep root zone adequately moist
for the duration of the work.
MULCH COVER
A.
3.6
Water Basins.
All ground cover, perennial, shrub, and annual beds (with exception to those exceeding 2:1
slope) to be dressed with 3” layer of mulch or as shown on drawings.
WATERING
LANDSCAPING
02900-18
3.7
A.
Water plants immediately after planting. Do not allow plants to dry out before or while
being planted. Keep exposed roots wet with wet sawdust, peat moss or burlap at all times
during planting operations.
B.
Once the seedlings are established, the frequency of waterings can be reduced while
increasing the duration for each watering.
C.
Apply water to planted areas and plants during planting operations and thereafter until
acceptance of work.
D.
Water plants which cannot be watered efficiently with existing system with a hose.
TREE SUPPORTS
A.
Tree Staking: See details for quantity of stakes required per tree. Stake per
manufacturer's written specifications.
B.
Tree Guying: Trees shown to be guyed shall be immediately guyed after planting, using
minimum of three guys per tree or as shown on drawings. Install wood flag or plastic tubing
for each guy. Use one type of warning device on guys throughout entire project.
C.
3.8
3.9
Protect bark of tree by covering wire with hose.
2.
Anchor guys with "deadmen" buried at least 2' below finish grade.
3.
Tighten guy lines to firm tension.
Pruning: Pruning may not be done prior to delivery of plants. Cuts over 3/4" in diameter
shall be painted with tree paint. Prune as directed by the Owner's Representative.
NOT USED
ROOT BARRIER
A.
Install individual root barriers per landscape details.
B.
Install linear root barrier along the edge of paving for a distance of ten (10) feet in each
direction from the tree for a total of twenty (20) feet per tree. Where trees are closer than
twenty feet apart a single continuous piece of root barrier shall be used. Overlap root
barrier a minimum of twelve (12) inches at splices.
3.10
3.11
1.
NOT USED
WEED AND PEST CONTROL
A.
Weeding: All planting areas shall be kept weed free during the duration of the Contract.
The Contractor, at his option, may use herbicides, but only specified types following the
exact recommendations of a California Licensed Pest Control Operator and of the
manufacturers. If the Contractor is in doubt as to whether a particular ornamental might be
harmed by any herbicide, he will manually remove the weeds around the ornamental.
LANDSCAPING
02900-19
3.13
B.
Insecticides: The Contractor shall use the appropriate specified insecticides using
manufacturer's recommendation during the duration of the contract to eliminate harmful
insects. Contractor shall verify that a particular insecticide is not corrosive to metal,
plastic, or limestone, before any spraying.
C.
Extermination of Gophers and Moles: Utilize poisonous gases, and/or traps to exterminate
all gophers and moles within the limits of the work following the explicit directions and
recommendations of a California Licensed Pest Control Operator, and those of the
respective manufacturers.
MAINTENANCE
A.
All work shall be continuously maintained in all areas included in the contract during the
progress of the work, the maintenance period and until the final acceptance of the work.
B.
Provide the following during the final ninety (90) calendar day maintenance period: All
plants and planted areas shall be kept watered. Weeds, Dallis, Johnson, Kikuyu, Nut and
Bermuda Grass shall be removed. Grass shall be mowed with a reel type mower equipped
with rollers. Lawns shall be edged whenever necessary. Keep lawn cut to not less than 1
1/2” and not more than 2" in height. Collect grass clippings during mowing operations and
remove from site. The entire project shall be so cared for that a neat and clean condition
will be presented at all times to the satisfaction of the Construction Manager.
C.
General Weeding:
D.
1.
Weeding Program: The Maintenance Contractor shall be responsible for providing
a continuous weeding program for all project areas. Weeding shall be done on a
weekly basis and shall include " any undesirable or misplaced plant."
2.
Shrubs: Weeds shall be removed from beds regularly, no less than once a week,
chemically or manually. Bermuda grass and other noxious weeds shall not be
allowed to become established.
3.
Ground Cover: Weeds shall be removed completely, on a regular basis,
chemically or manually, no less than once a week. Weeds may be controlled with
pre-emergent herbicides, preferably, but also may be controlled with post-emergent
herbicides, and/or by hand pulling.
4.
Maintenance Fertilization: A complete fertilizer such as 16-6-8 should be
uniformly broadcast at the rate of 5 lbs. per 1000 sq. ft. The first application should
occur approximately 30 days after planting and can be repeated thereafter every
45-60 days. All fertilizer applications should be made when the plant material is
dry. Follow each fertilization with a thorough irrigation. When plants have become
well established, the frequency of fertilizer applications can be decreased.
Insect, Disease and Pest Control: The Contractor shall regularly inspect all landscaped
areas for presence of disease, insect or rodent infestation. The Contractor shall advise the
Owner within four (4) days if disease, insect or rodent infestation is found; he shall identify
the disease, insect or rodent and specify control measures to be taken using legally
approved materials and methods. Upon written approval of the Owner, the Contractor shall
implement the approved control measures, exercising extreme caution in the application of
all spray material, dusts or other materials utilized. The use of any chemicals for insect
LANDSCAPING
02900-20
and disease control shall be done by a state licensed pest control operator who shall follow
all guidelines governing his license. Extreme caution shall be used when spraying
insecticides and fungicides. Only spray when there is no wind. Owner approval must be
obtained prior to spraying any insecticides or fungicides. All chemicals shall be used only
in the manner approved by state and Owner agencies.
Approved control measures shall be continued until the disease, insect or rodent is
controlled to the satisfaction of the Owner. The Contractor shall utilize all safeguards
necessary during disease, insect or rodent control operations to ensure safety of the public
and the employees of the Contractor.
E.
Staking and Guying: Tree stakes, ties and guys shall be checked to prevent bark wounds
caused by abrasion and corrected as needed. Ties shall be adjusted to prevent girdling.
When trees attain a trunk caliper of approximately 4" consider removing stakes and guys.
The tree must retain its upright position and this position must be held regardless of
moisture content of the soil. Before any stakes are removed, remove tree ties and allow the
tree to remain without support for a period of time to observe structural stability of the tree.
Remove tree stakes only when tree has been proven to be structurally stable. Any
restaking shall be done with originally specified materials. Guying will, over time, stretch or
loosen. Adjust as needed to retain a taut position, until such time when guying is removed.
Any tree that is damaged due to improper staking or typing shall be replaced at the
Contractor's expense.
F.
Plant Replacement: Any tree and shrub that appears to have more than one-half (1/2) of its
foliage in a declining state shall be brought to the Owner's attention immediately. Check
plant for over-watering, or drainage problems; and repair the problem prior to replacement.
Replacement plants shall be of a size, condition and variety acceptable to the Owner. The
Contractor shall replace plant material at no cost to the Owner and subject to acceptance
by the Owner.
G.
1.
Plants that show signs of failure to grow at any time during the maintenance
period, or those plants so injured or damaged as to render them unsuitable for the
purpose intended shall be replaced immediately at the expense of the Contractor.
2.
Any trees, shrubs or grass that die or loose form and size as originally specified
shall be replaced even though they have taken root and are growing after die-back
or loss of form and size.
Shrub and Vine Care:
All shrubbery shall be checked weekly for any breakage or damage, special watering
needs, etc. and treated as necessary. All undesirable conditions shall be eliminated as
per accepted landscape maintenance practices. All shrubs shall be maintained in a
healthy vigorous condition. Remove all spent flowers, flower spikes and remove all leaves
and debris from plant areas daily. Hose off all plant material monthly to remove
accumulated dirt and soot.
1.
Pruning: Pruning shall be performed as a continuous ongoing
operation, and shall be done under the direction of the Owner; not allowing plants
to develop stray, undesirable growth. Trimming, pruning, thinning and training are
functions to be done at any time as needed to maintain a pleasing appearance.
Accomplish pruning by removing woody stems from inside shrubs on an as-needed
LANDSCAPING
02900-21
basis as directed by the Owner's Representative. Excessive pruning or stubbing
back will not be permitted. Top shrubs only when necessary for appearance and
after interior selective branch pruning has been completed or as directed by the
Owner's Representative. Where trees and shrubs occur in close proximity to walks
or parked cars, prune to allow movement without interference from branches and
foliage.
a.
H.
3.14
Shrub Pruners: Shrubs shall be pruned and thinned using hand-held shrub
pruners. Hedge shears and clippers shall not be used.
Damage to planting areas shall be replaced immediately. Depressions caused by erosion,
vehicles, or foot traffic to be filled with topsoil and leveled.
CLEAN UP: As project progresses, Contractor shall maintain all areas in a neat manner and
remove unsightly debris as necessary. After completion of project, Contractor shall remove all
debris and containers used in accomplishing work. The Contractor shall sweep and clean all
sidewalks, asphalt and concrete areas adjacent to plantings.
END OF SECTION
LANDSCAPING
02900-22
SECTION 02911
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Furnish and install HDPE (High Density Polyethylene) and wood benches as indicated on
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data sheets, catalogs, illustrations, and other information that fully describes
the benches proposed to be pro vided. Such information shall include dimensions, profiles,
meth ods of fabrication, and materials of construction.
B. Submit samples for selection of colors and finishes that are available as standard with the
bench manufacturer.
1.3
A.
Deliver benches in manufacturers unopened cartons clearly labeled with manufacturers
name and contents.
B.
Handle benches in a manner to prevent damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements, provide "Arcata
Backless Bench" by Landscape Forms Inc., or "or equal" products by one of the
following:
1.
Petersen Manufacturing Co.
2.
Plastic Lumber, Inc.
Materials of construction shall be HDPE and solid wood (not plywood).
1.
Frame: Provide tubular steel outer frame 0.188 wall thickness, surrounds steel
angle and tee inner members. Boards are attached to inner members with black
oxide finished stainless steel screws.
2.
Seat and Back Panels: Solid stock wooden molded boards with eased edges
and ends are nominal 1" thick. Wood shall be Ipe - solid stock, select South
American hardwood, unfinished.
3.
HDPE lumber boards have eased edges as well as ends and are nominal 1-1/4”
thick. Each board is fastened to the steel frame with black oxide finished
stainless steel screws. Individual boards can be replaced with ordinary tools.
HDPE shall be of 90% (minimum) recycled materials.
02911-1
C.
Finishes: Finish on metal shall be a finishing process that includes a rust inhibitor and
top coat finish of thermosetting polyester powdercoat that is U.V., chip and flake
resistant.
D.
Powdercoat shall have the following properties:
E.
1.
Gloss according to Garner 60 deg. ASTM D 523-67: 80-90
2.
Cross hatch adhesion ASTM D 3359 method B: pass 100%
3.
Mandrel bending test ASTM D 522: 1/8"/3 mm
4.
Erichsen cupping ISO 1520: 5/16"/8 mm
5.
Impression hardness according to Buchholz ISO 2215: 95
6.
Impact test ASTM D 2794-69: 1/10" distortion up to 160 in/lb
7.
Pencil hardness ASTM D 3363-74: 2H (min.)
Drill mill tests: ok
8.
Saltspray Resistance 3000 hr test, ASTM D 117: max. undercutting 1/16"/1 mm
9.
Humidity Resistance 3000 hr test, ASTM D 2247-68: min. blisters 1/16"/1 mm
Colors: Color shall be "Storm Cloud" or as selected by the Architect from the
manufacturer's standard palette.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Mounting shall be by means of core drilled holes in concrete. Fill the annular space with
non-shrink grout.
B.
Comply with bench manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable to products
and application indicated.
C.
Locate benches in locations as directed by the Architect.
D.
Touch-up minor abrasions and irregularities in painted finishes with coating which
matches factory-applied finish.
02911-2
SECTION 02948
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Furnish and install tree grates and frames as indicated on the drawings and specified.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ironsmith "Sunrise: 1/2"
Slots, an "or equal" product by one of the following manufacturers:
1.
McKinley Tree Grate Inc.
2.
Meenah Foundry Co.
B.
Grates and frames shall comply with the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities
Act (ADA).
C.
Grates shall be cast iron or aluminum, as follows:
1.
Cast Aluminum: ASTM B26.
2.
Gray Iron Castings: ASTM A48, Class 35B.
D.
Steel: ASTM A36.
E.
Fasteners shall be designed to deter pilferage.
F.
Apply corrosion resisting shop primer as standard with the manufacturer and one top coat
of gloss enamel finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Install tree grates and frames in accordance with the approved shop drawings and the
manufacturer's installation instructions.
B.
Set the frames accurately in position, properly leveled and aligned. Cut or grind the pads
on the underside of the grating to ensure that the grate rests solidly on the frame, without
wobbling fitting required for installation of handrails and railings.
02948-1
SECTION 02950
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SUMMARY
A.
Work Included: All labor, materials, equipment, and appliances necessary to provide trees,
plants and ground cover as indicated on the Contract Drawings, specified herein and as needed
for complete and proper installation and maintenance.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to
the GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and Sections in
DIVISION 1 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS of these Specifications.
2.
Rough Grading in Section 02220 - EARTHWORK.
3.
Irrigation System in Section 02810.
4.
Landscape Maintenance and Plant Establishment in Section 02970
SUBMITTALS
A.
Comply with provisions of Section 01340 - SUBMITTALS of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS of these Specifications.
B.
Make all submittal 30 calendar days prior to start of Work of this Section.
C.
Submit in quintuplicate five (5) complete lists of landscape materials and equipment, including
manufacturer's name and address, specific trade names, catalog numbers, complete with
illustrations and descriptive literature and clearly mark or underline proposed items; list sources
of landscape topsoils.
D.
Shop Drawings: Required for any landscape structure as may be specified hereinafter in
accordance with provisions of Section 01340 in DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
E.
Disapprovals: Promptly resubmit for approval necessary data concerning a substitution for a
disapproved item.
F.
Procurement List: Use the approved list of landscape materials and equipment for procurement
without deviation unless otherwise authorized in writing by the City Engineer.
G.
Certification: In addition to other required certification, furnish a certificate with each delivery of
bulk material, including topsoil, stating its source, quantity, type of material furnished and that
such item or material conforms to specification requirements.
H.
Bonds: Furnish a faithful performance bond in the amount specified in the Contract Documents
to cover the guarantees per Section 4.01.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
02950-1
1.4
A.
Workers: Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and
requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the Work of this Section.
B.
Codes and Regulations: All materials and workmanship in this Section shall comply with all
applicable City, County, Federal and State Codes and Regulations. Contractor to obtain and
pay for all required permits. Deliver all permits and certifications of inspection to the City
Engineer.
C.
Quality and Size: Comply with current edition of the "Horticultural Standards" for number one
nursery stock as adopted by the "American Association of Nurserymen".
D.
All Plants:
1.
True to name, with the name of the plants in accordance with the standards of practice
of "American Association of Nurserymen".
2.
In all cases, botanical names take precedence over common names.
A.
B.
C.
Approvals by the City Engineer:
1.
All work on sprinkler irrigation system prior to start of landscaping work.
2.
All approvals on required submittals hereinafter specified.
3.
All re-submittals requested by the City Engineer.
Inspection: Notify the City Inspector at least 72 hours prior to time of the following required
inspections:
1.
All plant material at time of delivery to the job-site.
2.
All trees (15 gallon can size and larger) at their source prior to delivery to the job-site
or elsewhere as may otherwise be directed by the City Engineer or specified.
3.
Condition of lawn area preparation prior to seeding or sodding.
4.
All landscaping construction items prior to start of maintenance or plant establishment
period.
Existing Utilities and Plant Materials: Protect utilities and/or plant materials not designated for
removal or modification in place against damage resulting from work of this Contract. Perform
any removal and/or modifications only on approval or instructions from the City Engineer or in
accordance with applicable provisions noted or specified on the Contract Drawings or in other
sections of these Specifications. Replace damaged existing plant material with like type and
size material. Determine the cost of unreplaceable plant material according to the "square
inch" method as described by the council of tree and landscape appraisers "Manual for Plant
Appraisers" Handbook Current Edition and "Guide for Establishing Values of Trees and Other
Plants".
02950-2
D.
1.5
Verification of Dimensions and Quantities: Verify all scaled dimensions and quantities prior to
start of work. Plant quantities noted on the Contract Drawings are for the convenience of the
Contractor only and do not limit the Contractor to those specific quantities. Furnish the
quantities as may be necessary to do the specific work. Promptly notify the City Engineer of
any discrepancies between the Contract Drawings and Specifications and/or actual job-site
conditions which would affect the proper execution of the landscaping work. Do not work in
areas where such discrepancies occur until further instructed by the City Engineer.
A.
B.
C.
Delivery:
1.
Notify the City Engineer of the delivery a minimum of 48 hours in advance so the plant
materials may be inspected upon arrival at the job-site. All plant materials judged by
the City Engineer as unacceptable shall be removed immediately from the job-site by
the Contractor.
2.
Protect plants during delivery against damage to root balls or desiccation of leaves.
Protect trees during transport by tying in the branches and covering all exposed
branches.
3.
Deliver fertilizer to the job-site in the original and unopened containers bearing
manufacturer's guarantee chemical analysis, name, trade mark or trade name in
conformance with Federal and Local law. In lieu of containers, fertilizer may be
furnished in bulk and a certificate indicating the above information shall accompany
each delivery.
4.
During delivery, protect sod from drying out and contaminants.
Storage:
1.
Store plants, trees, etc. at the job-site where directed by the City Engineer.
2.
Sprinkle sod with water and cover with moist burlap, straw or other approved covering,
and protect from exposure to wind and direct sunlight. Covering shall permit air
circulation to alleviate heat development.
3.
Keep fertilizer in dry storage away from contaminants.
4.
Store plants not installed on the day of arrival at the job-site as follows:
a.
Outside storage to be protected from wind.
b.
Keep plants in containers in a moist condition until planted by watering with
fine mist spray.
Handling: Transport and handle plants with care to ensure protection against injury.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Topsoil: Designated as "imported" or "unclassified" as specified herein. The City Engineer will
02950-3
determine the suitability of topsoil prior to use. Transport topsoil from the source to its final
position unless stockpiling is specified.
1.
"Imported" Topsoil: From a source outside the limits of the project selected by the
Contractor and in compliance with requirements specified herein. The City Engineer
may make such inspections and require such tests as deemed necessary to
determine that the material meets the requirements. At least thirty (30) days before
scheduled use, submit the proposed source of topsoil to the City Engineer for
approval. Submit a written request for approval, accompanied by a written report of a
soils testing laboratory registered by the State for agricultural soil evaluation which
states that the proposed source complies with these Specifications. The Contractor
shall comply with all recommendation of the soils testing laboratory and add any
additional soil amendments, necessary to achieve proper nutrient and drainage levels
to support healthy plant growth, at no additional cost to the City.
"Imported" topsoil shall be of a uniform composition and structure, fertile and friable
sandy loam garden soil, and be free of roots, clods and stones larger than 1-inch in
greatest dimension, pockets of coarse sand, noxious weeds, sticks, brush and other
litter and not be infested with nematodes or other undesirable insects and plant
disease organisms.
"Imported" topsoil shall meet the following additional
requirements.
2.
B.
a.
Gradation Limits: Sand - 50-80 percent, clay - 20 percent maximum, and silt
- 30 percent maximum. The sand, clay and silt gradation limits shall be as
defined in ASTM D-422.
b.
Agricultural Suitability and Fertility: The topsoil shall be fertile and friable
garden soil suitable for sustaining and promoting the growth of the specified
plants.
c.
Electrical conductivity less than 3.0 millim/ centimeter at 25 degrees Celsius.
d.
Boron content maximum of 1.0 part per million.
"Unclassified" Topsoil: Soil found in place in the designated landscape area, including
soil compacted in place as part of the earthwork specified for the project. Test
samples of on-site soils shall be taken under the supervision of the City Inspector as
directed by the City Engineer. Soil Amendments shall be added in accordance to the
soils testing laboratory's recommendation upon approval of the City Engineer.
Fertilizers and Conditioning Materials: Comply with the applicable requirements of the State
Agricultural Code. All fertilizing materials shall be packaged, first grade, commercial quality
products identified as to source, type of material, weight and manufacturer' guaranteed
analysis. Fertilizing material shall not contain toxic ingredients or fillers in quantities harmful to
human, animal, or plant life.
Submit a certificate of compliance stating that the material substantially meets the
Specifications in accordance with provisions of Subsection 1.03(b) herein before specified.
1.
Bone Meal: Commercial raw bone meal shall be finely ground, steamed dry material
with a minimum analysis of 2.5 percent nitrogen and 22 percent phosphoric acid.
2.
Gypsum: Hydrated calcium sulfate product containing 23 percent calcium and 18
02950-4
percent sulfur with a guaranteed analysis of 84 percent calcium sulfate.
3.
Soil Sulfur: Guarantee analysis of 99 percent sulfur.
4.
Superphosphate: First-grade finely ground phosphate rock used for agricultural
purpose, containing minimum 18 percent phosphoric acid by volume.
5.
Commercial Fertilizer: Pelletized or granular product having a chemical analysis of 88-4 unless otherwise specified on the Contract Drawings or by soil testing laboratory’s
recommendation; free-flowing material delivered in unopened sacks. Do not use
material that becomes caked or otherwise damaged.
6.
Nitrogen Fortified Wood Compost: Derived form Redwood, Fir or Cedar sawdust, or
from the bark of Fir or Pine treated with a non-toxic agent to absorb water quickly and
comply with the following requirements:
GRADATION
Sieve Size
1/4-inch
#8
#35
Percent Passing
95% minimum
80% minimum
30% maximum
Nitrogen Content
(%, Dry Weight)
Redwood
Fir
Cedar
Fir Bark
Pine Bark
0.4 - 0.6%
0.56 - 0.84%
0.56 - 0.84%
0.8 - 1.2%
0.8 - 1.2%
Salinity: Maximum saturation extract conductivity 2.5 millimhos / centimeter at 25
degrees Celsius.
Wetability: When one teaspoon of tap water is applied to 4 cubic inches of the airdried products, the material shall become completely damp in a period not exceeding
2 minutes. (Kellogg KRA, Sequoia Redwood/Cedar blend or white fir, Long Beach soil
prep., Bandini #101 Redwood Soil Builder or nitrogenized wood amendment).
7.
C.
Organic Fertilizer: Treated relatively dry friable organic compost derived from sewage
sludge processed for agricultural use; containing at least 1 percent nitrogen by dry
weight, 2 percent phosphoric acid and comply substantially with the gradation for
Subsection 2.01(b)6 (Milorganite, Kellogg's nitrohumus).
Plants (General): The plant names shown or listed on the Contract Drawings shall conform to
the "Sunset, Western Garden Book" latest edition.
1.
Type and Size: Plant materials shall be as listed on the Contract Drawings, unless
otherwise instructed by the City Engineer.
02950-5
D.
E.
2.
Tag one plant of each variety for identifying purposes.
3.
All plants shall be inspected and approved prior to planting as per provisions of
Subsection 1.03(e) herein before specified.
4.
Substitutions: When plants of a specified kind or size are not available, substitution
may be made upon approval by the City Landscape Architect.
5.
All plants shall have a growth habit normal to the species in accordance with U.S.A.
Standards for Nursery Stocks, latest editions; shall be sound, healthy, vigorous and
free from insect pests, plant disease, sun scalds, fresh bark abrasions, excessive
abrasions or other objectionable disfigurements. Tree trunks shall have normal welldeveloped branch systems, and vigorous and fibrous root system, not root bound and
shall be free of kinked or girding roots.
6.
Other than normal side pruning during the growth period, no pruning shall be done prior
to inspection at the nursery.
7.
Plant materials specified for adverse site conditions shall be site acclimated prior to
planting, either through purchase from local nurseries or site storage for a period of ten
(10) weeks for autumn planting and six (6) weeks for spring planting.
Plant Material:
1.
Trees: All trees shall conform to type and size noted on the Contract Drawings.
Measure height from the root crown to the last division of the terminal leader and
measure the diameter 6-inches above the root crown. Trees shall stand erect without
support.
2.
Shrubs: Specified type and size selected from high quality well-shaped nursery stock.
3.
Flatted Plants: Grown and remain in the flat until transplanted at the job-site. The soil
and spacing of the plants in the flat shall insure the minimum disturbance of the root
system at time of transplanting. Maximum plants per flat are to be between 64 to 100
plants or as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
General Materials:
1.
Gravel: Uses sizes specified or noted on the Contract Drawings.
2.
Disintegrated (Decomposed) Granite with Stabilizer: Disintegrated Granite shall be
referred to by the abbreviation (D.G.), or referred to as a decomposed granite. All
decomposed granite shall conform to the following grading requirements:
Sieve Designation
% Passing
Sieve Deignation
% Passing
3/8”
No. 4
No. 8
No. 16
100
95-100
75-80
55-65
No. 30
No. 50
No. 100
No. 200
40-50
25-35
20-25
5-15
The portion of D.G. retained on the #4 sieve shall have a maximum percentage of wear
02950-6
of 50 at 500 revolutions as determined by AASHTO T96-77. The portion passing a No.
40 sieve shall have a maximum liquid limit of 25 and maximum plasticity index of 7 as
determined by AASHTO 789-81 and AASHTO T90-81, respectively. D.G. shall be at a
depth of 2”.
F.
3.
Soil Stabilizer.: The stabilizer shall be non-toxic, colorless, odorless, organic powder
that binds D.G. screenings. The stabilizer shall be manufactured by Stabilizer, Inc.,
(800) 336-2468, or an approved equal.
4.
Root Barriers: Root barrier shall be installed on all trees planted within five (5) feet of
paving or wall footings. Deep root barriers, UB 24-2 in linear application per detail, by
Deep Root (415) 344-1464 or Deep Root Corporation as Arborguard+ (714) 898-0563,
or an approved equal.
5.
Geotextile Fabric: The geotextile fabric shall be “Filter-Fabric”, manufactured by
Dewitt Co. (800) 888-9669, or an approved equal.
6.
Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and
proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the City
Engineer.
Tree Stakes: Wood as designated on the Contract Drawings or herein.
1.
G.
Tree Ties:
1.
H.
Wood tree stakes minimum 1 1/4-inches in diameter by 10-feet long, lodgepole grade
or pine, pressure treated, capable of standing in the ground at least two years.
Cinch-Tie: Use methods and materials as noted on Contract Drawings.
Pre-Emergent Herbicides: Selected from the broad spectrum of commercial brands available
subject to approval by the City Engineer and not in conflict with any regulations governing its
use. (Treflan, Devrinol, Betasany, Ronstar, Surflow or Dychomec).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SURFACE CONDITIONS
A.
3.2
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct
conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until
detrimental conditions are corrected.
GRADING AND SOIL PREPARATION:
A.
Initial Rough Grading: Specified in Section 02220 - EARTHWORK.
B.
Earthwork and Topsoil Placement: Shall include excavation and backfilling for the irrigation
system and the preparation for the spreading, densification, cultivation and raking of topsoil,
including fertilization and conditioning.
C.
Preliminary Grading: Scarify the existing soil to a depth of 6-inches prior to backfilling with
topsoil. Scarify and cultivate "Unclassified" topsoil as described in Subsection 2.01(a)2, to a
finely divided condition to a depth of 8-inches minimum below finish grade. Remove during
02950-7
preliminary grading operation all stones over 1-inch in greatest dimension. Prepare grades to
within one tenth of a foot of the finish grade.
D.
In Previously Paved Areas: Remove the top 6-inches of existing soil and dispose of off the site.
Replace with an approved "imported" topsoil in accordance with Subsection 2.1(a)1 to the
indicated finish grade.
E.
Topsoil Preparation and Conditioning:
F.
1.
Type and Thickness: An approved "imported" topsoil in accordance with Subsection
2.01(a), 18-inches deep as required by the City Engineer or as indicated on the
Contract Drawings.
2.
Make planting areas free of weeds and other extraneous materials to a depth of 6inches below existing grade before placement of topsoil.
3.
Do not work topsoil when it is so wet as to cause excessive compaction or forming of
hard clods, or so dry as to cause dust.
Fertilizing and Conditioning: Bring planting areas to finish grade including mounds before the
spreading of specified fertilizer or soil conditioning materials.
1.
After approximate finished grades have been established, soil shall be conditioned and
fertilized by means of mechanical tiller into top 6" of soil.
The following organic, soil amendments and fertilizer rates, and quantities are to be
used for bid basis only. Specific planting specifications will be made after rough
grading operations are completed and soil samples are tested by Landscape
Contractor.
2.
G.
a.
Nitrogen-stabilized organic amendment: 6 cu. yds. per 1,000 sq. ft.
b.
Ammonium phosphate 6/20/20: 15 lbs. per 1,000 sq. ft.
c.
100 lbs. agricultural gypsum per 1,000 sq. ft.
d.
Soil sulfur: 20 lbs. per 1,000 sq. ft.
The quantities of such materials required for planting areas shall be at the job-site.
Furnish the City Inspector with delivery tickets before spreading to verify the source,
kind and quantities delivered.
Finish Grading:
1.
Make finish grade smooth, uniform and free of abrupt grade changes and depressions
to insure proper surface drainage.
2.
Finish grade below adjacent paving, curbs or headers shall be 2-inches in shrub or
ground cover areas and 1-inch in lawn areas.
3.
Water soil after spreading of fertilizer and/or soil conditioning materials, and allow it to
settle to provide a stable surface. After the soil has dried to hold moisture level that
allows a workable condition, regrade, rake and smooth to the required grades and
02950-8
contours. Finished surfaces to be clean and suitable for planting.
3.3
3.4
4.
Finish grading shall ensure proper drainage of site.
5.
Eliminate all erosion scars.
6.
Surface drainage shall be away from all building foundations @ a min. of 2%.
H.
Contour Mounds: Construct with approved "imported" topsoil as specified in Subsection
2.01(a)1 and specified soil amendments. Place mounds and let water settle to the satisfaction
of the City Landscape Architect and construct in a manner to minimize settlement and/or
erosion and to provide adequate footing for placement of boulders. Mound contour elevations
as shown on plans, refer to heights above adjacent finish grade to the mound.
I.
Trenching: When completed with soil conditioning and finish grading operations, backfill the
upper portion of the trench to the specified topsoil thickness in the trench is restored.
WEED / PEST CONTROL
A.
Germinate and destroy all existing weed seeds before preparing areas for planting. Sufficient
water shall be applied to cause weed seed to sprout. Contractor shall chose method of weed
elimination for Owner's representative approval. If herbicides are applied, apply in accordance
to manufacturer's specifications which must also adhere to governmental regulations. Lawn
areas should be rototilled under before plant can set seed.
B.
Herbicides for weed control shall be applied with a photosensitive dye which will produce a
contrasting color when sprayed upon the ground. The dye shall be applied in a manner so as
not to leave any stain upon surfaces. Pre-emergent herbicides shall not be applied to those
areas to receive manual seeding and/or hydroseed.
C.
Pesticides, as required, shall be applied by a licensed pest control adviser in accordance with
the requirements of the California Food and Agricultural Code. A minimum of fifteen days prior
to applying any pesticides, a copy of the proposed application program shall be submitted to
the Owner's representative for review. The submittal shall include, but not be limited to, the
pesticides to be used, rates of application, methods of application, and areas to which
pesticides are to be applied. Prior to commencement of application, the licensed pest control
adviser must receive the Owner's representative's approval of the program.
D.
Contractor shall notify the Owner's representative a minimum of 48 hours prior to each
application of pesticide / herbicide and shall indicate the hours during which the application will
occur. No applications shall be made on Saturdays, Sundays, or legal holidays, unless
otherwise prior approval by the Owner's representative in writing
E.
New and/or existing plants, which in the opinion of the Owner's representative, have been
damaged by the application of pesticide / herbicide shall be replaced by the Contractor at his
expense.
CONSERVATION OF TOPSOIL
A.
After area(s) have been cleared of vegetation, strip the existing topsoil to a depth necessary to
provide at least a 6-inch depth of topsoil in areas shown on the Contract Drawings to be turfed
or planted and to fill planters without contamination with subsoils.
02950-9
3.5
B.
Stockpile topsoil in an area clear of new construction or where directed by the City Engineer or
the Consultant.
C.
Maintain topsoil stockpile in a manner which will not obstruct the natural flow of drainage.
1.
Maintain the stockpiled topsoil free from debris and trash.
2.
Keep the stockpiled topsoil damp to prevent dust and drying out.
PLANTING
A.
B.
C.
General: All plant materials, including plant previously approved at the nursery, shall be
inspected prior to planting. The Contractor shall be responsible for the condition of all plants,
planted or otherwise, until final acceptance by the City.
1.
Perform planting with materials and equipment according to procedures favorable to
the optimum growth of the plant. Do not plant during windy conditions.
2.
Except as noted for specimen planting in Subsection 3.03(d) start all planting
operations immediately following the completion and approval of the irrigation system.
Protection and Storage:
1.
Keep all plant materials delivered to the job-site in a healthy condition for planting.
2.
Do not allow plants to dry out.
3.
Separate bare root stock and "heal in" in moist earth or other suitable material.
4.
Cover the root ball of balled and burlapped plants with moist sawdust, wood chips, or
other approved material.
Layout and Plant Locations:
1.
Plant locations indicated on the Contract Drawings are approximate.
2.
Plants may be re-spotted prior to planting as directed by the City Landscape
Architect, without additional compensation to the Contractor.
3.
Make a detailed layout of plants, etc., in the planting areas and obtain approval of the
City Landscape Architect prior to actual planting operations.
4.
Locate the first row of plants in areas designated for on center spacing at one-half the
designated spacing from the edge of the area.
D.
Specimen Planting: Plants in boxes (24-inches or larger) shall be planted before installation of
lateral irrigation lines. Re-route irrigation lines in conflict with specimen plant locations to clear
the root ball.
E.
Tree and Shrub Planting:
1.
Make planting holes approximately square with vertical sides twice the depth and
width of the plant container or root ball and larger if necessary to permit handling and
02950-10
planting without injury to the root system.
F.
2.
Do not plant plants with a broken or cracked root ball.
3.
Open and remove plant containers in such a manner that the plant root is not injured.
4.
Scarify native soil at the bottom of planting holes to a depth of 6-inches.
5.
Backfill the bottom half of the planting hole with the specified backfill mix
minus the fertilizers and water settle.
6.
After "water settling" the bottom half of the planting hole, set the plant approximately
in the center of the planting hole and adjust the root crown flush to finish grade.
7.
Backfill balance of the planting hole with the specific backfill mix and fertilizer and
"water settle".
8.
Prune or remove any broken or damaged limbs.
9.
Form a circular watering basin slightly larger than the planting hole; 4-inches high for
trees and 2-inches high for shrubs. Make the bottom of the basin at finish grade or
slightly lower.
10.
Restore the area around the plants to finish grade and dispose of excess soil.
11.
After planting, plants shall be plumb with the root crown at its natural depth with
respect to finish grade.
Backfill Planting Mix:
1.
Container plants shall be backfilled with:
70% on-site soil
30% type 1 soil amendment
See “Notice to Contractors”
2.
All plants which settle deeper than specified above shall be raised to the correct level.
After the plant has been placed, additional backfill shall be added to the hole to
cover approximately one half the height of the root
ball. At this stage, water shall be added to the top of the partly filled hole to thoroughly
saturate the root ball
and adjacent soil.
3.
After the water has completely drained, planting tablets shall be placed as indicated
below.
One tablet per 1 gallon container
Three tablets per 5 gallon container
Five tablets per 15 gallon container
One tablet per 4" box size
4.
The remainder of the hole shall be backfilled.
5.
Planting tablets shall be set with each plant on the top of the root ball while plants are
02950-11
still in their containers so the required number of tablets to be used in each hole can
be verified.
G.
H.
Ground Cover Planting:
1.
Complete soil preparation and fine grading prior to planting of ground cover materials.
2.
Plant ground covers in moist soil, spaced as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
3.
Plant each plant with its proportionate amount of flat soil to minimize root disturbance.
4.
The degree of soil moisture in the flat shall be such that the soil does not
crumble when removing plant.
5.
Following planting of ground cover, restore finish grade to insure proper surface
drainage.
Vine Planting:
1.
3.6
PLANT STAKING AND GUYING
A.
3.7
Plant vines adjacent to walls, fences, etc., as prescribed on the Contract Drawings.
Temporary staking shall be removed at the start of the plant establishment period
unless otherwise directed.
Tree Staking:
Drawings.
Stake trees with wood lodgepole materials as indicated on the Contract
1.
Install one stake vertically on the windward side of the tree. Install two additional
stakes at equal distances around the tree. Position the stake at least 6-inches from
the trunk at ground level and a minimum of 24-inches into the soil in a manner to avoid
injury to the roots or breaking the root ball.
2.
Secure plant trunk to the stake with one tie just below the head of the tree.
3.
Make tie loop 1-inch greater in diameter than the trunk.
4.
Attach tie to wooden stake with one clinched 6d nail.
MAINTENANCE AND PLANT ESTABLISHMENT
A.
Required: Maintain all areas on a continuous basis as they are completed during the progress
of the work and during the establishment period. Continue to maintain them until final
acceptance by the City. Maintenance shall include continuous operation of watering, weeding,
trimming, and rodent control reseeding, plant replacement (irrespective of cause) or any other
operations necessary to assure normal plant growth.
B.
Keep all planted area free of debris and weeds. Cultivate at intervals not to exceed 10 days.
C.
Pruning: The City Landscape Architect will designate any required pruning of plants at the
start of the plant establishment period. Perform the pruning as part of the plant establishment
work.
02950-12
D.
F.
Final Inspection:
1.
Request a final inspection to begin the plant establishment and maintenance period
after all planting and related work have been completed in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
2.
After planting is completed and approved, a field notification will be issued to the
Contractor to establish the effective beginning date of the plant establishment period.
3.
The Plant Establishment Period: A period of 120 calendar days or as otherwise
indicated on the Contract Drawings.
4.
The City Inspector may extend the plant establishment period if the planted areas are
improperly maintained, appreciable plant replacement is required, or other corrective
work becomes necessary.
Damage:
1.
Replace as soon as possible plants that show signs of failure to grow at any time
during the Contract period or those plants so injured or damaged so as to render them
unsuitable for the purpose intended, at no additional cost to the City.
Provide replacement plants of the same type and size to match adjacent plants.
Furnish plant and fertilizer as specified. New plantings shall be subject to a 30 day
minimum establishment period.
2.
Damage to planting areas shall be repaired immediately.
Depressions caused by vehicles or foot traffic shall be filled with topsoil and leveled.
G.
3.8
3.9
Final Acceptance:
1.
Upon completion of the plant establishment period, a final inspection for acceptance
will be performed by the City Inspector and City Landscape Architect.
2.
If the plant establishment period is satisfactorily completed ahead of other work
included in the Contract, the maintenance of planted areas shall be the responsibility
of the Contractor until all other work has been completed and accepted by the City.
GUARANTEE
A.
General: Guarantee the life of all trees for a period of one year from the date of acceptance of
the work.
B.
Deficiencies: Should any deficiencies develop within the specified guarantee period, correct
such deficiencies to the full satisfaction of the City Engineer without added expense to the
City.
FINAL CLEAN-UP
A.
Required: Upon completion of all landscape work and before final acceptance, remove all tools,
surplus materials, apparatus, debris, weeds and exterminate rodents from the job-site. Leave
02950-13
the job-site in a neat, clean condition, acceptable to the City Inspector. Wash, clean and leave
all paved areas without stains.
02950-14
SECTION 02954
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Furnish and install bollards (pipe guard posts) as indicated on the drawings and
specified, including removable bollards.
SUBMITTALS
A.
In accordance with Section 01340, submit shop drawings showing materials and
installation bollards.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
BOLLARDS
A.
Provide galvanized, and prime coated, standard weight steel pipe as specified in ASTM
A53. Fill solidly with concrete having a minimum compressive strength of 2000 psi.
B.
Concrete Footings: Provide Class 500-6-2500 concrete prepared as prescribed in
Section 201-1 of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction. Concrete
footings shall be 18 inches in diameter, cast not less than 36 inches deep into solid
ground.
C.
Provide sleeves of galvanized sheet steel not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside
dimensions of bollard post, with steel plate forming bottom closure.
D.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous grout complying with CE CRD-C 621, by Dayton Superior Corp., Master
Builders, W. R. Meadows, Inc, Sonneborn Building Products Div., U.S. Grout Corp., or
equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install bollards in accordance with the approved shop drawings. Fill the pipe with
concrete, dome shaped at the top. Anchor posts in concrete by means of pipe sleeves
preset into concrete.
B.
Except for removable bollards, after posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular
space between post and sleeve solid with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. Shape the
nonshrink grout to divert water away from the post. Removable bollards shall have the
annular space filled with clean sand.
02954-1
SECTION 02955
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
B.
1.2
Work Included: Work located outside the property lines as indicated on the drawings,
specified, and as follows:
1.
Surface Improvements: Street work, sidewalks, curbs and gutters, and driveway.
2.
Utilities: Underground utilities.
Related Work:
1.
Documents affecting work of this Sections include but are not necessarily limited
to the GENERAL CONDITIONS and Sections in DIVISION 1 of these
Specifications.
2.
Earthwork including excavating, grading and filling and select base materials in
Section 02220.
3.
Irrigation System in Sections 02810
4.
Concrete work in Section 03300.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Methods: Applicable sections of the "Standard Specifications for Public Works
Construction", 1997 edition and latest amendments thereto and Los Angeles City Bureau
of Engineering Standard Details noted on the Drawings.
B.
Inspection: By the City Bureau of Contract Administration. Notify the Director at least 72
hours prior to proposed time of doing street work, to arrange for required inspections at
no charge to the Contractor.
C.
Permits: Obtain and pay for all street work permits associated with off-site
improvements.
D.
1.
Obtain necessary "Permits to Use Street Space or Deposit Building Materials.”
2.
Obtain and pay for any surveys and grade sheets required by the City Bureau of
Contract Administration, "Standard Specifications" or the City Engineer.
3.
All surveying shall be performed by a licensed surveyor whose services shall be
engaged and paid for by the Contractor. The Contractor shall submit grade
sheets for approval prior to the start of work.
Codes and Regulations: Conform to the applicable Los Angeles City Building Code and
the Los Angeles City "Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction" and Bureau
of Engineering "Standard Plans" hereinafter specified in these specifications.
02955-1
1.3
ALTERATIONS, REPAIRS AND REPLACEMENTS
A.
1.4
PROTECTION
A.
1.5
1.6
As required for complete construction of project; materials and construction to match
existing adjacent work, where it occurs, in quality and appearance and conform to
applicable provisions of these Specifications.
Required: Furnish, erect and maintain fences, barriers, lights and signs as necessary, in
order to protect the public, City personnel, Contractor's personnel and existing work and
work of this Section under this Contract.
A.
Delivery: Deliver materials, and products and equipment to the job-site where directed by
the City Engineer.
B.
Storage: Store materials where located on the job-site not interfering with work
operations of this Section as directed by the City Engineer and easily accessible when
needed to be installed. Handle materials safely and avoiding damage to such materials
prior to installation.
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
Required: Clearly mark changes, deletions and/or additions to the work of this Section
conforming to provisions of the GENERAL CONDITIONS of these Specifications.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
2.2
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
2.3
Products shall conform with the current standards and specifications of the City of Los
Angeles.
Furnish Concrete material, form work and reinforcing in accordance with applicable
requirements specified in Section 03300, CONCRETE.
ASPHALT CONCRETE
A.
Conform to the L.A. City standard plans and SSPWC.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
A.
The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with all utility companies and pay all
fees or charges exacted by the utility companies.
B.
Match adjoining improvements such as constructions and expansion joints, sidewalk
marking patterns and trees. Identifying impressions, stamps or markers will not be
allowed.
02955-2
3.2
3.3
ASPHALTIC CONCRETE REPAIRS
A.
Required: As necessary to accommodate construction of new curbs, gutters and
driveways as indicated on drawings; as necessary due to excavation, trenching and utility
connections.
B.
Application: Upon completion of all work within existing asphalt concrete paved areas,
Contractor shall repair the existing asphalt concrete paving conforming to requirements of
the "Standard Specifications" and Bureau of Engineering standards as follows:
Properly prepare aggregate base using existing removed aggregate base
materials as approved by the City Engineer or Inspector to match existing
adjoining work.
2.
Tack coat surfaces of existing asphalt concrete surfaces as per 302-5.3 of the
"Standard Specifications" over which new materials will be laid of edges of
existing saw cut asphalt concrete and/or concrete against which new asphalt
concrete will be placed, with suitable grade asphalt or asphalt emulsion (fed.
Spec. SS-1H); terminate tack coat on concrete surfaces at top of asphalt
concrete paving.
3.
Lay new asphalt concrete paving conforming to Section 302-5.4 of the "Standard
Specifications" to match adjoining work using material of a heavier density than
the "in-place" adjacent work. Use hot smoothing iron to obtain inconspicuous,
straight and flush joint lines. Properly grade to provide the desired drainage as
indicated on the Drawings.
ELECTRICAL ALTERATIONS
A.
3.4
1.
Conform to Division 16.
REMOVAL AND CLEAN-UP
A.
Remove all surplus materials, debris and rubbish resulting from work of this Section.
B.
Comply with Section 01710.
02955-3
SECTION 02970
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
A.
1.2
1.3
The requirements of the General Conditions and of Division 1, General Requirements shall
apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as though repeated in full
herein.
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
Work specified in this Section: Furnish all labor, material, equipment, and services required
to maintain the landscape in an attractive condition as specified herein for a period of 90
calendar days.
B.
Definition: The word Architect as used herein shall refer to the City’s authorized
representative.
MAINTENANCE PERIOD
A.
The contractor shall continuously maintain all areas involved in this Contract during the
progress of the work and during the maintenance period until final acceptance of the work
by the Architect.
B.
Improper maintenance or possible poor condition of any planting at the termination of the
scheduled maintenance period may cause postponement of the final completion date of the
Contract.
C.
The Contractor will not be held responsible for damage arising from acts of God, vandalism,
negligence, or inadequate maintenance by the City, after the end of the establishment
period, unless caused by negligence of the Contractor.
D.
In order to carry out the plant establishment work, the Contractor shall furnish sufficient
personnel and adequate equipment to perform the work during the plant maintenance
period. The plant maintenance period shall be ninety (90) calendar days.
E.
Start of Maintenance Criteria: The maintenance period shall not start until all elements of
project construction, planting, and irrigation for the entire project are complete. Project will
not be segmented into maintenance phases, unless specifically authorized in writing by the
Architect.
LIBRARY BRANCH LIBRARY
LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE AND
TREE ESTABLISHMENT
02970-1
SECTION 02970
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
A.
1.2
1.3
The requirements of the General Conditions and of Division 1, General Requirements shall
apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as though repeated in full
herein.
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
Work specified in this Section: Furnish all labor, material, equipment, and services required
to maintain the landscape in an attractive condition as specified herein for a period of 90
calendar days.
B.
Definition: The word Architect as used herein shall refer to the City’s authorized
representative.
MAINTENANCE PERIOD
A.
The contractor shall continuously maintain all areas involved in this Contract during the
progress of the work and during the maintenance period until final acceptance of the work
by the Architect.
B.
Improper maintenance or possible poor condition of any planting at the termination of the
scheduled maintenance period may cause postponement of the final completion date of the
Contract.
C.
The Contractor will not be held responsible for damage arising from acts of God, vandalism,
negligence, or inadequate maintenance by the City, after the end of the establishment
period, unless caused by negligence of the Contractor.
D.
In order to carry out the plant establishment work, the Contractor shall furnish sufficient
personnel and adequate equipment to perform the work during the plant maintenance
period. The plant maintenance period shall be ninety (90) calendar days.
E.
Start of Maintenance Criteria: The maintenance period shall not start until all elements of
project construction, planting, and irrigation for the entire project are complete. Project will
not be segmented into maintenance phases, unless specifically authorized in writing by the
Architect.
LIBRARY BRANCH LIBRARY
LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE AND
TREE ESTABLISHMENT
02970-1
SECTION 03100
CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Formwork for cast-in-place concrete, with shoring, bracing and anchorage.
B.
Openings for other affected work.
C.
Form accessories.
D.
Stripping forms.
REFERENCES
A.
ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.
B.
ACI 347 - Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.
C.
PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Design, engineer, and construct formwork, shoring and bracing to meet design and code
requirements, so that resultant concrete conforms to required shapes, lines, and dimensions.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit drawings that illustrate the method and manner of securing and
supporting the stainless steel inserts within the forms. The arrangement and placement of the
strips within the formwork shall be subject to approval by the Architect.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
A.
1.6
Construct and erect concrete formwork in accordance with ACI 301 and 347.
Conform to code for City of Los Angeles.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit the manufacturer's data literature describing form materials, accessories, and form
releasing agents, including installation instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FORM MATERIALS
A.
Plywood: U.S. Product Standard PS-1, Exterior type, Grade B-B (concrete form) Class I.
CONCRETE FORMWORK
03100-1
2.2
B.
Plywood: Douglas Fir species; solid one side grade; sound, undamaged sheets with straight
edges.
C.
Glass Fiber Fabric Reinforced Plastic Forms: Matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight
of concrete without deflection detrimental to structural tolerances and appearance of finished
concrete surface.
D.
Lumber: Douglas Fir species; structural grade; with grade stamp clearly visible.
E.
Steel: Minimum 16 gage sheet, well matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of
concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished surfaces.
F.
Pan Type: Steel, Glass fiber type; removable of size and profile required.
G.
Tubular Column: Round, of spirally wound laminated fiber, wood, glass fiber type; surface
treated with release agent; of size required.
H.
Void Forms: Moisture resistant treated paper faces; biodegradable; structurally sufficient to
support weight of wet concrete mix until initial set.
FORMWORK ACCESSORIES
A.
Form Ties: Removable, Snap-off metal of fixed adjustable length; cone type; one inch break
back dimension; free of defects that will leave holes no larger than one 1 1/4 inches diameter in
concrete surface with waterproofing washer.
B.
Form Release Agent: Colorless material which will not stain concrete, absorb moisture, or
impair natural bonding or color characteristics of coating intended for use on concrete.
C.
Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorage: Sized as required; of strength and
character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete.
D.
Cylindrical Columns: Form round section members with steel, fiberglass, paper or fiber tubes,
constructed of laminated plies using water-resistant adhesive with wax-impregnated exterior for
weather and moisture protection.
1.
Tubes for columns to be exposed in the finish construction shall be seamless, or
designed to impart a texture or pattern to the concrete that has been previously
approved by the Architect.
2.
Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist loads imposed by the vibration of
wet concrete without deformation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
3.2
Verify lines, levels, and measurements before proceeding with formwork.
PREPARATION
A.
Earth forms may be permitted in accordance with Geotechnical Report.
B.
Hand-trim sides and bottoms of earth forms; remove loose dirt prior to placing concrete.
CONCRETE FORMWORK
03100-2
3.3
3.4
3.5
C.
Minimize form joints. Symmetrically align joints and make watertight to prevent leakage of
mortar.
D.
Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling so that concrete is not damaged during
its removal.
E.
Arrange forms to allow stripping without removal of principal shores, where required to remain
in place.
ERECTION
A.
Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Strengthen formwork liable to be overstressed
by construction loads. Secure Stainless Steel strips in the formwork with solid backing and
lateral support.
B.
Camber slabs and beams to achieve ACI 301 tolerances and as shown on the drawings.
C.
Provide temporary ports in formwork to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at
bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain. Close ports with tight fitting panels, flush
with inside face of forms, neatly fitted so that joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete
surfaces.
D.
Provide chamfer strips on external corners of beams and columns as shown on Architectural
drawings.
E.
Install void forms. Protect from moisture before concrete placement. Protect from crushing
during concrete placement.
F.
Do not displace or damage vapor barrier placed by Section 03300.
G.
Construct forms to maintain tolerances in accordance with ACI 301.
APPLICATION OF FORM RELEASE AGENT
A.
Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Apply
prior to placing reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items.
B.
Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces are scheduled to receive special
finishes applied covering which may be affected by agent. Soak contact surfaces of untreated
forms with clean water. Keep surfaces wet prior to placing concrete.
INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS
A.
Provide formed openings where required for work embedded in or passing through concrete.
B.
Coordinate work of other Sections in forming and setting openings, slots, recesses, chases,
sleeves, bolts, anchors, and other inserts.
C.
Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, level and plumb. Ensure
items are not disturbed during concrete placement.
CONCRETE FORMWORK
03100-3
3.6
3.7
FORM REMOVAL
A.
Notify Architect prior to removing formwork.
B.
Do not remove forms and shoring bracing until concrete has sufficient strength to support its
own weight, and construction and design loads which may be imposed upon it. Remove load
supporting forms when concrete has attained 75 percent of required 28 day compressive
strength, provided construction is reshored.
C.
Reshore structural members due to design requirements or construction conditions to permit
successive construction.
D.
Remove formwork progressively so no unbalanced loads are imposed on structure.
E.
Do not damage concrete surfaces during form removal.
F.
Store reusable forms for exposed architectural concrete to prevent damage to contact surfaces.
G.
Remove formwork in same sequence as concrete placement to achieve similar concrete surface
coloration.
CLEANING
A.
Clean forms to remove foreign matter as erection proceeds.
B.
Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports.
END OF SECTION
CONCRETE FORMWORK
03100-4
SECTION 03200
PART 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
GENERAL
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Reinforcing steel bars, welded steel wire fabric fabricated steel bar or rod mats for cast-in-place
concrete.
B.
Support chairs, bolsters, bar supports, spacers, for supporting reinforcement.
RELATED WORK
A.
Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork.
B.
Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete placement and vapor barrier.
REFERENCES
A.
ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.
B.
ACI 315 - Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.
C.
ASTM A82 - Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement.
D.
ASTM A185 - Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement.
E.
ASTM A497 - Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement.
F.
AWS D1.4 - Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel.
G.
ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
H.
ASTM A706 - Low-Alloy steel deformed bars for concrete reinforcement.
I.
CRSI - Manual of Practice.
J.
CRSI 63 - Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars.
K.
CRSI 65 - Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports, Specifications and Nomenclature.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform concrete reinforcement work in accordance with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice,
Documents 63 and 65.
B.
Conform to ACI 301 and 315.
FIELD SAMPLES
A.
Provide reinforcement for field sample specified in Sections 03100 and 03300.
03200-1
1.6
1.7
SHOP DRAWINGS
A.
Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01340 only when deviations are made from
the contract documents. The Contractor shall deliver rebar samples to the City Laboratory at
least 10 days in advance of installation.
B.
Indicate sizes, spacings, locations and quantities of reinforcing steel, wire fabric, bending and
cutting schedules, splicing, stirrup spacing, supporting and spacing devices.
CERTIFICATES
A.
Submit mill test certificates of supplied concrete reinforcing, indicating physical and chemical
analysis.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
MATERIALS
A.
Reinforcing Steel: All bars shall conform to ASTM A615, 60 ksi, yield grade billet-steel plain
deformed bars, except Grade 40 for No. 3 bars.
B.
Reinforcing Steel that is to be welded shall conform to ASTM A706, 60 yield grade low - alloy
deformed bars.
C.
Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A185 plain type; ASTM A497 deformed type; in flat sheets.
D.
Spiral Steel: ASTM A82.
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gage 1.5 mm annealed type. Acceptable patented system.
B.
Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of
reinforcement during installation and placement of concrete including load bearing pad on
bottom to prevent vapor barrier puncture.
C.
Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers Adjacent to Architectural Concrete Surfaces: Plastic
coated, Plastic tipped, Stainless steel type; sized and shaped as required.
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate in accordance with ACI 315, providing concrete cover specified in Section 03300.
B.
Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on Drawings at points of minimum stress. Indicate
location of splices on shop drawings.
C.
Weld reinforcing bars in accordance with AWS D1.4.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Before placing concrete, clean reinforcement of foreign particles or coatings.
B.
Place, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from alignment
or measurement.
03200-2
C.
Do not displace or damage vapor barrier required by Section 03300.
END OF SECTION
03200-3
SECTION 03300
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Cast-in-place concrete.
B.
Floors and slabs on grade and on vapor barrier with a protective sand blanket.
C.
Equipment pads, thrust blocks, light pole bases flag pole bases and any miscellaneous concrete
indicated on construction documents.
D.
Grouting under base plates.
E.
Furnishing as built drawings of anchor bolt settings to structural steel contractor.
RELATED WORK
A.
Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork.
B.
Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
1.4
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform work in accordance with ACI 301.
B.
Obtain materials from same source throughout the Work.
A.
1.6
The specifications and recommended practices of the American Concrete Institute (ACI),
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), the California Department of Transportation
(CalTrans) Standard Specifications, the Construction Specifications Institute (CSI), the Standard
Specifications for Public Works (Greenbook), and the Uniform Building Code (UBC) referred to
in these specifications with their individual designations are to be considered part of these
specifications. The latest revision of each recommended practice or specification shall apply.
Conform to L.A. City Building code.
TESTS
A.
Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to appointed firm for review prior to
commencement of work.
B.
Testing firm will take cylinders and perform slump and air entrainment tests in accordance with
ACI 301.
C.
Tests of cement and aggregates will be performed to ensure conformance with requirements stated
herein.
03300-1
1.7
D.
Three concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 150 cu. yds. or less of each class of concrete
placed each day, nor not less than one for each 5000 square feet of surface area for slabs or walls.
E.
One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken.
F.
Contractor shall allow ten (10) days to obtain test result for each analysis.
PRODUCT DATA
A.
Submit mix design and method of curing.
B.
Provide product data for specified products, including expansion joint and control joint materials.
C.
Submit manufacturers' instructions including directions for the installation of the vapor barrier.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Cement: Portland Cement shall meet the requirements of ASTM C150, Type I or II. Cement shall
have a maximum alkali content of .60% calculated as (Na2O+.658K20).
B.
Fine and coarse aggregate shall meet the requirements of ASTM C33 or California Department of
Transportation Standard Specifications, Section 90 or the Standard Specification for Public
Works, Section 200. Exceptions shall not be made without approval of Architect.
C.
Mixing Water shall be essentially free from injurious amounts of deleterious materials such as
oils, acids and organic matter. Nonpotable water may be used based on a satisfactory service
record of the source tested as required by ACI 301, Specifications for Structural Concrete
Buildings, Chapter 2.
D.
Air entraining admixt ures shall conform to ASTM C260.
E.
Chemical admixtures shall conform to ASTM C494 or ASTM C1017.
F.
Mineral admixtures shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C618, ASTM C989, and Section
201 of the Green Book.
G.
Other admixtures proposed for use and not covered by the above specifications must be approved
by the architect and/or engineer of record.
VAPOR BARRIER
A.
2.3
NON-SHRINK GROUT
A.
2.4
Provide a 10 mil thick clear polyethylene film. Cover the vapor barrier with a 2-inch thick sand
blanket.
Provide remixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and
plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 7000 psi in 28 days.
Grout shall conform to CRD-C621.
CONCRETE MIX
A.
Mix concrete in accordance with ASTM C94.
B.
Provide concrete for the following characteristics:
03300-2
2.5
1.
7 day Compressive Strength to be at least 60% of required 28 day strength.
2.
28 day Compressive Strength as shown on contract drawing.
C.
Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by Architect/Engineer. Use of
admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements.
D.
Use set-retarding admixtures during hot weather only, or in mass pours when approved by
Architect/Engineer.
E.
Add air entraining agent to concrete mix for lightweight concrete work only.
F.
Calcium Chloride will not be permitted.
SELECTION OF PROPORTIONS
A.
Mix designs shall be generated from an independent licensed commercial laboratory, approved by
the Architect.
B.
The proportioning of ingredients shall be readily worked into forms and around reinforcement
under conditions of placement to be employed, without segregation or excessive bleeding.
C.
The acceptability of the mix proportions shall be determined by one of the following methods:
1.
Whenever possible, mix proportions shall be determined by using ACI 318, Part 3,
Chapter 4. The acceptability of mix proportions shall be based on the standard deviation
of 30 sets of field compressive strength tests or two groups totaling 30 sets of data of the
same or similar mixes within 1000 psi of the specified work. A set is two cylinders made
from the same sample of concrete tested at 28 days. The required average strength shall
be calculated from either of these equations, whichever is greatest:
f'cr=f'c + 1.34 S
f'cr=f'c + 2.33 S -500
There are allowances for calculating f'cr when data totaling 15 to 30 sets of cylinders is
available in Table 4.3.1.2 of ACI 318, Part 3, Chapter 4.
2.
Verification of the suitability of the concrete producer's recommended proportions by a
qualified testing laboratory having supporting data.
3.
In lieu of actual field test data or individual mix verification, the proposed material may
be evaluated by a series of trial mixes.
4.
Only as a last resort, when no field or laboratory data exists, mixes shall be proportioned
using the maximum water cement ratios as shown in Table 4.4 of ACI 318 Chapter 4.
Specified
Compressive
Strength
f'c psi
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
Non-AirEntrained
Concrete
0.67
0.58
0.51
0.44
0.38
Air-Entrained
Concrete
0.54
0.46
0.40
0.35
03300-3
5.
D.
E.
2.6
The largest aggregate permitted by code shall be used unless otherwise approved by the
structural engineer.
Shrinkage Tests:
1.
Prior to placing any concrete for walls or horizontal surfaces, a trial batch of each mix
design of structural concrete shall be prepared using the aggregates, cement and
admixture (if any) proposed for the project. From each trial batch at least 3 specimens
for determining drying shrinkage shall be prepared. The drying shrinkage specimens
shall be a 4" x 4" x 11" prisms fabricated, cured, dried, and measured in accordance with
the requirements of Tentative Method of Test for Length Change of Cement Mortar and
Concrete, ASTM C157. The measurements shall be made and reported separately for 7
and 28 days of drying after 7 days of moist curing. The effective gage length of the
specimens shall be 10", and except for the foundation concrete, the average drying
shrinkage at 35 days shall not exceed .054%.
2.
Previous Test: Ready-mixed concrete manufacturer may furnish certified test reports
from approved Testing Laboratory as proof of meeting shrinkage requirements, provided
aggregate used and concrete covered by such test report conform to mix design approved
for use on this project. Method used, use an independent testing facility acceptable to
Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.
Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15
days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by
Architect. Review of design, mixes by the Architect will in no way relieve the contractor of his
responsibility for the performance of the concrete work.
PRODUCTION
A.
Ready Mixed Concrete:
1.
B.
Except as otherwise provided in these specifications, ready mixed concrete shall be
batched, mixed, and transported in accordance with ASTM C94 "Specifications for
Ready Mixed Concrete."
Mixing Water Control:
1.
Concrete which arrives at the jobsite with slump below that specified for placement may
be adjusted by the addition of water to increase slump, provided the maximum slump is
not exceeded, and provided that maximum water content of the design mix is not
exceeded. Following any such water addition the concrete shall be mixed at mixing
speed for at least 30 revolutions of the drum.
2.
After adjustment is made to the proper slump, the concrete shall be discharged for as long
as it retains its placeability without adding additional water.
3.
Concrete shall be placed within one and one half hour after mixer is charged in average
weather conditions. Time may be reduced to one hour during hot weather concreting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION
A.
Verify anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement, and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately
placed, held securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete.
03300-4
3.2
TESTING
1.
3.3
3.4
TESTING AGENCY
A.
The testing agency shall be designated by the owner, architect or engineer of record. Ample time
shall be allowed for preliminary tests as required prior to concreting operations.
B.
All testing agency personnel shall meet the requirements of ASTM E329, "Recommended Practice
of Inspecting and Testing Agencies for Concrete and Steel in Construction."
C.
All testing agency personnel shall have the knowledge and ability to perform the necessary tests
equivalent to the minimum guideline for Certification of Concrete Field Testing Technicians,
Grade I in accordance with ACI CP-2.
DUTIES AND SERVICES
A.
3.5
3.7
3.8
The duties and responsibilities of the testing agency and the contractor and services to be
performed by each are as designated in ACI 301, Chapter 16, "Specifications for Structural
Concrete for Buildings."
EVALUATION AND ACCEPTANCE
A.
3.6
General: Concrete materials and operations shall be tested and inspected for compliance
with the specifications requirements.
Test results of standard cylinders, molded, cured and tested according to ASTM C31 and C39
should be evaluated separately for each concrete mix according to ACI 214, "Recommended
Practice for Evaluation of Concrete Compression Test Results of Field Concrete."
ACCEPTANCE
A.
The criteria for acceptance of concrete shall be as detailed in ACI 318, Chapter 4, Paragraph 4.7,
"Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete" or as per ASTM C94, Section 17
"Strength" and Section 18 "Failure to Meet Strength Requirements."
B.
As referenced in ASTM C94 - Section 4.4, "When the strength of concrete is used as a basis for
acceptance, the manufacturer shall be entitled to copies of all test reports."
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare adjoining faces of previously placed concrete by cleaning with sand blasting. Sand
blasting procedures shall be in accordance with the rules and regulations promulgated by the
South Coast Air Quality Management District.
B.
At locations where new concrete is dowelled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete,
insert steel dowels, and pack solid with non-shrink grout.
C.
Install vapor barrier where called for on the drawings under interior slabs on fill. Lap joints
minimum 6 inches and seal. Turn moisture film up or down at least 6 inches and adhere it to the
adjacent vertical wall. Seal the vapor barrier at all plumbing and electrical penetrations. Do not
dis turb or damage vapor barrier while placing concrete. Repair damaged vapor barrier.
PLACING CONCRETE
A.
Notify Architect/Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations.
03300-5
3.9
B.
Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joints are not disturbed during concrete
placement.
C.
Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing as indicated on the drawings.
D.
Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction and control joints. Do not break
or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur.
E.
Place floor slabs on grade as indicated on Drawings.
F.
Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Architect upon
discovery.
G.
Placement of concrete between construction joints in walls and horizontal floor assemblies shall
not exceed sixty feet in length. Walls around corners may be placed 60 feet in each direction.
FINISHING
A.
3.10
PREPARATION
A.
3.11
The contractor shall provide access for delivery and provide sufficient equipment and manpower
to properly place all concrete.
1.
All work shall be in accordance with ACI 304, "Recommended Practice for Measuring,
Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete."
2.
Formwork shall have been completed, Snow, ice, excess water and debris shall be
removed from within forms.
3.
Expansion joint material, anchors and all embedded items shall have been positioned
prior to concrete placement.
4.
Dry subgrades shall be wetted sufficiently to minimize water loss from concrete.
5.
Concrete shall not be placed on frozen ground.
CONVEYING
A.
3.12
Concrete finishing and curing shall adhere to the requirement details in ACI 301, "Specifications
for Structural Concrete for Buildings" and ACI 302, "Guide for Concrete Floor Slab
Construction." Placement procedures shall be in accordance with ACI 304, "Measuring, Mixing,
Transporting and Placing Concrete."
Concrete shall be handled from the mixer to final point of deposit by methods which will prevent
segregation or loss of ingredients to maintain the required quality of concrete.
DEPOSITING
A.
Concrete shall be continuously deposited. When continuous placement is not possible,
construction joints shall be located as approved by the architect or engineer of record. Concrete
shall be deposited as close to its final point of placement as possible.
1.
Concrete shall be consolidated by vibration, spading, rodding or forking. Work concrete
around reinforcements, embedded items and into corners. Eliminate all air or rock
pockets and other causes of honeycombing, pitting or planes of weakness.
03300-6
2.
B.
3.15
3.17
b.
Use of vibrators to transport concrete shall not be allowed.
c.
Vibrators shall be vertically inserted every 18 inches for 5 to 15 seconds and
then withdrawn.
In warm weather, concreting shall be in accordance with ACI 305, "Hot Weather
Concreting."
To eliminate high and low spots and embedded large aggregate particles, a bull float or darby
should be used immediately after strike off. For non-air entrained concrete, these tools should
preferably be made of wood. For air entrained concrete, they can be of aluminum or magnesium
alloy. For additional information on finishing concrete sections, see ACI 302, "Guide for
Concrete Floor and Slab Construction."
CURING
A.
Immediately following placement, concrete shall be protected from premature drying, hot and cold
temperatures, wind, rain, flowing water, and mechanical injury. Materials and methods of curing
shall be approved by the architect or engineer of record. ACI 308, "Standard Practice for Curing
Concrete" shall be followed. Suggested methods shall include but are not limited to the
following: ponding, fogging, continuous sprinkling, continuously wet mats, waterproof paper, or
liquid membrane forming curing compounds.
B.
Application of liquid membrane-forming compounds shall not be applied at a square foot ratio
(square foot per gallon) above that for which the compound meets the ASTM C309, "Standard
Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete." Compounds shall
be placed in two coats. Second coat to be placed normal to first coat, that is, in opposite
directions.
SAW CUT JOINTS
A.
3.16
Vibrators shall be operated by experienced and competent workmen.
FINISHING
A.
3.14
a.
When the outdoor temperature is less than 40 degrees F, all work shall be in accordance with ACI
306 "Cold Weather Concreting."
1.
3.13
Internal vibration shall have a minimum frequency with amplitude to consolidate the
concrete effectively. See ACI 309, "Recommended Practice for Consolidation of
Concrete."
Form joints with powered saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades.
Cut joints into hardened concrete as soon as surface will not be torn, abraded, or otherwise
damaged by cutting action.
PATCHING
A.
Notify Architect/Engineer immediately upon removal of forms.
B.
Patch imperfections.
DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A.
Modify or replace concrete not conforming to required levels and lines, details, and elevations.
B.
Repair concrete not properly placed or of the specified type.
03300-7
3.18
A.
Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400.
B.
Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air
temperature, and test samples taken.
END OF SECTION
03300-8
SECTION 03310
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
1.2
Supply and installation of lightweight concrete as indicated.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit in accordance with Section 01300: Submittals.
1.
Mix Design: Testing laboratory designated by the Owner shall submit a concrete
mix design for each mix that will be used on job. Include water/ cement ratio, size
of coarse aggregate and amount of any admixture. Predict minimum compressive
strength, maximum slump and air content percentage.
2.
Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete shall deliver to the Owner a certificate with
each mixer truck. Certificate shall bear the signature of representative of the
testing laboratory, and shall state quantity of cement, water, fine and coarse
aggregate and admixture, if any, contained in load.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
GENERAL
A.
Laboratory designed mix shall be established by a Testing Laboratory designated by the
Owner.
B.
Designated mix shall be proportioned so as to produce concrete with a minimum
compressive strength as indicated on the drawings, and a unit weight of 90 to 100 lbs. per
cubic foot in the oven dry condition, at 28 days.
C.
Concrete shall be designed for site placement, with minimum slump necessary for efficient
placing and finishing. Maximum slump shall be 2-1/2", with a tolerance of plus or minus
1/2".
D.
When an air-entrainment agent is used, total air content shall range between a minimum of
3% and a maximum of 6%.
MATERIALS
A.
Portland Cement: Standard brand conforming to ASTM C150.
B.
Aggregates:
1.
Coarse aggregate shall be lightweight aggregate conforming to ASTM C330, and
shall be sealed, expanded shale such as "Rocklite", or equal.
2.
Fine aggregate shall be hardrock aggregate conforming to ASTM C33, or
lightweight aggregate conforming to ASTM C330.
03310-1
C.
Water shall be clean and free from deleterious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, salts, or
organic materials.
D.
Admixture: Air entraining agent shall conform to ASTM C260.
E.
Reinforcing Mesh shall conform to ASTM A185. Welded wire fabric shall be self-furring 4" x
4/14" - #14 gage welded mesh, furnished in flat sheets.
F.
Tie Wire shall be fully annealed, copper-bearing steel wire, #16 gage minimum.
G.
Cleavage Membrane: Provide 6-mil thick polyethelene sheet.
H.
Curing Paper shall be a standard brand conforming to ASTM C171 Type 1, regular.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Concrete shall be placed in its final position immediately after mixing is completed.
Rehandling to place concrete into position shall be kept to a minimum to prevent
segregation.
B.
After placement, concrete shall be rodded following directions of concrete placement
process. Rodded concrete shall then be tamped with a grid tamper. Re-rod in see-saw
method to finished elevations. After screeds and screed supports are removed, concrete in
removal areas shall be retamped.
C.
Immediately following above operation and while concrete is plastic, surface shall be bull
floated to level out tamp marks and humps. After floating, wait until concrete has reached
proper consistency to start steel troweling. To maintain surface in proper condition for
troweling, a light film of moisture can be applied with a mist type fog sprayer. Final
(second) troweling operation shall produce a hard, non-slip surface, free from defects and
blemishes.
D.
Finished surface shall contact a 10'-0" straight edge for its entire length. A maximum of
1/8" tolerance shall be permitted.
E.
All lightweight concrete floor fills shall be properly cured and protected against injury and
defacement during construction operations.
F.
Placement of curing paper shall immediately follow final troweling operation. However, if
concrete surface has started to dry due to high air temperatures, wind, or a combination of
two, spray concrete surface with a fine water mist.
G.
Curing paper shall be lapped 3" and sealed with waterproof sealer. Edges shall be
cemented to finish. Curing paper shall remain in place until removal is authorized by the
Owner. Paper that is torn or otherwise damaged during curing period shall be immediately
repaired or replaced. Paper shall remain in place for a minimum of 7 days.
H.
After removal of curing paper, cement surface shall be thoroughly washed, and mopped
clean.
03310-2
SECTION 04220
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Concrete block masonry.
B.
Reinforcing steel, mortar and grout for concrete block masonry. Furnish dowels to be
embedded in concrete for anchoring concrete block masonry to concrete.
C.
Install anchors, frames and similar items furnished by other trades for installation in
concrete block masonry.
D.
Remove excess mortar and grout, and clean exposed concrete block masonry surfaces.
RELATED WORK
A.
Reinforcing steel in Section 03200.
B.
Installation of dowels for anchoring concrete block masonry to concrete.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Tolerances for concrete block masonry:
1.
1.4
1.5
Maximum variation from plumb:
a.
In walls and corners: 1/4" in 10'; 3/8" in any story or 20' maximum; 1/2"
in 40'.
b.
For external corners and other conspicuous lines: 1/4" in any story or 20'
maximum; 1/2" in 40'.
2.
Maximum variation from level or indicated elevations: 1/4" in any bay or 20'; 1/2"
in 40'.
3.
Maximum variation from plan position indicated on the Drawings: 1/2" maximum.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Make submittals in accordance with the requirements of Section 01340 - "Submittals".
Submit mortar and grout mix designs.
B.
Submit certification showing compliance with the Specifications before delivering
concrete block units to the jobsite.
HANDLING
A.
Ship, handle and store concrete blocks to avoid chipping, cracking or damaging them.
Concrete block with spalled corners may be used provided the damaged corners are
04220-1
concealed in the finished work. Do not use damaged concrete block at exposed
locations.
B.
Store concrete blocks in a dry, well ventilated space, under cover and off the ground, to
prevent their getting wet.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Mortar and grout materials:
1.
Portland cement: ASTM C150, Type I or Type II; use same manufacture for all
work.
2.
Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.
3.
Aggregates:
4.
B.
2.2
a.
For mortar: Natural sand, ASTM C144.
b.
For grout: ASTM C404.
c.
Water: Potable.
Admixtures: Sika grout aid for all grout. Sika red label for mortar.
Concrete block: Fine-textured steam-cured units complete with all required special
shapes, conforming to the following requirements:
1.
ASTM C90, Grade N-1, hollow, load-bearing.
2.
Type: Normal Weight.
3.
Size: Dimensions as indicated on the Drawings.
4.
Colors: As indicated on the drawings, or if not so indicated colors shall be as
directed by the Architect.
5.
Texture: Provide split face units by Angeles Block Co., or equal. The texture
and color shall match the color of the metal siding as closely as practicable.
C.
Reinforcing steel: ASTM A615, Grade 60.
D.
Concrete block cleaner: "Sure Klean No. 600 Detergent" by Process Solvent Co., Inc.,
"Doex Chemical Cleaner" by National Chemsearch Corp., or equal.
MORTAR AND GROUT
A.
Mix mortar and grout uniformly in the proportions required by the Building Code. Readymix mortar and grout may be used, at the Contractor's option, provided it conforms to
Building Code requirements. Add admixtures at jobsite just prior to use. Turn mixture 30
revolutions after adding.
04220-2
B.
Job mix grout as fluid as possible for pouring without segregation of parts. Slump to
range between 8 and 10 inches.
C.
Mix mortar and grout by placing one-half of water and sand in a power operated mixer,
then add cement, lime, admixture, and the remainder of sand and water.
D.
Mortar may be retempered with water as required to maintain high plasticity. Retemper
on mortar boards only by adding water within a basin formed within the mortar and
rework the mortar into the water. Do not use mortar or grout which is unused within 1-1/2
hours of mixing.
E.
Mix mortar and grout mechanically for not less than three minutes after all ingredients
have been placed in the mixer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
INSPECTION
A.
Inspect adjacent construction and make sure that all conditions detrimental to the proper
and timely execution of this work have been corrected before proceeding.
B.
Inspection is required during preparation of masonry walls, sampling and placing of all
masonry units, placement of reinforcement, inspection of grout space, immediately prior
to closing of cleanouts, and during all grouting operations. Test specimens may consist
of either one prism test for each 5000 square feet of wall area or a series of tests based
on both grout and mortar for the first three consecutive days and each third day
thereafter.
SHORING AND BRACING
A.
Provide all shores and bracing required for this work. Construct shoring and bracing to
required shapes and sizes, capable of supporting and sustaining the loads to which they
will be subjected without failure or deflection. Leave shores and bracing in place until
concrete block masonry can safely carry all required live and dead loads.
B.
Brace concrete block masonry walls adequately to withstand all forces they will be
subjected to during construction. Walls are not designed to be self supporting for lateral
loads until attached to floor and roof elements.
WORKMANSHIP
A.
Erect concrete block masonry plumb, level, square and straight to indicated lines and
dimensions, with head joints filled solidly with mortar.
B.
Do not use fractional parts of concrete block where whole block can be used. Chinking
joints with fragments and bats is prohibited.
C.
Concrete block masonry shall be sound, dry, clean and free from cracks when placed.
Do not wet the block, except that in very dry weather the block contact surfaces shall be
moistened just before laying.
D.
Puddle grout and rod it thoroughly to insure its contact with cells of concrete block
masonry units and reinforcing steel. Provide at least 1/2" clearance between sides of
04220-3
concrete block masonry cells and reinforcing steel. For high lift grouting use mechanical
vibrator.
3.4
3.5
3.6
E.
Saw cut concrete block neatly and accurately as necessary to provide openings for the
work of other trades, with diamond or abrasive saws to produce straight, sharp edges
without spalling or other defects, and of sizes required to maintain uniform joint widths.
F.
If it is necessary to move a concrete block after it has been once set in place, remove the
unit, clean it and set it in fresh mortar.
REINFORCING STEEL
A.
Conform to the requirements of Section 03200. Place reinforcing steel in the locations
shown on the Drawings. When a dowel does not line up with a vertical core, do not slope
more than one horizontal in six vertical. Grout dowels in a core in vertical alignment,
even though it is a cell adjacent to the vertical wall reinforcing.
B.
Keep reinforcing steel straight, except at corners, and where bends or hooks are
specifically indicated on the Drawings. Lap splices in reinforcing steel in accordance with
Building Code requirements, and separate them by one bar diameter or wire them
together.
GROUTING
A.
Grout cells of indicated concrete block masonry in lifts less than 4' high. At Contractor's
option, high lift grouting may be used provided its installation conforms to Building Code
requirements, and the Contractor pays all necessary extra inspection costs.
B.
Keep mortar droppings out of grout spaces, or remove them from the grout spaces before
grouting. Puddle or vibrate grout thoroughly to eliminate air pockets and assure bonding
with reinforcing steel.
C.
Keep vertical cells free of mortar droppings and in vertical alignment to maintain
continuous, unobstructed cells not less than 4" x 4" when coarse grout is used, and 2" x
3" for all other conditions.
D.
Grout bolts and anchors inserted in the concrete block masonry solidly in place so that
there is a minimum of 1" of grout between the bolts and the side of the concrete block
masonry cell wall.
E.
Fill all cells solidly with grout. Stop pours 1-1/2" below the top of a course to form a
mechanical key at pour joints. Grout beams over openings in one continuous operation.
Solidly grout all courses containing horizontal reinforcing steel.
JOINTS AND BONDING
A.
Clean concrete bearing surfaces and remove all laitance by steel brushing or
sandblasting to expose the coarse aggregates before laying the first course of concrete
block masonry.
B.
Lay concrete block masonry in straight and uniform courses in a running bond pattern.
Lay the starting joint on concrete bearing surfaces with full mortar coverage, except that
area where grout occurs shall be free from mortar so that grout will contact the bearing
surface.
04220-4
3.7
C.
Mortar joints shall be straight, clean and of a uniform width (approximately 3/8"). Tool all
joints with a rounded jointing tool to produce concave joints well bonded to the block.
D.
Tool joints with a rounded bar when the mortar has partially set but still sufficiently plastic
to bond. Rake out joints which are not tight at the time of tooling, point and then retool.
E.
Horizontal joints shall have full mortar coverage on face shells. Butter head joints well for
the full width of the face shell and shove these joints tightly so that the mortar bonds well
to both concrete block.
CLEANING AND PROTECTING
Remove mortar and grout stains from concrete block surfaces immediately upon their discovery. Clean
exposed concrete block surfaces with one of the specified cleaners used in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's printed instructions. Take all necessary precautions to avoid staining the concrete
block and adjacent surfaces. Cover sills and top course of unfinished work with waterproof coverings
and tie securely in place to prevent its accidental displacement. Dampen (but don't saturate) the
surface of the concrete block masonry with a light fog spray when the atmosphere is excessively dry
and keep it damp for approximately three days to permit the mortar to thoroughly cure.
04220-5
SECTION 04411
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Furnish and install granite or limestone countertops as indicated on the drawings and
specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Limestone and granite shall be of the sizes, dimensions, and colors indicated, and shall
have a smooth polished finish surface.
B.
Limestone: Conform to ASTM C505, class I or II, polished. Provide hard, sound,
domestic limestone, with rounded edges and sand-rubbed finish on exposed surfaces.
Color shall be as selected by the Architect from the fabricator's standard products.
C.
Granite Association Standard: Granite shall conform to ASTM C615, Iridian, or Mt. Airy
varieties, sound, and polished finish. Color shall be as selected from the fabricator's
standard products.
D.
Installation Materials for Thin-Set Method
1.
Thin-Set Adhesive: Provide 3M Company "Scotch-Clad Thinset Adhesive," or
equal.
2.
Grout: Provide epoxy grout; Laticrete 210, or equal, color as selected by the
Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of granite and limestone
countertops. Do not commence the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
B.
Thin-Set Method: Install granite and limestone countertops in conformance with ANSI
A108.5, and as directed by the manufacturer.
C.
The granite and limestone countertops shall be covered and protected from damage until
completion of the work of all other trades. Defects which develop, such as loose, broken,
or chipped granite and limestone, shall be removed and replaced.
END OF SECTION
04411-1
SECTION 05120
STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
C.
1.2
Work Included: All labor, tools, materials and equipment necessary to install structural
steel as shown on the Contract Drawing and hereinafter specified and needed for a
complete and proper installation, including but not limited to the following:
1.
Connections, anchorages and accessories.
2.
Anchorages for safety harness.
3.
Structural steel beams, frames, truss, girders, and columns.
Related Sections:
1.
Setting Anchor Bolts and Concrete Foundations in Division 3.
2.
Masonry Work in DIVISION 4.
3.
Metal Fabrications in Section 05500.
4.
Wood Framing in Section 06100.
5.
Finish Painting in Section 09900.
Products Furnished but Not Installed Under This Section:
1.
Anchors for casting into concrete.
2.
Loose bearing plates to receive Structural Steel.
3.
Anchors for embedding in reinforced masonry.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Workmanship:
1.
The supplier of the structural steel and welders shall have been preapproved by
the City of L.A. Dept of Building and Safety. All structural steel shall be shop
inspected as required by the L.A. Building Code.
2.
Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS
"Standard Qualification Procedures".
Applicable Codes and Regulations:
1.
Los Angeles City Building Code, Division 27.
2.
AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.
3.
American Welding Society "Code D1-1 Structural Welding Code".
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120-1
C.
D.
E.
1.3
Applicable Standards:
1.
AISC Specifications for Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for
Buildings.
2.
RCRBSJ Specifications for "Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 Bolts."
Qualifications
1.
Fabricator shall be an organization that is licensed by the City of Los Angeles
Department of Building and Safety.
2.
Erector: Company specializing in the installation of structural shall have a
minimum of 5-years experience.
Provide shop inspection.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Comply with applicable Provisions in the SUBMITTALS SECTION IN DIVISION
- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS of these Specifications.
B.
Product Data:
1.
2.
Producer's Specifications recommended installation instructions, laboratory test
reports and other data required to prove compliance with the specified
requirements.
a.
Structural steel, including certified copies of mill test reports covering
chemical and physical properties.
b.
Unfinished bolts and nuts.
c.
High Strength Bolts, including nuts and washers.
d.
Structural steel primer paints.
Shop Drawing including complete details and schedules for fabrication and shop
assembly of members.
a.
Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes and other pertinent
data.
b.
Indicate welds by AWS symbols, show size, type and length of welds.
c.
Provide setting drawings, templates and directions for installing anchor
bolts and other required anchors.
d.
Identify details by reference to Sheet and Detail Number on the Contract
Drawings.
C.
Manufacturer's Mill Certificate: Submittal shall certify that products meet or exceed
specified requirements.
D.
Mill Text Reports: Submit manufacturer's certificates indicating structural strength,
destructive and non-destructive test analysis.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120-2
1.4
1.5
E.
Welder's Certificate: Submit manufacturer's Certificates certifying welders employed on
the work verifying AWS qualifications within the previous 12 months.
F.
Test Reports: Submit reports of tests conducted on shop and field welded and bolted
connections, including data on type of tests conducted and test results.
G.
Erection and Shoring Plan: Refer to Section 1710 Title 8, CCR, and the L.A. Building
Code. Employ a Registered Civil Engineer (RCE) licensed in California to prepare an
erection, bracing, and shoring plan, and erection procedure for structural steel, including
columns, beams, and girders. The RCE shall be solely responsible for compliance with
the Erection and Shoring Plan.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
Verify that field measurements, lines, grades and elevations agree with measurements
shown on the Contract Drawings. Concrete Contractor shall furnish the Steel Contractor
accurate as-built drawing of bolt settings.
B.
Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the correctness, conformity, accuracy and
execution of structural steel work.
PRODUCT HANDLING
A.
Delivery and Storage:
1.
Deliver materials, structural steel and components to the job-site properly marked
to identify location for which they are intended.
2.
Use markings corresponding to markings shown on the approved shop drawings.
3.
Store materials in a manner to permit easy access for inspection and
identification and to prevent damage, distortion, erosion and deterioration. Keep
steel members off ground using approved platforms or other supports.
4.
Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices which are to be embedded in castin-place concrete in ample time not to delay that work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: New tested and fabricated stock complying with applicable Standard
Specifications hereinafter referenced.
B.
Rolled Steel Sections, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A36. Dual rated steel is not acceptable.
C.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type E or S, grade B-welded seamless steel pipe and where
applicable API-5L, grade B.
D.
Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, grade B Structural Tubing.
E.
Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307, non-headed type with heavy hexagonal nuts unless otherwise
indicated on the Drawings.
F.
Unfinished Threaded Fasteners:
1.
ASTM A307, Grade A, regular low carbon steel bolts and nuts.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120-3
2.
2.2
Provide either hexagonal or square heads and nuts; except use only hexagonal
units for exposed connections.
G.
High Strength Threaded Fasteners: Provide heavy hexagonal structural bolts, heavy
hexagonal nuts, and hardened washers, all quenched and tempered medium carbon
steel complying with ASTM A325.
H.
Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS Code, using AWS A5.1 or A5.5 E70XX
electrodes.
I.
Dry Pack: A cement-sand mix of 1 part Portland Cement to 2-1/2 parts sand by volume
with necessary water added to provide for solid compaction.
J.
Primer: Use primer complying to FS TT-P-862, Type I, rust inhibitive product, compatible
with finish coat specified in Section 09900.
K.
Non-Shrink Grout: An approved non-shrinking premixed material or a cement-sand mix
of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand by volume, with water added as necessary for a
mixture to flow under its own weight and which will develop a 3000 psi strength; "PorRok" by Hallemite Mfg. Company or "Embeco" by Master Builders or equal.
FABRICATION
A.
Workmanship: In accordance with AISC Code of Standard Practice and best trade
practices.
B.
Shop Fabrication and Assembly:
C.
1.
Fabricate items in accordance with AISC specifications, and as indicated on the
approved Shop Drawings.
2.
Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly and for identification
as to location for which intended.
3.
Fabricate for delivery sequence which will expedite erection and minimize field
handling of materials.
4.
Where finishing is required, complete the assembly, including welding of units,
before start of finishing operations.
5.
Provide finish surfaces of members exposed in the final structure free from
markings, burrs, and other defects.
6.
Joints and intersections to be accurately made, tightly fitted, true to plane and
accurately fastened.
7.
Provide bearing plates, connection stiffeners and gussets as necessary for the
work indicated on the Drawings whether detailed or not.
Connections:
1.
Methods: Bolted or welded as indicated on the Drawings.
2.
Provide bolts and washers of types and sizes required for completion of field
erection.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120-4
3.
4.
D.
2.3
High strength bolted construction:
a.
Install high strength threaded fasteners in accordance with AISC
"Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts."
b.
Use A325N bolts unless noted otherwise.
Welded construction: Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance, and
quality of welds.
a.
Shop and field welding to be done by a fabricator licensed by the Los
Angeles City Board of Building and Safety Commissioners in accordance
with Los Angeles City Building Code Section 91.0310 (a) and (b).
b.
Repair welds by methods as provided for in Article 410 of the AWS
Specifications D1.0 Costs of repairs to be borne by the Contractor.
5.
Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods which will produce true
alignment of axes without warp.
6.
Furnish templates and other devices as necessary for presetting bolts and other
anchors to accurate locations.
Holes for Other Work:
1.
Provide holes required for securing other work to structural framing, and for
passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on the
2.
Provide threaded nuts welded to framing, and other specialty items as shown, to
receive other work.
3.
Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.
4.
Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning.
5.
Drill holes in bearing plates.
SHOP PAINTING
A.
B.
General:
1.
Prime coat structural steel work, except those members or portions of members
to be embedded in concrete or mortar, or surfaces designated to receive applied
fire proofing.
2.
Prime coat embedded steel which is partially exposed on the exposed portions,
and the initial 2" of embedded areas only. Finish coat will be applied in the field.
3.
Do not prime coat surfaces which are to be welded or high-strength bolted with
friction type connections. Welds shall be prime coated after the connection has
been made.
4.
Apply two coats of paint to surfaces which are inaccessible after assembly or
erection. Change color of the second coat to distinguish it from the first.
Surface Preparation:
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120-5
C.
D.
1.
After inspection and before shipping, clean steelwork to be painted. Remove
loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag, and flux deposits.
2.
Clean steel in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council SP-3, "Power
Tool Cleaning".
Shop Painting:
1.
Immediately after surface preparation, apply structural steel primer paint in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and at a rate to provide a
uniform dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils.
2.
Use painting methods which will result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges,
and exposed surfaces.
Galvanize structural steel members conforming to ASTM A123. Provide minimum 1.25
oz/sq ft galvanized coating.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
SURFACE CONDITIONS
A.
3.2
ERECTION
A.
Comply with AISC Specifications and "Code of Standard Practice", except as may be
modified herein.
B.
Anchor Bolts:
1.
Provide as indicated on the Drawings; Anchor bolts and other connectors
required for securing structural steel to foundations and other in-place work.
2.
Provide templates and other devices necessary for presetting bolts and anchors
to accurate locations in concrete or masonry construction.
3.
Arrange and pay for all torque testing of anchor bolts or dowels required by the
Codes.
C.
Bases and Bearing Plates: Shop weld to columns and members attached to concrete.
D.
Setting Bases and Bearing Plates:
1.
Clean concrete bearing surfaces free from bond-reducing materials, and then
roughen to improve bond to the surface.
2.
Clean the bottom surface of base and bearing plates.
3.
Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members in
wedges or other adjusting devices.
4.
Tighten anchor bolts after the supported members have been positioned and
plumbed.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120-6
5.
Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with the edge of
the base or bearing plate prior to assure that no voids remain.
6.
Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to assure that
no voids remain.
7.
Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure in strict
compliance with the manufacturers' recommendations as approved by the City
Engineer or Consultant.
8.
Apply grout in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Grout shall have a
compressive strength of not less than 3000 psi in 7 days.
E.
Splicing: Splice only where indicated in the shop drawings. For splices not indicated,
submit structural calculations prepared and signed by a Structural Engineer licensed to
practice where the fabricator is located.
F.
Gas Cutting:
G.
H.
I.
1.
Do not use gas cutting torches for correcting fabricating errors in the structural
framing.
2.
Cutting will be permitted only in secondary members as acceptable to the City
Engineer or Consultant.
3.
When gas cutting is permitted, finish the gas cut section to a sheared
appearance acceptable to the City Engineer or Consultant.
Surveys:
1.
Establish permanent benchmarks necessary for accurate erection of structural
steel.
2.
Check elevations of concrete surfaces, and locations of anchor bolts and similar
items, before erection proceeds.
Temporary Shoring and Bracing:
1.
Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with connections of sufficient
strength to bear imposed loads.
2.
Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignments of the structure as
erection proceeds.
3.
Remove temporary connections and members when permanent members are in
place and the final connections have been made.
Field Assembly:
1.
Set structural frames accurately to the lines and elevations indicated.
2.
Align and adjust members forming part of a complete frame or structure before
fastening permanently.
3.
Clean the bearing surface, and other surface which will be in permanent contact,
before assembly.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120-7
3.3
4.
Adjust as required to compensate for discrepancies in elevation and alignment.
5.
Level and plumb individual members of the structure within specified AISC
tolerances.
6.
Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on the mean operating
temperature of the structure, making allowances for the difference between
temperature at time of erection and the mean temperature at which the structure
will be when completed and in service.
7.
Comply with AISC specifications for bearing, adequacy of temporary
connections, alignment, and the removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to welds.
TESTING AND INSPECTING
A.
B.
C.
Testing: The Contractor shall engage and pay a testing laboratory that is acceptable to
the City Engineer.
1.
The Contractor's selected testing laboratory will pick up specimens and make
required tests.
2.
Cost of procuring test specimens will be paid by the Contractor.
3.
Costs of tests of identified stock will be paid by the City; except that if a test fails
to comply with the specified requirements, the cost of testing will be paid by the
Contractor.
4.
Costs of tests of unidentified stock will be paid by the Contractor.
Test Specimens:
1.
Test specimens, including existing steel members to be tested for weldability,
shall be taken under the direction of the Contractor's testing laboratory.
2.
Each specimen shall be machined by the testing laboratory to dimensions
required by ASTM A370.
3.
Cost of procuring, making, and machining test specimens shall be considered
test costs as defined above.
Identification and Tests:
1.
If structural steel can be identified by heat or melt numbers, and if accompanied
by mill analysis and test reports, not less than one tension and one bend test will
be made for each ten tons or fractional part thereof.
2.
If structural steel cannot be identified, or if its source is questionable, not less
than one tension test and one bend test will be made for each five tons or
fractional part thereof.
3.
If steel pipe is identified by heat numbers, or manufacturer name, not less than
one tension test and one bend test will be made for each ten tons or fractional
part thereof.
4.
Additional tests may be required when deemed necessary by the City Engineer.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120-8
D.
E.
Inspecting:
1.
A complete four sided inspection of steel will be made when required by the City
Engineer.
2.
Cost of inspecting will be paid by the City subject to the same provisions made
above for tests.
3.
If, after fabrication and inspection, the work of this Section is found to be
defective and to require reinspection, cost of such reinspection will be paid by the
City and backcharged to the Contractor.
4.
Provide labor, equipment, and facilities needed to move and handle the materials
to be inspected.
Welding Inspection:
1.
Unless otherwise specified, perform welding under observation of a qualified
inspector from a testing laboratory approved by the City Engineer.
2.
Inspect every layer of weld for quality, penetration, and conformity with design
requirements.
3.
Require the welding inspector to submit a signed report to the City Engineer,
verifying that:
a.
The welding is adequate and was performed in conformity with the
specified requirements; and
b.
Adequate methods have been used to determine the quality of the
welding.
4.
The welding inspector may use gamma ray, magnaflux, trepanning, or any other
aid to visual inspection considered necessary to assure adequacy of welding, or
may use ultrasonic testing performed in accordance with pertinent requirements
of governmental agencies having jurisdiction. The Contractor shall arrange and
pay for gamma ray, magnaflux, ultrasonic, or other testing.
5.
Cost of visual welding inspection will be paid by the City. The Contractor shall
arrange and pay for gamma ray, magnaflux, ultrasonic, or other testing.
F.
For the anchorage of the safety harness the welding inspector shall use gamma ray,
magnaflux, ultrasonic, or any other aid to visual inspection considered necessary to
assure quality of welding. The Contractor shall arrange and pay for gamma ray,
magnaflux, or ultrasonic testing of the safety harness anchorage welding.
G.
Access: Provide access for the testing agencies and inspectors to places where
structural steel work is being fabricated or produced, so that required testing and
inspecting may be accomplished.
H.
Erection Inspecting:
1.
The City's testing and inspecting agency will inspect high strength bolted
connections, will visually inspect field welded connections, will perform such
additional tests and inspections of field work as are required by the City
Engineer, and will prepare test reports for the City Engineer's review.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120-9
2.
I.
3.4
The testing agency will conduct and interpret the tests, and will state in each
report whether the inspected work complies with the requirements, specifically
stating all deviations therefrom.
Corrections:
1.
Correct deficiencies in structural steel work which inspections and test reports
indicate to be not in compliance with the specified requirements.
2.
Perform additional tests required to reconfirm noncompliance of the original work
and to show compliance of corrected work, all at no additional cost to the City.
FIELD PAINTING
A.
General: Prepare surfaces in a manner appropriate to the condition, and as approved by
the City Engineer. Clean spots and surfaces where primer coats have been removed,
damaged, or burned off, and clean field bolts and other field connections not concealed in
the finished work. Remove dirt, oil, and grease. Apply a spot coat of the approved
primer. Do not apply paint to wet, damp, oily, or improperly prepared surfaces.
B.
Apply one finish coat of finish enamel in accordance with Section 09900 Painting.
C.
Notify the City Engineer when the work of this Section is ready to receive field painting.
1.
Secure inspection and approval by the City Engineer prior to field painting.
2.
Using spray or brush, as recommended by the manufacturer of the approved
paint material, fill all joints and corners and cover the surfaces with a smooth
unbroken film of at least 1.5 dry mils thickness.
3.
Apply two coats to all surfaces of steel which will be in accessible for painting,
after fabrication and erection.
END OF SECTION
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120-10
SECTION 05300
METAL DECKING
1
1.1
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.2
Work Included: All metal roof decking indicated on the Contract Drawings and in these
Specifications, principally including:
1.
Corollary materials, flashings and closures, dams, accessories conventionally
furnished with this work, and as indicated on the Drawings.
2.
Cutting and reinforcing all holes in decking indicated on the Architectural and
Structural Drawings.
3.
Miscellaneous steel reinforcement around openings in decking, and curbs
welded to decking.
Related Sections:
1.
to the GENERAL CONDITIONS, and Sections in DIVISION 1 of these
Specifications.
2.
Structural Steel Work in Section 05120.
3.
Metal Fabrication in Section 05500.
4.
Sheet Metal Work in Section 07600.
5.
Finish Painting in Section 09900.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Comply with Provisions in the SUBMITTALS SECTION in DIVISION 1 - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS of these SPECIFICATIONS.
B.
Product Data: Within 45 calendar days after the Contractor has received the City's
"Notice to Proceed", submit the following:
1.
Submit for approval prior to fabrication seven (7) sets in lieu of quantity specified
in GENERAL CONDITIONS.
2.
Materials list of all items proposed to be provided under this Section.
3.
Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with
the specified requirements.
4.
Shop and Erection Drawings to be prepared and submitted prior to fabrications or
delivery:
a.
Show all details of connections, attachment, erection diagrams,
accessory materials. Contract Drawings shall govern. Details not shown
METAL DECKING
05300-1
shall be according to other similar details on Contract Drawings. Indicate
as specifically excluded, any intimately related materials not actually a
part of this work.
b.
5.
1.3
A.
Metal decking shall be installed by an organization approved by the Los Angeles City
B.
Use adequate number of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in
the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and the
methods needed for the proper performance of the Work of this Section.
Workers must be skilled in the installation of materials and worker's workmanship
shall be first class in all respects.
C.
Fire-Resistive Construction: When the materials of this Section are used as part of an
assembly indicated on the Contract Drawings in which fire-resistive construction ratings
are required, demonstrate approval by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. and the
governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
D.
Applicable Codes:
E.
1.5
Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by
the City Engineer or the Consultant, will become the basis for accepting or
rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work of this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.
1.4
Contractor shall be responsible for accuracy of all dimensions, proper fit,
and adequacy of connections.
1.
Los Angeles City Building Code, Division 27.
2.
American Welding Society Code D1.1, Structural Welding Code.
Applicable Standards:
1.
AISI Specifications for the "Design of Light-Gage Cold Formed Steel Structural
Members."
2.
"Basic Design Specifications" as adopted by the steel Deck Institute.
COORDINATION AND COOPERATION
A.
Perform work of this Section in a full coordinated and cooperative manner with work of
other related trades to provide complete installation as detailed and specified in a most
expeditious manner without delay to job progress.
B.
Consult the Contract Drawings and other trades and expedite and coordinate materials
and labor to avoid omissions, errors and delays.
INSPECTIONS
A.
Shop: Required for all shop fabricated items at no cost to the Contractor or his
Subcontractor.
METAL DECKING
05300-2
B.
1.6
2
2.1
Field: Perform field welding under continuous inspection of Registered Deputy Inspector
at the City's cost, except instances or rework, retesting, and reinspection, the costs of
which shall be borne by the Contractor.
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A.
Delivery: Deliver work of this Section and commence installation at the job-site at the
time established by the building schedule.
B.
Storage and Handling: Take every precaution to avoid damage and to keep surfaces
clean and free from dirt and stains. Provide materials with adequate protection, as
required, to prevent damage during shipment and handling at job-site.
PRODUCTS
METAL DECK UNITS
A.
Design: Design the units in accordance with AISI "Specifications for Design of Light
Gage Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" with appropriate steel fiber stress
limitations and appropriate live load deflection limitations.
B.
Acceptable manufacturer shall be by BHP, or an "Or equal" product by either of the
following:
1.
Vulcraft.
2.
H. H. Robertson
3.
Verco
C.
Metal Decking: Formed from steel conforming to AISI SG-673, latest edition.
D.
Closures: Provide for various locations at penetrations and perimeters using galvanized
steel and gasketing as standard with manufacturer and shown on Drawings and
E.
Galvanizing Repair Materials: "Galvalloy," "Galvabar," or equal.
F.
Accessories: Provide accessories specifically designed to be used with the metal deck
units supplied to the work, and as normal to uses shown on the Contract Drawings.
1.
Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete
and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of
the City Engineer or the Consultant.
2.
Provide sheet metal closures for open ends of all cell raceways at walls and
openings.
3.
Provide sheet steel cover plates as required to close panel ends conditions
where panels change direction or abut and as required to retain concrete fill at
edges of steel decking.
4.
Provide closures as necessary to support roofing insulation where ribs of decking
are parallel to edges of insulation at roof perimeters.
METAL DECKING
05300-3
G.
2.2
3
3.1
3.2
Related Materials:
1.
Solder: ASTM B32, composed of not less than 40 percent block tin with
manufacturer's name, class and grade cast thereon.
2.
Flux: Muriatic acid killed with zinc or an approved brand of soldering paste. After
soldering, wash off remaining acid flux with a solution of soap and 5 to 10
percent washing soda. Use a special flux for stainless steel.
3.
Tin: Best grade, pure and new block tin for tinning irons, seams and other items.
4.
Flashing Cement: Neoprene, ASTM D412, trowel grade having 500-pound psi
tensile strength and 250 percent elongation.
5.
Paint primer (for uncoated ferrous metals) Rust-Oleum Corp. "X-60 Base Metal
Red Primer," "Tenemec 10," or equal.
FABRICATION
A.
Workmanship: In accordance with applicable standards hereinbefore specified and the
Contract Drawings and approved Shop/Erection Drawings and these Specifications.
B.
Required: For new roofs and floors in accordance with this Specification and as indicated
on the Contract Drawings.
C.
Type and Manufacture Roof Decking: See Structural Drawings.
D.
Materials: As hereinbefore specified above, gage and profile type as indicated on the
Contract Drawings, all having a galvanized coating on each side, and having a total
weight of not less than 0.04-oz. per square foot, coated prior to fabrication and having no
other factory treatment which would affect bond of paint or other protective coating.
E.
Design: Form steel roof units to have a Section Modulus and a Moment of Inertia per
foot of width equal to that on the City of Los Angeles Research Report, and noted on the
Contract Drawings (structural) as governed by AISI applicable Standards and the Los
Angeles City Building Code.
EXECUTION
VERIFICATION OF CONDITIONS
A.
Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed to
verify that all surfaces to receive said work is satisfactory.
B.
Correct all defects in workmanship and/or materials which would affect the work of this
Section, subject to the directions and approval of the City Engineer or the Consultant at
no added cost to the City.
C.
Do not proceed with work of this Section until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
ERECTION
A.
General:
METAL DECKING
05300-4
3.3
3.4
In accordance with approved Shop and Erection Drawings, Contract Drawings
and as hereinafter specified.
2.
Prior to start of installation, verify that beams, etc. are in proper alignment and
that surfaces are clean for welding.
B.
Holes for Openings: Cut roof wall or ceiling decking to fit openings which are indicated
on the Contract Drawings.
C.
Erection or Installation:
1.
Place the steel decking roof deck units on the supporting framework and adjust
to final position before being permanently fastened. Bring each unit to proper
bearing on the supporting beams. Place the units in straight alignment for the
entire length of run and with minimum of space between ends of abutting units.
Fasten steel units to the steel framework at ends of units and at intermediate
supports by welds not less than 3/4-inch width of unit. Where two units abut,
fasten each unit to the steel framing. Make welds free of sharp points or edges.
Fasten the side laps of adjacent units between supports at intervals not
exceeding 3-feet.
2.
Fastenings to Structural Steel: Fusion, seam, and plug welded, lengths and
sizes of welds as indicated on the Drawings. Strictly adhere to all indicated
elevations. Report deviations of supporting members from required elevations
to the Inspector before decking is fastened to the supporting structure.
3.
Install accessory items in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended
installation procedures as approved by the City Engineer or the Consultant.
FIELD GALVANIZING
A.
Required: For repairing damaged galvanize surface coatings resulting from welding or
other construction operations in the field or at the job-site.
B.
Method: "Galvalloy," "Galvabar," or equal, in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
TOUCH-UP
A.
3.5
1.
Upon Completion of Installation and as a condition of acceptance of Work of this Section;
visually inspect each item installed and locate surfaces where finish was damaged.
1.
Apply touch-up paint with a hand brush, thoroughly work into all joints, corners
and open spaces and well brush over the surfaces; after all connections and
welding have been approved; do not apply to damp or wet surfaces.
2.
Touch-up galvanized surfaces with zinc-rich primer or other galvanized repair
paint approved for the purpose by the City Engineer or the Consultant.
CLEAN-UP
A. Required: In addition to provisions in GENERAL REQUIREMENTS of DIVISION 1, keep work
and adjacent areas affected free and clear of debris caused by Work of this Section.
During and upon completion of work herein specified, remove from the building and the
job-site all debris, unused materials, and equipment caused by this work and leave the
work in an acceptable condition.
METAL DECKING
05300-5
METAL DECKING
05300-6
SECTION 05410
1
1.1
GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
1.3
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work specified in this section.
SUMMARY
A.
Work Included: Furnish and install cold formed metal stud system as indicated on the
drawings and specified. Cold formed metal framing systems for exterior plastered walls
and for load bearing walls and partitions.
B.
Related Work:
1.
Structural Steel: Section 05120.
2.
Metal Framing Furring for Gypsum Board in Section 09260.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.
Where design of studs, joists, bracing and other framing members and connections are
not indicated they shall be designed by a professional civil or structural engineer
registered in the State of California and employed by the Contractor. Design shall
include fasteners, attachments and lateral bracing required for proper installation. Design
shall conform to the following criteria:
1.
Exterior Wall Framing: Design exterior wall framing to withstand the wind loads
and seismic loads specified in Chapter 23 of the City of Los Angeles Building
Code with deflection limited to L/360.
2.
Load Bearing Wall Framing: Design framing to support intended design loads
shown on the drawings.
3.
Compute structural properties of studs, joists, bracing, and other framing
members in accordance with AISI "Specifications for Design of Cold-Formed
Steel Structural Members".
B.
Engineer, design, make calculations, do shop drawings, pay for a plan check by the City,
and obtain a permit, fabricate and erect the cold formed metal stud system to withstand
loads from winds, gravity, structural movement including movement thermally induced,
and to resist in-service use conditions that the system will experience, including exposure
to the weather, without failure.
C.
Submit the engineering drawings to the Architect, along with the structural engineer's
certificate prepared and signed by the Engineer, verifying that the cold formed metal
framing system meets the requirements and codes of the City of Los Angeles.
05410-1
1.4
1.5
2
2.1
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit framing manufacturer's literature, including a current City of Los
Angeles Research Report, showing tabulation of structural properties, load capacities,
dimensions, metal gauges and type of coating for all framing and furring members.
Submit powder driven fastener manufacturer's current City of Los Angeles Research
Report.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for wall and partition framing systems and special
assemblies where the design is not indicated. Show size, gauge and cross sections and
spacing of framing members; connections including welding procedures and electrodes;
and supplemental strapping, bridging, lateral bracing, accessories, and details required
for proper installation. Furnish layout of required clips or slots to the metal deck installer
well in advance of deck installation.
C.
Submittal procedures and quantities are specified in Section 01340.
D.
Preinstallation Conference: Before beginning installation of the metal framing systems,
hold a conference with representatives of the installers of metal framing systems, door
frames, plaster, gypsum board, mechanical and electrical construction, Contractor, and
City Engineer in attendance. The conference shall assure a clear understanding of the
drawings and specifications, resolve possible conflicts and establish coordination
between all parties involved.
PRODUCT HANDLING
A.
Store metal studs above ground and protect from corrosion.
B.
Store welding electrodes in as to prevent damage.
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A. Products of the following manufacturers are approved for use on this project, or equal:
2.2
3.1
Angeles Metal Systems; ICBO Evaluation Report No. ER-1715P.
2.
CEMCO.; ICBO Evaluation Report No. ER-3403.
3.
Western Metal Lath; ICBO Evaluation Report No. ER-2274
MATERIALS
A.
3
1.
Steel studs shall be "C" type structural studs conforming to ASTM A446, grade Dminimum yield of 50 ksi, galvanized, 16 gauge unless indicated otherwise, sizes shall be
as indicated.
EXECUTION
ERECTION
A.
Erect plumb and true. Install accessories as indicated and as necessary for proper
installation.
05410-2
3.2
B.
Anchor top and bottom runner track to ceiling or roof structure overhead and to floor
structure below.
C.
Studs shall set squarely in the top and bottom runner track with firm abutment against
track webs.
D.
Align and plumb studs, and fasten to flanges of both top and bottom runner tracks.
E.
Provide three studs minimum at corners of stud walls. Locate so as to provide surfaces
for attachment of all interior and exterior facings.
F.
Members not indicated to be welded together shall be attached with manufacturer
recommended screws using one screw at each flange of stud to top and bottom track.
Wire tying of framing members is not acceptable.
G.
Provide lateral bracing and bridging in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
H.
Intersecting walls and partitions, whether load-bearing or not, shall be connected.
I.
Splices in axially loaded studs or exterior stud walls are not permitted.
J.
Splice or butt weld all butt joints in the runner tracks. No splices are permitted in tracks
over lintels, diaphragm sheathing, or diagonal bracing.
K.
Weld connections by fillet welds or plug welds in accordance with AWS recommended
procedures and practices.
L.
Touch-up field abrasions and welds with galvanizing touch-up material.
M.
Studs framing door openings shall be clipped to the floor with 14 gauge angle clips, with
two fasteners into studs and two fasteners into floor.
N.
Size and space studs used as joists as indicated on Drawings.
O.
Provide additional blocking adjacent to exterior and interior walls, openings and
elsewhere as necessary to provide support for ceiling construction as indicated.
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Welding Inspection:
1.
Inspection of all field welding operations shall be made by a qualified Welding
Inspector approved by the Office of the State Architect.
2.
The Welding Inspector shall check the material, equipment, procedures, welds as
well as the competence of the welder. He shall furnish the Architect with a report
duly verified by him that the welding which is required to be inspected is proper
and has been done in conformity with the approved Drawings and Specifications.
3.
The Welding Inspector shall use all means necessary to determine the quality of
the welds.
05410-3
SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
Work Included: Provide and install all miscellaneous metal and metal fabrications in place,
as indicated on the Contract Drawings and hereafter specified or needed for complete and
proper installation.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Inspection of shop fabrication shall be as required by the L.A. Building Code and the
California Building Code.
B.
Qualifications of Personnel: Use only adequate number of skilled workers who are
thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and are completely familiar with
the necessary crafts and with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper
performance of the work of this Section.
C.
Welder's Qualifications: Currently qualified according to AWS D1-1, and the L.A.
D.
Design: Fabricate and erect work in accordance with A.I.S.C.
E.
Welding Operations: Perform shop and field welding required in connection with work of
this Section in strict accordance with pertinent recommendations of the American Welding
Society (AWS).
F.
Project Conditions: Do not fabricate components which require fitting to structural elements
or into finished spaces until dimensions are verified at the job-site.
G.
Provide shop inspection.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Materials List: Submit list of proposed items to be provided under this Section.
C.
Shop Drawings: Submit for all items proposed to be fabricated and installed under this
Section. Identify each proposed item with corresponding Contract Drawing detail and
Specification references.
PRODUCT HANDLING
A.
General:
1.
Fabricated metal items shall not be fabricated or delivered to the job-site before
required review of the Shop Drawings by the City Engineer or the Consultant and
returned to the Contractor.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500-1
2.
Store fabricated metal items above ground on platforms, skids or other approved
supports in a weathertight and dry location until ready for installation.
B.
Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials and manufactured items of
this Section before, during and after installation and to protect the work and materials of all
other trades.
C.
Replacements: In the event of damage to work of this Section, immediately make all
repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the City Engineer or the Consultant
and at no added cost to the City.
D.
Materials to be Installed by Others:
1.
Deliver anchor bolts and other anchorage devices to be embedded in concrete to
the job-site in time before start of concrete work operations.
2.
Provide setting drawings, templates and other directions necessary for installation
of anchor bolts and devices.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A.
B.
General:
1.
All material shall conform with the following requirements and shall be of new stock
of the highest grade available, free from defects and imperfections, of recent
manufacture and unused. Where two or more identical articles or pieces of
equipment are required, they shall be of the same manufacture.
2.
All metals shall be free from any defects which would impair the strength, durability,
appearance, and shall be of the best commercial quality, for the purposes intended
and adequate to withstand the strains and stresses to which they will be subject.
Metals shall be protected from injury at the job, in transit, and until erected in place,
inspected, and approved.
Miscellaneous Related Materials:
1.
Welding Electrodes: Conform to AISC and ASTM A233 and the Code for Arc and
Gas Welding in Building Construction, A.W.S. Publication D1.1 use E-70XX Series
Electrodes.
2.
Aluminum channel Sills: Provide extruded aluminum conforming to ASTM B261.
Accurately fabricate the material, free from blemishes and irregularities. Finish
shall be mill finish and painted.
3.
Aluminum channels, tees and other shapes to be installed in the Patio and back of
the building shall conform to ASTM B221. Fabricate units to form smooth, sharp,
well-defined lines and arrises. Finish shall be mill finished and painted.
4.
Hot-Dip Galvanizing: Conform to ASTM A123 after fabrication.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500-2
2.2
2.3
5.
Fasteners: Same material and finish of work to be fastened together; screws to be
countersunk oval head type, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
6.
Mechanical Anchors: For securing miscellaneous metal items to concrete to be
self-drilling concrete anchors, not less than 3/8-inch size, Phillips Redhead, or as
otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
7.
Bolts and Nuts: Low-carbon hexagon-head type, ASTM A-307, Grade "A" or "B".
8.
Miscellaneous: All items of miscellaneous metal indicated on drawings, including
clip angles, ties, straps, anchors, bolts, angles, rods, and other appurtenances
required by details or necessary for proper installations.
9.
Dry Pack: A cement-sand mix of 1 part Portland cement to 2-1/2 parts sand by
volume with necessary water added to provide for solid compaction.
SHOP PAINT
A.
Primer: Use "10-99 Tnemec Primer" or "Rustoleum Number 5769 Primer.
B.
For Repair of Galvanizing: Use a high zinc-dust content paint complying with MIL-P-21035.
FABRICATION
A.
Field Measurements: Secure all field measurements required for proper and adequate
fabrication and installation of all work of this Section.
B.
Workmanship:
1.
Except as otherwise shown on the Contract Drawings or the approved Shop
Drawings, use materials of size, thickness, and type required to produce
reasonable strength and durability in the work of this Section.
2.
Fabricate with accurate angles and surfaces which are true to the required lines
and levels, grinding exposed welds smooth and flush, forming exposed connections
with hairline joints, and using concealed fasteners wherever possible.
3.
Prior to shop painting or priming, properly clean metal surfaces as required for the
applied finish and for the proposed use of the item.
4.
On surfaces inaccessible after assembly or erection, apply two coats of the
specified primer. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from the first.
5.
Work to dimensions shown or accepted on the Shop Drawings, using proven details
of fabrication and support.
6.
Conform to applicable provisions of Los Angeles City Building Code, Division 27.
7.
Form exposed work true to line and level, with accurate angles and surfaces and
with straight sharp edges.
8.
Ease the exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32-inch unless otherwise
shown.
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500-3
C.
D.
E.
9.
Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without impairing the work.
10.
Welding: Electric arc welding, Los Angeles City Building Code, Division 27.
11.
Bolting: Bolts to be drawn tight and threads set to secure nuts.
12.
Assembly: Assemble all items with parts in true alignment and accurately fitted,
joints well made, adequately fastened with butts and sharp edges ground smooth.
13.
Conceal all fastenings where practicable and make exposed joints hairline.
14.
Nonferrous metal items shall comply with best practice of the trade. Form all
sections true to detail and free from defects impairing appearance, strength, and
durability.
15.
Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish
hardware and similar items.
16.
On surfaces inaccessible after assembly or erection, apply two (2) coats of the
specified primer. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from the first coat.
Galvanizing: Provide a zinc coating for those items shown or specified to be galvanized as
follows and as applicable:
1.
ASTM A153 for galvanized iron or steel hardware.
2.
ASTM A123 for galvanized rolled, pressed or forged steel shapes, plates, bars and
strip 1/8-inch thick and heavier.
3.
ASTM A386 for galvanized assembled steel products.
Shop Painting: Use primer complying to FS TT-P-862, Type I, rust inhibitive product,
compatible with finish coat specified in Section 09900. Field paint shall be in colors
selected by the Architect.
1.
Required: On all uncoated ferrous metals; galvanized ferrous metal not to be shop
coated.
2.
Painting: Full prime coating, completely covering the metal surfaces; at least 1 coat
on all surfaces which will be accessible after fabrication and erection; at least 2
coats on all surfaces which will be inaccessible after erection.
3.
Remove scale, rust and other deleterious materials before application of Shop
Coating.
4.
Clean off heavy rust and loose mill scale in accordance with SSPC-SP-2 or SSPCSP-3 before coating.
5.
Remove oil, grease and similar contaminants in accordance with SSPC-SP-1.
Carpenter's Iron Work: Furnish all bent or otherwise fabricated bolts, plates, anchors,
hangers and other miscellaneous steel items not readily obtainable "OFF-THE-SHELF" and
required for anchoring work to concrete, masonry and interior partitions. Fasteners shall be
of the same material as the item being fastened. Items to be built into masonry or cast into
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500-4
concrete shall be delivered to the job-site in time to avoid any delay of other trade
operations. Anchor, for mechanical anchoring of items to concrete shall be self-drilling type
and minimum 3/8-inch size.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
SURFACE CONDITIONS
A.
3.2
COORDINATION
A.
3.3
Coordinate work of this Section as required with other trades to assure proper and
adequate provisions in the work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section.
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
3.4
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work.
General:
1.
Set work accurately into position, plumb, level, true, and free from rack.
2.
Anchor firmly into position.
3.
Where field welding is required, comply with AWS recommended procedures of
manual-shielded metal-arc welding for appearance and quality of weld and for
methods to be used in correcting welding work. Grind exposed welds smooth, and
touchup shop prime coats.
4.
Do not cut, weld, or abrade surfaces which have been hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication and which are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.
5.
Dissimilar Materials: Where metals are in contact with plaster, or dissimilar metals,
paint contact faces of the metal before installation with a heavy bituminous coating.
Immediately After Erection: Clean the field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas
of shop priming. Paint the exposed areas with same material used for shop priming.
CLEAN-UP AND ADJUSTMENT
A.
During the progress of the work, keep the premises free from debris and waste resulting
from work of this Section. Upon completion of this Section remove all surplus materials and
debris from the job-site. Immediately after erection, clean the field welds, bolted
connections and abraded areas of shop priming. Paint the surfaces with the same material
used for the shop priming.
B.
Adjustments: Adjust all operating parts and/or assemblies as may be required to provide
the necessary function and smooth operation.
- End of Section -
METAL FABRICATIONS
05500-5
SECTION 05506
ENCLOSURE GATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Furnish and install enclosure gates for trash and transformer enclosures as indicated on
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
STEEL PLATES, SHAPES, AND BARS
A.
2.2
STEEL SHEETS
A.
2.3
Submit data for hardware approval. Provide latches for each gate or door, and 3 hinges
per jamb.
WORKMANSHIP
A.
2.5
Steel sheets shall be hot- or cold-rolled, and of perforated or expanded metal in the
pattern indicated on the drawings. Sheets shall be not lighter than 20 gage with a solid
face area of not less than 70 percent.
FINISH HARDWARE
A.
2.4
Plates, shapes, and bars shall conform to ASTM A36.
Corner joints shall be coped or mitered, well-formed, and in true alignment. Joints
exposed to the weather shall be formed and fabricated to exclude water.
SHOP PRIMING
A.
Primer: Shop prime gates with "Tnemec Series 10" or approved equal, applied to a
minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
WORKMANSHIP
A.
The frames shall be drilled and tapped as required for finish hardware. Gates shall be
hung to remain open when set in the fully open position. Hinges shall operate freely
without excessive looseness.
ENCLOSURE GATES
05506-1
SECTION 05515
STEEL LADDER
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
Furnish and install the steel ladder as indicated on the drawings.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit shop drawings showing dimensions, profiles, and details of installations, including
fastenings and anchorages.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
STEEL LADDER
A.
Steel ladder shall be comprised of solid rungs fitted into holes drilled in side rails, plug
welded both sides. Provide bracket supports at top, bottom, and intermediate points.
B.
The ladder shall comply with safety requirements of ANSI 14.3 and CCR, Title 8, General
Safety Orders, Sec. 3277.
C.
The ladder shall be all steel, bar or channel rail, fixed type of steel shapes, and plates
that conform to ASTM A36.
D.
Fastening and anchoring devices:
1.
Expansion shields shall be FS FF-S-325, of group, type, class, and style best
suited for the purpose.
2.
Screws shall conform to ANSI B18.2.1, type and grade best suited for the
purpose.
3.
Bolts and nuts shall conform to ANSI B18.2.2 and ASTM A 307.
E.
Welding: Weld shall be continuous and in accordance with requirements of AWS Code.
Grind exposed welds smooth and flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces.
F.
Galvanizing shall be by the hot dip in accordance with ASTM A123.
G.
Shop Priming: Ladder shall be shop primed with the fabricator's standard rust inhibitive
paint. The primer shall be brush or spray applied, covering surfaces with a smooth
unbroken film. Minimum dry film thickness of primer shall be 2.0 mils.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install the ladder in accordance with the approved shop drawings and the manufacturer's
installation instruction.
STEEL LADDER
05515-1
SECTION 05551
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
1.3
Furnish and install pedestrian mat gratings as indicated on the drawings and specified.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit the following:
B.
Product data for the pedestrian mat gratings. Include installation instructions.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Verifications and Measurements: Check actual locations of floor depressions and
other construction to which the pedestrian mats must fit, by field measurements and
observations before fabrication.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Pedestrian mat gratings shall be "RG-2000 aluminum Grating” by Pawling Corporation, or
equal, and suitable for wheel chair traffic.
B.
Mat gratings shall be fabricated of extruded bars and shapes that conform to ASTM B221,
alloys 6063-T5.
C.
Fasteners for Aluminum Gratings: Use fasteners made of same basic metal as fastened
metal except use galvanized fasteners complying with ASTM A153 for exterior aluminum
units. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with metals joined.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Furnish anchorages, directions for installation of anchorages, to be embedded in
concrete. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of the gratings.
B.
Install gratings as recommended by the manufacturer of the unit. Protect gratings from
damage with heavy wood panels or other protective measures.
05551 - 1
SECTION 06100
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
B.
1.2
All rough carpentry work indicated on the Contract Drawings and as hereinafter specified,
including:
1.
Blocking and nailers and framing anchors.
2.
Miscellaneous wood, nails, screws and rough hardware indicated or and required
for complete and proper installation.
3.
Wood framed partition construction.
Related Sections:
1.
the GENERAL CONDITIONS, and Sections in DIVISION 1 - GENERAL
2.
Concrete Formwork in Section 03300.
3.
Finish Carpentry and Millwork in Section 06200.
4.
Built Up Roofing in Section 07500.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in
the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and
the methods needed for the proper performance of the work of this Section.
B.
Codes and Standards:
1.
1.3
In addition to complying with the pertinent codes and regulations of the City of Los
Angeles Building code, comply with the following:
a.
"Product Use Manual" of the Western Wood Products Association for
selection and use of products included in that manual;
b.
"Plywood Specification and Grade Guide" of the American Plywood
Association;
c.
"Standard Specifications for Grades of California Redwood Lumber" of the
Redwood Inspection Bureau for Redwood, when used.
SHOP DRAWINGS
A.
Submit shop drawings showing the locations of backing, furring, blocking, and nailers.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100-1
1.4
1.5
A.
Verification of Job Conditions: Required and take field measurements as may be required.
Report to the City Engineer or Consultant any discrepancies between the Drawings and jobsite conditions, for further instructions.
B.
Coordination and Cooperation: Do work of this Section in a fully coordinated and
cooperative manner with work of other trades to provide complete and proper installation
and to expedite the job without delays.
C.
Defective Work: All work of this Section that is not set true to line, plane and elevation or is
damaged or marred or is not in a condition to receive other trade work will not be accepted.
Remedy remove or replace defective work to a first class condition as approved by the City
Engineer or Consultant, at no added cost to the City.
D.
Clean-Up: During the progress of the work of this Section, keep the premises free of debris
and waste resulting from the work of this Section. Upon completion, all surplus materials
and debris shall be removed from the job-site.
PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver the rough carpentry materials to the job-site and store in a safe area, out of
way of traffic and shored up off the ground surface, where directed by the City Engineer.
B.
1.
Identify framing lumber as to grades and store each grade separately from other
grades.
2.
Protect metal items with adequate waterproof outer wrapping and properly identify
or label such items.
3.
Use extreme care in off loading of lumber to prevent damage, splitting and breaking
of materials.
Protection: Stack lumber to prevent warping and keep dry.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
GRADE STAMPS
A.
Identify framing lumber by the grade stamp of the West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau,
or such other grade stamp as is approved in advance by the City Engineer or Consultant.
B.
Identify plywood as to species, grade, and glue type by the stamp of the American Plywood
Association.
C.
Identify other materials of this Section by the appropriate stamp of the agency approved in
advance by the City Engineer or Consultant.
D.
Conform to the Los Angeles City Building Code.
MATERIALS
A.
Provide materials in the quantities needed for the work shown on the Drawings and meeting
or exceeding the following standards of quality at the time of delivery:
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100-2
1.
B.
2.3
Furnish lumber manufactured to comply with PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber
Standard" and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by
American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review.
Seasoning:
1.
Rough lumber to be air dried and well seasoned to have average moisture content
not to exceed 19 percent.
2.
Finish lumber to be kiln dried as closely as practicable to have an average
moisture content not exceeding 12 percent.
PRODUCTS
A.
Structural Lumber: Provide all structural lumber, studs, joists, and other framing members
of the species and grade indicated on the drawings.
B.
Blocking and Nailers: Douglas Fir, "Construction" grade, pressure treat with chromate zinc
chloride.
C.
Plywood: Conform to U.S. Product Standard P.S. 1-74. Plywood shall be grade-marked by
the American Plywood Association (APA), Pittsburgh Testing Laboratories (PTL) or Timber
Engineering Company (TECO). Plywood shall be exterior grade, Structural I.
D.
Nails, Screws, and Lag Screws: Commercial Standard.
E.
Bolts and Washers: American Standard.
F.
Preservative Treated Wood:
1.
Wood and plywood specified as treated wood shall be pressure treated wood in
accordance with UBC Standards "Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process and
Quality Control Standards."
2.
Seasoning: Treated lumber shall be air seasoned after treatment, for at least 2
weeks before using in the work.
3.
Creosote shall not be used for treating wood in contact with painted or plastered
surfaces.
4.
When treated wood has been notched, dapped, drilled or in any way cut into, such
newly cut surfaces shall be painted with a heavy coat of the preservative material
used in the treatment of the wood.
G.
Fire Retardant: All wood shall be treated with Baxter "Pyresote", Barnard "Bar Flame" or
equal.
H.
Building Paper: Kraft paper complying with Fed. Spec. UU-B-7902.
I.
Factory made metal devices, joist hangers, anchors and other metal work used for framing
shall be as manufactured by Union, Simpson, Teco or equal and as approved by the
Architect.
J.
Load Bearing Studs: Douglas Fir WCLIB No. 1 grade.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100-3
2.4
2.5
K.
Beams and Stringers: 5-inch and thicker, width more than 2-inch greater than thickness,
Douglas Fire WCLIB No. 1 structural beams and stringers.
L.
Wall Sills: Treated Douglas Fir of WCLIB grade for wall framing or Redwood CRA
Foundation grade as market or branded by an approved agency of the Los Angeles City
MINIMUM SURFACING
A.
General: All faces required to be left exposed; where specifically indicated on the Drawings
or specified; where necessary to achieve proper connections to other members.
B.
S1E: Blocking, studs, joists, rafters, purlins, bridging and other members in which uniform
width must be maintained.
C.
S1S1E: Plates, sills and other members in which uniform width and thickness must be
maintained.
D.
S4S: Exposed wood except where noted otherwise.
OTHER MATERIALS
A.
Consultant.
1.
Glue: As suitable for required joining; water-resistant where subject to moisture
conditions.
2.
Stock Framing Connectors and Brackets: "Simpson," "Teco" or "Trimfast"
galvanized metal of types and sizes indicated or required. Use nails furnished by
the connector manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
SURFACE CONDITIONS
A.
3.2
3.3
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed
until detrimental conditions are corrected.
COMPLIANCE
A.
Do not permit materials not complying with the provisions of this Section to be brought onto
or to be stored at the job-site.
B.
Promptly remove non-complying materials from the job-site and replace with materials
meeting the requirements of this Section.
WORKMANSHIP
A.
Produce joints which are tight, true and well nailed, with members assembled in accordance
with the Contract Drawings and with pertinent Codes and Regulations.
B.
Selection of Lumber Pieces:
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100-4
3.4
1.
Carefully select the members.
2.
Select individual pieces to that knots and obvious defects will not interfere with
placing bolts or proper nailing, and will allow making of proper connections.
3.
Cut out and discard defects which render a piece unable to serve its intended
function.
4.
Lumber may be rejected by the City Engineer or Consultant, whether or not it has
been installed, for excessive warp, twist, bow, crook, mildew, fungus or mold, as
well as for improper cutting and fitting.
GENERAL FRAMING
A.
B.
General: Execute rough carpentry in accordance with the Los Angeles City Building Code,
Divisions 25 and 48 as applicable.
1.
In addition to framing operations normal to the fabrication and erection indicated on
the Drawings, install wood blocking and backing required for the work of other
trades.
2.
Set horizontal and sloped members with crown up.
3.
Do not notch, cut, or bore members for pipes, ducts, or conduits, or for other
reasons except as shown on the Drawings or as specifically approved in advance
by the Consultant or City Engineer.
4.
Make proper allowances for shrinkage where possible. Splicing between bearings
not permitted.
5.
The contact surfaces of any member coming in contact with an exterior concrete or
masonry wall regardless of height above ground shall be treated wood or shall be
painted with two coats of an approved preservative.
6.
Wood at eaves that support copper cladding shall be preservative treated material.
Bearings:
1.
Make bearings full unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
2.
Finish bearing surfaces on which structural members are to rest so as to give sure
and even support.
3.
Where framing members slope, cut or notch the ends as required to give uniform
bearing surface.
C.
Furring and/or Stripping: Provide Douglas Fir Boards, S4S, in accurate spacing and
straight alignment, and at right angles to framing. Securely nail to framing at every bearing
with suitable box nails or other fastening as approved by the City Engineer.
D.
Crickets: Construct crickets of lumber and plywood, or of rigid roofing insulation in forms
that will divert water away from the vertical surface.
E.
Wood Nailers:
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100-5
F.
3.5
3.7
Materials: Pressure treated lumber, sizes, and shapes as indicated on the
Drawings.
2.
Installation: In level position, tightly bolt in place with nuts or heads countersunk
and make ready for receiving sheet metal copings; as indicated on the Drawings.
Plywood Backing:
1.
Required: For supports for Mechanical and/or Electrical equipment on walls. Back
prime before installation.
2.
Material: 3/4-inch plywood "B-D" grade; sizes as noted or indicated on the
Drawings.
3.
Installation: At location indicated on the Drawings; bolt to structural framing so as to
bear weight of equipment; countersink all fasteners.
BLOCKING AND BRIDGING
A.
3.6
1.
Install blocking as required to support items of finish and to cut off concealed draft
openings, both vertical and horizontal, between ceiling and floor areas.
INSTALLATION OF PLYWOOD SHEATHING
A.
Placement: Place plywood with face grain perpendicular to supports and continuously over
at least two supports, except where otherwise shown on the Drawings. Center joints
accurately over supports, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
B.
Protect Plywood from moisture by use of waterproof coverings until the plywood in turn has
been covered with the next succeeding component or finish.
FASTENING
A.
General: Comply with provisions of the Los Angeles City Building Code, and the California
Building Code.
B.
Nailing:
1.
Use only common wire nails or spikes of the dimension shown on the Nailing
Schedule, except where otherwise specifically noted on the Drawings. Sinker nails
are not allowed.
2.
For conditions not covered in the Nailing Schedule, provide penetration into the
piece receiving the point of not less than 1/2 the length of the nail or spike,
provided, however, that 16d nails may be used to connect two pieces of 2"
(nominal) thickness.
3.
Nail without splitting wood.
4.
Prebore as required.
5.
Remove split members and replace with members complying with the specified
requirements.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100-6
C.
D.
Bolting:
1.
Drill holes 1/16" larger in diameter than the bolts being used. Drill straight and true
from one side only.
2.
Do not bear bolt threads on wood, but use washers under head and nut where both
bear on wood, and use washers under all nuts.
Screws: For lag screws and wood screws, prebore holes same diameter as root of threads,
enlarging holes to shank diameter for length of shank.
- End of Section -
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100-7
SECTION 06158
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
B.
1.2
Contractor shall participate in promoting efforts of City to help create an
environmentally-sensitive structure.
2.
Contractor shall use products with recycled content, toxic-free, and
environmentally-sensitive materials, products, and procedures to the greatest
extent feasible.
Provide elements constructed of recycled wood and plastics to ensure adequate strength
for the safe support of all superimposed loads, in addition to their own dead load, without
exceeding allowable stresses allowed by the Building Code of the City of Los Angeles.
Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to the
GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and Sections in Division 1
- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS of these Specifications.
SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
1.4
1.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.3
Furnish and install recycled wood and plastics as indicated on the drawings and specified
for the purpose of assuring the most environmentally conscious Work feasible within the
limits of the Construction Schedule, Contract Sum, and available materials.
Required Notification: Notify City Engineer when Contractor plans to furnish and install
recycled wood or plastics that meet the aesthetic and programmatic intent of Contract
Documents, but which are more environmentally-sensitive than materials or products
specified or indicated in the Contract Documents.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit product data fully describing the proposed recycled wood or plastic materials.
Include descriptive literature with material characteristics, physical properties,
performance characteristics, instructions on installation methods and procedures and
safety precautions.
B.
Submit samples of recycled wood and plastic in sufficient number and size to show the
principal characteristics of each kind and class of material.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
WOOD POLYMER COMPOSITE
A.
Recycled wood and plastics shall be Trex as manufactured by Environmental Specialty
Products, (909) 390-8800, or equal.
B.
The material shall be Mobile (or equal) wood polymer composite suitable for decking and
landscape applications.
06158-1
C.
Materials shall be inherently resistant to moisture and decay due to exposure to weather,
and have the following attributes:
2.
Readily painted, or stained using customary commercially available paint
products.
3.
Not susceptible to insect infestation
D.
The lumber product shall be comprised of reclaimed plastic and waste wood, and contain
no preservatives. Units shall be readily worked, sawed, sanded, nailed, drilled and
turned on a lathe.
E.
The decking product shall be nonslip when wet and be free from splinters.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION OF MATERIALS
A.
Recycled wood and plastics shall be install in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
B.
Coordinate the recycled wood and plastics work with the work of other trades at the
jobsite to ensure that components which are to be incorporated into the Project are
available to prevent delays or interruptions as the work progresses. Verify substrate
conditions are suitable for installation of recycled system components as the work
progresses in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
C.
Install all work in accordance with the UBC, the approved submittals, and the
manufacturer's recommendations and instructions to assure compliance with the
requirements specified herein. In the event of conflict between the specified.
06158-2
SECTION 06171
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer shall be a company specializing in manufacture of glue laminated structural
units with three years minimum experience, and certified by the AITC or in accordance with
ANSI A190.1 and approved by the City of Los Angeles.
B.
Affix Quality Control Mark on each glue laminated structural unit; locate on surface which
will not be exposed in completed work.
A.
1.4
1.5
Furnish and install glue laminated structural units as indicated on the drawings, including
the steel framing anchors and devices.
Conform to the Building Code of the City of Los Angeles, CCR Title 24, and the California
Building Code.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit shop drawings. Indicate sizes and spacing of members, loads and cambers,
bearing and anchor details, bridging and bracing, and framed openings.
B.
Provide technical data on wood preservative materials, application technique, and resultant
performance information.
C.
Submit samples for selection of finish colors.
D.
Submit three copies of Certificate of Conformance.
WARRANTY
A.
Provide two year warranty. Include coverage for materials and workmanship, and repair of
other work damaged as a direct or indirect result of improper materials or workmanship.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Lumber: Douglas Fir-Larch.
1.
Conform to UBC Standards.
2.
Conform to WCLIB grading rules.
3.
Inspect and identify by individual piece.
4.
Certify as meeting the requirements of the nominal size of the individual lamination
by an approved lumber grading agency.
06171-1
5.
2.2
Complete grading prior to start of gluing operation.
B.
Steel Connections and Brackets: ASTM A36; weldable quality, hot-dip galvanized to ASTM
A123 1.25 oz/sq ft.
C.
Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307, galvanized to ASTM A153.
D.
Adhesive: ASTM D2559; Type I, for wet condition of service.
E.
Sealer: Clear penetrating type suitable to retard transmission of moisture.
F.
Bearing Plate Anchors: Size and type indicated; where not indicated, provide size and type
best suited for intended use.
FABRICATION
A.
Conform to requirements of CCR Title 24.
B.
Conform to UBC Standards; Grade combination 24F-V8 DF/DF for multiple spans or
cantilevers, 24F-V4 DF/DF elsewhere.
C.
Fabricate glue laminated structural members in accordance with AITC architectural grade
where exposed to view, industrial grade or better elsewhere.
D.
Fabricate for dry condition of use, timber service temperature not to exceed 150 degrees F.
Glue shall be same as for wet condition of use.
E.
End Joints
1
F.
2.
Portions of scarf in adjacent laminations shall be separated by a minimum of 6
inches.
3.
Strength reducing defects such as wane shall not be permitted in or near end joints.
4.
The sum of the sizes of knots appearing in a bevelled surface of a scarf joint shall
not exceed 1/4 the nominal width of the lamination.
5.
Plain scarf joints shall have a slope not greater than 1:10.
6.
Subject to the acceptance of the Architect, finger joints may be substituted for the
above described scarf joints.
Moisture Content
1.
G.
End joints shall be pre-glued, plain scarf joints.
At the time of gluing, the moisture content of lumber shall be not less than 7
percent, nor more than 12 percent.
Individual Laminations: 2 inch or less; uniform in each member.
1.
Surface to be glued shall be clean and free from oil and other foreign matter.
2.
Laminations shall be machine finished, not sanded, to a smooth surface and
uniform thickness with maximum allowable variation of 1/64 inch.
06171-2
3.
H.
I.
Warp, twist, or other characteristics which will prevent close contact of adjacent
glued surfaces shall not be permitted.
Adhesives
1.
Each lot number of adhesives shall be certified to be manufactured to conform to
these specifications.
2.
Mixing, spreading, pot life, storage life, working life, and assembly life shall be in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.
Mechanical spreaders shall be used, except at scarfs.
Clamping
1.
Method shall be such as to provide uniform pressure over entire area.
2.
Clamping may start at any point, but shall continue to an end or ends.
3.
Gluing pressure shall assure close surface contact and provide uniformly thin glue
line, but shall not exceed 100 psi.
4.
Clamping time and curing process shall be in accordance with adhesive
manufacturer's instructions.
5. Nailing in lieu of clamping shall not be permitted.
J.
2.3
Sealing
1.
Immediately after end cutting each member to final length, and after wood
treatment, apply a saturation coat of end sealer to ends and other cross-cut
surfaces, keeping surfaces flood coated for not less than 10 minutes.
2.
After fabrication and sanding of each unit, and after end cut sealing, apply a heavy
saturation coat of penetrating sealer on surfaces of each unit.
K.
Verify dimensions and site conditions prior to fabrication.
L.
Cut and fit members accurately to length to achieve tight joint fit. Fabricate member with
camber built in. Do not splice or join members in locations other than that indicated, without
permission.
M.
Fabricate steel hardware and connections with joints neatly fitted, welded, and ground
smooth.
N.
Identification: Suitably mark each member and wrapping to identify final location in the
work. Identify tops of beams, unless configuration leaves top visible.
FINISHING
A.
Apply manufacturer's standard "dry appearance" penetrating acrylic stain and sealer; type
resistant to mildew and fungus. Oven dry.
B.
Color: Selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standards.
06171-3
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
ERECTION
A.
Erect in accordance with the approved shop drawings and CCR Title 24. Install connectors
and fittings. Set structural members level and plumb, in correct positions.
B.
Provide temporary bracing and anchorage to hold members in place until permanently
secured. Fit members together accurately without trimming, cutting, or other unauthorized
modification. Fit squarely on supports; do not use shims.
C.
Do not cut or drill members except as indicated on reviewed shop drawings. Where
members are field cut or trimmed, apply same sealer as used to seal shop cuts.
D.
Remove protective wrappings only after adjacent work has been completed and there is no
threat of damage to glue laminated structural units.
REPAIR AND ADJUSTMENT
A.
3.3
Repair of damaged members shall be by original fabricator only, and shall be subject to the
approval of the Architect.
TOLERANCES
A.
Framing Members: 1/2 inch maximum from true position.
- End of Section -
06171-4
SECTION 06200
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
DESCRIPTION
A.
Furnish and install finish carpentry as indicated on the ddrawings and specified including,
nails, screws, and other items as needed for the construction shown on the Contract
Drawings, and as needed for a complete and proper installation.
B.
Related Sections:
to the GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS and
2.
Metal Fabrications in Section 05500.
3.
Rough Carpentry in Section 06100.
4.
Architectural Woodwork in Section 06400.
5.
Caulking and Sealants in Section 07900.
6.
Wood Doors in Section 08200.
7.
Paint Finishes in Section 09900.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.3
1.
Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in
the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and
the methods needed for the proper performance of the work of this Section.
REQUIREMENTS
A.
Submittals: Comply with provisions in the SUBMITTALS Section 01340 in DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS of these Specifications. Submit shop drawings,
manufacturer's technical data and material specifications and samples as applicable, for
all products specified herein for City Engineer's review prior to start of work of this
Section.
B.
Verification of Job Conditions: Required and take field measurements as may be
required. Report to the City Engineer or Architect any discrepancies between the
Drawings and job-site conditions, for further instructions.
C.
Coordination and Cooperation: Do work of this Section in a fully coordinated and
cooperative manner with work of other trades to provide complete and proper installation
and to expedite the job without delays.
FINISH CARPENTRY
06200-1
1.4
D.
Defective Work: All work of this Section that is not set true to line, plane and elevation or
is damaged or marred or is not in a condition to receive other trade work will not be
accepted. Remedy remove or replace defective work to a first class condition as
approved by the City Engineer or Architect, at no added cost to the City.
E.
Priming and Backpainting: Priming and backpainting of all carpentry and millwork is
specified in Painting - Section 09900. Do not set items until priming and backpainting
have been done.
F.
Protection: Protect all work against damage of any kind until final acceptance of the
building. Repair or replace damaged work to the satisfaction of the City Engineer without
additional cost to the City.
G.
Delivery, Storage and Handling:
1.
No fabrication, finishing or installation shall be performed until Shop and Erection
Drawings and finish samples have been approved by the City Engineer or
Architect.
2.
Defer delivery to the job until the installation and storage areas are complete and
dry of all wet-type construction.
3.
Maintain relative humidity in storage areas not to exceed 60 percent and
protected from extreme changes in temperature and humidity.
4.
Protect all surfaces of work subject to damage while in transit.
REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS
A.
Manufacture all millwork in accordance with the standards established in the latest edition
of the (WIC) "Manual of Millwork" of the Woodwork Institute of California, or equivalent
construction, in the grade or grades hereinafter specified or as shown on the Contract
Drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
GRADE STAMPS
A.
Identify lumber by the grade stamp of the West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau, or such
other grade stamp as is approved in advance by the City Engineer or Architect.
B.
Identify plywood as to species, grade, and glue type by the stamp of the American
Plywood Association.
MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide materials in the quantities needed for the work shown on the Contract
Drawings and meeting or exceeding the following standards of quality:
B.
Lumber and Plywood: New, clean stock of the species and WIC grades shown below.
1.
Douglas Fir for concealed stripping, blocking and framings manufactured and
graded in accordance with "Standard Grading and Dressing Rules 16 of WCLIB,
"D" VG Finish Grade S4S, kiln-dried to a maximum 12% moisture content.
FINISH CARPENTRY
06200-2
C.
2.3
2.
Softwood: WIC Section 3, "Custom" grade Douglas Fir, vertical grain.
3.
Hardwood: WIC Section 4, "Premium" grade, solid select White Oak, selected
for clear finish.
4.
Softwood Plywood: WIC Section 5, "Custom" grade Douglas Fir - rotary cut.
5.
Hardwood Plywood: WIC Section 6, "Custom" grade, select Red Birch.
6.
Closet Shelving:
a.
Shelves 11-1/2" Wide or Less: Douglas Fir-Hemlock, B and Better
grade; or Ponderosa Pine, B and Better grade.
b.
Shelves Wider Than 11-1/2": 3/4" thick, A-D, group 1, interior plywood
with 3/8" x 3/4" Douglas Fir or Pine bands on visible edges.
7.
Clothes Rods: Douglas Fir, 1-3/8" diameter, with nylon sockets each end and
Stanley 7045 steel bracket at center of all rods 48" long or longer.
8.
Wood Base: Ponderosa Pine "ranch base", 9/16" x 3-1/4".
Interior Millwork:
1.
Interior trim per WIC Section 10, "Premium" grade, select White Oak unless
otherwise specified.
2.
Miscellaneous interior millwork per WIC Section 11 "Premium" grade, select
White Oak, stain grade. Closet shelving shall be WIC "Custom" grade, softwood
solid stock or exposed edgebanded plywood, cleat supported unless otherwise
indicated.
3.
Interior trim per WIC Section 12 "Premium" grade, select Clear White Oak.
OTHER MATERIALS
A.
Architect.
1.
Glue: As suitable for required joining; water-resistant where subject to moisture
conditions.
2.
Reinforced Building Paper: Sisalkraft; the Sisalkraft Company, Chicago, Illinois.
3.
Stock Framing Connectors and Brackets: "Simpson", "Teco" or "Trimfast",
galvanized metal of types and sizes indicated or required. Use nails furnished by
the connector manufacturer.
4.
Nails: Use finish nails for finish carpentry and millwork.
FINISH CARPENTRY
06200-3
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
SURFACE CONDITIONS
A.
3.2
WORKMANSHIP
A.
Produce joints which are true, tight and well nailed with all members assembled in
accordance with the Drawings.
B.
Jointing:
C.
3.3
1.
Make joints to conceal shrinkage; miter exterior joints; cope interior joints; miter
or scarf end-to-end joints.
2.
Install trim in pieces as long as possible, jointing only where solid support is
obtained.
Fastening:
1.
Install items straight, true, level, plumb, and firmly anchored in place.
2.
Where blocking or backing is required, coordinate as necessary with other trades
to ensure placement of required backing and blocking in a timely manner.
3.
Nail trim with finish nails of proper dimension to hold the member firmly in place
without splitting the wood.
4.
Nail exterior trim with galvanized nails, making joints to exclude water and setting
in waterproof glue or the sealant described in Section 07920 of these
Specifications.
5.
On exposed work, set nails for putty.
6.
Screw, do not drive wood screws; except that screws may be started by driving
and then screwed home.
7.
Nailing, Screwing and Bolting: Conform to provisions of Los Angeles City
Building Code, Uniform Building code Supplement, Table 25-Q in Division 25 as
applicable to Finish Carpentry.
MILLWORK
A.
Assemble all millwork at the mill as far as practicable, and deliver to building ready to set
in place. Work material in the best manner known to the trade, mortise and tenon, dowel,
block, and glue together so as to avoid the use of nails as much as possible. Follow
detail closely, cut moldings cleanly and define sharply and make miters accurately. Butt
joints without an approved device for preventing the separation of the joint will not be
accepted. Set all nails, and where screws are used in exposed surfaces, conceal with
wood plugs.
FINISH CARPENTRY
06200-4
3.4
SHELVES, HOOK STRIPS, GUSSETS AND HANGING RODS
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.5
1.
Single boards may be used for shelving 12" or less in width. Built-up shelves
more than 12" wide shall be 3/4" thick plywood or particle board with edge bands.
2.
Installation: Support shelves at ends and back on hook strips or cleats, as
indicated on Drawings; securely screw to the strips or cleats; set level; locate top
of coat closet shelves 5-feet, 8-inches above floor, unless otherwise indicated on
the Drawings.
Hook Strips and Cleats:
1.
Material: Douglas Fir boards, S4S; 1-inch x 6-inch for hook strips, 1-inch x 2-inch
for cleats except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
2.
Installation: Securely attach to walls by means of flathead screws, into suitable
shields in the masonry; screws countersunk.
3.
Gussets: Douglas Fir plywood, Interior A-A grade, 3/4-inch thickness, secured
with glue and countersunk screws to mounting strips, as indicated on the
Drawings.
Hanging Rods:
1.
Material: 1-inch diameter aluminum pipe.
2.
Installation: Set centerline of rod 1-1/2-inches below bottom surface of shelf and
12-inches forward of hook strips.
Shelf Struts:
1.
Material: Douglas Fir boards, S4S, 1-inch x 3-inch.
2.
Installation: Gain into front edges of shelves over gussets; screw 1-inch x 3-inch
strut at each shelf with flat head countersunk screws; round exposed ends and
edges of struts.
INSTALLATION OF OTHER ITEMS
A.
3.6
Shelves:
Install items in strict accordance with the Drawings and the recommended methods of the
manufacturer as approved by the City Engineer or the Architect, anchoring firmly into
position at the prescribed locations, straight, plumb, and level.
FINISHING
A.
Sandpaper finished wood surfaces thoroughly as required to produce a uniformly smooth
surface, always sanding in the direction of the grain; except do not sand wood which is
designed to be left rough.
B.
No coarse grained sandpaper mark, hammer mark, or other irregularity will be accepted.
FINISH CARPENTRY
06200-5
3.7
INSTALLATION OF WOOD DOORS, SIDE AND/OR TRANSOM PANELS
A.
3.8
Fit work accurately, leaving equal clearances at sides and top and allowing for painter's
finish. Maximum clearances to be as follows:
1.
1/16-inch between door and frame top and side edges except as otherwise
detailed.
2.
1/2-inch over floor coverings.
3.
3/16-inch over thresholds.
4.
Undercut bottom edge of door 1-inch or as otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
B.
Sand door edges smooth and slightly round arrises, after fitting.
C.
Hang doors, side and/or transom panels plumb and square so as to operate freely
without binding or sticking. Install transom panels flush with adjoining door face and
coordinate graining of transom panel with that of adjacent door.
CLEANING UP
A.
Conform to applicable provisions noted in Section 01710 - CLEANING in DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS of these Specifications.
B.
Keep the premises in a neat, safe, and orderly condition at all times during execution of
this portion of the Work, free from accumulation of sawdust, cut-ends, and debris.
C.
Sweeping:
1.
At the end of each working day and more often if necessary, thoroughly sweep
surfaces where refuse from this portion of the Work has settled.
2.
Remove the refuse to the area of the job-site set aside for its storage upon
completion of the work of this Section, remove all surplus materials and debris
from the job-site.
3.
Upon completion of work of this Section, thoroughly broom clean all surfaces.
FINISH CARPENTRY
06200-6
SECTION 06400
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.2
1.3
Fabrication and installation of architectural casework including shelving, end panels, drawers, doors,
countertops, wall cabinets, hardware and cabinet accessory equipment indicated on the Contract
Drawings and hereinafter specified.
RELATED WORK
A.
Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to the GENERAL
CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS and Sections in DIVISION 1 - GENERAL
B.
Finish Carpentry in Section 06200.
C.
Back Priming and Painting in Section 09900.
D.
Book Detection System in Section 11052
E.
Library Shelving in Section 11053
F.
Mechanical and Electrical Work to be incorporated into the Casework in Divisions 15 and 16
respectively.
SUBMITTALS
A.
All submittals shall conform to the provisions of the SUBMITTALS Section 01340 of DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of all custom casework indicating materials and hardware,
details of construction, dimensions, methods of fastening and erection details. Shop Drawings shall
bear a W.I.C. certified compliance label indicating that Drawings fully meet the requirement of the
W.I.C. grade specified. Shop Drawings shall indicate all grounds, backing, blocking, sleepers and
other items required for the installation of casework, which are to be provided and installed as part of
the structure.
C.
Manufactured Product Information: Submit manufacturers cut sheets and installation requirements for
all library equipment, as listed in item 2.1 F, that is installed as part of the cabinetry.
D.
Samples: Submit 2" x 3" plastic laminate chips bearing the manufacturer's name, color, pattern or
texture designations.
E.
Mock-Up: When required by City Engineer, submit a full-scale base cabinet showing joinery and
plastic laminate finish. Cabinet shall incorporate drawers, and adjustable shelf, a door and all required
hardware and shall be representative of the quality of work which the manufacturer regularly produces
and bearing W.I.C. Grade Stamp verifying compliance with approved Shop Drawings. Approved
assembled base cabinet and top may be incorporated into the building at location indicated on the
Contract Drawings. Mock-up shall be representative of the quality of work which the manufacturer
regularly produces.
06400-1
F.
1.4
Manufacturer's Recommended Installation Procedures: Such submitted procedures approved by the
City Engineer will become the basis for City Engineer's inspection and acceptance or rejection of
actual installation procedures used on the work of this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Workmanship: All work of this Section to be constructed, assembled and installed by skilled
craftspersons skilled in finish carpentry in compliance with W.I.C. construction types and grades
hereinafter specified and detailed on the Contract Documents. All such work to be accurately
fabricated, assembled, joined and expertly finished in accordance with measurements taken on the
job-site.
B.
Defective Work: All casework, shelving and countertops not true to line, not in satisfactory operating
condition, improperly installed, damaged or marred will not be accepted. Remedy, remove or replace
defective work as directed by the City Engineer subject to his approval at no cost to the City.
C.
Standards: All applicable Sections of the "Manual of Millwork" and current supplements published by
the Woodwork Institute of California (W.I.C.) for the construction types and grades hereinafter
specified or shown on the Contract Drawings. All modifications to such standards shown on the
Contract Drawings and approved Shop Drawings or specified shall govern.
D.
Qualifications of Manufacturer: Product shall be produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the
manufacture of similar items and with a history of successful production acceptable to the City.
E.
Qualifications of Installers: Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and
experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and
F.
Certification: Before delivery to the job-site, Manufacturer shall issue a W.I.C. Certified Compliance
Certificate indicating that casework to be furnished for this project will fully meet all specified
requirements of W.I.C. grades.
1.
G.
1.5
All laminated plastic countertops shall bear the W.I.C. Certified Compliance Label indicating
the tops meet the requirements of the W.I.C. grade specified.
Inspection: To assure quality as specified, the City Engineer may inspect Work in the process of the
manufacturer or the finished casework prior to delivery and installation to assure quality of Work.
A.
Delivery: Cabinets, countertops, and materials shall be delivered to the job-site in undamaged
condition in crates or suitable packaging bearing the manufacturer’s label and model number. All
cabinets and countertops delivered to the job-site for installation shall be properly identified as to
where they are to be located within the structure.
B.
Storage: All cabinets and countertops shall be stored where directed by the City Engineer, in fully
covered, well ventilated area(s) and protected from extreme changes in temperature and humidity
before installation.
C.
Protection: Use all means necessary to protect Work of this Section before, during and after
installation and protect the installed Work and materials of other trades.
D.
Replacements: In the event of damage, Contractor or Manufacturer shall immediately make
necessary repairs or replacement to the approval of the City Engineer at no added cost to the City.
06400-2
1.6
A. Verification of Job Conditions: Prior to fabrication, take necessary field measurements to assure proper
dimensions for the Work of this Section and report to the City Engineer any discrepancies between the
Contract Drawings and the Specifications and/or job conditions and await for further instructions from the
City Engineer.
B. Coordination and Cooperation: Required of Work operations of this Section with other trades, including
mechanical and electrical work to be incorporated into cabinets and installation without delaying work
progress.
C. Warranty: Comply with provisions of Section 28 of the GENERAL CONDITIONS of these Specifications
which shall include a 12-month warranty period which covers parts and labor; effective date of the warranty
being the date of acceptance by the City.
D.
Guarantee: Provide a written guarantee which in addition to the warranty requirements of the Contract
Documents, shall include the removal and replacement of all cabinet doors that develop a warp or wind of
1/8" or more.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: In compliance with Sections of the W.I.C. Manual applicable to the construction types and
grades and modifications hereinafter specified and noted on the Contract Drawings.
B.
Materials for Concealed Portions of Cabinets: Operational as per Section 14 of the W.I.C. Manual.
C.
Laminated Plastic Covered Cabinets, Shelves, Doors and Countertops: High pressure thermo setting
plastic laminate conforming to N.E.M.A., LD 3 - Latest Edition and Section 15 of the W.I.C. Manual.
D.
1.
Colors and Patterns: As selected by the City Engineer from manufacturer's standard color
and pattern palette or as noted on the Contract Drawings.
2.
Laminate Thicknesses: For surfaces other than countertops minimum .028-inch; for cabinet
liners minimum thickness as noted in W.I.C. Manual; for shelves, countertops and splashes
minimum .050-inch.
3.
Core Material: Particle Board, 45-lb. density conforming to ANSI A208 1-79 Table I, Grade 1M-3.
4.
Glue: Type II Adhesive, water-resistant, rigid type of caseinalkaline or ureaformaldehyde
formula conforming to PS 51-71.
5.
Edge Banding: "T" type extruded tenite-butyrate, 1/16" minimum thickness with serrated leg
3/8" length.
6.
Total Thickness of Cabinets and Countertop Components: 3/4-inch or 1-inch or as otherwise
detailed on the Drawings and as noted in the W.I.C. Manual.
Conventional Cabinets - Wood Finish:
1.
Particle Board: 45-lb. density conforming to ANSI A-208 1-79 Table 1, Grade 1-M3.
2.
Solid Lumber:
06400-3
3.
4.
E.
a.
Concealed Portions: Any species of sound dry and solid stock.
b.
Semi-Exposed Portions: "Custom Grade" solid stock hardboard of Solid
Birch ].with a specific gravity in excess of .37.
c.
Exposed Portions: "Premium Grade" color and grain matched solid stock of [
Select Birch ].
[ Select
Hardboard: Factory finished, pressure sealed hardboard conforming to requirements of PS
58-74.
Edge Banding: Same species of wood as adjacent exposed wood surfaces.
Casework Hardware: Provide and install all rough and finish hardware as necessary for complete
installation, but not limited to the following:
1.
Concealed hinges by Amerock 180 degrees, No. CM-1727-14 or approved equal.
2.
Cabinet Door Pulls by Stanley No. 4477 or approved equal.
3.
Cabinet Door Locks, pin tumbler type by National Lock or approved equal.
4.
Magnetic Catches by Stanley Epco #592 or Lawrence SC1364-AL or approved equal.
5.
Shelf Standards and Brackets, K & V #255x256 or Stanley No. 798x799, steel zinc plated or
approved equal.
Miscellaneous hardware including, but not limited to the following: Spikes, bolts, screws,
lags, shields, straps, angles, cleats and other related items for fabrication and installation.
6.
7.
Drawer Guides; KV1300, KV1330, Krona-Flex 1336, HDI 2800, Grant 336 or equal for all
drawers except file drawers which shall have KV1460, Grant 329, Accuride 3008, 3009, 4025,
4037; Waterloo 2950, HDI 2910, full extension drawer guides or approved equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL FABRICATION
A.
B.
General:
1.
Work of this Section shall be fabricated in strict accordance with designs on the Contract
Drawings and approved Shop Drawings, conforming to construction requirements for W.I.C.
Premium grade flush overlay construction.
2.
Cabinet units and countertops shall be shop fabricated as complete sections of adequate
size to permit easy handling, access to installation areas for assembly or required for setting
in place and installing of closing pieces or components.
3.
Make holes or cutouts necessary for incorporation of mechanical and/or electrical work into
the cabinet units and countertop as detailed or specified.
Plastic Covered Cabinets:
1.
Shop fabricate as complete units of adequate size to permit easy handling, access to
installation areas for assembly or required setting in place and installing of countertops and
closing pieces.
2.
Cabinet interiors to be covered with colored liner material.
06400-4
C.
3.
Shelves to be 3/4" thick ply-wood for spans up to 35-inches and for spans up to 45-inches
shall be 1-inch thick and covered with laminated plastic on both sides and exposed edges
plastic on both sides and exposed edges plastic edgebanded.
4.
Cabinet hardware hereinbefore specified in this Section shall be installed by the Cabinet
manufacturer in accordance with approved Shop Drawings and shall be adjustable to 1"
center. Hinges to be routed into door edges. Doors over 40" high to receive 3 hinges
secured in place with Type "A" Phillips head sheet metal screws.
5.
Drawers: Sides, back and sub-fronts shall be of dovetail construction made of 1/2" thick
clear Birch or Maple. Drawer bottom shall be 3/8" thick tempered hardboard, plowed into
sides, front and back, glue-blocked and nailed. Fronts shall be 3/4" thick plastic laminate
construction, fully edgebanded with plastic "T" banding or plastic laminate. Bonding joints
shall occur at center of bottom edge of panel.
6.
Doors: Overlay type with flush exposed surfaces, fully edgebanded with plastic "T" banding
or plastic laminate. Joints in banding shall occur at center of bottom edge. Doors of base
and/or wall cabinet units within any group of adjacent units shall be in alignment.
7.
Wall Cabinets: Exposed bottom of such cabinets shall have laminate finish or finish of wood
cabinets.
Laminated Plastic Covered Countertops:
1.
Fabricate to type and sizes indicated on the Contract Drawings with 4- or 6-inch high back
and side splashes as measured from the exposed counter surface and no drip leading edge.
Rolled edges shall rise 1/8-inch above the counter surface.
2.
Core material for counters and back splash shall be 3/4-inch MDF, Type I.
3.
Make holes and/or cutouts as necessary for mechanical and/or electrical work to be
incorporated into the countertop as detailed or specified. Provide 3" grommets at every 3' of
counter surface.
4.
Make joints with screw clip fasteners on not less than 8-inch centers. A water resisting
mastic or glue shall be applied in the joints. Joints shall not occur at sink cutouts.
5.
Metal sink moldings shall be stainless steel "Hudee", "Kintrim T-Type" or "Chromedge SinkLok" complete with bolts and lugs or as otherwise detailed on the Contract Drawings.
6.
Cover countertop and splashes with solid core colored laminated plastic as selected by the
City Engineer.
7.
Side and back splashes shall rest on the top, be set in mastic and be secured to the top with
screws on 8-inch centers. Edges of splashes shall be self-edged and scribed to the walls.
8.
Application of plastic laminate to countertop shall be in accordance with published
specifications and recommended practices of the plastic laminate manufacturer.
9.
Mastic: Metal trim shall have a thorough application of an approved mastic in voids between
metal, plywood and sink. Counter cut-out edges shall be waterproofed to prevent
delamination of plywood. Metal trim shall be applied over the finished plastic surfaces
without kerfing, routing, or "letting-in" of moldings or trim.
06400-5
D.
3.2
Wood Finish Conventional Cabinets: Fabricate in accordance with W.I.C. (Woodwork Institute of
California), Section 14 of the Manual of Millwork, for Hardwood Veneer Cabinets (Casework)
"Premium" grade, except as maybe modified below:
1.
Cabinet bodies shall be 3/4" thickness particle board. Particle board shall have a minimum
density of 45 pounds.
2.
Exposed surfaces for transparent finish shall be [ plain sliced select oak ], and shall be
"Premium" grade veneers and solid stocks.
3.
Semi-exposed surfaces shall be Natural [ Birch ] "Good" grade veneer. Semi-exposed
portions behind glass or in open cases shall be of the same species and grade as exposed
portions.
4.
Edge Banding shall be wood edge bands of the same species as the adjacent exposed
faces.
5.
Cabinet Doors shall be particle board core plywood, a minimum of 3/4" thickness. The
interior faces of the cabinet doors shall be same species as exposed surfaces. Cabinet doors
shall be flush overlay Type F.
E.
Finishing: All exposed hardwood components shall be finished with one coat of lacquer sealer and
two coats of finish lacquer. All unexposed materials such as backs, webs, back of tops and the like
shall be sealed with one oil base prime coat. All semi-exposed wood surfaces such as drawer
interiors shall be finished with one coat of sanding sealer and one coat of clear gloss lacquer.
F.
Grommets: Make grommeted holes as necessary for mechanical, computers, communications, or
electrical work to be incorporated into the countertop as detailed or specified. Grommets shall be
formed of high impact plastic, cylindrical, and rounded edges. Colors as selected by the City.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: All in strict accordance with the approved Shop Drawings, Contract Drawings and referenced
W.I.C. Standards. Cabinets and countertops to be installed by the manufacturer or by an experienced
person under the supervision of the manufacturer.
B.
Preparations: All grounds, backing, blocking, furring and other anchorages required for cabinet and
countertop installation which become an integral part of a floor, wall or partition shall be in place ready
to receive the cabinets and countertops. Start of installation of Work of this Section shall imply
Contractor's (manufacturer's acceptance of job conditions).
C.
Inspection: Manufacturer or Installer of cabinets and countertops shall examine the areas and
conditions under which Work of this Section will be installed.
D.
1.
Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper installation of cabinets and countertops.
2.
Do not proceed until detrimental conditions have been corrected at no added cost to the City.
3.
Start of installation of cabinets and countertop shall imply Contractor's acceptance of job
conditions.
Cabinet Installation:
1.
All cabinet units delivered to the job-site shall bear the W.I.C. grade stamp verifying
compliance with the specified W.I.C. Type II construction grade B.
06400-6
E.
3.3
3.4
2.
Cabinets: Set all base and wall cabinets level and plumb and secure to walls. All screws
shall have finish washers.
3.
End Panels and Fillers: Furnish to match exposed surfaces and accurately scribe to walls
and neatly and securely fit to cabinets.
4.
Matching Lacquered Wood Molds: Fasten to cabinets when required for scribing purposes
and at top of cabinets as indicated.
5.
Completion: Upon completion of the installation, cabinets including drawers and shelves
shall be cleaned. Doors and drawers shall operate easily and freely.
6.
Install all hardware items in accordance with approved Shop Drawings.
7.
Scribe plastic laminated cabinets directly to wall. Do not use scribe moldings or fillers.
Laminated Plastic Countertop Installation:
1.
Secure countertop to base cabinets in level and aligned position with minimum four No. 10 x
1-1/4" round head wood screws per base cabinet. Provide additional screws at the front and
back of each cabinet on both sides of countertop joints.
2.
Countertop Joints: Make flush and hairline by cutting back each joint edge to 85 degrees
and secure together using adequate number of "trite joint" fasteners or approved equal at 3inch centers.
3.
Join countertop surfaces to adjacent vertical wall or other surfaces and fabricate edges to
conform to manufacturer's recommendations or as otherwise detailed.
4.
Where no back or side splashes are on countertops accurately scribe countertop edges to
wall surfaces and caulk.
COMPLIANCE
A.
Performance of Work: The City reserves the right to request and pay for an inspection by a W.I.C.
representative to determine that Work of this Section has been performed in accordance with the
specified standards.
B.
Non-Conforming Work: If the W.I.C. representative determines that Work of this Section does not
comply, Contractor shall immediately remove non-conforming items and replace it with complying
items at no added cost to the City and reimburse the City for the cost of the inspection(s).
CLEAN-UP
A.
Comply with applicable provisions of Section 01710 - CLEANING of DIVISION 1 - GENERAL
B.
Visually inspect each installed cabinet unit, including shelves, drawers and countertops and
thoroughly clean all surfaces using cleaning materials recommended by the manufacturer of the finish
being cleaned and carefully adjust all operating components for optimum operation of drawers and
doors.
C.
Remove all excess materials, equipment, rubbish and debris from the job-site. All areas in the library
structure used by the Contractor to be left in a clean, acceptable and safe condition.
06400-7
SECTION 06427
PLASTIC COATED HARDBOARD PANELWORK (MARLITE)
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Furnish and install plastic coated hardboard panelwork as indicated on the drawings and
specified.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01340.
B.
Product data describing the product to be furnished, including accessory items of
panelwork, finishing, and installation.
C.
Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations,
location of each panel, and large-scale details.
D.
Samples of plastic coated paneling consisting 8" x 8" (or larger) examples that are
representative of the hardboard products.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
HARDBOARD PANELING
A.
Materials: Provide 1/4-inch thick plastic-finished hardboard panels, "Marlite Deluxe HiGloss" with matching trim shapes and accessories. Colors and patterns as selected by
the Architect from the manufacturer's standard products.
1.
Wall panels shall be 5/32" thick "Marlite Deluxe Hi-Gloss Panels" by Masonite
Corp.
2.
Panels shall be factory finished with a baked-on modified melamine resin finish,
permanently bonded to oil tempered hardboard.
3.
Aluminum molding for panels shall be bright anodized:
a.
b.
c.
4.
B.
Exposed edges, "Marlite M70-BA".
Inside corner, "Marlite M50-BA".
Panel Joints, "Marlite M65-BA".
Adhesive: "Marlite C-375."
Wall Panels: Panels shall be cemented to walls with adhesive as per manufacturer's
printed instructions. Where panels are applied behind sink areas, aluminum moldings
shall be calked with waterproof calking, Marlite T-627 or T-628.
PLASTIC COATED HARDBOARD
PANELWORK (MARLITE)
06427-1
SECTION 07150
DAMPPROOFING FOR PLANTERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
DESCRIPTION
A.
This section includes supply and application of dampproofing on below grade masonry.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
the GENERAL CONDITIONS, and Sections in DIVISION 1 of these Specifications.
2.
Parging of masonry surfaces in Section 04220.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Use adequate numbers of skilled applicators who are thoroughly trained and experienced in
the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified materials and the
B.
Use an applicator currently approved in writing by the manufacturer of the dampproofing
system.
C.
Manufacturer's Certification: Prior to start of dampproofing operations of this Section and
during work progress, the manufacturer of the dampproofing material shall certify that
materials applied conform to the specified requirements.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Comply with provisions in SUBMITTALS SECTION 01340 in DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS of these Specifications.
B.
Applicator: Submit letter to the City Engineer or Consultant stating that the applicator is
approved by the material manufacturer and that the work has been installed or applied in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as shown or noted on the Drawings and as
hereinafter specified.
C.
Manufacturer's Recommended Installation Procedures: When approved by the City
Engineer, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures
used on the work.
D.
Manufacturer's Specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with specified
requirements.
E.
Submit a materials list for items to be provided under this Section.
INSPECTION
A.
Each applicator hereunder, in the company of the City Engineer's representative, before
starting work, shall inspect and verify surfaces that are to receive dampproofing materials
are in the following condition to receive work of this Section:
DAMP PROOFING FOR PLANTERS
07150-1
1.5
Masonry and concrete to be dry, smooth, free from loose material, rough spots,
sharp projections and lumpy places, and that all pits, holes or cracks in the surfaces
are filled with cement mortar to provide solid surface.
2.
Should any deficiency appear, the City Engineer representative shall file a written
report of same to the Contractor for correction before such dampproofing work
commences.
CLEAN-UP
A.
1.6
1.
Upon completion of work of this Section, thoroughly clean all non-related surfaces of any
material splashed onto adjacent surfaces during work operations of this Section. Use
cleaning materials and methods recommended by the dampproofing or dampproofing
material manufacturer. Remove all waste, debris, surplus materials, equipment, and tools
co-incident with the specified work. Leave the premises in a clean condition.
PRODUCT HANDLING
A.
Deliver dampproofing materials to job site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers,
bearing manufacturer's name and label. Store materials on pallets, off the ground, and
covered with tarpaulins or other protective cover.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Primer: Fed Spec. SS-A-710B, ASTM D41 Genstar Roofing Products Co. No. 810-01
asphalt primer.
B.
Asphalt Emulsion: ASTM D1187-66, marine type asphalt-clay fibered emulsion, Genstar
Roofing Products Co. No. C-113-E.
SUMMARY OF DAMPPROOFING ASSEMBLY
A.
Dampproofing Planters:
1.
Asphalt emulsion primer ...............15 lbs./100 sq. ft.
2.
Course of emulsion ..................... 40 lbs./100 sq. ft.
TOTAL:
55 lbs./100 sq. ft.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
SURFACE CONDITIONS
A.
Examinations Required: All surfaces to receive dampproofing materials by the material
applicator shall be dry and clean, free of dirt, foreign materials and surface defects which
would impair the proper application of materials.
B.
Preparation of Surfaces: Perform or arrange for all remedial work to be executed prior to
start of work of this Section. Start of work of this Section shall imply Contractor's
acceptance of surface conditions as meeting requirements for the specified work.
07150-2
3.2
3.3
APPLICATION
A.
Required: Apply dampproofing on masonry surfaces down to concrete foundation against
which backfill will be placed.
B.
Extend dampproofing from bottom of footing to not more than 4 inches above the level of
fill.
C.
Prime concrete foundation and masonry wall surfaces with asphalt emulsion primer at rate
of 1 1/2 gallon per 100 square foot of surface; allow to dry thoroughly.
D.
Brush apply cold asphalt emulsion to surfaces at rate of three gallons per 100 square foot.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect adjoining surfaces which are not to be dampproofed from damage while performing
the work.
B.
All dampproofing shall be protected from injury during application and until finished work is
approved and accepted.
07150-3
SECTION 07200
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
SUMMARY
A.
Provide insulation work located within the building framing and partitions at the job-site as
indicated or noted on the Contract Drawings and in these Specifications, including the
exterior walls of the existing structure.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
the GENERAL CONDITIONS, and Sections in DIVISION 1-GENERAL
2.
Carpentry in Section 06100.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Certificate of Compliance: Upon completion of this portion of the Work, complete and post
a certificate of insulation compliance in accordance with pertinent requirements of
governmental agencies having jurisdiction.
B.
Manufacturer: Manufacturer shall mark insulation with the manufacturer's name or
trademark; thermal resistance "R" value, (insulation only) and the thickness to obtain this
"R" value. Markings shall be at no more than 8-foot intervals.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Submit to the City Engineer after award of Contract in accordance with
provisions in SUBMITTALS SECTION 01340 in DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
of these Specifications.
B.
Certification: Submit to the City Engineer "Certification" that materials and installation
comply with the Project Specifications; also Energy Insulation Certification.
PRODUCT HANDLING
A.
Delivery: Insulation materials to be delivered to the job-site in their original and properly
marked and unbroken packages.
B.
Storage: Store all materials at the job-site undercover, protected from weather, moisture
and damage from any cause, with all labels intact and legible at time of installation.
INSPECTION
A.
Required: By the City Inspector prior to closing-in of walls, lathing and other construction.
07200-1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS - GENERAL
A.
"R" Values: As indicated on the drawings.
B.
Thermal and Acoustical Building Insulation: Owens-Corning, Certainteed, or equal,
Fiberglass 3 inch thick blankets or batts with or without vapor seal Kraft paper on one face
extending to form stapling flanges on both edges; width to fit between studs.
C.
Thermal Insulation on Underside of Roof Structure:
1.
Three (3) inch thick insulating mineral wool fiber batts or blankets with a vapor-seal
backing paper, Fed. Spec., HH-1-521E as approved by the City Engineer and
having a thermal conductivity "K" factor not exceeding 0.27 Btu.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
SURFACE CONDITIONS
A.
Required: Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be
performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work. Do
not proceed until such detrimental conditions are corrected.
B.
Remove or protect against, projections in the construction framing which may damage or
prevent proper installation of the insulation.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install work of this Section in accordance with the original design, requirements of
governmental agencies having jurisdiction. Install materials to conform to the Los Angeles
City Building Code and the manufacturer's recommended installation procedures as
approved by the City Engineer or the Consultant, fastening all components firmly into
position where indicated on the Contract Drawings.
B.
Locations:
1.
Within studs in partitions separating all toilet rooms from other occupied rooms or
areas and elsewhere indicated on the Contract Drawings.
2.
Between joists and underside of roof framing.
INSTALLATION OF BATTS AND BLANKETS
A.
Application:
1.
Completely fill spaces between framing members; snugly butt adjacent batts
together; to provide continuous insulation between framing members.
2.
Face vapor barrier flanges of insulation material inward.
3.
Cut neatly to fit angles, irregular spaces, for proper fastening and tight insulation.
07200-2
4.
Split and wrap around conduit, pipe, or other obstructions, as required to maintain
continuity of installation.
5.
Repair or replace any break or tear of the insulation as recommended by the
insulation manufacturer.
6.
Cut blankets to required length to extend from top of wall or partition to floor level,
fasten to each stud secured in place by weaving horizontal galvanized light gage
wire at 12-inch spacings or by stitch stapling the flanges together through web
openings not to exceed 8-inches O.C.
7.
Underside of roof framing: Restrain insulation to prevent sagging, using one of the
following methods:
8.
a.
10 gauge galvanized wire with pointed ends spaced 6-inch O.C. between
end supports.
b.
18 gauge wire diagonal lacing stapled to framing members. Space not
over 24-inches, stagger spacing on opposite member.
c.
Mesh (poultry wire) staple to framing members at 12-inches O.C.
Maintain clearances at heat producing devices such as recessed lighting fixtures,
ballasts and HVAC equipment in accord with ANSI C1, and the National Electrical
Code recommendations.
3.4 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE
Upon completion of work of this Section, the Contractor and the Insulation Contractor shall execute
"The Certificate of Compliance", certifying that the insulation has been installed in compliance with
Article 5, Subchapter 1 of Title 25 of the California State Energy Code. Such "Certificate" shall be
prominently posted in a conspicuous location within the building as directed by the City Engineer.
Certificate shall be signed by both the Contractor and Insulation Contractor.
NOTE:
Fill out the attached "Energy Insulation Certification."
07200-3
CITY OF LOS ANGELES, DEPARTMENT OF BUILDING AND SAFETY
ENERGY INSULATION CERTIFICATION
This is to certify that insulation has been installed in conformance with the current energy regulations,
California Code of Regulations, Title 25, State of California, in the building located at:
____________________________________________________________________
Number
Street
City
INSULATION SPECIFICATIONS
Ext. Walls:
Thickness
R. Value _______
Ceilings: Batts -______ Thickness
R. Value ________
Blown -_______ Thickness ____________ R. Value _______
Floors: Thickness
R. Value ________
General Contractor:
License No. __________
By:
Date _______
Title
Insulation Contractor:
License No. _________
By:
Date ________
Title
DO NOT REMOVE
"Certificate of Compliance"
-- End of Document --
07200-4
SECTION 07226
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data, including manufacturer's technical product data, installation instructions,
and recommendations for installing the roof insulation.
B.
Shop drawings shall show a complete description of the procedures for the installation of
each phase of the system indicating the type of materials, thicknesses, identity codes,
sequence of laying insulation, and methods for cutting and fitting of insulation, and
special precautions. The manufacturer's drawings, based on field measurements, may
be submitted to supplement the information shown on the shop drawings.
C.
Samples: Submit the following samples:
D.
E.
1.3
1.4
Furnish and install rigid roof insulation as indicated on the drawings and specified.
1.
Insulation
2.
Fasteners
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions
1.
Indicate fastener recommendations and attachment rate.
2.
Indicate installation techniques.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that insulation is approved by manufacturer for use
with specified roofing membrane materials.
REFERENCES
A.
NRCA - National Roofing Contractors Association: Roofing and Waterproofing Manual.
B.
UL - Underwriters Laboratories: Fire Hazard Classifications.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer to perform rigid insulation work
for built-up asphalt roofing work who has specialized in the installation of roofing systems
similar to that required for this project and who is acceptable to by manufacturer of
primary roofing materials.
B.
UL Listing: Provide rigid insulation and accessory materials that have been tested for
application and slopes indicated and are listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) for
Class A or B external fire exposure.
C.
Preliminary Roofing Conference: As soon as possible after award of built-up roofing
work, meet with Installer, installers of substrate construction (decks) and other work
07226-1
adjoining roof insulation, and the Architect, Owner, and representatives of other entities
directly concerned with performance of roofing system.
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.6
A.
1.7
Weather Condition Limitations: Proceed with roof insulation work only when existing and
forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed in accordance with
manufacturers' recommendations and warranty requirements.
Store and handle roof insulation materials in a manner that will ensure that there is no
possibility of significant moisture pickup. Store in a dry, well-ventilated, weather-tight
place. Handle and store materials or equipment in a manner to avoid significant or
permanent deflection of deck.
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit executed copy of insulation manufacturer's standard
"Limited Service Warranty" agreement including flashing endorsement, signed by an
authorized representative of insulation, on form that was published with product literature
as of date of Contract Documents, for the following period of time:
1.
10 years after date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
ROOF INSULATION
A.
Insulation shall be “Apache Nail Line” or equal as approved by the roofing manufacturer,
and as necessary to obtain the roofing materials manufacturer's warranty.
B.
Roof insulation assembly shall have the following physical properties:
Thermal Resistance: R-rating shall be as indicated on the drawings.
2.
Thickness: Thickness required to achieve the specified R-value, and satisfy the
details of construction indicated on the drawings.
NAILS FOR WOOD DECKS
A.
2.3
1.
Provide annular ring shank, square head, one-piece composite nails. Nails shall be long
enough to penetrate into plywood decks approximately ½ inch but shall not protrude
through the underside of the decking.
FASTENERS FOR USE ON STEEL DECKS
A.
Case hardened penetrating fasteners or screws conforming to FM A/S4470 and listed in
FM P7825 for Class I roof deck construction. Quantity and placement to withstand an
uplift pressure of 90 pounds per square foot conforming to FM P7825.
B.
Fasteners shall be designed for flush driving through flat round or hexagonal steel or
plastic plates. Steel plates shall be zinc-coated, flat round not less than 1 3/8-inch
diameter or hexagonal not less than 28 gauge.
07226-2
C.
2.4
Plastic plates shall be high-density, molded thermoplastic with smooth top surface,
reinforcing ribs and not less than 3 inches in diameter. Fastener head shall recess fully
into the plastic plate after it is driven. Plates shall be formed to prevent dishing.
1.
Do not use bell-or cup-shaped plates.
2.
Minimum withdrawal resistance of fasteners from deck shall be not less than 40
pounds each in steel deck.
PREFORMED CANTS
A.
Provide the same material used for the roof insulation; or, if roof insulation material is
unavailable in cant-form, provide pressure-preservative treated wood, or wood fiberboard
as recommended by the roofing manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSPECTION OF SUBSTRATE
A.
Examine substrate surfaces to receive the rigid insulation and associated work and
conditions under which roofing will be installed. Do not proceed with installation of
insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to
Installer.
1.
3.2
3.3
Verify that deck is securely fastened with no projecting fasteners and with no
adjacent units in excess of 1/16 inch out of plane.
INSTALLATION ON WOOD DECK
A.
Install roof insulating materials as specified and as recommended in the manufacturer’s
printed instructions. Keep roof insulating materials dry before, during, and after
installation.
B.
Keep insulation ½ inch clear of vertical surfaces penetrating and projecting from the roof
surface.
C.
Install insulation directly to roof deck surface, nailed in place. Lay insulation so that end
joints of each course are staggered with those of the adjoining courses.
D.
When using multiple layers of insulation, the joints of each succeeding layer shall be
parallel and staggered in both directions with respect to the layer below
INSTALLATION ON STEEL DECK
A.
B.
Install roof insulating materials as specified and as recommended in the roofing and
insulation manufacturer's printed instructions.
Coordinate the installation of insulation, roofing sheets, flashings, stripping, and
surfacings so that insulation and felts are not exposed to precipitation or exposed
overnight. Provide cut offs at end of each day's work, to cover exposed insulation with a
course of coated felt with joints and edges sealed with roofing cement. Remove cut offs
immediately before resuming work.
1.
Comply with NRCA Built-up Roofing Manual "Specification 22-INS" and Diagram
A or B.
07226-3
C.
3.4
3.5
2.
Keep roof insulating materials dry before, during, and after installation.
3.
Keep insulation on steel deck 1/2 inch clear of vertical surfaces penetrating and
projecting from the roof surface.
Secure the first layer of insulation to deck with piercing or self-drilling, self-tapping
fasteners. Engage fasteners by driving them through insulation into top flange of steel
deck. Use driving method prescribed by fastener manufacturer. Insulation joints parallel
to ribs of deck shall occur on solid bearing surfaces only, not over open ribs.
CANT STRIPS
A.
Where indicated, provide cant strips at intersections of the roof with walls, parapets, and
curbs extending above the roof.
B.
The face of cant strips shall have an incline of 45 degrees, the minimum face dimension
shall be 5 1/2 inches, and the minimum thickness shall be 1 1/2 inches. Cant strips shall
bear on the wood nailers and fit flush against vertical surfaces. Where possible, nail cant
strips to adjoining surfaces.
PROTECTION OF APPLIED INSULATION
A.
Completely cover each day's installation of insulation with finished roofing. Protect open
spaces between insulation and parapets or other walls and spaces at curbs, and
expansion joints until permanent roofing and flashing are applied.
B.
Do not permit storing, walking, wheeling, or trucking directly on insulation.
07226-4
SECTION 07270
FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Scope of Work: Provide all labor and materials or a combination of materials to form an
effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke and gases and to maintain the integrity
of the time-rated firestopping at slab and fire-rated penetrations in the following locations:
1.
Duct, conduit and pipe penetrations through above grade floor slabs and through
time-rated partitions and fire walls.
2.
Penetrations of vertical shafts such as pipe chases.
3.
The gaps at the joint of the above grade floor slabs and curtain walls.
4.
Other locations where shown.
B. Related Work:
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.
the GENERAL CONDITIONS, and Sections in DIVISION 1 - GENERAL
2.
Joint Sealers in Section 07920.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Labor: Use adequate number of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and
requirements and methods needed for the proper performance of the work of this Section.
B.
Code Requirements: All work of this Section shall conform to the latest requirements of the
National Fire Protection Association and the Los Angeles City Fire Department and L. A.
City Standards.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Conform to applicable provisions of Section 01340 - SUBMITTALS of DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS of these Specifications.
B.
Shop Drawings: Shall be submitted for City approval and shall include manufacturer's
descriptive data, typical details, installation instructions and the fire-test data and/or report
as appropriate for the time-rated construction and location. The fire-test data will include a
certification by a nationally recognized testing authority or by other supporting evidence
satisfactory to the Consultant or City Engineer.
PRODUCT HANDLING
A.
Delivery: Materials shall be delivered to the job-site in the original unopened packages or
containers showing name of the manufacturer and the brand name.
FIRESTOPPING
07270-1
B.
Storage: Materials shall be stored off the ground and shall be protected from damage and
exposure to the elements.
C.
Handling: Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from the job-site and shall
be replaced with new materials at no added cost to the City.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements provide fire stopping
insulation, "Fire Master" as manufactured by Thermal Ceramics Inc. or an "Or Equal"
product by one of the following:
1.
U.S. Gypsum "Thermafiber Safing"
2.
Manville "Pyro-Fiber"
B.
Accessories: Provide packing, clips, putty and other accessory products as recommended
by the firestopping materials manufacturer.
C.
Firestopping Materials: Materials shall consist of commercially manufactured products
complying with the following minimum requirements:
1.
Flame Spread: Twenty-five or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2.
Smoke Density: Fifty or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
3.
Fuel Contribution: Twenty-five or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
4.
Nontoxicity: Nontoxic to human beings at all stages of application and during fire
conditions.
5.
Fire Resistance:
a.
Materials used to seal penetrations in time-rated assemblies shall be
capable of preventing the passage of flame and hot gases sufficient to
ignite cotton waste when subjected to ASTM E119 time-temperature fire
conditions for one hour.
b.
Materials used to seal openings between floor slabs and curtain walls shall
be capable of preventing the passage of flame and hot gases sufficient to
ignite cotton waste when subjected to ASTM E119 time-temperature fire
conditions for one hour at a two-inch wide opening between floor slab
edge and vertical wall assembly.
c.
Material shall not require a rise in temperature to install or activate seal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Firestopping shall be installed at locations shown or specified in accordance with
manufacturers written instruction and fire-test report. Cutting and patching of construction
FIRESTOPPING
07270-2
and providing sleeves, where required, are shown in Contract Drawings or specified in other
sections.
3.2
B.
Filling the Voids: Firestopping material shall completely fill void spaces regardless of
geometric configuration, subject to tolerances established by the manufacturer.
Firestopping for filling voids in floors in which the smallest dimension of the void is 4-inches
or more shall support the same load as the floor is designed to support or shall be protected
by a permanent barrier to prevent loading or traffic in the firestopped area.
C.
Insulated Pipes and Ducts: Insulated pipes and ducts penetrating fire-rated floors and walls
shall be insulated with materials which provide the same performance as the firestopping
material. This material shall extend a minimum of 6-inches on each side of the opening.
Vapor barrier of such insulation shall have a perm-rating of 0.03 maximum.
D.
Electrical Cables for Conduits: Firestopping at penetrations of electrical cables of conduits
shall also comply with the requirements of NFPA No. 70.
CLEAN-UP
A.
Comply with applicable provisions of Section 01710 - CLEANING in DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS of these Specifications.
B.
Remove spilled and excess materials adjacent to firestopping without damaging adjacent
surfaces.
C.
Leave finished work in neat, clean condition with no evidence of spillovers or damage to
adjacent surfaces.
FIRESTOPPING
07270-3
SECTION 07411
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Furnish and install standing seam roofing as indicated on the drawings and specified.
Submit product data including manufacturer's specifications, standard details, and
installation instructions.
WIND UPLIFT
A.
Provide roof panel system including supports meeting requirements of UL 580 for Class
90 wind uplift resistance.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Subject to compliance with specified requirements, provide roof panels by one of the
following (or equal):
1.
ASC Pacific, Inc.
2.
Berridge Manufacturing Co.
3.
Butler Manufacturing Co.
4.
MM Systems Corp.
5.
H.H. Robertson Company.
SHEET MATERIALS
A.
Materials may be either sheet steel or aluminum as follows:
1.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: Comply with ASTM A526 with coating complying with
ASTM A525 G90.
2.
Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B209 for alloy 3004 or 3004 with temper
as required to suit forming operations, 0.040 inch thick or thicker.
B.
Acrylic Enamel Coating: Factory-applied baked-on enamel coating consisting of epoxy
primer and acrylic enamel topcoat with dry film thickness of not less than 0.2 mil for
primer and 0.8 mil for topcoat. Color shall be as selected by the Architect.
C.
Standing Seam Roof Panels: Manufacturer's standard factory-formed standing-seam
roof panel system designed for mechanical attachment of panels to roof using a
concealed clip.
07411-1
D.
Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets, self-locking bolts, endwelded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads.
1.
Use aluminum, corrosion-resistant steel, or stainless steel fasteners for exterior
application and galvanized or cadmium-plated fasteners for interior applications.
2.
Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of roof panel by means of
plastic caps or factory-applied coating.
3.
Provide metal-backed neoprene washers under heads of exposed fasteners
bearing on weather side of panels.
4.
Locate and space exposed fasteners in true vertical and horizontal alignment.
Use proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal
without rupture of neoprene washer.
E.
Underlayment: Polyethylene-sheet-backed rubberized asphalt membrane, 40-mil thick,
as recommended by panel manufacturer. Provide primer when recommended by
underlayment manufacturer.
F.
Accessories: Provide components required for a complete roof panel system, including
trim, copings, fascias, gravel stops, corner units, clips, seam covers, battens, flashings,
sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match materials and finishes
of panels.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with manufacturers' instructions and recommendations for installation,
as applicable to project conditions and supporting substrates. Anchor panels and other
components of the work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural
movement.
1.
B.
Install roof panels over solid substrate with one ply of underlayment installed
from lower edge up with at least 3-inch side laps and 4-inch end laps.
Accessories: Install components required for a complete roof panel system, including
trim, copings, fascias, gravel stops, clips, seam covers, battens, flashings, sealants,
gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.
07411-2
SECTION 07435
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Furnish and install flat metal wall panels as indicated on the drawings and specified.
B.
Submit shop drawings and installation instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
CONCEALED FASTENER PANELS
A.
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Centria ADP model IW40A concealed fastener wall panels, or an "or equal" product by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
ASC Pacific, Inc.
Berridge Manufacturing Co.
Morin Building Products Co., Inc.
MM Systems Corp.
Steelite, Inc.
B.
Structural Quality Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide hot-dip aluminumzinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A792 with class AZ-50 coating; Grade 40
(Galvalume or equal) to suit manufacturer's standards.
C.
Finish: Apply coatings either before or after forming and fabricating panels, as required by
coating process and as required for maximum coating performance capability. Protect
coating either by application of strippable film or by packing plastic film or other suitable
material between panels in a manner to protect the finish properly. Furnish air-drying spray
finish in matching color for touch-up.
2. Color: As selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standard colors.
D.
Fluoropolymer Coating: Manufacturer's standard two-coat, thermo-cured, full-strength 70
percent "Kynar 500" coating consisting of a primer and a minimum 0.75-mil dry film
thickness with a total minimum dry film thickness of 0.9 mil and 30 percent reflective gloss
when tested in accordance with ASTM D523.
E.
Concealed Fasteners: Provide self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets, selflocking bolts, end-welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design
loads.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install flat wall panels in accordance with the approved shop drawings and installation
insturctions.
07435-1
SECTION 07436
MOISTURE RETARDER - DOUBLE BUILDING PAPER
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Submit product data, including installation instructions.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.4
Furnish and install double building paper moisture retarder on exterior walls as indicated
on the drawings and specified.
Work of this Section shall comply with provisions of current edition of California Building
Code (CBC) and Title 24, CCR.
A.
Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to
weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
BUILDING PAPER
A.
Provide building paper that conforms to Federal Specifications UU-B-790, Type I, Grade
D (breather style), No. 15.
B.
Building paper shall be free from holes, or punctures, other than those created by
fasteners, or those inherent in the exterior wall.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install building paper as recommended by the manufacturer and as required by the Code.
B.
Building paper shall be installed in 2 layers, horizontally. The first layer shall be secured
to the structure with side edges overlapped not less than 2 inches, shingle fashion. Ends
shall overlap at least 6 inches.
C.
The second layer shall be applied similarly to the first layer, except the second ply shall
cover the side and end overlapped joints of the first ply. Cover flashings with 4-inch
overlap.
MOISTURE RETARDER –
DOUBLE BUILDING PAPER
07436-1
SECTION 07600
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
DESCRIPTION
A.
Provide and install all flashings and sheet metal work indicated on the Contract Drawing
and hereinafter specified, not specifically described in other Sections these Specifications,
but required to prevent penetration of water through the exterior shell of the building.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Built-Up Roofing in Section 07510.
2.
Caulking and Sealing in Section 07900.
3.
Field Painting in Section 09900.
4.
Metal roofing in Section 07611.
5.
Sheet Metal Work in DIVISION 15.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Standards: In accordance with best trade practice, Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, latest
edition by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.
(SMACNA).
B.
Fabricator's Qualifications: Products used in the work of this Section shall be produced by
fabricators regularly engaged in the manufacture of similar items and with a history of
successful production acceptable to the City Engineer or the Consultant.
C.
Installer Qualifications: Use adequate numbers of skilled installers who are thoroughly
trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the
specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this
Section.
D.
Standard commercial items may be used for flashing, trim, reglets, and similar purposed
provided such items meet or exceed the quality standards specified.
E.
Current recommendations of the National Roofing Contractor's Association (NRCA) Roofing
and Waterproofing Manual latest edition.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Comply with applicable provisions in SUBMITTALS SECTION 01340 in DIVISION
1-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS of these Specifications.
B.
Manufacturer's Data:
1.
Complete materials list of all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this
Contract.
07600-1
C.
1.4
1.6
1.7
Manufacturer's specifications and other data required to demonstrate compliance
with the specified requirements.
3.
Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrications, installation, anchorage, and
interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades:
4.
Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures when approved by the City
Engineer or the Consultant will become the basis for inspecting and acceptance or
rejection of actual installation procedures used on the Work.
Samples: To be provided when requested by the City Engineer or Consultant for approval
of surface finish or texture.
COORDINATION
A.
1.5
2.
Coordinate work of this Section with that of roofing and waterproofing and dampproofing
trades so that all sheet metal work and related items will provide waterproof connections.
INSPECTION
A.
Shop Inspection Required: On all shop fabricated items if called for on the reviewed shop
drawings, at no cost to the Contractor or his Subcontractor.
B.
To assure quality as specified, the Consultant or the City Engineer may inspect work in
process and installation to assure quality of work and revise process to achieve desired
quality.
PROTECTION (PRODUCT HANDLING)
A.
Adequately guard against damaging sheet metal work by walking on or placing of other
materials thereon during construction operations. After completion of work of this Section,
replace damaged work and remove stains and debris.
B.
Replace or repair work of other trades damaged during this Section's work operations to the
full satisfaction of the Inspector at no added cost to the City. Patched or defective work will
not be accepted.
WARRANTY
A.
Provide two year warranty covering materials and installation of sheet metal and that the
system shall be watertight and weatherproof in accordance with provisions of the
GENERAL CONDITIONS of these Specifications.
B.
Manufacturer's recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the City
Engineer or the Consultant, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual
installation procedures used on the Work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS AND GAGES
A.
Where sheet metal is required, and no material or gage is indicated on the Drawings,
provide the highest quality and gage commensurate with the referenced standards.
07600-2
2.2
2.3
GALVANIZED STEEL
A.
Galvanized sheet metal shall comply with ASTM A526, G90 Commercial hot-dip
galvanizing.
B.
Gages: As indicated on the Contract Drawings and in these Specifications, understood to
be U.S. Standard Gage, minimum No. 24 unless otherwise indicated or noted.
LEAD
A.
2.4
2.5
2.6
Pure sheet lead weighing 4 pounds.
RELATED MATERIALS
A.
Solder: Where solder is required, comply with ASTM B32, composed of not less than 40%
block tin, with manufacturer's name, class and grade thereon.
B.
Flux: Muriatic acid killed with zinc or an approved brand of soldering paste. After soldering,
was off remaining acid flux with a solution of soap and 5 to 10 percent washing soda. flux
for stainless steel.
C.
Flashing Cement: Neoprene, ASTM D412, trowel grade having 500 pound psi tensile
strength and 250 percent elongation.
D.
Fastenings: Bolt, expansion anchors, screws and/or nails as required for best
workmanship.
NAILS, RIVETS, AND FASTENERS
A.
Use only soft iron rivets having rust-resistive coating, galvanized nails, and cadmium plated
screws and washers in connection with galvanized iron and steel.
B.
Use same metal fasteners as metal being installed.
C.
Use annular type nails for securing sheet metal to wood. Use soft iron rivets with rustresistive coating with ferrous metals.
EDGE STOPS
A.
Expansion joints shall be provided at 20-foot intervals for galvanized steel edge stops,
except that where the distance between the last expansion joint and the end of the
continuous run is more than half the required interval spacing an additional joint shall be
provided. Joints shall be evenly spaced.
B.
A continuous cleat shall be provided to secure the bottom loose edge of the edge stop.
Cleat butt joints shall be spaced approximately 1/8-inch apart. The cleat shall be fastened
to the supporting construction with nails evenly spaced not more than 12 inches on centers.
Where the fastening is to be made to concrete or masonry, screws shall be used and shall
be driven in expansion shields set in concrete or masonry. The cleat for edge anchorage
shall be installed to extend below the supporting construction to form a drip and to allow the
flashing to be hooked over the lower edge at least 3/4 inch. The cleat shall be of sufficient
width to provide adequate bearing area to ensure a rigid installation.
07600-3
2.7
C.
The top edge of the edge stop shall be hemmed. Expansion joints shall be shop fabricated
to form a sleeve that will receive the longitudinal strips, enveloping them internally. Corner
units with mitered joints shall be provided.
D.
Provide a continuous pressure treated nailer affixed in the concrete formwork. The edge
flange shall be set in elastomeric sealant, and secured to the structure with through slotted
holes, face nailed at 8 inches on The lower edge of fascia shall be hooked 3/4 inch over a
continuous cleat.
DRIP SCREEDS
A.
2.8
Provide drip screeds for installation above the heads of doors, windows, and other openings
for the purpose of directing water away from the opening. Fabricate drips of galvanized
steel not lighter than 18 gage with the lower edge formed on a brake at a 45 degree angle
outwardly. Drill holed for countersunk screw fastening.
OTHER MATERIALS
A.
installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the City Engineer or the
Consultant.
B.
Roofer's Cement: Federal Specification SS-C-153, Type I, black.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
SURFACE CONDITIONS
A.
General: Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be
performed.
B.
Surfaces to receive sheet metal shall be smooth, sound, clean and dry. Correct conditions
detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until detrimental
conditions are corrected.
WORKMANSHIP
A.
B.
General:
1.
Form sheet metal accurately and to the dimensions and shapes required, finishing
molded and broken surfaces with true, sharp, and straight lines and angles and,
where intercepting other members, coping to an accurate fit and soldering securely.
2.
Unless otherwise specifically permitted by the City Engineer or the Consultant, turn
exposed edges back 1/2".
3.
Coordinate work of this Section with work of other Sections. Verify placement of
wood blocking, nailers, inserts, nailing strips, cants, etc.
Fabrication: Form, fabricate, and install sheet metal so as to adequately provide for
expansion and contraction in the finished work.
1.
Accurately form items to required shape and size. Molded or braked members to
have true, straight, and sharp lines and angles. Cope members to accurately fit
and be securely soldered at intersections.
07600-4
C.
D.
E.
3.3
2.
Turn back all exposed edges 1/2-inch unless otherwise noted on the drawings.
3.
Adequately provide for expansion and contraction in the completed work.
4.
Take care of preserve coatings; avoid scaring or breaking of coating.
5.
Accurately install work as hereinafter specified and as indicated on the Contract
Drawings.
Weatherproofing:
1.
Finish watertight and weathertight where so required.
2.
Make lock seam work flat and true to line, sweating full of solder.
3.
Make lock seams and lap seams, when soldered, at least 1/2" wide.
4.
Where lap seams are not soldered, lap according to pitch, but in no case less than
3".
5.
Make flat and lap seams in the direction of water flow.
Joints:
1.
Join parts with rivets or sheet metal screws where necessary for strength and
stiffness.
2.
Provide suitable watertight expansion joints for runs of more than 40'-0", except
where closer spacing is indicated on the Drawings or required for proper
installation.
3.
On continuous sheet metal shapes, splicing joints shall be soldered and smoothed
out to match finish surface.
Nailing:
1.
Whenever possible, secure metal by means of clips or cleats, without nailing
through the exterior metal.
2.
In general, space nails, rivets, and screws not more than 8" apart and, where
exposed to the weather, use lead washers.
3.
For nailing into wood, use barbed galvanized roofing nails 1-1/4" long by 11 gage.
4.
For nailing into concrete, use drilled plugholes and plugs.
EMBEDMENT
A.
Embed metal in connection with roofs in a solid bed of sealant, using materials and
methods described in Section 07920 Caulking and Sealing of these Specifications or other
materials and methods approved in advance by the City Engineer or the Consultant.
07600-5
3.4
SOLDERING
A.
3.5
2.
Perform soldering slowly, with a well heated copper, in order to heat the seams
thoroughly and to completely fill them with solder.
3.
Perform soldering with a heavy soldering copper of blunt design, properly tinned for
use.
4.
Make exposed soldering on finished surfaces neat, full flowing, and smooth.
5.
After soldering, thoroughly acid flux with a soda solution.
Demonstrate by hose or standing water that the flashing and sheet metal are completely
watertight. For testing the built-in gutter, allow water to stand at least 24 hours.
Separate aluminum or copper from contact with cementitious materials and other metals
(except stainless steel and/or zinc) with a heavy coat of bituminous paint, liquid neoprene,
or chromate gasketing or priming.
REPAIR OF DAMAGED GALVANIZED SURFACES
A.
3.8
Thoroughly clean and tin the joint materials prior to soldering.
DISSIMILAR MATERIALS PROTECTION
A.
3.7
1.
TESTS
A.
3.6
General:
Clean and pretreat with a phosphoric or vinyl resin primer.
1.
Metal Surfaces to be Painted. Apply coat of zinc dust-zinc oxide primer, Federal
Specification TT-P-641d.
2.
Metal Surfaces to be Left Unpainted: Coat with a 90 percent zinc content paint;
PRC cold galvanizing process, "Galvicon" or "Drygalv".
ROOFING SHEET METAL WORK
A.
General: All surfaces to which sheet metal is applied or attached to be free from defects of
any kind and brushed clean; set flush or remove any projections, nails, fins, etc., as
required for neat, secure, and waterproof installation.
B.
Reglets and Counterflashings:
1.
Materials: 24-gage galvanized sheet steel of gage noted on the Contract Drawings.
2.
Products: Metal spring-lock flashings by Metco Metal Products Co., Los Angeles,
California, or Lane-Aire Permanent Flashings by Lane-Aire Mfg. Co., Los Angeles,
California, or "Spring Lock" Reglet and Counterflashing System by Fry Reglet
Corp., Los Angeles, California.
3.
Installation: As per manufacturer's approved shop drawings and printed
instructions.
07600-6
C.
D.
Flashings for Overflow Drains Passing Through Roof:
1.
Material: 20-gage galvanized sheet steel.
2.
Fabrication and Installation: Overflow drain to extend two inches above roof
surface. Flashings to be sized to properly fit around overflow drain pipe and be
sealed watertight. Flashing flange to extend at least 6-inches in all directions and
be embedded in roofing bitumen over the roof insulation under the roofing felts.
Flashings for Electrical Conduit Passing Through Roof:
1.
Materials: 20-gage galvanized sheet metal.
2.
Fabrication and Installation: Extend sleeve minimum 6-inches above roof surface
of size to properly fit the conduit or antenna and sealed watertight. Extend 4-inch
roof flanges in all directions and embed in roofing bitumen.
E.
Sheet Metal Covering on Flat, or Sloped Surfaces: Except as specified or indicated
otherwise, cover and flash all minor flat, or sloped surfaces, and small decks with metal
sheets of the material used for flashing; maximum size of sheets, 16 inches by 18 inches.
Fasten sheets to wood with metal cleats. Lock seams and solder. Lock aluminum seams
and fill with sealer as recommended by aluminum manufacturer. Provide an underlayment
of building paper for all sheet metal covering.
F.
Gutters shall terminate at least 1/2 inch away from vertical surfaces. Gutters shall be hung
with high points at ends or equidistant from downspouts and shall have a slope of not less
than 1/16 inch per foot.
- End of Section -
07600-7
SECTION 07829
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Furnish and install flat glazed skylights as indicated on the drawings and specified.
SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTIONS
Submittal shall be as specified in Section 01340.
1.3
A.
Manufacturer's Catalog Data.
B.
Shop Drawings.
C.
Color Selection Samples: Submit small size specimens of the aluminum finish and
translucent tempered insulating glass and glazing materials.
DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE
A.
Skylight materials shall be delivered in the manufacturer's unbroken containers and
handled carefully at all times to prevent damage. Store materials off the ground,
protected from damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with specified requirements, skylights shall be the
prefabricated product of one of the following manufacturers (or equal):
1.
Wasco Products Inc.
2.
Dur-Red Plastic Skylights by Red Plastic Co.
3.
Velux America Inc.
B.
Skylights shall consist of a dual glazed, extruded aluminum retaining frame, and curb
frame fabricated to drain condensed water away from the unit. The minimum thickness
of extruded aluminum shall be 0.072 inch.
C.
Skylights shall be fixed (non operable), and designed for mounting on high profile roofs,
including roofing of the kind to be installed in this Project.
D.
Exposed aluminum shall have an anodized finish, or organic coating in the color selected
by the Architect.
SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS
A.
General: Provi de preassembled units consisting of organically sealed panes of glass
enclosing a hermetically sealed dehydrated air space and complying with ASTM E774 for
performance classification indicated as well as with other requirements specified for glass
07829-1
characteristics, air space, sealing system, sealant, spacer material, corner design and
dessicant.
2.3
1.
Provide fully tempered glass in a manner to form translucent panes as
recommended by manufacturer for application indicated, and as follows:
2.
Thickness of Each Pane: 1/4".
3.
Air Space Thickness: 1/2".
4.
Sealing System: Manufacturer's standard.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Provide watertight sealing. The sealant shall be a single-component, or two-component
polyurethane elastomeric compound conforming to FS TT-S-00227.
1.
The sealant shall be as recommended by the skylight manufacturer, and color as
selected by the Architect.
B.
Fasteners shall be aluminum or stainless steel with attached neoprene washers.
C.
Gaskets shall be vinyl, formulated with an efficient antioxidant. The vinyl shall have a
Shore A durometer hardness of 40 to 70, a tensile strength of 1,200 pounds per square
inch with an elongation at break of 300 percent at 75 degrees F.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Skylights shall be installed in accordance with the approved shop drawings, printed
instructions, expansion clearances, and as indicated. Panels shall not be subjected to
overloading, abuse, or undue impact. Bent, or defective panels shall not be installed.
B.
Work shall be installed to allow for thermal movement and to provide freedom from noise
due to wind pressures.
CLEANING
A.
3.3
Stains, spots, sealant, tape, paint, and foreign material shall be removed and the surface
washed clean in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
LEAKAGE TESTS
A.
Skylight installations will be subject to inspection and test for leakage by the Architect.
Skylights shall not leak when tested.
B.
Skylights will be subjected to a 15-minute water-hose spray test. The hose will be held
at a distance of 15 feet at a water pressure of approximately 50 pounds per square inch
and a flow rate of not less than 5 gallons per minute.
07829-2
SECTION 07900
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
B.
1.2
Throughout the Work furnish all tools, equipment, materials, and supplies and perform all
labor to provide a positive barrier against passage of air or moisture from the exterior.
1.
Caulk and Seal around entire exposed perimeters of all penetrations and openings
through walls and for slabs on grade where any item is installed in the opening or
through the penetrations.
2.
Caulk and seal the sheet metal flashings and other items penetrating through the
roof.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
Masonry Work in Division 4.
3.
Building Insulation in Section 07200.
3.
Firestopping in Section 07270.
5.
Sheet Metal Work in Section 07600.
6.
Ceramic Tile in Section 09300.
7.
Metal Door Frames in Section 08110.
10.
Plumbing in Section 15400.
11.
Mechanical work in Division 15.
12.
Electrical work in Division 16.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
B.
Reference Standards:
1.
All materials specified herein shall conform to the requirements of the publications
hereinafter listed, to the extent that the requirements therein specified are not in
conflict with the provisions of this Section.
2.
References to "ANSI" shall mean the American National Standards Institute
Publication A116.1-1967 "Two Component Elastomeric Sealing Components for the
Building Trade".
Qualifications of Manufacturers: Products used in the work of this Section shall be
produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of similar items and with
07900-1
a history of successful production acceptable to the City Engineer or the Consultant.
Manufacturer shall have been on business of manufacturing the specified types of Sealants
for not less than 10 years.
C.
1.3
Qualification of Installers:
1.
Installers shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary skills and be
thoroughly familiar with the specified requirements and shall have a minimum of 5
years experience installing caulking and sealants.
2.
Installers shall be completely familiar with the joint details shown on the Contract
Drawings and installation requirement hereinafter specified in this Section.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Manufacturer's Data: Comply with provisions in the SUBMITTALS SECTION 01340 in
DIVISION 1-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS of these Specifications.
1.
B.
1.4
Submit within 45 days after execution of Contract:
a.
A complete materials list showing all items specified to be furnished and
installed under this Section.
b.
Sufficient data to demonstrate that all materials meet or exceed the
specified requirements, including proof of manufacturer's and installer's
qualifications.
c.
Specification, installation instructions and general recommendations from
manufacturer showing procedures under which it is proposed that
materials will be installed.
d.
Upon approval by the City Engineer or the Consultant, the proposed
installation procedures will become the basis for inspection and
acceptance or rejection of actual installation procedures used on the work.
Samples: Submit separate samples for each type of caulking or sealant material, together
with manufacturer's data, all as necessary to fully demonstrate functional and service ability
characteristics that comply with the specified requirements. Obtain approval prior to
delivery of materials to the job-site for material substitutions. Samples of the sealant in
concrete construction expansion joints shall be applied between 1-inch thick concrete
blocks to the full size and shape of sealant in the joints indicated. Conform to the provisions
of Section 32 in the GENERAL CONDITIONS of these Specifications.
GUARANTEE
A.
Guarantee: The guarantee period specified in Section 28 of the GENERAL CONDITIONS
of these Specifications shall hereby be extended to two (2) years. Contractor shall provide
the City Engineer with a written guarantee against any inherent or developed defects in
material or in installation and file five (5) copies of same with the City Engineer or the
Consultant as a prerequisite for final acceptance of the work.
07900-2
1.5
1.6
DEFECTIVE WORK
A.
Work will be adjudged defective by the City Engineer or the Consultant if leakage results
from failure of sealant or caulking to bond to adjacent work or if it hardens, cracks, shrinks,
or runs or stains adjacent work.
B.
Remove defective work, clean joints and install new caulking and/or sealant materials as
approved by the City Engineer or the Consultant at no added cost to the City.
PRODUCT HANDLING
A.
Delivery and Storage: Deliver all materials of this Section to the job-site in their original
unopened or unbroken containers with all labels intact and legible at time of use. Store only
under conditions recommended by the manufacturer concerning shelf life, temperature
humidity, ensuring the fitness of the material when installed. Do not retain on the job-site
any material which has exceeded the manufacturer's recommended shelf life.
B.
Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the materials of this Section before, during
and after installation and to protect work and materials of other trades.
C.
Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements
necessary to the approval of the City Engineer or the Consultant, at no added cost to the
City.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Materials utilized shall be from new cartridges with shelf-life valid during installation. Do not
use seconds or remnants.
1.
Color shall be as follows:
a.
For joints separating two similar materials, match finish surface color.
b.
For joints separating dissimilar materials, such as perimeter joints around
louvers, door frames, window frames, etc., match wall surface color,
except match mortar color in face brick walls.
B.
Caulking shall be acrylic latex type caulk.
C.
Sealant: Provide two (2) component rubber based compounds complying with Federal
Specification TT-S-0027C. Materials shall be the product of one of the following
manufacturers or equal:
1.
Sika Corp., Lynhurst NJ.
2.
Sonneborn Building Products, Minneapolis, MN.
3.
3M Products, St. Paul, MN.
4.
Class "A" for non-traffic horizontal surfaces.
5.
Class "B" for vertical surfaces.
07900-3
6.
7.
D.
2.2
Class "C" for foot traffic horizontal surfaces. Provide one of the following:
a.
Mameco International "Vulkem 245."
b.
Sika Corp. "Sikaflex 2C-SL."
c.
Sonneborn Building Products "Sonolastic Paving Joint Sealant."
d.
Or equal.
Class "D" (acoustical sealant) for metal framed partitions to deter the passage of
sound from one room to another. Acoustical sealant shall be one of the following:
a.
Ohio Sealants "Sound Caulk (solvent type)."
b.
Pecora Corp. "BA-98."
c.
Tremco "Acoustical Sealant."
d.
Or equal.
Primer shall be as recommended by the caulking or sealant manufacturer.
BACKUP MATERIALS FOR SEALANTS
A.
Primers and Bond Breakers: As recommended by the sealant manufacturer in their
published instructions.
B.
Backer Rods and Other Backing Materials: Type as recommended by the Sealant
manufacturer.
1.
Closed-cell resilient urethane or polyvinyl chloride foam;
2.
Closed-cell polyethylene foam;
3.
Closed-cell sponge of vinyl or rubber;
4.
Polychloroprene tubes or beads;
5.
Polyisobuthlene extrusion;
6.
Oil-less dry jute.
C.
Filler for Use with Asphalt Sealant: Asphalt impregnated, as per ASTM D 1715.
D.
Filler of Use with Elastomeric Sealer: Plain type as per ASTM D 1752 Type II or Type III.
E.
Surface Covers: (Where Simple bond-prevention is necessary).
1.

b. Project Manual - Bureau of Engineering

Transcription

Similar documents

Atlantis Energy Systems Inc.

CSAH 5 Newletter - Sherburne County

hafeilobopartsmanual

Amendment

Regions CD Check Viewer Installation Guide

Construction In Brief: Winter 2009 - Cohen Seglias Pallas Greenhall

ILOC Program

Managing Contractor Owned Equipment Leased To the Owner`s

1 - City of Laredo